From 0d3ec920803ecdca0c8a0ffa4a05409e3cd04525 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shaun McCance Date: Sun, 19 Feb 2006 04:03:38 +0000 Subject: - Pruning old stuff from CVS * gnome-users-guide: * introduction-to-gnome: * omf-install: * omf.make: * sgmldocs-ug.make: * sgmldocs.make xmldocs.make: * unix-primer: - Pruning old stuff from CVS --- ChangeLog | 11 + gnome-users-guide/Makefile.am | 3 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/Makefile.am | 190 - .../C/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml | 247 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/applet2ug | 42 - .../C/applets/asclock-ug.sgml | 260 -- .../C/applets/battery-ug.sgml | 540 --- .../C/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml | 170 - .../C/applets/charpick-ug.sgml | 342 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clock-ug.sgml | 265 -- .../C/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml | 343 -- .../C/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml | 319 -- .../C/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml | 175 - .../C/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml | 603 ---- .../C/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml | 259 -- .../C/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml | 571 --- .../C/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml | 171 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fish-ug.sgml | 254 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/geyes-ug.sgml | 203 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gkb-ug.sgml | 523 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml | 293 -- .../C/applets/gweather-ug.sgml | 580 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/jbc-ug.sgml | 240 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/life-ug.sgml | 217 -- .../C/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml | 305 -- .../C/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml | 345 -- .../C/applets/memload-ug.sgml | 329 -- .../C/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml | 402 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mixer-ug.sgml | 193 - .../C/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml | 317 -- .../C/applets/netload-ug.sgml | 333 -- .../C/applets/odometer-ug.sgml | 308 -- .../C/applets/printer-ug.sgml | 249 -- .../C/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml | 181 - .../C/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml | 714 ---- .../C/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml | 505 --- .../C/applets/swapload-ug.sgml | 289 -- .../C/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml | 482 --- .../C/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml | 504 --- .../C/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml | 240 -- .../C/applets/whereami-ug.sgml | 167 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/authors.sgml | 80 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/desktop.sgml | 205 -- gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/fdl.sgml | 636 ---- .../C/figures/anotherclock-applet.png | Bin 4249 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/anotherclock-properties.png | Bin 52051 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/applet_props_dialog.png | Bin 86087 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/asclock_applet.png | Bin 5455 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/asclock_settings.png | Bin 8609 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png | Bin 520 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png | Bin 580 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/battery-applet-graph.png | Bin 417 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png | Bin 5724 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png | Bin 6179 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png | Bin 5319 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png | Bin 5099 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/bg-capplet.png | Bin 40481 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/border1.png | Bin 4638 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cdplayer_applet.png | Bin 1174 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/charpick_applet.png | Bin 358 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png | Bin 5565 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/charpick_characters.png | Bin 36598 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/clock_applet.png | Bin 374 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/clock_settings.png | Bin 5059 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png | Bin 78270 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png | Bin 54909 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/clockmail_applet.png | Bin 1458 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png | Bin 52472 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 52706 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png | Bin 49387 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cpuload-applet.png | Bin 228 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png | Bin 206 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/create_launcher.png | Bin 4576 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/custicon.png | Bin 112744 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/deskguide-fig.png | Bin 731 -> 0 bytes .../figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png | Bin 10799 -> 0 bytes .../figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png | Bin 11768 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png | Bin 8213 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/deskguide-properties.png | Bin 9319 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png | Bin 4454 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png | Bin 8304 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/diskusage-applet.png | Bin 826 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drawer_open.png | Bin 11373 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drawer_properties.png | Bin 6700 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png | Bin 1877 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png | Bin 459 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png | Bin 5788 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png | Bin 8501 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/example_applets.png | Bin 1860 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/example_menu.png | Bin 5841 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/example_panel.png | Bin 8821 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/fifteen_applet.png | Bin 1288 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/fish_applet.png | Bin 2006 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/fish_settings.png | Bin 8975 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-1.png | Bin 1218 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-2.png | Bin 1260 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-3.png | Bin 1290 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-4.png | Bin 1251 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-5.png | Bin 1293 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-6.png | Bin 1284 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-desk.png | Bin 154508 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full.png | Bin 85425 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccalf.png | Bin 31744 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccappdef.png | Bin 29315 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccdialog.png | Bin 28155 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccedit.png | Bin 27374 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gcchints.png | Bin 26959 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmdi.png | Bin 24971 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmime.png | Bin 34380 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gccsession-props.png | Bin 16981 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsessopt.png | Bin 29093 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound1.png | Bin 29808 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound2.png | Bin 35329 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccstartup.png | Bin 28349 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccurl.png | Bin 29733 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/geyes_applet.png | Bin 1622 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/geyes_settings.png | Bin 3674 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gkb_add_list.png | Bin 6670 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet.png | Bin 1096 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png | Bin 4502 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png | Bin 8616 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/glob_pref_anim.png | Bin 12533 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gnome-logo-large.png | Bin 23473 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-fig.png | Bin 3587 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gnotes-properties.png | Bin 4650 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gweather_applet.png | Bin 1152 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gweather_settings.png | Bin 4366 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/gweather_weather.png | Bin 8980 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/hide-button.png | Bin 287 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/jbc_applet.png | Bin 2178 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/keyboard-capplet.png | Bin 30160 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png | Bin 7208 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png | Bin 6232 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/life-applet.png | Bin 4033 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/link.png | Bin 974 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png | Bin 53358 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png | Bin 55734 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png | Bin 51616 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/loadavg-applet.png | Bin 1038 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/locbar.png | Bin 4296 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/logout-screen.png | Bin 4336 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mailcheck-applet.png | Bin 2033 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png | Bin 58075 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png | Bin 69861 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mainmenu_properties.png | Bin 7003 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/memload-applet-default.png | Bin 55430 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 55738 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/memload-applet-properties.png | Bin 51474 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/memload-applet.png | Bin 177 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/menueditor.png | Bin 149108 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mini-commander_applet.png | Bin 545 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png | Bin 6786 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mixer_applet.png | Bin 1078 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mm-button.png | Bin 1682 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/modemlights-advpref.png | Bin 5191 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/modemlights-prefs.png | Bin 5826 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/modemlights.png | Bin 1040 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/mouse-capplet.png | Bin 29484 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/netload-applet-default.png | Bin 54094 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 54613 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/netload-applet-properties.png | Bin 51310 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/netload-applet.png | Bin 2132 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/noread.png | Bin 1390 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/nowrite.png | Bin 1901 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/odometer_applet.png | Bin 4305 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/odometer_settings.png | Bin 44859 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/odometer_themes.png | Bin 44590 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_applets.png | Bin 1860 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_lockbut.png | Bin 2501 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_logoutbut.png | Bin 3057 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_props_back.png | Bin 33566 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_props_edge.png | Bin 6734 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_runbutton.png | Bin 1751 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_runprogram.png | Bin 3156 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/panel_swallow.png | Bin 3876 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-1.png | Bin 1205 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-2.png | Bin 1263 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-3.png | Bin 1277 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part.png | Bin 81919 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-1.png | Bin 1233 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-2.png | Bin 1285 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-3.png | Bin 1270 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-4.png | Bin 1249 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player.png | Bin 6778 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/prefmenu.png | Bin 10431 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/printer-fig.png | Bin 675 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/printer-properties.png | Bin 18788 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png | Bin 2677 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/screensave-capplet.png | Bin 31934 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/sidebar.png | Bin 25564 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png | Bin 329 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png | Bin 6075 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png | Bin 5487 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png | Bin 5923 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/status_dock.png | Bin 2626 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/swapload-applet-default.png | Bin 50926 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 49459 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png | Bin 46389 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/swapload-applet.png | Bin 162 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tasklist-fig.png | Bin 33295 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png | Bin 10751 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tasklist-properties.png | Bin 10164 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png | Bin 2288 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/theme-select.png | Bin 32708 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tickastat_applet.png | Bin 1415 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tickastat_coredump.png | Bin 1868 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png | Bin 1614 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/tickastat_settings.png | Bin 6236 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmenu.png | Bin 3071 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmusic.png | Bin 5033 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png | Bin 3794 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/webcontrol-applet.png | Bin 1300 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/whereami_applet.png | Bin 325 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-add.png | Bin 2747 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-main.png | Bin 28075 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gmenu.sgml | 103 - .../C/gnome-users-guide-C.omf | 14 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide.sgml | 162 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnomecc.sgml | 1608 --------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gpl-appendix.sgml | 453 --- .../C/nautilus-user-manual.sgml | 3800 -------------------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/panel.sgml | 2414 ------------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/ug-applets.sgml | 503 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/unix-primer.sgml | 792 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wheeler.sgml | 268 -- gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wms.sgml | 90 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/Makefile.am | 4 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/Makefile.am | 193 - .../es/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml | 174 - .../es/applets/asclock-ug.sgml | 260 -- .../es/applets/battery-ug.sgml | 498 --- .../es/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml | 97 - .../es/applets/charpick-ug.sgml | 261 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clock-ug.sgml | 174 - .../es/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml | 343 -- .../es/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml | 222 -- .../es/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml | 113 - .../es/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml | 603 ---- .../es/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml | 146 - .../es/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml | 464 --- .../es/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml | 171 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fish-ug.sgml | 254 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/geyes-ug.sgml | 124 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gkb-ug.sgml | 523 --- .../es/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml | 293 -- .../es/applets/gweather-ug.sgml | 580 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/jbc-ug.sgml | 165 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/life-ug.sgml | 146 - .../es/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml | 305 -- .../es/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml | 345 -- .../es/applets/memload-ug.sgml | 220 -- .../es/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml | 289 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mixer-ug.sgml | 126 - .../es/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml | 194 - .../es/applets/netload-ug.sgml | 223 -- .../es/applets/odometer-ug.sgml | 308 -- .../es/applets/printer-ug.sgml | 249 -- .../es/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml | 181 - .../es/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml | 714 ---- .../es/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml | 505 --- .../es/applets/swapload-ug.sgml | 184 - .../es/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml | 483 --- .../es/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml | 504 --- .../es/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml | 240 -- .../es/applets/whereami-ug.sgml | 95 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/authors.sgml | 107 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/desktop.sgml | 486 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl-es.sgml | 645 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl.sgml | 636 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/CPULoad.png | Bin 232 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/MEMLoad.png | Bin 181 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/NETLoad.png | Bin 2139 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/SWAPLoad.png | Bin 166 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/anotherclock-applet.png | Bin 4245 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/anotherclock-properties.png | Bin 3363 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/applet_props_dialog.png | Bin 3235 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/asclock_applet.png | Bin 5380 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/asclock_settings.png | Bin 4921 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png | Bin 265 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png | Bin 324 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/battery-applet-general.png | Bin 4229 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/battery-applet-graph.png | Bin 160 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png | Bin 4229 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png | Bin 3885 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png | Bin 3693 -> 0 bytes .../figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png | Bin 3146 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/bg-capplet.png | Bin 38218 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border1.png | Bin 7991 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border2.png | Bin 3730 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cal-props.png | Bin 5638 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calday.png | Bin 58581 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calmonth.png | Bin 40487 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calweek.png | Bin 52575 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calyear.png | Bin 60320 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdapplet.png | Bin 404 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cdplayer_applet.png | Bin 342 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/charpick_applet.png | Bin 284 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png | Bin 4171 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/charpick_characters.png | Bin 15431 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock.png | Bin 288 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/clock_applet.png | Bin 301 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/clock_settings.png | Bin 3235 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png | Bin 5122 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png | Bin 4070 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/clockmail_applet.png | Bin 782 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/control-center.png | Bin 97647 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png | Bin 3643 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 3664 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png | Bin 3333 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpuload-applet.png | Bin 232 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpumem-applet.png | Bin 202 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png | Bin 202 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/create_launcher.png | Bin 3369 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custicon.png | Bin 112744 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/custom-view.png | Bin 5269 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/desk-guide-props.png | Bin 5387 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/desk-guide.png | Bin 494 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/deskguide-fig.png | Bin 392 -> 0 bytes .../figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png | Bin 5487 -> 0 bytes .../figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png | Bin 6339 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png | Bin 17444 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/deskguide-properties.png | Bin 5764 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png | Bin 2598 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png | Bin 5302 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/diskusage-applet.png | Bin 505 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/diskuse-applet-props.png | Bin 4442 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/diskuse-applet.png | Bin 408 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer.png | Bin 9513 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drawer_open.png | Bin 11295 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drawer_properties.png | Bin 5085 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drive-prefs.png | Bin 3141 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive.png | Bin 235 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png | Bin 1779 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png | Bin 227 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png | Bin 4517 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png | Bin 8412 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/example_applets.png | Bin 1778 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/example_menu.png | Bin 7404 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/example_panel.png | Bin 8716 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/fifteen_applet.png | Bin 486 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fileprops.png | Bin 5041 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/fish_applet.png | Bin 1442 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/fish_settings.png | Bin 11547 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-1.png | Bin 1218 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-2.png | Bin 1260 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-3.png | Bin 1290 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-4.png | Bin 1251 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-5.png | Bin 1293 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-6.png | Bin 1284 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-desk.png | Bin 203253 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full.png | Bin 112138 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalc-fig.png | Bin 3130 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalcfig.png | Bin 7318 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gcc-session.png | Bin 6407 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccalf.png | Bin 31744 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdef.png | Bin 6554 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gccappdefs.png | Bin 26894 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialog.png | Bin 6508 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gccdialogs.png | Bin 26521 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccedit.png | Bin 24416 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcchints.png | Bin 23925 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmdi.png | Bin 22490 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmime.png | Bin 32258 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gccsession-props.png | Bin 7990 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gccsessopt.png | Bin 29093 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound1.png | Bin 27635 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound2.png | Bin 32038 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gccstartup.png | Bin 24775 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccurl.png | Bin 26539 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gcolorsel-favorites.png | Bin 8977 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gcolorsel-search.png | Bin 6154 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gcolorsel-simple.png | Bin 6613 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gdict-prefs.png | Bin 2608 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gdict-spell.png | Bin 2447 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdictmain.png | Bin 8229 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gdiskfree-prefs.png | Bin 3874 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree.png | Bin 4185 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gdiskfreemain.png | Bin 3070 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gedit-capplet.png | Bin 10053 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/geyes_applet.png | Bin 929 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/geyes_settings.png | Bin 2806 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-another.png | Bin 3123 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-badblocks.png | Bin 5876 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-formatting.png | Bin 928 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-main.png | Bin 6270 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-nodisk.png | Bin 2700 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-nodos.png | Bin 6416 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-qferror.png | Bin 2171 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-successful.png | Bin 7213 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-verifying.png | Bin 919 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-write-protected.png | Bin 2522 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppy-writeprotected.png | Bin 2522 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfloppyfig.png | Bin 10097 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfontsel-filterwin.png | Bin 7013 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfontsel-mainshot.png | Bin 7318 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfontsel-shotmain.png | Bin 7131 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gfontselfig.png | Bin 15988 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gkb_add_list.png | Bin 6670 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gkb_applet.png | Bin 597 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png | Bin 4035 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png | Bin 8616 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glessfig.png | Bin 2161 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/glob_pref_anim.png | Bin 29565 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-drawer.png | Bin 8762 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-launch.png | Bin 8680 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-log.png | Bin 7912 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-menu.png | Bin 8484 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-menu2.png | Bin 153923 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config-misc.png | Bin 6160 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/global-config.png | Bin 5051 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc1.png | Bin 21682 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc_move.png | Bin 2548 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops1.png | Bin 4165 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops2.png | Bin 4022 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops3.png | Bin 4033 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops4.png | Bin 4247 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops5.png | Bin 4033 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops6.png | Bin 5114 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnome-logo-large.png | Bin 12255 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnome-pager-props.png | Bin 4544 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnome-pager.png | Bin 1529 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnome-panel.png | Bin 14075 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnome-startup.png | Bin 81576 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnotes-fig.png | Bin 3538 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gnotes-properties.png | Bin 4528 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/grun.png | Bin 1469 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtool-gsearch.png | Bin 5293 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtool-locate.png | Bin 3875 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtool-mainwin.png | Bin 4343 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtool-result.png | Bin 4976 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtool-results.png | Bin 4976 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gsearchtoolfig.png | Bin 10436 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gshutdown-advanced.png | Bin 7029 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gshutdown-preferences.png | Bin 7680 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gshutdownfig.png | Bin 7792 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gstripchart-main.png | Bin 5973 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gstripchart-param.png | Bin 4222 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gstripchart-text.png | Bin 3327 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gstripchartfig.png | Bin 5973 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gtcd-props.png | Bin 47806 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd.png | Bin 1984 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gtt_mainwin.png | Bin 4157 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gtt_prefswin.png | Bin 5859 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gttfig.png | Bin 5081 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/guname-cpuinfo.png | Bin 4620 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/guname-diskinfo.png | Bin 6696 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/guname-main.png | Bin 37162 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/guname-memoryinfo.png | Bin 4370 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gunamefig.png | Bin 35852 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-main.png | Bin 7005 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gw-menuitems.png | Bin 6889 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gweather_applet.png | Bin 438 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gweather_settings.png | Bin 3205 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/gweather_weather.png | Bin 5093 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gwfig.png | Bin 4361 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/hide-button.png | Bin 194 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/idetool.png | Bin 16489 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/jbc_applet.png | Bin 2118 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keybell.png | Bin 5455 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/keyboard-capplet.png | Bin 24470 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/keyboardd-capplet.png | Bin 11053 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/launcher-props.png | Bin 2533 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/launcher_advprops.png | Bin 7295 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png | Bin 5166 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png | Bin 6534 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/launcher_props.png | Bin 6178 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launchers.png | Bin 8610 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/life-applet.png | Bin 4038 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/link.png | Bin 974 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png | Bin 3619 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png | Bin 3796 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png | Bin 3459 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/loadavg-applet.png | Bin 1033 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/locbar.png | Bin 4296 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/login.png | Bin 13150 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/logout-screen.png | Bin 3024 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mailcheck-applet.png | Bin 2031 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png | Bin 4366 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png | Bin 4681 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mainmenu_properties.png | Bin 6549 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/memload-applet-default.png | Bin 3758 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 3885 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/memload-applet-properties.png | Bin 3506 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/memload-applet.png | Bin 181 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/menu-props.png | Bin 48657 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/menu_properties.png | Bin 6527 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/menueditor.png | Bin 24946 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-command-applet.png | Bin 301 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-command-props.png | Bin 6271 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-command.png | Bin 367 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-command_applet.png | Bin 301 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-commander-general.png | Bin 5410 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-commander_applet.png | Bin 301 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png | Bin 5410 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixapplet.png | Bin 424 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mixer_applet.png | Bin 313 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mm-button.png | Bin 1148 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/modemlights-advpref.png | Bin 3629 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/modemlights-prefs.png | Bin 3789 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/modemlights.png | Bin 564 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/mouse-capplet.png | Bin 23721 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/netload-applet-default.png | Bin 3577 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 3564 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/netload-applet-properties.png | Bin 3256 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/netload-applet.png | Bin 2139 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/noread.png | Bin 1390 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/nowrite.png | Bin 1901 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/odometer_applet.png | Bin 4258 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/odometer_settings.png | Bin 3471 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/odometer_themes.png | Bin 3326 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/open_with.png | Bin 8801 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel-prop.png | Bin 5545 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_applets.png | Bin 1778 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_lockbut.png | Bin 2488 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_logoutbut.png | Bin 3055 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_props_back.png | Bin 5809 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_props_edge.png | Bin 5616 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_runbutton.png | Bin 1118 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_runprogram.png | Bin 3044 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/panel_swallow.png | Bin 2584 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-1.png | Bin 1205 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-2.png | Bin 1263 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-3.png | Bin 1277 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part.png | Bin 81919 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-1.png | Bin 1233 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-2.png | Bin 1285 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-3.png | Bin 1270 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-4.png | Bin 1249 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player.png | Bin 6778 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/prefmenu.png | Bin 10431 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/printer-applet-props.png | Bin 2456 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/printer-fig.png | Bin 415 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/printer-properties.png | Bin 2468 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/quicklaunch.png | Bin 3749 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png | Bin 2437 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/rubberband.png | Bin 4356 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/run_program.png | Bin 1957 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/run_swallow.png | Bin 2589 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/salva.png | Bin 3123 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/screensave-capplet.png | Bin 29940 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/screensaver-capplet.png | Bin 7246 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sidebar.png | Bin 25564 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/sound-capplet.png | Bin 53580 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png | Bin 221 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png | Bin 5917 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png | Bin 5345 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png | Bin 5797 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/start-capplet.png | Bin 7021 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/status_dock.png | Bin 1131 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/swapload-applet-default.png | Bin 3545 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png | Bin 3466 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png | Bin 3189 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/swapload-applet.png | Bin 166 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tasklist-fig.png | Bin 4849 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png | Bin 6086 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tasklist-properties.png | Bin 5132 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png | Bin 1324 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/theme-capplet.png | Bin 30397 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/theme-select.png | Bin 31405 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/thispanel.png | Bin 3872 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tickastat_applet.png | Bin 425 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tickastat_coredump.png | Bin 1743 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png | Bin 1532 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/tickastat_settings.png | Bin 4284 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/trackeditor.png | Bin 4326 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/url-capplet.png | Bin 6568 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmenu.png | Bin 3071 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmusic.png | Bin 5033 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png | Bin 2568 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/webcontrol-applet.png | Bin 494 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/whereami_applet.png | Bin 252 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-add.png | Bin 2059 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-main.png | Bin 25736 -> 0 bytes .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/glossary.sgml | 1715 --------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gmenu.sgml | 259 -- .../es/gnome-users-guide-es.omf | 14 - .../es/gnome-users-guide.sgml | 208 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnomecc.sgml | 1041 ------ .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-appendix.sgml | 453 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-es.sgml | 518 --- .../es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml | 1313 ------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/licencias.sgml | 42 - .../es/nautilus-user-manual.sgml | 3717 ------------------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/newbies.sgml | 804 ----- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/panel.sgml | 2246 ------------ .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/traduccion.sgml | 565 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/ug-applets.sgml | 446 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wheeler.sgml | 458 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wms.sgml | 169 - gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/AUTHORS | 6 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/Makefile.am | 17 - gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/README | 10 - .../it/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml | 245 -- .../it/applets/asclock-ug.sgml | 165 - .../it/applets/battery-ug.sgml | 462 --- .../it/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml | 164 - .../it/applets/charpick-ug.sgml | 331 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clock-ug.sgml | 257 -- .../it/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml | 247 -- .../it/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml | 336 -- .../it/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml | 181 - .../it/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml | 593 --- .../it/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml | 272 -- .../it/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml | 558 --- .../it/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml | 166 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fish-ug.sgml | 246 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/geyes-ug.sgml | 193 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gkb-ug.sgml | 295 -- .../it/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml | 243 -- .../it/applets/gweather-ug.sgml | 573 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/jbc-ug.sgml | 226 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/life-ug.sgml | 213 -- .../it/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml | 306 -- .../it/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml | 341 -- .../it/applets/memload-ug.sgml | 328 -- .../it/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml | 395 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mixer-ug.sgml | 187 - .../it/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml | 306 -- .../it/applets/netload-ug.sgml | 333 -- .../it/applets/odometer-ug.sgml | 302 -- .../it/applets/printer-ug.sgml | 234 -- .../it/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml | 175 - .../it/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml | 877 ----- .../it/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml | 491 --- .../it/applets/swapload-ug.sgml | 291 -- .../it/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml | 512 --- .../it/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml | 242 -- .../it/applets/whereami-ug.sgml | 163 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/authors.sgml | 102 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/desktop.sgml | 210 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl-it.sgml | 638 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl.sgml | 636 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gmenu.sgml | 107 - .../it/gnome-users-guide-it.omf | 14 - .../it/gnome-users-guide.sgml | 175 - .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnomecc.sgml | 1578 -------- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-appendix.sgml | 455 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-it.sgml | 375 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/ug-applets.sgml | 506 --- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/unix-primer.sgml | 799 ---- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wheeler.sgml | 285 -- .../gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wms.sgml | 94 - introduction-to-gnome/C/Makefile.am | 8 - introduction-to-gnome/C/README | 5 - introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/desktop.png | Bin 309257 -> 0 bytes introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/microguiborder.png | Bin 6232 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/naut_iconview_window.png | Bin 36731 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.png | Bin 6054 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.xcf | Bin 58710 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.png | Bin 63408 -> 0 bytes .../C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.xcf | Bin 293844 -> 0 bytes .../C/introduction-to-gnome-C.omf | 32 - introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.sgml | 1253 ------- introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.xml | 1983 ---------- introduction-to-gnome/C/legal.xml | 76 - introduction-to-gnome/Makefile.am | 1 - introduction-to-gnome/README | 4 - introduction-to-gnome/es/Makefile.am | 10 - introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/desktop.png | Bin 306570 -> 0 bytes .../es/figures/microguiborder.png | Bin 6232 -> 0 bytes .../es/introduction-to-gnome-es.omf | 14 - .../es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml | 1313 ------- introduction-to-gnome/it/Makefile.am | 10 - introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/desktop.png | Bin 306570 -> 0 bytes .../it/figures/microguiborder.png | Bin 6232 -> 0 bytes .../it/introduction-to-gnome-it.omf | 14 - .../it/introduction-to-gnome.sgml | 1220 ------- omf-install/Makefile.am | 33 - omf.make | 53 - sgmldocs-ug.make | 142 - sgmldocs.make | 138 - unix-primer/C/Makefile.am | 8 - unix-primer/C/unix-primer-C.omf | 14 - unix-primer/C/unix-primer.sgml | 832 ----- unix-primer/Makefile.am | 1 - unix-primer/es/Makefile.am | 8 - unix-primer/es/unix-primer-es.omf | 14 - unix-primer/es/unix-primer.sgml | 877 ----- unix-primer/it/Makefile.am | 8 - unix-primer/it/unix-primer-it.omf | 14 - unix-primer/it/unix-primer.sgml | 833 ----- xmldocs.make | 95 - 682 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 77085 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100755 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/applet2ug delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/asclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/battery-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/charpick-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fish-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/geyes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gkb-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gweather-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/jbc-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/life-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/memload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mixer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/netload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/odometer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/printer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/swapload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/whereami-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/authors.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/desktop.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/fdl.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/applet_props_dialog.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-graph.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/bg-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/border1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cdplayer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_characters.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/create_launcher.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/custicon.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_open.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_applets.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_menu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_panel.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fifteen_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-4.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-5.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-6.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-desk.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccalf.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccappdef.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccdialog.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccedit.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gcchints.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmdi.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmime.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsession-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsessopt.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccstartup.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccurl.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_add_list.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/glob_pref_anim.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnome-logo-large.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_weather.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/hide-button.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/jbc_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/keyboard-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/life-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/link.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/locbar.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/logout-screen.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mainmenu_properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/menueditor.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mixer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mm-button.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-advpref.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mouse-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/noread.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/nowrite.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_themes.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_applets.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_lockbut.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_logoutbut.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_back.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_edge.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runbutton.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runprogram.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_swallow.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-4.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/prefmenu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/screensave-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/sidebar.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/status_dock.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/theme-select.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_coredump.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmenu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmusic.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/whereami_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-add.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gmenu.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide-C.omf delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnomecc.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gpl-appendix.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/nautilus-user-manual.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/panel.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/ug-applets.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/unix-primer.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wheeler.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wms.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/asclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/battery-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/charpick-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fish-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/geyes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gkb-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gweather-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/jbc-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/life-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/memload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mixer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/netload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/odometer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/printer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/swapload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/whereami-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/authors.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/desktop.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl-es.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/CPULoad.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/MEMLoad.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/NETLoad.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/SWAPLoad.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/applet_props_dialog.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-graph.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/bg-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cal-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calday.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calmonth.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calweek.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calyear.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdapplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdplayer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_characters.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/control-center.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumem-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/create_launcher.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custicon.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custom-view.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_open.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_applets.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_menu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_panel.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fifteen_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fileprops.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-4.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-5.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-6.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-desk.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalc-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalcfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcc-session.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccalf.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdef.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialog.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialogs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccedit.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcchints.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmdi.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmime.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsession-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsessopt.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccstartup.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccurl.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-favorites.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-search.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-simple.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-spell.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdictmain.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfreemain.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gedit-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-another.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-badblocks.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-formatting.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodisk.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodos.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-qferror.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-successful.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-verifying.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-write-protected.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-writeprotected.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppyfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-filterwin.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-mainshot.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-shotmain.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontselfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_add_list.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glessfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glob_pref_anim.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-drawer.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-launch.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-log.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-misc.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc_move.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops4.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops5.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops6.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-logo-large.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-panel.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-startup.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/grun.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-gsearch.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-locate.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-mainwin.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-result.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-results.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtoolfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-advanced.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-preferences.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdownfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-param.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-text.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchartfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_mainwin.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_prefswin.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gttfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-cpuinfo.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-diskinfo.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-memoryinfo.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gunamefig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-menuitems.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_weather.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gwfig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/hide-button.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/idetool.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/jbc_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keybell.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboard-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboardd-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_advprops.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launchers.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/life-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/link.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/locbar.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/login.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/logout-screen.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mainmenu_properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu_properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menueditor.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander-general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixapplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mm-button.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-advpref.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mouse-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/noread.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/nowrite.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_themes.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/open_with.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel-prop.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_applets.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_lockbut.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_logoutbut.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_back.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_edge.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runbutton.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runprogram.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_swallow.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-1.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-2.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-3.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-4.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/prefmenu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-applet-props.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/rubberband.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_program.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_swallow.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/salva.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensave-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensaver-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sidebar.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sound-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/start-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/status_dock.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-default.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-select.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/thispanel.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_coredump.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_settings.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/trackeditor.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/url-capplet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmenu.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmusic.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/whereami_applet.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-add.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-main.png delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/glossary.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gmenu.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide-es.omf delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnomecc.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-appendix.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-es.sgml delete mode 100755 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/licencias.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/nautilus-user-manual.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/newbies.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/panel.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/traduccion.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/ug-applets.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wheeler.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wms.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/AUTHORS delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/README delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/asclock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/battery-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/charpick-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clock-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fish-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/geyes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gkb-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gweather-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/jbc-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/life-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/memload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mixer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/netload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/odometer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/printer-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/swapload-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/whereami-ug.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/authors.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/desktop.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl-it.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gmenu.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide-it.omf delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnomecc.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-appendix.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-it.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/ug-applets.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/unix-primer.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wheeler.sgml delete mode 100644 gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wms.sgml delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/README delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/desktop.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/microguiborder.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/naut_iconview_window.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.xcf delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.xcf delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome-C.omf delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.sgml delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.xml delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/C/legal.xml delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/README delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/es/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/desktop.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/microguiborder.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome-es.omf delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/it/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/desktop.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/microguiborder.png delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome-it.omf delete mode 100644 introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome.sgml delete mode 100644 omf-install/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 omf.make delete mode 100644 sgmldocs-ug.make delete mode 100644 sgmldocs.make delete mode 100644 unix-primer/C/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 unix-primer/C/unix-primer-C.omf delete mode 100644 unix-primer/C/unix-primer.sgml delete mode 100644 unix-primer/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 unix-primer/es/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 unix-primer/es/unix-primer-es.omf delete mode 100644 unix-primer/es/unix-primer.sgml delete mode 100644 unix-primer/it/Makefile.am delete mode 100644 unix-primer/it/unix-primer-it.omf delete mode 100644 unix-primer/it/unix-primer.sgml delete mode 100644 xmldocs.make diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog index 77c400e..2adb954 100644 --- a/ChangeLog +++ b/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,14 @@ +2006-02-18 Shaun McCance + + * gnome-users-guide: + * introduction-to-gnome: + * omf-install: + * omf.make: + * sgmldocs-ug.make: + * sgmldocs.make xmldocs.make: + * unix-primer: + - Pruning old stuff from CVS + 2006-02-18 Shaun McCance * gnome2-accessibility-guide/ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/Makefile.am b/gnome-users-guide/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 570328e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -SUBDIRS = \ - gnome-users-guide-1.4 - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/Makefile.am b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 015349f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ -docname = gnome-users-guide -lang = C -omffile = gnome-users-guide-C.omf -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook -sgml_ents = \ - authors.sgml \ - desktop.sgml \ - fdl.sgml \ - gmenu.sgml \ - gnomecc.sgml \ - gpl-appendix.sgml \ - nautilus-user-manual.sgml \ - unix-primer.sgml \ - panel.sgml \ - ug-applets.sgml \ - wheeler.sgml \ - wms.sgml -figs = \ -figures/anotherclock-applet.png \ -figures/anotherclock-properties.png \ -figures/applet_props_dialog.png \ -figures/asclock_applet.png \ -figures/asclock_settings.png \ -figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png \ -figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png \ -figures/battery-applet-graph.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png \ -figures/bg-capplet.png \ -figures/border1.png \ -figures/cdplayer_applet.png \ -figures/charpick_applet.png \ -figures/charpick_applet_settings.png \ -figures/charpick_characters.png \ -figures/clock_applet.png \ -figures/clock_settings.png \ -figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png \ -figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png \ -figures/clockmail_applet.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-default.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet.png \ -figures/cpumemusage-applet.png \ -figures/create_launcher.png \ -figures/custicon.png \ -figures/deskguide-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties.png \ -figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png \ -figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png \ -figures/diskusage-applet.png \ -figures/drawer_open.png \ -figures/drawer_properties.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_all.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png \ -figures/example_applets.png \ -figures/example_menu.png \ -figures/example_panel.png \ -figures/fifteen_applet.png \ -figures/fish_applet.png \ -figures/fish_settings.png \ -figures/full-1.png \ -figures/full-2.png \ -figures/full-3.png \ -figures/full-4.png \ -figures/full-5.png \ -figures/full-6.png \ -figures/full-desk.png \ -figures/full.png \ -figures/gccalf.png \ -figures/gccappdef.png \ -figures/gccdialog.png \ -figures/gccedit.png \ -figures/gcchints.png \ -figures/gccmdi.png \ -figures/gccmime.png \ -figures/gccsession-props.png \ -figures/gccsessopt.png \ -figures/gccsound1.png \ -figures/gccsound2.png \ -figures/gccstartup.png \ -figures/gccurl.png \ -figures/geyes_applet.png \ -figures/geyes_settings.png \ -figures/gkb_add_list.png \ -figures/gkb_applet.png \ -figures/gkb_applet_settings.png \ -figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png \ -figures/glob_pref_anim.png \ -figures/gnome-logo-large.png \ -figures/gnotes-fig.png \ -figures/gnotes-properties.png \ -figures/gweather_applet.png \ -figures/gweather_settings.png \ -figures/gweather_weather.png \ -figures/hide-button.png \ -figures/jbc_applet.png \ -figures/keyboard-capplet.png \ -figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png \ -figures/launcher_properties_basic.png \ -figures/life-applet.png \ -figures/link.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-default.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet.png \ -figures/locbar.png \ -figures/logout-screen.png \ -figures/mailcheck-applet.png \ -figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png \ -figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png \ -figures/mainmenu_properties.png \ -figures/memload-applet-default.png \ -figures/memload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/memload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/memload-applet.png \ -figures/menueditor.png \ -figures/mini-commander_applet.png \ -figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png \ -figures/mixer_applet.png \ -figures/mm-button.png \ -figures/modemlights-advpref.png \ -figures/modemlights-prefs.png \ -figures/modemlights.png \ -figures/mouse-capplet.png \ -figures/netload-applet-default.png \ -figures/netload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/netload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/netload-applet.png \ -figures/noread.png \ -figures/nowrite.png \ -figures/odometer_applet.png \ -figures/odometer_settings.png \ -figures/odometer_themes.png \ -figures/panel_applets.png \ -figures/panel_lockbut.png \ -figures/panel_logoutbut.png \ -figures/panel_props_back.png \ -figures/panel_props_edge.png \ -figures/panel_runbutton.png \ -figures/panel_runprogram.png \ -figures/panel_swallow.png \ -figures/part-1.png \ -figures/part-2.png \ -figures/part-3.png \ -figures/part.png \ -figures/player-1.png \ -figures/player-2.png \ -figures/player-3.png \ -figures/player-4.png \ -figures/player.png \ -figures/prefmenu.png \ -figures/printer-fig.png \ -figures/printer-properties.png \ -figures/quicklaunch_applet.png \ -figures/screensave-capplet.png \ -figures/sidebar.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png \ -figures/status_dock.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-default.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/swapload-applet.png \ -figures/tasklist-fig.png \ -figures/tasklist-properties-size.png \ -figures/tasklist-properties.png \ -figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png \ -figures/theme-select.png \ -figures/tickastat_applet.png \ -figures/tickastat_coredump.png \ -figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png \ -figures/tickastat_settings.png \ -figures/viewmenu.png \ -figures/viewmusic.png \ -figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png \ -figures/webcontrol-applet.png \ -figures/whereami_applet.png \ -figures/wm-add.png \ -figures/wm-main.png diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2382e9c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,247 +0,0 @@ - - Another Clock - - Another Clock applet, shown in , is a simple analog clock (similar - to that in the CDE, Common Desktop Environment, panel). To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - Another Clock - . - - -
- Another Clock Applet - - Another Clock Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything special to this clock. It will just - sit on your panel and tell the time for you. - - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Another Clock - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Another Clock by - right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - - Clock color — This is currently greyed-out, but in the - future it will be possible to adjust the colour of the clockface. - - - - - - Hour needle color — Set this to the color you wish to - use for the hour needle (hand) of the clock. - - - - - - Minute needle color — Set this to the color you wish to - use for the minute needle (hand) of the clock. - - - - - - Second needle color — Set this to the color you wish to - use for the second needle (hand) of the clock. - - - - - - Show seconds needle — If this button is checked, the - second needle (hand) of the clock will be shown. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - - - - If you adjust the system clock backwards using the - date command, the clock will stop working until the - system time reaches the time the clock displays. It will start - working normally then. - - - - - - - - - Authors - - Another Clock was written by - Iñigo Serna (inigo@gazletan.bi.ehu.es). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne (telsa@linuxchix.org) - and Eric Baudais (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/applet2ug b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/applet2ug deleted file mode 100755 index c1c2be5..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/applet2ug +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -#!/usr/bin/perl -w -# -# THIS SCRIPT CHANGES THE SECTION LABELLING -# -# example input name: sound-monitor or sound-monitor.sgml -# example output name: sound-monitor.sgml.ug -# - -$_ = shift @ARGV; -s/.sgml//; -$basename=$_; -$infilename=$basename . ".sgml"; -$outfilename=$basename . "-ug.sgml"; - -print ("Reading: $infilename\n"); -open (IN,$infilename) || die "can't open file: $!"; -print ("Writing: $outfilename\n"); -open (OUT,">$outfilename") || die "can't open file for writing: $!"; - -while () { - # Now comment out the license - s// - <\/sect1>/; - - # Start by substituting sections (sect4->sect5, sect3->sect4, ...) - s/sect4/sect5/; - s/sect3/sect4/; - s/sect2/sect3/; - s/sect1/sect2/; - - # Now try to pluck out any id's which could be problematic - s/id="authors"/id="$basename-authors"/; - s/id="bugs"/id="$basename-bugs"/; - s/id="prefs"/id="$basename-prefs"/; - s/id="usage"/id="$basename-usage"/; - - print OUT $_; -} -close (IN) || die "can't close $infilename: $!"; -close (OUT) || die "can't close $outfilename: $!"; diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/asclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/asclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f832445..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/asclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ - - AfterStep Clock Applet - - - The AfterStep Clock applet, shown in , is an applet which - displays the time in both analogue (clockface) and digital format - along with the day of the week and the date. It is based on the look - of the NeXTStep clock. This document describes version 2.1.10 of - AfterStep Clock. - - - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - AfterStep Clock - . - - -
- AfterStep Clock Applet - - AfterStep Clock Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything special to this clock. It will just - sit on your panel and tell you the time and date. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about ASClock - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize AfterStep Clock - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - Your properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Display time in 12 hour format (AM/PM) — Clicking this - will display the time in a 12 hour format. The default state, - off, uses a 24-hour clock. - - - - - - Blinking elements in clock — When the - AfterStep clock applet starts - up, by default it displays a blinking colon between the hour and - minute display. Clicking this turns this blinking off. - - - - - - Clock theme — The AS Clock - applet can take on a number of different appearances. Select - the theme (appearance) from this list. - - - - - - - - - The Timezone tab is used to specify your - timezone. Select the continent and city your are in or closest - to. - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - You can't change the time through the clock properties. This - is not really a bug; it's because you must be root to alter - the time for the whole of the system, using the - date command. - - - If you adjust the system clock backwards using the - date command, the clock will stop working until the - system time reaches the time the clock displays. It will start - working normally then. - - - Switching between a lot of themes or a lot of timezones seems - to use up inordinate amounts of memory. - - - - - - - - Authors - - - - The AfterStep Clock applet was written - by Beat Christen (spiff@longstreet.ch) and - Patrick Rogan (rogan@lycos.com). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports regarding the software to the - GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk) and Aaron Weber - (aaron@helixcode.com. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/battery-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/battery-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ea30472..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/battery-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,540 +0,0 @@ - - - Battery Charge Monitor Applet - - - Battery Charge Monitor applet, shown in Figure 1, displays the - charge status of your portable computer battery. To learn how to - add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Monitors - Battery Charge Monitor - . - - - - - In order for Battery Charge - Monitor to function correctly, your computer must - have been configured to support Advanced Power - Management. - - - -
- Battery Charge Monitor - - Battery Charge Monitor - - - -
- - - Usage - - Battery Charge Monitor just sits in - your panel monitoring the status of your computer battery. By - left-clicking on the applet you can - toggle the view between Readout View and Graph View described in the - Readout View - and Graph View - sections respectively. - - - - Readout View - - Readout View, the default mode of view, displays the current - battery status in an iconic and textual format. In this mode - Battery Charge Monitor displays - the following information: - - - - - Battery Icon - - - The iconic representation of a battery on the left of the - applet, shows how fully charged your battery is - currently. The coloured area of the battery represents the - ammount of charge left in your battery, with the top of the - battery representing 100% charged. - - - - The colour of the battery changes when the charge drops below - the current Low Charge Threshold (see - Properties — - General). The default colour of the battery is green in a normal state and - red when it drops below the Low Charge Threshold. - - - - When your computer is attached to the power supply, a - small lightning bolt appears on the battery representation to - indicate that the battery is attached to the power supply - and is in a charging state. An example of this is shown in - Figure 2. - You can also configure the battery to change colour when it is or isn't - connected to the power supply, see - - Properties — Readout for further details on this feature. - - -
- Battery Charge Monitor with the power supply connected - - Battery Charge Monitor - - - -
- - - - - - Percentage Remaining - - - The percentage readout on the top right of the applet - represents how fully charged your computer battery is currently. - - - - - - Time Remaining - - - The time remaining readout on the bottom right of the applet - shows how much running time the battery has left. The time is - shown in hours and minutes. - - - - - - - - Graph View - - Graph View displays the percentage of charge remaining in your - battery as a moving graph. The horizontal axis represents time - and the vertical axis represents charge percentage with 100% - charged being the top of the graph. By default the graph is - green when your computer is connected to the power supply and - blue when it isn't. The graph also changes colour when the - charge drops below the Low Charge Threshold - (see - Properties — General) the default colour in this case is red. - - -
- Battery Charge Monitor in Graph View - - Battery Charge Monitor in Graph View - - - -
- - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu has - the following item: - - - - Properties... — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see - Properties) - which allows you to customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure Battery Charge - Monitor applet by right-clicking on the applet and - choosing the Properties... menu - item. This will open the Properties - dialog, with four groups of configurable items arranged in the - following tabbed pages: - General, - Readout, - Graph and - Battery - Charge Messages. - - - - Properties — General - -
- Properties Dialogue — General - - Properties Dialogue — General - - - -
- - - - - Follow Panel Size — instructs - Battery Charge Monitor to resize - when the panel changes size. It is checked on by default. In - order for Applet Height and - Applet Width settings to take affect, it - must be unchecked. - - - - - - Applet Height & Applet Width — - these two spin buttons allow you to specify the dimensions - of Battery Charge Monitor exactly - in pixels. In order for these settings to take affect, - Follow Panel Size must be unchecked. The - default values are both set to 48. - - - - - Setting these values very small (below 28 pixels) - results in the battery icon not being displayed due to lack - of space. - - - - - - - Update Interval — specifies in - seconds how often Battery Charge - Monitor refreshes the battery charge - information it displays. The default setting is two seconds. - - - - - - Low Charge Threshold — is a - percentage value of the battery charge that - Battery Charge Monitor uses to - optionally display a warning, it then considers the battery to - have little power remaining. For example this information is - used to decide when to change the colour of the battery icon in - Readout View. The default value is 25. - - - - - - Applet Mode — the two - Readout and - Graph checkboxes are another way of - toggling between - Readout View and - Graph View. - - - - - - - Properties — Readout - - - The settings on this tab only affect Battery Charge - Monitor when it is in - Readout View. - - - - All of the coloured rectangles on this tab can be - left clicked on to display the GNOME - colour wheel. This enables you to choose colours that you may - prefer more than the defaults. - - -
- Properties Dialogue — Readout - - Properties Dialogue — Readout - - -
- - - - - AC-On Battery Color — specifies the - colour of the battery icon in Readout view when your computer - is connected to the AC power supply. The default colour is - green. - - - - - - AC-Off Battery Color — specifies - the colour of the battery icon in Readout View when your - computer is not connected to the AC power supply. The default - colour is green. - - - - - - - Low Battery Color — specifies the - colour of the battery icon in Readout View when the charge - percentage rate drops below the Low Charge - Threshold (see Properties - — General). The default colour is red. - - - - - - - Properties — Graph - - - The settings on this tab only affect Battery Charge - Monitor when it is in - Graph View. - - - All of the coloured rectangles on this tab can be - left clicked on to display the GNOME - colour wheel. This enables you to choose colours that you may - prefer more than the defaults. - - -
- Properties Dialogue — Graph - - Properties Dialogue — Graph - - -
- - - - - - AC-On Battery Color — - specifies the colour of the graph when your computer is - connected to the AC power supply. The default colour is - green. - - - - - - AC-Off Battery Color &mdash: specifies - the colour of the graph when your computer is not connected to - the AC power supply. The default colour is blue. - - - - - - Graph Battery Low Color — specifies - the colour of the graph when the charge percentage rate drops - below the Low Charge Threshold. The - default colour is red. - - - - - - Graph Tick Color — specifies the - colour of the graph division lines on the graph which mark the - 25%, 50% and 75% charge points. The default colour is dark - grey. - - - - - - Graph Direction — - specifies which direction the graph moves over time. The - default direction is Right to Left. - - - - - - - Properties — Battery Charge Messages - -
- Properties Dialogue — Battery Charge - Messages - - Properties Dialogue — Battery Charge - Messages - - -
- - - - - Warn in the battery charge dips below - — specifies the charge percentage at which - Battery Charge Monitor shows a - warning dialogue box that the battery is at a low charge. This - warning is only displayed if Enable Low Battery - Warning is checked. The default setting is 5%. - - - - - - Enable Low Battery Warning — - specifies if Battery Charge Monitor - should display a dialogue box warning that the battery charge - has dropped below the charge percentage specified in the - Warn if the battery charge dips below - setting. The default value is checked. - - - - - - Enable Full-Charge Notification — - specifies if Battery Charge - Monitor should display a dialogue box when the - battery has reached its 100% charged rate. The default value - is unchecked. - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - One oddity is if you start Battery Charge - Monitor on a computer that has no Advanced Power - Management support. This causes the Low Battery - Warning dialogue box to be displayed which may be - mis-leading. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Nat Friedman - nat@nat.org. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use - Bug Report Tool (bug-buddy), - available in the Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - The documentation for this applet - which you are reading now was written by - James Cope jcope@bcs.org.uk.. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index d0a540e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - - CD Player Applet - - - CD Player Applet, shown in , allows you to play CD's from a - Panel. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Multimedia - CD Player - . - - -
- CD Player Applet - - CD Player Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - This applet is used to unobtrusively play and control CD's while you - get real work done or play - FreeCell. To use it, just press the - small buttons in the applet like you would on any CD player. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Run CD Player… — - starts the GNOME CD Player, which - has more features than the CD Player - Applet such as automatically downloading CD track - information from a CDDB server, volume control, and title/track - display. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about CD Player - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - CD Player Applet was written by Tim Gerla - (timg@means.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Chris Lyttle - (chris@wilddev.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/charpick-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/charpick-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 32f6a85..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/charpick-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,342 +0,0 @@ - - Character Picker Applet - - - Character Picker applet, shown in , allows you to easily write many - characters which are not available on standard keyboards such as - accented characters, certain mathemathical symbols and punctuation, - and some other special symbols. To add this applet to a - Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Character Picker - . - - -
- Character Picker Applet - - Character Picker Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - First, bring the cursor focus to the Character - Picker applet by left-clicking on one of the - characters displayed in the applet. Specify the character group - by pressing the corresponding key on your keyboard. (For a - complete list of the character groups and corresponding keys, see - .) For example, - to see the various accented versions of the "a" letter, press - "a". After you have found the correct letter or symbol, - left-click on it to copy the symbol into the buffer. The - character should appear as a depressed button. This is similar to - the common Copy command available in many programs. To paste the - symbol in any window, just click in the window with the middle - mouse button. Most applications which have Copy and Paste - features will also allow you to paste the symbol using its Paste - command. - - - - ISO-8859-1 (Latin-1) character support - - Note that some applications do not support ISO-8859-1 - characters. These applications will not display some characters - from the Character Picker applet. - - - - - Cut and Paste in X - - The X Windows system allows you to copy and paste text by - highlighting it with the first mouse button to copy the text and - then pasting the text by pressing the middle mouse button. - Note that Character Picker uses the - same copy buffer as X uses. Thus, when you - select a character in the Character - Picker it replaces any previous text in the buffer - from highlighting text. Similarly, if you have selected a - character in Character Picker and then - highlight text, the highlighted text will replace the character - in the buffer and the character's button will no longer appear - depressed. - - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Character Picker - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Character Picker - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties in the Size tab are: - - - - - Follow panel size — If this - button is checked, the - Character Picker applet will - automatically set the appropriate number of columns and rows - of characters to fit in the Panel. - - - - - - Minimum number of cells: (for autosize) - — This sets the - minimum number of character buttons (or "cells") which will be - shown. The actual number of character buttons may exceed this - number, depending upon the Panel size - and number chosen. Note that if this number is too small, - some characters may not be visible. (This variable does not - influence the cell layout if the Follow panel - size button is not selected.) - - - - - - Number of rows of buttons: — This - determines the number - of rows of character buttons (or "cells") that appear in the - applet. (This variable does not influence the cell layout if - the Follow panel size button is selected.) - - - - - - Number of columns of buttons: — - This determines the number - of columns of character buttons (or "cells") that appear in the - applet. (This variable does not influence the cell layout if - the Follow panel size button is selected.) - - - - - - Size of button: (pixels) — This is - the size (in pixels) - of each character button in the applet. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Default List tab are: - - - - - Default character list — This is - the list of characters - which will be shown in the applet when you press the space - bar. This is a convenient way to keep a list of your most - frequently used characters. Just enter your most frequently - used characters here. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. Click - Apply to apply changes without closing. - Close closes - Properties without saving changes which - have not been applied. Applied changes cannot be cancelled. - - - - - - Characters - - Character Picker applet has all - the characters from the - ISO-8859-1(Latin 1) character set which are not on standard US - keyboards. They are mapped onto the standard characters as shown in - . The bold - characters in the first column of each half and to the left of the - dotted lines are the characters you - must type in the Character Picker - applet to obtain - the corresponding characters shown to the right. - -
- Character Picker's Character Key - - Character Picker's Character Key - - - -
- - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Character Picker was written by Alexandre Muñiz - (munizao@xprt.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 9968693..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,265 +0,0 @@ - - Clock Applet - - - Clock applet, shown in , is a simple applet which shows the - time (and optionally the date too) in any of several formats. To - add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - Clock - . - - -
- Clock Applet - - Clock Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Clock applet requires no user - input. You may optionally configure it, as described below. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Clock - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Clock - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - - Time Format — Select either 12 hour - format for AM/PM formatted time, or - 24 hour for a 24 hour clock. - - - - - - Show date in applet — Select this to show the date - inside the applet. - - - - - - Show date in tooltip — Select this to show the date in - the tooltip that pops up when the mouse is briefly left over - the applet. - - - - - - Use GMT — Select this to show the Greenwich Mean Time - instead of the local time. - - - - - - Unix time — Select this to show the time, in seconds, - that has elapsed since Jan 1, 1970. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - Setting the Time - - Clock applet only displays the time; - it does not allow you to set the time. In order to set the time - on a Unix or Linux system, you should use the - date command. For example, to set the time to - 11:43:01PM and the date to April 4, use date --set="Apr - 4 23:43:01". Note that you must be logged in as root to - set the time. More information about the date command is - available from the date manual page. - You may set your timezone using the timeconfig or - tzselect commands on some Linux - distributions. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Clock was written by Miguel de Icaza - (miguel@kernel.org), Federico Mena - (quartic@gimp.org), and Stuart Parmenter - (pavlov@innerx.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6c17602..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,343 +0,0 @@ - - Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - - Clock and Mailcheck applet, shown in , displays the current time and how - much mail is in your mailbox. It also notifies you when new mail - arrives by flashing. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - Clock and Mailcheck - . - - -
- Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - - View the time and number of messages in your inbox in the applet's - display. The envelope will flash when new email arrives. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Clock and Mailcheck - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Clock and Mailcheck - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The Properties dialogue is divided in two - sections, one for general options and one for themes. - - - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Display time in 12 hours format (AM/PM) — Check this - button to show the time in 12-hour format. - - - - - - Display time relative to GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) — - This allows you to change the timezone - Clock and Mailcheck - uses. The time can be anything from twelve hours - ahead of GMT to twelve hours behind it. Remember also to select - the checkbox, to use the new - timezone. Note that you can only alter the - time by an integral number of hours. - - - - - - Mail file — Enter you email inbox file which should be - checked for new mail. Typically, this is - /var/spool/mail/yourusername - or something similar. You can only enter one file. - - - - - - When new mail is received, run... — It is possible to - execute commands when new mail arrives. - For example, it is very common for people to have a sound - file played as mail arrives. You can put the command to - run and the file to run it on in this space and ensure the - checkbox is checked for it to occur. - If you have more than one command, you can separate them - by a semi-colon. For example, - - - - esdplay /full/path/to/file.wav - - - - - cd /path/to/directory ; esdplay file.wav - - - - These two have the same effect. You will need the full path - for this, without using shortcuts such as cd ~. - - - - - - Always blink when new mail is waiting — If you select - this checkbox, then the - red envelope will blink until you read your unread email. Normally, - this is off, and the blinking lasts only a few seconds. - - - - - - Number of messages to consider mailbox full — Set the - number of messages you mailbox must have to be considered - full. Certain themes will show a special - symbol indicating the mailbox is full. - - - - - - When clicked, run... — When this is set, clicking - the left mouse button on the applet will run a program. The default is - to run the Balsa mail client. (If - Balsa is not installed, nothing - will happen.) Set this to be your favorite email program. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Theme tab allows you - to set the appearance of Clock and - Mailcheck applet. Clock and - Mailcheck applet comes with many themes which are - stored in $PREFIX/clockmail/. By - default, it does not use a theme. Note that not all of the themes - show both the time and the state of your mailbox. - - -
- Properties dialog showing theme tab - - Properties dialog showing theme tab - - - -
- - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - - - You can't change the time through the clock properties. This - is not really a bug; it's because you must be root to alter - the time for the whole of the system, using the - date command. - - - - - If you adjust the system clock backwards using the - date command, the clock will stop working until the - system time reaches the time the clock displays. It will start - working normally then. - - - - - The mailcounter theme gets the number of messages in your inbox - wrong. - - - - - Several themes do not reshape to the size of a vertical panel and - force the panel to be wider. - - - - - Doesn't handle multiple mailboxes. - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - ClockMail was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index e4a973d..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,319 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The CPU load applet - - - The cpuload_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you how much CPU is - being used. - - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - -
- CPU Load Applet - - CPU Load Applet - - - -
- - - cpuload_applet divides CPU use into - four sorts: - - - - User - - - This measures CPU use in "userland": ie, things not talking to - the kernel. The default colour for this is yellow. - - - - - - System - - - This measures CPU use that involves the kernel: lots of talking - between memory and disc, for example. The default colour is pale - grey. - - - - - - Nice - - - This measures CPU use which is not "nice": running at a high priority. - The default colour is medium grey. - - - - - - Idle - - - Idle measures unused CPU capacity. The default colour is black. - - - - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu has - the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the cpuload_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - CPU Load Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - cpuload_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect any of this group - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - CPU Load Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - cpuload_applet. This is useful for when - you only use cpuload_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- CPU Load Properties Dialog - - CPU Load Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are three: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for the different forms of - CPU usage displayed by clicking on the colour boxes. This - invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds. The highest value is 1,000,000,000 - and the lowest is 1. The default is a more sensible 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can result in - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b2a9631..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The CPU and memory usage applet - - - The cpumemusage_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you about your machine's - use of CPU, memory and swap. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Monitors - CPU/MEM usage - . - - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. - - - The applet shows three bar charts, for CPU, memory and swap space. - If your panel is horizontal, the top bar is CPU, the middle is - memory, and the bottom is swap. If your panel is vertical, the left - bar is CPU, the middle is memory, and the right is swap. - - -
- CPU/MEM Applet - - CPU/MEM applet - - - -
- - - - CPU - - - Three colours are used here. Yellow is used for CPU activity - which does not need the kernel. Grey is used for CPU activity - by programs talking to the kernel (typically, lots of I/O such - as moving things between memory and disk). Black is the background - and represents unused CPU. - - - - - Memory - - - Four colours are used here. Yellow is used for shared memory - (memory more than one program is using). Grey is used for - buffer use (memory containing data not yet written to disk). - The greenish-yellow is used for other memory use. Green - represents unused memory. - - - - - Swap - - - Two colours are used here. Red is used for swap space in use. - Green is for unused swap. Swap is a section of the hard-drive - where the kernel puts parts of programs which are not currently - being used so that it can retrieve them easily when it needs to. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - There are no known bugs for this applet. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Radek Doulik (rodo@ucw.cz). - Please report problems with it to the - GNOME bug - tracking system. You can do this by following the - guidelines on that site or by using bug-buddy - from the command-line. For the package, put gnome-applets. - - - This guide was written by Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu) and is almost entirely based on - the earlier documentation from the GNOME 1.0.53 User's Guide by David - Mason (dcm@redhat.com) and David Wheeler. Please - report problems with or suggestions for it to the GNOME Documentation - Project (docs@gnome.org). You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 47d839a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,603 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - Desk Guide Applet - - - Desk Guide applet, shown in , is an applet that allows you to - visually navigate your virtual desktops. To add this applet to a - Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Applets - Utility - Desk Guide - . - - - -
- Desk Guide - - Desk Guide - - - -
- - Usage - - - Desk Guide applet helps you - navigate all of the virtual desktops available on your system. The - X Window system, working in - hand with a piece of software called a "window manager", allows - you to create more than one virtual desktop to organize your - work, with different applications running on each - desktop. Each desktop can also be subdivided by the window - manager into rows and columns of working space, called - "desk areas". Desk - Guide applet is a navigational tool to get around - the various desktops and desk areas, providing a miniature road - map in the GNOME panel showing all your virtual desktops (also - known as workspaces) and desk areas, and allowing you to switch - easily between them. - - Desk Guide applet works - hand-in-hand with the window manager, the piece of software such - as Sawfish or Enlightenment that handles the look, feel and performance of - your windows. The window manager lays down borders, resizes windows, places - and moves them. The window manager is in charge of the various - desktops. Desk Guide applet handles the - navigation. - - Desk Guide applet displays - miniature versions of all your available desktops, including - outlined boxes representing the applications running in each - desktop window. The desktop currently in use is - highlighted. Mouse-click on a representation of a desktop in - Desk Guide applet to switch to display - a different virtual desktop on your monitor. - - Click and hold with your middle mouse button on any window - image in Desk Guide applet to drag the - window around your virtual desktops. - - - Note - Different window managers use different jargon to describe - virtual desktops and the subdivided workspaces within - them. Enlightenment divides your - working area into "desktops," and then subdivides those into - "screens." Sawfish, formerly known as - Sawmill divides your - working area into "workspaces" and then subdivides those into - columns and rows. Desk Guide applet - calls the workspaces "desktops" and the areas within them - "viewports". See your window manager's documentation for more - informaton on setting up and managing your virtual workspaces. - - - Mouse-clicking on the arrow on the left side of - Desk Guide applet brings up the - Task List window, shown in . - -
- Desk Guide Task List - - Desk Guide Task List - - - -
- - The window lists the various applications running on your - computer. Left-clicking on any of the applications listed in the - Task List window shifts focus to that - application, i.e. this window rises to the foreground and all your - keyboard input will be sent to the application running in this window. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items (see ), the right-click - pop-up menu has the following item: - - - - Properties... — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see - ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure Desk Guide applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, with four different - tabbed pages giving you access to various configuration options - - display, - tasks geometry, advanced. - - - - - Properties - Display - The first Properties window, shown - in , allows you to - control Desk Guide applet's display. - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - Options include: - - - - Switch tasklist arrow - — switches the side of the applet on which the - arrow used to launch the tasklist window is displayed. - - - - Only show current desktop in - pager — limits the applet display - to the desktop currently in use, including all its - viewports. - - - - Raise area grid over tasks - — If you use multiple viewports (not only multiple - desktops) with your window manager, Desk - Guide draws a - viewport grid in the current desktop. It can either draw the - grid on top of the windows or below them. - - - - - Show Desk-Guide tooltips — - Display tooltips related to various - Desk Guide applet components. The arrow - is the only widget that displays a tooltip. - - - - Desk-Guide tooltip delay [ms] — - delay, in milliseconds, before the tooltip is displayed. You - may either type in a number or use the arrows to change the - number. - - - - Show desktop name tooltips - — Some window managers, such as - Enlightenment, allow you to name - your desktops. The feature directs - Deskguide to show tooltips - displaying the desktop's name. - - - - Desktop name tooltip delay [ms] - — delay, in milliseconds, before the tooltip is - displayed. You may either type in a number or use the arrows - to change the number. - - - - - - - Properties - Tasks - - -
- Properties Dialog - Tasks - - Properties Dialog - Tasks - - - -
- Options include: - - - Show hidden tasks (HIDDEN), - Show shaded tasks (SHADED), - Show tasks which hide from window list - (SKIP-WINLIST), Show tasks which hide from taskbar - (SKIP-TASKBAR) — These four items allow - Deskguide to display applications - running with flags set that would normally hide them from an - application like this. For instance the - panel is flagged as - HIDDEN, HIDE_FROM_WINLIST and - HIDE_FROM_TASKBAR. Selecting these options will allow - Deskguide to show such - applications. - - - - - - - - Properties - Geometry -
- Properties Dialog - Geometry - - Properties Dialog - Geometry - - - -
- Options include: - - - Desktop Height [pixels] — - sets the height of the desktop. By default this is greyed - out, and the panel size automatically sets the desktop - height. To activate it uncheck the Override desktop - height with panel size checkbox. - - - - - Override desktop height with panel - size — forces Desk - Guide to automatically size itself to the - panel. Unchecking this allows you to manually set the height - using the Desktop Height setting above. - - - - - Divide height by number of vertical - areas — divide the total applet - height by the number of rows of desktop areas visible. - - - - - - Rows of desktops — set the - number of rows of desktop maps Desk - Guide creates in the panel to represent your - desktops. - - Your window manager, not Desk Guide - Applet, controls the number of desktops available on - your computer. This feature only controls the way - Desk Guide applet displays them. - - - - - - - - Divide height by number of rows - — forces Desk - Guide to fit all the rows of desktops into the - height specified above (either one you have manually - specified or one set automatically to match the height of the - panel). Unchecking this, if you have more than one row, - allows Desk Guide to expand - vertically to two or more times normal height. - - - - - - - The options for Vertical Layout are - mirror those for horizontal layout above, but effect the width - instead of height of the applet, and the number of columns it - occupies instead of the number of rows. - - - - Properties - Advanced -
- Properties Dialog - Advanced - - Properties Dialog - Advanced - - - -
- - Advanced options allow you to control Desk - Guide's behavior with specific window managers, - along with other settings. - - - - - Draw desktops double-buffered - (recommended) — controls the method - Desk Guide draws desktops. Without - double-buffering, you may see flicker on slower - machines. With it, you may see slower performance on network - connections. - - - - Window manager moves decoration window - instead — Check this if, when you move a - window with the middle mouse button, but the resulting window - position is off. If in doubt, check this if you use any of - the window managers mentioned - (AfterStep, - Enlightenment, - FVWM, - IceWM, or - Sawmill, now known as - Sawfish). - - - - Window manager changes active area on all - desktops — If you have more than one - desktop, with multiple work areas within each desktop, this - option can be used to force the window manager to change the - active work area within all the desktops simultaneously if - you change your work area on one. - - - - Window manager expects pager to modify - area+desktop — Currently has no effect. - - - Popdown task view automatically — - Automatically pops down the task view window after you click on an - application in the task view list. If unchecked, you must click a - second time on the task view arrow to get the window to pop down. - - - - - - More Information - All Properties dialogs have the following - buttons at the bottom of the dialog: - - - - OK — - Pressing OK will activate any changes - in the properties you have made and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - Apply — - Pressing Apply at any time will - make your changes active without closing the - Properties dialog. This is helpful if - you would like to test the effects of the changes you have - made but may want to continue changing the properties. - - - - - Close — - Pressing Close will close the - Properties dialog. Only changes in the - configuration which were previously applied with the - Apply button will persist. Other - changes will not be made active. - - - - - Help — - Pressing Help brings up the manual for - the application, opening it to the page describing the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Pop-Up Items - - All applets should have the following items in their right-click - pop-up menu: - - - Remove from panel - - - The Remove from panel menu item - removes the applet from the Panel. - - - - - - Move - - - After selecting Move, your mouse - pointer will change appearance (typically to a cross with - arrows in each direction). As you move your mouse, the applet - will move with it. When you have finished moving the applet, - click any mouse button and the applet will anchor in its - current position. Note that applets can be moved between two - Panels this way. - - - - - - Panel - - - The Panel submenu contains various - items and submenus for adding and removing - Panels and applets and for changing - the configuration. - - - - - - About - - - The About... menu item brings up a - dialogue box containing various information about the applet, - typically including the applet's name, version, author, - copyright, license and description. - - - - - - Help - - - The Help menu item brings up the help - manual for the applet. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - The Window manager expects pager to modify - area+desktop feature on the advanced - properties window currently has no effect. - - - - - - - Authors - - Desk Guide applet was written by Tim Janik - (timj@gtk.org). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - License - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or - modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software - Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) - any later version. - - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General - Public License for more details. - - - A copy of the GNU General Public - License is included with the GNOME - documentation. You also may obtain a copy from the Free Software - Foundation by visiting their Web site or by writing to -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330 - Boston, MA 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 9f28db5..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,259 +0,0 @@ - - - Disk Usage Applet - - Disk Usage Applet, shown in , provides a panel monitor for the - amount of space in use and available on your disk drives. To add - this applet to the panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Monitors - Disk Usage - - - - -
- Disk Usage Applet - - Disk Usages Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - Disk Usage Applet provides - real-time monitoring of the available space on your disk - drives. - It provides three pieces of information. The colored pie - graphically represents how much space is used and how much is - available. MP: indicates the mount point of - the disk it is currently monitoring. av: - indicates the amount of space available on the selected drive, in - kilobytes. Clicking on the applet changes the drive being - monitored. Doing so repeatedly cycles through all available drives. - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - File system — allows you - to change the file system Disk Usage - Applet monitors. - - - - Properties— opens the - - Properties - dialog - - - - - - Update — this can be used - to force the applet to update the filesystem list the applet - uses. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Disk Usage - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Disk Usage Applet by - right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties. This will launch the - Properties… dialog, which allows you to - change various settings. - -
- Preferences dialog - - Preferences dialog - - - -
- - The properties are: - - - - - - Colors — To change the colors - displayed in the applet, click on the colored - buttons next to Used Diskspace, - Free Diskspace, - Textcolor and - Backgroundcolor. A color wheel dialog will - pop up offering you color options to make changes. When - finished, click on the OK button on the - color options window. - - - - - - - Size — Applet - Size and can be used to change the height (on a - horizontal panel) or width (on a vertical panel) of the applet. - - By checking the Automatically pick best applet - size check box, you can force Disk Usage - Applet to automatically choose the appropriate size - for your panel. - - - - - - Fonts — Clicking on the bar in this - window opens a dialog box allowing you to change the font - displayed in the applet. - - - - - Update Frequency — changes - the amount of time, in seconds, between updates of - Disk Usage Applet. - - - - - - - - - - - - - After you have made all the choices you want, click on - OK to make the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click on - Cancel button. - - - - - - - Authors - - Disk Usage Applet was written by Dave Finton - dfinton@d.umn.edu, Bruno Widmann - bwidmann@tks.fh-sbg.ac.at and Martin Baulig - martin@home-of-linux.org. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug reports to the GNOME bug tracking - database. (Instructions for submitting bug reports can be - found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index e1facf5..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,571 +0,0 @@ - - Drive Mount Applet - - - Drive Mount Applet, shown in , allows you to quickly and easily - mount and unmount various types of drives and filesystems on your - computer. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Drive Mount - . - - -
- Drive Mount Applet - - Drive Mount Applet - - - -
- - - Background Information for Beginners - - Many file systems on Linux and Unix systems must be manually - mounted and unmounted. After a file system is mounted, you can - read and write to it. When you are finished with a file system, - you should unmount it. It is important to unmount removable - drives, such as floppy disks and Zip disks, - before removing the media, because Linux and Unix systems do not - always write the changes made immediately. They typically buffer - the changes made to the disk in order to improve the speed of the - system. Partitions on fixed drives, such as your hard drive, are - typically mounted automatically when your computer boots and - unmounted when it shuts down. Removable media must be mounted and - unmounted by hand, such as by using the Drive - Mount applet. - - - The "root - filesystem" is the main filesystem on your computer starting with - "/" (root). Other filesystems are associated with directories inside - the root filesystem. These are called "mount points", which are - just empty directories. When a filesystem is mounted, its - contents appear inside this directory. As an example, most - systems create a mount point "/mnt/floppy" which is just an empty - directory if your floppy drive is not mounted. It contains - the contents of your floppy if the floppy drive is mounted. - - - - - - Usage - - To mount or unmount a drive, simply click on the - Drive Mount Applet icon with the left - mouse button. For drives which can eject their media, such as - most CDROM's and JAZ drives, you can eject the drive by clicking on the - icon with the right mouse button and selecting - Eject. To browse the contents of the - drive with the GNOME File Manager, select - Browse…. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Browse… — shows - the contents of the drive using the GNOME File - Manager. - The drive must be mounted for this to work. - - - - - - Eject — ejects the - storage medium for drives which can be ejected, such as - CDROM's and JAZ drives. - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Drive Mount - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - The mount point and mount status of a drive is shown in a tooltip - if the cursor is left over the applet for a short time, as shown - in . -
- Drive Mount Applet showing tooltip - - Drive Mount Applet showing tooltip - - - -
- - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Drive Mount - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - - Mount Point — This is the mount - point used when mounting the drive. This is - an empty directory which will hold the contents of the drive - whenever the drive is mounted. Mount points can occur - anywhere in your filesystem, but the convention is to put all - mount points for removable drives in the /mnt - directory. - - - - - - Update in seconds — This is the - interval in seconds at - which Drive Mount refreshes its - icon by checking the mount status. This is only - important if you sometimes mount or unmount a drive using a - command or application other than Drive - Mount. - - - - - - Icon — This determines the icons - (one for unmounted and - one for mounted) displayed for the - drive. There are icon sets for most of the commonly used - drives (floppy, CDROM, Zip, hard disk, and JAZ). - They are shown in . You may also select - Custom; this allows you to specify - your own icons. - -
- Icons for Mounted and Unmounted Drives of Various Types - - Icons for Mounted and Unmounted Drives of Various - Types - - - -
- - Notice that - shows the icons for the unmounted and mounted states of (from - left to right) floppy, CDROM, Zip, JAZ, and hard disk drives. - - - - - - Custom icon for mounted — A custom - icon which is - displayed when the drive is mounted. This option is only - available if the Icon: selection is set to - "Custom". - - - - - - Custom icon for not mounted — A - custom icon which is - displayed when the drive is not mounted. This option is only - available if the Icon: selection is set to - "Custom". - - - - - - Scale size to panel — Selecting - this option scales - the size of the mounted and unmounted icons with the - Panel's size. If this option is not - set, the icon sizes are fixed, independent of the size of - the Panel. Selecting this option - typically makes for a nicer appearance. For very small - Panel sizes, unselecting this option - may be useful, as it forces the applet to appear rotated and - larger, which makes it easier to see. - - - - - - Use automount friendly status test - — Select this option - if you use automount, otherwise leave it unselected. - - - Information for Advanced Users - - The default command used by Drive - Mountto test whether a drive is mounted is - stat and would cause the drive to actually be - mounted if the user is using - automount. If this button is - selected, it uses mount instead, which - does not cause automount to mount - the drive. The reason this button is not selected by default - is that mount is more cpu intensive than - stat. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. Click - Apply to apply changes without closing. - Close closes - Properties without saving changes which - have not been applied. Applied changes cannot be cancelled. - - - - - - Configuring Your System - - - For Advanced Users - - This section is intended for system administrators and advanced - users. - - - - - In order for Drive Mount Applet to work - properly, the system may need to be configured by the system - administrator, using root privileges. This section provides a - very basic introduction. - - - - Information describing the mount point and filesystem type of each - drive is kept in /etc/fstab. This can be - configured by hand or by using the - linuxconf application. For drives which - do not always have a single filesystem type (such as a floppy - drive which may have msdos or ext2 filesystems), you should use - "auto" for the filesystem type. Each device has a single line in - /etc/fstab of the following form: - - /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,user 0 0 - - This entry describes the first floppy device (/dev/fd0) as having - a mount point of /mnt/floppy, a variable - filesystem type which should be automatically detected, and the - following configurations: "noauto"— Do not automatically - mount the drive when the computer is booted, "rw"— The drive - is readable and writable, and "user"— Users have permission - to mount the drive. These, along with the last two fields which - we do not describe here, are discussed in detail in the fstab man - pages, available by typing man fstab or through - the GNOME Help Browser. - - - The linuxconf application provides a - graphical interface for controlling these filesystems. To start - linuxconf, just type - linuxconf in a shell window (you must log in as - root). Select - - Config - filesystems - Access local drive - . - To edit an entry, just select - it. linuxconf is meant to be easy - to use and has its own internal help system to guide you - through the process. You may also add new entries by selecting the - Add button. - - - - - - - Troubleshooting and Understanding Error Messages - - If you do not have your system configured properly, you may - encounter certain error messages when trying to mount or access - certain drives. Here are some of the more common error messages - and their causes: - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 is not a valid block - device— The most common cause for this error is - that the drive (in this example, /dev/fd0, corresponding to the - floppy drive) is empty. - - - - - mount: only root can mount /dev/fda on - /mnt/floppy— You do not have permission to mount - this drive. Contact the system administrator, who can give you - permission. - - - Note for System Administrators - - You can set a drive to be mountable and unmountable by users by - adding "users" to the mount options (fourth column) in - /etc/fstab. This may be done by hand or - by using linuxconf, using the - Local volume tab in - - Config - Filesystems - Access local drive - . After you select the correct drive from the list, - it will show you the Volume - specifications. Click on the - Options tab, and select the - User mountable button. - - - - - - mount: wrong fs type, bad option, bad superblock on - /dev/cdrom, or too many mounted file systems— - This error can be caused by several problems. It is most - commonly caused by not having the right filesystem type, such as - trying to mount a music CDROM as if it held data, or trying to - mount an msdos formatted floppy as ext2. - - - - - mount /mnt/cdrom 2>&1 reported: mount: No medium - found— This error indicates the drive, in - this case the CDROM drive, is empty. - - - - - umount /mnt/cdrom 2>&1 reported: umount: /mnt/cdrom: - device is busy— This error indicates that the - drive cannot be unmounted because the drive is being used by - the computer. This often happens if you have the - GNOME File Manager open to a - directory on the drive or if you have a terminal window open - with the working directory on the drive. - - - - - umount: can't find /mnt/floppy in /etc/fstab or /etc/mtab - — - This indicates that the system has not been configured to mount - the mount point you are trying to use. In many cases, you may - have put the wrong mount point in the Mount - point entry in the Properties - Dialog (see ). To find out which mount - point you should be using, contact your system administrator. - - - Note for Advanced Users - - Each device (filesystem or drive) which can be mounted should - be listed in the /etc/fstab configuration - file. Reading this file will tell you which devices are - configured for your system. To add or modify entries, you can - edit this file by hand or by using the - linuxconf application. - - - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 already mounted or /mnt/floppy busy - mount: according to mtab, /dev/fd0 is mounted on /mnt/floppy_ext2 - — - This error occurs if you have a single device (in this case - /dev/fd0) configured for multiple mount points and you try to - mount one mount point while another one is already mounted. - Having multiple mount points for a single device typically is - not necessary. - - - - - mount: the kernel does not recognize /dev/sda4 as a - block device(maybe 'insmod driver'?)— Contact - your system administrator. (This error - occurs if your kernel is not properly configured to - automatically mount the necessary kernel modules to read the - device.) - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Eject does not always work. Trying to - eject with the drive mounted does not give a warning, explaining - why the drive does not eject. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Drive Mount Applet was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index a60364f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,171 +0,0 @@ - - Fifteen Applet - - - Fifteen applet, shown in , is a version of the old game of - moving squares around a grid to put them into numerical order. To - add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Fifteen - . - - -
- Fifteen Applet - - Fifteen Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - The applet starts with the pieces in the correct order: this is - the order you will need to restore them to. To start a new game, - right-click on the applet and select Scramble - Pieces. Move the pieces by clicking on them with - the left mouse button until you have restored them all to their - original positions. When you have done this, you will see a - You win! dialog box. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Scramble pieces — - randomly rearranges the tile positions. Use this to start a - new game. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about - Fifteen applet, inluding the - applet's version and the author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Fifteen was written by Federico Mena - Quintero (federico@nuclecu.unam.mx). It is based on - the game described by Sam Lloyd in 1878. Please send - all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fish-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fish-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index e387f6f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/fish-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,254 +0,0 @@ - - Fish Applet - - - Fish applet, shown in , displays a small - fish in your panel and does nothing useful - whatsoever beyond that. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Fish - . - - -
- Fish Applet - - Fish Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Unlike most fishes, this fish requires little care and no fishbowl - cleaning. It swims happily about in its water. If you ask it, it - will tell you interesting thoughts. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Fish - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Fish - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - - Your GNOME Fish's Name — You can change your fish's - name here. The default name is Wanda. - - - - - - The Animation Filename — You can select a different set - of pictures here. By default, - the list of pictures is in $PREFIX/pixmaps/fish/, - which you can browse and choose from. You may also put a different - pathname in pointing to your own pictures. - - - - - - Frames In Animation — The number of frames in the - animation. The default is three, but the range is from 1 to 255. - - - - - - Pause per frame (s) — The period in seconds before - updating the picture. The default is one second, but the range - is from 0.10 to 10 seconds. - - - - - - Rotate on vertical panels — This checkbox is used for - vertical panels, and when checked, the - fish will appear swimming downwards on a vertical panel. If it is - not checked, it will appear the same way as on a horizontal panel, - which forces the vertical panel to widen to accomodate it. - - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Fish was written by George Lebl - (jirka@5z.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all - comments and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/geyes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/geyes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0f0d14f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/geyes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ - - gEyes Applet - - - gEyes applet, shown in , is a pair of eyes which follow your - mouse pointer around the screen. To add this applet to a - Panel, right-click on the - Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - gEyes - . - - -
- gEyes Applet - - gEyes Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Watch the eyes watch your mouse. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about gEyes - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize gEyes - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change the theme. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - This window shows a list of the currently installed - themes(appearances) for gEyes. Select - the theme you would like to use. - - - - After you have selected your new theme, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - With the exception of Default-tiny, most of the themes - are too large for some Panel sizes and - force the Panel to resize. - - - - - - - - Authors - - gEyes was written by Dave Camp - (campd@oit.edu). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk) and Arjan Scherpenisse - (acscherp@wins.uva.nl). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gkb-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gkb-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index cd4b63d..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gkb-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,523 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet, shown with its - default configuration in , allows - you to easily and quickly change - the keyboard map to those used in various different countries. To - add this applet to a - Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GKB KeyBoard Switcher - . - - -
- GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - - Once configured, the GNOME Keyboard - applet allows you to switch the keyboard mapping between any number of - keyboard layout. Just left-click on the applet or press - AltShift - to switch the keyboard - mapping. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about GNOME KeyBoard - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize GNOME KeyBoard - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - add, modify, and remove keymaps, as well as to configure - the applet's appearance. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - The Properties dialog box has two tabs: - Keymaps and Options. - On the Keymaps tab, you can Add, Edit, Delete - or change the order of keyboard layouts. On the - Options tab you can set the appearance of the - applet (flag, label or flag+label) and its size (Normal or Big), as - well as the key sequence to use to get GKB to switch between - keyboard layouts (see ). - - - Setting keyboard layouts for your language - - Setting up keymaps can consist in one or more of the following steps: - - - - Adding a required keyboard layout — On the - Keymaps tab, click on the - Add button. The - tree shown in - allows you to choose - the keymap best suited for you, based on the language and the - country involved. - - -
- Select Layout dialog - - Select layout dialog - - -
- To add a keymap, click on the + - sign preceeding the languge you want to set. A list of coutries - where the given language is used appears. Again, click on the - + preceeding the country chosen, and a - list of keymaps shows up. Select the keymap you would like to - use and click Add. Your keymap gets added to - the list on the GKB Properties window. You - may add another keymap or click - Close to close the - Select Layout dialog. - - - - - - Editing an existing keyboard layout — Selecting a keymap - and pressing the Edit brings up the - Edit keymap window (see - ). - - - -
- Edit keymap dialog - - Edit keymap dialog - - -
- - -On this dialog, you can modify different properties of the keymap. These -properties are: - - - - - -Name: The name of the keymap, as shown in the -GKB Properties window and in the hint appearing -when you move your mouse over the applet. - - - - - -Label: This is the label that appears when you set -"Label" or "Flag+Label" modes. See for more -details. - - - - - -Language: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. -It has no effect right now. - - - - - -Country: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It -has no effect right now. - - - - - -Flag: This is the place where you can set the flag -to be displayed with the given keyboard layout. - - - - - -Architecture:This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. -It has no effect right now. - - - - - -Type: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It has no -effect right now. - - - - - -Code page: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It -has no effect right now. - - - - - -Command: This is the command which - GNOME KeyBoard will use to change - the keymap. The default is to use the - gkb_xmmap xmodmap-file-extension - command, where xmodmap-file-extension -should be replaced by the extension of the xmodmap file you want to use. - - -Finding keyboard layouts availble on your system -On a typical Linux system, xmodmap files can be found under the -directory /usr/share/xmodmap. - - - -To set the keymap to a US 101 key keyboard, for example, you would -use gkb_xmmap us-101. - - - If this doesn't work, you may also try setting the - keyboard using command setxkbmap - LC where - LC is the two letter country - code of your locale. (for example, - setxkbmap fr to use a French - keyboard). Finally, if you have your own keyboard layout - (xmodmap) file, set the command to xmodmap - xmodmap-filename (for - example, xmodmap - ~/xrus/yawerty.koi8.xmm to use keyboard layout - for Cyrillic letters in koi8 encoding). Please see - for more information. - - - - - - - - - - - Removing a keyboard layout that is no longer needed — - To remove a keyboard, select it (click on it in the - GKB Properties window) and click the - Delete button. - - - - - - Reordering keyboard layouts — The order in which the - keyboard layouts become active as you click on the applet or - press the hot key depends on the order they appear in the list in - the Properties window. The layout that is - displayed at the top of - the list will become the default layout when you close the - Properties window. To change the order in - the list, select the keymap to be moved, and click - Up or Down as - appropriate. - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - Apply to apply the changes or on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the Close - button. The Help button brings up this chapter - of the on-line help. - - - - - - - Miscellaneous options - - Different options allow you to customize the look of your applet. - As a new feature, you can select between three different display modes: - - - - - Flag mode — The flag associated to the keymap is - displayed on the Panel. - - - - - - Label mode — No flag is displayed, only the label - associated with the keymap. - - - - - - Flag and label mode — Both flag and label - associated with the keymap are displayed. - - - - - - - Many users have reported, that the applet takes too much room on - the panel. You can now set the applets size from the - Applet size pull down list. Set the size to - Normal if you want a smaller applet. - If you have plenty of space or like nice big flags on you panel, - set the option to Big. - - -An often formulated user wish was to implement the keymap switching using -hotkeys. The developers proudly announce, that keyboard initiated switching now works. The hotkey combination that allows to change keymaps is set to -AltShift (Alt being the left Alt key). You can customize this hotkey sequence from the GKB Properties window's -Options tab. Click on the Grab hotkey button and press the keys you want to set. The key combination is displayed in the input box near the button (you may see something like: Control-Shift_R). Finally, click on Apply or OK to finalize the new settings. - - - - - - - Technical information - - Normally you do not need these details - but if something is not - working, or you are just curious, read on. - - - GNOME Keyboard switches the keyboard - map by issuing a command to X Window - System. X Window System has two mechanisms for setting keyboard - mapping: older one called "xmodmap" and a newer one, based on the - so-called "Xkb extension". If you have Xkb enabled, you should use - it and switch keyboard layouts by issuing a command - setxkbmap LC. It - comes with a number of various keyboard layout files, usually in - directory /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xkb/symbols. - - If you do not have Xkb extension enabled, or if it just - does not cover the language you need, you should use the older - xmodmap mechanism. In this case, you need to - have a file which describes keyboard layout in a special format - (see manual page for xmodmap for details), and - the command should be xmodmap - filename . GNOME - Keyboard includes a - number of keyboard layout files, which are installed in the - directory /usr/share/xmodmap; these files - have names like xmodmap.de. To use one of - these files, you can use the command gkb_xmmap - LC - which is equivalent to xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.LC: - for example, - gkb_xmmap hu is the same as xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.hu. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - - - - Languages and countries showing up in the - Select layout dialog are not sorted in - alphabetical order. - - - - -The program has very few error handling routines implemented. If you try to feed it something unusual, it may crash. - - - - -If it does not crash, it returns the error: "The keymap switching - returned an error". If the Edit window is open - when this error appears and - you press the OK button on this window, it is - likely that nothing will happen. Try closing the - Edit window first and - then the error window. - - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - GNOME KeyBoard was written by Szabolcs Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line). You can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was originally written by Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu) and Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). It has been rewritten - (strongly based on the original) by Emese Kovacs - (emese@gnome.hu) to reflect changes from v1.2 to v1.4. - The Technical Information - section has been added by - Alexander Kirillov (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu). - Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1f5cc97..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ - - - - GNOTES! Applet - - - GNOTES! applet, shown in , allows you to cover your - GNOME desktop with little, yellow, virtual sticky-notes. To - learn how to add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GNotes! - . - - - -
- GNOTES! - - GNOTES! - - - -
- - - Usage - - This applet places a yellow sticky-note on your desktop. To use it, - left-click on the GNOTES! icon to make a new - note appear on your desktop. After creating a new note, you may - then left-click within the yellow area of the note to begin - adding text to it. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu has - the following items: - - - - Properties… — opens - the - Properties dialog which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about APPLET - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - Raise Notes — causes all your - notes to appear above any overlapping windows. - - - - - - Lower Notes — causes all your - notes to be hidden below any overlapping windows. - - - - - Hide Notes — causes all your - notes to become hidden from view. It does not destroy your notes. - - - - - Show Notes — brings your - notes back into view if you used the - Hide Notes menu command. - - - - - - - Right-Clicking on the Left Border of Individual Notes - - You may also right-click on the left border of each of the notes on your - desktop to change their individual properties. - - - - - - Raise Note — This menu - item causes your note to appear above any overlapping windows. - - - - - - Lower Note — This - menu item causes your note to be placed below any overlapping - windows. - - - - - - Hide Note — This menu - item causes your note to become hidden from view. It does - not destroy your note. - - - - - - Destroy Note — This menu - item permanently removes your note from the desktop. Unlike - Hide Notes, you may not recover - your note. - - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure GNOTES! applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in - Figure 2. - - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - To change the default size at which your notes appear on the desktop, you - may either click on the up and - down arrows, or type values (in pixels) directly - into the fields next to the Default Height and - Default Width labels. - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Setting the Default Height or Default - Width may cause the GNOTES to crash. - - - - After first adding GNOTES! to your - Panel, clicking on the first note you create may - cause a second note to be created on your desktop. - - - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by spoon - spoon@ix.netcom.com and dres - dres@debian.org. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - The documentation for this applet - which you are reading now was written by - Michael Hall mphall@cstone.net. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gweather-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gweather-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 04967d9..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/gweather-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,580 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME Weather Applet - - - GNOME Weather applet, shown in , retrieves and displays various - weather information. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GNOME Weather - . - - -
- GNOME Weather Applet - - GNOME Weather Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - GNOME Weather displays the current - temperature and weather conditions in numeric and iconified form - inside the applet. For further information, double-click on the - applet. This will open up the Weather Information - Window, shown in . This displays the current weather - information and either a one-day or five-day forecast. - - -
- Weather Information Window - - Weather Information Window - - - -
- - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Update — - refreshes the weather information and display. - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about GNOME Weather - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize GNOME Weather - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties in the Basic tab are: - - - - - Update Interval — This option determines how often - GNOME Weather will connect - to the server(s) and retrieve weather information. Current - conditions, forecast and radar map (if enabled) will be - downloaded - - - Note About Server Updates - - Note that the Update Interval only - determines how often your computer downloads information from - the server(s). The update time shown in the - Current Conditions tab (viewed by - double-clicking on the applet) indicates when those - measurements were renewed on the server, rather than when - they were last retrieved. - - - - Disabling Automatic Updates and Using Manual Updates - - You can disable automatic updates by unchecking the - Update enabled box. On the other hand, you can - also force GNOME Weather to - perform an update by choosing the corresponding option in the - popup menu. These two options are very useful if you have an - intermitant internet connection, such as a laptop or modem - provides. - - - - - - - Update enabled — Select this if you would like - GNOME Weather to automatically - download the latest weather information at the time interval - specified by Update. Deselect this if - you would only like weather updates to be done manually, by - right-clicking on the applet and selecting - Update. - - - - - - Use metric — By default GNOME - Weather uses the imperial system of - units. Select this box to use metric units. The units used are shown in - . - - - - Measurement Units - - - - Quantity - Metric - Imperial - - - - - Temperature - deg Celsius - deg Farenheit - - - Windspeed - km/h - mph - - - Pressure - mmHg - inHg - - - Visibility - km - miles - - - -
- - - - - Detailed Forecast — Select this if you would like - GNOME Weather to retrieve the - full five day forecast for your particular area. Note that - these forecasts may not be - available for some locations. - - - The forecast retrieved when this - button is not selected is a brief - forecast for the broader area containing the selected location - (usually the entire state) and typically is a 5-day forecast. - - - Forecast Availability - - Note that the detailed forecasts downloaded from IWIN are - available only for US cities. - - - - - - - - - - - The properties in the Network tab should be - used if your computer is located behind a firewall. These - properties are: - - - - - Use proxy — Select this button if your computer is - behind a firewall and you must use an HTTP proxy to access the - Web. - - - - - - Proxy host — Enter your proxy host IP address here (if - you are using a HTTP proxy). - - - - - - Username — Enter your username here. - - - - - - Password — Enter your password here. (Note that this - password will be saved in a private configuration file but - will not be encrypted.) - - - - - - - - The Location tab allows you to specify the - geographic location that you would like GNOME - Weather applet to display the weather information - for. Click on any plus (+) symbol to expand the tree or any minus - (-) symbol to collapse a tree branch. Select the city or region - by clicking with the first mouse button. - - - - Locations are organized in a three-level hierarchy. The top - level contains broader geographical areas, the second contains - sub-regions of these areas and the last contains the particular - locations. This hierarchy is essentially based on the way - information is organized in the US NWS (National Weather - Service), and that is the reason that the US and Canada appear on - the topmost level. - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - Further Information - - GNOME Weather has a homepage at http://gweather.dhs.org/. - Here you can find the latest Locations file, - which is periodically updated with new cities, as sent in by - users. If your city is not included in the distribution, please - send an email to Spiros Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) with the necessary - information and it will be included in the next release. - - - - You may also want to visit the homepage if you are curious to see - what's new. - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Blocking Input/Output - - Even though GNOME Weather now uses - non-blocking I/O to retrieve data from the network, there are - still some steps that block execution. Most notably, - establishing a TCP connection to remote hosts is a blocking - operation. Because the NWS and IWIN web servers are often - heavily loaded, this step may take a significant amount of time. - While that happens, the application is unable to respond to CORBA - requests from the Panel. In its current - implementation, the Panel iterates through - all applications and sends frequent CORBA requests (eg. for - saving state). If an applet cannot respond for any reason, then - the Panel will block waiting for a - response. - - - - While the Panel is blocked, it will not - respond to any user (or application) requests. For instance, - Panel movement and - Panel menus (the ones that appear upon a - right click) will not work. However, other applets in the - Panel should work (unless they have made a - CORBA request to the Panel, eg. for - querying Panel size). As soon as the - blocking operation in GNOME Weather - completes, things should return to normal (and user interface - requests that were buffered will be executed). - - - - There is an experimental version of GNOME - Weather that uses a separate thread for HTTP - processing, which may be incorporated (temporarily) in the next - release. However, the final solution is - gnome-vfs which will be part of GNOME - 2.0 and will offer cross-platform support for fully asynchronous - I/O. - - - - - - - - - - - Frequently Asked Questions - - - This is a list of frequently asked questions about - GNOME Weather. For further information - and updates, please visit the GNOME Weather homepage. If - your question is still unresolved, you can email the author at - spapadim+gweather@cs.cmu.edu. - - - - Why does GNOME Weather freezes my Panel? - - This is due to the blocking nature of certain network operations - (see also ) and due to the way the - Panel currently works. - - - - - Why does location list appears empty? - - - This is probably because the Locations file - was not installed in the proper place. This is usually because - GNOME Weather and GNOME were not - configured in the same way. The file containing the locations - must be installed in the gweather - subdirectory, under the gnome data directory. You can find out - the latter with the gnome-config --datadir - command. - - - - If you have compiled gnome-applets yourself, make sure that you - have used configure --prefix=`gnome-config --prefix` - --sysconfdir=`gnome-config --sysconfdir`. Binary - RPMs assume a that the prefix and sysconfdir are - /usr and /etc, - respectively. If you have compiled GNOME yourself with different - options, you need to download and compile gnome-applets yourself. - - - - - Why does GNOME Weather display a question mark and dashes - for current conditions? - - - This will happen if GNOME Weather - cannot access the NWS server for any reason. This may be - because your network connection is down, or the NWS server is - down, or maybe the NWS server does not currently have any - information about your location. - - - - - Why does GNOME Weather say that a forecast is not - available? - - - If you have enabled detailed forecasts, then it is possible that - one may not be available for your location. In this case, try - disabling detailed forecasts. - - - - Another possible reason is that the IWIN server is down and - GNOME Weather cannot retrieve forecast - information. The problem should go away as soon as the IWIN - server is up again. - - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - GNOME Weather was written by Spiros - Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Spiros Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) and Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/jbc-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/jbc-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 136d9cc..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/jbc-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ - - Jon's Binary Clock Applet - - - Jon's Binary Clock applet, shown in , shows the time in an unusual form: binary - coded decimal. It has twenty-four LEDs which represent the hours, - minutes and seconds by illuminating the appropriate LED. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - JBC Binary Clock - . - - -
- Jon's Binary Clock Applet - - Jon's Binary Clock Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything special to this clock. It just - sits there and flashes lights at you. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Jon's Binary Clock - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Deciphering the Lights - - BCD stands for binary-coded decimal, a way of representing - normal denary (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) numbers as what programmers - call "a set of binary numbers in four bits, thus removing the - numbers A to F". If this doesn't make sense, just be aware - that this clock is an amusement for programmers, and serves - no really useful purpose. - - - It helps to read this clock upside-down! Start at the bottom and - read up to the top. - - - The right-hand pair of columns shows the two digits of the seconds: - the units on the right, the tens on the left. The centre pair of - columns shows the two digits of the minutes. The left hand pair of - columns shows the two digits of the hours. - - - You add up the values of the illuminated LEDs in each column. - You should get a number between zero to nine for each. That's - the time. - - - - - The bottom LED represents 1 when it is illuminated. - - - - - - The next LED represents 2 when it is illuminated. - - - - - - The next LED represents 4 when it is illuminated. - - - - - - The top LED represents 8 when it is illuminated. - - - - - - It is probably simplest to decipher the hours and minutes - first before trying to follow the seconds, which are always - changing. - - - - As an example, we can read the time in . Let's start with the hour. The first - column has only 1 LED on, in the second lowest position, so this - gives us 2 for the first digit of the hour. The - second column has no LEDs on, so we have a 0 for - the second digit of the hour. So the hour is 20, - or 8PM for people who like AM/PM notation. Looking at the - minutes, we have 0 for the first digit, and - 1 for the second digit since only the bottom LED - is lit. This gives us "20:01" so far. Lastly, we have the - seconds. For the first digit, we have the lowest two LED's - lit. These have value 1 (for the lowest) and 2 (second lowest) - for a total of 3. And the second column of the - seconds has the top LED lit, with a value of - 8. Thus, the time is 20:01:38, or - 8:01:38PM. - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - If you add it to a vertical panel, it is a nice size. If you then - move it to a horizonal panel, it changes size in the horizontal - panel. If you move it back to a vertical panel, it doesn't change - size back, and forces the panel to widen itself. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Jon's Binary Clock was written by Jon - Anhold (jon@snoopy.net. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug reports to the GNOME bug tracking - database. (Instructions for submitting bug reports can be - found on-line. If you are using GNOME 1.1 or later, - you can also use Bug Report Tool - (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all - comments and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/life-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/life-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 12dcf6a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/life-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ - - The Life Applet - - The GNOME panel life is an applet - which runs the game of life according to Conway's rules in a - small grid in your panel, with the organism and background colour - constantly changing. It is part of the gnome-applets package. - - - To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Game of Life - . - or you can issue this command at a command prompt: - life_applet --activate-goad-server=life_applet & - - -
- Life Applet - - Life Applet - - - -
- - - Usage - - Once it is present, you don't need to do anything to the life - applet. It will run happily on its own. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Randomize — - randomizes the game. This will stop it from - getting boring and repeating the same patterns. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about the Game of Life - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - Rules - - The Game of Life as described by Conway in 1970 has the following - rules: - - - - - Start with a grid (usually a plain square) of squares. Fill - a proportion of them with cells, randomly placed. This is generation - zero. - - - - - Any cell with two or three neighbours survives to the next - generation. - - - - - On any square with no cell and three neighbours, a new cell is - born. On any other square, no new cells are born. - - - - - Repeat generations. - - - - - - The game will eventually end in one of a number of ways: - - - - - - The death of all cells (theoretical, but uncommon in the life - applet). - - - - - A fixed equilibrium with all remaining cells surviving but - creating no new cells. - - - - - A dynamic equilibrium where the game cycles continually through - a particular sequence of patterns. - - - - - - For interest value, the current grid in the life applet is 78 by 78 - and the proportion of squares filled with cells is 50%. - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - None known. - - - - - Authors - - The Life Applet was written by George Lebl - (jirka@5z.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne (telsa@linuxchix.org) - and Eric Baudais (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 96450a7..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,305 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The load average applet - - - The loadavg_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you the current load - average. - - - - The load average of a machine is a rather arbitrary number which - represents how "busy" your machine is. It is calculated as an - average of (very roughly) how many processes there are which are - either running or are waiting for a wake-up call from the kernel. - It is very useful for comparing over time with different load - averages on your machine, but it is not very useful to compare - it with other machines. Normally, it is represented as a fraction. - -
- Load Average Applet - - Load Average Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, - the right-click pop-up menu has the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the loadavg_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - loadavg_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect any of this group of - applets, - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - loadavg_applet. This is useful for when - you only use loadavg_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- Load Average Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are four: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for the applet's display - clicking on the colour boxes. This invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - The titles are a little misleading. "Used" is the current load - average, and "free" is the background colour. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds. The default is 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - Maximum - - - This is the maximum number in the Y axis (the possible - maximum load average which the applet will show). The default - is 10. - - - - This option is only available from the Default - Properties menu option. It does not appear on - the dialogue box which is started by the - Properties menu option. - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can still cause - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bd9f554..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,345 +0,0 @@ - - The Mail Check Applet - - - The mailcheck applet is an applet which - sits in your panel and tells you when you have new email. To add - this applet to the panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Add applet - Network - Mailcheck - - - -
- Mail Check Applet - - Mail Check Applet - - - -
- - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything in particular to run this applet. - Providing it is looking in the right place for your email, it - will run itself quite happily. The following options, however, - are available: - - - - - - Clicking mouse button 1 does nothing - unless you have told it to start a program when you do this. You - do this with the properties box described below. - - - - - Holding down mouse button 2 allows - you to drag the applet around the panel (and between panels). - option. - - - - - Clicking mouse button 3 brings up - the typical applet menu which includes an - About box and a properties - - - - - - - Preferences - - The mailcheck properties dialogue box is - divided into two sections, one for what the mail check applet - does, and one for where it checks for email. - - -
- Properties dialog — Mail check tab - - Properties dialog - Mail check tab - - - -
- - - - Mail check options - - - The mail check options have six sections: - - - - - Execute...before each update - - - Sometimes you may want to run something such as - fetchmail before the applet - checks for new mail. To do this, check the checkbox and - fill in the program name in the space here. - - - - - - Execute...when new mail arrives - - - Sometimes you may want other programs to run when new mail - arrives. It is common to tell the machine to play a noise - at you, for example. Checking this checkbox and filling in - the command (such as mpg123 - sillynoise.mpg or - esdplay - sillynoise.wav) will - let this happen. - - - - - - Execute...when clicked - - - By putting a program name (generally a mail-reader such as - balsa or spruce - here and clicking on the checkbox, you can set things up so that - when you click button 1 on the - applet, that program will be automatically run. - - - - - - Check for mail every... - - - You can adjust the range for checking whether mail has arrived - between 1440 minutes (once a day) to never. Setting it to never - is silly and will confuse it. The default value is every two - minutes. - - - - - - Play a sound when new mail arrives - - - The sound played if you check this checkbox - is an alarm bell. It is contained in - $prefix/sound/events/mailcheck.soundlist; - if you want to change it to a different sound, alter that and - put the sound in $prefix/sounds/. - - - - - - Select animation - - - By clicking on the box with the animation name, - you can get a list of different pictures which have different - animations when new email arrives. - - - - - - - - -
- Properties dialog — Mailbox tab - - Properties dialog - Mailbox tab - - - -
- - - - Mailbox options - - - The mailbox options have four sections, some of which will be - greyed-out. - - - - By clicking on the box with the mailbox location, - you can tell the mailcheck applet where to look for your incoming - email. - - - - - When local mailspool or local maildir are selected as the location - for the mailbox, then you can fill in the details on which file - or directory the applet should check for new email. You can only - put one filename here. The section about mail servers will be - greyed out. - - - - - When remote POP3 or remote IMAP are selected as the location for - the mailbox, then you can fill in the details on the mail server, - username and password. If the you don't supply the password, the - applet will ask for it when it first tries to check for mail. - The section about local filenames will be greyed out. - - - - - - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - - - Setting something to be executed before each update can hang the - applet and the panel. - - - - - Sometimes the animation stops happening after prolonged use. - - - - - If you use a mail filter such as procmail, - which sorts email into different folders, the applet won't check them - all for new email. It will only look at one file. - - - - - - - - - Authors - - Mail Check was written by - Miguel de Icaza (miguel@gnu.org), - Jacob Berkman (jberkman@andrew.cmu.edu), - Jaka Mocnik (jaka.mocnik@kiss.uni-lj.si) and - Lennart Poettering (poettering@gmx.net). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments - online by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/memload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/memload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2a3bb0a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/memload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,329 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The memory load applet - - - The memload_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you how much memory is - being used. - - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - -
- MEM Load Applet - - MEM Load Applet - - - -
- - - The applet shows four different uses of memory: - - - - Free - - - Free memory is memory which is not being used by any program. - The default colour is green. - - - - - - Buffers - - - Buffers hold data which has not yet been written to the disk. - They also hold data which has been recently read from the disk, - keeping it around in case it is needed again. The default colour - is grey. - - - - - - Shared memory - - - Shared memory is memory which more than one program is using. - This is a very common thing to do on UNIX systems. Many GNOME - programs use a lot of shared memory, which cuts down on the - total memory used. The default colour is yellow. - - - - - - Other - - - Memory being used in other ways is shown in this category. The - default colour is a greenish-yellow. - - - - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu - has the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the memload_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - MEM Load Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - memload_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect any of this group of - applets - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - MEM Load Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - memload_applet. This is useful for when - you only use memload_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- MEM Load Properties Dialog - - MEM Load Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are three: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for the different categories of memory - the applet displays by clicking on the colour boxes. This - invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds. The default value is 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can still cause - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index cbedcce..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,402 +0,0 @@ - - Mini-Commander Applet - - - Mini-Commander applet, shown in , adds a command line to your - Panel. It features command completion, - command history, changeable macros and an optional built-in clock. - Because of the changeable macros you can use it for many different - tasks. You can simply start a program (or a short macro) or view a - web page or search for a man/info page - etc. Mini-Commander can be detached from - your Panel using an optional handler on the - side, which is especially usefull for people who use vertical - panels. - - - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Mini-Commander - . - - -
- Mini-Commander Applet - - Mini-Commander Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - - To start a program or run a command, simply enter the program or - command and press return. Or, to browse for an application or command - in your filesystem, click on the small circle - in the lower corner. - - - Mini-Commander has command - completion (similar to many other user shells). Thus, you often - have not to enter the full name but only the first few characters - followed by the tab - key. Mini-Commander will try to - complete the program name in the same way most UNIX shells do. - - - Mini-Commander also has command - history, which allows you to recall previous commands by pressing - the arrow-up or arrow-down - key. This works like the command history in most UNIX shells. Note - that commands are not stored in the history if it is already - present in the history in order to avoid duplication. You may - also access the history list by pressing the small down - arrow icon in the applet and selecting a command from - the history list. - - - Mini-Commander has the ability to use - macros. It has some predefined macros. For example if - you enter - term:command then - command is executed - in a terminal window. Or if you enter an URL then your web browser is - used to view it. Additionally you can define your own macros or - change the predefined ones. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Mini-commander - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Mini-Commander - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog: General Tab - - Properties dialog: General Tab - - - -
- - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Show time — If this button is checked, the time will be - shown in the lower corner of the applet. - - - - - - Show date — If this button is checked, the date will be - shown in the lower corner of the applet. - - - - - - Show handle — If this button is checked, a handle will - be attached to the edge of the applet, allowing you to detach - the applet from the Panel. You may - re-attach the applet on the Panel by - dragging it back into place. - - - - - - Show frame — If this button is checked, a thin black - frame will be drawn around the applet. - - - - - - Enable history based auto completion — If this button is - selected, Mini-Commander will - automatically complete commands using the history list. - - - - - - Applet width — Enter the desired applet width here. - - - - - - Applet height — Enter the desired applet height here. - - - - - - Command line height — (This feature is disabled.) - - - - - - Command line foreground — Select the foreground color, - used for the text you enter. - - - - - - Command line background — Selecting the background - color, used for the background behind the text in the entry. - - - - - - - - - - The Macros tab consists of a list of up to - 99 macros, each of which is a regular expression - (Regex) and a macro - (Macro). Enter the regular expression for - Mini-Commander to match in the left - column, and the corresponding macro which should be executed in - the right column. The default setting has many useful macros - already defined, which may be helpful in learning to write your - own macros. - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - - - - Frequently Asked Questions - - - Here are listed some frequently asked questions and the answers to - them. - - - - - - - Why am I not able to give - Mini-Commander keyboard focus? - - - - - This is a confusing problem which seems to have several reasons - and which occurs only under certain conditions. - - - - If you cannot give Mini-Commander - applet keyboard focus at all then this could be a problem with - you window manager. If this is true for you it would helpful - if you write me a short mail and tell me what window manager - you are using (name and version). - - - - Sometimes it happens that you can give keyboard focus to - Mini-Commander applet only for the - first time. After this it is impossible - to focus it again. Currently the reason for this bug is - unknown. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - In some instances, it is impossible to give - Mini-Commander focus after the first - time. - - - - - - - Further Information - - For more information on Mini-Commander - applet, check out its web page at - http://www.maruhn.com/mini-commander/. - - - - - - - Authors - - Mini-Commander was written by Oliver Maruhn - (oliver@maruhn.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Oliver Maruhn - (oliver@maruhn.com). Minor modifications and - updates were made by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mixer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mixer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f630387..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/mixer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ - - Mixer Applet - - - Mixer applet, shown in , provides a simple and - convenient interface for controlling the sound volume and launching - the Audio Mixer. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Multimedia - Mixer - . - - -
- Mixer Applet - - Mixer Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - To adjust the volume, slide the volume bar up (louder) or down - (quieter). To mute (or un-mute) the volume, press the speaker - icon at the bottom of the applet. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Run Audio Mixer… — starts - the Gmix Audio Mixer - application. The contents of this audio mixer will vary, - depending upon the capabilities of your sound card. - However, it typically allows you to control the volume - level of the different sound input devices, such as the CD - player, microphone, and line. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Mixer - applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - Note About Sound in GNOME - - For sound to work in GNOME, you must have sound enabled in the - Control Center. To configure sound, - click on the Main Menu button (the foot - icon) and select - - Programs - Setting - Multimedia - Sound - . Make sure both sound options are enabled in the - General tab. Feel free to configure and - test things in the Sound Events section. - Note that you may have to exit GNOME and restart for sound to - work properly after enabling it in the Control - Center for the first time. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Mixer applet was written by Michael Fulbright - (msf@redhat.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 462d71b..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,317 +0,0 @@ - - Modem Lights Applet - - Modem Lights Applet, shown in , monitors your modem while it is - working. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the panel - and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Network - Modem Lights - - - - -
- Modem Lights Applet - - Modem Lights Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - This applet can be used to tell if your modem is working, - and to track its behavior and performance. It can also be - configured to call a separate script or program to have your modem - connect and disconnect when you click on the button - with the single green light. - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - Properties— brings up - - Properties - dialog - - - - - - Help — brings up this - document. - - - - - - About — shows basic - information about the Modem Lights - Applet, including the applet's version and - author's name. - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Modem Lights Applet by - right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Modem Lights Settings dialog (shown in , which allows you to - change various settings. - -
- Preferences dialog - - Preferences dialog - - - -
- - The properties are: - - - - Show connect time and - throughput &mdash have Modem - Lights Applet's graphic display expand to include - two small text boxes showing the current data transfer rate (top) - and connect time (bottom). - - Connect command: and - Disconnect command: — To use - Modem Lights Applet to initiate a - connection, place the name of the startup command in the - Connect command text box, and the disconnect - command in the box beneath it labeled Disconnect - command. When you click on the single button on the - applet, it will connect or disconnect your modem. - - - Confirm connection — - Display a dialog box confirming your connection. - - - - - Updates per second — Set the update - rate of Modem Lights - Applet's display. - - - Show connect time and - throughput — add two text windows to the - applet showing the time you have been connected at the data - transfer rate. This is a good way to monitor your modem's - performance. - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - -
- Advanced preferences dialog - - Advanced preferences dialog - - - -
- Modem Lights Applet's - Advanced preferences window allows you to - control advanced features of the applet. - - - The properties are: - - - - Modem lock file: — - specifies the file created by the computer when the modem is - working, allowing other programs to know it is in - operation. /var/lock/LCK..modem, the default - setting, is the most common, if your computer uses a symbolic link - from /dev/modem to the actual modem - device. Check with your system administrator to see if a different - device name and therefore lock file is in use. Modem - Lights Applet needs this information to find and - monitor your modem. - - - - Verify owner of lock file - — verify that the lockfile really belongs to the - currently running PPP daemon and is not left over from an - older one. This is checked by default and shouldn't be changed. - - - - - - - Device — Device, typically - ppp0 on a Linux machine, is the name of the - network interface being used by the modem. If - ppp0 is not correct for your machine, check - your system documentation for the correct designation. - - Other possible network interface names commonly used include - ippp0 for Linux ISDN; - isp0 for NetBSD ISDN and - ipdptp0 for Solaris PPP. - - - - - - Use ISDN — If you use - an ISDN modem, check the Use ISDN - checkbox. Modem Lights Applet will then - ignore all the settings above related to standard modems. - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - After you made all the choices you want, click on - OK to make the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click on - Cancel button. - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - The Verify lock file check box on the - advanced preferences window should always be left true. It is - likely to be removed from future versions of Modem - Lights Applet. - - - - - - - - - Authors - - Modem Lights Applet was written by - John Ellis (johne@bellatlantic.net) and Martin - Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/netload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/netload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2d806f2..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/netload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,333 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The net load applet - - - The netload_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you about the load on -different network interfaces. - - - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - -
- Net Load Applet - - Net Load Applet - - - -
- - - It displays details for four different types of network interfaces: - - - - SLIP - - - SLIP is the serial line IP protocol. It is not commonly used - any more, being largely replaced by PPP, but it is one way of - connecting a computer to other machines which was popular for - modems. - - - - - - PPP - - - PPP is the Point to Point Protocol, for connecting one computer - to another. It has largely replaced SLIP. It is effective and - flexible but not as fast as ethernet. This is probably the most - common way people connect from home to the internet. - - - - - - ETH - - - Ethernet is another method for connecting machines together. - It requires an ethernet card in the computer and a piece of - ethernet cable connecting it to the other machine to talk to. - It's a lot faster than PPP. - - - - - - Other - - - Other forms of networking are available, such as ways to - talk over infra-red beams (IRDA), ways to talk over amateur - radio (AX25), and token-ring networks. Anything the applet - finds which is not SLIP, PPP or ethernet is monitored under - 'other'. - - - - - - - If you have two interfaces of the same type running (for example, - two ethernet interfaces talking to different machines), what is - displayed is the sum total of the two. The applet will not divide - it into two sections. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up - menu has the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the netload_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - Net Load Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - netload_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect all of this applet group - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - Net Load Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - netload_applet. This is useful for when - you only use netload_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- Net Load Properties Dialog - - Net Load Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are three: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for the different network interfaces - by clicking on the colour boxes. This invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds. The default is 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can still cause - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/odometer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/odometer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1f84c4c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/odometer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,308 +0,0 @@ - - Odometer Applet - - - The GNOME panel Odometer applet, shown in is an applet which tracks and measures the - movements of your mouse pointer across the desktop. It is part of the - gnome-applets package. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Odometer - . - - -
- Odometer Applet - - Odometer Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Once it is present, you don't need to do anything to the odometer. - It just sits quietly in your panel and keeps track of all your mouse movements. - In addition, moving the mouse pointer over the odometer produces - a tooltip telling you whether the distance - is expressed in metric units (centimeters, meters, kilometers) - of in feet (inches, feet, miles). - The upper value indicates your total trip distance, - and the lower value is the partial trip distance, that - can be resetted at will. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Reset — - This resets the odometer applet to zero again. - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about odometer - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize odometer - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - - - The properties dialog box (which calls - itself "Odometer setting" rather than properties) is divided into - two sections, one for general options, and one for themes. - - - - General - - -
- Properties dialog (general preferences tab) - - General preferences tab - - - -
- - - The general preferences tab, shown in , has four options: - - - - Use metric - - - If the use metric checkbox is checked, - mouse pointer distance travelled is shown in meters - (centimeters, meters, and kilometers) . If it - is not checked, the distance travelled is shown in feet - (inches, feet and miles). By - moving the pointer over the odometer you can produce a - tooltip which shows you whether it is - currently displaying meters or feet. - - - - - auto_reset - - - If the auto_reset checkbox is checked, - the odometer numbers return to zero each time it's - started or each time the session is started. This allows - you to display your daily mouse trip distance if you - used to restart you gnome session every morning. - - - - - enabled - - - If the enabled checkbox is checked, then - the odometer will keep counting how far you have moved your - pointer. If not, it will return the numbers to zero until you - re-enable it. - - - - - digits number - - - The digits number field determines how - many digits the odometer will display. The default is four, and - the range is from 1 to 10. - - - - - - - - - Theme - - -
- Properties dialog (theme preferences tab) - - Theme preferences tab - - - -
- - - The theme preferences tab, shown in , has a variety of - themes you can choose from. They are found by default in - $PREFIX/odometer/. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - The odometer applet was written by - Fabrice Bellet (Fabrice.Bellet@creatis.insa-lyon.fr), - and based on the Mouspedometa for KDE by - Armen Nakashian, which in turn was based on the - Motif-based Xodometer by Mark H. Granoff. - Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line.) If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Arjan Scherpenisse - (acscherp@wins.uva.nl). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/printer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/printer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f012b27..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/printer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,249 +0,0 @@ - - - Printer Applet - - - - Printer applet, shown in , - allows you to print files by dragging them onto the - applet from the desktop or file - manager. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Printer Applet - . - - - - -
- Printer Applet - - Printer Applet - - - -
- - - Usage - - - To print a file from your desktop or file - manager, drag the file onto the printer applet. - - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - Properties... — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see - ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about the Printer - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure printer applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in . - - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - - To change the label displayed at the bottom of the - printer applet, ("Print" in ) type a new name in the Printer - name field. This setting is useful if you have more than one - printer available for use and wish to add a - printer applet to the - Panel for each printer. The Printer - name does not determine which printer your file will be printed - to, it exists as an easy means to to distinguish between printers should you - have more than one printer applet installed on - your Panel. - - - - - - To change the command the printer applet uses to - print your files, you may enter a new command in the Print - command field. By default, the printer - applet uses the command lpr, which is - common to many systems. Your system may use a different command. If you're - unsure, check your system's documentation. - - - Note for advanced users - - If you have more than one printer, you may designate which printer to send - files to by changing the Print command setting. For - instance, if your system uses the command lpr to print - files and you need to print your file on the printer named "ljet5", you - would change the Print command setting to lpr - -Pljet5. - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - There are no known bugs in the - printer applet. - - - - - - - Authors - - Printer Applet was written by - Miguel de Icaza (miguel@kernel.org) - and Federico Mena (quartic@gimp.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. You also can use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Michael Hall - (mphall@cstone.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments - online by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0535306..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ - - QuickLaunch Applet - - - QuickLaunch is an applet - which holds application launchers. It shrinks the launcher icons - to their smallest size to save room on your panel. The example - QuickLaunch Applet shown in contains eight GNOME - application launchers in a standard-sized Panel. - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - QuickLaunch - . - - -
- QuickLaunch Applet - - QuickLaunch Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - To add a launcher to the QuickLaunch - applet, just drag it from its current position (either on a - Panel or in the Main - Menu) onto the QuickLaunch - applet using the left mouse button. - To remove a launcher from the - QuickLaunch applet, just right-click on - the launcher and select Delete launcher. To - configure the properties of a launcher which is in your - QuickLaunch applet, right-click on the - launcher and select Launcher - Properties…. - - - The vertical bar at the left edge of the applet is used for - easily moving the applet in your Panel. - Grab the applet by depressing the left or center mouse button and - then move the applet, releasing the mouse button when finished. - This vertical bar is also used to access the applet menu items by - right-clicking on this bar. - - - - Right-clicking on the vertical bar on the left side of the applet - brings up a menu containing the following items: - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about APPLET - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - It is not possible to re-arrange launchers inside the - QuickLaunch applet. It is also not - possible to have multiple QuickLaunch - applets with different contents. - - - - - - - - Authors - - QuickLaunch applet was written by Fabio - Gomes de Souza (fabiofb@altavista.net). Please - send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6bedb76..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,714 +0,0 @@ - - ScreenShooter Applet - - - Screen-Shooter is a handy little - screengrabber which is simple to use. It sits in your panel - and you can click on it to take a screenshot of either the - whole desktop or just a single window. - - - - To add the applet to your panel, you can - right-click on an empty part of the panel - and follow the sequence - - Applets - Utility - ScreenShooter - . - - - - Usage - - - - To take a picture of the entire desktop, - left-click on the image of a monitor. This - button is the lower of the two on a normally-sized horizontal - panel and the right-hand button on a - narrow horizontal panel or a vertical - panel. - - - - - To take a picture of just one window, - left-click on the image of a window. - This button is the top one on a normally-sized horizontal - panel and the left-hand one on a narrow - horizontal panel or a vertical - panel. The button will stay pressed in - and the cursor will change to a cross. Move the cursor to the - window you want a picture of, and click in that window to select - it. - - - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu - containing the usual options for an applet, including a - Properties option - described below. - - - - - Settings - - Screen-Shooter can be configured to do - a number of different things. To configure - Screen-Shooter, click on the applet - with mouse button 3 (usually, right mouse button) and select - Properties from the - popup menu. The - Preferences dialogue has seven sections - described below. Five of these are visible initially: two more - sections are available from a toggle in the first section. - - - - - General Preferences - - - - - Capture WM decorations when grabbing a window - - - - The capture decorations checkbox controls - whether or not the titlebar and edges of a - window are included. It is only relevant - when Screen-Shooter is taking a - picture of a single window rather than of - the whole screen or of a rectangle you have selected. The default is - for this to be checked and for the titlebar - and window borders to be included in the shot. - - - - - - Give audio feedback using the keyboard bell - - - - The audio feedback checkbox controls - whether or not Screen-Shooter will - beep when it actually takes the shot. The default is to beep. - - - - - - Display spurious options - - - The spurious options checkbox controls whether - some of Screen-Shooter's more esoteric - options are available. The default is off (i.e., they are not - available). Checking this option makes two sections called - Spurious 1 and - Spurious 2 visible - in the preferences dialogue. - - - - - - Delay before taking shot - - - When taking shots of the desktop, you can - set a delay between clicking on the - Screen-Shooter and the shot being taken. - The delay can be up to one minute. This can be very useful when you - want to focus on a particular window or if - you want to bring up a menu. - - - - - - Compression quality - - - Compression quality does not refer to how tightly a file is - compressed, but to how well it retains detail after - compression. The higher the compression quality, the better - the quality of the image, but the larger the size of the resulting - file. It is relevant when you are saving something as a JPEG, - a MIFF or a PNG file. The default compression quality is 75%. - - - - - - Create monochrome image - - - A fairly self-explanatory option: if this is selected, - the resulting image will be in monochrome. This is off by default. - - - - - - Invert colours in image - - - Another self-explanatory option: if this is selected, the colours - of the image are reversed so that white becomes black, pale purple - becomes greenish, and so on. Lovely -- but rarely useful! Off by - default. - - - - - - - - Files, Apps - - - - Directory to save file in - - - The directory to save the shot in must exist already: - Screen-Shooter will not create - it for you. If you try to save it to somewhere that does - not exist, then no screenshot will be taken. The default - directory is ~/: your home directory. - - - - - - Filename for images - - - Screen-Shooter is designed to allow the - user maximum flexibility in naming each shot. The filename field - (as well as the directory field) is passed to a shell for normal - shell expansion before being used. This allows you to use the - output of programs, scripts or environment variables to name your - shots. The reason for this is to allow unique filenames. - By default, Screen-Shooter will create a name which is based on - the time and date it was taken: this of course should always be - unique. The default filename is - `date +%Y_%m_%d_%H%M%S`_shot.jpg. - As you can see, the filename includes the output of the date - command in order to generate a datestamp. - So it makes up a name based on the date, using the format the - percentage symbols and letters tell it. Then it adds the rest - of the name from outside the backticks to the date it has used. - Explanations of the cryptic percentage symbols can be found - in man date, but the arguments in the - default filename are: - - - - %H - The hour of the day (from 00 to 23) - - - %M - The minute of the hour (from 00 to 59) - - - %S - The second of the minute (from 00 to 60) - - - %d - The day of the month (from 01 to 31) - - - %m - The month of the year (from 01 to 12) - - - %y - The final two digits of the year - - - - - Other examples of filenames you might use are: - - - - screenshot-`date +%Y%m%d-%H%M%S`.jpg - - - pic-`date +%H%M%S`.png - - - myshot.jpg - - - `my_own_script_to_create_a_filename`.jpg - - - - - The filename suffix determines the filetype. Screen-Shooter - supports what can only be described as a ridiculous number of - different image formats. Try your luck. For a full list, type - man convert. You can even try .html to create a - client-side image map, and wild things like that. - - - - If your filename suffix is not something Screen-Shooter - recognises, or you omit one, it will save the shot as a - MIFF file. Use the convert utility to change the - format later. - - - - - - View screenshot after saving - - - The view screenshot checkbox is unchecked by - default. After checking it, you will get a view of the shot once it - has been taken. You need to specify a viewer for this: the default - is ee, which launches the - Electric Eyes image viewing program. - - - - - - - - - Thumbnails - - - - Create thumbnail of image too - - - None of the other options on this page will have any effect - if create thumbnail is not checked. - By default, it is off. - - - - - - Thumbnail size - - - This is the percentage of the original's size that the thumbnail - will be. The default is 25%. - - - - - - Thumbnail compression - - - This is the quality of compression to use. As with the general - preferences, the better the quality of the compression, the more - detail will be preserved, and the bigger the thumbnail will be. - The default for a thumbnail is 50%. - - - - - - Prefix to attach to filename - - - This is the prefix to attach to the thumbnail filename to distinguish - it from the full-sized shot. If you leave this blank, the - thumbnail will overwrite the full-sized shot and you will lose - the full-sized one. The default prefix is "thumb-". - - - - - - Use high-quality intermediate for - generating thumbnail - - - - The high-quality intermediate checkbox is off - by default. It generates a MIFF image whilst making the thumbnail. A - 'lossy' file format refers to a file format where data and detail is - irretrievably lost, but which is typically much smaller than a - non-lossy format image of the same thing. The typical example of a - lossy file format is JPEG. - - - - - - - - Post-Processing - - - These options munch processing power compared - with the options in previous sections. They work by producing an - intermediate image of the screenshot, and then performing actions - upon it. Once any of these options are enabled, the shot will take - longer to complete, due to the extra processing involved. - - - - - - Normalize image - - - The normalize image checkbox transforms the - image to span the full range of colour values. - Default is off. - - - - - - Equalize image - - - The equalize image checkbox enables - histogram-based image equalization, which is a process which - compensates for low contrast in an image and brings out more - detail. Default is off. - - - - - - Enhance image - - - The enhance image checkbox tells - Screen-Shooter to clean up - the image as best it can, and try to remove any noise. - Default is off. - - - - - - Despeckle image - - - The despeckle image checkbox reduces - spotting by removing single pixels which are very different in - colour from their surroundings. The default is off. - - - - - - Sharpen image by factor - - - Sharpening the image sharpens the image. The default is a factor - of zero, but it can be raised to 100%. - - - - - - Rotate image clockwise - - - This is how many degrees clockwise to rotate the image. The - default is 0: unrotated. - - - - - - Adjust gamma - - - The gamma checkbox enables you to adjust the - gamma. The gamma value is a value to do with the intensity - of the lightness of an image (and rather complicated). The - range Screen-Shooter provides is - from 0.8 to 2.3 with a default of 1.6. This is not a linear - (straight) scale so you will need to experiment. Lowering the - gamma produces a darker image. Raising it produces a lighter one. - - - - - - - - Frills - - - Create frame around image - - - The create frame checkbox is off by default. - Checking it produces a frame around the shot taken. This frame is - always grey, but Tom - Gilbert notes, if anybody requests it, I'll add - options for setting its colour. - - - - - - Frame width - - - This determines the size of the frame in pixels. The range - is from one pixel to fifty. The default frame is six pixels. - - - - - - Flip image vertically - - - This gives a vertical mirror image of the shot. It can be combined - with the following option. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Flip image horizontally - - - This gives a horizontal mirror image of the shot. It can be combined - with the preceding option. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Emboss image - - - Embossing an image produces an image drained of most colour and - drawn in relief. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Send image and thumbnail to... - - - By placing a script or program name in the box and checking the - send to checkbox, you can invoke that script - or program to be automatically run on the image and thumbnail. - This could be used to print the image out automatically, - to invoke a script to catalogue the files, or to add the - pictures to a website automatically. A sample script for the - latter is available with Screen-Shooter. - - - - - - - - Spurious options: part 1 - - - Tom Gilbert says, These options are all just plain silly. But - they're fun. So I included them. They also munch processing - power in the same manner as the post-processing options above. - - - - - To make use of any of the options listed in this section and the - next section, you need to have selected Display spurious - options in the General Preferences - section. They will not be available otherwise. - - - - - - Blur image - - - The blur image checkbox is off by default and - the blur factor is set to zero. By checking the checkbox and altering - the blur factor you can blur the image. Even at the highest - rating (100), a typical font on a typical terminal window is - still just about decipherable. - - - - - - Create charcoal effect - - - The charcoal checkbox is off by default and - the charcoal factor is set to zero. Charcoaling produces a - monochrome image with a slight smudginess which increases - with the charcoal factor. It does not deal with highlighted - text very well, though. The maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - Find edges - - - The find edges checkbox is off by default and - the factor is set to zero. Using it produces a monochrome image - where, rather than highlighting areas of different colours, it - highlights the edges and borders between areas of different - colour. Very interesting on maps and astronomical photos. The - maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - Implode image - - - The implode image checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. Using it warps the resulting - screenshot as if a weight had been pressed into the centre of the - shot. The maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - - - Spurious options: part 2 - - - - Create painted effect - - - The painted effect checkbox is off by default - and the radius to paint around each pixel is set to zero. Checking - it with a radius of about 5 produces an effect like an Impressionist - painting. Checking it with a radius of about 50 will eat your - CPU cycles like mad for ten minutes on a reasonably powerful - machine. The maximum radius is 100, but you will need either - a large machine or a lot of patience for that. - - - - - - Solarise image - - - The solarise checkbox is off by default and - the factor is set to zero. Solarising is an effect first noticed - in developing photographs from negatives. It results in a - negative image with different colouring from that of the - "inverted colours" option in the general preferences. A - solarise factor of 5 will produce startling results, but the - maximum factor is 100. - - - - - - Spread image pixels - - - The spread image checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. The result of spreading the image - pixels by a radius of about 5 is similar to looking through - lightly frosted glass; for heavily-frosted glass, try 25. - The maximum is 100. - - - - - - Swirl pixels - - - The swirl pixels checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. Swirling the pixels results in a - distorted image similar to an imploded image except that it - swirls around the central point rather than stretching to - it. A radius of 20 produces an effect like a fairground distorting - mirror, only not a mirror-image; 90 a much increased version - (although text is still legible); at 180 the entire image is - warped; and at the maximum of 360 a spiral effect is created. - - - - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - - - - Often screenshots saved in PNG format show incorrectly in - Netscape or the GNOME Help - Browser. This is due to bugs in Netscape and - and GNOME image libraries, not to bugs in - Screen-Shooter. You can view such - screenshots in a different image-viewing program; or you can try - changing image compression level in the Preferences dialogue box, - which sometimes helps. - - - - - - - Authors - - The Screen-Shooter applet was - written by Tom Gilbert - (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). - Please report bugs in the Screen-Shooter applet to the - GNOME bug - tracking system. You can do this by following the - guidelines on that site or by using - bug-buddy - from the command-line. For the package, put gnome-applets. - - - This manual was written by - Telsa Gwynne (telsa@linuxchix.org) and - Tom Gilbert (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). - Please send all comments and suggestions regarding this manual to - the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 202a4b1..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,505 +0,0 @@ - - Sound Monitor Applet - - - Sound Monitor applet, shown in its - default theme (appearance) in , is a sound volume display and an - interface for controlling ESD (the Enlightened Sound Daemon) -- - GNOME component responsible for sound output. To add this applet to - a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Multimedia - Sound Monitor - . - - -
- Sound Monitor Applet - - Sound Monitor Applet - - - -
- - - - Sound in GNOME - - GNOME uses a special program, called ESD (the Enlightened Sound - Daemon), as an intermediary between applications and sound - card. ESD allows mixing sound from several applications, so that - you can play a game and hear the sound effects while listening - to an aduio CD. To hear any sound from GNOME applications, ESD - must be running. Normally GNOME is configured so that ESD is - started every time you login; if for some reason this is not so, - click on the Main Menu button (the foot - icon) and select - - Programs - Setting - Multimedia - Sound - - and make sure that the option Enable sound server - startup is enabled, so that the next time you login, - ESD will be started. You can also start or stop ESD - using the Sound Monitor applet as - described below. - - - Non-GNOME applications usually are not aware of ESD and need - full control of the audio card --- they can not share audio card - with other applications. This means with such applications, you - can either have sound from GNOME or sound from non-GNOME - application, but not both. In many cases, this means that you - have to temporarily stop ESD to get sound from non-GNOME - applications (otherwise, you get error messages like - Device /dev/dsp busy). - - - - - - - Usage - - Sound Monitor always displays the - volume of sound being produced on your system graphically. - You may control sound by turning ESD on or off by right-clicking - on the applet and selecting Place Esound in - standby or Resume Esound - respectively, as described below. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Manager… — brings - up the - Sound Monitor Manager dialog, - which allows you to view and control current ESD settings. - - - - - - Place Esound in - standby/Resume - Esound/Start - Esound — At any time, you will only - have one of these three items, depending on whether ESD is - running and what its status is. The first two menu items - allow you to - temporarily place ESD in standby and then resume ESD. - This is useful if you have a sound application which is - unable to work with ESD, but needs direct access to the - sound device. The third allows you to start - Esound if it is not started. - - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Sound - Monitor, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Sound Monitor - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Peak indicator — This controls the behavior of the peak - indicator (the bright line which tracks the peak volume), - either turning it off (off), having it - follow the peak as if it is floating on top - (active), or having it follow the peak - smoothing out short spikes and drops - (smooth). - - - - - - Peak indicator falloff speed — This controls the speed - the peak indicator falls back to zero volume (for active mode) - or moves toward the current volume (for smooth mode). - - - - - Scope (scale 1:X, where X=?) — This controls the - horizontal (time) axis scale for Sound - Monitor "scope-like" themes, i.e., themes that - show a graph of sound level, with time along the horizontal - axis. (Since - the default theme is not a scope, this control does not do - anything until you have modified the theme, as described - below.) A value of 1 corresponds to time scale of 44 100 - pixels/second; value of X gives 44 100/X pixels/second. (These - numbers appear because the standard for CD-quality audio - stipulates that there should be 44 100 sound samplings per second.) - - - - - - Connect points in scope — This determines whether the - sampled volume points are connected. (For scope themes only.) - - - - - - Screen refresh (frames per second) — This controls the - number of times the Sound Monitor - display is updated each second. - - - - - - - The properties in the Theme tab are: - - - - - Theme file (directory) — This is the theme for you - Sound Monitor, which determines the - overall appearance of the applet. You can either select a - theme from the list Themes:, or else type - in the directory and name of another theme if available. Some - of the standard themes are shown in . - -
- Example Sound Monitor Themes - - Example Sound Monitor Themes - - - -
- - - - - - - - - The properties in the Advanced tab are: - - - - - ESD host to monitor — This option allows you to listen - to sound being played by ESD on another computer. To do so, - enter the network address (or IP address) of a computer to - monitor in the format host:port. - The host specified must be running ESD and have their esound - daemon "unlocked" to allow other machines to connect. Note - that the default port for ESD is 5001. Leave - this entry blank to monitor sound on the local machine. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - The Sound Monitor Manager - - To start the Sound Monitor Manager, - right-click on the applet and choose - Manager…. This will open the - Sound Monitor - Manager dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - view and modify various ESD settings. - -
- Properties dialog - - Sound Monitor Manager dialog - - - -
- - - The Server tab displays the following information: - - - - - Server information — This is a brief description of the - esound server daemon's current status, including the sound - output rate to the sound card, the number of currently playing - sounds (connected streams), and the number of sound samples - cached in the server. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Streams tab are: - - - - - Connected Streams — This displays a list of basic - information for the current sound streams playing through the - sound server. The user can adjust the volume and balance of a - stream by first selecting the stream's line, then adjusting - the volume and balance sliders. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Samples tab are: - - - - - Cached Samples — This displays a list of basic - information for the current sounds cached in the sound - server. The user can adjust the volume and balance of a cached - sound by first selecting the sound's line, then adjusting the - volume and balance sliders. To toggle between displaying the - sound's length as bytes or time (format MM:SS.S) click on the - length or time column heading. - - - - - - - After you made all the choices you want, click on - OK to make the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - The Esound Persistent Volume Daemon (ESDPVD) - - The Sound Monitor applet comes with a - companion program called the Esound Persistent Volume - Daemon - (ESDPVD), which can run in the background and remembers the volume - and balance of each stream that connects to the sound server. The - main purpose of ESDPVD is to be used in - conjunction with the Sound Monitor - applet's Manager dialog - to retain volume levels for individual streams that - connect to the ESD sound server. - - - As an example, suppose you are running the - GTCD CD Player and you - lower its volume using the Manager window. Normally - the volume setting will be lost when the program (in this case - GTCD) is exited and - restarted. However, if esdpvd is - running and you start GTCD again, the - volume will be restored to its previous (in this case, - lower) value from before. - - - If you configure GNOME to start ESDPVD - each time GNOME is started (using the - control-center's Startup - Programs section), ESDPVD - will remember sound volume and balance customizations between - GNOME sessions. - - - ESDPVD also remembers volume and - balance adjustments to cached samples (often used for interface - sound events such as button clicks, menus, etc.). - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet only shows the sound volume for sound produced by - GNOME applications (to be precise, sounds passing through ESD); it - will not show sound volume for applications that directly connect - to audio card. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Sound Monitor was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. You can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu) and John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/swapload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/swapload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2ea2f70..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/swapload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,289 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The swap load applet - - - The swapload_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you how much swap space is - being used. - - - - The swap space is a part of the hard drive which is not - part of the filesystem. When the kernel decides a program in - memory is not being used a lot but might be required soon, - it takes parts of the program out of memory and puts those into the - swap space, where it can easily retrieve it. Moving data between - memory and swap can be slow, so if you are using a lot of your - swap space, you may find the machine's reaction slows. - - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - -
- Swap Load Applet - - Swap Load Applet - - - -
- - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu has - the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the swapload_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - Swap Load Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - swapload_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect all of this group - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - Swap Load Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - swapload_applet. This is useful for when - you only use swapload_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- Swap Load Properties Dialog - - Swap Load Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are three: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for used and free swap space - that are displayed by clicking on the colour boxes. This - invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds, and the default is 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can still cause - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index e2e08b0..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,482 +0,0 @@ - - - - Tasklist Applet - - - Tasklist applet, shown in , displays a table showing windowed - applications running on your computer. Depending on the options - chosen, you can display either those on the desktop currently in - use, or on all virtual desktops. To add this applet to a - Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Applets - Utility - Tasklist - . - - - -
- Tasklist - - Tasklist - - - -
- - - Usage - Tasklist allows you to quickly - navigate the applications running on your computer, displaying - icons and application names for each application that meets the - criteria you've set in the properties window. Clicking - on an icon or application name gives focus to that application, - bringing it to the foreground so it accepts your keyboard input. - - Right-clicking with the mouse on an application's icon or - text in the applet brings up the following menu: - -
- Tasklist Right-Click Options - - Tasklist Right-Click Options - - - -
- - - - Iconify — reduce the - selected application to a panel icon. When an application - already has been iconified, the menu item changes to - Restore. Clicking on it restores the - application to your desktop. - - - - Shade — minimize the - application to a single window bar. When an application - has been Shaded, the menu item changes to - Unshade. Clicking on - Unshade restores the application to - full size. - - - - Stick — make application - "sticky", which means it remains in your field of view when - you change virtual desktops, following you as you go. When - an application is sticky, the menu option - Unstick is displayed, allowing you to - leave an application behind as you continue your virtual - desktop travels. - - - - Kill — kills the - application. The properties - dialog allows you to - have Tasklist prompt you for - confirmation before causing an application's untimely death. - - - - - - - - Task Grouping - Tasklist can group icons together when - multiple instances of a program are running. A number in parentheses - appears to next to the application. Clicking on the icon brings up a menu - listing all of the running instances. - - Clicking on an item in the list brings that window to the foreground - and gives it focus. - By default, Tasklist groups four or more - applications. You can change this in the properties window. - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items (see ), the - right-click pop-up menu has - Properties... item — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure Tasklist applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in . - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- The Properties dialog allows to you - control which tasks are displayed: - - - - Show normal applications — - display, in the applet, all applications on the current - desktop that have not been minimized. - - - Show iconified (minimized) applications - — show all applications on the current - desktop that have been minimized - - - Show normal applications on all - desktops — show all full-sized, - non-minimized applications on all desktops. For this to - work, you must also have checked the Show normal - applications checkbox above. - - - Show iconified (minimized) applications on - all desktops — show all applications that - have been minimized on all desktops. For this to work, you - must also have checked Show iconified (minimized) - applications above. - - - - - - - - Show mini icons — Some - applications support a miniature icon. This option displays - it on the Tasklist panel. - - - Confirm before killing windows - — have the applet prompt you before you're permitted - to kill an - application. - - - Move iconified tasks to current workspace - when restoring — automatically switches - the desktop work area on your screen to the one containing - the application you click on in the - Tasklist panel. - - - Enable task grouping — Turns on - Tasklist's grouping feature and controls the number of instances of an application that must be running before they are grouped. - - - - - - -
- Properties Dialog - Size - - Properties Dialog - Size - - - -
- - The size properties dialog controls - how much space Tasklist takes up on - your panel: - - - Follow panel size - — have Tasklist size - determined automatically based on panel size. This overrides - other size options. - - - Tasklist width (height) - — width (or height in vertical panel) of - Tasklist in pixels. - - - Rows of tasks - — determines how many rows of task icons - Tasklist displays. - - - Default task size - — set the default size for display of a task - item. (This only has effect if Tasklist width is - dynamic is checked below.) - - - Tasklist width (height) is fixed - (dynamic) — Have the size of the tasklist - fixed or established by the applet dynamically. Setting it - to "fixed" means that the applet will always take the amount - of space set in "tasklist width", even if there are no - tasks. Setting it to dynamic means that - the applet will take as much space as needed to show all tasks (zero if - there are no tasks), but not more than the value set in - Tasklist width. - - - Only use empty space — If width or - height is set to be dynamic, this option forces - Tasklist to use only the available space - on your screen, preventing it from pushing other applets out - of the way and off of your screen. - - - - - - - - - - Basic Properties Options - All Properties dialogs have the following - buttons at the bottom of the dialog: - - - - OK — - Pressing OK will activate any changes - in the properties you have made and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - Apply — - Pressing Apply at any time will - make your changes active without closing the - Properties dialog. This is helpful if - you would like to test the effects of the changes you have - made but may want to continue changing the properties. - - - - - Close — - Pressing Close will close the - Properties dialog. Only changes in the - configuration which were previously applied with the - Apply button will persist. Other - changes will be discarded. - - - - - Help — - Pressing Help brings up the manual for - the application, opening it to the page describing the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Pop-Up Items - - All applets should have the following items in their right-click - pop-up menu: - - - Remove from panel - - - The Remove from panel menu item - removes the applet from the Panel. - - - - - - Move - - - After selecting Move, your mouse - pointer will change appearance (typically to a cross with - arrows in each direction). As you move your mouse, the applet - will move with it. When you have finished moving the applet, - click any mouse button and the applet will anchor in its - current position. Note that applets can be moved between two - Panels this way. - - - - - - Panel - - - The Panel submenu contains various - items and submenus for adding and removing - Panels and applets and for changing - the configuration. - - - - - - About - - - The About... menu item brings up a - dialogue box containing various information about the applet, - typically including the applet's name, version, author, - copyright, license and description. - - - - - - Help - - - The Help menu item brings up the help - manual for the applet. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - There are no known bugs in the - Tasklist applet. - - - - - - - Authors - - The Tasklist applet was written by Anders Carlsson - (andersca@gnu.org). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 4576897..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,504 +0,0 @@ - - Tick-a-Stat Applet - - - Tick-a-Stat applet, shown in , watches various aspects of your - system and delivers information when certain events occur. For - example, it can watch the CPU load and warn you when the CPU is - being overloaded with concurrent processes. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Tick-a-Stat - . - - -
- Tick-a-Stat Applet - - Tick-a-Stat Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - After you have configured Tick-a-Stat, - it will run continuously and does not require any input. - General configuration of Tick-a-Stat is - explained in . There are several - modules which can be used. Their function and configuration is - described in . - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Event Log… — - opens the - Event Log dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Tick-a-Stat - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Tick-a-Stat - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The Modules tab lists the various modules - you can enable. Select a module from Module - list on the left to configure it in the pane on the right. Each - module and its configurable properties are described in . - - - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - Enable logging of events — If this button is - checked, a log of each event detected by an enabled module - will be written to the file named in the Log - path entry. - - - - - - Log Path — This is name of the file which will be used - to store the event log. - - - - - - - The properties in the Display tab are: - - - - - Smooth scroll — Selecting this button causes old events - to slowly scroll upwards when new events occur, instead of - quickly moving up to make room. - - - - - - Smooth type — Selecting this button causes new text to - be slowly typed across the applet as if somebody is typing it, - instead of appearing very quickly. - - - - - - Delay when wrapping text — This is the time delay (in - tenths of a second) that it pauses when it wraps a message - around the right edge of the applet (ie. for a carriage return). - - - - - - Scroll speed between lines (Smooth scroll) — This is the - speed at which lines are scrolled upwards. - - - - - - Width — This is the width(in pixels) of the applet. - - - - - - Use all room on panel — Selecting this button expands - the applet along the Panel to fill all - space (up to any neighboring Panel objects if they exist.) - - - - - - Height — This is the height(in pixels) of the applet. - - - - - - Use panel size hint — Selecting this button causes the - applet to try to size itself to fit the - Panel height. - - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - Modules - - Tick-a-Stat has several modules. - Each module watches a certain part of your system and responds - to different evens. Multiple modules can be run enabled at once. - The standard Tick-a-Stat modules are - described below. - - - - Test Module - - The Test module is a simple module that just prints - Testing line from test module :) in the applet - every few seconds. - - - - - Core Dump Catcher Module - - The Dump Monitor module monitors a certain path for core dumps. - If it finds one, it time stamps it and logs the backtrace. It also - displays a core dump logo and message in the main applet, as - shown in and optionally - will open a dialog displaying the backtrace. - -
- Tick-a-Stat Showing a Core Dump - - Tick-a-Stat Showing a Core Dump - - - -
- - - The Core Dump module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Show backtrace dialog on new core files — Selecting this - button will cause Tick-a-Stat to - open a dialog showing the backtrace each time a new core dump - is found. - - - - - - Path to monitor — Enter the name of the directory you - would like the Core Dump module to monitor for core dumps. - - - - - - - - Load Average Monitor Module - - The Load Average Monitor module monitors the systems CPU usage - and warns you when the number of processes(programs) sharing the - CPU is too high. (This will cause poor performance of each - process and can be indicative of an errant program or daemon.) - When the CPU load is high it will display a warning, as shown in - . For even higher - loads, an alert is displayed. - -
- Tick-a-Stat Showing a Load Warning - - Tick-a-Stat Showing a Load Warning - - - -
- - - The Load Average Monitor module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Check every (Seconds) — Set this to the interval (in - seconds) between checking the load. - - - - - - Show pop-up dialog for this event — Select this button - to have a pop-up dialog open each time a warning (or alert) - is issued. (This option occurs in both the Warning and Alert - sections.) - - - - - - Load average threshold — Set this to the load (the - average number of running programs which request use of the - CPU at any instant in time). (This option occurs in both the - Warning and Alert sections.) - - - - - - Text to display — Enter the message which should be - displayed when the load reaches the threshold level. - - - - - - - - - File Tailer Module - - The File Tailer module shows any lines which are added to the - end of a given file. This is typically used to monitor the - output log files created by many programs. - - - - - The File Tailerr module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Path to tail — Set this to the name of the file you - wish to tail. (The term "tail" refers to watching the tail, - or end, of a file. In a shell, one can do this using the - tail command, typically with the "-f" - flag.) - - - - - - Show pop-up dialog for new line — Select this - to have a pop-up dialog showing the new line open each time a - new line is added to the file. - - - - - - - - - - - - - The Event Log - - The event log is used to keep track of any events which register - in Tick-a-Stat. The file used for the - event log and whether event logging is enabled are specified in - the General tab of the Properties - dialog. To view the event log, right click on the applet and - select Event log…. - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Tick-a-Stat Applet was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ce11a1c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ - - - - - WebControl Applet - - WebControl Applet, shown in , allows you to launch your - Netscape browser with the URL you - indicate in the URL text box. To add this applet - to a Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Network - WebControl - - - - -
- WebControl Applet - - WebControl Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - To use this applet, type the URL of the document you wish - to view in the text box. For an Internet URL, you must type in - http:// followed by the web address, for - example, http://www.gnome.org. For a local - file, simply type the file's name. - - - If you would like to launch a new browser window instead of - using the currently active one, check the Launch new - window check box. - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties— opens the - - Properties - dialog - - - - - Help — displays this - document. - - - - - About — shows basic - information about WebControl - Applet, including the applet's version and author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize WebControl Applet by - right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open - the Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - -
- WebControl Properties Dialog - - Preferences dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - Display URL label — - display the text Url: to the left of the - text entry window in the applet. - - - - - - Display "launch new window" option - — display check box on the applet window allowing you to - decide whether your document will be displayed in a new browser - window or the currently open. - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - WebControl Applet only starts - Netscape. If you don't have - Netscape, it won't work. If you have - a different browser set as your URL handler, Web - Control Applet will still start Netscape. - - WebControl Applet does not - resize to match the size of the panel if the panel is smaller than - WebControl Applet's normal height and width. This - effects both small horizontal panels and all vertical panels. - - - - - - - - Authors - - WebControl Applet was written by Garrett Smith - gsmith@serv.net. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/whereami-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/whereami-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1a84e6a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/applets/whereami-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ - - Where Am I? Applet - - - The Where Am I? applet, shown in , shows the position - of your mouse pointer on the screen, reporting the coordinates as - x and y, where - x is horizontal and y - is vertical. The dimensions of an area on the screen can be determined - by dragging the cursor after the Where Am I? - applet has been activated. - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Where Am I? - . - - -
- Where Am I? Applet - - Where Am I? Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything special to use this applet. It will - report the position of your cursor as you move your mouse about. - Clicking on the Where Am I? will "grab" - the cursor, causing it to change to a cross-hairs shape. Once the - cursor has been grabbed, you can can drag the cursor to measure - the dimensions of an area on the screen. A second click will - ungrab the cursor, and restore normal operation. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Where Am I? - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Where Am I? was written by John Kodis - (kodis@jagunet.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/authors.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/authors.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 7cbb403..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/authors.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME User's Guide Documentation Team - - This User's Guide was written by the following authors - - - Writers - - - - - David C. Mason - - - David A. Wheeler - - - Alexander Kirillov - - - Dan Mueth - - - Telsa Gwynne - - - Eric Baudais - - - John Fleck - - - Aaron Weber - - - Kenny Graunke - - - John Ellis - - - Havoc Pennington - - - Emese Kovacs - - - Spiros Papadimitriou - - - Oliver Maruhn - - - Chris Lyttle - - - James Cope - - - Michael Hall - - - Tom Gilbert - - - John Kodis - - - Gregory Leblanc - - - Vera Horiuchi - - - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - - - Arjan Scherpenisse - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/desktop.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/desktop.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6ad4fc0..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/desktop.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,205 +0,0 @@ - - - - The GNOME Desktop - - Introduction - - - GNOME Desktop - - The GNOME Desktop provides the functionality of any traditional operating - system desktop. You can drag files, programs and directory folders to the - desktop; you can also drag those items back into GNOME-compliant - applications, allowing you to quickly access any items you select. - - - IMPORTANT - - The GNOME Desktop is actually provided by a backend process in the GNOME - File Manager. If, for any reason, that backend process has stopped running - you may start the Nautilus File Manager again and your desktop will be - restored. Even if you do have to do this you do not need to keep the - Nautilus File Manager window open to enable the desktop. - - - - - Using the Desktop - - Using the Desktop is as simple as dragging items you wish to use - routinely to the desktop. The default desktop includes a - folder of your home directory (usually /home/[user - name]). By default the Nautilus File Manager window will - also appear so you can quickly access other areas of your system. - - - Once an item is on the desktop you can double-click on it to perform its - default action or right-click on it (click on it using the mouse's right - button) to see a menu of actions that can be performed on it. The default - action depends on the kind of item it is; if it's a program, that program - will start, if it's data, the appropriate program will be started with - that data loaded, and if it's a directory, a file manager window will be - opened showing that directory's contents. - - - To use drag and drop you need to be using either a GNOME compliant - application or a Motif application. GNOME is compliant with Motif drag and - drop so you will find it works with many applications you already have - installed. - - - All items that are stored on your desktop are located in the following - directory: - - $/home/[user name]/.nautilus/desktop/ - - This is helpful to remember when you want your desktop to contain an item - for which you cannot use drag and drop. - - - - GNOME Desktop - Hardware Devices - - Once you have started GNOME you can mount CDROM or floppy drives you have - connected to your system by right clicking on the desktop and selecting the - disks menu. This will show an icon on your desktop that you can use to - access these drives. - - - IMPORTANT - - You must have permission to mount the device shown on your desktop before - you can use these icons. If you do not have mount permission someone - with root access such as your system administrator can give it as - follows. You can read more about this and other items of system knowledge - in . - - - - Mounting Drives - - Giving mount access to ordinary users can be done quite easily if you have - linuxconf installed on - your machine. Just select the drive you want to access in the - Access local drive section. In the - Options tab select the User - Mountable option. Your drive will now be mountable by users. - - - If linuxconf is not - available someone with root access must edit the - /etc/fstab file to include user access. This is done - by adding the user attribute to the drive. For example: - - - If your fstab file contains a line like this: - - /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - Add "user" to the fourth column: - - /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - Depending on your system and work environment, there could be some - security risks in permitting users to mount disks. Please consult your - system administrator before taking this action. - - - - - Desktop Areas - - - Desktop Areas - - - Multiple Desktops - - Desktop areas allow you to keep a well organized system when you have many - tasks to perform at one time. Just like adding a new desk when you have too - much material to fit on one, desktop areas allow you to move to another area - to launch more programs. - - - GNOME is aware of desktop areas even though they are controlled by another - software program called the 'window manager'. You can set the number of - desktop areas within the configuration of the window manager you are - using. If you are using the default window manager or your window manager - has a graphical configuration tool you may be able to launch it from the - Window Manager Capplet. You may read more about this Capplet in - - - IMPORTANT - - Most window managers will give you the option of having multiple desktops, - which are different from desktop areas. Desktop areas are virtual - extensions of one desktop whereas multiple desktops are actually separate. - - - The default setup of GNOME is to use desktop areas with only one - desktop. The reason for this is with some applications, such as those which - use Motif, users can experience problems with some drag and drop - functionality across desktops. - - - - Other Desktop Menus - - - GNOME Desktop - Desktop menus - - There are a few desktop menus you may use in GNOME. These menus are accessed - by making a right-button mouse click on any clean space on the desktop. This - will bring up a pop-up menu which contains a few items: - - - - - New Window - This launches a new Nautilus - File Manager window displaying your Home directory. - - - - - New Folder - This creates a new folder - on your desktop into which you can place files: a convenient way to clean - up your desktop. - - - - - New Terminal - This launches a new GNOME - Terminal window that will automatically navigate to the - /home/[username] - directory. - - - - - Clean Up by Name - This automatically arranges - your desktop icons. - - - - - Disks - This accesses the submenu to mount - removable drives - - - - - Change Desktop Background - This opens the - GNOME Control-center at the Background Capplet to allow you to reconfigure - the background of your desktop. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/fdl.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/fdl.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 57c82f4..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/fdl.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,636 +0,0 @@ - - GNU Free Documentation License - - Version 1.1, March 2000 - - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license - document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - 0. PREAMBLE - - - The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other - written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone - the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without - modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, - this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get - credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for - modifications made by others. - - - - This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative - works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It - complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft - license designed for free software. - - - - We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free - software, because free software needs free documentation: a free - program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the - software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it - can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or - whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License - principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. - - - - - 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS - - - This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a - notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed - under the terms of this License. The "Document" , below, refers to any such - manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is - addressed as "you". - - - - A "Modified Version" of the - Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, - either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into - another language. - - - - A "Secondary Section" is a named - appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the - relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to - related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within - that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of - mathematics, a Secondary Section - may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter - of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or - of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position - regarding them. - - - - The "Invariant Sections" are - certain Secondary Sections whose - titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - The "Cover Texts" are certain - short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - A "Transparent" copy of the - Document means a machine-readable - copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the - general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and - straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of - pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available - drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or - for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input - to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup - has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by - readers is not Transparent. A - copy that is not "Transparent" - is called "Opaque". - - - - Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain - ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML - or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple - HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include - PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only - by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or - processing tools are not generally available, and the - machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output - purposes only. - - - - The "Title Page" means, for a - printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are - needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear - in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title - page as such, "Title Page" - means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, - preceding the beginning of the body of the text. - - - - - - 2. VERBATIM COPYING - - - You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either - commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the - copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies - to the Document are reproduced in - all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those - of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or - control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or - distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for - copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must - also follow the conditions in section - 3. - - - - You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and - you may publicly display copies. - - - - - - 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY - - - If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and - the Document's license notice - requires Cover Texts, you must - enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all - these Cover Texts: Front-Cover - Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both - covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of - these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all - words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other - material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to - the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, - can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. - - - - If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit - legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit - reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent - pages. - - - - If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you - must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each - Opaque copy, or state in or - with each Opaque copy a - publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete - Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which - the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at - no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the - latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin - distribution of Opaque copies - in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus - accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the - last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your - agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. - - - - It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the - Document well before - redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to - provide you with an updated version of the Document. - - - - - - 4. MODIFICATIONS - - - You may copy and distribute a Modified - Version of the Document - under the conditions of sections 2 - and 3 above, provided that you - release the Modified Version under - precisely this License, with the Modified - Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution - and modification of the Modified - Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you - must do these things in the Modified - Version: - - - - - - Use in the Title Page (and - on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of - previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in - the History section of the Document). You may use the same - title as a previous version if the original publisher of that - version gives permission. - - - - - - List on the Title Page, as - authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for - authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at - least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal - authors, if it has less than five). - - - - - - State on the Title Page - the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the - publisher. - - - - - - Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. - - - - - - Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications - adjacent to the other copyright notices. - - - - - - Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license - notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms - of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. - - - - - - Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required - Cover Texts given in the - Document's license notice. - - - - - - Include an unaltered copy of this License. - - - - - - Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add - to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and - publisher of the Modified Version - as given on the Title - Page. If there is no section entitled "History" in the - Document, create one stating - the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item - describing the Modified - Version as stated in the previous sentence. - - - - - - Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a - Transparent copy of the - Document, and likewise the - network locations given in the Document for previous versions it - was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. You - may omit a network location for a work that was published at - least four years before the Document itself, or if the - original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. - - - - - - In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", - preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all - the substance and tone of each of the contributor - acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. - - - - - - Preserve all the Invariant - Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text - and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not - considered part of the section titles. - - - - - - Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may - not be included in the Modified - Version. - - - - - - Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to - conflict in title with any Invariant Section. - - - - - - If the Modified Version includes - new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no - material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate - some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their - titles to the list of Invariant - Sections in the Modified - Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from - any other section titles. - - - - You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains - nothing but endorsements of your Modified - Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer - review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the - authoritative definition of a standard. - - - - You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up - to 25 words as a Back-Cover - Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of - Front-Cover Text and one of - Back-Cover Text may be added by - (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text - for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by - the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; - but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the - previous publisher that added the old one. - - - - The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give - permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply - endorsement of any Modified Version - . - - - - - - 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS - - - You may combine the Document with - other documents released under this License, under the terms defined - in section 4 above for modified - versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the - Invariant Sections of all of the - original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined - work in its license notice. - - - - The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and - multiple identical Invariant - Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are - multiple Invariant Sections with - the same name but different contents, make the title of each such - section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of - the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a - unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the - list of Invariant Sections in the - license notice of the combined work. - - - - In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" - in the various original documents, forming one section entitled - "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", - and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections - entitled "Endorsements." - - - - - - 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS - - - You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released - under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License - in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the - collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for - verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. - - - - You may extract a single document from such a collection, and - distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a - copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this - License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that - document. - - - - - - 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS - - - A compilation of the Document or - its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or - works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not - as a whole count as a Modified - Version of the Document, - provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. - Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this License does not - apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being - thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the - Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies - of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the - entire aggregate, the Document's - Cover Texts may be placed on - covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise - they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. - - - - - - 8. TRANSLATION - - - Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may - distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations - requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may - include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the - original versions of these Invariant - Sections. You may include a translation of this License - provided that you also include the original English version of this - License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the - original English version of this License, the original English version - will prevail. - - - - - - 9. TERMINATION - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided - for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense - or distribute the Document is - void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this - License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from - you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long - as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - - 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE - - - The Free - Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the - GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions - will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in - detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. - - - - Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version - number. If the Document specifies - that a particular numbered version of this License "or any later - version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and - conditions either of that specified version or of any later version - that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Document does - not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. - - - - - - Addendum - - - To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of - the License in the document and put the following copyright and - license notices just after the title page: - - - - Copyright © YEAR YOUR NAME. - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or - any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the - Invariant Sections being LIST - THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover - Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy - of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free - Documentation License. - - - - If you have no Invariant - Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" instead of saying - which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write "no - Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise - for Back-Cover Texts. - - - - If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we - recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of - free software license, such as the GNU General Public - License, to permit their use in free software. - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4430448..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 865d78d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/anotherclock-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/applet_props_dialog.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/applet_props_dialog.png deleted file mode 100644 index f11ef3a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/applet_props_dialog.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 74bee03..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7a0438f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/asclock_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png deleted file mode 100644 index 91ddffc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png deleted file mode 100644 index da8986f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-graph.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8285bc1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index a87f6fa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index 99db334..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png deleted file mode 100644 index 45099f2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png deleted file mode 100644 index ebd18b3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/bg-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/bg-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9b42874..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/bg-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/border1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/border1.png deleted file mode 100644 index bdb6d9c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/border1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cdplayer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cdplayer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 67cabb3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cdplayer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 874bbf1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 553ef6f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_characters.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_characters.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9b541ef..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/charpick_characters.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f8bc800..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6a943bf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clock_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index f4e3a32..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png deleted file mode 100644 index a01e1a4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index cc9d7f7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/clockmail_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 40e5df2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index afd328d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 183cbcf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index c5110b8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpuload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6f64f0d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/create_launcher.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/create_launcher.png deleted file mode 100644 index 902377a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/create_launcher.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/custicon.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/custicon.png deleted file mode 100644 index 16959f4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/custicon.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index fc984a9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index ffb4f70..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 949af46..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9a678f6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index d38050e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 41bb221..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 555696e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f6c89b9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/diskusage-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_open.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_open.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1550c1d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_open.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7dfa8e5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drawer_properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png deleted file mode 100644 index 59b7db6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png deleted file mode 100644 index f5009a2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 57da50b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png deleted file mode 100644 index a3cf6b4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_applets.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_applets.png deleted file mode 100644 index aaee64a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_applets.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_menu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_menu.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0551942..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_menu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_panel.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_panel.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1cd461f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/example_panel.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fifteen_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fifteen_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 993616d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fifteen_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 209c98a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5c35caf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/fish_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 84afc9d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 929e356..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 175fd1d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-4.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-4.png deleted file mode 100644 index 45d66bb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-5.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-5.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5fcfd20..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-5.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-6.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-6.png deleted file mode 100644 index 484eca4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-6.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-desk.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-desk.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0f1ee63..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full-desk.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full.png deleted file mode 100644 index 52bb7a6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/full.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccalf.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccalf.png deleted file mode 100644 index 37f55c4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccalf.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccappdef.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccappdef.png deleted file mode 100644 index f2a1c4f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccappdef.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccdialog.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccdialog.png deleted file mode 100644 index 31a59ce..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccdialog.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccedit.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccedit.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6903b6a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccedit.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gcchints.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gcchints.png deleted file mode 100644 index db6ac39..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gcchints.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmdi.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmdi.png deleted file mode 100644 index becd375..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmdi.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmime.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmime.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8fa022f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccmime.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsession-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsession-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8684128..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsession-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsessopt.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsessopt.png deleted file mode 100644 index 308566e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsessopt.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound1.png deleted file mode 100644 index ab998c2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9aa093e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccsound2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccstartup.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccstartup.png deleted file mode 100644 index 85b4312..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccstartup.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccurl.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccurl.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7e5c0f3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gccurl.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index d1ab92d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 365b879..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/geyes_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_add_list.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_add_list.png deleted file mode 100644 index db48777..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_add_list.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index ada87de..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 553b3dc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5001fa8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/glob_pref_anim.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/glob_pref_anim.png deleted file mode 100644 index 294efe7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/glob_pref_anim.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnome-logo-large.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnome-logo-large.png deleted file mode 100644 index 495e3c5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnome-logo-large.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 79e8f93..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 42a1965..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gnotes-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0920b0a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8065dc9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_weather.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_weather.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5cea51f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/gweather_weather.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/hide-button.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/hide-button.png deleted file mode 100644 index e08e53c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/hide-button.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/jbc_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/jbc_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 734417b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/jbc_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/keyboard-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/keyboard-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index b6d51c4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/keyboard-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4d0726d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7364004..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/life-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/life-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index cda1844..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/life-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/link.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/link.png deleted file mode 100644 index ed4fd94..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/link.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 92db347..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3c8fb0a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2f7efea..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 31e944a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/loadavg-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/locbar.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/locbar.png deleted file mode 100644 index 81d02d0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/locbar.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/logout-screen.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/logout-screen.png deleted file mode 100644 index c15ad5b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/logout-screen.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8f560cf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png deleted file mode 100644 index bc7ee3a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2ee5d8a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mainmenu_properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mainmenu_properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index bbf6fa2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mainmenu_properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 93bc827..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index f234c3c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index cfe8a7b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index c8e8f21..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/memload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/menueditor.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/menueditor.png deleted file mode 100644 index c59bc44..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/menueditor.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index a276c08..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png deleted file mode 100644 index efa58cd..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mixer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mixer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 825700f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mixer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mm-button.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mm-button.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2622a3d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mm-button.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-advpref.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-advpref.png deleted file mode 100644 index c2fcf11..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-advpref.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 81cf6e5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights.png deleted file mode 100644 index 453fc6a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/modemlights.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mouse-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mouse-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f910f8d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/mouse-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 25458e9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 274f92b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index c6dde32..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index bf93c98..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/netload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/noread.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/noread.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5dd705a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/noread.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/nowrite.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/nowrite.png deleted file mode 100644 index 34bb7c1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/nowrite.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9247388..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0d3ca13..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_themes.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_themes.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2280e3e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/odometer_themes.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_applets.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_applets.png deleted file mode 100644 index aaee64a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_applets.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_lockbut.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_lockbut.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3afb0a4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_lockbut.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_logoutbut.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_logoutbut.png deleted file mode 100644 index 93d6ff9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_logoutbut.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_back.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_back.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1a5e004..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_back.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_edge.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_edge.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0809e28..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_props_edge.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runbutton.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runbutton.png deleted file mode 100644 index 417e4bc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runbutton.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runprogram.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runprogram.png deleted file mode 100644 index bf9d04d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_runprogram.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_swallow.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_swallow.png deleted file mode 100644 index dcfa479..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/panel_swallow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 68649af..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0e9d1ac..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index a199432..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part.png deleted file mode 100644 index ea1c99b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/part.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index aa58ca3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index c17d1ff..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index c6d8b2d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-4.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-4.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0af06a9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player-4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player.png deleted file mode 100644 index 07030f9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/player.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/prefmenu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/prefmenu.png deleted file mode 100644 index aed87d5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/prefmenu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index eddafaa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index ec450f4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/printer-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 613a8e1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/screensave-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/screensave-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1ca7c1e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/screensave-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/sidebar.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/sidebar.png deleted file mode 100644 index ed2fda5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/sidebar.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index bdde4ca..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index a0a0498..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png deleted file mode 100644 index 76ad7e6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2e03f1c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/status_dock.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/status_dock.png deleted file mode 100644 index 739dfbb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/status_dock.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4e40efe..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index e4224a3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 192cbb7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1bbf19b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/swapload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0f7e08b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png deleted file mode 100644 index 954db0b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 628947a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index c033ee7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/theme-select.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/theme-select.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9e906b8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/theme-select.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0ff7b38..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_coredump.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_coredump.png deleted file mode 100644 index 25444aa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_coredump.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png deleted file mode 100644 index 835ed95..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6520550..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/tickastat_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmenu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmenu.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1c3e802..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmenu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmusic.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmusic.png deleted file mode 100644 index f8c03d6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/viewmusic.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index d37dc54..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 24341a6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/webcontrol-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/whereami_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/whereami_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9f44ec7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/whereami_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-add.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-add.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4a89e30..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-add.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index 216ab5f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/figures/wm-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gmenu.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gmenu.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ed31929..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gmenu.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ - - - - Editing the Main Menu - - Introduction - - - Main Menu - editing - - The Main Menu is a repository for your applications and can be - found on the Panel. The Main Menu is preloaded with GNOME but it - can be configured to fit your work habits. The Main Menu is broken - up into three main subdirectories: Programs (System menus), Favorites - (User menus) and Applets (Panel Apps). The Menu Editor is available - for you to add new applications to the Main Menu but you cannot add - applications to the System menus if you are not the system - administrator (root). In this section you will learn how to add - applications to your Main Menu. - - - Using the Menu Editor - - The Menu Editor is a configuration tool for the Main Menu. The Menu Editor - is started by clicking on the Main Menu Launcher or Programs in the Global - Main Menu (the "Foot" menu) and selecting - Settings Menu - editor. - -
- The Menu Editor - - The Menu Editor - - - -
- - - The Menu Editor is divided into two main panels. The left side - contains the menu in its default state. The right side contains a - tabbed dialog that allows you to add new applications to the - menu. - - - On the left side in the menu tree you will notice that there are - two main menu lists, one for Favorites (User Menus) and one for - Programs (System Menus). The User Menus are for the current user - and the System Menus are for all users on the system. The - prepackaged applications are all located in the System Menus. - - - Within the menu list on the left side you may open and close - folders and see what is in your current menu by clicking on the - small plus signs beside the menus. - - - - Adding a New Menu Item - - - Main Menu - Adding a new menu item - - If you want to add a new menu item press the New - Item button on the toolbar. A new menu item will be added to - the highlighted menu. If you do not have a menu highlighted, it will - be placed at the top of the menu tree. Select the new item and type in the - information for the item in the dialog on the right. Once the information - is complete press the Save button and the new menu - item will be inserted at the highlighted location on the left side menu - tree. You may then move the menu item by pressing the up or down buttons - on the toolbar. You may also move the menu item by dragging it with your - left mouse button. - - - IMPORTANT - - Keep in mind that you cannot change the System menus unless you are - logged in as root. An ordinary user can only add to, delete from, and - edit the User Menus. - - - - - Drag and Drop in the Main Menu - - In the Menu Editor - The Menu Editor supports drag and drop functionality, - which will make your work easier. You may drag applications into the folders - you wish them to reside in or re-arrange you folders completely. - - - To the Panel - If you would like to place a menu item onto the Panel, you - can drag and drop from the menu to the Panel and it will place a launcher - there with all the appropriate properties set for you. If you prefer not to - use drag and drop you may also right click on the menu item and choose the - Add this launcher to panel from the - pop-up menu. - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide-C.omf b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide-C.omf deleted file mode 100644 index aabe6ea..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide-C.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - GNOME User's Guide - - - GNOME|Core Desktop - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bfaf158..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnome-users-guide.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,162 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -]> - - - - - - GNOME 1.4 User's Guide - - - GNOME User's Guide - Documentation Team - - - - - - - This is the official 1.4.0-1 release of the GNOME User's Guide. - - - - - - 1.0 - - - 03.12.2001 - - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Eazel Inc., - Helix Code, Inc., - Red Hat, Inc., - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban, - Eric Baudais, - James Cope, - John Ellis, - John Fleck, - Tom Gilbert, - Kenny Graunke, - Telsa Gwynne, - Michael Hall, - Vera Horiuchi, - Alexander Kirillov, - Emese Kovacs, - Gregory Leblanc, - Chris Lyttle, - Oliver Maruhn, - David Mason, - Dan Mueth, - Spiros Papadimitriou, - Arjan Scherpenisse, - Aaron Weber, - David A. Wheeler - - - - -Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, - no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license - can be found here. - -Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and - services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any - GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members - of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps - or initial caps. - - - - - - - -&WHEELER; - -&WM; - -&PANEL; - -&GMENU; - -&DESKTOP; - -&NAUTILUS; - -&GNOMECC; - -&GNOME-APPLETS; - -&NEWBIES; - -&AUTHORS; - -&FDL; - -&GPL; - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnomecc.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnomecc.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fa7861b..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gnomecc.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1608 +0,0 @@ - - The GNOME Control Center - - Introduction - - The Gnome Control Center allows you - to configure various parts of your system using a collection - of tools called capplets. These capplets may be - associated with the core set of Gnome applications or other - applications for which the developers have written capplets. - - - Your Control Center may contain - more capplets than are documented here depending on the - applications installed on your system. - - Control Center is a part of - Gnome desktop environment; it is included in - control-center package. This manual - describes version 1.4 of Control - Center. - - - - - - You may start the Control Center - one of three ways. To launch the Control - Center without any particular active capplet - select the Control Center menu item - from the Settings submenu in the - Main Menu or type the - command gnomecc at the command line - prompt. - - - If you know which capplet you would like to edit you may start - that capplet by selecting the correct menu item in the - Settings menu. - - - - - - Using the Control Center - - The Control Center is divided into - two main sections, the menu of configurable capplets on the - left and the main work space on the right. The capplets in the - menu are grouped in sections, such as - Desktop, Multimedia, - etc. Each of these sections is discussed in detail below. As - with all menus of this type, you can collapse a - whole section by clicking on the small downward triangle to - the left of the section title. To expand a collapsed section, - click on the triangle again. - - - Working with the Control Center - simply requires you to select a capplet from the menu on the - left and click on it. Once this is done, the workspace will - change, allowing you to configure the item. - - After you have made the configuration changes, you can - press OK button to confirm the changes - or Cancel to return to the old - configuration. It you want to test the new settings before - making your decision press Try button; - this will apply the new cofiguration settings so that you can - see what they would look like, but it also remembers the old - ones. After you have tried the new settings, you can press - OK button to make them permanent, or - Revert to return to the old - configuration. - - - - - - - Desktop - - The Desktop section controls the most visible global settings - for your Gnome environment. - - - The Background Properties Capplet - - - Gnome Control Center - Desktop - - The properties for your background image can be set here by - either selecting a color or an image. If you select a color - you have the option of having Solid, - Horizontal Gradient (the color smoothly - changes from left to right) and Vertical - Gradient (the color changes from top to bottom). - For gradient backgrounds, you need to select two colors: - beginning (primary) and ending (secondary) one. - - - If you decide to have an image as wallpaper you may browse for - the image you wish to use. Once you have found your image you - need to decide whether you would like to have the image tiled - across the screen, centered, scaled up while keeping the same - aspect, or simply scaled up to fit the screen. Once you have - changed your background properties you may press the - Try button at the bottom of the - Control Center to make the change. - - - If you would like to set the background by any other means you - may disable this capplet by unselecting Use Gnome - to set background checkbox. -
- The Background Properties Capplet - - The Background Properties Capplet - - - -
- - - - - Global Panel Preferences - - This capplet is provided by the Gnome Panel and is documented in the - Panel - Manual - - - - The Screensaver Capplet - - - Gnome Control Center - Screensaver - - In this capplet you can change your screensaver properties. This - capplet contains a list of available screen savers you may choose - and a demo screen. Below these two dialogs you will see a set of - tools that allow you to change the settings for the global - screen saver properties. If the screen saver you choose has - particular settings you can change those by pressing the - Settings button that appears below the - screen saver list. - - - Global Screen Saver settings &mdash In this - section of the capplet you can change the time, password, - and power management properties. You can decide how long you - would like the screen saver to wait before starting by - typing the number of minutes in the Start - After text box. If you would like a password to - return to your desktop click the Require - Password button. Your account login password is - the password set for the screen saver. - - - You are also given the option of using power management — if - your monitor is capable of it. You may set the time to wait - before the monitor is shut off by typing the time in the - Shutdown monitor text box. -
- The Screensaver Properties Capplet - - The Screensaver Properties Capplet - - - -
- - - - Theme Selector - - - Gnome Control Center - Theme Selector - - The Theme Selector capplet allows - you to select which GTK theme you would like to run. - - - GTK themes are coordinated settings that define the look and - feel of such elements of graphical user interface as buttons, - menus, scrollbars etc. of all Gnome applications (more - generally, of all applications using the GIMP Toolkit (GTK), - hence the name). - - - To change your GTK theme select a theme from the - Available Themes list on the left side - of the main workspace. If you have Auto - Preview selected you will be able to see what - the theme looks like in the preview window below. Note that - the preview window is live: you can click on - a button, enter text in sample text entry box, etc. If you - like the theme press the Try button - on the bottom of the Gnome Control - Center to install it. - - - There are a few GTK themes that come loaded with Gnome when - you install it. If you would like more themes you can check - resources on the Internet such as the GTK Themes - site. Once you have found and downloaded a theme - you like, press the Install new theme - button. This will launch a file browser that allows you to - find the theme you have just downloaded. The theme files - should be in a tar.gz or - .tgz format (otherwise known as a - tarball). Once you have found the file press - the OK and Gnome will install the - theme in the appropriate directory - (~/.themes) automatically. Now you can - look in the Available Themes list for - the theme you have installed. - - -
- The Theme Selector Capplet - - The Theme Selector Capplet - - - -
- - - If you would like to change the font used in the current - theme, you may do so by selecting the Use custom - font checkbox and clicking on the - font button below it. This will bring up a font selection - dialog that allows you to specify the font, its style, and - size. - - - Window Manager Capplet - - - Gnome Control Center - Window Manager"Window - Manager" - - Because Gnome is not dependent on any one window manager this capplet - allows you to select which window manager you wish to use. The Window - Manager capplet only shows Gnome-compliant window managers; if you - want to use other window managers, you have to tell Window Manager - capplet about them. - -
- Window Manager Capplet - - Window Manager Capplet - - - -
- - The Window Manager capplet has a main list of the window - managers that you can currently select from. Your current - window manager will be labeled Current. - - - If you wish to add a new window manager to the main list you may - press the Add button. This will launch - the Add New Window Manager dialog. - -
- Add New Window Manager - - Add New Window Manager - - - -
- - In the Add New Window Manager dialog - you may specify the name you wish to give the window - manager, the command to launch that window manager, and the - command to launch any configuration tool that might be - available for that window manager. - - - If you know that the window manager is fully Gnome compliant and - can be session managed you may select the Window - manager is session managed button. If you are unsure - you should check the documentation of your window manager. - - - Press OK when you are done. - - - Once you have finished adding your new window manager you will - see it appear in the main list of window managers. If you need - to change any of the properties you set in the Add New - Window Manager dialog you may select the window - manager from the main list with your mouse and press the - Edit button. - - - You may also delete any window manager in the main list by - selecting it with your mouse and pressing the - Delete button. - - - If you are ready to switch the current window manager you - may select the manager you wish to run from the main list - and press the Try button. If you - would like to run the configuration tool, make sure the - manager you want to configure is selected and press the - Run Configuration Tool for [window manager - name] button. - - - - - - - - - Document Handlers - - The Document Handlers section of the Gnome - Control Center allows you to change the way - certain file types and functions are viewed, edited or - manipulated. - - - Default Editor - - - Gnome Control Center - Default Editor - - The Default Editor Capplet allows you to select which editor - will be your default editor while using Gnome. This will - allow applications like the Gnome File Manager to launch the - correct editor when you try to open files associated with - editing. All popular editors available are included in the - selection list. - -
- The Default Editor Capplet - - The Gnome Edit Properties - - - -
- - - - - - URL Handlers - - The URL Handlers Capplet allows you to determine which browser - is responsible for various types of URLs. URLs or Uniform - Resource Locators are addresses - used to find certain documents or files. When you type in a - web address in a browser you are using a URL. The default - types of URLs are: - - - - Default - - - - Default &mdash this is any URL that is not - otherwise specified. For example, a web page. - - - - - - ghelp - - - This type of URLs is used for all Gnome documentation. By - default this is handled by Nautilus (Gnome file manager - and help browser) but you - may wish to view the files in another browser. - - - - - - info - - - This type of URLs is used for documentation in - info format file documentation - system. Nautilus can show these documents but you may wish - to handle them with another application. - - - - - - man - - - This type of URLs is used for so-called man - pages, a standard documentation format for command - line tools. Nautilus can view these documents but you may - wish to handle them with another application. - - - - - - To change the default browser for any of these URL types - simply change the browser in the handler - text box at the top of the Capplet and press the - Set button. If you wish to remove the - URL handler press the Remove button. - -
- The URL Handlers Capplet - - The URL Handler - - - -
- - - - - - - - File types and programs - - This capplet allows you to configure how files of various types - should be handled. File type (formally called MIME type) - describes what kind of data and in what format the file - contains. For each of the file types, you can set the icon to be - used by the File Manager, the default application to be used to - open files of this type, etc. For example, file type - image/jpeg is used for image files in - JPEG format; by default, it is opened using - File Manager's built-in graphics viewer. - - - - Viewing available file types - - The File types capplet shows you all file types currently known - to Gnome. For each file type, it shows a short description - (e.g., PDF document), the file type name - (e.g., application/pdf), etc. Clicking on a - file type in the list shows you more information about this gile - type, namely: - - - - Brief description (e.g., PDF document) - - - - Official file type name, or the MIME - type (e.g., application/pdf). These - names should be of the form - type/subtype, where - type describes general type of data - (image, text, audio, video, or application) and - subtype gives complete - specification. - - - - Icon to be used for files of this type by File - Manager. - - - - Default action to be performed when you click on the - file in the File Manager window. There are two possible - types of default actions: view the file using one of File - Manager built-in viewers or open the file - using an external application. In fact, you can have a whole - list of applications that can be used to open the file. One - of these applications is used by default when you click on - file; the other applications will be included in the pop-up - menu for files of this type (to get the pop-up menu, click - on the file with the right mouse button in the File Manager - window and select Open With). - - - - Extensions: these are used by File Manager and other - Gnome applications to determine file type of a given - file. The most common and simplest way of doing this is by - matching the filename extension: for example, extension - pdf is used for files of type - application/pdf. - - - - - NOTE FOR ADVANCED USERS - - In fact, Gnome File Manager can also use more elaborate - methods of determining file type than just matching the - extensions. Advanced users who want to know more - about this should take a look at the file - PREFIX/mime-info/gnome-vfs.mime, where - PREFIX=/usr/share or - /usr/local/share depending on your - system's configuration. - - - - - Editing a file type - - By far the most common type of editing a file type is changing - the default action associated with a given file type. To do so: - - - - Click on the file type in the list. - - - Select the type of default action - (Use Viewer or Open with - Application) - - - Select the application/viewer you want to be - the default from the drop-down list. If you don't see an - application you want in this list, click on the - Edit List button. It will show you - the list of all application which are currently included - in the pop-up menu for this file type. Now click on - Add application button and enter - the application name (e.g., Gnome PS - viewer) and command used to launch this - application (e.g., ggv). - - - - You can also change other properties of a file type: - - - - To change the icon used by a file type, click on the - Change icon button. - - - - To change file type description, just click - inside the text field containing description and edit - it. - - - To edit the list of extensions associated - with a file type, click on the Change file - extensions button. This will produce a window - showing the list of file extensions currently associated - with this file type. To remove an extension from the list, - select it with the mouse and then click - Remove button. To add a new - extension, click on Add button and - enter the new extension in the appearing dialog. Do not type - the leading dot: if you want to add extension - pdf, you should type in - pdf, not .pdf. - - - - - To edit the list of applications associated with the file - type (these applications appear in the menu when you right-click - on the file of this type in the File Manager and select - Open with), click on the - Edit List button. This will show - the list of all applications associated with this file - type. You can remove any of the applications from the - list, edit an existing application (this allows you to - cahnge the name under which this application appears in - the menu and the command used to launch this application), - or add a new application. Instead of removing of - application from the list, you can also temporarily - disable it by unchecking it in the list. Such a disabled - application will not be shown in the menu for the files of - this type. - - - - - - Adding and deleting file types - - To delete a file type, select it in the file type list and - press Delete this Mime type button. To - add a new file type, press Add new Mime - type button. You will be prompted to enter the - file type name and description. It is strongly advised that - you follow the MIME standard: file type name should be of the - form type/subtype, where - type is one of the following five - standard types: text, - audio,image, - video, or - application (the last one should be - used if none of the first four are suitable). - - After you have entered the file type name and description, the - new file type is added to the list. Now you can select it in - the list and choose an icon, file extensions and default - action for this file type as described in . - - - - - - Restoring system defaults - - If you (or someone else) did something wrong in this capplet, - you can discard all your changes and - restore the system default values for all the settings - controlled by this capplet (i.e., file types, default actions, - icons, etc). To do so, click on Revert to system - defaults button. Note that this will erase all - your changes; you can not "undo" this action. - - - - - - - - - - Launch feedback - - This capplet allows you configure application launch feedback, - i.e. indicators which tell you that a program is being - loaded. Such indicators, which can take a number of forms (i.e., - an hourglass icon next to mouse cursor or a blinking star) come - to life the moment you click on the application launch button or - select it in the menu and stay on until the application actually - starts or until specified time has passed. These indicators can - be very useful in cases when an application takes a long time to - start: without them, you would never know whether the - application is just taking a long time to start, or something - went wrong (e.g., it has crashed at startup, or you maybe you - didn't click on that button at all). - -
- The Launch Feedback capplet - - The Launch Feedback capplet - - - -
- - - Enabled indicators - - - In this section, you can select what launch indicators should be - enabled. You can select more than one; you can also disable all - of them if you want to. - - - - Tasklist (invisible window) - - - This is the default selection. This option adds to the - list of windows in your taskbar the window with the name - of the application being started and with hourglass icon - next to it. (This will only work if your taskbar is - configured to show normal. i.e. non-iconified - applications.) - - - - - Hourglass mouse cursor - - - This option will put an hourglass icon next to the mouse - cursor. It doesn't affect mouse opertaions: you can still - use the mouse for clicking and dragging. - - - - - Splashscreen - - - This option puts a small window saying Starting - (Application Name) in the middle of your screen - - - - - Animated star - - - This option put a small yellow blinking star in the upper - left corner of your screen. - - - - - - - - Miscellaneous - - - Timeout - - This parameter specifies maximal time the - indicators can be on; after this, the indicators will - disappear even if the application has not yet started. - - - - - Do not distinguish between windows - (compatibility mode) - - This option controls the behavior of the indicators when - you are launching several applications simultaneosly (or - in quick succession). Since this is not a very common - situation, new users may skip this section. - - - If this section is disabled (which is the default), the - indicators will track each of the applications you are - launching separately, and the indicators will stay on - until all the applications have started. This is - the right thing to do. Unfortunately, in - some (rare) cases it can also cause problems, sometimes - even leading to system crash. In such situations, you - should enable this option. - - - If this option is enabled, the indicators will work - in a more primitive (but safer) way. Namely, they will - go away as soon as the first of the applications you are - launching starts. - - - - - - - - - - - Multimedia - - The Multimedia capplet provides control over sound and other Gnome - multimedia functions. - - - Sound - - The Sound capplet allows you to set the system sounds for - your Gnome session. It contains two tabs, - General and Sound - Events. - - - General Tab - At this point you have - two options to choose from in the - General tab, enabling sound for Gnome - and for events. If you select Enable sound server - startup you will make sure that Gnome's sound - engine (ESD) will be launched when you start Gnome. ESD is - used by all Gnome applications that produce sound, so if you - want to hear any sound from Gnome applications you should - enable this option. - - - NOTE - Some non-Gnome applications do not work well with - ESD. So if you do not hear any sounds from your favorite - xgalaga game or get error messages - like Device /dev/dsp busy, you should - temporarily suspend ESD. You can do this using - Sound Monitor applet. - - - - Sound for events will enable sounds - accompanying various "events", such as closing a window or - an error message. You can select sounds associted with - various events in the Sound Events tab - when those events occur. With these two items enabled, Gnome - will remember your sound settings whenever you log in or - out. - -
- The Gnome Sound Capplet - - The Gnome Sound Capplet - - - -
- - Sound Events Tab - This tab allows you - to control the sounds made by various programs and events in - Gnome. - - - To change the sound associated with a Gnome event, select - the event from the hierarchical list on the left and press - the Browse button to find a sound file - on your system (file must be in wav - format). Press the Play button to test - the sound. - -
- The Gnome Sound Capplet - - The Gnome Sound Capplet - - - -
- - - - - - - Peripherals - - - Gnome Control Center - Peripherals - - The capplets in this section of the Control Center will help - you configure devices such as keyboard and - mouse. You may also have other peripheral devices - that have capplets provided for the Gnome Control - Center. Please refer to the documentation provided by any - other peripheral capplet you might have. - - - The Keyboard Properties Capplet - - - Gnome Control Center - Keyboard - - There are currently three settings for the keyboard in this - capplet. You may change the properties of - Auto-repeat, the Keyboard - Click, and the Keyboard Bell. - - - Auto-repeat enables you to hold a key down - and have it repeat the character at the rate and delay you set - in this capplet. - - - Keyboard Click enables a small click - sound to play at each key press. If enabled you may change the - volume to your preference. - - - The Keyboard Bell section allows you to - change the bell sound that is produced by your CPU speaker - when a keyboard error or message is sent. - - - Volume changes the actual volume of the bell. - - - The pitch slider will change the pitch of the note that is - played. By default it is set to 440Hz, or the A above middle C. - - - Duration changes the length of time the - tone is played. - - - The Test button will allow you to hear - the current settings of your keyboard bell. - -
- The Keyboard Properties Capplet - - The Keyboard Properties Capplet - - - -
- - - The Mouse Properties Capplet - - - Gnome Control Center - Mouse - - The Mouse Properties capplet allows you to change between left - and right handed mouse buttons and to define the - Accelerations and - Threshold properties. - - - The Accelerations setting allows you to - change the speed the mouse moves across the screen in relation - to the movement of the mouse on your mouse pad. The - Threshold setting allows you to set the - speed at which you have to move your mouse before it starts - the acceleration speed you have defined in the - Acceleration setting. -
- The Mouse Properties Capplet - - The Mouse Properties Capplet - - - -
- - - - - - - - - Session - - The Session Group provides you methods of controlling various - items that occur with the startup of your Gnome Session. These - include session options, startup programs and startup hints. - - - Startup Hints - - Startup hint are short messages displayed when you login; - they contain tips on using Gnome and other bits of information - you may find useful. This capplet allows you to configure - these hints. - - - The Enable login hints checkbox allows - you to turn this feature on or off. - - - The Display normal hints checkbox will display a - group of hints on how to use Gnome. This is a good choice for new users - of Gnome. - - - The Display fortunes instead of hints - checkbox allows you to make use of the - fortune application which displays - various fortunes and sayings. Please refer to - the fortune documentation for how to set it up. - - - The Display message of the day instead of - hints checkbox will message of the day to be - displayed instead of hints or fortunes. The Message - of the day file to use text box allows you to - select the text file that will be used as the message. This is - a good choice for system administrators to use to inform many - users of daily news. - -
- Startup Hints Capplet - - Startup Hints Capplet - - - -
- - - Session Options and Startup Programs - - The Session Options and Startup Programs capplet allows you to - control what programs are started at login time. Gnome - has the concept of session management. In simple terms, it - means that you can save your session (that is, - information about currently working applications, their status - and position on the screen) at any stage, and at your next - login the same applications will reappear on your screen in - the same positions, allowing you to continue your work. Note, - however, this only works for Gnome compliant applications. - - - Gnome also provides another way of starting applications at - login. You can explicitly specify one or more commands to - run, and Gnome will execute them at login in addition to the - applications from your saved session. This works for all - kinds of applications, whether Gnome compliant or not. - - - Session Options and Startup Programs capplet allows you to configure - all of these options, as described below. - -
- Session Options Capplet - - Session Options Capplet - - - -
- - - - Show splash screen on login - - - - This option controls whether the splash screen should be - shown at startup. It does nothing useful, but is an eye - candy, so why not? - - - - - Prompt on logout - - - - If this option is enabled, a confirmation dialog will - appear at logout. Among other things, this dialog provides - checkbox Save current setup (unless - you have set the checkbox Automatically save - session, see below). If you check this box, - the current session will be saved and will be restored at - your next login. Otherwise, the previous saved session - will be used. - - - - - Automatically save session - - - - This option determines whether your current session will - be automatically saved at logout time or not. Note that - you can also manually save your session at any time by - selecting - - Settings - Session - Save Current Session - from the Main Menu. - - - - - Choose Current Session - - - - This section allows you to configure more complicated - features of session management. These features are - currently being developed and should be used by advanced - users only. - - - Gnome allows you to define several sessions. For - example, you could have session - Work in which you are using office - applications such as Gnumeric - spreadsheet, and another session - Net in which you have - Netscape, - X-Chat (IRC chat client) and - Evolution mail client - open. This way, you can keep the setups (i.e., - information about open applications and their position - on screen) for work and for net surfing separate, - making it easy to switch from one to - another. Unfortunately, at the moment the only way to - switch from one session to another is by using command - gnome-session - . - In the future, an easier way of - switching will be provided. - - - In this part of Session Properties capplet you can - explicitly specify under which session name you current - setup should be saved, but a save won't occur until you - specifically do so. Here, you can also create new - sessions, edit and delete existing sessions. - - - To add a new session, press the Add - button and enter in a new session name. This name must be - different from existing session names. - - - To edit an existing session name, highlight the session - name you wish to edit, press the Edit button - and edit the existing session name. The new name must be - different from existing session names. - - - To delete an existing session name, highlight the session - name you wish to delete, press the Delete - button. - - - - -
- Startup Programs Capplet - - Startup Programs Capplet - - - -
- - - - Non-session managed startup programs - — In this section, you can explicitly specify the - commands that should be executed during login. This is - mostly used for programs that are not - Gnome-compatible. For Gnome applications, it is easier - just to leave them running and then save your session at - logout — this will ensure that they will be - restarted at your next login. - - To add a new command, press - Add button and enter the command to - run in the appearing dialog window. For example, if you want - Netscape to start every time - you login, just enter netscape in the - Startup command field. - - You can also specify priority, which determines the - order in which the programs will be started: programs with - lower values are started before the ones with higher - values. The default value is 50, which means that the - program will be started after all core Gnome - components. Unless you know what you are doing, it is better - to use this default value. - - - You can also edit or remove previously entered programs using - Edit... and - Remove... buttons. - - - - - Browse currently running programs — - This button will launch Session - properties dialog which shows the state of your - current Gnome session — in other words, which - programs are currently running, their status, priorities, - and more. It can also be used to remove one of the core - Gnome programs, such as Panel, from your session, thus - making sure that it won't be started next time you - login. - - - -
- Session Properties Manager - - Screenshot of the session properties manager. - - - - -
- - - - - - - - User Interface - - - Gnome Control Center - User Interface Options - - The User Interface Options allows you to change the appearance - of applications that are Gnome compliant. You may recognize these - applications as ones that are pre-installed with Gnome or ones that say - they are built with GTK (the GIMP Toolkit). - - Application - - - Gnome Control Center - Application Defaults - - The Application Defaults capplet allows you to change certain - user interface aspects of your Gnome compliant applications. - - - IMPORTANT - - Although this capplet gives you great control over the look - and feel of your applications you should consider these tools - for advanced use only. - - - - - - Can detach and move menubars — By - default menubars in Gnome applications may be dragged - from their usual location and placed anywhere within the - application or desktop. If you do not wish to use this - feature you may turn it off. - - - - - Menus have relieved borders — By - default menubars have relieved borders. If you do not - like this look you may turn this feature off. - - - - - Submenus can be torn off — This - allows the submenus to have the perforated line which - allows you to "tear" them off an have them as a small - movable window. - - - - - Menu items have icons — Some menu - items in applications will have icons. If you wish not - to see these icons in applications that use them you may - turn off this feature. - - - - - Statusbar is interactive when - possible — Some applications can have the - status bar at the bottom become separated into its own - window. If you would like to have those applications - separate the status bar into another window you may turn - on this option. - - - - - Statusbar progress meter on right — - Some applications have progress meters in their - statusbars. By default these progress meters are on the - right side of the statusbar. If you wish them to be on - the left you may turn off this feature. - - - - - Can detach and move toolbars — By - default toolbars in Gnome applications may be dragged - from their usual location and placed anywhere within the - application or desktop. If you do not wish to use this - feature, you may turn it off. - - - - - Toolbars have relieved border — By - default toolbars have relieved borders. If you do not - like this look you may turn this feature off. - - - - - Toolbar buttons have relieved - border — By default toolbar buttons do not - have relieved borders in their natural state. They do, - however, change when the mouse is over them. If you wish - them to be relieved at all times you may turn on this - feature. - - - - - Toolbars have line separators — By - default toolbar buttons have small line separators - between them. If you do not wish to have the line - separators you may turn this feature off. - - - - - Toolbars have text labels — By - default toolbar buttons have images and text to identify - them. If you are familiar with the buttons and do not - need the text you may turn on this feature. - - - -
- Applications Defaults Capplet - - Dialog Capplet - - - -
- - Dialogs - - - Gnome Control Center - Dialogs - - The Dialogs Capplet will allow you to change the default settings for - dialog boxes in Gnome compliant applications. A dialog box is a - window that is launched by an application to help perform a task - needed by that application. An example of a dialog box is a Print - dialog which appears when you press a print button. The dialog allows - you to set print options and start the print process. The Dialogs - capplet will allow you to change the following options. - - - - IMPORTANT - - Although this capplet gives you great control over the look - and feel of your applications you should consider these tools - for advanced use only. - - - - Dialog buttons — Choose to use the - default buttons, buttons more spread out, put buttons on the - edges, put the buttons on the left with left-justify, and - put buttons on the right with right-justify. - - - Dialog buttons have icons — Some - dialog buttons (for example OK) can - have icons on them. By default the applications which - provide this have the icons turned on. If you wish not to - see them you may turn off this feature. - - - Use statusbar instead of dialog when - possible — You may tell applications to use the - statusbar instead of a dialog if the application will allow - it. This will only work with dialogs that provide - information not one that require some interaction on your - part. - - - Dialog position — This will let you - choose how the dialogs appear when launched. You can let the - window manager decide for you (or how you have defined it in - the window manager configuration), center the dialogs on the - screen, or drop them where the mouse pointer is when they - are launched. - - - Dialog hints — This will let you change - the behavior of the dialog hints which are the tooltips that - appear when you move your mouse button over a button or part - of the dialog. You may choose to have hints handled like - other windows, or let the window manager decide how to - display them. - - - Place dialogs over application window when - possible — You may choose to place dialog over - the applications when possible which will help you keep your - windows organized on your screen If you are familiar with - other operating systems you may wish to keep this selected - as this is how most operating systems handle dialogs. - -
- Dialog Capplet - - Dialog Capplet - - - -
- - - MDI - - - Gnome Control Center - MDI - - The MDI capplet allows you to change the MDI mode for Gnome - applications. MDI stands for Multiple Document Interface - and refers to the way more than one document is displayed in - Gnome applications. - - - IMPORTANT - - Although this capplet gives you great control over the - look and feel of your applications you should consider - these tools for advanced use only. - - - - The default style in Gnome-compliant applications for MDI is - usually tabs or notebook: it looks like an - address book, your documents are leaves of - this notebook, and you switch between them by using the - tabs. If you do not like - the tab look you may change it here. - - - Default MDI Mode — In addition to - Notebook, you will find - Toplevel and - Modal. Notebook is the - default tab look described above; - Toplevel displays only the active - document on the top view until it is closed and - Modal has only one toplevel which can - contain any of the documents at any one time, however only - one can be displayed. If you have ever used - Emacs, Modal - is very similar to the way Emacs - handles buffers. - - - MDI notebook tab position — If - you choose to use the Notebook style - you may then decide where you want the tabs to appear in - your applications. You may have them at the top, left, - right, or bottom of your application. Keep in mind that - these choices will affect only applications that are Gnome - compliant. - -
- MDI Capplet - - MDI Capplet - - - -
- - - - - - - - Authors - - Gnome Control Center was written by - Jonathan Blandford (jrb@redhat.com). Please send - all comments, suggestions, and bug reports to the Gnome bug tracking - database. (Instructions for submitting bug reports can - be found on-line.) You can also use Bug - Report Tool (bug-buddy), - available in the Utilities submenu of - Main Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dave Mason - (dcm@redhat.com) and Alexander Kirillov - (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu) with some help from other members - of Gnome Documentation Project. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the Gnome Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also add your comments - online by using the Gnome - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gpl-appendix.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gpl-appendix.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6aa6b96..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/gpl-appendix.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,453 +0,0 @@ - - GNU General Public License - - - - Version 2, June 1991 - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of - this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - - - - - Preamble - - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your - freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public - License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change - free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. - This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software - Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit - to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered - by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it - to your programs, too. - - - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. - Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the - freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this - service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you - want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free - programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone - to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These - restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute - copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or - for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You - must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you - must show them these terms so they know their rights. - - - - We protect your rights with two steps: - - - - - copyright the software, and - - - - - offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, - distribute and/or modify the software. - - - - - - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that - everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If - the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its - recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any - problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' - reputations. - - - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. - We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will - individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program - proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be - licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification - follow. - - - - - - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - - Section 0 - - This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice - placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms - of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such - program or work, and a work based on the Program means either - the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a - work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with - modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation - is included without limitation in the term modification.) Each - licensee is addressed as you. - - - - Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by - this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not - restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents - constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running - the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - - - - Section 1 - - You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you - receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately - publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; - keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any - warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License - along with the Program. - - - - You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at - your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - - - - Section 2 - - You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus - forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications - or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided - that you also meet all of these conditions: - - - - - You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that - you changed the files and the date of any change. - - - - - You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or - in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be - licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of - this License. - - - - - If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you - must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most - ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate - copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying - that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program - under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. - - - Exception: - - If the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an - announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an - announcement.) - - - - - - - - - - These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections - of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered - independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, - do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when - you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the - Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose - permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and - every part regardless of who wrote it. - - - - Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights - to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control - the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. - - - - In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program - (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium - does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. - - - - - Section 3 - - - You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under - Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of - Sections 1 and 2 above provided that - you also do one of the following: - - - - - Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which - must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any - third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source - distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, - to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily - used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute - corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial - distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form - with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - - - - - - - The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications - to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules - it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control - compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source - code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or - binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system - on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. - - - - If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a - designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place - counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to - copy the source along with the object code. - - - - - Section 4 - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided - under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the - Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, - parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their - licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - Section 5 - - - You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing - else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. - These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying - or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance - of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or - modifying the Program or works based on it. - - - - - Section 6 - - - Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient - automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify - the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions - on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing - compliance by third parties to this License. - - - - - Section 7 - - - If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other - reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, - agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you - from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously - your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence - you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit - royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or - indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be - to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - - - - If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, - the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply - in other circumstances. - - - - It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property - right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of - protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public - license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software - distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up - to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other - system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. - - - - This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the - rest of this License. - - - - - Section 8 - - - If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents - or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License - may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that - distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License - incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - - - - Section 9 - - - The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License - from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ - in detail to address new problems or concerns. - - - - Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of - this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms - and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. - - - - - Section 10 - - - If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution - conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted - by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions - for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all - derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - - - - NO WARRANTY - Section 11 - - - BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT - PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR - OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, - INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR - PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE - PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - - - - Section 12 - - - IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR - ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU - FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE - USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED - INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH - ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH - DAMAGES. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/nautilus-user-manual.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/nautilus-user-manual.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 5a3f4fe..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/nautilus-user-manual.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3800 +0,0 @@ - - Nautilus User Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Introducing Nautilus - - - Nautilus is a core component of the GNOME desktop - environment. Nautilus provides an easy way to view, manage, and - customize your own files and folders, as well as browse the Web. - - - - Nautilus integrates your access to files, applications, media, - Internet-based resources, and the Web, making it easy and fast for - you to locate and use all the resources available to you. - - - - The Nautilus Window - -
- The Nautilus Window - - Diagram of Nautilus - - - -
- - - - Menu Bar - - - - The eight menus contain options for most file- and folder- - management tasks and let you personalize your view of all the - applications, folders, and files on your hard disk. The - preferences menu, represented by the symbol to the right of the - Help menu, lets you specify your level of Linux and GNOME - experience. - - - - - Toolbar - - - - The toolbar lets you use a single click for browsing and searching - your computer's directories as well as locations on the Web. Click - the Services button for quick access to Eazel Services, a suite of - services specially designed to address the needs of Linux users. - - - - - Location Bar - - - - Use the location bar to enter path names, Web addresses (URLs), or - other types of addresses. The pop-up menu on the right end of the - bar lets you choose various views - for instance, View as Icons - or View as List. Click the + and - signs to enlarge or reduce - icon or list view. Click the magnifying glass to return to original - size. (If you've changed your theme, the magnifying glass may be - replaced by another symbol.) - - - - - Sidebar - - - - The sidebar displays information about the current file or - folder. Each of the four tabs at the bottom of the sidebar provide - additional information or help: - - - - - - - The Tree tab displays the tree, a hierarchical view of your - computer's organization of folders and files. - - - - - - The History tab lists the path names or addresses of locations - you've previously visited. - - - - - - The Help tab gives you quick access to information resources - - manuals, GNOME info pages, Linux man pages, and more. - - - - - - The Notes tab provides a space where you can jot notes about the - current folder. - - - - - - - Note: If your user level is set to Beginner or if you've changed - your sidebar preferences, you may not see all four sidebar - tabs. - - - - - Status Bar - - - - The status bar contains information about menu items. To see an - explanation for a menu item, point to it and read the status bar - text. - - - - - Main Panel - - - - The main panel in the Nautilus window is where you do most of your - browsing. Files, folders, and applications are displayed - here. You have several options for modifying and customizing your - views. - - - - The Nautilus Desktop - - - The desktop is the background area of your screen. If Nautilus was - pre-installed on your GNOME system, Nautilus draws the - desktop. The desktop on your computer can look like your physical - desktop - it can be full of folders, icons, and works in progress, - or it can be clear. Nautilus lets you organize it the way - you want. - - - - If Nautilus doesn't already draw the desktop on your system, do - this: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu (shown below) and choose - Preferences. - - - - - - In the Desktop section, select "Use Nautilus to draw the - desktop." - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - Initially, the desktop contains three items: a house icon that - represents your home location, an Eazel Services icon that takes - you to Eazel's Web site, and a Trash icon. - - - - You can create folders on the desktop or drag additional files - and folders from the Nautilus window to the desktop. For instance, - you can create a folder that contains your current projects and - keep it on the desktop for easy access. You also mount disks (such - as floppies or CD-ROMs) on the desktop. - - - - To see the options for using your desktop space, right-click - anywhere on the desktop (outside a window). - - - - - - - - Setting Nautilus to Start Automatically - - - You can adjust your GNOME settings so Nautilus starts - automatically whenever you start GNOME. Follow these steps: - - - - - - - Make sure Nautilus is running. You should see the Nautilus - desktop or an open Nautilus window. - - - - - - Log out of GNOME (open the GNOME Main Menu and choose Log out). - - - - - - In the Log out dialog box, click the "Save current setup" checkbox. - - - - - - Proceed to log out. The next time you log into GNOME, Nautilus - will start automatically. - - - - - - - To stop Nautilus from launching automatically: - - - - - - - Open the GNOME Main Menu (footprint) and choose - Programs - Settings - SessionStartup - Programs. (The menu option may be - Session Properties and Startup Programs.) - - - - - - The GNOME Control Center opens in the Session Properties and - Startup Programs section. If you see a Startup Programs tab, - click it. - - - - - - Click the Browse Currently Running Programs button. - - - - - - In the list of programs, locate and select "nautilus." - - - - - - Click Remove. - - - - - - Make sure the checkbox labeled "Automatically save changes to - session" is enabled. (If your GNOME Control Center window has - tabs, this checkbox is under the Session Options tab.) - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - - - - - About Nautilus - - - Nautilus is developed by Eazel, a founding member of the GNOME - Foundation, with the help of the GNOME community. Nautilus is a - free software project developed under the GNU General Public - License (GPL). - - - - - - - - - - - Navigating Your Computer and the Internet - - - This section explains how to use Nautilus to keep track of the - folders and files on your machine, as well as browse Web pages on - the Internet. - - - - - Viewing Your Home Folder - - - When you first launch Nautilus, you'll see your home folder in the - Nautilus window. Three areas of the Nautilus window contain - information about your folder: - - - - - The location bar, which contains your - folder's path name - - - - - The sidebar, which contains a folder icon - representing your folder - - - - - The main panel, where you see icons - representing the items in your folder - - -
- Location Bar, Sidebar, and Main Panel - - Diagram of Nautilus - - - -
- - - Your home folder also appears on your desktop, represented by a - house icon. Double-clicking the house icon opens a new Nautilus - window with your home folder displayed. - - - - Note about the home folder: Depending on your user-level setting, - your home folder may be the default Nautilus home folder, which - contains basic information about your computer and pointers to - some useful applications, or the home folder defined for you in - your Linux settings (normally /home/your_name). - - - - - - - Navigating Your Files and Folders - - - You can move among your folders by using the navigation buttons - in the toolbar and the icons in the Nautilus window. - - - - Try this - - Using your home folder as a reference point, navigate your hard - disk: - - - - - - - To view your home folder, click the Home button. - - - - - - To move to the folder that contains your home folder - that is, - to move one folder up in the hierarchy - click the Up button. - - - - - - To return to the home folder, click the Back button. - - - - - - To view the contents of any folder, double-click its - icon (normally a folder icon). - - - - - - If you think that the contents of a folder have changed while - you've been viewing it, click the Refresh button to update the - information. - - - - - - To stop an item from loading, click the Stop button. - - - - - - - - - - - The Tree - - - You can get an overview of all of your computer's files and - folders by using the tree. Many people find using the tree to - navigate faster than selecting and opening folders. - - - - To see the tree, click the Tree tab at the bottom of the - sidebar. Click the tab again to put the tree away. - - - - If you don't see the Tree tab, right-click the sidebar and choose - Tree. - - - - The starting point - the top of the tree - is the root directory, - represented by a slash (/). Click the disclosure triangle next to - the root directory to open or close the list of all your - computer's folders and files. The items on your computer are - arranged hierarchically. The root directory may list network - locations in addition to locations on your computer. (Note: In - addition to the root directory identified by a /, there is a - directory named root.) - - - - Try this - - Open and close a folder in the tree: - - - - - - - To open or close a folder in the tree, click its - triangle. - - - - - - To display the contents of a folder in the main panel, - click the folder's name in the tree. - - - - - - - - - - - Viewing and Opening Files - - Icon and List Views - - - The first time you launch Nautilus, you see folders and files - represented as icons. This is the icon view. - - - - Try this - - Look at your files and folders in two views: - - - - - - - To see the contents of a folder as a list, click the View as - pop-up menu and choose View as List. - - - - - - To sort the items displayed in list view, click the - column headers (Name, Size, Type, and Date - Modified). - - - - - - To return to icon view, open the View as pop-up menu and choose - View as Icons. - - - - - - To sort the items in icon view, open the View menu, choose Lay - Out Items, and then choose a layout option. (For more about the - layout options, see Choosing File - Layouts.) - - - - - - -
- The View as Pop-up Menu - - Screenshot of view menu - - - -
- - - Zooming In or Out - - - - You can enlarge or reduce the size of items in either list or - icon view and stretch individual icons in icon view. - - - - Try this - - Enlarge and reduce icons in either icon view or list view: - - - - - - - To enlarge or reduce all the icons simultaneously, - click the plus (+) and minus (-) symbols in the location - bar. - - - - - - To return them to their original size, click the - symbol between the - and + symbols (normally a magnifying - glass). - - - - - - - - Try this - - Stretch an icon in icon view: - - - - - - - Click to select the icon you want to stretch. - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Stretch Icon. A box appears around - the icon, with "handles" in each - corner. - - - - - - Click and drag the handles to resize the icon. To cancel the - stretch, press the Escape key. - - - - - - To remove the stretching handles, click away from the icon. - - - - - - - - To return an icon to its original size, select the icon; then - open the Edit menu and choose Restore Icon's Original Size. - - - - Previewing Files in Icon View - - - - You can preview many files in the Nautilus window just by - looking at their icons in the main panel - you don't need to open the - files. - - - - - - - Text files: The icons for most text files display the files' - first few words or lines of text. If you enlarge a text file's - icon by zooming or stretching, you can see more of the - text. - - - - - - Image files: The icons for most image files appear as thumbnails - - small versions of the image. - - - - - - Music files: You can preview common types of music files by - positioning the mouse pointer over the icons. Music plays as - long as the pointer is over a music file's - icon. - - - - - - - Using Nautilus as a Viewer - - - - You can use the Nautilus window to look at a file's contents - without opening it for editing in an application. Using a viewer - instead of opening an application can save time and memory. - - - - Most text files automatically appear in the Nautilus window when - you double-click their icons. However, some files open - automatically in their applications. For such files, right-click - the icon and choose Open With. Then choose the appropriate - viewer. - - - - Note: You can control which viewer or application an individual - file automatically opens in. See Choosing - Applications to Handle Files. - - - - Here are some of the file types for which the Nautilus window can - act as a viewer: - - - - - - - - Text - ASCII text, HTML - - - Image GIF (without - animation), JPEG, PNG, SVG (without interactive features), - XPM - - - Music AIFF, MP3 (for - MP3 files located on your hard disk), RIFF, WAV - - - - - - - - Opening Individual Files - - - - You can open files in Nautilus in several ways: - - - - - - - Double-click the file's icon (unless you've changed - your preference so that a single click activates items). - - - - - - Click the file's icon, open the File menu, and choose Open or - Open With. - - - - - - Right-click the file's icon, and choose Open or one of the Open - With options. - - - - - - Click the file's icon, and press the Enter key. - - - - - - - Note: If the application you want to use is not listed when you - choose Open With, you can add the application to the list. See - Choosing Applications to Handle Files. - - - - - - - Viewing and Playing MP3 Files - - - Nautilus provides a special set of features to help you enjoy your - MP3 files. Using the View as Music option, you can set up a folder - of MP3 files as an album containing tracks of your choice and - represented by an album cover (custom image) that you - specify. - - - - Try this - - Use your collection of MP3 files to create a custom music album: - - - - - - - Go to the folder containing your MP3 files. - - - - - - Click the View as pop-up menu and choose View as Music. - - - - - - -
- The View as Pop-up Menu - - Screenshot of View Menu - - - -
- - - Only the MP3 files in your folder are visible in this view. For - each file, you see a listing of titles, artists, bit rates, and - playing times. - - - - To begin playing the tracks in your album, click the music - player's play button. The selected track begins to play; when it - has finished, the next track begins playing automatically. You can - also double-click a file to play it. - - -
- The Music Player - - Screenshot of Music Player - - - -
- - - - Play button - - - - - Pause button - - - - - Stop button - - - - - To rewind or fast forward, drag the slider. - - - - If you wish, you can choose a cover image to be displayed for your - music folder: - - - - - - - Go to the folder containing your MP3 - files. - - - - - - Click the View as pop-up menu and choose View as Music. - - - - - - Click the Set Cover Image button in the bottom right corner of - the Nautilus window. - - - - - - Browse to find the graphic you want to use; then - select it. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - - - - Mounting Floppy Disks and CD-ROMs - - - If you have a disk in a CD-ROM or floppy drive, you can mount it - from the desktop. Do this: - - - - - - - Make sure the disk is in the drive. - - - - - - Right-click anywhere on the desktop (outside a window) and - choose Disks - Floppy or - Disks - CD-ROM from the pop-up - menu. - - - - - - - - - - Navigating the Internet - - - You can use Nautilus as a browser for viewing Web pages and FTP - sites. - - - - To view a Web page, type its Web address (URL) in the Location - bar. - - - - Try this - - Connect to Eazel's Web site by typing eazel.com in the location - bar, and pressing Enter. It's not necessary to type http: or www. - - - -
- The Location Bar - - Screenshot of Location Bar - - - -
- - - When you're viewing a Web page, Nautilus gives you additional - browser choices in case you want to use a full-featured Web - browser. To select a different browser, click one of the buttons in - the sidebar. - - - - - - - - - Viewing Your Navigation History - - - When you navigate your computer or the Internet, you may want to - return to a page, file, or folder you've previously viewed. - - - - You can view your navigation history in three ways: - - - - - - - Look at the bottom section of the Go menu to see a list of the - things you've viewed during the current session. - - - - - - Click the History tab at the bottom of the sidebar. (To put the - History tab away, click the tab again.) - - - - - - Right-click the Back or Forward button. - - - - - - - You can have Nautilus clear the list of locations you've - previously visited. This removes the previous locations listed in - the Go menu, the History tab, and under the Back and Forward - buttons. - - - - To clear the list of previously visited locations: - - - - - - Open the Go menu and choose Forget History. - - - - - - - - - Bookmarking Your Favorite Locations - - - You will probably discover that you frequently visit certain - locations - Web pages, folders on your computer, and favorite - photos or text files. You can bookmark these items in Nautilus, so - that you can return to them easily. - - - - Creating a Bookmark - - - - To bookmark an item: - - - - - - - Go to the item you want to bookmark. For example, go to - http://www.happypenguin.org. - - - - - - Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Add Bookmark. - - - - - - To use your bookmark, open the Bookmarks menu and choose your - bookmark from the bottom of the menu. - - - - - - - Using the Built-In Bookmarks - - - - Nautilus comes with some built-in bookmarks arranged in folders in - the middle part of the Bookmarks menu. They take you to the Web - sites of organizations and companies of interest to Linux - users. - - - - If your user level is set to Intermediate or Advanced, you can - turn off the built-in bookmarks: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu and choose Preferences. - - - - - - In the left-hand column of the Preferences dialog box, click - Navigation. - - - - - - Select Don't include the built-in bookmarks in the Bookmarks - menu. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - Editing Your Bookmarks - - - - You can rename a bookmark, change its location, or remove it - altogether: - - - - - - - Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Edit Bookmarks. - - - - - - Select the bookmark you want to edit. - - - - - - Type a new name or location for the bookmark, or click Remove. - - - - - - When you're done editing bookmarks, close the dialog box. - - - - - - - - - - - - Searching Your Computer and the Internet - - - Nautilus provides a Find feature for locating files and directories - on your computer and a Web Search feature for finding Web pages. - - - - - Finding Items on Your Computer - - - When you search for items on your computer, you can use one - of these Nautilus search utilities: - - - - - - - Simple searches: If your user level is set to Beginner, Nautilus - performs a quick and easy search by file name. - - - - - - Complex searches: If your user level is set to Intermediate or - Advanced, Nautilus searches the files on your hard disk by file - name, creator, file type, and other attributes, as well as by - the actual content of files. - - - - - - - Fast Versus Slow Searches - - - - Nautilus uses Medusa, a daemon, which is a piece of software that - runs in the background. Medusa creates an index of all the items - on your hard disk and mounted volumes, including their names, - size, creation date, and other attributes. In addition, Medusa - indexes the actual content of each file - so - you can find any word or phrase in any file on your computer when - you search by content. - - - - Medusa runs when your computer is idle, so it doesn't disrupt your - activities. - - - - If Medusa has not finished indexing your system or is not running - on your computer, when you do a search you may see a message - letting you know that Nautilus can't perform a fast search. - - - - If you suspect that Medusa is not turned on, do this: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu and choose Preferences. - - - - - - From the left column of the Preferences dialog box, choose - Search. - - - - - - In the Fast Search section, turn on "Enable fast search." - - - - - - Note: For Medusa to perform its indexing task, the crond - program must also be running. If you have turned off crond, Medusa - won't work. - - - - - - - Simple Searches - - - To find an item on your hard disk (Beginner user level): - - - - - - - Click the Find button in the toolbar. The location bar is - replaced by the find bar. - - - - - - Enter the name of the item you want to find in the Find field. - - - - - - Click Find Them. - - - - - - When you're done searching, click the Find button again to put - away the Find bar. - - - - - - - - - - Complex Searches - - - To find an item on your hard disk (Intermediate or Advanced user - level): - - - - - - - Click the Find button in the toolbar. - - - - - - From the two pop-up menus, choose criteria to define your - search. The options are explained below. - - - - - - (Optional) To further narrow your search, click More Options and - choose additional criteria. - - - - - - Enter the item you want to find - a particular file name, - modification date, and so forth - in the Find field. - - - - - - Click Find Them. - - - - - - When you're done searching, click the Find button again to put - away the Find bar. - - - - - - - - - - - Search Category - Modifier - Search Field or List - - - - - Name: Nautilus searches the names of files on your hard - disk. - - - - Specify if the files should have names that contain, begin - with, or end with the characters you type. You can also - choose "matches glob" or "matches regexp" to do Linux - wildcard searches. - - - - Enter part or all of the file name you want to find. - - - - - - - - Content: Nautilus searches the content of files on your hard - disk. - - - - Specify if the files should have content that includes - all, any, some, or none of the word or phrase you type. - - - - Enter a word or phrase you want to search for in the content of - the files on your hard disk. - - - - - - - - Type: Nautilus searches for the file types you specify. - - - - Choose "is" or "is not" to include or exclude file types from - the search. - - - - Choose a file type from the pop-up menu. - - - - - - - Size - - - Specify if the files should be larger or smaller than - the number you type. - - - Type a size, in kilobytes. - - - - - - With Emblem - - - Specify if the files should be marked with, or not marked - with, a particular emblem. - - - Choose an emblem. - - - - - - Last Modified - - - Choose an option to narrow down the last modification date of - the files. - - - - Enter a date. The current date is filled in by default, but - you can delete it and type any date you want. - - - - - - - Owner - - - Choose "is" or "is not" to include or exclude files owned by a - particular user. - - - - Enter the name of a user who owns files on your - system. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Searching the Internet - - - To search for pages on the Web, click the Web Search button in the - toolbar. Eazel's Search page appears. Type the word or phrase for - which you want to search, and click Search. - - - - You can choose a search engine from the ones listed above the - Search box. For instance, choose Google by clicking the Google - link. - - - - If you like, you can set the Web Search button to take you to your - favorite Web search service: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu and choose Preferences. - - - - - - In the left-hand portion of the Preferences dialog box, click - Search. - - - - - - In the Search Engines section, enter the Web address (URL) for - your favorite search service. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - - - - - Managing Your Files and Folders - - - This section explains how to use Nautilus to organize your files - and folders. - - - - - Moving and Copying Files and Folders - - - The easiest way to move a file or folder is to work with two - Nautilus windows. - - - - To move a file or folder to a new location, do this: - - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose New Window. You now have two - Nautilus windows. - - - - - - In one window, locate the file or folder you want to move. In - the other window, locate the destination - folder. - - - - - - Using the left mouse button, click the file or folder you want - to move and drag it to the other window. - - - - - - - Note: If your hard disk is divided into partitions (volumes), - dragging a file or folder from one partition to another copies the - file or folder instead of moving it. - - - - To copy a file or folder to a new folder while retaining the - original, do this: - - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose New Window. You now have two - Nautilus windows. - - - - - - In one window, locate the file or folder you want to copy. In - the other window, locate the destination - folder. - - - - - - Click and hold the right mouse button on the item; then drag it - to the destination folder. A pop-up menu appears. - - - - - - Choose Copy Here to place a copy of the item in the destination - folder. Choose Link Here to create a link to the item. - - - - - - - - - - Creating New Folders - - - You can create a new folder anywhere in the folder hierarchy on - your computer, as long as you have the appropriate permissions. - - - - Do this: - - - - - - - Go to the folder that will contain the new folder. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose New Folder. - - - - - - - Nautilus creates a new folder inside the current folder. It has - the name untitled folder. You can rename - the new folder. - - - - - - - Files and Folders on the Desktop - - - You can treat the desktop as an extension of the Nautilus window - and move, copy, and create folders there. - - - - To move a file or folder to the desktop, use the left mouse button - to click and drag it to the desktop. You can put the file or - folder anywhere you like on the desktop. - - - - To put a copy of an item on the desktop or to create a link to it, - do this: - - - - - - - In the Nautilus window, locate the file or folder you want to - copy. - - - - - - Click and hold the right mouse button on the item; then drag it - to the desktop. A pop-up menu appears. - - - - - - Choose Copy Here to place a copy of the item on the - desktop. Choose Link Here to create a link to the item. - - - - - - - To create a new folder on the desktop, right-click anywhere on the - desktop (outside a window), and choose New Folder from the - pop-up menu. - - - - Tip: If you're working on the desktop and you want to open a - Nautilus window, right-click anywhere on the desktop and choose - New Window from the pop-up menu. - - - - - - - Duplicating Files and Folders - - - To duplicate an item, do this: - - - - - - - Click the icon of the item you want to duplicate. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Duplicate. - - - - - - - A copy of the item is added to the current folder. You can rename the new folder. - - - - Shortcut: In either icon or list view, right-click the item you - want to duplicate and choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu. - - - - - - - Renaming Files and Folders - - - To rename an item in icon view, do this: - - - - - - - Click the icon of the item you want to rename. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Rename. The icon label now has a - text box around it. - - - - - - Type a new name for the item, and press Return. - - - - - - - To rename an item in list view, do this: - - - - - - - Click to select the item you want to rename. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Show Properties. - - - - - - Type a new name for the item in the space provided in the Basic - tab. - - - - - - Close the dialog box. - - - - - - - Shortcut: In either icon or list view, right-click the item you - want to rename. In icon view, choose Rename from the context menu; - in list view, choose Show Properties. - - - - - - - Deleting Files and Folders - - - To delete an item, do this: - - - - - - - Click the icon of the item you want to delete. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Move to Trash. - - - - - - To empty the trash, open the File menu and choose Empty - Trash. (Empty the trash only if you're sure you want to - permanently delete the items in it!) - - - - - - - Shortcuts: In either icon or list view, right-click the item you - want to delete and choose Move to Trash from the pop-up menu. Or click - and drag the item to the Trash icon on the desktop. - - - - - - - Changing File Permissions - - - You can change permissions for folders and files you own. If - you're logged in as root (for experts only), you can change - permissions for any folders and files on your computer. - - - - - - - Click to select the item for which you want to change - permissions. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Show Properties. The Properties - dialog box opens for the file or folder you selected. - - - - - - Click the Permissions tab. - - - - - - From the File Group menu, choose the group that this file or - folder belongs to. - - - - - - In the table, click to put a checkmark under each type of - permission you want to grant. For instance, you might give the - owner and users in the group permission to read (view), write - (edit), and execute the file, and give others permission to read - the file but not write to it. - - - - - - When you are done managing permissions, close the dialog box. - - - - - - - Note: Execute is normally used only for programs and for folders - with directory listings that you wish to make available. - - - - - - - - - Customizing Nautilus - - - You can customize Nautilus in many ways so that its appearance and - behavior meet your needs and taste. This section explains how. - - - - - Setting Your User Level - - - When you first lanched Nautilus, you were asked to choose your - user level: Beginner, Intermediate, or Advanced. The user level - dictates the amount of detail you see while navigating your files - and folders: - - - - - - - Beginner: For users who have no previous experience - with Linux or GNOME. - - - - - - Intermediate: For users who have had some experience with Linux - or GNOME but don't want to see every detail of their - system. - - - - - - Advanced: For users who like to see every detail of - their system, including the ugly stuff. - - - - - - - To change your user level, open the preferences menu and choose - the level you want. - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - One way to see the difference between the levels is to go to your - home directory and then compare what you see as you select each - level in turn. Be sure to return to the level with which you're - comfortable when you're done. - - - - - - - Setting Preferences - - - Several preference settings that you can adjust are located in the - Preferences dialog box. The available settings depend on your user - level - intermediate and advanced users have access to more - settings than beginners. - - - - The preference settings adjust the appearance of Nautilus, the - behavior of files and folders when you view and click them, the - type of searches performed when you click the Find or Web Search - buttons, and more. - - - - To open the Preferences dialog box use the preferences menu, - shown here. - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - To customize preferences: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu and choose Preferences. - - - - - - From the left column in the Preferences dialog box, choose the - type of settings you want to adjust (for instance, Icon & List Views). - - - - - - Adjust each group of settings as desired. - - - - - - When you are finished setting preferences, click - OK to close the window. - - - - - - - - - - Showing and Hiding Bars - - - The Nautilus window shows these bars by default: - - - - sidebar - toolbar - location bar - status bar (at the bottom of the window) - - - - You may want to hide one or more of these bars to save space on - your screen. - - - - To hide and show bars: - - - - - - - Open the View menu and click one of the options in the second - section. For instance, to hide the sidebar, click Hide Sidebar. - - - - - - To see the bar again, open the View menu and choose one of the - Show options. - - - - - - - Note: If you hide a bar in your Nautilus window and then open - another Nautilus window, the bar is not hidden in the new - window. To specify which bars should be hidden or displayed in new - windows: - - - - - - - Open the preferences menu (shown below) and choose Preferences. - - - - - - In the left column of the Preferences dialog box, click - Appearance. - - - - - - In the Views section, deselect any bars you want hidden in new - windows. - - - - - - Click OK to close the window. - - - - - -
- The Preferences Menu - - Screenshot of Preferences Menu - - - -
- - - - - Choosing File Layouts - - - File Layout in Icon View - - - - To change the layout of files you're viewing, open the View menu - and choose Lay Out Items. Then choose how you want the files - arranged. - - - - - - - - Manually - You can drag icons to arrange them as you like. - - - - By Name - The files appear alphabetically by name. - - - - By Size - Files are displayed from largest to smallest. - - - - By Type - - Files are arranged in groups, such as text, image, and - so on. All folders are grouped. - - - - - By Modification Date - The most recently modified files appear first. - - - - By Emblems - - If you've added emblems to icons, the files are grouped - according to emblems (files without emblems are at the - end). - - - - - Tighter Layout - Icons are closer together. - - - - Reversed Order - Reverses the order for the option you've chosen. - - - - - - - - File Layout in List View - - - - In list view, you can change the layout of files by clicking the - column headings. For instance, to arrange files by type, click the - Type column heading. Click again to reverse the order. - - - - See also Viewing and Opening - Files. - - - - - - - Changing Themes and Backgrounds - - - You can customize the decor of your Nautilus window by choosing an - overall theme and by changing the background color or image of - specific objects. - - - - Choosing a New Theme - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Nautilus Themes. - - - - - - Choose a theme. The appearance changes immediately, so you can - see how the theme looks. - - - - - - When you're finished, click Done. - - - - - - - Changing Backgrounds - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Backgrounds and Emblems. - - - - - - In the Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box, choose Patterns or - Colors. - - - - - - Drag a tile to a part of the Nautilus window. For instance, - change the color of the sidebar by dragging the yellow tile. To - restore the orginal setting, drag the Reset tile. - - - - - - When you're finished, click Done. - - - - - - - Note: The Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box also lets you drag - emblems to attach to individual - file and folder icons. - - - - Adding and Removing Custom Backgrounds - - - - If your user level is set to Intermediate or Advanced, you can add - and remove backgrounds and colors in the list of customization - choices. - - - - Any image file can be a background. To add a background to the - customization choices: - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Backgrounds and Emblems. - - - - - - In the Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box, choose Patterns - - - - - - Click Add a New Pattern. - - - - - - Locate the image file you want to add to the set of background - patterns. - - - - - - Select the image file and click OK. The image is added as a new - tile. - - - - - - - To add a new color to the background color choices: - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Backgrounds and Emblems. - - - - - - In the Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box, choose Colors. - - - - - - Click Add a New Color. - - - - - - On the color wheel, click the color you want to use and click - OK. - - - - - - Type a name for the color and click OK. The color is added as a - new tile. - - - - - - - To remove a custom pattern or color from the set of pattern and - color tiles: - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Backgrounds and Emblems. - - - - - - In the Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box, choose Patterns or - Colors. - - - - - - Click Remove a Pattern or Remove a Color. - - - - - - Any patterns or color tiles you have previously added are - displayed. Click the one you want to remove. - - - - - - Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other pattern or color tiles you - want to remove. - - - - - - Click Done. - - - - - - - Note: If you remove a pattern or color tile that you have applied - as a background for an object, the object continues to display that - pattern or color. - - - - - - - Customizing Icons and Icon Captions - - - Icons appear with information in their captions - normally the - directory name and number of items for directories and the name - and size for files. If you zoom in for a closer look at icons, - more information appears. - - - - Customizing Icon Captions - - - - You can customize the information below icons - the icon - captions. Although the file name must always appear first, you can - specify which other information to show and change the order of - the information. - - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Icon Captions. - - - - - - Click the first button and choose from the list. The information - you choose will be the first thing shown below an icon, after - the file name. - - - - - - Repeat step 2 for the second and third buttons. - - - - - - When you are done customizing icon captions, close the dialog - box. - - - - - - - Note: To see the entire icon caption, you may need to zoom in - (click the + symbol in the location bar). - - - - Customizing Icons - - - - You can change the icon for an individual folder or file, giving - it a custom icon: - - - - - - - Click the icon for the file or folder. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Show Properties. - - - - - - In the Properties dialog box, click Select Custom Icon. - - - - - - Find and select the image you want to use as a custom icon; then - click OK. - - - - - - Close the Properties dialog box. - - - - - - - You can also drag an image file to an icon you want to customize: - - - - - - - If you have a tab (Tree, Notes, History, or Help) open in the - sidebar, put it away so that you can see the icon you want - to customize. (To put away a tab, click it.) - - - - - - Double-click the item you want to customize so that its icon is - displayed in the sidebar. - - - - - - Drag an image to the icon. The image replaces the icon. - - - - - -
- Creating a Custom Icon - - Screenshot of Custom Icon - - - -
- - - Tip: You may want to work with two Nautilus windows when you - customize an icon. Open the File menu and choose New - Window. You can drag an image from one window to the icon - you're customizing. - - - - Adding Emblems to Icons - - - - Emblems let you tag individual files as Urgent, Favorite, and so - forth. To add an emblem to an icon: - - - - - - - Make sure that the folder or file to which you want to add an - emblem is visible in the Nautilus window. You can be in Icon or - List view. - - - - - - Open the Edit menu and choose Backgrounds and Emblems. - - - - - - In the Backgrounds and Emblems dialog box, choose Emblems. - - - - - - Select an emblem and drag it to the icon you want to - customize. To remove emblems, drag the Erase emblem to the icon. - - - - - - Click Done. - - - - - - - You can add as many emblems as you like. - - - - Try this - - Use emblems to organize your files. - - - - - Attach Oh No! or Urgent emblems to the files that need immediate - attention; then open the View menu and choose Lay Out Items By - Emblems. The files with emblems are displayed at the top in icon view - and first in list view. - - - - If you use emblems, you can also search by emblem. - - - - - - - Choosing a Desktop Background - - - You can change the color of your desktop, or give it new - "wallpaper." Do this: - - - - - - - Right-click anywhere on the desktop (outside a window), and - choose Change Desktop Background from the pop-up menu. The - GNOME Control Center opens with the Background Image section - displayed. - - - - - - To use an image as the background, choose an item from the - pop-up menu under Wallpaper or click Browse to find an image - file on your computer. - - - - - - If you're using an image as a background, choose the effect you - want: Tiled, Centered, Scaled, or Embossed Logo. Click Try to - see how the styles look. - - - - - - To use a color as the background, click the color tiles next to - Primary Color and Secondary Color and choose colors from the - color wheel. - - - - - - From the pop-up menu under Color, choose Solid, Horizontal - Gradient, or Vertical Gradient. Click Try to see how the - gradients look. - - - - - - Be sure that Use GNOME to set Background is selected. - - - - - - Click OK; then close the GNOME Control Center. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Choosing Applications to Handle Files - - - This section explains how to customize the way files are opened for - editing and viewing. - - - - What Are MIME Types? - - - MIME types are a standard way to identify files so that they can - be easily transmitted over the Internet. MIME stands for - "Multipurpose Internet Mail Extention." Each type of file is - assigned a specific MIME type. For instance, the MIME type for - HTML files is "text/html," and the MIME type for JPEG files is - "image/jpeg." A file's MIME type tells Internet applications such - as browsers and email programs what type of file is being - exchanged, how to encode it for transmission, and how to decode it - when it arrives at its destination. - - - - Unless you've specified that a particular application or viewer - should open a file, it normally opens automatically in an - application that's appropriate for the type. For instance, a JPEG - file normally opens automatically in a graphics application. - - - - You can choose which application or viewer opens automatically for - a particular type of file. You can also set up new applications to - handle particular types of files. - - - - - - - Adding and Removing Applications - - - When you select a file and choose Open With, you see a list of - applications that can open that particular file. You also have the - choices Other Application and Other Viewer, which let you use an - application that's not in the list to open or view the - file. - - - - You can modify the list of applications you see when you choose - Open With: - - - - - - - Click the icon of the file for which you want to change the Open - With options. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose - Open With Other - Application. A dialog box opens that - lists all the applications currently able to open this particular - type of file. Some applications in the list are tagged "in the - menu" for this file type; others are tagged "not in the - menu." - - - - - - Select an application in the list and click Modify. - - - - - - Choose the option you want. You can choose to add or remove the - application from the menu for this particular file or for all - files of this type. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - - Click Done. (If you want to open the file now, click Choose.) - - - - - - - To modify the list of viewers you see when you choose Open With, - follow steps 1 through 6 above but choose Other Viewer instead of - Other Application in step 2. (A viewer lets you view but not edit a - file. Opening a file in a viewer can save time and memory.) - - - - - - - Changing the Default Application - - - The default application or viewer opens a file automatically when - you select the file and choose Open from the File menu. To specify - the default: - - - - - - - Click the icon of the file for which you want to change the - default. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose - Open With Other - Application - - - - - - Select the application you want to use as the default and click - Modify. - - - - - - Choose the option you want. You can choose to use the - application as the default for this particular file or for all - files of this type. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - - Click Done. (If you want to open the file now, click Choose.) - - - - - - - To change the default viewer, follow steps 1 through 6 above, but - choose Other Viewer instead of Other Application in step 2. - - - - - - - Configuring Additional Applications (Advanced) - - - The Open With Other dialog box (described above) lists all the - applications that Nautilus can currently use to open a file. Your - computer may have additional applications that can open the file - but that aren't in the list. You can configure additional - applications so that they appear in the list: - - - - - - - Click to select the file for which you want to configure a new - application. - - - - - - Open the File menu and choose Open - With Other - Application - - - - - - In the File Types and Programs section, click Go There. The GNOME - Control Center opens, with the File Types and Programs - preferences displayed. - - - - - - In the list, find the file type for the file you're working - with. For instance, if you're configuring an additional - application for a text file, locate the entry for text files in - the list. (Clicking the column headers sorts the - list.) - - - - - - Once you've found the file type, click to select - it. - - - - - - In the Default Action section, click Edit List. - - - - - - Click Add Application. - - - - - - Type the application's name and the command that launches the - application. The command is the same as the command you'd type - if you were launching the application from a GNOME terminal - window. - - - - - - Click OK in each of the next three dialog boxes to dismiss them. - - - - - - - To edit the name or command for an application, follow steps 1 - through 9 but click Edit Application instead of Add Application - in step 7. - - - - To remove an application, follow steps 1 through 7 but click - Delete Application instead of Add Application in step 7. - - - - - - - Adding a New MIME Type (Advanced) - - - You can set up default applications for new file types that are - not currently configured on your system. - - - - First, add the new file type: - - - - - - - Open the GNOME Main Menu and choose - Programs - Settings GNOME Control - Center. - - - - - - Choose File Types and Programs in the GNOME Control Center's - left-hand column. - - - - - - Click Add New MIME Type. - - - - - - In the Add MIME Type dialog box, enter the MIME type and a - description. For instance, if you have a new kind of image file - of type alf (for alfie files), you'd enter image/x-alf as the - MIME type and Alfie image as the description. - - - - - - Click OK. Your new MIME type is added to the list. - - - - - - - Second, associate a file extension: - - - - - - - Select your new MIME type in the list and click Change File - Extensions. - - - - - - Click Add. - - - - - - Type a file extension (for instance, .alf for the alfie image - files in the example) and click OK. - - - - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - Third, specify an icon: - - - - - - Select your new MIME type in the list and click Change Icon. - - - - - Choose an icon and click OK. - - - - - - Fourth, define the application(s) that can open files of this - type: - - - - - - - Select your new MIME type in the list. - - - - - - In the Default Action section, click Edit List. - - - - - - Click Add Application. - - - - - - Type the application's name and the command that launches the - application. The command is the same as the command you'd type if - you were launching the application from a GNOME terminal - window. - - - - - - Click OK in each of the next three dialog boxes to dismiss them. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Eazel Services - - - Eazel Services are Internet-based tools designed to simplify - system management for Linux users. Nautilus and Eazel Services - work together to make your life easier. - - - - Eazel Services include - - - - - - - Eazel Online Storage, for file backup - - - - - - File sharing capability - - - - - - Eazel Software Catalog, for easy installation of - software titles - - - - - - The Nautilus installer - - - - - - - Registering with Eazel - - - - When you first launched Nautilus, you were asked if you wanted to - register for Eazel Services. If you registered at that time, click - the Services button in the Nautilus window and log in, using your - user name and password. - - - - If you have not already registered, click the Services button to - see a registration screen. Follow the steps for registering. - - - - - - - - Nautilus Keyboard Shortcuts - - - These keyboard shortcuts are available when you're working in the - Nautilus window or on the Nautilus desktop. - - - - - - - - Keystroke Sequence - Result - - - Ctrl-B - Add Bookmark - - - Ctrl-X - Cut Text - - - Ctrl-C - Copy Text - - - Ctrl-V - Paste Text - - - Ctrl-A - Select All (select all files, etc.) - - - Ctrl-N - New Folder - - - Ctrl-O - Open - - - Ctrl-W - Close Window - - - Shift-Ctrl-W - Close All Windows - - - Ctrl-I - Show Properties - - - Ctrl-T - Move to Trash - - - Ctrl-D - Duplicate - - - Ctrl-L - Create Link - - - Ctrl-F - Find - - - Shift-Ctrl-F - Web Search - - - Ctrl-[ - Back - - - Ctrl-] - Forward - - - Ctrl-U - Up One Level - - - Ctrl-H - Home - - - Ctrl-R - Refresh - - - Ctrl-= - Zoom In - - - Ctrl-- - Zoom Out - - - - - - - - - - Default Emblems - - - Nautilus applies emblems automatically to icons for files that are - read or write only and to icons that are links (aliases) to other - files or folders. - - - - The default emblems change depending on your theme. The ones shown - here are for two of the Nautilus themes, but if you have a custom - theme, your emblems may be different. - - -
- Read Only - - Screenshot of Read Only Emblem - - - -
- - - Read only: You have permission to view this file or folder, but you - can't modify it. - - -
- No Read, No Write - - Screenshot of No Permissions Emblem - - - -
- - - You can't view or modify this file or folder. - - - - - - A link icon denotes a file that contains no content of its own but - links to a file or folder located elsewhere on the - computer. Clicking this icon opens the linked file or folder. (A - link is similar to a shortcut in Windows or an alias in the Mac - OS.) - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/panel.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/panel.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f50feab..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/panel.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2414 +0,0 @@ - - The GNOME Panel - - Introduction - - - Panel - - The GNOME Panel is the heart of the GNOME - user interface and acts as a repository for the Main Menu, user menus, application launchers, applets (applications which run entirely - within the panel), drawers, and - several special objects. - The Panel was designed to be highly - configurable. You can easily customize its behavior and - appearance and add or remove - objects to suite your personal needs and preferences. You - can even have multiple panels, - each with its own appearance, properties, and contents. This - flexibility allows you to easily create a comfortable and - efficient personalized desktop environment. - - This manual describes version 1.2 of the GNOME - Panel. - - - - - - - - Panel Basics - - Using the GNOME Panel is very simple and - will come easily to anyone who has used a graphical desktop - environment. This section will give you a basic introduction to - help you get started, and the following sections will discuss the - various Panel objects and features in more detail. - - - - Introduction to Panel Objects - - A Panel can hold several types of objects. - The example Panel in shows each type of Panel object. - -
- An Example Panel - - An Example Panel. - - - -
- - - This example Panel contains the following - objects: - - Menus - - Menus are lists of items, each of which either starts an - application, executes a command, or is a submenu. In the - example Panel in , the left-most icon after the - arrow is a stylized footprint icon (the GNOME logo). This is - the Main Menu, one of the most important - objects in the Panel. This menu - provides access to almost all the applications, commands, and - configuration options available in GNOME. The Main - Menu is described in detail in . The second icon shown is a folder, the - default icon used for user menus. GNOME allows users to - create their own menus with personalized contents to use in - addition to the Main Menu. To open a - menu, just click on the icon with the left mouse button. For - more information on menus, see . - - - - - - Launchers - - Launchers are buttons which either start an application or - execute a command when you press them (click with the left - mouse button). The third icon in the example - Panel is a launcher which starts the - Gnumeric spreadsheet. For more - information on launchers, see . - - - - - - Applets Applets are applications which - run inside a small part of the - Panel. The fourth through eighth icons - in the example Panel are applets. The - first applet shown is the GNOME - Weather applet, which periodically downloads the - current weather conditions off the Web and displays the - information. The second applet shown is the Drive - Mount applet, which shows whether a disk (in - this case, the floppy drive) is mounted and allows you to - mount and unmount the drive with a single click of the mouse. - The third applet shown is the Quick - Launch applet, which acts as a container for - launchers, but saves more space than placing your launchers - directly on the Panel. In the example - shown the Quick Launch applet - contains six application launchers. Next is the - GNOME Desk Guide, which allows you - to control multiple virtual desktops, each of which can have - multiple screens. You can move between desktops and screens - by clicking with your left mouse button. The final applet - shown is the Tasklist, which allows - you to control your application windows in various ways, - including changing the focus, iconifying windows, closing - windows, and killing applications. The - Tasklist shown is for a screen with - only two windows, both of which are Electric - Eyes. For more information on applets, see - . - - - - - - Drawers Drawers are essentially - extensions of a Panel which can be - opened or closed. They can hold anything the - Panel can. The brown icon of a drawer - in the example Panel is the default - icon for drawers, although any icon can be used. Click on the - Drawer icon with the left mouse button to - open or close it. For more information on drawers, see . - - - - - - Special Objects - - Special objects are items you can add to a - Panel which perform functions which - are generally not available through the other - Panel objects. The last item in the - example Panel is a special object - called the Logout Button. Pressing - this with the left mouse button begins the logout sequence - to end your GNOME session. For more information on special - objects, see . - - - - - - - Each of these object types is described in detail in the - following sections. You can easily add, move, or remove Panel - objects (see ). - - - - - - Right-Click Menu - - Clicking on any Panel object with the right mouse button brings - up the Panel object's right-click menu. This - menu contains Remove from panel for - removing the object from the Panel, - Move for moving objects within the - Panel or between two - Panels, the - Panel submenu described below, and - typically one or more object-specific menu items. For drawers, - menus, and launchers the only object-specific item is - Properties... which allows you to - customize the properties and settings of the object. For applets, - the right-click menu will often contain - About... for viewing information about - the applet such as the author's name and the applet version, - Help for viewing the applet's - documentation, and Properties... for - configuring preferences and settings for the applet. Applets - often have other applet-specific controls in their - right-click menus. - - - The Panel submenu allows you to create and remove - Panels and add objects to the - Panel. It also allows you to modify the - properties of the particular Panel of - interest using the Properties menu - item (see ) or the properties of - all Panels using the Global - Preferences... menu item (see ). - - - You can also right-click on the Panel - itself. This will bring up the Main Menu. In - particular, this menu also contains the - Panel submenu described above. - - - - - Hiding the Panel - - - Panel Hide Buttons - - - Panel Hiding - - The left and right arrow icons seen at either end of the example - Panel and in are - used to hide the Panel. -
- The Hide Button - - The Hide Button - - - -
- - - Pressing one of these arrows will hide the - Panel by sliding it in the direction of - the arrow pressed, so that the only part of the - Panel which remains visible is the - Hide button itself. Pressing it a second - time will expand the Panel. - - - Panels can be configured to automatically - hide when you are not using it and reappear when you move the - mouse to the part of the screen where the - Panel resides. This can be useful if you - are unable to run your system in a high resolution. To learn how - to have a Panel auto-hide, see . - - - - - Logging Out - - To log out of GNOME, right click on the - Panel and select Log - out. This will bring up the - Logout dialog, shown in . - -
- The Logout Dialog - - Logout - - - -
- - If you would like to save your current setup, select the - Save current setup checkbox. This will save - any GNOME applications you have open and configuration changes - you may have made in the Control - Center. - - - The default way to log out is by using the - Logout option, which ends your GNOME session - but does not shut down the computer. Depending on your system - configuration, you may also have the Halt - option, which shuts down the computer, and the - Reboot option, which will reboot the - computer. - - - Note for advanced users - The - Halt and Reboot choices - will only be shown if you have permission to execute the command - /usr/bin/shutdown. - - - - If you do not want to log out, press the - No button and you will be returned to your - GNOME session. Otherwise press the Yes - button to log out. - - - Logging Out and Window Managers - - If you are running a window manager that is GNOME compliant, the - logout feature will quit the window manager as well as GNOME. If - you are running a non-compliant window manager you will have to - quit the window manager yourself. - - - - You can disable the Logout dialog so that - selecting the Log out menu item will - end your GNOME session without asking any questions. To do so, - start the GNOME Control Center by - selecting Main Menu - Settings Startup - programs and uncheck the - Prompt on logout button. - - - - Locking the Screen - - Sometimes you may want to leave your computer with GNOME running - and not allow others to use or view your GNOME session. GNOME - allows you to do this by locking the screen, requiring a password - to unlock it. To lock your GNOME session, right click on either - end of a Panel and select - Lock screen. Alternately, if you have - the Lock Button(see ) on a Panel, you may - just press this button to lock the screen. To unlock the screen, - just type your login password. - - - Screensavers and the Lock Button - - The Lock screen button uses a feature of - the xscreensaver program. This is the - same program that the Control Center - uses to set your screensaver. In order for the Lock - screen button to work properly, you must have a - screensaver enabled in the Control - Center. - - - - - - - - - - - - The Main Menu - - Main Menu - - The footprint icon seen towards the left end of the example - Panel (see ) and in is the Main - Menu (yes, you guessed right, it is the footprint of - the gnome). This menu provides access to almost all GNOME - features — all the applications, configuration tools, - command line prompt, Logout and - Lock Screen commands, and much more. - To access any of these items, click on the Main - Menu button. You should release the mouse after - pressing the Main Menu button so that you - can take advantage of other mouse-activated features in the - Main Menu such as right-click pop-up menus and - drag-and-drop from the menu to the desktop or - Panel. - - - You can have several Main - Menu buttons on different - Panels; all of them can be configured - independently. - - - - Global menu - - In addition to the Main Menu which you get by - clicking on the foot icon, GNOME also provides a Global - Menu, which contains the same commands but is not - linked to any button. To access the Global - Menu, right-click on any empty place on the - Panel. You can also access the - Global Menu by pressing - - Alt F1 . (You can - change the default key for activating the Global - Menu in the Miscellaneous tab - of the Global Panel - Preferences dialog.) - - - Note that the Global Menu is configured - independently from the Main Menu, by using the - Menu tab in the Global Panel - Preferences dialog. - - - - - Components of the Main Menu - - The primary component of the Main Menu is the - Programs submenu, which contains a list - of preconfigured submenus and menu items. Here you will find all - the GNOME applications, from the - Gnumeric spreadsheet to the - Free Cell game, as well as quite a - few non-GNOME ones, such as the - Netscape web browser and the - emacs text editor. In addition, the - Programs submenu also contains the - following commands: - - - - - File Manager — launches the - GNOME graphical file manager. - - - - - Help system — launches the - GNOME Help Browser. The - GNOME Help Browser gives you access - to most of the documentation installed on your system — - not only GNOME documentation (the GNOME User's Guide, - application manuals, …), but also other types of - documentation (man pages, info pages, …). - - - - - In addition to the Programs - submenu, the Main Menu also contains a - number of other submenus and useful commands. Depending on your - configuration, you may not see all of these. Also, some of them - may be shown as submenus, and others included as part of the - Main Menu, separated by horizontal lines from - the other parts. These additional submenus and commands are: - - - - - Favorites. This submenu, which is - originally empty, is a place where you can put your favorite - applications for quick access. You can edit this menu using - the Menu Editor, which can be - accessed from the Main Menu by choosing - Settings - Menu editor . You can - also add any item from any other menu (in particular, from the - Programs menu) to the - Favorites menu by clicking on the - item with the right mouse button and selecting - Add this to Favorites menu. - - - - - - Applets. This submenu contains all - the applets installed on your system. Selecting an applet will - add it to your Panel. - - - - - - KDE menus. This shows the menus of - the K Desktop Environment (KDE) if you have it installed on - your system. - - - - - - AnotherLevel menus and - Debian menus. These submenus show the - default application menus for Red Hat Linux and Debian - GNU/Linux, respectively. These will only appear for users of - the particular distributions. - - - - - - Panel. This submenu can be used to - change Panel properties (both for individual - Panels and global, i.e. for all - Panels), add an - object to the Panel, remove the whole - Panel, create a new - Panel, or view the - Panel Manual. - - - - - - Desktop— This submenu - contains Log out, which ends your - GNOME session (see ), and - Lock screen (see ). - - - - - - Run … — This menu item - opens the Run Program dialog for - executing shell commands (see ). - - - - - - - Configuring the Main Menu - - To change the configuration of the Main Menu, - right-click on the Main Menu button - (shown in ) and select - Properties … from the pop-up - menu. This will show the Menu Properties - dialog. In this dialog, for each of the submenus of the - Main Menu listed above - (Programs, - Favorites, …) you can choose - whether you want it to be shown as part of the Main - Menu, as a submenu, or not at all. - - - -
- Menu Properties Dialog - - Menu Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - You can also edit the contents of the - Favorites submenu (or, if you are the - system administrator, also of the - Programs submenu) using the - GNOME Menu Editor. To start it, - right-click on the Main Menu button and - select Edit Menus - …. Alternatively, you can start - GNOME Menu Editor by selecting - Programs - Settings Menu - editor from the Main - Menu itself. - - - - - - - - - - - Menus - - In addition to the Main Menu, discussed in , you can also add "normal menus" to a - Panel. An example menu, in this case a - Favorites menu containing three application - launchers and one submenu titled Games, is - shown in . Unlike the - Main Menu, normal menus only contain whatever - launchers and submenus you place in them - no default submenus, - Run... command, etc. as the - Main Menu has. You can also add any submenu of - your Favorites menu or the - Programs menu as a separate menu to a - Panel; to do so, bring up this submenu from - the Main Menu, right click on the submenu - title, and select Add this as menu to - panel. - -
- An Example Menu - - An Example Menu - - - -
- - - Adding a Menu to a Panel To learn how - to add a menu to a Panel, see . - - - - - Tearing Off a Menu - - All menus in GNOME have the tear-off feature: if you left-click on - the "perforation" (thin dashed line at the top of the menu, right - above the menu title), the menu will be turned into a separate - window on your desktop, which will stay there even after you move - the mouse cursor elsewhere. This is very convenient if you will be - using the same command from some deeply nested submenu - frequently. To remove a "torn-off" menu from your desktop, click - on the Close button in the window title - (its appearance and location depends on the window manager you are - using, but usually it is the rightmost button, labelled by an "x"). - - - - - Configuring a Menu - - You can easily change a menu name and icon (for user menus only, - not for submenus taken from the Main Menu). To - do so, click on the menu, right-click on the menu title (at the - very top of the list, above all other items), and select - Properties… from the pop-up - menu. This will bring up the Desktop Entry - Properties dialog, quite similar to the Launcher Properties - dialog. - - To add a new item to the menu, click on the menu button, - right-click on the Menu name, and select Add new - item to this menu. This will bring up - Create Menu Item dialog, in which you can - enter the menu item name, comment, command, and type (see for more information). To remove an item - from the menu, right-click on the item and choose - Remove this item. - - - Finally, a frequently asked question is "How I can change the - font and the background used by the menus?" The answer is that it - is determined by the current GTK Theme, which can be changed - using the GNOME Control Center by - selecting Main Menu - Programs - Settings - DesktopTheme Selector - . - - - - - - - - - Launchers - - Launchers are buttons which reside in your - Panel and start an application or execute a - command when clicked. A launcher can use any icon and has a - customized tooltip to display a message when the cursor is passed - over the launcher. - - - You can change a launcher's properties, such as the icon it uses - and its name, by right-clicking on the launcher and selecting - Properties... from the pop-up menu. This - brings up the Launcher properties dialog, - shown in . A similar dialog is - used when you create a new launcher (see ). Note that internally GNOME makes no distinction - between menu items and launchers: these are just different - representations of the same thing. You can place any menu item on a - Panel, and it will appear as a - launcher. Therefore, all the information below applies equally to - launchers and menu items. - -
- Create Launcher/Launcher Properties Dialog - - Create Launcher/Launcher Properties Dialog - - - -
- - The Laucher Properties dialog has two tabs: - Basic and Advanced. In - the Basic tab, you can set: - - - - - Name — this is the application - name, for example, GNOME - terminal. This name will be used if you later - put this launcher in a menu. - - - - - Comment — this is a brief - explanation of what this application does, for example, - Terminal emulation program. This will - be used for tooltips. - - - - - Command — the actual command that - runs the application, for example, - gnome-terminal. - - - - - Type — should be - Application; do not change it unless - you want to create something other than an application - launcher. - - - - - Icon — this is the icon which - will be used to represent the launcher in the - Panel. If no icon is specified, a - default icon will be used. To change the icon, just click on - it to launch the icon browser. - - - - - Run in Terminal — this specifies - whether the application should be run inside a terminal. If - the application doesn't create any windows on its own, check - this button. If you are unsure, leave it unchecked. - - - - - - The Advanced properties tab is shown - below. It is intended for advanced users; most of the time, you - will not need to change any of these settings. - -
- Launcher Advanced Properties Dialog - - Launcher Advanced Properties Dialog - - - -
- - In the Advanced tab, you can set: - - - - - Try this before using — you can - enter a command here, and GNOME will check if this command - can be executed. If the command cannot be successfully - executed, the launcher (or menu item) will not be shown even - if you added it to a Panel or - menu. It is mostly used by people preparing GNOME - distributions. For example, the default GNOME Main - Menu contains an item for the - TkRat e-mail program, but you - will only see this item if you have - TkRat installed on your system. - - - - - Documentation — currently not - used. - - - - - Name/Comment translations — here - you can set translations of the Name - and Comment to other languages. For - example, for GNOME Terminal, the - translations to Spanish (es) are name: Terminal - UNIX de GNOME and comment: Emulador - de terminal GNOME. This means that if a user - sets his language to Spanish during login (this can be done - by selecting the desired language from - Languages menu of the GNOME - Display Manager when logging in) he will see - Terminal UNIX de GNOME in the - menu and Emulador de terminal GNOME as - the tooltip. The actual command that runs the terminal is - unchanged. - - - To add a new translation, enter the language 2-letter code - and translations of Name and - Comment fields in the empty fields - under the list of current translations, and press the - Add/Set button. To change one of - existing translations, select the row from the list, edit - the fields you want to change, and press the - Add/Set button. To remove one of - existing translations, select it in the list and press the - Remove button. - - - You can find the list of all languages supported by GNOME - along with their 2-letter codes in GNOME - Frequently Asked Questions. - - - - - - All of the changes you make in the Launcher - Properties dialog will take effect when you press - Apply or - OK. Pressing OK - closes the dialog; pressing Apply will - allow you to continue editing. - - - - - - - - Applets - - Applets are GNOME applications which reside in a - Panel. An applet's appearance typically - reveals the state of the applet or other information. Applets often - have buttons, sliders, entries, or other methods to allow you to - control their behavior. - -
- Example Applets - - Example Applets - - - -
- - Some example applets are shown above(see ). At the very left is the - Mixer Applet which allows you to change - the volume level and mute the sound. Next is theSound - Monitor Applet, which displays the current volume of - sound being played and allows you to control various sound - features. The third applet is the GTCD - Applet, a CD player which has all its controls - available in the applet and displays the track and time.The next - applet is the Drive Mount Applet, used - to mount and unmount drives with a single click of the mouse. This - is followed by the Desk-Guide Applet - which shows you your desktops and the applications which are - running on them. The last applet shown is the Tasklist - Applet which allows you to control certain aspects of - each application or window which is open. - - - GNOME has many useful applets. Just right click on a - Panel and add some applets to your - Panel to find out which applets are - available and which ones are best for you. Right click on each - applet to see a menu listing various commands and operations the - applet can do and to access the documentation for the applet. - - - - - - - - Drawers - - The simplest way to think about a drawer is that it is a container - to store things. Typically one may use a drawer to hold multiple - launchers which are related to each other in some way, such as the - various applications in GNOME Office. The drawers in the GNOME - Panel take this one step further by making a - drawer an actual extension of the Panel - itself. Thus, a drawer is a collapsible branch of an existing - Panel. It can contain anything that a - Panel can, including launchers, applets, and - other drawers. - -
- An open Drawer - - An open Drawer - - - -
- - Once you have placed a drawer on a Panel, - you may click on it to "open" the drawer, revealing its contents. - You may then add items to the drawer in the same way you would add - items to a Panel, right clicking on the end - of the drawer with the arrow to open the Global Menu. - You can close the drawer by clicking on its icon again or by - clicking on the arrow at its end. - - - You can configure a drawer's properties by right clicking on the - drawer's icon and selecting - Properties.... This brings up the - Drawer Properties dialog. Here you can - select the icon used for the drawer by clicking on the icon. A - tooltip may be entered by typing in the - Tooltip/Name entry. This tooltip will be - displayed whenever the mouse is moved over the drawer to remind you - what is inside. One may also select whether the hide - button and arrow are displayed at the end of the drawer. - -
- Drawer Properties Dialog - - Drawer Properties Dialog - - - -
- - You may also control the background color or image of the - drawer. Just right click on the drawer and select - Properties... to open the - Drawer Properties dialog. Then select the - Background tab to bring up the - Panel Background Dialog (see ). - - - - - - - - - Special Panel Objects - - There are several special Panel objects which are not considered - menus, applets, or launchers. These special objects are described - below. - - - The Lock Button -
- The Lock Button - - The Lock Button - - - -
- - The Lock Button is a - Panel button which starts a screensaver - which locks the screen. In order to remove the screensaver and - access the GNOME session again, you must supply your password. - For more information on locking the screen, see . - - - - The Logout Button -
- The Logout Button - - The Logout Button - - - -
- - The Logout button is used to exit the GNOME - desktop environment. It initiates the logout sequence, bringing - up the Logout Dialog, as described in . - - - - The Run Button -
- The Run Button - - The Run Button - - - -
- - The Run button opens the Run - Program dialog, shown in . This gives you access to the - command line prompt. It is not a full-blown shell, so it is not a - replacement for GNOME terminal, but it - is very convenient when you need to enter just one command - quickly. You can also open the Run Program - dialog by using a keyboard shortcut. The default keyboard - shortcut is - - Alt F2 - - but you can change this in the Miscellaneous tab of - the Global Panel - Preferences dialog. - -
- The Run Program Dialog - - The Run Program Dialog - - - -
- - The command entry has a history buffer which allows you to execute - a previously entered command by pressing the down - arrow icon located to the right of the text field and - selecting the command. It also has a - Browse… button, which allows you to - choose a file — this filename will be appended to the end of - your command. For example, you can enter - emacs (an extremely powerful text editor) - on the command line and then use the - Browse… button to select the file to - be edited. - - - - Swallowed Applications - - You can run many applications which are not applets inside the - Panel as if they were applets. - Applications which you pull into the Panel, - even though they are not GNOME applets, are called "swallowed - applications". Applications do not have to be GNOME-compliant to - be swallowed. In general, the only constraints for swallowing an - application are that the application must be small enough to fit - in your Panel and you must know the title - of the window you would like to swallow. In many cases, the - application can be automatically shrank to fit in the - Panel, as specified in the - Create Swallowed Application Dialog. If - the application is not small enough to fit in the - Panel, the Panel - will generally grow to allow the application to fit. - -
- Create Swallowed Application Dialog - - Create Swallowed Application Dialog - - - -
- - The Title of application to swallow is the - window title, typically displayed on the top left edge of the - window. (Note that the window title is case sensitive.) The - Width and Height - determine the size of the swallowed application in the - Panel in pixels. - - - If you leave the Command field empty, this - dialog will create an empty window of given size on the panel - which will sit there waiting for a window with the given title to - appear on your desktop. As soon such a window appears (for - example, when you choose appropriate item in the menu), it will be - swallowed. - - - You can also enter any command in the Command - field; this command will be executed before trying to swallowing - the window to the Panel (and each time the - Panel is restarted afterwards). This is - normally used to start an application which you want the - Panel to swallow. - - - - - Status Dock - - The status dock is a - Panel object which can hold status docklets - — small windows which applications place in the - status dock to provide status information. - Status docklets can also be used to control the - application. Essentially, docklets are small (both in size and in - complexity) applets. GNOME currently does not have many - applications which place status docklets in the status - dock. However, GNOME's status - dock is compatible with that of the K Desktop - Environment (KDE), so KDE applications, such as - kscd, may place status docklets in - GNOME's status dock. Future versions of - GNOME applications will make use of this recently added - Panel object. - -
- Example Status Dock With Docklet - - Example Status Dock With Docklet - - - -
- - The above example shows the status dock - with a status docklet from the kscd CD - player program. This particular docklet is used to open and close - the main kscd window without ending the - program. - - - - - - - - - Adding, Moving, and Removing Panel Objects - - Moving objects - - To move any object in a Panel to a - different location, just hold down the middle mouse button and - drag it to the new location. Or, you can right-click on it and - choose Move, then move the mouse to - the new location and press any mouse button to anchor it in its - new position. You can move it to a different location on the same - Panel, or to a different - Panel. If in the course of this - movement it hits other objects, the behavior depends on the - global preferences (see ): the - object you are moving can switch places with other objects, - "push" all objects it meets, or "jump" over all other objects - without disturbing them. You can also override the default - behavior by holding the Shift button (for - "push" mode), the Ctrl button (for "switched" - mode), or the Alt button (for "free" mode, - i.e. jumping other objects without disturbing them) while - moving the object. - - - - - Removing objects from the Panel - - To remove an object from a Panel, - right-click on it and choose Remove from - panel from the pop-up menu. - - - - - - Adding objects to the panel - - By default, the GNOME Panel contains - only a few basic objects, such as the Main - Menu. However, there are many - Panel objects you can - add to it. For example, every menu item in the Main - Menu or its submenus can be added to a - Panel as an - application launcher. GNOME also has many applets - that can be added to a Panel, ranging from - Printer Applet, which prints files - which you drag and drop onto the applet, to - Wanda the Fish. There are many - additional GNOME applets and applications available on the - Internet. - - - - Applets - - - To add an applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and select - PanelAdd - to panel - Applet. This - will show you a - menu of all the applets on your system, divided into - categories; choosing any applet from this menu will - add it to the Panel. - - - - - - - Application launchers - - - To create a new application launcher, right-click on - the Panel and select - PanelAdd - to panel - Launcher. - This will open the Create Launcher - dialog, shown below. In this dialog you - should enter a name for your launcher, a comment, and - the command line to launch the application. This - dialog is virtually identical to Launcher - Properties dialog. See for a more detailed description. - -
- The Create launcher dialog - - Create launcher dialog - - - -
- - You can also add any application in the Main - Menu or application launcher on your - desktop to a Panel. - To do so, use the first mouse button to drag the object - onto the Panel. Be - careful to drop it in an empty space on the - Panel and - not on any existing object: for example, if you drop - it on the Printer Applet, it - will be printed. You can also right-click on an item - in the Main Menu - and select Add this launcher to - panel. After this, you can change any - options for that launcher by clicking on it with the - right mouse button and selecting - Properties.... - - - - - - Menus - - - To add a menu, right-click on the - Panel and select - Panel Add - to panel Menu - . This gives you a choice of the Main - menu, Programs menu, and - Favorites menu. - - - You can also add the Main Menu or - any its submenu as a new menu to the - Panel by - right-clicking on the menu title (the top line of the - menu, separated from menu items by a thin line) and - selecting Add this as a menu to the - panel. - - - Creating Menus By Hand - - Advanced users can also create new menus - manually. To do so, you need to know that internally, - GNOME represents a menu by a directory, with menu items - presented by files of special type - (.desktop files — these files - also represent the application launchers), and submenus - presented by subdirectories. For example, the - Favorites menu corresponds to the - directory ~/.gnome/apps (where - ~ denotes your home directory), and - the Programs menu corresponds to the - directory - /usr/share/gnome/apps. Thus, you - can create a new directory, using the GNOME File - Manager, drag and drop there any - .desktop files from any other - directories you might have (for example, from - /usr/share/gnome/apps) or from the - desktop, and then drag and drop this directory from the - File Manager window to the - Panel. This will add this - directory as a menu to the Panel. - - - - After you have added a menu to your - Panel using any of the methods - described above, you can modify its properties (for - example, add new items to this menu or change the icon - used by the menu), as described in . - - - - - - Drawers - - - To add a new empty drawer, select - Panel - Add to panel - Drawer. Then - right-click on the drawer and select - Properties... to change its - properties (for example, the icon it uses). You can - add new items to this drawer in the same way as you - add items to a Panel: all the - methods for adding new objects to the - Panel described in this section - will also work for adding new items to a drawer. - - - You can also add the Main Menu or any - of its submenus to the Panel as a - drawer by right-clicking on the menu title and selecting - Add this as drawer to - panel. - - - - - Swallowed application - - To add a swallowed application to your - Panel, select - Panel - Add to panel - Swallowed - app. This will - open the Create Swallowed - Application dialog. For detailed information - on using this dialog, see . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Creating, Moving, and Removing Panels - - Creating new panels - - To add a new Panel to your desktop, - select - PanelCreate - panel from the Main - Menu. Choose from the following - Panel types: - - - - - Menu Panel — The Menu - Panel is a special Panel - which is always placed at the top of your screen and - contains several pull-down menus. These are - Programs, Favorites, - Settings, Desktop, and - a special menu which provides quick access to GNOME-related - Internet resources (look for the bullet hole icon). This - Panel can also hold the other objects - which other Panels can hold, but it - does not have the configuration properties which other - Panels have. Note that the - Menu Panel is more restrictive than - other Panels, and some normal - Panel operations, such as moving the - Panel, cannot be performed on it. - - - - - Edge Panel — An Edge - Panel is exactly like the main - Panel that starts up with GNOME; it - stretches along the whole length of one of screen edges. By - selecting this type of Panel, you - may add a new Panel to another edge - of your screen to give yourself more functionality. - - - - - Aligned Panel — An - Aligned Panel is also positioned - along one of the screen edges. But unlike an Edge - Panel, an Aligned Panel - will not stretch across the entire edge of the screen it is - on; It will only stretch as much as necessary to display - the icons and applets it contains. It can be positioned - either at one of the corners (in this case, it will stretch - towards the opposite corner) or at the center of the edge - (in this case, it will stretch in both directions, - automatically recentering when you add new objects). - - - If an Aligned Panel is aligned with - one of the corners, the hide buttons will work slightly - differently than for an Edge Panel. - The hide button closest to the edge of your screen will hide - the Panel as usual but the other hide - button will send the whole Panel to - the opposite corner. When the latter move is made it will - not hide the Panel since it is - changing the side of the screen it resides on. If you want - to hide it you will have to press the hide button once again. - - - - - Sliding Panel — A - Sliding Panel is very similar to an - Aligned Panel, but can be placed - anywhere along the screen edge, not necessarily in one of - the corners or in the center. As you add objects, it will - only grow in one direction — it won't automatically - recenter. - - - - - Floating Panel — A - Floating Panel can be placed anywhere - on your screen, not necessarily along one of the edges. - - - - - - Changing Panel Type - - You can also change type of existing panel — for example, - convert edge panel to a floating panel, see . - - - - - - - Moving Panels - - Any Panel you have on your desktop(except - a Menu Panel) can be - moved by pressing the middle mouse button, or by simultaneously - pressing the left and right mouse buttons, while dragging the - Panel to - the desired position on your screen. If you do not have a middle - mouse button and did not configure your mouse to emulate a - middle button you may also move a Panel - by changing its location in the Panel - properties dialog. You can read more about this in - of this documentation. - - - - Removing Panels - - To remove an existing Panel, right-click - on it and choose - PanelRemove - this panel. If the - Panel is not empty, you will be prompted - to confirm. - - - Removing Your Only Panel - - You must have at least one Panel - running at all times. GNOME will not allow you to remove your - only Panel. - - - - - - - - - - Global Panel Preferences - - To start configure the behavior of all of your - Panels, select - Panel Global - Preferences from the Main Menu. - - - This will open the Global Panel - Preferences dialog. (This dialog is a - component of the GNOME Control - Center). With this dialog you can control many - properties shared by all of your Panels. -
- The Global Panel Configuration Dialog - - The Global Panel Configuration Dialog - - - -
- - - The Global Panel Configuration dialog - contains the following five tabs: - Animation, Buttons, - Panel Objects, Menu, and - Miscellaneous. Each of these tabs is - explained below. - - - Animation Tab - - - - Enable animations — This allows - Panels and drawers to animate as the - hide and unhide. - - - - - Constant speed animations — By - default, the animations start slowly, but then accelerate. If - you enable this option, the animations will not use any - acceleration. - - - - - [Animation speed] Auto hide — This - controls the speed of animation for any - Panel which is set to hide automatically - when the mouse leaves the Panel. The - slowest setting is 1, and the fastest is 100. - - - - - [Animation speed] Explicit hide — This - controls the hide speed when you press a Panel's - Hide Button. The slowest setting is 1, - and the fastest is 100. - - - - - [Animation speed] Drawer sliding — - This controls how fast a drawer menu will raise when you - press a drawer button on a Panel. The - slowest setting is 1, and the fastest is 100. - - - - - [Auto hide] Delay (ms) — If you have - a Panel set to minimize automatically - after the mouse leaves the Panel - this will allow you to control how much time passes before it - minimizes. The Panel - will start the time count once the mouse is no longer over - it. It will appear again when the mouse is passed over the - portion of the Panel that remains - visible. This time is measured in milliseconds. - - - - - [Auto hide] Size (pixels) — - This determines the number of pixels that show when a - Panel is minimized, for any - Panel which is set to hide automatically. - To maximize the Panel, the pointer must - enter the Panel area. - - - - - - Buttons Tab - - In this section, you can set the - appearance of the various types of buttons: launcher buttons, menu - buttons, drawer buttons, and special buttons(such as the Logout Button and the Lock Button). - - - - - Button Type — Select the type of - button you wish to configure. - - - - - Tiles enabled — This checkbox will - enable background tiles for buttons of the given type on the - Panel. - - - - - Normal tile — This shows the image - used for the tile in the up position (inactive, not - pressed). To choose another image file, just click on the - image, and it will launch the icon browser. Tiles must be - enabled to access this option. - - - - - Clicked tile — This shows the image - used for the tile in the down position (active, pressed). To - choose another image file, just press on the image, and it will - launch the icon browser. Tiles must be enabled to access this - option. - - - - - Border width (tile only) — This - determines the width of the border around an icon. For example, - if you set border width equal to 5, this will ensure that at - least 5 pixels of the tile will be shown on every side of the - icon; if necessary, the icon will be cropped. This is very - useful if you have an icon that would normally cover up a tile. - Tiles must be enabled to access this option. - - - - - Depth (displacement when pressed) — - This determines the depth an icon will displace when - pressed. Tiles must be enabled to access this option. - - - - - This tab also contains 3 options which affect all types - of buttons simultaneously: - - - - - Make buttons flush with panel edge - — This allows you to align the button with - the edge of the Panel. If this - option is not set then the border width setting is obeyed. - By default this option is off. - - - - - Show button tiles only when cursor is over - the button — If this option is enabled, the - tiles will only appear when mouse cursor is over the button. - - - - - Prelight buttons on mouseover - — Choosing this option will make the buttons - brighten up when the mouse cursor is over them. - - - - - - Panel objects Tab - - This tab shows some options related to the placement and moving - of objects on the Panel. - - - - - Default movement mode — Here - you can choose the default mode for moving objects on - the Panel. Possible variants are - - - - - Switched — - When the object you are moving hits another object, - they switch places. - - - - - - Free — When - the object you are moving hits another object, it - "jumps" over it, so no other object is disturbed. - This is a convenient option if you like the - current arrangement of objects on your - Panel and want to leave the - other objects in place. - - - - - - Push — The object you are - moving pushes all other objects in front of it, like - a snow plow. - - - - - You can override the default movement mode by dragging - an object while holding Ctrl (for - switched movement), Alt (for free - movement), or Shift (for push movement) - button pressed. - - - - - Padding — This changes - the amount of space (padding) between objects on the - Panel. It is measured in pixels. - - - - - - - Menu Tab - - In this tab, you can set the options determining the - appearance of Panel menus. - - - - - - Use large icons — This will use - large icons (rather than the default size) in menus. This is only - practical for those with high resolution screens (1280x1024 and - higher). - - - - - Show [...] buttons — This will add - small buttons labelled by three dots (...) to all the items of - the Main Menu. Clicking on such a button - with the left mouse button will bring the - pop-up menu for this item, i.e. the same - menu which you get by clicking on the menu item with the right - mouse button. - - - - - Show popup menus outside of panels — - When this button is on, it allows pop-up menus to appear away - from the Panel. When toggled off, the - pop-ups will appear over the Panel. This - can be useful on smaller screens or cluttered desktops. - - - - - Keep menus in memory — This will - keep your menus in memory so that they do not rescan for added - items. This can increase the speed of GNOME, but may also - result in you missing new items added to your menu. - - - - - Global menu — This - allows you to configure the - Global Menu - which you get by right-clicking on a - Panel, or by using - the keyboard shortcut. For each of the possible submenus - (Programs, - Favorites, etc.), you can choose - whether it should be included as a part of the Global - Menu, as a submenu, or not included at all. A - description of these submenus is given in . - - - - - - - Miscellaneous Tab - - The Miscellaneous tab contains options for various - customizable behavior that didn't fit anywhere else. - - - - - - Tooltips enabled — This option - defines whether GNOME should show a tooltip when the - pointer pauses on a Panel item. - - - - - Close drawer if a launcher inside it is - pressed — By default drawers will remain open - when you select an item within one. This can be annoying as the - drawer will remain open until you close it with a mouse - click. With this option selected drawers will close - automatically when you select any item within one. - - - - - Raise panels on mouse-over — If you - are using a window manager that is not GNOME compliant it will - not understand its relationship with the - Panel. This can cause - your Panel to be covered by - applications. If you enable this feature you can have the - Panel automatically raise when your - mouse is over it. - - - - - Keep panel below windows — If you - are using a GNOME compliant window manager, the window manager - will understand its relationship with the - Panel. If you choose - this feature the window manager and GNOME will allow - applications to appear over the - Panel. This can be useful on - smaller screens. - - - - - Confirm removal of panels with a - dialog — If this option is enabled, - GNOME will ask for confirmation before removing a - Panel. - - - - - This tab also allows you to configure some global key - bindings. You can define key bindings for the Global Menu(ie. - Popup Menu) and - for the Run - Program dialog. (The default key bindings for - these are - - Alt - F1 - - and - - Alt - F2 - - respectively.) To - change these key bindings, select a key from the drop-down list - or press the Grab key… button and then - press the desired key. - - - Using the Menu and Window keys - - You should be able to use the special Menu - and Windows keys for keybindings. If you - have problems with using these keys, the most probable reason - is that your X server was incorrectly configured: the - keyboard type chosen during installation does not match - your actual keyboard. If you are using - XFree86 server, you can fix it by - manually editing the configuration file. This file, named - XF86Config, is usually located in - the /etc or /etc/X11 - directory. Open this file with any text editor (not a - word-processor!) and find the line containing the word - XkbModel. Change it to read - - XkbModel "pc104" - - You must be root (system administrator) to do this. Now, - logout of GNOME and restart the X server by simultaneously - pressing Ctrl - Alt Backspace . - - - - Use Caution When Editing XF86Config - - Making a mistake while editing the XF86Config - file can make your keyboard or screen unusable in X - Windows. Before editing this file, you should make a backup copy of - it and make sure you know how to restore it from the backup file - without using X Windows or GNOME, i.e., from a terminal. If - you don't know how to do this, then do not edit this file. - - - - - - - - - - - Individual Panel Properties - - Panel - Individual Panel Properties - - - Panel properties - - In addition to global Panel properties, described in , some properties can be configured - individually for each Panel. This - includes Panel type (Edge, - Aligned, Sliding, Floating), size, location, background color, - and hiding preferences. To change these properties for a - Panel, - click on it with the right mouse button and select - Panel - Properties. You may also - press the Main Menu button and select - Panel - Properties. - - - From the Properties submenu, you can - choose All properties..., which will - launch the Panel properties dialog. If you - are already familiar with this dialog, you can more quickly - change some of the properties — say, - Panel size or type - — by selecting the appropriate item in the - Properties menu. - - - The Panel properties dialog contains two - tabs to help you set the active Panel - properties: Edge - Panel (or Aligned, … - - depending on your Panel type) and - Background. Both of these tabs are explained - below. - - - - Edge Panel Tab -
- Panel Edge Properties Dialog - - Panel Edge Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - - Panel Position — This changes - the position of the Panel on the screen. For - Edge Panel, you must specify an - edge (Top, - Right, Left or - Bottom). For Aligned - Panel, you have to specify an edge and one of - the edge's ends or the center. For Sliding - Panel, you must specify the edge and offset - from one of the corners (in pixels). Finally, for - Floating Panel you must specify - orientation (horizontal or vertical) and position of - Panel's left top corner (relative - to the left top corner of the screen and measured in pixels). - - - The Panel will change position once - you have pressed the Apply or - OK button. - - - Manually Moving a Panel - - You can also change Panel - position by dragging it with the middle mouse button to - the new location. - - - - - - - Panel size — Here you can - choose the Panel width. The default - size is 48 pixels, which is - also the default size of icons used by GNOME. Users with low - screen resolution might want to decrease the - Panel size to - free some screen space; conversely, users with high - resolution displays may try using larger - Panel sizes. - - - Changing Panel size automatically - resizes all the icons on this Panel, - which can lead to some quality loss. Also, - the Panel will ask all the applets to resize - themselves. Most of the applets will comply; however, if - some applets do not obey this request, then the - Panel will resize itself so that it - can fit all the applets. - - - - - - Panel - Auto-hide - - Hiding — In this section, you - can choose whether you want to Enable - Auto-hide — that is, have the - Panel automatically hide when - the mouse is not over the Panel. The - autohide parameters - can be configured in the Global - Preferences dialog. If you choose to auto-hide, you - might want to disable the hide buttons here as well. You - may also disable the hide button arrows graphics on the - hide buttons. - - - - - - - Background Tab - - Panel Background - - -
- Panel Background Properties Dialog - - Panel Background Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - - These options allow you to change the background of the - Panel - itself. You may choose, if you wish, to have the - Standard, Pixmap, or - Color background. The standard look for - the Panel is determined by the GTK theme - you are running at the - time (you can configure the GTK theme using the - GNOME Control Center). The - Pixmap option allows you to choose an - image to tile or scale to the Panel. The - Color option allows you to specify a - particular color for the Panel. - - - - - - - Color to use — If you choose to have - your Panel one color, this button will - launch a dialog which allows you to specify which color to use. - - - - - - - Image — If you wish to have a - Pixmap - for the background of your Panel, this - section of the dialog allows you to choose which image to use. - If you press the Browse button, you can - search for the file you want to use. The current filename is - shown to the left of this button. The window above it shows you - the preview of this background. - - - - - - - Drag and Drop With Images - - An easier way to change the background of your - Panel is to - drag and drop an image file from the GNOME - File Manager onto the - Panel. This will automatically - change the background of the Panel to - that image. - - - - - - - Don't scale image to fit — If this - button is checked, the background image will be tiled to cover - the Panel, rather than scaled. - - - - - Scale image (keep proportions) — If - this button is checked, the background image will be scaled as - much as possible preserving image's proportions, and then the - scaled image will be used to tile the - Panel. - - - - - Stretch image (change proportions) — - If this button is checked, the background image will be - stretched in both dimensions to the size of the - Panel. - - - - - Rotate image for vertical panel — If - this button is checked, the image will be rotated when you - change Panel orientation - (horizontal/vertical). - - - - - - - - - - - - Current bugs and limitations - - Most of the things here are not really bugs; rather, they - describe situations when the Panel's - behavior is not what you would expect. - - - - You cannot place an ordinary file or directory on the - Panel. If you try to drag and drop a file - from the File Manager window to the - Panel, it won't work. The only type of - file that can be placed on the Panel are - .desktop - files, which describe launchers (and - .kdelnk files, which describe launchers in - the format used by K Desktop Environment); any directory dropped on the - Panel will be interpreted as a menu - — that is, all the - files other than .desktop files will be - ignored. - - - - Editing menus other than the Main Menu - is rather confusing. Menu Editor at - the moment cannot be used for this, and the - Properties item of the right-click - menu is not too helpful either - for example, it doesn't allow - one to change the menu's icon (see for - instructions for doing this). This will be improved in the next - release. - - - - The Global Menu (which you get by - pressing the - AltF1 key - on the keyboard or by - right-clicking on the Panel), and the - Main - Menu (which you get by clicking on the foot icon) - are configured separately. The reason is that you - can have several Main Menu buttons on - different Panels. - - - - The Screen Lock button does not lock the - screen if No Screensaver is set in the - GNOME Control Center. - - - - The only way of changing a Panel's type - (Edge, Aligned, etc.) - is by choosing Panel Properties - Type from the - Main Menu or Global Menu: - you can not change Panel type in the - Panel Properties dialog. Conversely, - PanelProperties - Background type allows - you to change the background type (Pixmap/Color/Standard), but - not to choose the actual color or image to use. - - - - - - - - - Authors - - GNOME Panel was written by many GNOME - developers; you can find a partial list in the - About dialog. By - the way: if you wonder what is the name of the animal shown in - the About dialog, it is called - "Gegl" and it has its own - Web page. - - - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug reports to the - GNOME bug - tracking database. Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found on-line at - http://bugs.gnome.org/Reporting.html. You can also use - the Bug Report Tool - (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Dave Mason - (dcm@redhat.com), Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu), and Alexander Kirillov - (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu). Please send all - comments and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project at docs@gnome.org or enter - your comments online using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/ug-applets.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/ug-applets.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index cc67b51..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/ug-applets.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,503 +0,0 @@ - - - - GNOME Applets - - - - Applet Basics - - - - What Are Applets? - - Applets are one of the most popular and useful objects you can add - to your Panel to customize your desktop. - An applet is a small application which runs inside a small area of - your Panel. Applets have been written for - a wide range of purposes. Some are very powerful interactive - tools, such as the Mixer Applet - which allows you to easily control your system sound. - Others are simple system - monitors, displaying information such as the amount of power left - in the battery on your laptop (see Battery Charge - Monitor) or weather - information(see GNOME Weather). Some - are simply for amusement(see gEyes). - - - - Applets are similar to swallowed applications in that both of them - reside within the Panel. However, - swallowed applications are generally applications which were - not designed to run within the Panel. - Typically one will swallow an application which already exists in - the main desktop area, putting it into your - Panel. The application will continue to - run in the Panel until you end the - application or unswallow it, placing it back onto the main part of - your desktop when you need to. - - - -
- Example Applets - - Example Applets - - - -
- Several example applets are shown in . From left to right, they are: (1) - Mixer Applet, which allows you to turn - on/off sound and control its volume by clicking on the applet. (2) - Sound Monitor Applet, which displays - the current volume of sound being played and allows you to control - various sound features. (3) GTCD - Applet, a CD player which has all its controls - available in the applet and displays the track and time. (4) - Drive Mount Applet, used to mount and - unmount drives with a single click of the mouse. (5) - Desk Guide which allows you to view and - control multiple virtual screens. (6) - Tasklist Applet which allows you to control - your various windows and applications. - - - There are many other applets to choose from. The rest of this - chapter will explain the basic information to get you started - adding, moving, and removing applets from your - Panels and using them. The following - chapters go through each of the standard GNOME applets describing - them in detail. There are also additional applets which can be - downloaded off the Web. See The GNOME - Software Map for lists of additional GNOME applications - and applets. - - - As you read through the the rest of this chapter, you should try - adding and removing applets from your Panel and - experiment with them freely. - - - - - - Adding, Moving, and Removing Applets - - - Adding Applets to a Panel - - To add an applet to a Panel, right-click - on the Panel and select - PanelAdd to panel - Applet. This will show you - the menu of all the applets on your system, divided into - categories. Choosing any applet from this menu will add it to the - Panel. - - - - - Moving Applets In or Between Panels - - It is easy to move applets in a Panel or - between two Panels. If you have a - three-button mouse, just move the mouse over the applet, depress - the middle mouse button and drag the applet to its new location, - releasing the middle mouse button when you are finished. Note - that you can drag applets within a Panel - or between two Panels this way. If you - don't have a three-button mouse, just - right-click on the applet and choose - Move. The cursor will turn into a - cross and the applet will move with your mouse until you press - any mouse button to indicate you are finished moving it. - If, in the course of this movement, it hits - other objects, the behavior depends on the global preferences - you have set for your Panels in the - GNOME Control Center: the applet you are - moving can switch places with other objects, "push" all objects - it meets, or "jump" over all other objects without disturbing - them. You can also override the default behavior by holding - Shift button (for "push" mode), - Ctrl (for "switched" mode), or - Alt (for "free" mode, i.e. jumping other other - objects without disturbing them) button while dragging. - - - To change the global Panel preferences, right-click on any applet - or Panel and select - - Panel - Global Preferences... - . - The Default movement mode is set under the - Applets tab. - - - - - Removing Applets from a Panel - - To remove an applet from a Panel, - right-click on the applet and select Remove from - panel.... - - - - - - - - The Right-Click Pop-Up Menu - - Clicking the right mouse button on any applet brings up - a pop-up menu. This - menu always has certain standard menu items in it and - often has additional items which vary depending on the particular - applet. - - - Standard Pop-Up Items - - All applets have the following items in their right-click - pop-up menu: - - - Remove from panel - - - The Remove from panel menu item - removes the applet from the Panel. - - - - - - Move - - - After selecting Move, your mouse - pointer will change appearance (typically to a cross with - arrows in each direction). As you move your mouse, the applet - will move with it. When you have finished moving the applet, - click any mouse button and the applet will anchor in its - current position. Note that applets can be moved between two - Panels this way. - - - - - - Panel - - - The Panel submenu contains various - items and submenus for adding and removing - Panels and applets and for changing - the configuration. - - - - - - Help - - - The Help menu item brings up the help - manual for the applet. - - - - - - About - - - The About... menu item brings up a - dialogue box containing various information about the applet, - typically including the applet's name, version, author, - copyright, license and desciption. - - - - - - - - - - Other Common Pop-Up Items - - Many applets also have other items in their right-click pop-up - menus. Some of the more common ones are: - - - Properties... - - - The Properties... menu item opens - the Properties dialog (see ) for the applet. Many - applets have properties dialogs, which allow you to configure - the behavior and appearance of the applet. - - - - - Run... - - - The Run... menu item generally - invokes a program which is related to the applet in some way - but which runs in its own window rather than in the - panel. For example: - - - - - The CPU Load applet, which monitors - what programs are running, has a Run - gtop... menu item. Selecting this menu item - starts GTop, which allows you to - view and control programs which are running. - - - - - The CD Player applet has a - Run gtcd... menu item which - starts the GNOME CD Player when - selected, which has more capabilities than the applet. - - - - - - - - - - - The Applet Properties Dialog - - Many applets have customizable properties. These applets will - have a Properties... menu item in their - right-click pop-up menu which brings up the - Properties dialog where you can alter the - appearance or behaviour of the applet. -
- An Example Applet Properties Dialog - - An Example Applets Properties Dialog - - - -
- All Properties dialogs have the following - buttons at the bottom of the dialog: - - - - OK — - Pressing OK will activate any changes - in the properties you have made and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - Apply — - Pressing Apply at any time will - make your changes active without closing the - Properties dialog. This is helpful if - you would like to test the effects of the changes you have - made but may want to continue changing the properties. - - - - - Close — - Pressing Close will close the - Properties dialog. Only changes in the - configuration which were previously applied with the - Apply button will persist. Other - changes will not be made active. - - - - - Help — - Pressing Help brings up the manual for - the application, opening it to the page describing the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Amusements Applets - - &FIFTEEN; - &FISH; - &GEYES; - &LIFE; - &ODOMETER; - - - - - - Monitor Applets - - &BATTERY; - &CPULOAD; - &CPUMEMUSAGE; - &DISKUSAGE; - &LOADAVG; - &MEMLOAD; - &NETLOAD; - &SWAPLOAD; - - - - - - - Multimedia Applets - - &CDPLAYER; - &MIXER; - &SOUNDMONITOR; - - - - - - - Network Applets - - &MAILCHECK; - &MODEMLIGHTS; - &WEBCONTROL; - - - - - - - - Utility Applets - - &CHARPICK; - &DESKGUIDE; - &DRIVEMOUNT; - &GKB; - &GNOTES; - &GWEATHER; - &MINICOMMAND; - &PRINTER; - &QUICKLAUNCH; - &SCREENSHOOTER; - &TASKLIST; - &TICKASTAT; - &WHEREAMI; - - - - - - - - Clock Applets - - &ANOTHERCLOCK; - &ASCLOCK; - &CLOCK; - &CLOCKMAIL; - &JBC; - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/unix-primer.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/unix-primer.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 391cc1c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/unix-primer.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,792 +0,0 @@ - - - If you are new to Linux/UNIX - - One of the goals of GNOME is to make your system easy to use, - without requiring you to learn the technical details about your - operating system. However, there are some basic UNIX notions that - you have to be familiar with even while using the easy graphical - interface provided by GNOME. For the convenience of new users, - these basics are collected in this document. If you need further - information on UNIX, you should read the documentation which came - with your system; there are also a number of books and on-line - guides available for all versions of UNIX. - - - The following guide applies to all versions of UNIX and - UNIX-like operating systems, including both the commercial Unices - such as Solaris and open-source operating - systems such as FreeBSD and - Linux. Some of the material here is based - on Linux Installation and Getting Started - guide, by Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, - Sean Dreilinger, Robert Kiesling, Evan Leibovitch, and Henry - Pierce. The guide is available for download or online viewing from - the Linux - Documentation Project or from the Open Source Writers Group. - - - - - Users - UNIX is a multiuser operating system: it - was designed to allow many users to work on the same computer, - either simultaneously (using several terminals or network - connections) or in turns. Under UNIX, to identify yourself to - the system, you must log in, which entails entering your - login name (the name the system uses to identify - you) and your password, which is your personal key - for logging in to your account. Because only you know your - password, no one else can log in to the system under your user - name. Usually people choose their first or last name or some - variation of it as their login name, so that if your real name - is Sasha Beilinson, your login might be sasha. - - Each user has a separate place to keep his files (called - his home directory). UNIX has a system of - permissions (see ), so that on a - properly configured UNIX system a user can't change other users' - or system files. This also allows every user to customize - various aspects of the system — in particular, GNOME - behavior — for himself, without affecting other users. - - On any UNIX system there is also a special user, called - system administrator, with the login name - root. He has full - control over the system — including full access to all the - system and users' files. He has the authority to change the - passwords of existing users and add new users, install and - uninstall software, and so on. The system administrator is - usually the person responsible for proper functioning of the - system, so if you have some problems, you should ask him. - - - IMPORTANT - - Even if you are the only user on your computer (for example, - if the computer is your personal workstation), so that you are - also the system administrator, it is important that you create - a user account and use it for daily work, logging in as root - only when necessary for system maintenance. Because root can - do anything, it is easy to make mistakes that have - catastrophic consequences. Picture the root account as a - magic hat that gives you lots of power, with which you can, by - waving your hands, create or destroy entire cities. Because - it is easy to wave your hands in a destructive manner, it is - not a good idea to wear the magic hat when it is not needed, - despite the wonderful feeling. - - - - - Files and filenames - - Under most operating systems (including UNIX), there is the - concept of a file, which is just a bundle of - information given a name (called a - filename). Examples of files might be - your history term paper, an e-mail message, or an actual - program that can be executed. Essentially, anything saved on - disk is saved in an individual file. - - - Filenames - - Files are identified by their filenames. For example, the file - containing your conference talk might be saved with the filename - talk.txt. There is no standard format for file - names as there is under MS-DOS and some other operating systems; in - general, a filename can contain any character (except the / - character–see the discussion of path names below) and is - limited to 256 characters in length. - - - IMPORTANT - - Unlike MS-DOS, the filenames in UNIX are case-sensitive: - myfile.txt and - MyFile.txt are considered as two - different files. - - - - You should also be aware of several UNIX conventions; while they are - not mandatory, it is usually a good idea to follow them. - - - It is customary to use the format - filename.extension for filenames, - where the extension indicates the file type; for - example, the extension txt is - usually used for plain text files, while the extension - jpeg is used for graphics in JPEG - format, and so on. In particular, the GNOME - File Manager - (Nautilus) uses extensions to - determine file type. You can view or change file - extensions recognized by - GNOME by selecting the - section Document Handlers - MIME types in - GNOME Control Center. Note - that the standard convention in UNIX is that the - executables (i.e., the program - files) have no extension at all. - - - - - Files and directories whose names begin with a dot - (.) are usually configuration - files, that is, files which keep settings and - preferences for various applications. For example, GNOME - keeps all its settings in various files in the directories - .gnome and - .gnome-desktop in the user's home - directory. Since most of the time you do not need to - edit these files manually, or even know their precise - names and locations, Nautilus - usually doesn't show these files. You can change this - setting as described in Nautilus manual. - - - - - Files with names ending with tilde (~) are - usually backup files created by various - applications. For example, when you edit a file - myfile.txt with - emacs, it - saves the previous version in the file - myfile.txt~. - - - - - - - Wildcards - - When entering commands from the command line, you can use - so-called wildcards instead of an exact - filename. The most common wildcard is *, which matches any - sequence of symbols (including an empty string). For example, - the command ls *.txt will list all the files with - the extension txt, and the command rm - chapter* will remove all files with the names starting with - chapter (ls and - rm are UNIX - commands for listing and removing files). Another useful - wildcard is ?, which matches any single symbol: for example, - rm chapter?.txt will remove files - chapter1.txt, chapter2.txt , but not - chapter10.txt - - Most new GNOME users prefer using the GNOME - File Manager for operations with files, rather - than working from the command line. Wildcards can also be - used in Nautilus in the file - selection and view filter dialogs. - - - - Using spaces, commas, etc. in file names - - As was mentioned above, a file name may contain not only - letters and numbers, but also spaces, commas, etc. — any - characters other than slash (/). However, if you are using - commands typed on the command line, you should be careful when - dealing with such files. To avoid problems, it is advised that - you enclose filenames that contain anything other than - letters, numbers, and dots, in single quotes: to delete file - My File, you should type rm 'My - File' rather than rm My - File. - - - Of course, if you are only using graphical tools such as GNOME - File Manager, than you do not need to worry about this: to - delete file My File, just drag it to the - trash can. - - - - - - Directories and paths - - Directory structure - - Now, let's discuss the concept of directories. A - directory is a collection of files. It - can be thought of as a folder that contains - many different files. Directories are given names, with which - they can be identified. Furthermore, directories are - maintained in a tree-like structure; that is, directories may - contain other directories. The top level directory is called - the root directory and denoted by - /; it contains all the files in your - system. - - - Pathnames - - A pathname is a file's full - name; it contains not only filename but also its - location. It is made up of the filename, preceded by the - name of the directory containing that file. This, in turn, - is preceded by the name of directory containing - that directory, and so on. A typical - pathname may look like - /home/sasha/talk.txt which refers to - the file talk.txt in the directory - sasha which in turn is a subdirectory - in /home. - - - As you can see, the directory and filename are separated by - a single slash (/). For this reason, filenames themselves - cannot contain the / character. MS-DOS users will find this - convention familiar, although in the MS-DOS world the - backslash (\) is used instead. The directory that contains a - given subdirectory is known as the parent - directory. Here, the directory - home is the parent of the directory - sasha. - - - Each user has a home directory, which is the directory set aside for - that user to store his or her files. Usually, user home directories - are contained under /home, and are named for the - user owning that directory, so that the home directory of user - sasha would be - /home/sasha. - - - - - Relative directory names - - At any moment, commands that you enter are assumed to be - relative to your current working - directory. You can think of your working directory as the - directory in which you are currently - located. When you first log in, your working - directory is set to your home directory — for user - sasha, it would be /home/sasha. Whenever - you refer to a file, you may refer to it in relationship to - your current working directory, rather than specifying the - full pathname of the file. - - - For example, if your current directory is - /home/sasha, and you have a file there called - talk.txt, you can refer to it just by its file - name: a command like emacs talk.txt issued from the - directory /home/sasha is equivalent to - emacs /home/sasha/talk.txt - (emacs is an extremely powerful editor for - text files; new users may prefer something simpler, such as - gnotepad, but for power user, - emacs is indispensable). - - - - - Similarly, if, in /home/sasha you have a - subdirectory called papers and, in that - subdirectory, a file called fieldtheory.txt, you - can refer to it as papers/fieldtheory.txt. - - If you begin a filename (like - papers/fieldtheory.txt) with a character - other than /, you're referring to the file in terms relative - to your current working directory. This is known as a relative - pathname. On the other hand, if you begin a filename with a - /, the system interprets this as a full pathname — that - is, a pathname that includes the entire path to the file, - starting from the root directory, /. Use of the full pathname - is known as an absolute pathname. - - - - Pathname conventions - - Here are some standard conventions you can use in paths: - - - ~/ — user's home directory - - - ./ — current working directory - - - ../ — parent of the current directory - - - For example, if sasha's current directory is - /home/sasha/papers, he can refer to the file - /home/sasha/talk.txt as - ~/talk.txt or as ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permissions - - Every file on your system has an owner — one - of the users (usually the one who created this file), and a system of - permissions, which regulate access to this - file. - - - For ordinary files, there are 3 types of access permissions: - read, write, and execute (the latter only makes sense for - executable files). They can be set independently for 3 - categories of users: the file owner, the users in the group - owning the file, and everyone else. Discussion of groups of - users goes beyond the scope of this document; the other two - categories are self-explanatory. So, if the permissions on a file - /home/sasha/talk.txt are set to read and - write for user sasha, who is the file owner, and read only for - everyone else, only sasha will be able to modify this file. - - - - - All newly created files carry some standard permissions, usually - read/write for user and read only for everyone else. You can - view the permissions using the GNOME File Manager, by - right-clicking on the file, choosing - Properties in the pop-up menu, and - then the Permissions tab. Using this - dialog, you can also change the permissions — just click - on a square representing the permission to toggle it. Of - course, only the file owner or the system administrator can - change the permissions of a file. Advanced users can also change - the default file permissions which are assigned to newly created - files—see the manual pages for your default shell (usually - bash, csh or - tcsh) and look for the command - umask. - - - - A file can also have some special permission properties such as - UID, GID, and sticky bit. They are for advanced - users only — do not change them unless you know what you - are doing. (If you are curious: these permissions are typically - used on executable files to allow the user to execute - some commands which read or modify files to - which the user himself doesn't have access.) - - - Similar to files, the directories also have - permissions. Again, there are 3 possible permissions: read, - write, and execute. However, they have different meaning: - namely, read permission for a directory means - permission to list the contents of the directory or search for a - file; write means permission to create and remove - files in the directory, and execute means - permission to access files in the directory. - - - Note that the permissions granted to a file depend on the - permissions of the directory in which the file is located: in - order to be able to read a file, a user needs to have the read - permission for the file itself and execute - permission for the directory that contains it. So, if user sasha - doesn't want anybody else to see his files, he can achieve this - by removing the execute permission on his home directory for all - other users. This way, no one but himself (and, of course, root) - will be able to read any of his files, no matter what the - permissions of individual files are. - - Detailed explanation of the permission system can be found, - for example, in the info - page for the GNU File Utilities - package. - - - - - Symbolic links - - In addition to regular files, UNIX also has special files called - symbolic links (or - symlinks for short). These files do not - contain any data; instead, they are just - pointers, or shortcuts to other - files. For example, sasha can have a symlink named - ft.txt pointing to the file - papers/fieldtheory.txt; this way, when a - program tries to access the file ft.txt, - the file papers/fieldtheory.txt will be - opened instead. As you can see from this example, the symlink - and the target file can have different names and be located in - different directories. - - Note that deleting, moving, or renaming the symlink file - has no effect on the target file: if sasha tries to delete the - file ft.txt, it is the symlink that will - be deleted, and the file - papers/fieldtheory.txt will remain - unchanged. Also, the permissions of the symlink are - meaningless: it is the permissions of the target file that - determine whether a user has the access to it. - - - Symlinks can also point to directories. For example, on - the GNOME FTP server (ftp.gnome.org), - there is a file - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, - which is actually a symlink to directory - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53 - — as one would expect, since October GNOME - is just another name for 1.0.53 release - of GNOME. - - - - Mounting and unmounting drives - - As we mentioned earlier, the directories on a UNIX system are - organized in a tree, with the top level directory being - /. Unlike some other operating systems such as - MS-DOS, there are no special names for files on your floppy disk or - CD-ROM: all the files accessible to your system - must appear in the main directory tree starting with - /. - - - Thus, before you can access files on a floppy diskette or a - CD-ROM, you must give to your system a command to incorporate - the contents of this diskette into the main directory tree, - which is referred to as mounting the - diskette. You can think of it as the software analog of - connecting the drive to your system. Typically the contents of - the CD-ROM will appear under the name - /mnt/cdrom; the floppy diskette under - /mnt/floppy (these are called the - mount points and are defined in the special - configuration file, /etc/fstab). Accessing - a drive in this fashion doesn't mean that the system will copy - all the files from the CD to the directory - /mnt/cdrom. Instead, it means that the - directory /mnt/cdrom - represents the CD-ROM: When a program tries - to access, say, a file called - /mnt/cdrom/index.html, the system will look - for file index.html on the CD-ROM. - - - So, in short: before you can use files on a drive, you must - mount it. Similarly, before removing - the disk from the drive, you must unmount it. - - - When using GNOME, you usually do not have to worry about - mounting and unmounting: GNOME scans the appropriate - configuration file and places the icons for all drives on your - desktop. Double-clicking on any of these icons automatically - mounts the corresponding drive (if it was not already mounted) - and starts the file manager in the appropriate directory. - Similarly, if you right-click on the drive icon and choose the - command Eject device from the pop-up - menu, GNOME automatically unmounts it before ejecting. You can - also mount/unmount a drive by right-clicking on its icon on the - desktop and choosing Mount device or - Unmount device from the pop-up menu, - or by using the disk mount applet. - - - Note that you can't unmount a drive if it is being used by some - program; for example, if you have a terminal windows open in a - directory on the drive you're trying to unmount. So, if you get - the error message Device busy while trying to - unmount a drive, make sure that none of your open applications - is accessing a file or directory on this drive. - - - However, GNOME cannot prevent you from ejecting the disk using the - physical eject button on the drive itself — in this case, - it is your responsibility to unmount the drive - before doing so. For CD and Zip drives, the system blocks the eject - button on the drive while the drive is mounted; for floppy drives this - is technically impossible. - - - - IMPORTANT - - If you eject a floppy disk using the eject button on the drive without - first unmounting it, you may lose your data! - - - - Some systems are running special programs such as - supermount or - magicdev - which automatically mount a drive when a disk is inserted and unmount a - drive if it hasn't been used for a specified period of time. In - this case, you will probably never need to worry about - mounting/unmounting drives yourself; you don't even need to read - this section. - - - Allowing users to mount and unmount drives carries some security - risks, so many multi-user systems are configured so that only - root can mount or unmount drives. This is the most probable - cause of error messages you may be getting while trying to mount - a drive. In this case, discuss this matter with your system - administrator. - - - If the computer is your personal workstation or home computer - and you are not worried about security, you can give mount - permission to ordinary users. The easiest way to allow this is - to use the application - linuxconf (which - can only be run by root). Just select the drive you want to - access in the Access local drive section. - In the Options tab select the - User Mountable option. Your drive will now - be mountable by users. - - - If linuxconf is - not available, then you must manually edit the file - /etc/fstab to include user access. This is - done by adding the user attribute to the - drive. For example: - - - If your fstab file contains a line like - this: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - add the word user to the fourth column: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - Drives and devices - - Under UNIX, the word device is used for all - peripheral devices connected to your computer; this includes - hard drives, floppy and CD-ROM drives, audio and video cards, - serial and parallel ports, and much more. Each device has a - name, such as /dev/hda. The most common - device names are listed below (for Linux; other varieties of - UNIX may use slightly different device names). - - - /dev/hd* (where *=a,b,c, - …): these are IDE devices, such as hard drives, - CD-ROM drives and ZIP drives. /dev/hda - denotes the master drive on the first IDE controller - (usually your first hard drive, C: - under Windows), /dev/hdb is the slave - drive on the fist controller (this can be a second hard - drive or a CD-ROM), and so on. See also the note below about ZIP drives. - - - - /dev/sd* (where *=a,b,c, …): - these are SCSI devices, usually hard drives. - - - - - NOTE - If the acronyms IDE and SCSI are new to you, here is a - brief explanation: there are two types of interfaces for hard - drives and other similar devices: IDE (and its cousins such as - EIDE, ATAPI, etc.) and SCSI. SCSI provides better performance, - but is more expensive, so it is only used on - servers. If you are not sure what kind of drives you have, most - probably it is IDE. - - - - /dev/fd* (where *=0,1, etc) are floppy - drives; /dev/fd0 is the first drive (it - corresponds to A: under Windows), - /dev/fd1 is the second - (B:), etc. - - - - /dev/lp* (where *=0,1, etc) are - parallel ports; most commonly, these ports are used to - connect a printer to the - computer. /dev/lp0 corresponds to - LPT1 under Windows, - /dev/lp1 to LPT2, - etc. - - - /dev/ttyS* (where *=0,1, - etc) are serial ports; these ports are commonly used for - connecting a mouse or a - modem. /dev/ttyS0 corresponds to - COM1 under Windows, - /dev/ttyS1 to COM2, - etc. - - - - /dev/audio and - /dev/dsp — these two device - names are used for your audio card (they are not equivalent, - since they are used for different types of audio files). - - - - - In addition, it is a common practice to have symlinks - /dev/floppy, /dev/modem and - /dev/cdrom pointing to the actual device - name corresponding to your floppy drive, modem, and CD-ROM drive - respectively. - - - You rarely need to use these device names. In particular, if you - want to access a file on a drive, you do not use the device name - (such as /dev/fd0); instead, you first - mount the device so that its contents shows as a subdirectory - (for example, /mnt/floppy) in the main - directory tree, and then use this directory for accessing - files; see for more information. About - the only time when you actually need to use the device names is - when you are configuring some newly installed program. For - example, a fax program can ask you for the device name for your - modem (in which case you can either give it the actual device - name, such as /dev/ttyS1, or just use the - symlink /dev/modem). - - And just for fun: there is also a device - /dev/null which acts as a black - hole: you can send to it any information, and it never - returns. So if you do not want to be bothered by error messages, - re-direct them to /dev/null -:). - - - - Partitions - - Note that it is possible to subdivide a hard drive (or a - similar device) into parts which for all practical purposes - behave as independent disks, even though physically they - reside on the same disk. These parts are called - partitions (under Windows, the name - logical disk is used). For example, you can - partition your hard drive into several partitions, and install - different operating systems in different partitions; you can - reformat each partition independently of the others. This - partitioning of the hard drive is usually done during the - installation of the operating system; refer to your - installation guide for more information. - - - If your hard drive has been partitioned then each partition - is considered as a separate device. For example, if your hard - drive is /dev/hda, then the first - partition on this drive would be referred to as - /dev/hda1, the second as - /dev/hda2, and so on. - - - Partitioning of ZIP disks - - For reasons unknown to us, the pre-formatted - ZIP disks sold in stores or formatted using Iomega's ZIP - tools under Windows are partitioned in a strange way: - they have only one partition (of Windows type, of course), - but this partition has number 4. Thus, if your ZIP drive is - /dev/hdc, the correct device name you - should use for such disks is /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - Graphical user interface: X Window System, window - managers, and desktop environments. - - UNIX is a modular system: it consists of many components so that - a user (or system administrator) can choose those components he - needs. In particular, there are several layers of software - responsible for graphical user interface. These layers are: X - Window System, window managers, and desktop environment. - - X Window System (also known as X, or - X11) is the component of UNIX systems responsible for virtually - all basic graphics — in particular, for drawing icons, - backgrounds, and windows in which your applications - work. Without X, you only have command line. X11 sets the screen - resolution and color depth, moves the mouse cursor around the - screen, etc. It serves as a foundation for other components of - graphical user interface such as window managers and desktop - environments. - - Window manager extends capabilities of - X Window System by placing borders and buttons around windows, - which allows the user to move, close, hide or resize the - windows. X11 is virtually always used in combination with a - window manager, since it would be pretty much unusable without - one. There are many window managers available for X11; most - popular are fvwm, - mwm, kwm - (used by KDE), Enlightenment, and - Sawfish. - - Finally, a desktop environment goes - one more step further than a window manager by adding a - graphical file manager from which you can drag-and-drop items on - your desktop, a panel which can be used to launch frequently - used applications, and a set of applications and utilities. - There are several desktop environments available for all - versions of UNIX; the most popular ones are GNOME, KDE and CDE (soon to be - replaced by GNOME). - - Most desktop environments contain a window manager as their - integral part; for example, KDE contains its own window manager, - kwm (it is possible to use KDE with - another window manager, but few people do so). GNOME has no - window manager of its own; it will allow you to choose any - window manager you already have on your system. To make life - easier for new users, usually the - Sawfish window manager is distributed - with GNOME and is used by default; you can switch to - another window manager using GNOME Control - Center. Note however that you will need a - GNOME-compliant window manager to use such features of GNOME as - session management, taskbar applet, etc. - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wheeler.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wheeler.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 4c01545..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wheeler.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,268 +0,0 @@ - - - - An Introduction to GNOME - - What is GNOME - - GNOME is a user-friendly desktop environment that enables users to easily - use and configure their computers. GNOME includes a panel (for starting - applications and displaying status), a desktop (where data and applications - can be placed), a set of standard desktop tools and applications, and a set - of conventions that make it easy for applications to cooperate and be - consistent with each other. Users of other operating systems or - environments should feel right at home using the powerful graphics-driven - environment GNOME provides. - - - GNOME is completely open source (free software), with freely available - source code developed by hundreds of programmers around the world. If you - would like to learn more about the GNOME project please visit the GNOME web site. - - - GNOME has a number of advantages for users. GNOME makes it easy to use and - configure applications using a simple yet powerful graphical interface. - - - GNOME is highly configurable, enabling you to set your desktop the way you - want it to look and feel. GNOME's session manager remembers previous - settings, so once you've set things the way you like they'll stay that - way. GNOME supports many human languages, and you can add more without - changing the software. GNOME even supports several Drag and Drop protocols - for maximum interoperability with applications that aren't GNOME-compliant. - - - GNOME also has a number of advantages for developers, which indirectly also - help users. Developers don't need to purchase an expensive software license - to make their commercial application GNOME compliant. In fact, GNOME is - vendor neutral - no component of the interface is controlled solely by one - company or restricted from modification and redistribution. GNOME - applications can be developed in a variety of computer languages, so you're - not stuck with a single language. GNOME uses the Common Object Request - Broker Architecture (CORBA) to allow software components to inter-operate - seamlessly, regardless of the computer language in which they are - implemented, or even what machine they are running on. Finally, GNOME runs - on a number of Unix-like operating systems, including Linux. - - - GNOME is an acronym for the GNU Network Object Model Environment, so GNOME - is a part of the larger GNU project. The GNU Project started in 1984 to - develop a completely free Unix-like operating system. If you'd like to - learn more about the GNU project you can read about it at the GNU Website. - - - - About This Guide - - This user's guide is designed to help you find your way around GNOME with - ease. Both new and experienced computer users can benefit from this guide. - If you're new to GNOME, or even computers, you'll gain an idea of how to use - your desktop. If you're an advanced computer user trying out GNOME, you can - work with expert tips, which will help you to become familiar with GNOME. - - - Although this was written originally in English, there are many translations - of the guide available now or in the near future. If you would like to have - this guide in another language you should check your operating system - distribution or visit the - GNOME Web Site to find out more information on translation. - - - This guide describes GNOME 1.4, which is the latest (as of March - 2001) release of GNOME. GNOME is rapidly developing, so by the - time you read this some parts of - this guide may be not up to date; in these cases, please use on-line - help in the application you are having trouble with. - - - This manual was written by Dave Mason (dcm@redhat.com), - Chris Lyttle (chris@wilddev.net) and Alexander Kirillov - (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu) with some help from other members - of Gnome Documentation Project. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the Gnome Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also add your comments - online by using the Gnome - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - GNOME Quick Start - - A First Glance At GNOME - - Figure 1 shows an example of GNOME running. GNOME is - very configurable, so your screen may look quite different. - -
- Sample GNOME Display. - - Sample GNOME Display - - - -
- - - Quick Start - - The long bar at the bottom of figure 1 is a GNOME - Panel, which contains a collection of menus, useful panel applets, and - application launchers. The button containing the stylized foot is the - Main Menu button (the most common kind of menu); just click on the Main - Menu button and you'll see a menu of pre-loaded applications and options, - including a logout command. Panel applets are tiny programs designed to - be placed in a panel, for example, the the Desk Guide applet on the - far right shows 4 virtual desktops to place your applications. - Application launchers are buttons that, when - pressed, immediately start programs (including GNOME utilities and office - applications). In this example the toolbox button starts the GNOME - Control Center (for configuring your system), the question mark button - starts the GNOME Help browser (for viewing documentation), the display - starts the terminal (if you'd prefer to use a text interface), and the - world starts your web browser. The arrows on each - side of the panel hide (and unhide) the panel. - - - Outside of the Panel is the "Desktop". Just drag items from the panel on to - your desktop you use most often and you can double-click on an item (with the - left mouse button) to use it: - - - - - If the item is a program, that program will start. - - - - - If it's data, the appropriate program will start up with that data - loaded. - - - - - If it's a folder, the Nautilus file manager will start and - show the - contents of that folder. Your desktop will probably have a folder icon - labeled "Home". Double-clicking on it will start the Nautilus file manager - at your home directory. - - - - - The Nautilus file manager lets you manipulate your files. - The left side of its window shows the current folder with tabs for Help, - History and Notes, and the right side shows the current folder's contents: - - - - - To move the file or folder, just drag and drop it. - - - - - To copy a file or folder, hold down the CTRL key while dragging. - - - - - To run a program or edit a data file, double-click it. - - - - - To perform other operations on a file (such as rename or delete), select it - using the right mouse button and then choose the operation you want. You - can also use this to select an application to open the file. - - - - - To select more than one item at a time, click on the items after the first - one while holding down the CTRL key. - - - - - You can easily move or copy files between folders by starting two file - manager applications, each one showing a different folder. If you want to - put a file on your desktop, simply drag it from the file manager onto the - desktop. In fact, dragging and dropping items onto other items generally - "does the right thing" in GNOME, making it easy to get work done. - - - GNOME is very configurable; for example, you can have multiple panels - (horizontal and vertical), choose what goes in them, and have them hide - automatically. There are many panel applets you can include in your panel. - You can also change how the screen looks; later portions of this document - tell you how. - - - GNOME follows several UNIX conventions you should be aware of. The left - mouse button is used to select and drag items. The right mouse button brings - up a menu for the selected object (if a menu applies). Most UNIX mice have 3 - buttons, and the middle button is used to paste text (if in a text area) or - to move things. If you only have two buttons, press the left and right - buttons simultaneously to simulate the middle button. To copy text, use the - left button to drag across the text you want to copy, move the mouse cursor - to the place you want the text to be, and press the middle button (or mouse - wheel). - - - When an application window is displayed, there will be some buttons in - its borders for controlling the window. These include buttons to minimize, - maximize, and close the window. Their appearance can be configured and is - controlled by a component called the "Window Manager." - - - An example of border styles is the MicroGUI style (Figure - 2) which is a window manager theme used in both Sawmill and - Enlightenment. You can read more about window managers in . - - - In the MicroGUI border style, the down arrow means minimize, the up arrow means - maximize (use the whole screen), and the X button means close the window, - and the down triangle brings up the Window menu. - -
- MicroGUI Border Style - - Clean Border Style - - - -
- - If you've never used a Unix or Linux system before, you might find the - overview in Appendix A helpful as well. - - - The following sections go into more detail, describing each component of - the system: the window manager, panel, main menu, - desktop, file - manager, control center and applets. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wms.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wms.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 378c0ab..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/C/wms.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ - - - - Window Managers and GNOME - - About Window Managers - - In Unix and Linux, nearly all graphical applications use the - "X Window System" - as the underlying software between the hardware and the "graphical - user interface" (GUI). The window manager is the piece of software - that controls the display windows in the X Window System environment. The - placement, borders, and decorations of any window are managed by the - window manager. GNOME works with the window manager to display application - windows on your screen. - - - GNOME is not dependent on any particular window manager. If you decide to change - window managers GNOME will maintain a consistent interface to your applications. - GNOME works with the window manager to get information about the windows on the - screen. However, some GNOME features require a "GNOME compliant window - manager" to work correctly, in particular the Desk Guide applet as well as - drag and drop on the desktop. We recommend the use of a GNOME compliant - window manager for new users. - - - Some of the window managers that have partial to full compliance at the - time of this version of the GNOME User's Guide are: - - - - - Sawfish (formerly named Sawmill) - - - - - IceWM - - - - - WindowMaker - - - - - Enlightenment - - - - - AfterStep - - - - - FVWM2 - - - - - There are other window managers being developed that will work - with GNOME. You can find some of these on the GNOME Software Map. - - - - Changing Window Managers - - At any time you may change the window manager you are using by utilizing - the Window Manager Capplet in the GNOME Control Center. You may read more - about this Capplet in - - - IMPORTANT - - Keep in mind that the window manager you choose to use may not be - compliant with GNOME and you may not benefit from some of the GNOME - features if you use it. - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/Makefile.am b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 682583f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ -SUBDIRS = \ - C \ - es \ - it diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/Makefile.am b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index a2c0aee..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ -docname = gnome-users-guide -lang = es -omffile = gnome-users-guide-es.omf -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook -sgml_ents = \ - authors.sgml \ - desktop.sgml \ - fdl.sgml \ - gmenu.sgml \ - gnomecc.sgml \ - gpl-appendix.sgml \ - nautilus-user-manual.sgml \ - panel.sgml \ - ug-applets.sgml \ - wheeler.sgml \ - wms.sgml \ - fdl-es.sgml \ - gpl-es.sgml \ - licencias.sgml \ - traduccion.sgml -figs = \ -figures/anotherclock-applet.png \ -figures/anotherclock-properties.png \ -figures/applet_props_dialog.png \ -figures/asclock_applet.png \ -figures/asclock_settings.png \ -figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png \ -figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png \ -figures/battery-applet-graph.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png \ -figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png \ -figures/bg-capplet.png \ -figures/border1.png \ -figures/cdplayer_applet.png \ -figures/charpick_applet.png \ -figures/charpick_applet_settings.png \ -figures/charpick_characters.png \ -figures/clock_applet.png \ -figures/clock_settings.png \ -figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png \ -figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png \ -figures/clockmail_applet.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-default.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/cpuload-applet.png \ -figures/cpumemusage-applet.png \ -figures/create_launcher.png \ -figures/custicon.png \ -figures/deskguide-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png \ -figures/deskguide-properties.png \ -figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png \ -figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png \ -figures/diskusage-applet.png \ -figures/drawer_open.png \ -figures/drawer_properties.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_all.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png \ -figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png \ -figures/example_applets.png \ -figures/example_menu.png \ -figures/example_panel.png \ -figures/fifteen_applet.png \ -figures/fish_applet.png \ -figures/fish_settings.png \ -figures/full-1.png \ -figures/full-2.png \ -figures/full-3.png \ -figures/full-4.png \ -figures/full-5.png \ -figures/full-6.png \ -figures/full-desk.png \ -figures/full.png \ -figures/gccalf.png \ -figures/gccappdef.png \ -figures/gccdialog.png \ -figures/gccedit.png \ -figures/gcchints.png \ -figures/gccmdi.png \ -figures/gccmime.png \ -figures/gccsession-props.png \ -figures/gccsessopt.png \ -figures/gccsound1.png \ -figures/gccsound2.png \ -figures/gccstartup.png \ -figures/gccurl.png \ -figures/geyes_applet.png \ -figures/geyes_settings.png \ -figures/gkb_add_list.png \ -figures/gkb_applet.png \ -figures/gkb_applet_settings.png \ -figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png \ -figures/glob_pref_anim.png \ -figures/gnome-logo-large.png \ -figures/gnotes-fig.png \ -figures/gnotes-properties.png \ -figures/gweather_applet.png \ -figures/gweather_settings.png \ -figures/gweather_weather.png \ -figures/hide-button.png \ -figures/jbc_applet.png \ -figures/keyboard-capplet.png \ -figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png \ -figures/launcher_properties_basic.png \ -figures/life-applet.png \ -figures/link.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-default.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png \ -figures/loadavg-applet.png \ -figures/locbar.png \ -figures/logout-screen.png \ -figures/mailcheck-applet.png \ -figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png \ -figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png \ -figures/mainmenu_properties.png \ -figures/memload-applet-default.png \ -figures/memload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/memload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/memload-applet.png \ -figures/menueditor.png \ -figures/mini-commander_applet.png \ -figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png \ -figures/mixer_applet.png \ -figures/mm-button.png \ -figures/modemlights-advpref.png \ -figures/modemlights-prefs.png \ -figures/modemlights.png \ -figures/mouse-capplet.png \ -figures/netload-applet-default.png \ -figures/netload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/netload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/netload-applet.png \ -figures/noread.png \ -figures/nowrite.png \ -figures/odometer_applet.png \ -figures/odometer_settings.png \ -figures/odometer_themes.png \ -figures/panel_applets.png \ -figures/panel_lockbut.png \ -figures/panel_logoutbut.png \ -figures/panel_props_back.png \ -figures/panel_props_edge.png \ -figures/panel_runbutton.png \ -figures/panel_runprogram.png \ -figures/panel_swallow.png \ -figures/part-1.png \ -figures/part-2.png \ -figures/part-3.png \ -figures/part.png \ -figures/player-1.png \ -figures/player-2.png \ -figures/player-3.png \ -figures/player-4.png \ -figures/player.png \ -figures/prefmenu.png \ -figures/printer-fig.png \ -figures/printer-properties.png \ -figures/quicklaunch_applet.png \ -figures/screensave-capplet.png \ -figures/sidebar.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png \ -figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png \ -figures/status_dock.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-default.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png \ -figures/swapload-applet-properties.png \ -figures/swapload-applet.png \ -figures/tasklist-fig.png \ -figures/tasklist-properties-size.png \ -figures/tasklist-properties.png \ -figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png \ -figures/theme-select.png \ -figures/tickastat_applet.png \ -figures/tickastat_coredump.png \ -figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png \ -figures/tickastat_settings.png \ -figures/viewmenu.png \ -figures/viewmusic.png \ -figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png \ -figures/webcontrol-applet.png \ -figures/whereami_applet.png \ -figures/wm-add.png \ -figures/wm-main.png diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 43bcd4b..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ - - Otro Reloj - - El Aplique Otro reloj, , es un reloj analógico similar al que existe - en el panel de CDE Entorno común de escritorio, uno de los primeros entornos de escritorio de UNIX). - Para añadir al Panel, puede pulsar el botón derecho de su ratón en una zona - vacía del Panel y seguir la secuencia: - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Apliques - Relojes - Otro Reloj - . - - -
- Aplique Otro Reloj - - Aplique Otro Reloj - - - -
- - - - Uso - - No se necesita hacer nada especial para correr este aplique. Sólo se - coloca en el Panel y te indica la hora. - - - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo de - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica sobre el aplique Otro Reloj - , incluyendo la versión y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - - - Preferencias - - Tu puedes personalizar el aplique Otro Reloj - pulsando sobre el y eligiendo - Propiedades…. Esto abrirá la ventana de - diálogo de - Propiedades (vista en ), la cual permite hacer varios - cambios en la configuración. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades - - Diálogo de Propiedades - - - -
- - - Las propiedades son: - - - - - Color del reloj — Actualmente no está disponible, pero en el futuro será posible - ajustar el color de la esfera del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de las horas — Puede configurar el color que se - desea usar en la aguja de las horas del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de los minutos — Puede configurar el color que - se desea usar en la aguja de los minutos del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de los segundos — Puede configurar el color que - se desea usar en la aguja de los segundos del reloj. - - - - - - Mostrar aguja de los segundos — Pulsando sobre esta selección se - le permitirá elegir si la aguja de los segundos se muestra o no. La opción por - defecto será mostrarla. - - - - - - - - Despues que todos los cambios estan hechos, presione en - OK para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el - diálogo de Propiedades. Para cancelar los cambios - y volver a los valores anteriores, presione sobre el botón de - Cancelar. - - - - - - - - Errores Conocidos y Limitaciones - - - - - Si ajusta la hora del sistema hacia atrás (la atrasa) usando el comando date, - el reloj se parará hasta que la hora del sistema alcance a la hora que el reloj muestra. - Entonces comenzará a funcionar normalmente. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/asclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/asclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f832445..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/asclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ - - AfterStep Clock Applet - - - The AfterStep Clock applet, shown in , is an applet which - displays the time in both analogue (clockface) and digital format - along with the day of the week and the date. It is based on the look - of the NeXTStep clock. This document describes version 2.1.10 of - AfterStep Clock. - - - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - AfterStep Clock - . - - -
- AfterStep Clock Applet - - AfterStep Clock Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything special to this clock. It will just - sit on your panel and tell you the time and date. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about ASClock - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize AfterStep Clock - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - Your properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Display time in 12 hour format (AM/PM) — Clicking this - will display the time in a 12 hour format. The default state, - off, uses a 24-hour clock. - - - - - - Blinking elements in clock — When the - AfterStep clock applet starts - up, by default it displays a blinking colon between the hour and - minute display. Clicking this turns this blinking off. - - - - - - Clock theme — The AS Clock - applet can take on a number of different appearances. Select - the theme (appearance) from this list. - - - - - - - - - The Timezone tab is used to specify your - timezone. Select the continent and city your are in or closest - to. - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - You can't change the time through the clock properties. This - is not really a bug; it's because you must be root to alter - the time for the whole of the system, using the - date command. - - - If you adjust the system clock backwards using the - date command, the clock will stop working until the - system time reaches the time the clock displays. It will start - working normally then. - - - Switching between a lot of themes or a lot of timezones seems - to use up inordinate amounts of memory. - - - - - - - - Authors - - - - The AfterStep Clock applet was written - by Beat Christen (spiff@longstreet.ch) and - Patrick Rogan (rogan@lycos.com). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports regarding the software to the - GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk) and Aaron Weber - (aaron@helixcode.com. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/battery-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/battery-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 5143444..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/battery-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,498 +0,0 @@ - - - Aplique Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - - - El aplique Monitor de la Carga de la Batería, - tal como se observa en Figura 1, muestra el estado - de la carga de la batería de su ordenador portátil. Para - incluir este aplique en el Panel, - pulse con el botón derecho sobre el Panel y elija - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Monitores - Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - . - - - - - Para que el Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - funcione adecuadamente, su ordenador debe estar configurado para - admitir la Gestión Avanzada de Energía. - - - -
- Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - - Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - - - -
- - - Utilización - - El Monitor de la Carga de la Batería sencillamente - se localiza en su panel siguiendo el estado de la batería de su ordenador. Pulsando - el botón izquierdo sobre el aplique podrá conmutar entre - las vistas lectura y gráfica, tal y como se explica en las secciones respectivas - Vista Lectura - y Vista Gráfica . - - - - - Vista Lectura - - La Vista Lectura, el modo por omisión de la vista, muestra el estado - actual de la batería en forma de icono y texto. En este modo en el - Monitor de la Carga de la Batería aparecerá - la siguiente información: - - - - - Icono Batería - - - La representación iconográfica de la batería en la parte izquierda del aplique, - muestra cuánto de llena está actualmente su batería. La superficie coloreada de - la batería representa la cantidad de carga restante en su batería, - el límite superior representa la carga del 100% . - - - - El color de la batería cambia cuando la carga cae por debajo del umbral - actual de Umbral de Carga Baja (ver - Propiedades — - Generales). Los colores por omisión son verde si la batería está normal - y rojo cuando está por debajo del Umbral de Carga Baja . - - - - Cuando su ordenador está conectado a una fuente de corriente, aparece un - pequeño rayo en la representación de la batería indicando que la batería - está conectada al suministro eléctrico y se está cargando. Se puede ver - un ejemplo de esto en la - Figura 2. Puede configurar la batería para cambiar el color cuando - está o no conectada a la alimentación eléctrica, véase - - Propiedades — de Lectura para más detalles. - - -
- Monitor de la Carga de la Batería con la alimentación eléctrica conectada - - - Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - - - -
- - - - - - Porcentaje Restante - - - El porcentaje que se lee en la parte superior del aplique representa cual es la - carga actual de la batería de su ordenador. - - - - - - Tiempo Restante - - - El tiempo restante de batería aparece en la esquina inferior derecha del aplique. - Este tiempo está indicado en horas y minutos. - - - - - - - - - - - - Vista Gráfica - - La vista gráfica muestra el porcentaje de carga restante en su batería - en forma de gráfica móvil. El eje horizontal representa el tiempo y el vertical - el porcentaje de carga con el 100% de carga en la superior. Por omisión - la gráfica es verde cuando su ordenador se conecta a la alimentación eléctrica - y azul en otro caso. La gráfica también cambia de color cuando la carga cae por - debajo del Umbral de Carga Baja (véase Propiedades — Generales) - en ese caso el color por omisión es el rojo. - - - - -
- Monitor de Carga de Batería en el Modo Gráfico - - Monitor de Carga de Batería en el Modo Gráfico - - - -
- - - - - Elementos del Menú Emergente del Botón-Derecho - - Además de los elementos del menú estándar, el menú emergente del botón derecho posee - los siguientes elementos: - - - - Propiedades... — Este menú abre el diálogo - Propiedades (véase - Propiedades) - le permite personalizar la apariencia y comportamiento de este aplique. - - - - - - - - Propiedades - - Puede configurar el aplique Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - pulsando sobre el botón derecho del aplique y eligiendo el elemento de menú Propiedades... - . Se abrirá el diálogo Propiedades, con cuatro grupos de - elementos configurables dispuestos en las siguientes páginas: - - - General, - Lectura, - Gráfica y - Mensajes de Carga de Batería - . - - - - Propiedades — Generales - -
- Propiedades del Diálogo — General - - Propiedades del Diálogo — General - - - -
- - - - - Seguir el Tamaño del Panel — le indica al - Monitor de la Carga del Batería que cambie su tamaño - cuando lo haga el panel. Por omisión aparece seleccionado. Para que los elementos - Alto de Aplique y - Ancho de Aplique tengan efecto, la opción anterior - no debe estar seleccionada. - - - - - - Alto de Aplique & Ancho de Aplique — - Estos dos botones "spin" le permiten indicar exactamente las dimensiones del - Monitor de la Carga de la Batería en pixels. Para que - éstos tengan efecto Seguir el Tamaño del Panel no debe estar - seleccionado. Los valores por omisión son, para ambos, 48. - - - - - - Fijando estos valores muy pequeños (por debajo de 28 pixels) hará que - no se muestre el icono batería por la falta de espacio. - - - - - - - El Intervalo de Actualización — indica la periodicidad - de los refrescos de la información mostrada por el Monitor de Carga - de la Batería. Por omisión se toma dos segundos. - - - - - - El Umbral de Carga Baja — es un valor porcentual - de carga de la batería tal que es utilizado por el Monitor de Carga - de la Batería para, opcionalmente, mostrar un mensaje de alerta, - en ese caso considera que le queda poca energía a la batería. Esta información se - utiliza, por ejemplo, para decidir cuando se ha de cambiar el color del icono batería de - la Vista Lectura. El valor por omisión es 25. - - - - - - Modo Aplique — las dos cajas de chequeo - Lectura y - Gráfica son la otra forma de cambiar entre - - Vista Lectura y - Vista Gráfica . - - - - - - - Propiedades — Lectura - - - Los elementos de esta pestaña sólo actúan sobre el Monitor de Carga de - la Batería cuando está en modo - Vista Lectura. - - - - Todos los rectángulos coloreados de esta pestaña se pueden pulsar con el - botón izquierdo del ratón, de esa forma aparecerá - la rueda de colores de GNOME. Esto le permitirá seleccionar los colores que - prefiera además de los predeterminados. - - - -
- Propiedades del Diálogo — Lectura - - Propiedades del Diálogo — Lectura - - -
- - - - - Color Batería Conectada (AC-On) — indica el - color del icono batería en la vista Lectura cuando su ordenador está conectado - a la alimentación AC. El color por omisión es el verde. - - - - - - Color Batería Desconectada (AC-Off) — indica el - color del icono batería en la vista Lectura cuando su ordenador no está - conectado a la alimentación AC. El valor por omisión es verde. - - - - - - - Color de Batería Baja — indica el color - del icono batería en la vista Lectura cuando el porcentaje de carga - cae por debajo del Umbral de Carga Baja - (véase Propiedades - — Generales). El valor por omisión es rojo. - - - - - - - Propiedades — Gráfica - - Los elementos de esta pestaña sólo afectan al Monitor de la Carga - de la Batería cuando está en modo - Vista Gráfica. - - - - Todos los rectángulos coloreados en esta pestaña se pueden pulsador con el - botón izquierdo así aparecerá la rueda de selección - de color de GNOME. De esa forma podrá seleccionar los colores que prefiera además de los - predeterminados. - - - -
- Propiedades del Diálogo — Gráfica - - Propiedades del Diálogo — Gráfica - - -
- - - - - - Color de Batería conectada (AC-On) — - indica el color del gráfico cuando su ordenador está conectado - a la alimentación AC. El valor por omisión es verde. - - - - - - Color de Batería desconectada (AC-Off) &mdash: indica - el color de la gráfica cuando su ordenador no está conectado a la alimentación - AC. El valor por omisión es azul. - - - - - - - Color de Gráfica de Batería Baja — indica - el color de la gráfica cuando el porcentaje de carga cae por debajo del - Umbral de Carga Baja. El valor por defecto es rojo. - - - - - - Color de divisiones del Gráfico — indica el color - de las líneas de división de la gráfica, marca los puntos de carga - 25% 50% y 75% . El color por omisión es gris oscuro. - - - - - - Dirección de la Gráfica — - indica en que dirección se moverá la gráfica contra el tiempo. La dirección por - defecto es Derecha a Izquierda. - - - - - - - - Mensajes de la — Carga de la Batería - -
- Diálogo Propiedades — Mensajes de la Carga de la Batería - - Diálogo Propiedades — Mensajes de la Carga de la Batería - - - -
- - - - - Alerta si la carga de la batería cae - — indica el porcentaje de carga para el cual el - Monitor de Carga de la Batería mostrará una - caja de diálogo cuando la batería estea baja. Esta alerta se mostrará únicamente - si se selecciona Habilitar Alterna de Batería Baja . - El valor por omisión es 5%. - - - - - - - Habilitar Alerta de Batería Baja — - indica si el Monitor de Carga de la Batería - debería mostrar una caja de diálogo cuando la carga de la batería ha caído por - debajo del porcentaje de carga indicado en el elemento Alerta si - la carga de la batería cae. El valor por omisión es seleccionado. - - - - - - - - Habilitar la Notificación de Carga-Completa — - indica si el Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - mostrará una caja de diálogo cuando la batería ha alcanzado el porcentaje - del 100% de carga. El valor por defecto es no seleccionado. - - - - - - - - - - Errores y Limitaciones Conocidas - - Un problema es si arranca Monitor de la Carga de la Batería - en un ordenador que no tiene soporte de Gestión de Energía Avanzado. - De esa forma la caja diálogo Alerta de Batería Baja - mostrada esté equivocada. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3a89ac8..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique lector de CD - - - Aplique de lector de CD, que se muestra en , le permite escuchar CDs desde el - Panel. Para añadir este aplique al Panel, - apriete el botón derecho del ratón sobre el Panel y seleccione - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Multimedia - Lector de CD - . - - -
- Aplique lector de CD - - Aplique lector de CD - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Este aplique se utiliza para escuchar o controlar CDs sin bloquear el equipo - mientras usted realiza su trabajo o juega a FreeCell. Para - utilizarlo, simplemente apriete los pequeños botones en el aplique tal como - haría en cualquier lector de CD. - - - - Apretando el botón derecho del ratón sobre el aplique aparece un menú que - contiene los siguientes elementos: - - - - - Ejecutar lector de CD… — - ejecuta el Lector de CD de GNOME, - que tiene más funcionalidades que el Aplique de lector de CD - omo son la descarga automática de la información sobre - las pistas del CD desde un servidor CDDB, el control del volumen y el - visualizador de título y pista. - - - - - - Ayuda — - enseña este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica acerca delAplique - lector de CD, incluyendo la versión del aplique y el - nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - - - - Errores conocidos y Limitaciones - - Este aplique no tiene errores conocidos. - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/charpick-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/charpick-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 16a197f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/charpick-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,261 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique Tabla de Caracteres - - - El aplique Tabla de Caracteres, mostrado en , te permite escribir fácilmente muchos - caracteres que no están disponibles en teclados estándar, como caracteres - acentuados, ciertos símbolos matemáticos y de puntuación, y otros símbolos - especiales. Para añadir este aplique a un Panel, pulsa - con el botón derecho en el Panel y selecciona - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Utilidades - Tabla de Caracteres - . - - -
- Aplique Tabla de Caracteres - - Aplique Tabla de Caracteres - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Primero, lleva el foco del cursor al aplique Tabla de - Caracteres pulsando sobre uno de los caracteres mostrados en - el aplique. Especifica el grupo de caracteres pulsando la tecla - correspondiente en tu teclado. (Para una lista completa de grupos de - caracteres y teclas correspondientes, véase - .) Por ejemplo, para ver las - varias versiones de la letra "a" acentuada, pulsa "a". Después de haber - encontrado la letra o el símbolo correcto pulsa con el botón izquierdo sobre - él para copiar el símbolo al buffer. El caracter deberá aparecer cono un - botón pulsado. Esto es parecido al popular comando Copiar, disponible en - muchos programas. Para pegar el símbolo en cualquier ventana, simplemente - pulsa el botón central del ratón. La mayoría de las aplicaciones que tienen - las opciones Copiar y Pegar también te permitirán pegar el símbolo - utilizando su comando Pegar. - - - - Soporte de caracteres ISO-8859-1 (Latin-1) - - Fíjate que algunas aplicaciones no soportan caracteres ISO-8859-1. Estas - aplicaciones no mostrarán ciertos caracteres del aplique - Tabla de Caracteres. - - - - - Copiar y Pegar en X - - El sistema X Windows permite copiar y pegar texto marcándolo con el primer - botón del ratón para copiar el texto y después pegando el texto pulsando el - botón central del ratón. Fíjate que Tabla de - Caracteres usa el mismo buffer de copia que utiliza X. Por lo - tanto, cuando seleccionas un caracter en la Tabla de - Caracteres reemplaza cualquier texto previo que se encontrase - en el buffer. Del mismo modo, si has seleccionado un caracter en la - Tabla de Caracteres y después marcas algún texto - el texto marcado reemplazará el caracter en el buffer y el botón dejará de - aparecer como pulsado. - - - - - Pulsando con el botón derecho sobre el aplique emerge un menú con los - siguientes elementos: - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca de… — - muestra información básica acerca del Aplique Tabla de - Caracteres, incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre - del autor. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalización - - Puedes personalizar el aplique Tabla de - Caracteres pulsando con el botón derecho sobre él y - seleccionando Propiedades…. Esto abrirá - el diálogo Propiedades (mostrado en ), que te permite cambiar varias - opciones. - - -
- Diálogo Propiedades - - Diálogo Propiedades - - - -
- - - Las propiedades en la pestaña Tamaño son: - - - - - Adaptar al tamaño del panel — Si este botón - se encuentra marcado, el aplique Tabla de - Caracteres adaptará automáticamente el número de filas y - columnas de caracteres para caber en el Panel. - - - - - - Número mínimo de celdas: (para tamaño automático) - — Esto define el número mínimo de botones con caracter (o - "celdas") que se mostrarán. El número real de botones con caracter - puede exceder de este número, dependiendo del tamaño del - Panel y el número elegido. Fíjate que si el - número es demasiado pequeño, algunos caracteres podrían no ser visibles. - (Esta variable no influye en la disposición de las celdas si el botón - Adaptar al tamaño del panel no está - seleccionado.) - - - - - - Cantidad de filas de botones: — - Esto determina el número de filas de botones con caracter (o "celdas") - que aparecen en el aplique. (Esta variable no influye en la disposición - de las celdas si el botón Adaptar al tamaño del - panel está seleccionado.) - - - - - - Cantidad de columnas de botones: — - Esto determina el número de columnas de botones con caracter (o - "celdas") que aparecen en el aplique. (Esta variable no influye en la - disposición de las celdas si el botón Adaptar al tamaño del - panel está seleccionado.) - - - - - - Tamaño del botón: (en píxeles) — Este es el - tamaño (en píxeles) de cada botón con caracter en el aplique. - - - - - - - - Las propiedades en la pestaña Lista por omisión son: - - - - - Lista de caracteres por omisión — Esta es - la lista de caracteres que será mostrada en el aplique cuando pulsas la - barra espaciadora. Esto es un modo conveniente de tener una lista de los - caracteres usados con mayor frecuencia. Simplemente introduce los - caracteres que más usas en este campo. - - - - - - - - Después de haber realizado todos los cambios que quieras, pulsa sobre - OK para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo - Properties. Pulsa - Aplicar para aplicar los cambios sin cerrar el - diálogo actual. - Cerrar cierra - Propiedades sin guardar los cambios que no hayan - sido aplicados. Los cambios aplicados no pueden ser cancelados. - - - - - - Caracteres - - El aplique Tabla de Caracteres tiene todos los - caracteres del conjunto de caracteres ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1) que no están en - los teclados estándar de EEUU. Están asignados como se muestra en . Los caracteres en negrita en la - primera columna de cada mitad y a la izquierda de la línea de puntos son los - caracteres que debes usar en el aplique Tabla de - Caracteres para obtener los caracteres correspondientes - mostrados a la derecha. - -
- Clave de Caracteres de la Tabla de Caracteres - - Clave de Caracteres de la Tabla de Caracteres - - - -
- - - - - - - Errores y Limitaciones conocidos - - Este aplique no tiene errores conocidos. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 8b2dd07..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ - - Otro Reloj - - El Aplique Otro reloj, , es un reloj analógico similar al que existe - en el panel de CDE Entorno común de escritorio, uno de los primeros entornos de escritorio de UNIX). - Para añadir al Panel, puede pulsar el botón derecho de su ratón en una zona - vacía del Panel y seguir la secuencia: - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Apliques - Relojes - Otro Reloj - . - - -
- Aplique Otro Reloj - - Aplique Otro Reloj - - - -
- - - - Uso - - No se necesita hacer nada especial para correr este aplique. Sólo se - coloca en el Panel y te indica la hora. - - - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo de - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica sobre el aplique Otro Reloj - , incluyendo la versión y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - - - Preferencias - - Tu puedes personalizar el aplique Otro Reloj - pulsando sobre el y eligiendo - Propiedades…. Esto abrirá la ventana de - diálogo de - Propiedades (vista en ), la cual permite hacer varios - cambios en la configuración. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades - - Diálogo de Propiedades - - - -
- - - Las propiedades son: - - - - - Color del reloj — Actualmente no está disponible, pero en el futuro será posible - ajustar el color de la esfera del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de las horas — Puede configurar el color que se - desea usar en la aguja de las horas del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de los minutos — Puede configurar el color que - se desea usar en la aguja de los minutos del reloj. - - - - - - Color de la aguja de los segundos — Puede configurar el color que - se desea usar en la aguja de los segundos del reloj. - - - - - - Mostrar aguja de los segundos — Pulsando sobre esta selección se - le permitirá elegir si la aguja de los segundos se muestra o no. La opción por - defecto será mostrarla. - - - - - - - - Despues que todos los cambios estan hechos, presione en - OK para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el - diálogo de Propiedades. Para cancelar los cambios - y volver a los valores anteriores, presione sobre el botón de - Cancelar. - - - - - - - - Errores Conocidos y Limitaciones - - - - - Si ajusta la hora del sistema hacia atrás (la atrasa) usando el comando date, - el reloj se parará hasta que la hora del sistema alcance a la hora que el reloj muestra. - Entonces comenzará a funcionar normalmente. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6c17602..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,343 +0,0 @@ - - Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - - Clock and Mailcheck applet, shown in , displays the current time and how - much mail is in your mailbox. It also notifies you when new mail - arrives by flashing. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Clocks - Clock and Mailcheck - . - - -
- Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - Clock and Mailcheck Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - - View the time and number of messages in your inbox in the applet's - display. The envelope will flash when new email arrives. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Clock and Mailcheck - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Clock and Mailcheck - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The Properties dialogue is divided in two - sections, one for general options and one for themes. - - - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Display time in 12 hours format (AM/PM) — Check this - button to show the time in 12-hour format. - - - - - - Display time relative to GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) — - This allows you to change the timezone - Clock and Mailcheck - uses. The time can be anything from twelve hours - ahead of GMT to twelve hours behind it. Remember also to select - the checkbox, to use the new - timezone. Note that you can only alter the - time by an integral number of hours. - - - - - - Mail file — Enter you email inbox file which should be - checked for new mail. Typically, this is - /var/spool/mail/yourusername - or something similar. You can only enter one file. - - - - - - When new mail is received, run... — It is possible to - execute commands when new mail arrives. - For example, it is very common for people to have a sound - file played as mail arrives. You can put the command to - run and the file to run it on in this space and ensure the - checkbox is checked for it to occur. - If you have more than one command, you can separate them - by a semi-colon. For example, - - - - esdplay /full/path/to/file.wav - - - - - cd /path/to/directory ; esdplay file.wav - - - - These two have the same effect. You will need the full path - for this, without using shortcuts such as cd ~. - - - - - - Always blink when new mail is waiting — If you select - this checkbox, then the - red envelope will blink until you read your unread email. Normally, - this is off, and the blinking lasts only a few seconds. - - - - - - Number of messages to consider mailbox full — Set the - number of messages you mailbox must have to be considered - full. Certain themes will show a special - symbol indicating the mailbox is full. - - - - - - When clicked, run... — When this is set, clicking - the left mouse button on the applet will run a program. The default is - to run the Balsa mail client. (If - Balsa is not installed, nothing - will happen.) Set this to be your favorite email program. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Theme tab allows you - to set the appearance of Clock and - Mailcheck applet. Clock and - Mailcheck applet comes with many themes which are - stored in $PREFIX/clockmail/. By - default, it does not use a theme. Note that not all of the themes - show both the time and the state of your mailbox. - - -
- Properties dialog showing theme tab - - Properties dialog showing theme tab - - - -
- - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - - - You can't change the time through the clock properties. This - is not really a bug; it's because you must be root to alter - the time for the whole of the system, using the - date command. - - - - - If you adjust the system clock backwards using the - date command, the clock will stop working until the - system time reaches the time the clock displays. It will start - working normally then. - - - - - The mailcounter theme gets the number of messages in your inbox - wrong. - - - - - Several themes do not reshape to the size of a vertical panel and - force the panel to be wider. - - - - - Doesn't handle multiple mailboxes. - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - ClockMail was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f482cea..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - El aplique de carga de la CPU - - - El aplique de carga de la CPU es un pequeño aplique monitor que reside en su panel y le dice cuanta CPU esta siendo usada. - - - - Uso - - No es necesario hacer nada a este aplique. Se situará y ejecutará en su panel. Existen varias opciones para modificar su aspecto. - - -
- Aplique de Carga de CPU - - Aplique de Carga de CPU - - - -
- - - El aplique de carga de la CPU divide el uso de la CPU en cuatro tipos: - - - - Usuario - - - Éste mide el uso de la CPU en "zona de usuario": por ejemplo, cosas que no se comunican con el kernel. Su color por defecto es el amarillo. - - - - - - Sistema - - - Éste mide el uso de CPU que implica al kernel: Mucho intercambio entre memoria y disco, por ejemplo . El color por defecto es gris pálido. - - - - - - Prioridad - - - Éste mide el uso de la CPU que no es "delicado": ejecutando con una prioridad alta. - El color por defecto es gris oscuro. - - - - - - Inactivo - - - Inactivo mide la capacidad de CPU no usada. El color por defecto es el negro. - - - - - - - - Opciones de Menú desplegables con botón derecho - - A parte de las opciones de menú estándar, el menú desplegable contiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Propiedades por omisión... - - - Abre el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que le permite modificar las propiedades por defecto de este aplique monitor y otros apliques relacionados. - - - - - - Propiedades... - - - Abre el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que afecta sólo a las propiedades del aplique de carga de la CPU. - - - - - - Ejecutar gtop... - - -Esta opción ejecutará gtop que arranca el Monitor del Sistema de GNOME. gtop proporciona una visión mucho más detallada del sistema y de lo que en él ocurre. - - - - - - - - Propiedades - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión - - Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión del Aplique de Carga de CPU - - - -
- - - Al igual que varios de los aplique monitores, el - aplique de carga de la CPU tiene dos modos de seleccionar preferencias. Puede hacer cambios que afectan a todo este grupo - (aplique de carga CPU, aplique de carga de memoria, - aplique de carga swap, aplique de carga de la red - y aplique de carga promedio) en un amplio cuadro de diálogo. Esto es útil si ejecuta uno o más de ellos. Estos son los valores por defecto. Se llega a ellos desde la opción del menú - Propiedades por omisión... - - -
- Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado - - Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado del Aplique de Carga de CPU - - - -
- - - O puede cambiar sólo las propiedades para el - aplique de carga de la CPU. Esto es útil cuando sólo utiliza el aplique de carga de la CPU o cuando quiere probar nuevas combinaciones. Se llega a él desde la opción del menú - Propiedades. - - - - Si usa la opción del menú Propiedades... - y edita las preferencias para sólo este aplique, debe deshabilitar la casilla Usar propiedades por omisión antes de cambiar la configuración. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades de Carga de CPU - - Diálogo de Propiedades del Aplique de Carga de CPU - - - -
- - - Los cambios que puede hacer a las propiedades son tres: - - - - - Colores - - - Puede cambiar los colores usados para las diferentes formas de uso de CPU mostrados pulsando en las cajas de colores. Esto invoca la rueda de colores de GNOME. - - - - - - Velocidad - - - Puede alterar la velocidad de actualización del gráfico. - Se mide en milisegundos. El valor más alto es 1,000,000,000 - y el más bajo es 1. El valor por omisión es más sensible, es 500. - - - - - - Tamaño - - - Puede cambiar el tamaño del aplique. La medida es en píxeles. El valor por defecto es 40, y el rango abarca desde 1 pixel hasta donde quiera. En un panel vertical, este valor hace referencia a la altura. En uno horizontal, a la anchura. - - - - - - - - Errores Conocidos y Limitaciones - - Cambiar el tamaño del aplique y su orientación puede causar todavía problemas intermitentes, aunque ahora se corrigen por sí mismos al cabo de un corto período de tiempo. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bb2140e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - El aplique de utilización de la memoria y CPU - - - El cpumemusage_applet es un pequeño aplique monitor que se ubica en su panel y le informa sobre la utilización de la CPU, memoria y memoria de intercambio (swap) de su ordenador. Para añadir este applet a su Panel y pulse el botón derecho en el Panel y seleccione - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Monitores - Utilización de la CPU/MEM - . - - - - Utilización - - No necesita nada más. Se colocará y ejecutará en su panel. - - - El aplique muestra tres cartas de barras, para la CPU, memoria y espacio de intercambio. Si su panel es horizontal, la barra superior es la CPU, el del medio es la memoria, y el inferior es el espacio de intercambio. Si su panel es vertical, el izquierdo es el de la CPU, el central la memoria, y el derecho el del intercambio. - - -
- Aplique CPU/MEM - - Aplique CPU/MEM - - - -
- - - - CPU - - - Se utilizan tres colores. Amarillo para la actividad de la CPU que realiza el kernel. Gris para la actividad de los programas que se comunican con el kernel (habitualmente, muchas E/S tales como mover datos entre memoria y disco). El negro es el fondo y representa la memoria no utilizada. - - - - - Memoria - - - Se utilizan cuatro colores. Amarillo para la memoria compartida (memoria que es utilizada por más de un programa). Gris para el uso del 'buffer' (memoria que contiene datos que aún no han sido escritos en el disco). El amarillo grisáceo para otra utilización de memoria. El verde representa la memoria sin utilizar. - - - - - Intercambio - - - Se emplean dos colores. Rojo para el espacio de intercambio utilizado. Verde para el no utilizado. El espacio de intercambio es una parte del disco duro en la cual el kernel coloca partes de los programas que no se están utilizando actualmente así puede fácilmente acceder a ellos cuando lo necesite. - - - - - - - - Errores y Limitaciones conocidas - - No existen errores o limitaciones conocidas para este aplique. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 47d839a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,603 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - Desk Guide Applet - - - Desk Guide applet, shown in , is an applet that allows you to - visually navigate your virtual desktops. To add this applet to a - Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Applets - Utility - Desk Guide - . - - - -
- Desk Guide - - Desk Guide - - - -
- - Usage - - - Desk Guide applet helps you - navigate all of the virtual desktops available on your system. The - X Window system, working in - hand with a piece of software called a "window manager", allows - you to create more than one virtual desktop to organize your - work, with different applications running on each - desktop. Each desktop can also be subdivided by the window - manager into rows and columns of working space, called - "desk areas". Desk - Guide applet is a navigational tool to get around - the various desktops and desk areas, providing a miniature road - map in the GNOME panel showing all your virtual desktops (also - known as workspaces) and desk areas, and allowing you to switch - easily between them. - - Desk Guide applet works - hand-in-hand with the window manager, the piece of software such - as Sawfish or Enlightenment that handles the look, feel and performance of - your windows. The window manager lays down borders, resizes windows, places - and moves them. The window manager is in charge of the various - desktops. Desk Guide applet handles the - navigation. - - Desk Guide applet displays - miniature versions of all your available desktops, including - outlined boxes representing the applications running in each - desktop window. The desktop currently in use is - highlighted. Mouse-click on a representation of a desktop in - Desk Guide applet to switch to display - a different virtual desktop on your monitor. - - Click and hold with your middle mouse button on any window - image in Desk Guide applet to drag the - window around your virtual desktops. - - - Note - Different window managers use different jargon to describe - virtual desktops and the subdivided workspaces within - them. Enlightenment divides your - working area into "desktops," and then subdivides those into - "screens." Sawfish, formerly known as - Sawmill divides your - working area into "workspaces" and then subdivides those into - columns and rows. Desk Guide applet - calls the workspaces "desktops" and the areas within them - "viewports". See your window manager's documentation for more - informaton on setting up and managing your virtual workspaces. - - - Mouse-clicking on the arrow on the left side of - Desk Guide applet brings up the - Task List window, shown in . - -
- Desk Guide Task List - - Desk Guide Task List - - - -
- - The window lists the various applications running on your - computer. Left-clicking on any of the applications listed in the - Task List window shifts focus to that - application, i.e. this window rises to the foreground and all your - keyboard input will be sent to the application running in this window. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items (see ), the right-click - pop-up menu has the following item: - - - - Properties... — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see - ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure Desk Guide applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, with four different - tabbed pages giving you access to various configuration options - - display, - tasks geometry, advanced. - - - - - Properties - Display - The first Properties window, shown - in , allows you to - control Desk Guide applet's display. - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - Options include: - - - - Switch tasklist arrow - — switches the side of the applet on which the - arrow used to launch the tasklist window is displayed. - - - - Only show current desktop in - pager — limits the applet display - to the desktop currently in use, including all its - viewports. - - - - Raise area grid over tasks - — If you use multiple viewports (not only multiple - desktops) with your window manager, Desk - Guide draws a - viewport grid in the current desktop. It can either draw the - grid on top of the windows or below them. - - - - - Show Desk-Guide tooltips — - Display tooltips related to various - Desk Guide applet components. The arrow - is the only widget that displays a tooltip. - - - - Desk-Guide tooltip delay [ms] — - delay, in milliseconds, before the tooltip is displayed. You - may either type in a number or use the arrows to change the - number. - - - - Show desktop name tooltips - — Some window managers, such as - Enlightenment, allow you to name - your desktops. The feature directs - Deskguide to show tooltips - displaying the desktop's name. - - - - Desktop name tooltip delay [ms] - — delay, in milliseconds, before the tooltip is - displayed. You may either type in a number or use the arrows - to change the number. - - - - - - - Properties - Tasks - - -
- Properties Dialog - Tasks - - Properties Dialog - Tasks - - - -
- Options include: - - - Show hidden tasks (HIDDEN), - Show shaded tasks (SHADED), - Show tasks which hide from window list - (SKIP-WINLIST), Show tasks which hide from taskbar - (SKIP-TASKBAR) — These four items allow - Deskguide to display applications - running with flags set that would normally hide them from an - application like this. For instance the - panel is flagged as - HIDDEN, HIDE_FROM_WINLIST and - HIDE_FROM_TASKBAR. Selecting these options will allow - Deskguide to show such - applications. - - - - - - - - Properties - Geometry -
- Properties Dialog - Geometry - - Properties Dialog - Geometry - - - -
- Options include: - - - Desktop Height [pixels] — - sets the height of the desktop. By default this is greyed - out, and the panel size automatically sets the desktop - height. To activate it uncheck the Override desktop - height with panel size checkbox. - - - - - Override desktop height with panel - size — forces Desk - Guide to automatically size itself to the - panel. Unchecking this allows you to manually set the height - using the Desktop Height setting above. - - - - - Divide height by number of vertical - areas — divide the total applet - height by the number of rows of desktop areas visible. - - - - - - Rows of desktops — set the - number of rows of desktop maps Desk - Guide creates in the panel to represent your - desktops. - - Your window manager, not Desk Guide - Applet, controls the number of desktops available on - your computer. This feature only controls the way - Desk Guide applet displays them. - - - - - - - - Divide height by number of rows - — forces Desk - Guide to fit all the rows of desktops into the - height specified above (either one you have manually - specified or one set automatically to match the height of the - panel). Unchecking this, if you have more than one row, - allows Desk Guide to expand - vertically to two or more times normal height. - - - - - - - The options for Vertical Layout are - mirror those for horizontal layout above, but effect the width - instead of height of the applet, and the number of columns it - occupies instead of the number of rows. - - - - Properties - Advanced -
- Properties Dialog - Advanced - - Properties Dialog - Advanced - - - -
- - Advanced options allow you to control Desk - Guide's behavior with specific window managers, - along with other settings. - - - - - Draw desktops double-buffered - (recommended) — controls the method - Desk Guide draws desktops. Without - double-buffering, you may see flicker on slower - machines. With it, you may see slower performance on network - connections. - - - - Window manager moves decoration window - instead — Check this if, when you move a - window with the middle mouse button, but the resulting window - position is off. If in doubt, check this if you use any of - the window managers mentioned - (AfterStep, - Enlightenment, - FVWM, - IceWM, or - Sawmill, now known as - Sawfish). - - - - Window manager changes active area on all - desktops — If you have more than one - desktop, with multiple work areas within each desktop, this - option can be used to force the window manager to change the - active work area within all the desktops simultaneously if - you change your work area on one. - - - - Window manager expects pager to modify - area+desktop — Currently has no effect. - - - Popdown task view automatically — - Automatically pops down the task view window after you click on an - application in the task view list. If unchecked, you must click a - second time on the task view arrow to get the window to pop down. - - - - - - More Information - All Properties dialogs have the following - buttons at the bottom of the dialog: - - - - OK — - Pressing OK will activate any changes - in the properties you have made and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - Apply — - Pressing Apply at any time will - make your changes active without closing the - Properties dialog. This is helpful if - you would like to test the effects of the changes you have - made but may want to continue changing the properties. - - - - - Close — - Pressing Close will close the - Properties dialog. Only changes in the - configuration which were previously applied with the - Apply button will persist. Other - changes will not be made active. - - - - - Help — - Pressing Help brings up the manual for - the application, opening it to the page describing the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Pop-Up Items - - All applets should have the following items in their right-click - pop-up menu: - - - Remove from panel - - - The Remove from panel menu item - removes the applet from the Panel. - - - - - - Move - - - After selecting Move, your mouse - pointer will change appearance (typically to a cross with - arrows in each direction). As you move your mouse, the applet - will move with it. When you have finished moving the applet, - click any mouse button and the applet will anchor in its - current position. Note that applets can be moved between two - Panels this way. - - - - - - Panel - - - The Panel submenu contains various - items and submenus for adding and removing - Panels and applets and for changing - the configuration. - - - - - - About - - - The About... menu item brings up a - dialogue box containing various information about the applet, - typically including the applet's name, version, author, - copyright, license and description. - - - - - - Help - - - The Help menu item brings up the help - manual for the applet. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - The Window manager expects pager to modify - area+desktop feature on the advanced - properties window currently has no effect. - - - - - - - Authors - - Desk Guide applet was written by Tim Janik - (timj@gtk.org). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - License - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or - modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software - Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) - any later version. - - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General - Public License for more details. - - - A copy of the GNU General Public - License is included with the GNOME - documentation. You also may obtain a copy from the Free Software - Foundation by visiting their Web site or by writing to -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330 - Boston, MA 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0997c9a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,146 +0,0 @@ - - - Aplique de Utilización de Disco - - Aplique de Utilización de Disco, mostrado en , proporciona un monitor al panel para la cantidad de espacio en uso y disponible en sus particiones de disco duro. Para añadir este aplique al panel, pulse el botón derechos sobre el panel y elija - - Panel - Añadir al Panel - Aplique - Monitores - Utilización Disco - - - - -
- Aplique de Utilización de Disco - - Aplique de Utilización de Disco - - - -
- - - - - Uso - Aplique de Utilización de Disco proporciona - monitorización en tiempo real del espacio disponible en sus discos duros. - Proporciona tres partes de información. La tarta coloreada representa gráficamente cuanto espacio está siendo usado y cuanto está disponible. MP: indica el punto de montaje de la partición que actualmente se está monitorizando. av: - indica la cantidad de espacio disponible en la partición seleccionada, en - kilobytes. Pulsando en el aplique cambia la partición a monitorizar. Haciendo esto repetidamente hace un ciclo por todas las particiones disponibles. - - - Pulsando con el botón derecho sobre el aplique aparecere un menú que contiene las siguientes elementos: - - - - Sistema de Ficheros — le permite cambiar el sistema de ficheros que el Aplique de Utilización de Disco monitoriza. - - - - Propiedades— abre el diálogo de - - Propiedades - - - - - - - Actualizar — se puede usar para forzar al aplique a actualizar la lista de Sitemas de ficheros que el aplique usa. - - - - - Ayuda — -muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica sobre el Aplique de Utilización de Disco, incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - Configuración - - Puede configurar el Aplique de Utilización de Disco pulsando con el botón derecho sobre él y eligiendo Propiedades. Esto lanzará el diálogo de - Propiedades…, que le permite cambiar varios parámetros. - -
- Diálogo de Preferencias - - Diálogo de Preferencias - - - -
- - Las propiedades son: - - - - - - Colores — Para cambiar los colores mostrados en el aplique, pulse en los botones coloreados junto a Espacio de disco usado, - Espacio libre en disco, - Color de texto y - Color de fondo. Un diálogo con una rueda de colores aparecerá ofreciéndole opciones de colores para realizar los cambios. Cuando termine, pulse en el botón Aceptar de la ventana de opciones de color. - - - - - - Tamaño — Tamaño del Aplique y se puede usar para cambiar la altura (en un panel horizontal) o anchura (en un panel vertical) del aplique. - - Al marcar la casilla Automáticamente selecciona el mejor tamaño para el aplique, se puede forzar al Aplique de Utilización de Disco para que elija automáticamente el tamaño apropiado para su panel. - - - - - - Tipos de letra — pulsando en la barra de esta ventana se abre un diálogo que le permite cambiar la fuente usada en el aplique. - - - - - Frecuencia de Actualización — cambia la cantidad de tiempo, en segundos, entre actualizaciones del - Aplique de Utilización de Disco. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Después de haber hecho todos los cambios que desee, pulse en - Aceptar para efectuar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo de Propiedades. Para cancelar estos cambios y volver a los valores previos pulse en el botón Cancelar. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 72a7473..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,464 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique Montador de Discos - - - El ApliqueMontador de Discos, que puede ver en , permite montar y desmontar en su ordenador - fácil y rápidamente diversos tipos de unidades y sistemas de ficheros. - Para añadirlo a su Panel, - pulse con el botón derecho sobre el Panel y escoja - - Panel - Add to panel - Aplique - Utilidades - Montador de Discos - . - - -
- Aplique Montador de Discos - - Aplique Montador de Discos - - - -
- - - Información general para principiantes - - Muchos de los sistemas de ficheros de Linux y Unix han de ser montados y - desmontados manualmente. Para leer y escribir en un - sistema de ficheros se ha de montar previamente. Una vez termine de - utilizarlo debería desmontarlo. Desmontar las unidades - removibles, como disquetes o discos Zip, antes de sacar el disco es - especialmente importante ya que los sistemas Linux o Unix - no siempre graban los cambios en el momento. Normalmente los cambios se - guardan temporalmente en un buffer para mejorar la - velocidad del sistema. Las particiones de los discos fijos, como su - disco duro, normalmente se montan automáticamente al - arrancar el ordenador y se desmontan al cerrar el sistema. Las unidades - removibles se han de montar y desmontar manualmente, - usando, por ejemplo, el aplique Montador de Discos. - - - El "sistema de ficheros raíz" es el principal de los de su ordenador y - comienza en "/" (raíz). Otros sistemas de ficheros se asocian - a directorios del sistema de ficheros raíz. A estos se les conoce como - "puntos de montaje", que son simples directorios vacíos. - Cuando se monta un sistema de ficheros, su contenido aparece dentro de - este directorio. Por ejemplo, la mayoría de sistemas - crean un punto de montaje "/mnt/floppy" que mientras no monte la - disquetera será solo un directorio vacío y al montarla su - contenido será el del disquete. - - - - - - Uso - - Para montar o desmontar una unidad, simplemente pulse sobre el icono del - aplique Montador de Discos con el botón - izquierdo del ratón. En el caso de aquellas unidades que pueden expulsar su - disco como la mayoría de CDROM's y unidades JAZ, puede hacerlo pulsando - sobre su icono con el botón derecho del ratón y seleccionando - Expulsar. Para navegar por el contenido - de la unidad con el Gestor de Ficheros de GNOME, seleccione - Navegar…. - - - - Pulsando el botón derecho sobre el aplique hace aparecer un menú con - las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Navegar… — muestra el contenido de la - unidad con el Gestor de Ficheros de GNOME. Para que - funcione la unidad ha de estar montada. - - - - - - Expulsar — expulsa el medio de almacenamiento - de aquellas unidades capaces de hacerlo, como puedan ser las - unidades CDROM o JAZZ. - - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo de - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica sobre el ApliqueMontador de - Discos , incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre de - sus autores. - - - - - - - - Si deja descansar el cursor sobre el aplique aparecerá un tooltip con - el punto de montaje y el estado de la unidad, como puede ver en - . -
- El Aplique Montador de discos enseñando un tooltip - - El Aplique Montador de discos enseñando un tooltip - - - -
- - - - - - - - Personalización - - Usted puede personalizar el aplique Montador de Discos - pulsando con el botón derecho y escogiendo - Propiedades…. Se abrirá el diálogo de - Propiedades (puede verlo en ), que le permite cambiar varios parámetros. - - - -
- El diálogo de Propiedades - - El diálogo de Propiedades - - - -
- - - Las propiedades son: - - - - - Punto de Montaje — Este es el punto que se - utiliza para montar la unidad. Si no esta familiarizado con los puntos - de montaje, este es un directorio vacío que tendrá el contenido de la - unidad cuando este montada. Los puntos de montaje pueden estar en cualquier - parte del sistema de ficheros, pero por convención todos los puntos de - montaje para unidades removibles se ponen en el directorio - /mnt - - - - - - Actualización en segundos — Este es el intervalo - en segundos que espera el aplique Montador de Discos - para refrescar su icono comprobando el estado del montaje. Esta opción solo - tiene sentido si a veces monta o desmonta la unidad con otra orden o - aplicación además del aplique Montador de Discos. - - - - - - Icono — Determina los iconos (uno cuando no - esta montada y otro si lo esta) que mostrará para la unidad Hay conjuntos de - iconos para los tipos de unidad más comunes(disquetes, CDROM, Zip, disco duro, - y JAZ). Los puede ver en . También puede - escoger Personalizado; que le permite especificar sus - iconos particulares. - -
- Iconos para diversos tipos de unidades montadas y no montadas - - Iconos para diversos tipos de unidades montadas y no montadas - - - -
- - Dese cuenta que - muestra los iconos correspondientes al estado no montado y montado de - (de izquierda a derecha) unidad de disquete, CDROM, Zip, JAZ, y disco duro. - - - - - - Icono personalizado para el estado montado — - Un icono personalizado que se mostrará cuando la unidad este montada. - Esta opción solo estará disponible si en Icono: se - ha seleccionado la opción "Personalizado". - - - - - - Icono personalizado para el estado desmontado — - Un icono personalizado que se mostrará cuando la unidad no este montada. Esta - opción solo estará disponible si en Icono: se ha seleccionado - la opción "Personalizado". - - - - - - Escalar el tamaño al del panel — Seleccionando esta - opción el tamaño de los iconos montado y desmontado se escala para que - coincida con el del Panel. Si esta opción esta desactivada - el tamaño de los iconos sera fijo, con independencia del tamaño del - Panel. Seleccionar esta opción normalmente ayuda a mejorar - el aspecto. Para tamaños muy reducidos del Panel, puede valer la - pena desactivar esta opción ya que mejora la visibilidad del aplique al - forzarlo a aparecer más grande y rotado. - - - - - - Usar la amigable prueba del estado automontado - — Seleccione esta opción si utiliza automount, sino dejela desactivada. - - - Información para usuarios avanzados - - La orden predeterminada que utiliza el aplique Montador - de Discos para averiguar si una unidad esta montada es - stat. Si el usuario utiliza automount - puede provocar que se monte automáticamente la unidad. Si se activa - este botón utilizará en su lugar la orden mount - para evitar que automount monte la unidad. - El botón esta desactivado por defecto porque mount - gasta más cpu que stat. - - - - - - - - Después de efectuar sus cambios, pulse el botón - OK para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo de - Propiedades - Apply. Para deshacer los - cambios y recuperar los valores anteriores pulse el botón - Close - Properties - - - - - - Configurando el Sistema - - - Para usuarios avanzados - - Esta sección esta pensada para administradores de sistemas y usuarios - avanzados. - - - - - Para configurar correctamente el Aplique Montador de Discos - , el administrador del sistema puede necesitar los privilegios de root Esta - sección hace una introducción muy básica. - - - - En /etc/fstab se guarda la información del punto de montaje y tipo de sistema - de ficheros que corresponde a cada unidad. Este fichero se puede configurar manualmente - o usando la aplicación linuxconf. Cuando la unidad - pueda contener más de un tipo de sistema de ficheros (como sería el caso de la disquetera - que puede tener sistemas de ficheros msdos o ext2), debería usar la opción "auto". A cada - unidad le corresponde una sola linea de /etc/fstab como: - - /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,user 0 0 - - Esta entrada describe la primera disquetera (/dev/fd0) indicando que su - punto de montaje es /mnt/floppy, que su tipo de sistema de - ficheros debería detectarse automáticamente ya que no es fijo, y las siguientes - opciones de configuración: "noauto"— No montar automáticamente al arrancar - el ordenador "rw"— Habilitar lectura y escritura en la unidad, y - "user"— Los usuarios pueden montar la unidad. Todas estas opciones, y los - dos campos finales que no hemos descrito, se discuten en detalla en la pagina del - manual de fstab a la que puede acceder tecleando man fstab o a través - del Visualizador de ayuda de GNOME. - - - La aplicación linuxconf proporciona un interfaz - gráfico para controlar los sistemas de ficheros. Para arrancar linuxconf - , solo ha de teclear linuxconf, en una ventana - con el interprete de ordenes (Ha de haber entrado en el sistema como root). - Escoja - - Config - filesystems - Access local drive - . - Para editar una entrada, solo ha de seleccionarla. - linuxconf trata de ser fácil de usar y cuenta con - su propio sistema de ayuda para conducirle durante todo el proceso. También puede - añadir nuevas entradas seleccionando el botón Add. - - - - - - - Solución de problemas y comprensión de los mensajes de error - - Si su sistema no esta configurado adecuadamente se puede encontrar con ciertos - mensajes de error al tratar de montar y desmontar algunas unidades. Aquí tiene - una lista de los mensajes más habituales y sus causas: - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 is not a valid block device— - Habitualmente este error se produce por que la unidad (en este ejemplo, - /dev/fd0, es decir la unidad de disquetes) esta vacía. - - - - - mount: only root can mount /dev/fda on /mnt/floppy— - No esta autorizado a montar la unidad. Pongase en contacto con el - administrador del sistema para que le otorgue los permisos necesarios. - - - Nota para Administradores de Sistemas - - Para conseguir que los usuarios puedan montar y desmontar la unidad ha - de añadir "user" a las opciones de montaje (cuarta columna) de - /etc/fstab. Se puede hacer manualmente o con - linuxconf, escogiendo el apartado Local volume - en - - Config - Filesystems - Access local drive - . Después de escoger la unidad en la lista, le mostrará las Volume - specifications. Pulse en el apartado Options y active el botón - User mountable. - - - - - - mount: wrong fs type, bad option, bad superblock on - /dev/cdrom, or too many mounted file systems— - Este error puede tener varias causas. La más habitual es no haber acertado con - el tipo de sistema de ficheros, como pueda ser tratar de montar un CDROM de música como - si contuviera datos o un disquete msdos como si su formato fuera ext2. - - - - - mount /mnt/cdrom 2>&1 reported: mount: No medium - found— Este error indica que la unidad, en este caso la - unidad CDROM, esta vacía. - - - - - umount /mnt/cdrom 2>&1 reported: umount: /mnt/cdrom: - device is busy— Este error indica que la unidad no se puede desmontar por - que esta siendo utilizada por el ordenador. A menudo se produce al tener - abierto un directorio de la unidad en el Gestor de ficheros - o por que el directorio de trabajo de un terminal de una de sus ventanas - es de la unidad. - - - - - umount: can't find /mnt/floppy in /etc/fstab or /etc/mtab - — Indica que su sistema no tiene configurado el punto - de montaje que trata de utilizar Muchas veces se debe a un error al - rellenar la casilla de punto de montaje en el - Diálogo de Propiedades (vea ). Para averiguar el punto de montaje - correcto, pongase en contacto con el administrador de su sistema - - - Nota para usuarios avanzados - - Cada dispositivo(sistema de ficheros o unidad) a montar debería estar - reflejado en el fichero de configuración /etc/fstab - La lectura de este fichero le indicará que dispositivos están - configurados en su sistema. Para añadir o modificar las entradas puede - editarlas manualmente o utilizar linuxconf. - - - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 already mounted or /mnt/floppy busy - mount: according to mtab, /dev/fd0 is mounted on /mnt/floppy_ext2 - — - Este error se produce si un dispositivo (en este caso /dev/fd0) esta configurado - para varios puntos de montaje y intenta montarlo en uno de ellos - cuando ya esta montado en otro. Normalmente no hay ninguna necesidad de - tener varios puntos de montaje para un solo dispositivo. - - - - - mount: the kernel does not recognize /dev/sda4 as a - block device(maybe 'insmod driver'?)— - Pongase en contacto con el - administrador de su sistema. Este error se produce si el núcleo de su - sistema no esta configurado para cargar automáticamente los - módulos del núcleo para estos dispositivos. - - - - - - - - - - - Errores y limitaciones conocidos - - Expulsar - No siempre funciona. Cuando se intenta expulsar una unidad montada no se da un - mensaje de aviso de esta circunstancia. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index a60364f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,171 +0,0 @@ - - Fifteen Applet - - - Fifteen applet, shown in , is a version of the old game of - moving squares around a grid to put them into numerical order. To - add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Fifteen - . - - -
- Fifteen Applet - - Fifteen Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - The applet starts with the pieces in the correct order: this is - the order you will need to restore them to. To start a new game, - right-click on the applet and select Scramble - Pieces. Move the pieces by clicking on them with - the left mouse button until you have restored them all to their - original positions. When you have done this, you will see a - You win! dialog box. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Scramble pieces — - randomly rearranges the tile positions. Use this to start a - new game. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about - Fifteen applet, inluding the - applet's version and the author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Fifteen was written by Federico Mena - Quintero (federico@nuclecu.unam.mx). It is based on - the game described by Sam Lloyd in 1878. Please send - all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fish-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fish-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index e387f6f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/fish-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,254 +0,0 @@ - - Fish Applet - - - Fish applet, shown in , displays a small - fish in your panel and does nothing useful - whatsoever beyond that. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Fish - . - - -
- Fish Applet - - Fish Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Unlike most fishes, this fish requires little care and no fishbowl - cleaning. It swims happily about in its water. If you ask it, it - will tell you interesting thoughts. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Fish - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Fish - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - - Your GNOME Fish's Name — You can change your fish's - name here. The default name is Wanda. - - - - - - The Animation Filename — You can select a different set - of pictures here. By default, - the list of pictures is in $PREFIX/pixmaps/fish/, - which you can browse and choose from. You may also put a different - pathname in pointing to your own pictures. - - - - - - Frames In Animation — The number of frames in the - animation. The default is three, but the range is from 1 to 255. - - - - - - Pause per frame (s) — The period in seconds before - updating the picture. The default is one second, but the range - is from 0.10 to 10 seconds. - - - - - - Rotate on vertical panels — This checkbox is used for - vertical panels, and when checked, the - fish will appear swimming downwards on a vertical panel. If it is - not checked, it will appear the same way as on a horizontal panel, - which forces the vertical panel to widen to accomodate it. - - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Fish was written by George Lebl - (jirka@5z.com). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Please send all - comments and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/geyes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/geyes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ec6ced8..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/geyes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique gEyes - - - El aplique gEyes, véase , es un par de ojos que siguen su puntero del ratón. Para añadir - este aplique al - Panel, pulse con el botón derecho del ratón sobre - Panel y elija - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Entretenimientos - gEyes - . - - -
- Aplique gEyes - - Aplique gEyes - - - -
- - - - Utilización - - Mirar como los ojos observan su ratón. - - - - Presionando con el botón derecho sobre el aplique le muestra un menú conteniendo los - siguientes elementos: - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Sobre… — - muestra información básica sobre el Aplique gEyes - , incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre de su autor. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalización - - Puede personalizar el apliquegEyes presionando el botón derecho - del ratón sobre él y seleccionado - Propiedades…. Esta opción abrirá el diálogo - Propiedades (mostrado en ), el cual le permitirá cambiar el tema. - - -
- Diálogo propiedades - - Diálogo propiedades - - - -
- - - Esta ventana muestra una lista de los temas (apariencias) actualmente instalados para el - gEyes. Seleccione el tema que desee utilizar. - - - - Después de que haya seleccionado un nuevo tema, presione en el botón - OK para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo - Propiedades. - - - - - - - - Limitaciones y Errores conocidos - - Con la excepción del por-defecto-minúsculo, la mayoría de los temas son demasiado grandes para - algunos tamaños de Panel y obligan al Panel a - cambiar de tamaño. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gkb-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gkb-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 74e57cc..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gkb-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,523 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet, shown with its - default configuration in , allows - you to easily and quickly change - the keyboard map to those used in various different countries. To - add this applet to a - Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GKB KeyBoard Switcher - . - - -
- GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - GNOME KeyBoard Applet - - - -
- - - - - Usage - - Once configured, the GNOME Keyboard - applet allows you to switch the keyboard mapping between any number of - keyboard layout. Just left-click on the applet or press - AltShift - to switch the keyboard - mapping. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about GNOME KeyBoard - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize GNOME KeyBoard - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - add, modify, and remove keymaps, as well as to configure - the applet's appearance. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - The Properties dialog box has two tabs: - Keymaps and Options. - On the Keymaps tab, you can Add, Edit, Delete - or change the order of keyboard layouts. On the - Options tab you can set the appearance of the - applet (flag, label or flag+label) and its size (Normal or Big), as - well as the key sequence to use to get GKB to switch between - keyboard layouts (see section.) - - - Setting keyboard layouts for you language - - Setting up keymaps can consist in one or more of the following steps: - - - - Adding a required keyboard layout — On the - Keymaps tab, click on the - Add button. The - tree shown in - allows you to choose - the keymap best suited for you, based on the language and the - country involved. - - -
- Select Layout dialog - - Select layout dialog - - -
- To add a keymap, click on the + - sign preceeding the languge you want to set. A list of coutries - where the given language is used appears. Again, click on the - + preceeding the country chosen, and a - list of keymaps shows up. Select the keymap you would like to - use and click Add. Your keymap gets added to - the list on the GKB Properties window. You - may add another keymap or click - Close to close the - Select Layout dialog. - - - - - - Editing an existing keyboard layout — Selecting a keymap - and pressing the Edit brings up the - Edit keymap window (see - ). - - - -
- Edit keymap dialog - - Edit keymap dialog - - -
- - -On this dialog, you can modify different properties of the keymap. These -properties are: - - - - - -Name: The name of the keymap, as shown in the -GKB Properties window and in the hint appearing -when you move your mouse over the applet. - - - - - -Label: This is the label that appears when you set -"Label" or "Flag+Label" modes. See for more -details. - - - - - -Language: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. -It has no effect right now. - - - - - -Country: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It -has no effect right now. - - - - - -Flag: This is the place where you can set the flag -to be displayed with the given keyboard layout. - - - - - -Architecture:This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. -It has no effect right now. - - - - - -Type: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It has no -effect right now. - - - - - -Code page: This option will be used in Gnome 2.0. It -has no effect right now. - - - - - -Command: This is the command which - GNOME KeyBoard will use to change - the keymap. The default is to use the - gkb_xmmap xmodmap-file-extension - command, where xmodmap-file-extension -should be replaced by the extension of the xmodmap file you want to use. - - -Finding keyboard layouts availble on your system -On a typical Linux system, xmodmap files can be found under the -directory /usr/share/xmodmap. - - - -To set the keymap to a US 101 key keyboard, for example, you would -use gkb_xmmap us-101. - - - If this doesn't work, you may also try setting the - keyboard using command setxkbmap - LC where - LC is the two letter country - code of your locale. (for example, - setxkbmap fr to use a French - keyboard). Finally, if you have your own keyboard layout - (xmodmap) file, set the command to xmodmap - xmodmap-filename (for - example, xmodmap - ~/xrus/yawerty.koi8.xmm to use keyboard layout - for Cyrillic letters in koi8 encoding). Please see - for more information. - - - - - - - - - - - Removing a keyboard layout that is no longer needed — - To remove a keyboard, select it (click on it in the - GKB Properties window) and click the - Delete button. - - - - - - Reordering keyboard layouts — The order in which the - keyboard layouts become active as you click on the applet or - press the hot key depends on the order they appear in the list in - the Properties window. The layout that is - displayed at the top of - the list will become the default layout when you close the - Properties window. To change the order in - the list, select the keymap to be moved, and click - Up or Down as - appropriate. - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - Apply to apply the changes or on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the Close - button. The Help button brings up this chapter - of the on-line help. - - - - - - - Miscellaneous options - - Different options allow you to customize the look of your applet. - As a new feature, you can select between three different display modes: - - - - - Flag mode — The flag associated to the keymap is - displayed on the Panel. - - - - - - Label mode — No flag is displayed, only the label - associated with the keymap. - - - - - - Flag and label mode — Both flag and label - associated with the keymap are displayed. - - - - - - - Many users have reported, that the applet takes too much room on - the panel. You can now set the applets size from the - Applet size pull down list. Set the size to - Normal if you want a smaller applet. - If you have plenty of space or like nice big flags on you panel, - set the option to Big. - - -An often formulated user wish was to implement the keymap switching using -hotkeys. The developers proudly announce, that keyboard initiated switching now works. The hotkey combination that allows to change keymaps is set to -AltShift (Alt being the left Alt key). You can customize this hotkey sequence from the GKB Properties window's -Options tab. Click on the Grab hotkey button and press the keys you want to set. The key combination is displayed in the input box near the button (you may see something like: Control-Shift_R). Finally, click on Apply or OK to finalize the new settings. - - - - - - - Technical information - - Normally you do not need these details - but if something is not - working, or you are just curious, read on. - - - GNOME Keyboard switches the keyboard - map by issuing a command to X Window - System. X Window System has two mechanisms for setting keyboard - mapping: older one called "xmodmap" and a newer one, based on the - so-called "Xkb extension". If you have Xkb enabled, you should use - it and switch keyboard layouts by issuing a command - setxkbmap LC. It - comes with a number of various keyboard layout files, usually in - directory /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xkb/symbols. - - If you do not have Xkb extension enabled, or if it just - does not cover the language you need, you should use the older - xmodmap mechanism. In this case, you need to - have a file which describes keyboard layout in a special format - (see manual page for xmodmap for details), and - the command should be xmodmap - filename . GNOME - Keyboard includes a - number of keyboard layout files, which are installed in the - directory /usr/share/xmodmap; these files - have names like xmodmap.de. To use one of - these files, you can use the command gkb_xmmap - LC - which is equivalent to xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.LC: - for example, - gkb_xmmap hu is the same as xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.hu. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - - - - Languages and countries showing up in the - Select layout dialog are not sorted in - alphabetical order. - - - - -The program has very few error handling routines implemented. If you try to feed it something unusual, it may crash. - - - - -If it does not crash, it returns the error: "The keymap switching - returned an error". If the Edit window is open - when this error appears and - you press the OK button on this window, it is - likely that nothing will happen. Try closing the - Edit window first and - then the error window. - - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - GNOME KeyBoard was written by Szabolcs Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line). You can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was originally written by Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu) and Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). It has been rewritten - (strongly based on the original) by Emese Kovacs - (emese@gnome.hu) to reflect changes from v1.2 to v1.4. - The Technical Information - section has been added by - Alexander Kirillov (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu). - Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1f5cc97..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ - - - - GNOTES! Applet - - - GNOTES! applet, shown in , allows you to cover your - GNOME desktop with little, yellow, virtual sticky-notes. To - learn how to add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GNotes! - . - - - -
- GNOTES! - - GNOTES! - - - -
- - - Usage - - This applet places a yellow sticky-note on your desktop. To use it, - left-click on the GNOTES! icon to make a new - note appear on your desktop. After creating a new note, you may - then left-click within the yellow area of the note to begin - adding text to it. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, the right-click pop-up menu has - the following items: - - - - Properties… — opens - the - Properties dialog which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about APPLET - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - Raise Notes — causes all your - notes to appear above any overlapping windows. - - - - - - Lower Notes — causes all your - notes to be hidden below any overlapping windows. - - - - - Hide Notes — causes all your - notes to become hidden from view. It does not destroy your notes. - - - - - Show Notes — brings your - notes back into view if you used the - Hide Notes menu command. - - - - - - - Right-Clicking on the Left Border of Individual Notes - - You may also right-click on the left border of each of the notes on your - desktop to change their individual properties. - - - - - - Raise Note — This menu - item causes your note to appear above any overlapping windows. - - - - - - Lower Note — This - menu item causes your note to be placed below any overlapping - windows. - - - - - - Hide Note — This menu - item causes your note to become hidden from view. It does - not destroy your note. - - - - - - Destroy Note — This menu - item permanently removes your note from the desktop. Unlike - Hide Notes, you may not recover - your note. - - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure GNOTES! applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in - Figure 2. - - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - To change the default size at which your notes appear on the desktop, you - may either click on the up and - down arrows, or type values (in pixels) directly - into the fields next to the Default Height and - Default Width labels. - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Setting the Default Height or Default - Width may cause the GNOTES to crash. - - - - After first adding GNOTES! to your - Panel, clicking on the first note you create may - cause a second note to be created on your desktop. - - - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by spoon - spoon@ix.netcom.com and dres - dres@debian.org. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - The documentation for this applet - which you are reading now was written by - Michael Hall mphall@cstone.net. Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gweather-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gweather-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 04967d9..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/gweather-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,580 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME Weather Applet - - - GNOME Weather applet, shown in , retrieves and displays various - weather information. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - GNOME Weather - . - - -
- GNOME Weather Applet - - GNOME Weather Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - GNOME Weather displays the current - temperature and weather conditions in numeric and iconified form - inside the applet. For further information, double-click on the - applet. This will open up the Weather Information - Window, shown in . This displays the current weather - information and either a one-day or five-day forecast. - - -
- Weather Information Window - - Weather Information Window - - - -
- - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Update — - refreshes the weather information and display. - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about GNOME Weather - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize GNOME Weather - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties in the Basic tab are: - - - - - Update Interval — This option determines how often - GNOME Weather will connect - to the server(s) and retrieve weather information. Current - conditions, forecast and radar map (if enabled) will be - downloaded - - - Note About Server Updates - - Note that the Update Interval only - determines how often your computer downloads information from - the server(s). The update time shown in the - Current Conditions tab (viewed by - double-clicking on the applet) indicates when those - measurements were renewed on the server, rather than when - they were last retrieved. - - - - Disabling Automatic Updates and Using Manual Updates - - You can disable automatic updates by unchecking the - Update enabled box. On the other hand, you can - also force GNOME Weather to - perform an update by choosing the corresponding option in the - popup menu. These two options are very useful if you have an - intermitant internet connection, such as a laptop or modem - provides. - - - - - - - Update enabled — Select this if you would like - GNOME Weather to automatically - download the latest weather information at the time interval - specified by Update. Deselect this if - you would only like weather updates to be done manually, by - right-clicking on the applet and selecting - Update. - - - - - - Use metric — By default GNOME - Weather uses the imperial system of - units. Select this box to use metric units. The units used are shown in - . - - - - Measurement Units - - - - Quantity - Metric - Imperial - - - - - Temperature - deg Celsius - deg Farenheit - - - Windspeed - km/h - mph - - - Pressure - mmHg - inHg - - - Visibility - km - miles - - - -
- - - - - Detailed Forecast — Select this if you would like - GNOME Weather to retrieve the - full five day forecast for your particular area. Note that - these forecasts may not be - available for some locations. - - - The forecast retrieved when this - button is not selected is a brief - forecast for the broader area containing the selected location - (usually the entire state) and typically is a 5-day forecast. - - - Forecast Availability - - Note that the detailed forecasts downloaded from IWIN are - available only for US cities. - - - - - - - - - - - The properties in the Network tab should be - used if your computer is located behind a firewall. These - properties are: - - - - - Use proxy — Select this button if your computer is - behind a firewall and you must use an HTTP proxy to access the - Web. - - - - - - Proxy host — Enter your proxy host IP address here (if - you are using a HTTP proxy). - - - - - - Username — Enter your username here. - - - - - - Password — Enter your password here. (Note that this - password will be saved in a private configuration file but - will not be encrypted.) - - - - - - - - The Location tab allows you to specify the - geographic location that you would like GNOME - Weather applet to display the weather information - for. Click on any plus (+) symbol to expand the tree or any minus - (-) symbol to collapse a tree branch. Select the city or region - by clicking with the first mouse button. - - - - Locations are organized in a three-level hierarchy. The top - level contains broader geographical areas, the second contains - sub-regions of these areas and the last contains the particular - locations. This hierarchy is essentially based on the way - information is organized in the US NWS (National Weather - Service), and that is the reason that the US and Canada appear on - the topmost level. - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - Further Information - - GNOME Weather has a homepage at http://gweather.dhs.org/. - Here you can find the latest Locations file, - which is periodically updated with new cities, as sent in by - users. If your city is not included in the distribution, please - send an email to Spiros Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) with the necessary - information and it will be included in the next release. - - - - You may also want to visit the homepage if you are curious to see - what's new. - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Blocking Input/Output - - Even though GNOME Weather now uses - non-blocking I/O to retrieve data from the network, there are - still some steps that block execution. Most notably, - establishing a TCP connection to remote hosts is a blocking - operation. Because the NWS and IWIN web servers are often - heavily loaded, this step may take a significant amount of time. - While that happens, the application is unable to respond to CORBA - requests from the Panel. In its current - implementation, the Panel iterates through - all applications and sends frequent CORBA requests (eg. for - saving state). If an applet cannot respond for any reason, then - the Panel will block waiting for a - response. - - - - While the Panel is blocked, it will not - respond to any user (or application) requests. For instance, - Panel movement and - Panel menus (the ones that appear upon a - right click) will not work. However, other applets in the - Panel should work (unless they have made a - CORBA request to the Panel, eg. for - querying Panel size). As soon as the - blocking operation in GNOME Weather - completes, things should return to normal (and user interface - requests that were buffered will be executed). - - - - There is an experimental version of GNOME - Weather that uses a separate thread for HTTP - processing, which may be incorporated (temporarily) in the next - release. However, the final solution is - gnome-vfs which will be part of GNOME - 2.0 and will offer cross-platform support for fully asynchronous - I/O. - - - - - - - - - - - Frequently Asked Questions - - - This is a list of frequently asked questions about - GNOME Weather. For further information - and updates, please visit the GNOME Weather homepage. If - your question is still unresolved, you can email the author at - spapadim+gweather@cs.cmu.edu. - - - - Why does GNOME Weather freezes my Panel? - - This is due to the blocking nature of certain network operations - (see also ) and due to the way the - Panel currently works. - - - - - Why does location list appears empty? - - - This is probably because the Locations file - was not installed in the proper place. This is usually because - GNOME Weather and GNOME were not - configured in the same way. The file containing the locations - must be installed in the gweather - subdirectory, under the gnome data directory. You can find out - the latter with the gnome-config --datadir - command. - - - - If you have compiled gnome-applets yourself, make sure that you - have used configure --prefix=`gnome-config --prefix` - --sysconfdir=`gnome-config --sysconfdir`. Binary - RPMs assume a that the prefix and sysconfdir are - /usr and /etc, - respectively. If you have compiled GNOME yourself with different - options, you need to download and compile gnome-applets yourself. - - - - - Why does GNOME Weather display a question mark and dashes - for current conditions? - - - This will happen if GNOME Weather - cannot access the NWS server for any reason. This may be - because your network connection is down, or the NWS server is - down, or maybe the NWS server does not currently have any - information about your location. - - - - - Why does GNOME Weather say that a forecast is not - available? - - - If you have enabled detailed forecasts, then it is possible that - one may not be available for your location. In this case, try - disabling detailed forecasts. - - - - Another possible reason is that the IWIN server is down and - GNOME Weather cannot retrieve forecast - information. The problem should go away as soon as the IWIN - server is up again. - - - - - - - - - - - Authors - - GNOME Weather was written by Spiros - Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Spiros Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) and Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/jbc-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/jbc-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 976f45f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/jbc-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ - - El Applet de Reloj Binario de Jon - - - El Reloj Binario de Jon que se muestra aqui , muestra la hora de una manera especial: decimal - codificado en binario. Tiene veinticuatro LEDs que representan las horas, - minutos y segundos según se iluminan. Para añadir este applet a un - Panel, pulse con el botón derecho en el - Panel y escoja - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Applet - Relojes - JBC Binary Clock - . - - -
- Applet del Reloj Binario de Jon - - Applet del Reloj binario de Jon - - - -
- - - - Uso - - No hay que hacer nada con este reloj. Tan sólo se pone ahí y - te parpadea las lucecitas. - - - - Si se pulsa con el botón derecho en el applet aparece un menú - que contiene los siguientes elementos: - - - - - Help — - Muestra este documento. - - - - - - About… — - Muestra una breve descripción acerca del Reloj - Binario de Jon, incluyendo la versión del applet - y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - - - Descripción de las luces - - BCD significa "binary-coded-decimal", que es una manera de representar - los números decimales (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) como lo que los programadores - denominan "un conjunto de números binarios de 4 bits, de forma que se eliminan los números de la A la F". Si esto no tiene ningún sentido, tenga en cuenta que - este reloj es un pasatiempo para los programadores y realmente - no tiene ningún propósito útil. - - - ¡Es más fácil leer el reloj al revés! Empiece en el fondo y lea hasta - la parte de arriba. - - - El par de columnas de la derecha muestra los dos dígitos de los - segundos: las unidades en la columna más a la derecha y las decenas - en la más a la izquierda. El par de columnas centrales muestra los - dos dígitos de los minutos, mientras que el par izquierdo de columnas - muestra los dos dígitos de las horas. - - - Se suman los valores de los LEDs iluminados de cada columna. - Debería salir un número entre cero y nueve para cada uno. Esa es la hora. - - - - - El LED del fondo representa un 1 cuando está iluminado. - - - - - - El siguiente LED representa un 2 cuando está iluminado. - - - - - - El siguiente LED representa un 4 cuando está iluminado. - - - - - - El siguiente LED representa un 8 cuando está iluminado. - - - - - - Probablemente le resulte más fácil descifrar las horas y minutos - antes que intentar seguir los segundos, que siempre están cambiando. - - - - Como ejemplo, podemos leer la hora en . Empecemos con las horas. La primera columna - sólo tiene 1 LED encendido, en la segunda posición más baja, así que - esto da 2 para el primer dígito de lahora. La segunda - columan no tiene LEDs encendidos, así que tenemos un 0 - para el segundo dígito de la hora. Así que la hora es las 20, - o las 8PM para los que les guste la notación AM/PM. Fijándonos en los - minutos, tenemos un 0 para el primer dígito, y - 1 para el segundo dígitos dado que sólo el LED del fondo - está encendido. Esto nos dá las "20:01" de momento. Por último, - tenemos los segundos. Para el primer dígito, tenemos los dos LEDs del - fondo encendidos. Éstos tienen los valores 1 (para el de más abajo) - y 2 (para el otro) para sumar un total de 3. Y la segunda - columna de los segundos tiene el LED de más arriba encendido, que vale - 8. Así, son las 20:01:38, o - 8:01:38PM. - - - - - - - Fallos conocidos y limitaciones - - Si se le añade a un panel vertical, se ajusta bien a su tamaño. - Si luego se mueve a un panel horizontal, cambia de tamaño en el panel - horizontal. Pero si se mueve de nuevo a un panel vertical no cambia - de tamaño y obliga al panel a ensancharse. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/life-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/life-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fceaed1..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/life-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,146 +0,0 @@ - - El Aplique Juego de la Vida - - El panel life de GNOME es un aplique que ejecuta - juego de la vida según las reglas de Conway's en - una pequeña rejilla en el panel, con los organismos y el color de fondo cambiando - constantemente. Forma parte del paquete gnome-applets. - - - Para añadir este aplique a un Panel, - pulse el botón derecho sobre el Panel y elija - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Divertimientos - El juego de la vida - . - o puede teclear este comando en la linea de comandos: - life_applet --activate-goad-server=life_applet & - - -
- El Aplique Juego de la Vida - - El Aplique Juego de la Vida - - - -
- - - Uso - - Una vez presente, no necesita hacer nada con el aplique juego de la vida. Se - ejecutará alegremente a su aire. - - - - Al pulsar el botón derecho se presenta un menu con los siguiente item: - - - - - Al azar — - Cambia el juego al azar. Esto terminará con la ejecución repetida de los mismos - aburridos patrones. - - - - - - Ayuda — - Muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - Muestra información basica acerca del aplique Juego de la vida - , incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - Reglas - - El juego de la vida fue descrito por Conway en 1970 con las siguientes - reglas: - - - - - Se empieza con un rejilla (normalmente un sencillo cuadrado) de cuadros. Se rellena - una porción de ellos con celulas, situadas al azar. Esta es la primera generación. - - - - - Cualquier celula con dos o tres vecinas sobrevive a la siguiente - generación. - - - - - En cualquier cuadro sin celula y con tres vecinas, nace una nueva - celula. En cualquier otro cuadro, no nacen nuevas celulas. - - - - - Repetir para las siuientes generaciones. - - - - - - El juego podra eventualmente terminar en alguna de las siguientes maneras: - - - - - - La muerte de todas las celulas (teórico, pero improbable en el aplique vida). - - - - - Un equilibrio fijo con todas las restantes celulas sobreviviendo pero sin la creación - de nuevas celulas. - - - - - Un equilibrio dinámico donde el juego repite de forma constinua una - secuencia particular de patrones. - - - - - - Para conseguir valores interesantes, la rejilla actual del aplique juego de la vida - es de 78 por 78 y la proporción de cuadros rellenados con celulas es del 50%. - - - - - Errores y limitaciones conocidos - - Ninguno conocido. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 96450a7..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,305 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The load average applet - - - The loadavg_applet is a small monitor - applet which sits in your panel and tells you the current load - average. - - - - The load average of a machine is a rather arbitrary number which - represents how "busy" your machine is. It is calculated as an - average of (very roughly) how many processes there are which are - either running or are waiting for a wake-up call from the kernel. - It is very useful for comparing over time with different load - averages on your machine, but it is not very useful to compare - it with other machines. Normally, it is represented as a fraction. - -
- Load Average Applet - - Load Average Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything to this applet. It will sit and - run in your panel. Various options to alter its display are - available. - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items, - the right-click pop-up menu has the following items: - - - - - Default Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which allows - you to alter the default properties of this and related monitor - applets. - - - - - - Properties... - - - This opens the multiload_applet dialogue box - described below which - affects only the loadavg_applet - properties. - - - - - - Run gtop... - - - This option will run the gtop which - starts up the GNOME System Monitor. gtop - gives a much more detailed look at your system and what's happening - on it. - - - - - - - - Properties - -
- Default Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Default Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Like several of the monitor applets, - loadavg_applet has two ways of setting - preferences. You can make changes that affect any of this group of - applets, - (cpuload_applet, memload_applet, - swapload_applet, netload_applet - and loadavg_applet) in one large dialogue - box. This is useful if you run one or more of them. These are the - settings used by default. They are reached from the - Default Properties... menu item. - - -
- Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Greyed Out Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - Or you can change just the properties for - loadavg_applet. This is useful for when - you only use loadavg_applet or want to - try new combinations out. It is reached from the - Properties menu item. - - - - If you use the Properties... menu item - and edit the preferences for just this applet, you must uncheck - the Use default properties checkbox before - you can alter any settings. - - - -
- Load Average Properties Dialog - - Load Average Applet Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - The changes you can make to the properties are four: - - - - - Colours - - - You can alter the colours used for the applet's display - clicking on the colour boxes. This invokes the GNOME colour wheel. - The titles are a little misleading. "Used" is the current load - average, and "free" is the background colour. - - - - - - Speed - - - You can alter the speed that the graph proceeds with this. - It is measured in milliseconds. The default is 500. - - - - - - Size - - - You can alter the size of the applet with this. It is measured - in pixels. The default value is 40, and the range is from 1 pixel - to whatever you like. In a vertical panel, this refers to the - height. In a horizontal panel, it refers to the width. - - - - - - Maximum - - - This is the maximum number in the Y axis (the possible - maximum load average which the applet will show). The default - is 10. - - - - This option is only available from the Default - Properties menu option. It does not appear on - the dialogue box which is started by the - Properties menu option. - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - Resizing and then altering the panel orientation can still cause - intermittent problems, although they now fix themselves after a - short period. - - - - - Authors - - This applet was writen by Martin Baulig (martin@home-of-linux.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bd9f554..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,345 +0,0 @@ - - The Mail Check Applet - - - The mailcheck applet is an applet which - sits in your panel and tells you when you have new email. To add - this applet to the panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Add applet - Network - Mailcheck - - - -
- Mail Check Applet - - Mail Check Applet - - - -
- - - Usage - - You don't need to do anything in particular to run this applet. - Providing it is looking in the right place for your email, it - will run itself quite happily. The following options, however, - are available: - - - - - - Clicking mouse button 1 does nothing - unless you have told it to start a program when you do this. You - do this with the properties box described below. - - - - - Holding down mouse button 2 allows - you to drag the applet around the panel (and between panels). - option. - - - - - Clicking mouse button 3 brings up - the typical applet menu which includes an - About box and a properties - - - - - - - Preferences - - The mailcheck properties dialogue box is - divided into two sections, one for what the mail check applet - does, and one for where it checks for email. - - -
- Properties dialog — Mail check tab - - Properties dialog - Mail check tab - - - -
- - - - Mail check options - - - The mail check options have six sections: - - - - - Execute...before each update - - - Sometimes you may want to run something such as - fetchmail before the applet - checks for new mail. To do this, check the checkbox and - fill in the program name in the space here. - - - - - - Execute...when new mail arrives - - - Sometimes you may want other programs to run when new mail - arrives. It is common to tell the machine to play a noise - at you, for example. Checking this checkbox and filling in - the command (such as mpg123 - sillynoise.mpg or - esdplay - sillynoise.wav) will - let this happen. - - - - - - Execute...when clicked - - - By putting a program name (generally a mail-reader such as - balsa or spruce - here and clicking on the checkbox, you can set things up so that - when you click button 1 on the - applet, that program will be automatically run. - - - - - - Check for mail every... - - - You can adjust the range for checking whether mail has arrived - between 1440 minutes (once a day) to never. Setting it to never - is silly and will confuse it. The default value is every two - minutes. - - - - - - Play a sound when new mail arrives - - - The sound played if you check this checkbox - is an alarm bell. It is contained in - $prefix/sound/events/mailcheck.soundlist; - if you want to change it to a different sound, alter that and - put the sound in $prefix/sounds/. - - - - - - Select animation - - - By clicking on the box with the animation name, - you can get a list of different pictures which have different - animations when new email arrives. - - - - - - - - -
- Properties dialog — Mailbox tab - - Properties dialog - Mailbox tab - - - -
- - - - Mailbox options - - - The mailbox options have four sections, some of which will be - greyed-out. - - - - By clicking on the box with the mailbox location, - you can tell the mailcheck applet where to look for your incoming - email. - - - - - When local mailspool or local maildir are selected as the location - for the mailbox, then you can fill in the details on which file - or directory the applet should check for new email. You can only - put one filename here. The section about mail servers will be - greyed out. - - - - - When remote POP3 or remote IMAP are selected as the location for - the mailbox, then you can fill in the details on the mail server, - username and password. If the you don't supply the password, the - applet will ask for it when it first tries to check for mail. - The section about local filenames will be greyed out. - - - - - - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - - - Setting something to be executed before each update can hang the - applet and the panel. - - - - - Sometimes the animation stops happening after prolonged use. - - - - - If you use a mail filter such as procmail, - which sorts email into different folders, the applet won't check them - all for new email. It will only look at one file. - - - - - - - - - Authors - - Mail Check was written by - Miguel de Icaza (miguel@gnu.org), - Jacob Berkman (jberkman@andrew.cmu.edu), - Jaka Mocnik (jaka.mocnik@kiss.uni-lj.si) and - Lennart Poettering (poettering@gmx.net). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments - online by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/memload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/memload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ce669bf..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/memload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,220 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - El aplique de carga de memoria - - - El aplique de carga de memoria es un pequeño aplique monitor que reside en su panel y le dice cuanta memoria está siendo usada. - - - - Uso - - No es necesario hacer nada a este aplique. Se situará y ejecutará en su panel. Existen varias opciones para modificar su aspecto. - - -
- Aplique de Carga de Memoria - - Aplique de Carga de Memoria - - - -
- - - El aplique muestra cuatro usos diferentes de memoria: - - - - Libre - - - La memoria libre es la que no está siendo usada por ningún programa. El color por defecto es el verde. - - - - - - Buffers - - -Los búferes contienen datos que todavía no han sido escritos a disco. También contienen datos que han sido leídos de disco recientemente, y que se mantienen por si acaso son necesitados de nuevo. El color por defecto es el gris. - - - - - - Memoria compartida - - -La memoria compartida es la que está siendo usada por más de un programa. Esto es muy común en sistemas UNIX. Muchos programas GNOME usan un montón de memoria compartida, reduciendo así la cantidad total de memoria usada. El color por defecto es el amarillo. - - - - - - Otro - - -La memoria que está siendo usada de otra manera se muestra en esta categoría. El color por defecto es amarillo verdoso. - - - - - - - - Opciones de Menú desplegables con botón derecho - - A parte de las opciones de menú estándar, el menú desplegable contiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Propiedades por omisión... - - - Abre el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que le permite modificar las propiedades por defecto de este aplique monitor y otros apliques relacionados. - - - - - - Propiedades... - - - Abre el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que afecta sólo a las propiedades del aplique de carga de memoria. - - - - - - Ejecutar gtop... - - - Esta opción ejecutará gtop que arranca el Monitor del Sistema de GNOME. gtop proporciona una visión mucho más detallada del sistema y de lo que en él ocurre. - - - - - - - - Propiedades - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión - - Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión del Aplique de Carga de Memoria - - - -
- - -Al igual que varios de los aplique monitores, el - aplique de carga de la CPU tiene dos modos de seleccionar preferencias. Puede hacer cambios que afectan a todo este grupo - (aplique de carga CPU, aplique de carga de memoria, - aplique de carga swap, aplique de carga de la red - y aplique de carga promedio) en un amplio cuadro de diálogo. Esto es útil si ejecuta uno o más de ellos. Estos son los valores por defecto. Se llega a ellos desde la opción del menú - Propiedades por omisión... - - -
- Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado - - Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado del Aplique de Carga de Memoria - - - -
- - - O puede cambiar sólo las propiedades para el - aplique de carga de memoria. Esto es útil cuando sólo utiliza el aplique de carga de memoria o cuando quiere probar nuevas combinaciones. Se llega a él desde la opción del menú - Propiedades. - - - - Si usa la opción del menú Propiedades... - y edita las preferencias para sólo este aplique, debe deshabilitar la casilla Usar propiedades por omisión antes de cambiar la configuración. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades de Carga de Memoria - - Diálogo de Propiedades del Aplique de Carga de Memoria - - - -
- - - Los cambios que puede hacer a las propiedades son tres: - - - - - Colores - - - Puede cambiar los colores usados para las diferentes formas de uso de CPU mostrados pulsando en las cajas de colores. Esto invoca la rueda de colores de GNOME. - - - - - - Velocidad - - - Puede alterar la velocidad de actualización del gráfico. - Se mide en milisegundos. El valor por omisión es 500. - - - - - - Tamaño - - - Puede cambiar el tamaño del aplique. La medida es en píxeles. El valor por defecto es 40, y el rango abarca desde 1 pixel hasta donde quiera. En un panel vertical, este valor hace referencia a la altura. En uno horizontal, a la anchura. - - - - - - - - Errores Conocidos y Limitaciones - - Cambiar el tamaño del aplique y su orientación puede causar todavía problemas intermitentes, aunque ahora se corrigen por sí mismos al cabo de un corto período de tiempo. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 603255a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,289 +0,0 @@ - - El Aplique Mini-Commander - - - El aplique Mini-Commander, que puede ver en , añade una linea de ordenes a su - Panel. Panel. Sus funciones incluyen compleción de ordenes, - historial, macros modificables y un reloj interno opcional. - Su sistema de macros facilita su uso para tareas tan diversas - como arrancar un programa (o una pequeña macro), ver una pagina web o buscar - una pagina info o de manual, etc. - Mini-Commander puede despegarse del - Panel usando un tirador lateral opcional, lo cual - es especialmente útil en los paneles verticales. - - - Para añadir este aplique a un Panel, - pulse sobre él con el boton derecho y escoja - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Mini-Commander - . - - -
- El Aplique Mini-Commander - - El Aplique Mini-Commander - - - -
- - - - Uso - - - Para arrancar un programa o ejecutar una orden, entre su nombre y pulse return. - Para buscar una orden o aplicación en su sistema de - ficheros pulse sobre el pequeño circulo de la esquina inferior. - - - Mini-Commander ofrece compleción de ordenes (similar a la - de otros interpretes de ordenes de usuario). A menudo no hace falta teclear - todo el nombre, basta con los primeros caracteres y la tecla tabulador. - Mini-Commander; intentará completar el nombre del programa tal - como hacen la mayoría de shells UNIX. - - - Mini-Commander,al igual que la mayoría de los shells UNIX, - también guarda un historial de ordenes que permite recuperar las ultimas - ordenes introducidas con las teclas flecha arriba o flecha abajo. - Para evitar duplicidades no se guardan en el historial las repeticiones consecutivas de - la misma orden. También puede acceder a la lista de historial del aplique pulsando el pequeño - icono flecha abajo y seleccionando una de las ordenes de la lista. - - - Mini-Commander puede utilizar macros. Viene con varias macros - predefinidas. Por ejemplo, si entra term:orden - se ejecutará orden en una - ventana de terminal. O si entra una URL se mostrará en su navegador de web. - Ademas puede añadir sus propias macros e incluso cambiar las predefinidas. - - - - Pulsando sobre sobre el aplique con el botón derecho aparece un menú con las - siguientes opciones: - - - - - Propiedades… — - abre el diálogo de - Propiedades. - - - - - - Ayuda — - muestra este documento. - - - - - - Acerca… — - muestra información básica sobre el Aplique Mini-commander - , como el nombre de los autores y la versión. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalización - - Puede personalizar Mini-Commander - pulsando sobre el con el botón derecho y escogiendo - Propiedades…. Se abrirá el diálogo de - Propiedades (puede verlo en ), ue le permite cambiar varios - parámetros del aplique. - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades: Apartado General - - Diálogo de Propiedades: Apartado General - - - -
- - - Las propiedades de este apartado General son: - - - - - Mostrar la hora — Si se marca este botón, se mostrará la hora en - la esquina inferior del aplique. - - - - - - - Mostrar la fecha — Si se marca este botón, se mostrará la fecha - en la esquina inferior del aplique. - - - - - - Mostrar el tirador — Si marca este botón, se añadirá un tirador - lateral al aplique, que permite despegarlo del Panel. - Para volver a insertarlo solo ha de arrastrarlo hasta el interior del - Panel. - - - - - - Muestra marco — Si se marca este botón, se dibujará un marco - negro delgado alrededor del aplique. - - - - - - Activar auto-compleción basada en el historial — Si se selecciona este - botón Mini-Commander usará la lista de historial - completar sus ordenes automáticamente. - - - - - - Anchura del aplique — Entre aquí la anchura que desea para el aplique. - - - - - - Altura del aplique — Entre aquí la altura que desea para el aplique. - - - - - - Altura de la linea de ordenes — (Esta función esta desactivada.) - - - - - - Color de la linea de ordenes — Seleccione el color del texto que - usted entra. - - - - - - Color de fondo de la linea de ordenes — Seleccione el color de - fondo para el texto que usted entra. - - - - - - - - El apartado de Macros tiene una lista de hasta 99 macros, cada - una de las cuales se compone de una expresión regular (Regex) y una - macro (Macro). Entre en la columna izquierda la expresión regular que - Mini-Commander ha de emparejar, y la macro correspondiente, que - será ejecutada, en la derecha. Para aprender a definir sus propias macros puede - aprovechar que muchas macros de utilidad general estan ya definidas. - - - - Después de efectuar sus cambios, pulse el botón OK para aplicar los cambios y - cerrar el diálogo de Propiedades. Para deshacer los - cambios y recuperar los valores anteriores pulse el botón - Cerrar. - - - - - - - Preguntas de uso frecuente - - - Aquí se relacionan una serie de preguntas de uso frecuente y las - correspondientes respuestas: - - - - - - - ¿Por que no puedo dar el foco de teclado a Mini-Commander? - - - - - Este es un problema que arrastra a confusión. Las razones de su origen - son diversas y solo se da en ciertas circunstancias. - - - - Cuando no se puede dar nunca el foco a Mini-Commander - lo más probable es que el problema provenga de su Gestor de Ventanas. Si es su - caso me sería de gran ayuda que me enviará un pequeño mensaje detallando que - Gestor de Ventanas utiliza (nombre y versión). - - - - A veces ocurre que Mini-Commander solo recibe el foco - de teclado la primera vez y después ya no hay manera de que lo reciba. En estos - momentos se desconoce el origen del problema. - - - - - - - - - - - - Errores y Limitaciones conocidos - - A veces es imposible dar el foco a - Mini-Commander después de la primera vez. - - - - - - - Información adicional - - Para obtener más información sobre el aplique Mini-Commander - , puede dirigirse a su su pagina web - http://www.maruhn.com/mini-commander/. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mixer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mixer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2b24f1e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/mixer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique Mezclador - - - El aplique Mezclador , mostrado en , proporciona una interfaz sencillo y - conveniente para controlar el volumen de sonido y lanzar el - Mezclador de Audio. Para añadir este aplique - al Panel, presione el botón derecho sobre el - Panel y selecciones: - - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Multimedia - Mezclador - . - - -
- Aplique mezclador - - Aplique Mezclador - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Para ajustar el volumen, desplace la barra de volumen hacia - arriba (más voz) o hacia abajo (menor voz). Para silenciar - (o no-silenciar) presione en el icono del altavoz en la parte - inferior del aplique. - (N.T.: Algunas veces el aplique se dispone horizontalmente, - en ese caso hemos de buscar el icono altavoz en el lado izquierdo - del aplique) - - - - - Al pulsar el botón derecho del ratón sobre el aplique aparece un - menú conteniendo los siguientes elementos: - - - - - - Ejecuta el Mezclador de Audio… — starts - La aplicación Mezclador de Audio Gmix. - El contenido de este mezclador de audio puede variar, - dependiendo de las capacidades de su tarjeta de sonido. - Sin embargo, habitualmente le permite controlar el nivel - de voz de las diferentes entradas de los dispositivos - de sonido, tales como el lector de CD, micrófono y línea. - - - - - - Ayuda — - Muestra este documento. - - - - - - Sobre… — - Muestra información básica sobre el aplique - Mezclador, incluyendo la versión - del aplique y el nombre de su autor. - - - - - - - - Nota sobre el Sonido en GNOME - - Para que el sonido funcione en GNOME, Vd. debe tener el sonido - habilitado en el Centro de Control. - Para configurar el sonido, pulse sobre el botón Menú - Principal (el icono pie) y seleccione: - - - Programas - Configuración - Multimedia - Sonido - - . Compruebe que las opciones de sonido están - habilitadas en la pestaña General. - Configure y pruebe libremente los sonidos en la sección - Eventos de Sonido. Dese cuenta que - debe salir de GNOME y volver a entrar para que el sonido - funcione adecuadamente después de habilitarlo la primera - vez en el Centro de Control. - - - - - - - - - - - Errores y Limitaciones Conocidas - - Este aplique no posee errores conocidos. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fb78b16..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique del Monitor de Modem - - El Aplique del Monitor de Modem, mostrado en , monitoriza su modem mientras esté funcionando. Para añadir este aplique al Panel, - pulse el botón derecho del ratón sobre el panel y seleccione - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Red - Monitor de modem - - - - -
- Aplique del Monitor de Modem - - Aplique del Monitor de Modem - - - -
- - - - - Utilización - Este aplique se usa para ver si su modem está funcionando, - y seguir su funcionamiento. También se puede configurar para que ejecute un "script" externo o programa para conectar y desconectar su modem cuando pulse en el boton con una sola bombilla verde. - - Pulsando el botón derecho del ratón sobre el aplique aparecerá un menú desplegable que contiene los siguientes elementos: - - - - Propiedades— aparece el diálogo de - - Propiedades - - - - - - - Ayuda — enseña este documento. - - - - - - Acerca — muestra información básica acerca del Aplique del Monitor de Modem, incluyendo la versión del aplique y el nombre del autor. - - - - - - - - - Configuración - - Puede configurar el Aplique del Monitor de Modem pulsando con el botón derecho del ratón sobre el aplique y seleccionando - Propiedades…. Esto abrirá el diálogo de - Configuración del Monitor de Modem (que se muestra en , que le permite cambiar los parámetros de la configuración. - -
- Diálogo de preferencias - - Diálogo de preferencias - - - -
- - Las propiedades son: - - - - Mostrar tiempo de conexión y caudal &mdash el gráfico del Aplique del Monitor de Modem se modifica para incluir dos pequeñas cajas de texto que muestran el ratio de transferencia de datos en curso (el de arriba) y el tiempo transcurrido desde la conexión (el de abajo). - - Comando de conexión: y - Comando de desconexión: — Para usar el - Aplique del Monitor de Modem para inicializar una - conexión, ponga el nombre de la orden de inicio en la caja de texto - Comando de conexión , y la orden para desconectarse en la caja debajo de ésta etiquetada como Comando de desconexión. Cuando pulse el único botón del aplique, se conectará o desconectará su modem. - - - Confirmar conexión — - Muestra un diálogo pidiendo confirmación para la conexión. - - - - - Tiempo de actualización (s) — Indica el tiempo que tarda en actualizar el Aplique del Monitor de Modem con los datos actuales. - - - Mostrar tiempo de conexión y caudal — añade dos cajas de texto en el aplique mostrando el tiempo que lleva conectado y el ratio de - transferencia de datos. Esto es útil para monitorizar el funcionamiento de su modem. - - - - - - - Después de haber hecho todos los cambios que desee, pulse en el botón - Aceptar para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo - Propiedades. Para -cancelar los cambios y restaurar los valores anteriores, pulse el botón Cancelar. - - -
- Diálogo de propiedades avanzadas - - Diálogo de propiedades avanzadas - - - -
- - Ventana de propiedades avanzadas del Aplique del monitor de modem le permite controlar las características avanzadas del aplica. - - - Las propiedades son: - - - - Archivo de bloqueo del modem: — -especifica el archivo que el ordenador crea cuando el modem está en funcionamiento, permitiendo que otros programas sepan que está en marcha. El archivo /var/lock/LCK..modem es el valor por defecto, es el más común, si su ordenador usa un enlace simbólico desde /dev/modem al dispositivo ("device")de modem actual . Consulte con el administrador de su sistema para ver si usa un nombre - de dispositivo diferente y por tanto que archivo de bloqueo utiliza. El Aplique de Monitor de Modemnecesita conocer esta información - para encontrar y monitorizar su modem. - - - - Verificar el dueño del fichero de bloqueo - — verifica que el archivo de bloqueo pertenezca al demonio PPP que esté actualmente funcionando y no es un archivo creado con anterioridad. Esta opción está habilitada por defecto y no debería cambiarse. - - - - - - - Dispositivo — El dispositivo, normalmente ppp0 en un equipo Linux, es el nombre del interfaz de red que el modem usa. Si el dispositivo - ppp0 no es el que usa su equipo, consulte la documentación de su sistema para saber el nombre del dispositivo. - - Otros nombres de interfaz de red comúnmente usados son - ippp0 para Linux RDSI; - isp0 para NetBSD RDSI y - ipdptp0 para Solaris PPP. - - - - - - Usar RDSI — Si utiliza un modem RDSI, habilite la casilla Usar RDSI. El Aplique del Monitor de Modem entonces ignorará todos los - parámetros de configuración anteriores relacionados con los modems estándar. - - - - - - Después de que haya hecho todos los cambios que desee, pulse en el botón - Aceptar para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo Propiedades. Para -cancelar los cambios y restaurar los valores anteriores, apriete el botón Cancelar. - - - - - - Después de que haya hecho todos los cambios que desee, pulse en el botón - Aceptar para aplicar los cambios y cerrar el diálogo Propiedades. Para -cancelar los cambios y restaurar los valores anteriores, apriete el botón Cancelar. - - - - - Problemas conocidos y limitaciones - - La casilla de Verificar el dueño del fichero de bloqueo en la ventana de propiedades avanzadas debería estar siempre activada. Esto se -corregirá en próximas versiones del Aplique del Monitor de Modem. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/netload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/netload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fe2780f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/netload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,223 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - El aplique de carga de la red - - - El aplique de carga de la red es un pequeño aplique monitor que situado en su panel le indica la carga en diferentes interfaces de red. - - - - - Uso - - No necesita hacerle nada a este aplique. Él solo se situará y ejecutará en su panel. Hay varias opciones disponibles para modificar su aspecto. - - -
- Aplique de Carga de la Red - - Aplique de Carga de la Red - - - -
- - - Muestra los detalles para cuatro tipos diferentes de interfaz de red: - - - - SLIP - - - SLIP es el protocolo IP para líneas serie. Actualmente ya no se usa, pues ha sido reemplazado por PPP, pero es una forma de conectar ordenadores con otras máquinas que fue popular para los modems. - - - - - - PPP - - - PPP es el Protocolo Punto a Punto, para conectar un ordenador con otro. Ha reemplazado ampliamente a SLIP. Es eficiente y flexible pero no tan rápido como ethernet. Es probablemente la forma que más gente usa para conectarse a internet desde casa. - - - - - - ETH - - - Ethernet is otro método para interconectar máquinas. Requiere una tarjeta ethernet en el ordenador y cable para conectarlo a la otra máquina con la que se quiere comunicar. Es mucho más rápido que PPP. - - - - - - Otro - - - Hay otras formas de establecer una red, como medios de comunicación por infrarrojos (IRDA), por radio aficionado (AX25), y redes token-ring. Cualquier medio que el aplique encuentre que no sea SLIP, PPP or ethernet se monitoriza en 'otros'. - - - - - - - Si tiene dos interfaces del mismo tipo habilitados (por ejemplo, dos interfaces ethernet hablando con máquinas diferentes), lo que se muestra es la suma total de los dos. El aplique no lo dividirá en dos secciones. - - - - - Menú desplegable con botón derecho - - Además de las opciones del menú estándar, el menú desplegable con el botón derecho tiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Propiedades por omisión... - - - Abre el diálogo de aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que le permite modificar las propiedades por defecto de este aplique monitor y otros apliques relacionados. - - - - - - Propiedades... - - - Abre el diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que afecta - sólo a las propiedades del aplique de carga de la red. - - - - - - Lanzar gtop... - - - Esta opción ejecuta gtop que arranca el Monitor del Sistema de GNOME. gtop proporciona una visión mucho más detallada del sistema y de lo que en él ocurre. - - - - - - - - Propiedades - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades por Defecto - - Diálogo de Propiedades por Defecto del Aplique de Carga de la Red - - - -
- - - Al igual que varios de los aplique monitores, - el aplique de carga de la red tiene dos modos de cambiar las preferencias. Puedes hacer cambios que afectan a todos los apliques de este grupo (aplique de carga de CPU, aplique de carga de memoria, - aplique de carga de swap, aplique de carga de la red - y aplique de carga promedio) en un amplio cuadro de diálogo. Esto es útil si usa uno o más de ellos. Estos son los valores usados por defecto. Se accede a ellos desde la opción del menú Propiedades por omisión... - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades deshabilitado - - Diálogo de Propiedades deshabilitado del Aplique de Carga de la Red - - - -
- - - O puede cambiar sólo las propiedades del - aplique de carga de la red. Esto es útil cuando sólo usa el aplique de carga de la red o quiere probar nuevas combinaciones. Se accede desde la opción - Propiedades del menu. - - - - Si usa la opción del menú Propiedades... - y edita las preferencias sólo para este aplique, debe deseleccionar la opción Usar propiedades por omisión antes de modificar ningún valor. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades de Carga de la Red - - Diálogo de Propiedades del Aplique de Carga de la Red - - - -
- - - Los cambios que se pueden hacer a las propiedades son tres: - - - - - Colores - - -Puede modificar los colores usados para los diferentes interfaces de red pinchando en los cuadros de color. Así se invoca la paleta de colores de GNOME. - - - - - - Velocidad - - - Puede cambiar la velocidad a la que se actualiza el gráfico. La medida es en milisegundos. El valor por defecto es 500. - - - - - - Tamaño - - - Puede cambiar el tamaño del aplique. La medida es en píxeles. El valor por defecto es 40, y el rango abarca desde 1 pixel hasta donde quiera. En un panel vertical, este valor hace referencia a la altura. En uno horizontal, a la anchura. - - - - - - - - Errores conocidos y limitaciones - - Cambiar el tamaño del aplique y su orientación puede causar todavía problemas intermitentes, aunque ahora se corrigen por sí mismos al cabo de un corto período de tiempo. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/odometer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/odometer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1f84c4c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/odometer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,308 +0,0 @@ - - Odometer Applet - - - The GNOME panel Odometer applet, shown in is an applet which tracks and measures the - movements of your mouse pointer across the desktop. It is part of the - gnome-applets package. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Amusements - Odometer - . - - -
- Odometer Applet - - Odometer Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - Once it is present, you don't need to do anything to the odometer. - It just sits quietly in your panel and keeps track of all your mouse movements. - In addition, moving the mouse pointer over the odometer produces - a tooltip telling you whether the distance - is expressed in metric units (centimeters, meters, kilometers) - of in feet (inches, feet, miles). - The upper value indicates your total trip distance, - and the lower value is the partial trip distance, that - can be resetted at will. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Reset — - This resets the odometer applet to zero again. - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about odometer - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize odometer - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - - - The properties dialog box (which calls - itself "Odometer setting" rather than properties) is divided into - two sections, one for general options, and one for themes. - - - - General - - -
- Properties dialog (general preferences tab) - - General preferences tab - - - -
- - - The general preferences tab, shown in , has four options: - - - - Use metric - - - If the use metric checkbox is checked, - mouse pointer distance travelled is shown in meters - (centimeters, meters, and kilometers) . If it - is not checked, the distance travelled is shown in feet - (inches, feet and miles). By - moving the pointer over the odometer you can produce a - tooltip which shows you whether it is - currently displaying meters or feet. - - - - - auto_reset - - - If the auto_reset checkbox is checked, - the odometer numbers return to zero each time it's - started or each time the session is started. This allows - you to display your daily mouse trip distance if you - used to restart you gnome session every morning. - - - - - enabled - - - If the enabled checkbox is checked, then - the odometer will keep counting how far you have moved your - pointer. If not, it will return the numbers to zero until you - re-enable it. - - - - - digits number - - - The digits number field determines how - many digits the odometer will display. The default is four, and - the range is from 1 to 10. - - - - - - - - - Theme - - -
- Properties dialog (theme preferences tab) - - Theme preferences tab - - - -
- - - The theme preferences tab, shown in , has a variety of - themes you can choose from. They are found by default in - $PREFIX/odometer/. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - The odometer applet was written by - Fabrice Bellet (Fabrice.Bellet@creatis.insa-lyon.fr), - and based on the Mouspedometa for KDE by - Armen Nakashian, which in turn was based on the - Motif-based Xodometer by Mark H. Granoff. - Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line.) If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Arjan Scherpenisse - (acscherp@wins.uva.nl). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/printer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/printer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f012b27..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/printer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,249 +0,0 @@ - - - Printer Applet - - - - Printer applet, shown in , - allows you to print files by dragging them onto the - applet from the desktop or file - manager. To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Printer Applet - . - - - - -
- Printer Applet - - Printer Applet - - - -
- - - Usage - - - To print a file from your desktop or file - manager, drag the file onto the printer applet. - - - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - Properties... — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see - ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about the Printer - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure printer applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in . - - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- - - - To change the label displayed at the bottom of the - printer applet, ("Print" in ) type a new name in the Printer - name field. This setting is useful if you have more than one - printer available for use and wish to add a - printer applet to the - Panel for each printer. The Printer - name does not determine which printer your file will be printed - to, it exists as an easy means to to distinguish between printers should you - have more than one printer applet installed on - your Panel. - - - - - - To change the command the printer applet uses to - print your files, you may enter a new command in the Print - command field. By default, the printer - applet uses the command lpr, which is - common to many systems. Your system may use a different command. If you're - unsure, check your system's documentation. - - - Note for advanced users - - If you have more than one printer, you may designate which printer to send - files to by changing the Print command setting. For - instance, if your system uses the command lpr to print - files and you need to print your file on the printer named "ljet5", you - would change the Print command setting to lpr - -Pljet5. - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Close button. - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - There are no known bugs in the - printer applet. - - - - - - - Authors - - Printer Applet was written by - Miguel de Icaza (miguel@kernel.org) - and Federico Mena (quartic@gimp.org). - Please send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. You also can use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Michael Hall - (mphall@cstone.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME - Documentation Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments - online by using the GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0535306..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ - - QuickLaunch Applet - - - QuickLaunch is an applet - which holds application launchers. It shrinks the launcher icons - to their smallest size to save room on your panel. The example - QuickLaunch Applet shown in contains eight GNOME - application launchers in a standard-sized Panel. - To add this applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - QuickLaunch - . - - -
- QuickLaunch Applet - - QuickLaunch Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - To add a launcher to the QuickLaunch - applet, just drag it from its current position (either on a - Panel or in the Main - Menu) onto the QuickLaunch - applet using the left mouse button. - To remove a launcher from the - QuickLaunch applet, just right-click on - the launcher and select Delete launcher. To - configure the properties of a launcher which is in your - QuickLaunch applet, right-click on the - launcher and select Launcher - Properties…. - - - The vertical bar at the left edge of the applet is used for - easily moving the applet in your Panel. - Grab the applet by depressing the left or center mouse button and - then move the applet, releasing the mouse button when finished. - This vertical bar is also used to access the applet menu items by - right-clicking on this bar. - - - - Right-clicking on the vertical bar on the left side of the applet - brings up a menu containing the following items: - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about APPLET - Applet, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - It is not possible to re-arrange launchers inside the - QuickLaunch applet. It is also not - possible to have multiple QuickLaunch - applets with different contents. - - - - - - - - Authors - - QuickLaunch applet was written by Fabio - Gomes de Souza (fabiofb@altavista.net). Please - send all comments, suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6bedb76..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,714 +0,0 @@ - - ScreenShooter Applet - - - Screen-Shooter is a handy little - screengrabber which is simple to use. It sits in your panel - and you can click on it to take a screenshot of either the - whole desktop or just a single window. - - - - To add the applet to your panel, you can - right-click on an empty part of the panel - and follow the sequence - - Applets - Utility - ScreenShooter - . - - - - Usage - - - - To take a picture of the entire desktop, - left-click on the image of a monitor. This - button is the lower of the two on a normally-sized horizontal - panel and the right-hand button on a - narrow horizontal panel or a vertical - panel. - - - - - To take a picture of just one window, - left-click on the image of a window. - This button is the top one on a normally-sized horizontal - panel and the left-hand one on a narrow - horizontal panel or a vertical - panel. The button will stay pressed in - and the cursor will change to a cross. Move the cursor to the - window you want a picture of, and click in that window to select - it. - - - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu - containing the usual options for an applet, including a - Properties option - described below. - - - - - Settings - - Screen-Shooter can be configured to do - a number of different things. To configure - Screen-Shooter, click on the applet - with mouse button 3 (usually, right mouse button) and select - Properties from the - popup menu. The - Preferences dialogue has seven sections - described below. Five of these are visible initially: two more - sections are available from a toggle in the first section. - - - - - General Preferences - - - - - Capture WM decorations when grabbing a window - - - - The capture decorations checkbox controls - whether or not the titlebar and edges of a - window are included. It is only relevant - when Screen-Shooter is taking a - picture of a single window rather than of - the whole screen or of a rectangle you have selected. The default is - for this to be checked and for the titlebar - and window borders to be included in the shot. - - - - - - Give audio feedback using the keyboard bell - - - - The audio feedback checkbox controls - whether or not Screen-Shooter will - beep when it actually takes the shot. The default is to beep. - - - - - - Display spurious options - - - The spurious options checkbox controls whether - some of Screen-Shooter's more esoteric - options are available. The default is off (i.e., they are not - available). Checking this option makes two sections called - Spurious 1 and - Spurious 2 visible - in the preferences dialogue. - - - - - - Delay before taking shot - - - When taking shots of the desktop, you can - set a delay between clicking on the - Screen-Shooter and the shot being taken. - The delay can be up to one minute. This can be very useful when you - want to focus on a particular window or if - you want to bring up a menu. - - - - - - Compression quality - - - Compression quality does not refer to how tightly a file is - compressed, but to how well it retains detail after - compression. The higher the compression quality, the better - the quality of the image, but the larger the size of the resulting - file. It is relevant when you are saving something as a JPEG, - a MIFF or a PNG file. The default compression quality is 75%. - - - - - - Create monochrome image - - - A fairly self-explanatory option: if this is selected, - the resulting image will be in monochrome. This is off by default. - - - - - - Invert colours in image - - - Another self-explanatory option: if this is selected, the colours - of the image are reversed so that white becomes black, pale purple - becomes greenish, and so on. Lovely -- but rarely useful! Off by - default. - - - - - - - - Files, Apps - - - - Directory to save file in - - - The directory to save the shot in must exist already: - Screen-Shooter will not create - it for you. If you try to save it to somewhere that does - not exist, then no screenshot will be taken. The default - directory is ~/: your home directory. - - - - - - Filename for images - - - Screen-Shooter is designed to allow the - user maximum flexibility in naming each shot. The filename field - (as well as the directory field) is passed to a shell for normal - shell expansion before being used. This allows you to use the - output of programs, scripts or environment variables to name your - shots. The reason for this is to allow unique filenames. - By default, Screen-Shooter will create a name which is based on - the time and date it was taken: this of course should always be - unique. The default filename is - `date +%Y_%m_%d_%H%M%S`_shot.jpg. - As you can see, the filename includes the output of the date - command in order to generate a datestamp. - So it makes up a name based on the date, using the format the - percentage symbols and letters tell it. Then it adds the rest - of the name from outside the backticks to the date it has used. - Explanations of the cryptic percentage symbols can be found - in man date, but the arguments in the - default filename are: - - - - %H - The hour of the day (from 00 to 23) - - - %M - The minute of the hour (from 00 to 59) - - - %S - The second of the minute (from 00 to 60) - - - %d - The day of the month (from 01 to 31) - - - %m - The month of the year (from 01 to 12) - - - %y - The final two digits of the year - - - - - Other examples of filenames you might use are: - - - - screenshot-`date +%Y%m%d-%H%M%S`.jpg - - - pic-`date +%H%M%S`.png - - - myshot.jpg - - - `my_own_script_to_create_a_filename`.jpg - - - - - The filename suffix determines the filetype. Screen-Shooter - supports what can only be described as a ridiculous number of - different image formats. Try your luck. For a full list, type - man convert. You can even try .html to create a - client-side image map, and wild things like that. - - - - If your filename suffix is not something Screen-Shooter - recognises, or you omit one, it will save the shot as a - MIFF file. Use the convert utility to change the - format later. - - - - - - View screenshot after saving - - - The view screenshot checkbox is unchecked by - default. After checking it, you will get a view of the shot once it - has been taken. You need to specify a viewer for this: the default - is ee, which launches the - Electric Eyes image viewing program. - - - - - - - - - Thumbnails - - - - Create thumbnail of image too - - - None of the other options on this page will have any effect - if create thumbnail is not checked. - By default, it is off. - - - - - - Thumbnail size - - - This is the percentage of the original's size that the thumbnail - will be. The default is 25%. - - - - - - Thumbnail compression - - - This is the quality of compression to use. As with the general - preferences, the better the quality of the compression, the more - detail will be preserved, and the bigger the thumbnail will be. - The default for a thumbnail is 50%. - - - - - - Prefix to attach to filename - - - This is the prefix to attach to the thumbnail filename to distinguish - it from the full-sized shot. If you leave this blank, the - thumbnail will overwrite the full-sized shot and you will lose - the full-sized one. The default prefix is "thumb-". - - - - - - Use high-quality intermediate for - generating thumbnail - - - - The high-quality intermediate checkbox is off - by default. It generates a MIFF image whilst making the thumbnail. A - 'lossy' file format refers to a file format where data and detail is - irretrievably lost, but which is typically much smaller than a - non-lossy format image of the same thing. The typical example of a - lossy file format is JPEG. - - - - - - - - Post-Processing - - - These options munch processing power compared - with the options in previous sections. They work by producing an - intermediate image of the screenshot, and then performing actions - upon it. Once any of these options are enabled, the shot will take - longer to complete, due to the extra processing involved. - - - - - - Normalize image - - - The normalize image checkbox transforms the - image to span the full range of colour values. - Default is off. - - - - - - Equalize image - - - The equalize image checkbox enables - histogram-based image equalization, which is a process which - compensates for low contrast in an image and brings out more - detail. Default is off. - - - - - - Enhance image - - - The enhance image checkbox tells - Screen-Shooter to clean up - the image as best it can, and try to remove any noise. - Default is off. - - - - - - Despeckle image - - - The despeckle image checkbox reduces - spotting by removing single pixels which are very different in - colour from their surroundings. The default is off. - - - - - - Sharpen image by factor - - - Sharpening the image sharpens the image. The default is a factor - of zero, but it can be raised to 100%. - - - - - - Rotate image clockwise - - - This is how many degrees clockwise to rotate the image. The - default is 0: unrotated. - - - - - - Adjust gamma - - - The gamma checkbox enables you to adjust the - gamma. The gamma value is a value to do with the intensity - of the lightness of an image (and rather complicated). The - range Screen-Shooter provides is - from 0.8 to 2.3 with a default of 1.6. This is not a linear - (straight) scale so you will need to experiment. Lowering the - gamma produces a darker image. Raising it produces a lighter one. - - - - - - - - Frills - - - Create frame around image - - - The create frame checkbox is off by default. - Checking it produces a frame around the shot taken. This frame is - always grey, but Tom - Gilbert notes, if anybody requests it, I'll add - options for setting its colour. - - - - - - Frame width - - - This determines the size of the frame in pixels. The range - is from one pixel to fifty. The default frame is six pixels. - - - - - - Flip image vertically - - - This gives a vertical mirror image of the shot. It can be combined - with the following option. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Flip image horizontally - - - This gives a horizontal mirror image of the shot. It can be combined - with the preceding option. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Emboss image - - - Embossing an image produces an image drained of most colour and - drawn in relief. The default is unchecked. - - - - - - Send image and thumbnail to... - - - By placing a script or program name in the box and checking the - send to checkbox, you can invoke that script - or program to be automatically run on the image and thumbnail. - This could be used to print the image out automatically, - to invoke a script to catalogue the files, or to add the - pictures to a website automatically. A sample script for the - latter is available with Screen-Shooter. - - - - - - - - Spurious options: part 1 - - - Tom Gilbert says, These options are all just plain silly. But - they're fun. So I included them. They also munch processing - power in the same manner as the post-processing options above. - - - - - To make use of any of the options listed in this section and the - next section, you need to have selected Display spurious - options in the General Preferences - section. They will not be available otherwise. - - - - - - Blur image - - - The blur image checkbox is off by default and - the blur factor is set to zero. By checking the checkbox and altering - the blur factor you can blur the image. Even at the highest - rating (100), a typical font on a typical terminal window is - still just about decipherable. - - - - - - Create charcoal effect - - - The charcoal checkbox is off by default and - the charcoal factor is set to zero. Charcoaling produces a - monochrome image with a slight smudginess which increases - with the charcoal factor. It does not deal with highlighted - text very well, though. The maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - Find edges - - - The find edges checkbox is off by default and - the factor is set to zero. Using it produces a monochrome image - where, rather than highlighting areas of different colours, it - highlights the edges and borders between areas of different - colour. Very interesting on maps and astronomical photos. The - maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - Implode image - - - The implode image checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. Using it warps the resulting - screenshot as if a weight had been pressed into the centre of the - shot. The maximum factor for this is 100. - - - - - - - - Spurious options: part 2 - - - - Create painted effect - - - The painted effect checkbox is off by default - and the radius to paint around each pixel is set to zero. Checking - it with a radius of about 5 produces an effect like an Impressionist - painting. Checking it with a radius of about 50 will eat your - CPU cycles like mad for ten minutes on a reasonably powerful - machine. The maximum radius is 100, but you will need either - a large machine or a lot of patience for that. - - - - - - Solarise image - - - The solarise checkbox is off by default and - the factor is set to zero. Solarising is an effect first noticed - in developing photographs from negatives. It results in a - negative image with different colouring from that of the - "inverted colours" option in the general preferences. A - solarise factor of 5 will produce startling results, but the - maximum factor is 100. - - - - - - Spread image pixels - - - The spread image checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. The result of spreading the image - pixels by a radius of about 5 is similar to looking through - lightly frosted glass; for heavily-frosted glass, try 25. - The maximum is 100. - - - - - - Swirl pixels - - - The swirl pixels checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. Swirling the pixels results in a - distorted image similar to an imploded image except that it - swirls around the central point rather than stretching to - it. A radius of 20 produces an effect like a fairground distorting - mirror, only not a mirror-image; 90 a much increased version - (although text is still legible); at 180 the entire image is - warped; and at the maximum of 360 a spiral effect is created. - - - - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - - - - Often screenshots saved in PNG format show incorrectly in - Netscape or the GNOME Help - Browser. This is due to bugs in Netscape and - and GNOME image libraries, not to bugs in - Screen-Shooter. You can view such - screenshots in a different image-viewing program; or you can try - changing image compression level in the Preferences dialogue box, - which sometimes helps. - - - - - - - Authors - - The Screen-Shooter applet was - written by Tom Gilbert - (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). - Please report bugs in the Screen-Shooter applet to the - GNOME bug - tracking system. You can do this by following the - guidelines on that site or by using - bug-buddy - from the command-line. For the package, put gnome-applets. - - - This manual was written by - Telsa Gwynne (telsa@linuxchix.org) and - Tom Gilbert (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). - Please send all comments and suggestions regarding this manual to - the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 202a4b1..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,505 +0,0 @@ - - Sound Monitor Applet - - - Sound Monitor applet, shown in its - default theme (appearance) in , is a sound volume display and an - interface for controlling ESD (the Enlightened Sound Daemon) -- - GNOME component responsible for sound output. To add this applet to - a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Multimedia - Sound Monitor - . - - -
- Sound Monitor Applet - - Sound Monitor Applet - - - -
- - - - Sound in GNOME - - GNOME uses a special program, called ESD (the Enlightened Sound - Daemon), as an intermediary between applications and sound - card. ESD allows mixing sound from several applications, so that - you can play a game and hear the sound effects while listening - to an aduio CD. To hear any sound from GNOME applications, ESD - must be running. Normally GNOME is configured so that ESD is - started every time you login; if for some reason this is not so, - click on the Main Menu button (the foot - icon) and select - - Programs - Setting - Multimedia - Sound - - and make sure that the option Enable sound server - startup is enabled, so that the next time you login, - ESD will be started. You can also start or stop ESD - using the Sound Monitor applet as - described below. - - - Non-GNOME applications usually are not aware of ESD and need - full control of the audio card --- they can not share audio card - with other applications. This means with such applications, you - can either have sound from GNOME or sound from non-GNOME - application, but not both. In many cases, this means that you - have to temporarily stop ESD to get sound from non-GNOME - applications (otherwise, you get error messages like - Device /dev/dsp busy). - - - - - - - Usage - - Sound Monitor always displays the - volume of sound being produced on your system graphically. - You may control sound by turning ESD on or off by right-clicking - on the applet and selecting Place Esound in - standby or Resume Esound - respectively, as described below. - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Manager… — brings - up the - Sound Monitor Manager dialog, - which allows you to view and control current ESD settings. - - - - - - Place Esound in - standby/Resume - Esound/Start - Esound — At any time, you will only - have one of these three items, depending on whether ESD is - running and what its status is. The first two menu items - allow you to - temporarily place ESD in standby and then resume ESD. - This is useful if you have a sound application which is - unable to work with ESD, but needs direct access to the - sound device. The third allows you to start - Esound if it is not started. - - - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Sound - Monitor, inluding the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Sound Monitor - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - - Peak indicator — This controls the behavior of the peak - indicator (the bright line which tracks the peak volume), - either turning it off (off), having it - follow the peak as if it is floating on top - (active), or having it follow the peak - smoothing out short spikes and drops - (smooth). - - - - - - Peak indicator falloff speed — This controls the speed - the peak indicator falls back to zero volume (for active mode) - or moves toward the current volume (for smooth mode). - - - - - Scope (scale 1:X, where X=?) — This controls the - horizontal (time) axis scale for Sound - Monitor "scope-like" themes, i.e., themes that - show a graph of sound level, with time along the horizontal - axis. (Since - the default theme is not a scope, this control does not do - anything until you have modified the theme, as described - below.) A value of 1 corresponds to time scale of 44 100 - pixels/second; value of X gives 44 100/X pixels/second. (These - numbers appear because the standard for CD-quality audio - stipulates that there should be 44 100 sound samplings per second.) - - - - - - Connect points in scope — This determines whether the - sampled volume points are connected. (For scope themes only.) - - - - - - Screen refresh (frames per second) — This controls the - number of times the Sound Monitor - display is updated each second. - - - - - - - The properties in the Theme tab are: - - - - - Theme file (directory) — This is the theme for you - Sound Monitor, which determines the - overall appearance of the applet. You can either select a - theme from the list Themes:, or else type - in the directory and name of another theme if available. Some - of the standard themes are shown in . - -
- Example Sound Monitor Themes - - Example Sound Monitor Themes - - - -
- - - - - - - - - The properties in the Advanced tab are: - - - - - ESD host to monitor — This option allows you to listen - to sound being played by ESD on another computer. To do so, - enter the network address (or IP address) of a computer to - monitor in the format host:port. - The host specified must be running ESD and have their esound - daemon "unlocked" to allow other machines to connect. Note - that the default port for ESD is 5001. Leave - this entry blank to monitor sound on the local machine. - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - The Sound Monitor Manager - - To start the Sound Monitor Manager, - right-click on the applet and choose - Manager…. This will open the - Sound Monitor - Manager dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - view and modify various ESD settings. - -
- Properties dialog - - Sound Monitor Manager dialog - - - -
- - - The Server tab displays the following information: - - - - - Server information — This is a brief description of the - esound server daemon's current status, including the sound - output rate to the sound card, the number of currently playing - sounds (connected streams), and the number of sound samples - cached in the server. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Streams tab are: - - - - - Connected Streams — This displays a list of basic - information for the current sound streams playing through the - sound server. The user can adjust the volume and balance of a - stream by first selecting the stream's line, then adjusting - the volume and balance sliders. - - - - - - - - The properties in the Samples tab are: - - - - - Cached Samples — This displays a list of basic - information for the current sounds cached in the sound - server. The user can adjust the volume and balance of a cached - sound by first selecting the sound's line, then adjusting the - volume and balance sliders. To toggle between displaying the - sound's length as bytes or time (format MM:SS.S) click on the - length or time column heading. - - - - - - - After you made all the choices you want, click on - OK to make the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - - The Esound Persistent Volume Daemon (ESDPVD) - - The Sound Monitor applet comes with a - companion program called the Esound Persistent Volume - Daemon - (ESDPVD), which can run in the background and remembers the volume - and balance of each stream that connects to the sound server. The - main purpose of ESDPVD is to be used in - conjunction with the Sound Monitor - applet's Manager dialog - to retain volume levels for individual streams that - connect to the ESD sound server. - - - As an example, suppose you are running the - GTCD CD Player and you - lower its volume using the Manager window. Normally - the volume setting will be lost when the program (in this case - GTCD) is exited and - restarted. However, if esdpvd is - running and you start GTCD again, the - volume will be restored to its previous (in this case, - lower) value from before. - - - If you configure GNOME to start ESDPVD - each time GNOME is started (using the - control-center's Startup - Programs section), ESDPVD - will remember sound volume and balance customizations between - GNOME sessions. - - - ESDPVD also remembers volume and - balance adjustments to cached samples (often used for interface - sound events such as button clicks, menus, etc.). - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet only shows the sound volume for sound produced by - GNOME applications (to be precise, sounds passing through ESD); it - will not show sound volume for applications that directly connect - to audio card. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Sound Monitor was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. You can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu) and John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments - and suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation - Project by sending an email to - docs@gnome.org. You can also submit comments online - by using the GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/swapload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/swapload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 5681a6e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/swapload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,184 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - El aplique de carga de swap - - - El aplique de carga de swap es un pequeño aplique monitor situado en su panel que indica cuanto espacio de swap se está usando. - - - - El espacio de swap es una parte del disco duro que no forma parte del sistema de ficheros. Cuando el kernel decide que un programa en memoria no está siendo usado mucho pero puede ser requerido pronto, libera algunas partes del programa fuera de la memoria y las guarda en en el espacio de swap, de donde las puede recuperar fácilmente. El movimiento de datos entre la memoria y el espacio de swap puede ser lento, así que si está usando mucho espacio de swap, puede notar que el tiempo de respuesta de la máquina se realentiza. - - - - Uso - - No necesita hacerle nada a este aplique. Él sólo se situará y se ejecutará en su panel. Hay varias opciones disponibles para modificar su aspecto. - - -
- Aplique de Carga de Swap - - Aplique de Carga de Swap - - - -
- - - - - Opciones del menú desplegable con el botón derecho - - Además de las opciones de menú estándard, el menú desplegable con el botón derecho tiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Propiedades por omisión... - - - Lanza el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que le permite modificar las propiedades por defecto de este aplique monitor y otros apliques relacionados. - - - - - - Propiedades... - - - Lanza el cuadro de diálogo del aplique multicarga - descrito más adelante que afecta sólo a las propiedades del aplique de carga de swap. - - - - - - Lanzar gtop... - - - Esta opción ejecutará gtop que arranca el Monitor del Sistema de GNOME. gtop proporciona una visión mucho más detallada del sistema y de lo que en él ocurre. - - - - - - - - Propiedades - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión - - Diálogo de Propiedades por Omisión del Aplique de Carga de Swap - - - -
- - - Al igual que varios de los aplique monitores, el - aplique de carga de swap tiene dos modos de seleccionar preferencias. Puede hacer cambios que afectan a todo este grupo - (aplique de carga CPU, aplique de carga de memoria, - aplique de carga swap, aplique de carga de la red - y aplique de carga promedio) en un amplio cuadro de diálogo. Esto es útil si ejecuta uno o más de ellos. Estos son los valores por defecto. Se llega a ellos desde la opción del menú - Propiedades por omisión... - - -
- Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado - - Diálogo de propiedades deshabilitado del Aplique de Carga de Swap - - - -
- - - O puede cambiar sólo las propiedades para el - aplique de carga de swap. Esto es útil cuando sólo utiliza el aplique de carga de swap o cuando quiere probar nuevas combinaciones. Se llega a él desde la opción del menú - Propiedades. - - - - Si usa la opción del menú Propiedades... - y edita las preferencias para sólo este aplique, debe deshabilitar la casilla Usar propiedades por omisión antes de cambiar la configuración. - - - -
- Diálogo de Propiedades de Carga Swap - - Diálogo de Propiedades del Aplique de Carga Swap - - - -
- - - Los cambios que puedes hacer a las propiedades son tres: - - - - - Colores - - - Puede modificar los colores utilizados para el espacio de swap ocupado y el libre pulsando en los cuadros de color. Así se invoca la paleta de colores de GNOME. - - - - - - Velocidad - - - Puede cambiar la velocidad a la que el gráfico se actualiza. La medida es en milisegundos, y el valor por defecto 500. - - - - - - Tamaño - - - Puede cambiar el tamaño del aplique. La medida es en píxeles. El valor por defecto es 40, y el rango abarca desde 1 pixel hasta donde quiera. En un panel vertical, este valor hace referencia a la altura. En uno horizontal, a la anchura. - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - El cambiar el tamaño del aplique y su orientación puede causar todavía problemas intermitentes, aunque ahora se corrigen por sí mismos al cabo de un corto período de tiempo. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index afdc629..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tasklist-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,483 +0,0 @@ - - - - Tasklist Applet - - - Tasklist applet, shown in , displays a table showing windowed - applications running on your computer. Depending on the options - chosen, you can display either those on the desktop currently in - use, or on all virtual desktops. To add this applet to a - Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - Applets - Utility - Tasklist - . - - - -
- Tasklist - - Tasklist - - - -
- - - Usage - Tasklist allows you to quickly - navigate the applications running on your computer, displaying - icons and application names for each application that meets the - criteria you've set in the properties window. Clicking - on an icon or application name gives focus to that application, - bringing it to the foreground so it accepts your keyboard input. - - Right-clicking with the mouse on an application's icon or - text in the applet brings up the following menu: - -
- Tasklist Right-Click Options - - Tasklist Right-Click Options - - - -
- - - - Iconify — reduce the - selected application to a panel icon. When an application - already has been iconified, the menu item changes to - Restore. Clicking on it restores the - application to your desktop. - - - - Shade — minimize the - application to a single window bar. When an application - has been Shaded, the menu item changes to - Unshade. Clicking on - Unshade restores the application to - full size. - - - - Stick — make application - "sticky", which means it remains in your field of view when - you change virtual desktops, following you as you go. When - an application is sticky, the menu option - Unstick is displayed, allowing you to - leave an application behind as you continue your virtual - desktop travels. - - - - Kill — kills the - application. The properties - dialog allows you to - have Tasklist prompt you for - confirmation before causing an application's untimely death. - - - - - - - - Task Grouping - Tasklist can group icons together when - multiple instances of a program are running. A number in parentheses - appears to next to the application. Clicking on the icon brings up a menu - listing all of the running instances. - - Clicking on an item in the list brings that window to the foreground - and gives it focus. - By default, Tasklist groups four or more - applications. You can change this in the properties window. - - - - Right-Click Pop-Up Menu Items - - In addition to the standard menu items (see ), the - right-click pop-up menu has - Properties... item — This menu - item opens the Properties dialog (see ) which allows you to - customize the appearance and behavior of this applet. - - - - - - Properties - - You can configure Tasklist applet by - right-clicking on the applet and choosing the - Properties... menu item. This will open the - Properties dialog, shown in . - -
- Properties Dialog - - Properties Dialog - - - -
- The Properties dialog allows to you - control which tasks are displayed: - - - - Show normal applications — - display, in the applet, all applications on the current - desktop that have not been minimized. - - - Show iconified (minimized) applications - — show all applications on the current - desktop that have been minimized - - - Show normal applications on all - desktops — show all full-sized, - non-minimized applications on all desktops. For this to - work, you must also have checked the Show normal - applications checkbox above. - - - Show iconified (minimized) applications on - all desktops — show all applications that - have been minimized on all desktops. For this to work, you - must also have checked Show iconified (minimized) - applications above. - - - - - - - - Show mini icons — Some - applications support a miniature icon. This option displays - it on the Tasklist panel. - - - Confirm before killing windows - — have the applet prompt you before you're permitted - to kill an - application. - - - Move iconified tasks to current workspace - when restoring — automatically switches - the desktop work area on your screen to the one containing - the application you click on in the - Tasklist panel. - - - Enable task grouping — Turns on - Tasklist's grouping feature and controls the number of instances of an application that must be running before they are grouped. - - - - - - -
- Properties Dialog - Size - - Properties Dialog - Size - - - -
- - The size properties dialog controls - how much space Tasklist takes up on - your panel: - - - Follow panel size - — have Tasklist size - determined automatically based on panel size. This overrides - other size options. - - - Tasklist width (height) - — width (or height in vertical panel) of - Tasklist in pixels. - - - Rows of tasks - — determines how many rows of task icons - Tasklist displays. - - - Default task size - — set the default size for display of a task - item. (This only has effect if Tasklist width is - dynamic is checked below.) - - - Tasklist width (height) is fixed - (dynamic) — Have the size of the tasklist - fixed or established by the applet dynamically. Setting it - to "fixed" means that the applet will always take the amount - of space set in "tasklist width", even if there are no - tasks. Setting it to dynamic means that - the applet will take as much space as needed to show all tasks (zero if - there are no tasks), but not more than the value set in - Tasklist width. - - - Only use empty space — If width or - height is set to be dynamic, this option forces - Tasklist to use only the available space - on your screen, preventing it from pushing other applets out - of the way and off of your screen. - - - - - - - - - - Basic Properties Options - All Properties dialogs have the following - buttons at the bottom of the dialog: - - - - OK — - Pressing OK will activate any changes - in the properties you have made and close the - Properties dialog. - - - - - Apply — - Pressing Apply at any time will - make your changes active without closing the - Properties dialog. This is helpful if - you would like to test the effects of the changes you have - made but may want to continue changing the properties. - - - - - Close — - Pressing Close will close the - Properties dialog. Only changes in the - configuration which were previously applied with the - Apply button will persist. Other - changes will be discarded. - - - - - Help — - Pressing Help brings up the manual for - the application, opening it to the page describing the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Pop-Up Items - - All applets should have the following items in their right-click - pop-up menu: - - - Remove from panel - - - The Remove from panel menu item - removes the applet from the Panel. - - - - - - Move - - - After selecting Move, your mouse - pointer will change appearance (typically to a cross with - arrows in each direction). As you move your mouse, the applet - will move with it. When you have finished moving the applet, - click any mouse button and the applet will anchor in its - current position. Note that applets can be moved between two - Panels this way. - - - - - - Panel - - - The Panel submenu contains various - items and submenus for adding and removing - Panels and applets and for changing - the configuration. - - - - - - About - - - The About... menu item brings up a - dialogue box containing various information about the applet, - typically including the applet's name, version, author, - copyright, license and description. - - - - - - Help - - - The Help menu item brings up the help - manual for the applet. - - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - There are no known bugs in the - Tasklist applet. - - - - - - - Authors - - The Tasklist applet was written by Anders Carlsson - (andersca@gnu.org). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 4576897..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,504 +0,0 @@ - - Tick-a-Stat Applet - - - Tick-a-Stat applet, shown in , watches various aspects of your - system and delivers information when certain events occur. For - example, it can watch the CPU load and warn you when the CPU is - being overloaded with concurrent processes. To add this - applet to a Panel, - right-click on the Panel and choose - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Utility - Tick-a-Stat - . - - -
- Tick-a-Stat Applet - - Tick-a-Stat Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - - After you have configured Tick-a-Stat, - it will run continuously and does not require any input. - General configuration of Tick-a-Stat is - explained in . There are several - modules which can be used. Their function and configuration is - described in . - - - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties… — - opens the - Properties dialog. - - - - - - Event Log… — - opens the - Event Log dialog. - - - - - - Help — - displays this document. - - - - - - About… — - shows basic information about Tick-a-Stat - Applet, including the applet's version and the - author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize Tick-a-Stat - applet by right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open the - Properties dialog(shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - - -
- Properties dialog - - Properties dialog - - - -
- - - The Modules tab lists the various modules - you can enable. Select a module from Module - list on the left to configure it in the pane on the right. Each - module and its configurable properties are described in . - - - - The properties in the General tab are: - - - - Enable logging of events — If this button is - checked, a log of each event detected by an enabled module - will be written to the file named in the Log - path entry. - - - - - - Log Path — This is name of the file which will be used - to store the event log. - - - - - - - The properties in the Display tab are: - - - - - Smooth scroll — Selecting this button causes old events - to slowly scroll upwards when new events occur, instead of - quickly moving up to make room. - - - - - - Smooth type — Selecting this button causes new text to - be slowly typed across the applet as if somebody is typing it, - instead of appearing very quickly. - - - - - - Delay when wrapping text — This is the time delay (in - tenths of a second) that it pauses when it wraps a message - around the right edge of the applet (ie. for a carriage return). - - - - - - Scroll speed between lines (Smooth scroll) — This is the - speed at which lines are scrolled upwards. - - - - - - Width — This is the width(in pixels) of the applet. - - - - - - Use all room on panel — Selecting this button expands - the applet along the Panel to fill all - space (up to any neighboring Panel objects if they exist.) - - - - - - Height — This is the height(in pixels) of the applet. - - - - - - Use panel size hint — Selecting this button causes the - applet to try to size itself to fit the - Panel height. - - - - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - - Modules - - Tick-a-Stat has several modules. - Each module watches a certain part of your system and responds - to different evens. Multiple modules can be run enabled at once. - The standard Tick-a-Stat modules are - described below. - - - - Test Module - - The Test module is a simple module that just prints - Testing line from test module :) in the applet - every few seconds. - - - - - Core Dump Catcher Module - - The Dump Monitor module monitors a certain path for core dumps. - If it finds one, it time stamps it and logs the backtrace. It also - displays a core dump logo and message in the main applet, as - shown in and optionally - will open a dialog displaying the backtrace. - -
- Tick-a-Stat Showing a Core Dump - - Tick-a-Stat Showing a Core Dump - - - -
- - - The Core Dump module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Show backtrace dialog on new core files — Selecting this - button will cause Tick-a-Stat to - open a dialog showing the backtrace each time a new core dump - is found. - - - - - - Path to monitor — Enter the name of the directory you - would like the Core Dump module to monitor for core dumps. - - - - - - - - Load Average Monitor Module - - The Load Average Monitor module monitors the systems CPU usage - and warns you when the number of processes(programs) sharing the - CPU is too high. (This will cause poor performance of each - process and can be indicative of an errant program or daemon.) - When the CPU load is high it will display a warning, as shown in - . For even higher - loads, an alert is displayed. - -
- Tick-a-Stat Showing a Load Warning - - Tick-a-Stat Showing a Load Warning - - - -
- - - The Load Average Monitor module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Check every (Seconds) — Set this to the interval (in - seconds) between checking the load. - - - - - - Show pop-up dialog for this event — Select this button - to have a pop-up dialog open each time a warning (or alert) - is issued. (This option occurs in both the Warning and Alert - sections.) - - - - - - Load average threshold — Set this to the load (the - average number of running programs which request use of the - CPU at any instant in time). (This option occurs in both the - Warning and Alert sections.) - - - - - - Text to display — Enter the message which should be - displayed when the load reaches the threshold level. - - - - - - - - - File Tailer Module - - The File Tailer module shows any lines which are added to the - end of a given file. This is typically used to monitor the - output log files created by many programs. - - - - - The File Tailerr module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Path to tail — Set this to the name of the file you - wish to tail. (The term "tail" refers to watching the tail, - or end, of a file. In a shell, one can do this using the - tail command, typically with the "-f" - flag.) - - - - - - Show pop-up dialog for new line — Select this - to have a pop-up dialog showing the new line open each time a - new line is added to the file. - - - - - - - - - - - - - The Event Log - - The event log is used to keep track of any events which register - in Tick-a-Stat. The file used for the - event log and whether event logging is enabled are specified in - the General tab of the Properties - dialog. To view the event log, right click on the applet and - select Event log…. - - - - - - - - - Known Bugs and Limitations - - This applet has no known bugs. - - - - - - - - Authors - - Tick-a-Stat Applet was written by John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ce11a1c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ - - - - - WebControl Applet - - WebControl Applet, shown in , allows you to launch your - Netscape browser with the URL you - indicate in the URL text box. To add this applet - to a Panel, right-click on the panel and choose - - - Panel - Add to panel - Applet - Network - WebControl - - - - -
- WebControl Applet - - WebControl Applet - - - -
- - - - Usage - To use this applet, type the URL of the document you wish - to view in the text box. For an Internet URL, you must type in - http:// followed by the web address, for - example, http://www.gnome.org. For a local - file, simply type the file's name. - - - If you would like to launch a new browser window instead of - using the currently active one, check the Launch new - window check box. - - Right-clicking on the applet brings up a menu containing the - following items: - - - - - Properties— opens the - - Properties - dialog - - - - - Help — displays this - document. - - - - - About — shows basic - information about WebControl - Applet, including the applet's version and author's name. - - - - - - - - - - - - Customization - - You can customize WebControl Applet by - right-clicking on it and choosing - Properties…. This will open - the Properties dialog (shown in ), which allows you to - change various settings. - -
- WebControl Properties Dialog - - Preferences dialog - - - -
- - - The properties are: - - - - Display URL label — - display the text Url: to the left of the - text entry window in the applet. - - - - - - Display "launch new window" option - — display check box on the applet window allowing you to - decide whether your document will be displayed in a new browser - window or the currently open. - - - - - - After you have made all the changes you want, click on - OK to apply the changes and close the - Properties dialog. To cancel the changes - and return to previous values, click the - Cancel button. - - - - - Known bugs and limitations - - WebControl Applet only starts - Netscape. If you don't have - Netscape, it won't work. If you have - a different browser set as your URL handler, Web - Control Applet will still start Netscape. - - WebControl Applet does not - resize to match the size of the panel if the panel is smaller than - WebControl Applet's normal height and width. This - effects both small horizontal panels and all vertical panels. - - - - - - - - Authors - - WebControl Applet was written by Garrett Smith - gsmith@serv.net. Please send all comments, - suggestions, and bug - reports to the GNOME - bug tracking database. (Instructions for submitting bug - reports can be found - on-line. If you are using - GNOME 1.1 or later, you can also use Bug Report - Tool (bug-buddy), available in the - Utilities submenu of Main - Menu, for submitting bug reports. - - - - This manual was written by John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Please send all comments and - suggestions regarding this manual to the GNOME Documentation Project - by sending an email to docs@gnome.org. You can also - submit comments online by using the GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/whereami-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/whereami-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f9adcbc..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/applets/whereami-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - - Aplique ¿Donde estoy? - - -El aplique ¿Donde estoy?, mostrado en -, indica la posición del puntero -del ratón en la pantalla, mostrando las coordenadas x -e y, donde x es la coordenada -horizontal e y es la vertical. -Las dimensiones de un área en la pantalla se puede determinar arrastrando -el puntero del ratón, una vez arrancada el aplique ¿Donde estoy?. - - -Para añadir este aplique en un panel, pulse el -botón derecho sobre el Panel y escoja - - Panel - Añadir al panel - Aplique - Utilidades - ¿Donde estoy? - . - - -
- Aplique ¿Donde estoy? - - Aplique ¿Donde estoy? - - - -
- - - - Uso - -No necesita hacer nada especial para usar este aplique. Indicara la posición -del puntero según vaya moviendo el ratón. Al pulsar sobre -¿Donde estoy? se memorizará la posición -del puntero, haciendo que su forma se transforme en una cruz. Una vez -que la posición del puntero se ha memorizado, puede arrastrarlo para -medir las dimensiones de una área de la pantalla. Una segunda pulsación -finalizara la operación en curso, y restaurara el funcionamiento normal. - - - - Al pulsar el botón derecho sobre el aplique aparecerá un menú desplegable con las - siguientes opciones: - - - - - Ayuda — - presenta este documento. - - - - - - Acerca de...; — - presenta información básica acerca de ¿Donde estoy?, - incluyendo la versión del aplique y el autor. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Errores y limitaciones conocidas - - Este aplique no tiene errores conocidos. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/authors.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/authors.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 4d3e8ee..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/authors.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Equipo de documentación de la guía de usuario GNOME - - -Esta guía de usuario fue escrita por los siguientes autores - - - - - -Autores - - - - - - - -David C. Mason - - - - -David A. Wheeler - - - - - Alexander Kirillov - - - Dan Mueth - - - Telsa Gwynne - - - Eric Baudais - - - John Fleck - - - Aaron Weber - - - Kenny Graunke - - - John Ellis - - - Havoc Pennington - - - Emese Kovacs - - - Spiros Papadimitriou - - - Oliver Maruhn - - - Chris Lyttle - - - James Cope - - - Michael Hall - - - Tom Gilbert - - - John Kodis - - - Gregory Leblanc - - - Vera Horiuchi - - - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - - - Arjan Scherpenisse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/desktop.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/desktop.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 9e84438..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/desktop.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,486 +0,0 @@ - - - - -El Escritorio GNOME - - - - - -Introducción - - - - - - -Escritorio GNOME - - - - -El escritorio GNOME le proporciona la funcionalidad de un -escritorio tradicional de un sistema operativo. Puede arrastrar -ficheros, programas y directorios al escritorio; también puede -arrastrar estos elementos sobre aplicaciones compatibles GNOME, -lo cual le permitirá acceder de forma rápida a cualquier elemento que -seleccione. - - - - -Importante - - - - -El escritorio GNOME funciona en realidad por medio de un -proceso en segundo plano del Administrador de Ficheros de GNOME. Si, por -cualquier razón, dicho proceso ha dejado de ejecutarse, puede -volver a ejecutar el Administrador de Ficheros Nautilus y el -escritorio volverá a funcionar. Incluso si tiene que hacer esto recuerde que -no hay necesidad de mantener la ventana del Administrador de Ficheros -abierta para que el escritorio funcione. - - - - - - - -Uso del escritorio - - - - -Utilizar el escritorio es algo tan sencillo como arrastrar todo -aquello que desee utilizar rutinariamente al escritorio. -Una carpeta con su directorio personal va incluida en el escritorio - por defecto. -(/home/[nombre usuario]). Por defecto aparecerá la ventana del Administrador de Ficheros Nautilus para -permitirle acceder de forma rápida a otras zonas de su sistema. - - - -Una vez que tenga un elemento en el escritorio pulse dos veces sobre él -para ejecutar su acción por defecto, o pulse el botón derecho del ratón para ver el menú de acciones asociadas a este elemento. -Las acciones por omisión dependen del tipo de elemento que -sea; si es un programa, el programa se iniciará, si se trata de datos, el -programa apropiado arrancará con esos datos cargados, y si es un directorio, -se abrirá una ventana del gestor de ficheros mostrando su contenido. - - - - -Para utilizar arrastrar y soltar necesita utilizar una -aplicación compatible GNOME o una aplicación Motif. GNOME es compatible -con arrastrar y soltar de Motif, por lo que verá que funciona con muchas -de las aplicaciones que tiene instaladas. - - - - -Todo lo que tiene en el escritorio está almacenado en el directorio: - - - - -$ - - - -/home/[nombre usuario]/.nautilus/desktop/ - - - -Le será útil recordarlo cuando quiera que su escritorio contenga algún elemento -que no pueda poner mediante arrastrar y soltar. - - - - - - -Escritorio GNOME - - - - -Dispositivos hardware - - - -Una vez haya arrancado GNOME podrá montar unidades de CD-ROM o de discos flexibles que tenga conectadas a su sistema pulsando el botón derecho del ratón en el escritorio y seleccionando el menú de discos. Aparecerá un icono en su escritorio que podrá utilizar para acceder a estas unidades. - - - - - -Importante - - - - -Debe tener permiso para montar los dispositivos que aparecen en su -escritorio antes de poder utilizar estos iconos. -Si no dispone de permiso para montarlos, alguien con acceso a la cuenta -«root», como el administrador del sistema, puede dárselo tal y como se -indica a continuación. -Puede leer mas sobre este tema y otros relacionados con el sistema en -. - - - - - -Montar unidades - - - -Puede otorgar permiso para montar unidades a -usuarios normales de manera fácil si -tiene - - - - -linuxconf - - - - -instalado en su ordenador. Sólo tiene que seleccionar la unidad a -la que quiere acceder en la sección - - - -Acceso a unidades locales - - - -. Debe seleccionar la -opción - - - -Montable por el usuario - - - -dentro de la pestaña - - - -Opciones - - - -. Ahora los usuarios normales podrán montar unidades. - - - - -Si no tiene - - - - -linuxconf - - - - -alguien con acceso a la cuenta «root» deberá -editar el fichero - - - -/etc/fstab - - - -para añadir -acceso a los usuarios. Esto se consigue añadiendo el -atributo de usuario a la unidad. Por ejemplo: - - - - -Si en su fichero fstab aparece algo así: - - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - -Añada ``user'' a la cuarta columna: - - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - -El permitir a los usuarios montar discos puede implicar ciertos problemas de seguridad, -dependiendo de su sistema y de su entorno de trabajo. Por favor, -consulte a su administrador de sistema antes de hacerlo. - - - - - - - - - -Áreas del escritorio - - - - - - -Áreas del escritorio - - - - - - -Múltiples escritorios - - - - - -Las áreas del escritorio le permitirán mantener un sistema bien -organizado mientras realiza varias tareas simultáneamente. Es como si añadiera -otra mesa cuando tiene demasiadas cosas para ponerlas en una sola, -las áreas -del escritorio le permitirán moverse a otra área para lanzar más -programas. - - - - -GNOME es capaz de utilizar las áreas del escritorio aunque éstas -estén controladas por otro programa llamado el `administrador de -ventanas'. Puede decidir la cantidad de áreas de escritorio que quiere -enla configuración del administrador de ventanas que esté -utilizando. Si está utilizando el administrador de ventanas por defecto o su administrador de ventanas tiene una herramienta -gráfica de configuración, entonces puede -lanzarla desde el aplique C del administrador de -ventanas. Puede leer más acerca de este aplique C en - - - - - - -Importante - - - - -La mayoría de los administradores de ventanas le ofrecerán la posibilidad de -tener escritorios múltiples, siendo estos distintos a las áreas -de escritorio. Las áreas de escritorio son extensiones virtuales del escritorio, mientras que los escritorios múltiples están en realidad separados. - - - - -La configuración por defecto viene de tal manera que el uso de la áreas de escritorio está restringido a un sólo escritorio. La razón para esto es que con algunas aplicaciones, como las que usan Motif, el usuario puede experimentar problemas con acciones de arrastrar y soltar entre escritorios. - - - - - - - -Otros menús de escritorio - - - - - - -Escritorio GNOME - - - - -Menús del escritorio - - - - -Hay unos cuantos menús de escritorio que podrá utilizar -desde GNOME. A estos menús se accede pulsando el botón -derecho del ratón en cualquier lugar vacío del -escritorio. Aparecerá un menú - - - -desplegable - - - -que contiene varios elementos: - - - - - - - - -Nueva Ventana - - - -- Esta opción -lanzará una ventana del Administrador de Ficheros Nautilus que muestra su directorio hogar. - - - - - - - -Nuevo Directorio - - - -- Esta opción -crea un nuevo directorio en el escritorio, en el que podrá colocar ficheros: -una manera eficaz de mantener ordenado el escritorio. - - - - - - - -Nuevo | Terminal - - - -- Esta opción lanzará una ventana nueva del Terminal de GNOME que le llevará directamente al directorio -/home/[nombre de usuario] - - - - -Ordenar por Nombre - - -- Esta opción ordena automáticamente los iconos de su escritorio. - - - - - - - -Discos - - - -- Esta opción accede al submenú para montar unidades desmontables. - - - -Cambiar el Fondo del Escritorio - - - -- Esta opción abre el Centro de Control de GNOME en el aplique C de Fondos, que le permite reconfigurar el fondo de su escritorio - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl-es.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl-es.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2e480d9..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl-es.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,645 +0,0 @@ - - Licencia de Documentación Libre GNU (traduccion) - - Versión 1.1, Marzo de 2000 - - - -Esta es la GNU Free Document License (GFDL), versión 1.1 (de Marzo de -2.000), que cubre manuales y documentación para el software de la Free -Software Foundation, con posibilidades en otros campos. La traducción no tiene -ningún valor legal, ni ha sido comprobada de acuerdo a la legislación de -ningún país en particular. Vea el -original - - -Los autores de esta traducción son: - - - - - - -Igor Támara ikks@bigfoot.com - - - - -Pablo Reyes reyes_pablo@hotmail.com - - - - -Revisión : Vladimir Támara P. vtamara@gnu.org - - - - - - - - Copyright © 2000
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
-Se permite la copia y distribución de copias literales -de este documento de licencia, pero no se permiten cambios. - - - - - 0. Preámbulo - - -El propósito de esta licencia es permitir que un manual, libro de texto, u -otro documento escrito sea "libre" en el sentido de libertad: asegurar a todo -el mundo la libertad efectiva de copiarlo y redistribuirlo, con o sin -modificaciones, de manera comercial o no. En segundo término, esta licencia -preserva para el autor o para quien publica una manera de obtener -reconocimiento por su trabajo, al tiempo que no se consideran responsables de -las modificaciones realizadas por terceros. - - - -Esta licencia es una especie de "copyleft" -que significa que los trabajos derivados del -documento deben a su vez ser libres en el mismo sentido. Esto complementa la -Licencia Pública General GNU, que es una licencia de copyleft diseñada para el -software libre. - - - -Hemos diseñado esta Licencia para usarla en manuales de software libre, ya -que el software libre necesita documentación libre: Un programa libre debe -venir con los manuales que ofrezcan la mismas libertades que da el software. -Pero esta licencia no se limita a manuales de software; puede ser usada para -cualquier trabajo textual, sin tener en cuenta su temática o si se publica -como libro impreso. Recomendamos esta licencia principalmente para trabajos -cuyo fin sea instructivo o de referencia. - - - - - 1. Aplicabilidad y definiciones - - -Esta Licencia se aplica a cualquier manual u otro documento que contenga -una nota del propietario de los derechos que indique que puede ser distribuido -bajo los términos de la Licencia. El -"Documento", en adelante, se refiere a -cualquiera de dichos manuales o trabajos. Cualquier miembro del público es un -licenciatario, y será denominado como "Usted". - - - -Una "Versión Modificada" del Documento -significa cualquier trabajo que -contenga el Documento o una porción del mismo, ya sea una copia literal o con -modificaciones y/o traducciones a otro idioma. - - - -Una "Sección Secundaria" es un apéndice titulado o una sección preliminar -al prólogo del Documento que tiene que -ver exclusivamente con la relación de -quien publica o, los autores del Documento - o, el tema general del Documento(o -asuntos relacionados) y cuyo contenido no entra directamente en este tema -general. (Por ejemplo, si el Documento es en -parte un texto de matemáticas, -una Sección Secundaria puede no explicar matemáticas.) La relación puede ser -un asunto de conexión histórica, o de posición legal, comercial, filosófica, -ética o política con el tema o la materia del texto. - - - -Las "Secciones Invariantes" son ciertas Secciones Secundarias cuyos títulos -son denominados como Secciones Invariantes, en la nota que indica que el -documento es liberado bajo esta licencia. - - - -Los "Textos de Cubierta" son ciertos pasajes cortos de texto que se listan, -como Textos de Portada o Textos de Contra Portada, en la nota que indica que -el documento es liberado bajo esta Licencia. - - - -Una copia "Transparente" del Documento, significa una copia para lectura en -máquina, representada en un formato cuya especificación está disponible al -público general, cuyos contenidos pueden ser vistos y editados directamente -con editores de texto genéricos o (para imágenees compuestas por pixeles) de -programas genéricos de dibujo o (para dibujos) algún editor gráfico -ampliamente disponible, y que sea adecuado para exportar a formateadores de -texto o para traducción automática a una variedad de formatos adecuados para -ingresar a formateadores de texto. Una copia hecha en un formato de un -archivo que no sea Transparente, cuyo formato ha sido diseñado para impedir o -dificultar subsecuentes modificaciones posteriores por parte de los lectores -no es Transparente. Una copia que no es "Transparente" es llamada -"Opaca". - - - -Como ejemplos de formatos adecuados para copias Transparentes están el -ASCII plano sin formato, formato de Texinfo, formato de LaTeX, SGML o XML -usando un DTD disponible ampliamente, y HTML simple que sigue los estándares, -diseñado para modificaciones humanas. Los formatos Opacos incluyen -PostScript, PDF, formatos propietarios que pueden ser leídos y editados -unicamente en procesadores de palabras propietarios, SGML o XML para los -cuáles los DTD y/o herramientas de procesamiento no están disponibles -generalmente, y el HTML generado por máquinas producto de algún procesador de -palabras solo para propósitos de salida. - - - -La "Portada" en un libro impreso significa, la portada misma, más las -páginas siguientes necesarias para mantener la legibilidad del material, que -esta Licencia requiere que aparezca en la portada. Para trabajos en formatos -que no tienen Portada como tal, "Portada" significa el texto cerca a la -aparición más prominente del título del trabajo, precediendo el comienzo del -cuerpo del trabajo. - - - - - - 2. Copia literal - - -Puede copiar y distribuir el Documento en cualquier medio, sea en forma -comercial o no, siempre y cuando esta Licencia, las notas de derecho de autor, -y la nota de licencia que indica que esta Licencia se aplica al Documento se -reproduzca en todas las copias, y que usted no adicione ninguna otra condición -a las expuestas en en esta Licencia. No puede usar medidas técnicas para -obstruir o controlar la lectura o copia posterior de las copias que usted haga -o distribuya. Sin embargo, usted puede aceptar compensación a cambio de las -copias. Si distribuye un número suficientemente grande de copias también -deberá seguir las condiciones de la sección 3. - - - -También puede prestar copias, bajo las mismas condiciones establecidas -anteriormente, y puede exhibir copias publicamente. - - - - - - 3. Copiado en cantidades - - -Si publica copias impresas del Documento que sobrepasen las 100, y la nota -de Licencia del Documento exige Textos de Cubierta, debe incluir las copias -con cubiertas que lleven en forma clara y legible, todos esos textos de -Cubierta: Textos Frontales en la cubierta frontal, y Textos Posteriores de -Cubierta en la Cubierta Posterior. Ambas cubiertas deben identificarlo a Usted -clara y legiblemente como quien publica tales copias. La Cubierta Frontal -debe mostrar el título completo con todas las palabras igualmente prominentes -y visibles. Además puede adicionar otro material en la cubierta. Las copias -con cambios limitados en las cubiertas, siempre que preserven el título del -Documento y satisfagan estas condiciones, puede considerarse como copia -literal. - - - -Si los textos requeridos para la cubierta son muy voluminosos para que -ajusten legiblemente, debe colocar los primeros (tantos como sea razonable -colocar) en la cubierta real, y continuar el resto en páginas adyacentes. - - - -Si publica o distribuye copias Opacas del Documento cuya cantidad exceda -las 100, debe incluir una copia Transparente que pueda ser leída por una -máquina con cada copia Opaca, o entregar en o con cada copia Opaca una -dirección en red de computador publicamente-accesible conteniendo una copia -completa Transparente del Documento, sin material adicional, a la cual el -público en general de la red pueda acceder a bajar anónimamente sin cargo -usando protocolos de standard público. Si usted hace uso de la última opción, -deberá tomar medidas necesarias, cuando comience la distribución de las copias -Opacas en cantidad, para asegurar que esta copia Transparente permanecerá -accesible en el sitio por lo menos un año después de su última distribución de -copias Opacas (directamente o a través de sus agentes o distribuidores) de esa -edición al público. - - - -Se solicita, aunque no es requisito, que contacte a los autores del -Documento antes de redistribuir cualquier gran número de copias, para -permitirle la oportunidad de que le provean una versión del Documento. - - - - - - 4. Moodificaciones - - -Puede copiar y distribuir una Versión Modificada del Documento bajo las -condiciones de las seccions 2 y 3 anteriores, siempre que usted libere la -Versión Modificada bajo esta misma Licencia, con la Versión Modificada -haciendo el rol del Documento, por lo tanto licenciando la distribución y -modificación de la Versión Modificada a quienquiera que posea una copia de -este. En adición, debe hacer lo siguiente en la Versión Modificada: - - - - - - A - -Uso en la Portada (y en las cubiertas, si hay - alguna) de un título distinto al del Documento, y de versiones anteriores - (que deberían, si hay alguna, estar listados en la sección de Historia del - Documento). Puede usar el mismo título que versiones anteriores al - original siempre que quién publicó la primera versión lo permita. - - - - - - - B - -Listar en la Portada, como autores, una o más - personas o entidades responsables por la autoría o las modificaciones en - la Versión Modificada, junto con por lo menos cinco de los autores - principales del Documento (Todos sus autores principales, si hay menos de - cinco). - - - - - - - C - -Estado en la Portada del nombre de quién publica la Versión Modificada, como quien publica. - - - - - - - D - -Preservar todas las notas de derechos de autor del Documento. - - - - - - - E - -Adicionar una nota de derecho de autor apropiada a sus modificaciones adyacentes a las otras -notas de derecho de autor. - - - - - - - F - -Incluir, immediatamente después de la nota de - derecho de autor, una nota de licencia dando el permiso público para usar - la Versión Modificada bajo los términos de esta Licencia, de la forma - mostrada en la Adición (LEGAL)abajo. - - - - - - - G - -Preservar en esa nota de licencia el listado - completo de Secciones Invariantes y en los Textos de las Cubiertas que - sean requeridos como se especifique en la nota de Licencia del - Documento - - - - - - - H - -Incluir una copia sin modificación de esta - Licencia. - - - - - - - I - -Preservar la sección llamada "Historia", y su - título, y adicionar a esta una sección estableciendo al menos el título, - el año,los nuevos autores, y quién publicó la Versión Modificada como reza - en la Portada. Si no hay una sección titulada "Historia" en el Documento, - crear una estableciendo el título, el año, los autores y quien publicó el - Documento como reza en la Portada, añadiendo además un artículo - describiendo la Versión Modificada como se estableció en el punto - anterior. - - - - - - - J - -Preservar la localización en red, si hay , dada en - la Documentación para acceder públicamente a una copia Transparente del - Documento, tanto como las otras direcciones de red dadas en el Documento - para versiones anteriores en las cuáles estuviese basado. Estas pueden - ubicarse en la sección "Historia". Se puede omitir la ubicación en red - para un trabajo que sea publicado por lo menos 4 años antes que el mismo - Documento, o si quien publica originalmente la versión da permiso - explícitamente. - - - - - - - K - -En cualquier sección titulada "Agradecimientos" o - "Dedicatorias", preservar el título de la sección, y preservar en la - sección toda la sustancia y el tono de los agradeimientos y/o dedicatorias - de cada contribuyente que estén incluídas. - - - - - - - L - -Preservar todas las Secciones Invariantes del - Documento, sin alterar su texto ni sus títulos. Números de sección o el - equivalente no son considerados parte de los títulos de la sección. - M. Borrar cualquier sección titulada "Aprobaciones". - Tales secciones no pueden estar incluidas en las Versiones - Modificadas. - - - - - - - M - -Borrar cualquier sección titulada "Aprobaciones". - Tales secciones no pueden estar incluidas en las Versiones - Modificadas. - - - - - - - N - -No retitular ninguna sección existente como - "Aprobaciones" o conflictuar con título con alguna Sección - Invariante. - - - - - - -Si la Versión Modificada incluye secciones o apendices nuevos o -preliminares al prólogo que califican como Secciones Secundarias y contienen -material no copiado del Documento, puede opcionalmente designar algunas o -todas esas secciones como invariantes. Para hacerlo, adicione sus títulos a -la lista de Secciones Invariantes en la nota de licencia de la Versión -Modificada. Tales títulos deben ser distintos de cualquier otro título de -sección. - - - -Puede adicionar una sección titulada "Aprobaciones", siempre que contenga -unicamente aprobaciones de su Versión Modificada por varias fuentes--por -ejemplo, observaciones de peritos o que el texto ha sido aprobado por una -organización como un standard. - - - -Puede adicionar un pasaje de hasta cinco palabras como un Texto de Cubierta -Frontal, y un pasaje de hasta 25 palabras como un texto de Cubierta Posterior, -al final de la lista de Textos de Cubierta en la Versión Modificada. Solamente -un pasaje de Texto de Cubierta Frontal y un Texto de Cubierta Posterior puede -ser adicionado por (o a manera de arreglos hechos por) una entidad. Si el -Documento ya incluye un texto de cubierta para la misma cubierta, previamente -adicionado por usted o por arreglo hecho por la misma entidad, a nombre de la -cual está actuando, no puede adicionar otra; pero puede reemplazar la -anterior, con permiso explícito de quien publicó anteriormente tal -cubierta. - - - -El(los) autor(es) y quien(es) publica(n) el Documento no dan con esta -Licencia permiso para usar sus nombres para publicidad o para asegurar o -implicar aprobación de cualquier Versión Modificada. - - - - - - 5. Combinando documentos - - -Puede combinar el Documento con otros documentos liberados bajo esta -Licencia, bajo los términos definidos en la sección 4 anterior para versiones -modificadas, siempre que incluya en la combinación todas las Secciones -Invariantes de todos los documentos originales, sin modificar, y listadas -todas como Secciones Invariantes del trabajo combinado en su nota de -licencia. - - - -El trabajo combinado necesita contener solamente una copia de esta -Licencia, y múltiples Seccions Invariantes Idénticas pueden ser reemplazadas -por una sola copia. Si hay múltiples Secciones Invariantes con el mismo -nombre pero con contenidos diferentes, haga el título de cada una de estas -secciones único adicionándole al final de este, en paréntesis, el nombre del -autor o de quien publicó originalmente esa sección, si es conocido, o si no, -un número único. Haga el mismo ajuste a los títulos de sección en la lista de -Secciones Invariantes en la nota de licencia del trabajo combinado. - - - -En la combinación, debe combinar cualquier sección titulada "Historia" de -los varios documentos originales, formando una sección titulada "Historia"; de -la misma forma combine cualquier seción titulada "Agradecimientos", y -cualquier sección titulada "Dedicatorias". Debe borrar todas las secciones -tituladas "Aprobaciones." - - - - - - 6. Colecciones de documentos - - -Puede hacer una colección consistente del Documento y otros documentos -liberados bajo esta Licencia, y reemplazar las copias individuales de esta -Licencia en los varios documentos con una sola copia que esté incluida en la -colección, siempre que siga las reglas de esta Licencia para una copia literal -de cada uno de los documentos en cualquiera de todos los aspectos. - - - -Puede extraer un solo documento de una de tales colecciones, y distribuirlo -individualmente bajo esta Licencia, siempre que inserte una copia de esta -Licencia en el documento extraido, y siga esta Licencia en todos los otros -aspectos concernientes a la copia literal de tal documento. - - - - - - 7. Agregación con trabajos independientes - - -Una recopilación del Documento o de sus derivados con otros documentos o -trabajos separados o independientes, en cualquier tipo de distribución o medio -de almacenamiento, no como un todo, cuenta como una Versión Modificada del -Documento, teniendo en cuenta que ninguna compilación de derechos de autor sea -clamada por la recopilación. Tal recopilación es llamada un "agregado", y esta -Licencia no aplica a los otros trabajos auto-contenidos y por lo tanto -compilados con el Documento, o a cuenta de haber sido compilados, si no son -ellos mismos trabajos derivados del Documento. - - -Si el requerimiento de la sección 3 del Texto de la Cubierta es aplicable a -estas copias del Documento, entonces si el Documento es menor que un cuarto -del agregado entero, Los Textos de la Cubierta del Documento pueden ser -colocados en cubiertas que enmarquen solamente el Documento entre el agregado. -De otra forma deben aparecer en cubiertas enmarcando todo el agregado. - - - - - - 8. Traducción - - -La Traducción es considerada como una clase de modificación, Así que puede -distribuir traducciones del Documento bajo los términos de la sección 4. -Reemplazar las Secciones Invariantes con traducciones requiere permiso -especial de los dueños de derecho de autor, pero puede incluir traducciones de -algunas o todas las Secciones Invariantes adicionalmente a las versiones -originales de las Secciones Invariantes. Puede incluir una traducción de esta -Licencia siempre que incluya también la versión Inglesa de esta Licencia. En -caso de un desacuerdo entre la traducción y la versión original en Inglés de -esta Licencia, la versión original en Inglés prevalecerá. - - - - - - 9. Terminación - - -No se puede copiar, modificar, sublicenciar, o distribuir el Documento -excepto por lo permitido expresamente bajo esta Licencia. Cualquier otro -intento de copia, modificación, sublicenciamiento o distribución del Documento -es nulo, y serán automáticamente terminados sus derechos bajo esa licencia. -De todas maneras, los terceros que hayan recibido copias, o derechos, de su -parte bajo esta Licencia no tendrán por terminadas sus licencias siempre que -tales personas o entidades se encuentren en total conformidad con la licencia -original. - - - - - - 10. Futuras revisiones de esta licencia - - -La Free Software Foundation puede publicar nuevas, revisadas versiones de -la Licencia de Documentación Libre GNU de tiempo en tiempo. Tales nuevas -versiones serán similares en espíritu a la presente versión, pero pueden -diferir en detalles para solucionar problemas o intereses. Vea -http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. - - - -Cada versión de la Licencia tiene un número de versión que la distingue. Si -el Documento especifica que una versión numerada particularmente de esta -licencia o "cualquier versión posterior" se aplica a esta, tiene la opción -de seguir los términos y condiciones de la versión especificada o cualquiera -posterior que ha sido publicada(no como un borrador)por la Free Software -Foundation. Si el Documento no especifica un número de versión de esta -Licencia, puede escoger cualquier versión que haya sido publicada(no como un -borrador) por la Free Software Foundation. - - - - - - Addendum - - -Para usar esta licencia en un documento que usted haya escrito, incluya una -copia de la Licencia en el documento y ponga el siguiente derecho de autor y -nota de licencia justo después del título de la página: - - - -Derecho de Autor © Año Su Nombre. - - - - Permiso para copiar, distribuir y/o modificar este documento - bajo los términos de la Licencia de Documentación Libre GNU, Versión 1.1 - o cualquier otra versión posterior publicada por la Free Software Foundation; - con las Secciones Invariantes siendo LISTE SUS TÍTULOS, con los - siendo LISTELO el texto de la Cubierta Frontal, y siendo LISTELO el texto de la Cubierta Posterior. - Una copia de la licencia es incluida en la sección titulada "Licencia - de Documentación Libre GNU". - - - -Si no tiene Secciones Invariantes, escriba "Sin Secciones Invariantes" en -vez de decir cuáles son invariantes. Si no tiene Texto de Cubierta Frontal, -escriba "Sin Texto de Cubierta Frontal" en vez de"siendo LISTELO el texto de -la Cubierta Frontal"; Así como para la Cubierta Posterior. - - - -Si su documento contiene ejemplos de código de programa no triviales, -recomendamos liberar estos ejemplos en paralelo bajo su elección de licencia -de software libre, tal como la Licencia de Público General GNU, para permitir -su uso en software libre. - - -1. N. del T. Derechos Reservados en el sentido de GNU -http://www.gn\u.org/copyleft/copyleft.es.html - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 57c82f4..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/fdl.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,636 +0,0 @@ - - GNU Free Documentation License - - Version 1.1, March 2000 - - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license - document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - 0. PREAMBLE - - - The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other - written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone - the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without - modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, - this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get - credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for - modifications made by others. - - - - This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative - works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It - complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft - license designed for free software. - - - - We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free - software, because free software needs free documentation: a free - program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the - software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it - can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or - whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License - principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. - - - - - 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS - - - This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a - notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed - under the terms of this License. The "Document" , below, refers to any such - manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is - addressed as "you". - - - - A "Modified Version" of the - Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, - either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into - another language. - - - - A "Secondary Section" is a named - appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the - relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to - related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within - that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of - mathematics, a Secondary Section - may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter - of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or - of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position - regarding them. - - - - The "Invariant Sections" are - certain Secondary Sections whose - titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - The "Cover Texts" are certain - short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - A "Transparent" copy of the - Document means a machine-readable - copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the - general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and - straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of - pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available - drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or - for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input - to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup - has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by - readers is not Transparent. A - copy that is not "Transparent" - is called "Opaque". - - - - Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain - ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML - or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple - HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include - PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only - by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or - processing tools are not generally available, and the - machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output - purposes only. - - - - The "Title Page" means, for a - printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are - needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear - in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title - page as such, "Title Page" - means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, - preceding the beginning of the body of the text. - - - - - - 2. VERBATIM COPYING - - - You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either - commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the - copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies - to the Document are reproduced in - all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those - of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or - control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or - distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for - copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must - also follow the conditions in section - 3. - - - - You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and - you may publicly display copies. - - - - - - 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY - - - If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and - the Document's license notice - requires Cover Texts, you must - enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all - these Cover Texts: Front-Cover - Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both - covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of - these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all - words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other - material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to - the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, - can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. - - - - If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit - legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit - reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent - pages. - - - - If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you - must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each - Opaque copy, or state in or - with each Opaque copy a - publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete - Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which - the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at - no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the - latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin - distribution of Opaque copies - in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus - accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the - last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your - agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. - - - - It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the - Document well before - redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to - provide you with an updated version of the Document. - - - - - - 4. MODIFICATIONS - - - You may copy and distribute a Modified - Version of the Document - under the conditions of sections 2 - and 3 above, provided that you - release the Modified Version under - precisely this License, with the Modified - Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution - and modification of the Modified - Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you - must do these things in the Modified - Version: - - - - - - Use in the Title Page (and - on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of - previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in - the History section of the Document). You may use the same - title as a previous version if the original publisher of that - version gives permission. - - - - - - List on the Title Page, as - authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for - authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at - least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal - authors, if it has less than five). - - - - - - State on the Title Page - the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the - publisher. - - - - - - Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. - - - - - - Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications - adjacent to the other copyright notices. - - - - - - Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license - notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms - of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. - - - - - - Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required - Cover Texts given in the - Document's license notice. - - - - - - Include an unaltered copy of this License. - - - - - - Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add - to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and - publisher of the Modified Version - as given on the Title - Page. If there is no section entitled "History" in the - Document, create one stating - the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item - describing the Modified - Version as stated in the previous sentence. - - - - - - Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a - Transparent copy of the - Document, and likewise the - network locations given in the Document for previous versions it - was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. You - may omit a network location for a work that was published at - least four years before the Document itself, or if the - original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. - - - - - - In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", - preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all - the substance and tone of each of the contributor - acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. - - - - - - Preserve all the Invariant - Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text - and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not - considered part of the section titles. - - - - - - Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may - not be included in the Modified - Version. - - - - - - Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to - conflict in title with any Invariant Section. - - - - - - If the Modified Version includes - new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no - material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate - some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their - titles to the list of Invariant - Sections in the Modified - Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from - any other section titles. - - - - You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains - nothing but endorsements of your Modified - Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer - review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the - authoritative definition of a standard. - - - - You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up - to 25 words as a Back-Cover - Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of - Front-Cover Text and one of - Back-Cover Text may be added by - (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text - for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by - the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; - but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the - previous publisher that added the old one. - - - - The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give - permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply - endorsement of any Modified Version - . - - - - - - 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS - - - You may combine the Document with - other documents released under this License, under the terms defined - in section 4 above for modified - versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the - Invariant Sections of all of the - original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined - work in its license notice. - - - - The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and - multiple identical Invariant - Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are - multiple Invariant Sections with - the same name but different contents, make the title of each such - section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of - the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a - unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the - list of Invariant Sections in the - license notice of the combined work. - - - - In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" - in the various original documents, forming one section entitled - "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", - and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections - entitled "Endorsements." - - - - - - 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS - - - You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released - under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License - in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the - collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for - verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. - - - - You may extract a single document from such a collection, and - distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a - copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this - License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that - document. - - - - - - 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS - - - A compilation of the Document or - its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or - works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not - as a whole count as a Modified - Version of the Document, - provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. - Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this License does not - apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being - thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the - Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies - of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the - entire aggregate, the Document's - Cover Texts may be placed on - covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise - they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. - - - - - - 8. TRANSLATION - - - Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may - distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations - requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may - include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the - original versions of these Invariant - Sections. You may include a translation of this License - provided that you also include the original English version of this - License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the - original English version of this License, the original English version - will prevail. - - - - - - 9. TERMINATION - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided - for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense - or distribute the Document is - void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this - License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from - you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long - as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - - 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE - - - The Free - Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the - GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions - will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in - detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. - - - - Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version - number. If the Document specifies - that a particular numbered version of this License "or any later - version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and - conditions either of that specified version or of any later version - that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Document does - not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. - - - - - - Addendum - - - To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of - the License in the document and put the following copyright and - license notices just after the title page: - - - - Copyright © YEAR YOUR NAME. - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or - any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the - Invariant Sections being LIST - THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover - Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy - of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free - Documentation License. - - - - If you have no Invariant - Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" instead of saying - which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write "no - Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise - for Back-Cover Texts. - - - - If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we - recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of - free software license, such as the GNU General Public - License, to permit their use in free software. - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/CPULoad.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/CPULoad.png deleted file mode 100644 index 02ecb68..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/CPULoad.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/MEMLoad.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/MEMLoad.png deleted file mode 100644 index e246356..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/MEMLoad.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/NETLoad.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/NETLoad.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8746df8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/NETLoad.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/SWAPLoad.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/SWAPLoad.png deleted file mode 100644 index f158bf2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/SWAPLoad.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index b4b948b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 54761f2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/anotherclock-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/applet_props_dialog.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/applet_props_dialog.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6e96486..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/applet_props_dialog.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7c3ffd6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index ff71680..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/asclock_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0a6968c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-offline-25-20.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png deleted file mode 100644 index dd7ef89..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-ac-online-25-20.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8799d59..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-graph.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index ae35e61..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8799d59..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index f8c85c4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4e41e54..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-messages.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png deleted file mode 100644 index ff2e0aa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/battery-applet-properties-readout.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/bg-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/bg-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index d1d4dc5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/bg-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border1.png deleted file mode 100644 index f61546e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8cbca38..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/border2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cal-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cal-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2c20749..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cal-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calday.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calday.png deleted file mode 100644 index d4de450..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calday.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calmonth.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calmonth.png deleted file mode 100644 index c775132..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calmonth.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calweek.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calweek.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9004633..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calweek.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calyear.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calyear.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2343ff2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/calyear.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdapplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdapplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index fadd898..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdapplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdplayer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdplayer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index ff28820..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cdplayer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 25d7366..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index ec8f51d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_characters.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_characters.png deleted file mode 100644 index 17424f5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/charpick_characters.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9b8ac52..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f54e4ef..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5f2ceb1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clock_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2b223ff..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png deleted file mode 100644 index d586bd9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail-prefs-theme.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 76852e1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/clockmail_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/control-center.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/control-center.png deleted file mode 100644 index fbf27c1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/control-center.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8d77df1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3a8fcb3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9cf3a3a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 02ecb68..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpuload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumem-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumem-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5bfda95..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumem-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5bfda95..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/cpumemusage-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/create_launcher.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/create_launcher.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9ae95d0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/create_launcher.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custicon.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custicon.png deleted file mode 100644 index 16959f4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custicon.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custom-view.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custom-view.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6e1a625..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/custom-view.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7f838fb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide.png deleted file mode 100644 index 579668e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/desk-guide.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 14fdb3f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 94f381f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-advanced-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2cf2cb8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-geometry-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 27c5011..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties-tasks-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0ada2f8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 92740c8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/deskguide-tasklist-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6113804..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 64195e3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskusage-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7a727bf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 013d8ea..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/diskuse-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer.png deleted file mode 100644 index 11237cc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_open.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_open.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3cf53f5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_open.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1109619..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drawer_properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7f05bbe..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2e26412..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drive.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png deleted file mode 100644 index 613fd33..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_all.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1ad7105..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_floppy.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index d401eb4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png deleted file mode 100644 index 64e292b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/drivemount_applet_tooltip.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_applets.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_applets.png deleted file mode 100644 index 023d789..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_applets.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_menu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_menu.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7347ad7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_menu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_panel.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_panel.png deleted file mode 100644 index af05444..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/example_panel.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fifteen_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fifteen_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5d48338..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fifteen_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fileprops.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fileprops.png deleted file mode 100644 index d548f45..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fileprops.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 36a1788..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8ed016e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/fish_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 84afc9d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 929e356..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 175fd1d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-4.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-4.png deleted file mode 100644 index 45d66bb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-5.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-5.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5fcfd20..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-5.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-6.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-6.png deleted file mode 100644 index 484eca4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-6.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-desk.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-desk.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1b7a3d6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full-desk.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0b0f043..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/full.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalc-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalc-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8ba188d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalc-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalcfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalcfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index eaf5dc4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcalcfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcc-session.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcc-session.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3ac301f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcc-session.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccalf.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccalf.png deleted file mode 100644 index 37f55c4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccalf.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdef.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdef.png deleted file mode 100644 index a19d238..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdef.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index e08bf71..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccappdefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialog.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialog.png deleted file mode 100644 index a377558..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialog.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialogs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialogs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7a1851d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccdialogs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccedit.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccedit.png deleted file mode 100644 index 601151f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccedit.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcchints.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcchints.png deleted file mode 100644 index bc25600..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcchints.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmdi.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmdi.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7b334e4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmdi.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmime.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmime.png deleted file mode 100644 index d77df7c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccmime.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsession-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsession-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index c586b3b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsession-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsessopt.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsessopt.png deleted file mode 100644 index 308566e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsessopt.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9e2d4cd..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 33bdf98..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccsound2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccstartup.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccstartup.png deleted file mode 100644 index c88a4eb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccstartup.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccurl.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccurl.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3d50230..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gccurl.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-favorites.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-favorites.png deleted file mode 100644 index fb8548c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-favorites.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-search.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-search.png deleted file mode 100644 index d71eba7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-search.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-simple.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-simple.png deleted file mode 100644 index b53153f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gcolorsel-simple.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index f04840d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-spell.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-spell.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1614f68..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdict-spell.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdictmain.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdictmain.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2f73345..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdictmain.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index b641d7b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree.png deleted file mode 100644 index b18fc2a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfree.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfreemain.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfreemain.png deleted file mode 100644 index 77466f9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gdiskfreemain.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gedit-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gedit-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 57042fc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gedit-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 306979b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0606bce..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/geyes_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-another.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-another.png deleted file mode 100644 index 99d8556..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-another.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-badblocks.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-badblocks.png deleted file mode 100644 index ce59ee5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-badblocks.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-formatting.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-formatting.png deleted file mode 100644 index 24d939e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-formatting.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9f96220..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodisk.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodisk.png deleted file mode 100644 index bc79f72..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodisk.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodos.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodos.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1718473..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-nodos.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-qferror.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-qferror.png deleted file mode 100644 index e75edef..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-qferror.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-successful.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-successful.png deleted file mode 100644 index f53d192..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-successful.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-verifying.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-verifying.png deleted file mode 100644 index 87ecfcc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-verifying.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-write-protected.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-write-protected.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6a5cf02..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-write-protected.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-writeprotected.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-writeprotected.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6a5cf02..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppy-writeprotected.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppyfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppyfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0abee4a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfloppyfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-filterwin.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-filterwin.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6ab14ac..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-filterwin.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-mainshot.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-mainshot.png deleted file mode 100644 index eaf5dc4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-mainshot.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-shotmain.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-shotmain.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3f43831..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontsel-shotmain.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontselfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontselfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2f600f7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gfontselfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_add_list.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_add_list.png deleted file mode 100644 index db48777..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_add_list.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0c39977..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index d712701..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5001fa8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gkb_edit_keymap.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glessfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glessfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index f7f233f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glessfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glob_pref_anim.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glob_pref_anim.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5f91cf5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/glob_pref_anim.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-drawer.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-drawer.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5167f2d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-drawer.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-launch.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-launch.png deleted file mode 100644 index 964707a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-launch.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-log.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-log.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0690844..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-log.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2a68c72..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 07f48db..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-menu2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-misc.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-misc.png deleted file mode 100644 index fde3c31..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config-misc.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6deb401..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/global-config.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc1.png deleted file mode 100644 index b0645f5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc_move.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc_move.png deleted file mode 100644 index e82fc0a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmc_move.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 79516a2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 12d4ca9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9e6fc46..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops4.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops4.png deleted file mode 100644 index c03373a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops5.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops5.png deleted file mode 100644 index b5fce69..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops5.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops6.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops6.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7dc0ade..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gmcprops6.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-logo-large.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-logo-large.png deleted file mode 100644 index deabaf9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-logo-large.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 72037a0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager.png deleted file mode 100644 index 18b5366..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-pager.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-panel.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-panel.png deleted file mode 100644 index b2ab51e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-panel.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-startup.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-startup.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9d4b812..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnome-startup.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index f903b80..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index d333660..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gnotes-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/grun.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/grun.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0e73890..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/grun.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-gsearch.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-gsearch.png deleted file mode 100644 index b7e6186..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-gsearch.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-locate.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-locate.png deleted file mode 100644 index ffce73d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-locate.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-mainwin.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-mainwin.png deleted file mode 100644 index ffca3f7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-mainwin.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-result.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-result.png deleted file mode 100644 index adc5164..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-result.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-results.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-results.png deleted file mode 100644 index adc5164..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtool-results.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtoolfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtoolfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index c3a659a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gsearchtoolfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-advanced.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-advanced.png deleted file mode 100644 index b7f51ac..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-advanced.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-preferences.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-preferences.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8677c00..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdown-preferences.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdownfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdownfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index b2b5116..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gshutdownfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7f4c791..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-param.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-param.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8de9013..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-param.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-text.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-text.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2cbea88..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchart-text.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchartfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchartfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7f4c791..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gstripchartfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5c86bf0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd.png deleted file mode 100644 index b262428..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtcd.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_mainwin.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_mainwin.png deleted file mode 100644 index 84f0921..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_mainwin.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_prefswin.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_prefswin.png deleted file mode 100644 index c14c52b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gtt_prefswin.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gttfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gttfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index d000755..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gttfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-cpuinfo.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-cpuinfo.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8876e65..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-cpuinfo.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-diskinfo.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-diskinfo.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9adf8be..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-diskinfo.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index 69fc854..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-memoryinfo.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-memoryinfo.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4bfdb57..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/guname-memoryinfo.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gunamefig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gunamefig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 03f6990..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gunamefig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index c323734..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-menuitems.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-menuitems.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3859659..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gw-menuitems.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6db19f5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 41dd306..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_weather.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_weather.png deleted file mode 100644 index 34f5212..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gweather_weather.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gwfig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gwfig.png deleted file mode 100644 index b1d7ded..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/gwfig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/hide-button.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/hide-button.png deleted file mode 100644 index b6690d6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/hide-button.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/idetool.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/idetool.png deleted file mode 100644 index c4259f3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/idetool.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/jbc_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/jbc_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5c1ab4f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/jbc_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keybell.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keybell.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3167635..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keybell.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboard-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboard-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1afe174..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboard-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboardd-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboardd-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8ab0ae5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/keyboardd-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index e5bc538..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_advprops.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_advprops.png deleted file mode 100644 index a680683..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_advprops.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4daf2cc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_advanced.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png deleted file mode 100644 index 88cc0bf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_properties_basic.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_props.png deleted file mode 100644 index fb5059d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launcher_props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launchers.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launchers.png deleted file mode 100644 index 54707b8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/launchers.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/life-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/life-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9013fa4..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/life-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/link.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/link.png deleted file mode 100644 index ed4fd94..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/link.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index d809072..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 59f023f..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 92ec439..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1353983..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/loadavg-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/locbar.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/locbar.png deleted file mode 100644 index 81d02d0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/locbar.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/login.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/login.png deleted file mode 100644 index f06d318..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/login.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/logout-screen.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/logout-screen.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8a69bca..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/logout-screen.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8a8cc00..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png deleted file mode 100644 index b33b454..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailbox.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png deleted file mode 100644 index f9cd512..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mailcheck-properties-mailcheck.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mainmenu_properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mainmenu_properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3d88aad..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mainmenu_properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 87d5d6d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 08dd941..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index fbc74a7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index e246356..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/memload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index 71d1418..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu_properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu_properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 579665e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menu_properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menueditor.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menueditor.png deleted file mode 100644 index 975edf1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/menueditor.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 662810d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index c3b00ba..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command.png deleted file mode 100644 index 319884d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 662810d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-command_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander-general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander-general.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6034b85..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander-general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 662810d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6034b85..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mini-commander_settings_general.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixapplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixapplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index afdd1d5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixapplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5cf60ff..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mixer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mm-button.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mm-button.png deleted file mode 100644 index bb881ca..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mm-button.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-advpref.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-advpref.png deleted file mode 100644 index a2a2f93..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-advpref.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index d7993e8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights.png deleted file mode 100644 index a1079b6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/modemlights.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mouse-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mouse-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4592d5a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/mouse-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index d800933..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4f324e8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index aac4146..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8746df8..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/netload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/noread.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/noread.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5dd705a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/noread.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/nowrite.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/nowrite.png deleted file mode 100644 index 34bb7c1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/nowrite.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f7a7d1c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index aa8e2dd..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_themes.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_themes.png deleted file mode 100644 index ba27775..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/odometer_themes.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/open_with.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/open_with.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1c269bd..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/open_with.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel-prop.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel-prop.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5e6c036..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel-prop.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_applets.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_applets.png deleted file mode 100644 index 023d789..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_applets.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_lockbut.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_lockbut.png deleted file mode 100644 index 68b2bc3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_lockbut.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_logoutbut.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_logoutbut.png deleted file mode 100644 index 326cdc9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_logoutbut.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_back.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_back.png deleted file mode 100644 index 87d9d13..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_back.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_edge.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_edge.png deleted file mode 100644 index 25191cc..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_props_edge.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runbutton.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runbutton.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7ced3c0..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runbutton.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runprogram.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runprogram.png deleted file mode 100644 index 35bcefa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_runprogram.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_swallow.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_swallow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2040b97..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/panel_swallow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 68649af..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0e9d1ac..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index a199432..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part.png deleted file mode 100644 index ea1c99b..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/part.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-1.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-1.png deleted file mode 100644 index aa58ca3..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-2.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-2.png deleted file mode 100644 index c17d1ff..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-3.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-3.png deleted file mode 100644 index c6d8b2d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-4.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-4.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0af06a9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player-4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player.png deleted file mode 100644 index 07030f9..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/player.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/prefmenu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/prefmenu.png deleted file mode 100644 index aed87d5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/prefmenu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-applet-props.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-applet-props.png deleted file mode 100644 index abb2fcb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-applet-props.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 17c7cd7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index c93f2fe..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/printer-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8481d8c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8626842..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/quicklaunch_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/rubberband.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/rubberband.png deleted file mode 100644 index 40770b1..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/rubberband.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_program.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_program.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5711c4e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_program.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_swallow.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_swallow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 34f1600..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/run_swallow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/salva.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/salva.png deleted file mode 100644 index 99d8556..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/salva.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensave-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensave-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index a1d60e7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensave-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensaver-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensaver-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8a73ed5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/screensaver-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sidebar.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sidebar.png deleted file mode 100644 index ed2fda5..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sidebar.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sound-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sound-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index a0c37ad..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/sound-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9de2609..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index e9f3fcb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png deleted file mode 100644 index 52bce35..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_applet_themes.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png deleted file mode 100644 index bdd07b7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/soundmonitor_manager_server.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/start-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/start-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 681197a..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/start-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/status_dock.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/status_dock.png deleted file mode 100644 index 89691bf..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/status_dock.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-default.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-default.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8ade5aa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-default.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png deleted file mode 100644 index d2d4d4e..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-greyed.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 65e2af7..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index f158bf2..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/swapload-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4360a48..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png deleted file mode 100644 index ec7a693..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties-size.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1ee2309..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-properties.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png deleted file mode 100644 index f5a8d3c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tasklist-rightclick-fig.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index fde3313..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-select.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-select.png deleted file mode 100644 index 962a8fa..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/theme-select.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/thispanel.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/thispanel.png deleted file mode 100644 index 522409d..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/thispanel.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 11785ce..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_coredump.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_coredump.png deleted file mode 100644 index d609184..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_coredump.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png deleted file mode 100644 index 71b2746..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_loadaverage.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_settings.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_settings.png deleted file mode 100644 index cb5c185..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/tickastat_settings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/trackeditor.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/trackeditor.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2b07a37..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/trackeditor.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/url-capplet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/url-capplet.png deleted file mode 100644 index c7fa417..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/url-capplet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmenu.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmenu.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1c3e802..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmenu.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmusic.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmusic.png deleted file mode 100644 index f8c03d6..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/viewmusic.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png deleted file mode 100644 index 991d669..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet-prefs.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index ef4f158..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/webcontrol-applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/whereami_applet.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/whereami_applet.png deleted file mode 100644 index 60f87fb..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/whereami_applet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-add.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-add.png deleted file mode 100644 index dfbd42c..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-add.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-main.png b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-main.png deleted file mode 100644 index 70a5c96..0000000 Binary files a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/figures/wm-main.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/glossary.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/glossary.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ec27d20..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/glossary.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1715 +0,0 @@ - - - - - 2000 - 2001 - Alexander Kirillov, Kirrily Robert - - - - 2001 - Manuel de Vega Barreiro y grupo Gnome-es (traducción al Castellano) - - - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks - are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation - Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. - - - Se permite la copia, distribución y/o modificación de este - documento bajo los términos de la licencia de documentación libre - de GNU, versión 1.1 o cualquier versión posterior publicada por la - fundación para el software libre; sin secciones invariantes, sin - portada, y sin contraportada. - Una copia de esta licencia esta disponible en la fundación para el - software libre y puede leerse en - linea. - - - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por las compañías para diferencias sus - productos y servicios son reclamados como marcas registradas. Allí - donde estos nombres aparezcan en la documentación de Gnome, y cuando - los miembros del proyecto de documentación Gnome hayan sido informados - de esas marcas registradas, los nombres estarán impresos en mayúsculas - o como nombres propios. - - - - - - - Glossary - - - - -A - - - Aplique («Applet») - - -Una aplicación que se ejecuta en una pequeña ventana en el panel. - - - - - - - Lanzador de aplicaciones - - -Un boton en el panel que lanza una aplicacion o ejecuta un comando cuando se -pulsa. - - - - - - - ASCII - - -Codigo estandar americano para intercambio de infromacion; un estandar que -describe un juego de caracteres y los codigos que tiene asignados -(esto es secuencias de ceros y unos, o numeros). Los caracteres ASCII -incluyen el alfabeto latinos, los simbolos de puntuación comunes, algunos -simbolos especiales que se encuentran en el teclado como el & y el $ -y algunos caracteres de control, esto es codigos usados para avisar del -final de una linea y del final del fichero; No estan inlcuidos los caracteres -acentuados. Los codigos correspondientes van del 0 al 127. - - -Cuando vea en algu lado una mencion a un fichero ASCII o -texto ASCII, indicanormalmente que se trata de un -un fichero de texto plano que solo usa los simbolos definidos en -ASCII estandar, sin necesidad de usar informacion de formato como -tipografias. - - -ASCII esta definido como un estandar el instituto nacional de estandares -americano (ANSI); la referencia oficial es ANSI X3.4-1986. -Puede encontrar una copia en muchos sitios de Internet, por ejemplo en -la - pagina web CNET. - - - - - - - - - Anexo - - -cualquier fichero que acompaña un mensaje de correo electronico en un -formato especial que permite ser visto o salvado en el disco duro de -forma independiente de la parte principal del mensaje. - - - - - - -B - - - Segundo plano («background») - - -Hacer que un programa se ejecute sin ninguna salida visible; poner un -programa que este ya en ejecucion en segundo plano. - - -En la linea de comandos de Unix, el caracter & -añadido a un comando hara que este comando se ejecute en segundo plano. - - - - - - - Binario - - -Un programa ejecutable, llamado asi porque el fichero que contiene el -programa consiste en digitos binarios legibles por la maquina, esto es -unos y ceros. - - - - - - - - Bit - - -La minima parte posible una unidad de informacion, un digito que puede -valer 0 o 1. Decir que un fichero tiene una longitud de n bites es -equivalente a decir que puede escribirse como una secuencia de n ceros -y unos. - - - - - - - Byte u octeto - - 8 bits, esto es una secuencia de -8 ceros y unos. Hay 256 posibles secuencias, asi que tambien se puede -decir que un Byte representa un numero en el rango de 0 a 255. - - -El byte es el bloque basico para contruir sistemas de ficheros: -todos los sistemas de ficheros estan compuestos de bytes. Para los -ficheros de textos, cada byte representa un simbolo (vease la -definicion de cofificar para mas -informacion). - - - - - - - - - -C - - - Caché - - -Un area de almacenamiento transitorio en RAM o disco duro. Muchos programas -usan la caché para almacenar los ficheros accedidos recientemente u otros -elementos. - - - - - - - Juego de caracteres («charset») - - - -Una coleccio de simbolos, como letras de uno o mas alfabetos, digitos, -simbolos de puntuacion, etc. Habitualmente usados conjuntamente con -una codificacion. - - - - - - - - Portapapeles («Clipboard») - - -la memoria intermedia temporal en la que se copia texo u otros datos, -para usarlos mas tarde pegandolos en una posicion diferente. -La mayoria de las aplicaciones soportan el portapapeles bien a traves -de la funcionalidad cortar y pegar del raton del -sistema de ventanas X, bien a traves -de menus especializados u otras interfaces. - - - - - - Command line options - - - Parameters or arguments given on the UNIX command line after a - program name, which tell the program how to run. For instance, in - the command ls -l the -l is - a command line option telling the ls program to - produce a long listing. - - - - - - Cursor - - - A highlighted or animated icon which indicates the current - position of the mouse on the screen, or the position where - keyboard input will occur in a text window. - - - - - - - - - -D - - - Daemon - - - A background process providing basic system or network services. - - - - - - Desktop - - - The visible screen area, on which windows, icons, and other graphical - items may be placed. - - - - - - - - - Desktop environment - - - Software which provides graphical user interface for users - desktop. In addtition to capabilities provided by a window manager (that is, ability - to move, resize, and hide windows), a desktop environment - usually also includes such elements of GUI as a File Manager - with drag-and-drop capabilities, Panel used for keeping your - favorite applications and applets, and a set of other - utilities. Most popular desktop environments for UNIX - include GNOME, KDE and CDE (soon to be replaced by - GNOME). - - - - - - - Device - - - A piece of hardware with which the system interacts, such as a - hard disk, modem, or mouse. - - - - - - - - - - Directory - - - A branch within UNIX's hierarchical file system; a - folder containing files or other directories - (called subdirectories). - - - - - - - DNS - - - Domain Name Service; converting domain names (such as - www.gnome.org) into IP addresses such as - 209.116.70.70. If you want to use - domain names, your computer must be configured to connect to - one of DNS servers which would do this conversion. - - - - - - - - - -E - - - Electronic mail (e-mail) - - - A way of exchanging messages between users of computers - connected to a network (local or Internet). - - - - - - - - Encoding - - A correspondence between characters of some character set and character codes, - i.e. internal computer presentation of the symbols. In order to - be able to read a text file, you need to know its character set - and encoding. - - In most encodings, each symbol is represented by one - byte, which is equivalent to a - number from 0 to 255; the characters corresponding to codes 0 - to 127 coincide with the ASCII - standard, while the characters with codes higher than 127 vary - between encodings. For Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and similar - character sets, each symbol is represented by 2 bytes. - - The most common encoding is - iso-8859-1; in addition to ASCII - characters, it also contains accented letters covering most of - Western European languages. - - - - - Environment variable - - A global setting, or configuration - parameter, which is available to all applications. Each - environment variable has a name and a value (which usually is a - string of symbols or an integer number). Any application you run - can access any of the environment variables. For example, there - is a standard environment variable HOME, whose - value is the user's home directory (for example, - /home/joe), and any application which wants - to create a file in your home directory uses this variable to - find out what your home directory is. - - To view all currenlty defined environment variables, use - the command printenv (provided that you have - GNU shell utils package installed). To modify a value of - environment variable, use the command - export - NAME= VALUE; - if you are using bash shell or setenv - NAME VALUE; if you are - using csh or tcsh shell. - - - - - - Ethernet - - - A protocol for network communication, developed in the 1980s and - commonly used for Local Area Networks (LANs) and other network - communication. - - - - - - - - - - - -F - - - File - - Any piece of information (text, graphics, executable) put - together and given a name. All the information you have on the - hard drive is arranged as a collection of files. - - - - - - - Filesystem - - A collection of all the files and directories on a system - arranged in a tree-like hierarchy. - - - - - - - - Foreground - - - To run a program so that its output is visible to the user, or to - bring a previously backgrounded program to the foreground. - Programs running in the foreground can display output and receive - input from the user. - - - - - - - - - File Transfer Protocol (FTP) - - A protocol for exchanging files over the Internet or local network. There is a - number of utilities based on this protocol, such as - gFTP; you can also use command - ftp on the command line. In addition, most - file managers and Web browsers have built-in FTP capabilities. - - - - - - Free software - - As defined by Free Software Foundation, free software is - software that comes with permission for anyone to use, copy, and - distribute, either verbatim or with modifications, either gratis - or for a fee. In particular, this means that the source code must - be available. - - - This is very close, but not identical, to the notion of Open Source software. Detailed - discussion of this and related topics can be found on Free - Software Foundation's Web page. - - - - - - - - - - - - -G - - GNOME - - - A free desktop environment for UNIX and - UNIX-like operating systems; one of the two leading desktop - environments for Linux (the other one is KDE). For more information, please - visit GNOME - Web site. - - Officially, GNOME stands for GNU Network Object Model - Environment. The only part of this name that really matters is - GNU, which is there to indicate that GNOME is a part of the - larger GNU project. - - - - - - GNU - - - GNU's Not UNIX; a project to develop a complete UNIX-like - operating system which is free - software. Combination of tools and utilities produced - by GNU project with Linux kernel - is widely known under the name Linux operating - system; more accurately, such a system should be - called GNU/Linux. - - - For more information about GNU project, visit its Web page. - - - - - - GNU General Public License - (GPL) - - A software license developed by the Free Software - Foundation. In short, it allows anyone to use, copy, distribute, - or sell the software, in original or modified form, as long as - you distribute the program's source code along with the - binaries, and you distribute them again under the GPL. A copy of - the GPL is included as an appendix to GNOME User's guide. You - can also view GPL on-line on FSF's Web page. - - GPL plays an extremely important role in the free - software movement; almost all of GNU project software, as well - as Linux kernel, is distributed - under GPL. For a detailed discussion of history, ideas and - philosophy related to GPL and free sofware in general, visit - FSF's Web - page. - - - - - - - - - - GIMP Toolkit (GTK) - - - A collection of tools for creating screen widgets - such as scrollbars, menus, checkbuttons, etc. in - applications. GTK is used by all GNOME applications. - - - - - - - - - - -H - - - - Hot Key - - - Hot-keys are keyboard combinations used to do actions on a - computer instead of using the mouse to do the same action. - Hot-keys can speed up computer usage. Also known under the name - keyboard shortcut or keyboard - accelerator. - - - - - - - - HTML - - Hypertext Markup Language; the language in which all the - Web pages in the world are written. HTML can also be used for - e-mails, which allows having nicely formatted e-mails, possibly - including images and links. - - More information about HTML can be found on the Web page - of World Wide Web - Consortium, which is the official maintainer of HTML - standard. - - - - - - HTTP - HTTP - - - Hypertext Transfer Protocol; the protocol by which web pages and - other web-accessible resources are delivered. Whenever you are - browsing the Web, your browser uses HTTP to communicate with the - Web server and request a Web page. - - - HTTP is defined in RFC 1945 - (HTTP 1.0) and RFC 2068 - (HTTP 1.1). - - - - - - - - - -I - - - IDE - - - Intergrated Drive Electronics; an interface for connecting - hard drives and other similar devices to your computer. IDE - is an old interface; nowadays, most drives use an enhanced - version of IDE, EIDE. - - - - - - - Icon - - - A small picture used within a graphical user interface to indicate - a program, file, or other part of a computer system. - - - - - - - - Internet - - Unless you spent the last 20 years on a deserted island, - you probably know what Internet is. But just in case: Internet - is the network of millions of computers all around the world, - connected to each other by some hardware means (cables, wires, - phone lines, communication satellites) and communicating with - each other using some standard protocols. Internet makes it - possible for users of these computers to send and receive - electronic mail, browse the World Wide Web, exchange files (using FTP protocol), remotely login into your - computer from other places (using telnet), and more. - - - - - - - IP address - - A unique address assigned to each computer connected to - the Internet or a local - network. Has the form a.b.c.d, where - a,b,c,d are numbers from 0 to 255, subject to a number of rules - and conventions. - - All communication between computers on the Internet is - based on IP addresses; however, on a properly set up network you - can instead use domain names (such as www.gnome.org), which are - automatically transformed to IP addresses using Domain Name Service (DNS). - - - - - - - - - - - -K - - - - - KDE - - - A desktop environment for - UNIX and UNIX-like operating systems; one of two leading - desktop environments for Linux (the other one is GNOME). For more infrmation visit - KDE Web - site. - - - - - - - Kernel - - The core component of an operating system, responsible for - basic operations such as accessing the files, input/output, - managing the processor and memory resources, etc. All other - tools, utilities, and applications use the kernel. - - - - - - - - - -L - - Linux - - A free (as in GNU GPL) UNIX-like operating system, written in - collaboration by hundreds of developers all around the world, - most of them volunteers. One of the most successful and famous - free software projects. - - Strictly speaking, the name Linux only - applies to the kernel of the - operating system. Most of other tools and utilities necessary - for system functioning came from GNU - project, so the operating system should be properly - called GNU/Linux; however, for convenience - reasons most people use the name Linux for the whole operating - system. - - There is a tremendous amount of information about Linux - available on the Internet; good starting points are www.linux.com, - www.linux.org. There is - also a number of good books about Linux available in bookstores; - if you have a Linux system, you probably also have a lot of Linux - documentaion installed on your system. - - - - - - login - - - The process by which a user authenticates herself to a computer - system, usually by typing in a username and password. - - - - - - - - - - - - -M - - - - - Mail Client - - - An application which a user reads and sends - their e-mail with. Also called Mail User Agent (MUA). - - - - - - Manual page (manpage) - - - A documentation resource commonly provided with UNIX programs. - Manual pages typically contain concise technical listings of - available command line options and - other settings which affect the running of the program. Can be - viewed using GNOME Help Browser or by typing man - commandname on the command - line. - - - - - - - Menu - - - A list of possible actions or options available within a program. - - - - - - MIME type - - - A type of the file, describing what kind of - data and in which format this file contains; for example, MIME - type image/jpeg is used for graphic files - in JPEG format. Used by many applications (such as file - manager) to determine what application should be used to open - or edit a given file. This can be configured using - GNOME Control Center. - - The acronym MIME stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail - Extension, since originally it was used to describe types of - files sent in e-mail. - - - - - - Mount - - - A command instructing the operating system to incorporate - contents of a device (such as a - hard drive or a CD-ROM) into the system's link file system. Requires the device - name (e.g. /dev/cdrom) and the mount point, - i.e. the name of the directory under which the contents of the - device will be shown (e.g., - /mnt/cdrom). You must mount any device - before you can access files on it, and unmount it before - physically disconnnecting or removing the drive. For more - information, see Appendix If you are new to - UNIX in GNOME User's Guide or - manual page for mount. - - - - - - - - Mount point - - - - - - Mouse cursor - - - An small icon (usually an arrow) used to indicate the position - of the mouse on the desktop. - - - - - - - - - - -N - - - Nautilus - - - Nautilus is the next generation file - manager for GNOME being written by Eazel. - - - - - - - - -O - - - Open Source - - - Refers to software for which both the executable files and - the source code can be freely redistributed and re-used in - other products. This term was introduced by Open Source - Intiative; it is very close, but not identical to - the notion of free - software used by the Free software Foundation. - - - - - - - - - -P - - - Partition - - - Hard disks and other similar devices can be - divided into parts which, for all practical - purposes, can be used as separate disks; these parts are - called partitions. For example, you can create partitions of - differrent types (e.g., FAT32 used by - Windows and ext2 used by Linux) on the - same disk, format them independently of each other, and so - on. - - - - - - - - - Password - - - A string of typable characters (letters, numbers, punctuation - marks, etc.) used to authenticate a user's - identity. Required for logging in. - - - - - - - Process ID (PID) - - - The ID number by which the system identifies individual processes. - The first process to run on the system has PID 0. - - - - - - - - - Pixel - - - A single element, or dot, on the computer's - screen. A pixel's colour is made up of a mixture of red, green - and blue light. Screen resolution is measured in pixels. - - - - - - - Pointer - - - - - - Point-to-point protocol (PPP) - - - A protocol allowing a computer to connect to a TCP/IP network via a modem. A PPP - connection allows an ordinary home computer connected to a - telephone line to become a part of the Internet - - - - - - Postscript - - A language for desribing printed pages, developed by - Adobe - Corporation. Can be used to describe both graphics and - text, black and white or color. Postscript is the - de-facto standard for quality printing; almost all printing - in UNIX is done by converting the data to be printed to - Postscript before sending it to printer. If your printer does - not have built-in Postscript capabilities, then your system is - probably configured to convert Postscript to something you - printer can print. - - Postscript files can also be saved to disk; they usually - have extension .ps. There is a number of - utilities for viewing Postscript files, such as - gv or - ggv. - - - - - - Process - - A task run by the operating system. UNIX is a - multitasking sytem, so at any given moment there are many - processes running. Usually, each command or application you - start is run as a new process; some applications may run several - processes. In addition, there is also a number of system - processes which run in the background to ensure proper - functioning of the system. - - Each process has a unique ID number - (PID). You can view the list of all the - processes running on your system using GNOME System - monitor (gtop) or - Ktop. See the documentation for these - applications for more information. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -R - - Resolution - - - A measurement indicating the height and width of the visible - screen of a computer in pixels. - Typical resolutions include 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x1024. - - - - - - Root directory - - - The top level directory of a UNIX file system, containing all - other files and directories. Root directory is denoted by a - single slash (/). - - - - - - - Root (user) - - - The privileged user on a UNIX system; has full control over - the system and all files on it, including those of other - users. Is typically used by system administartor for system - maintenance. - - - - - - - Root window - - - The background of an X11 desktop, in which background images - (wallpaper) or running programs may be displayed. - - - - - - - RPM package - - A file containing in it in a packed form all the files - comprising an application (executable files, documentation, - configuration, etc.), plus some extra information about the - application, such as a brief description and dependency - information. The RPM format makes installing, un-installing, - upgrading, and keeping track of the applications installed on - your system very easy. There is a number of tools available for - working with RPM packages, such as - gnorpm or - Kpackage. For those who prefer the - command line, there is also the rpm command. - See the documentation for these utilities or RPM's Web page for more information. - - - RPM format was developed by Red Hat, Inc; the acronym - RPM stands for RPM Package Manager. - - - - - - - - - -S - - Screen - - - The physical monitor device of a computer, consisting of a cathode - ray tube, liquid crystal display, or similar means of displaying - pixels; the visible picture displayed - on the monitor. - - - - - - Screensaver - - - A program which blanks the screen or displays pretty or - entertaining graphics after a period of inactivity on the - console. Originally intended to prevent burn-in - of images on older cathode-ray tubes, screensavers are now used - primarily for entertainment purposes or to lock an unused - terminal, requiring the user to enter a password to return to the normal - display. - - - - - - Script - - - A program written in an interpreted language, i.e. a language - where the commands are executed one by one as you enter them - (as opposed to compiled languages, in which the whole program - must first be translated into machine codes (compiled) to - create an executable file). By far the most common type of - scripts are shell scripts, which are simply sequences of shell commands. Other popular types of - scripts are javascripts used in Web pages, perl scripts and - Tcl/Tk scripts. - - - - - - - - SCSI - - - Small Computer System Interface; an interface for connecting - various computer components, such as hard drives. Works - faster than the more common IDE - interface, but is more expensive, so it is used mostly on - servers. - - - - - - - - Segmentation fault (segfault) - - - A program crash. More precisely, this is what happens when a - program tries to access resources which do not belong to it; - in such a case, for security reasons the operating system - immediately kills the offending program. Segfaults are - almost always caused by bugs in the program. - - - - - - - - Shell - - - Any of a number of UNIX programs which interpret commands typed - by the user before passing them to the operating system and - provide other features such as command history, aliasing, and - scripting. Examples include bash and - tcsh. Shells are often displayed in a terminal window. - - - - - - - SMTP - - - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol; a protocol used for exchanging - electronic mail messages between machines on a network. - - - - - - - - Spam - - - Useless e-mail. Spam normally comes in forms of - chain-letters and advertisements for websites or services. - - - - - - - Symbolic link (symlink) - - - A file of special type which contains no data but instead, points - to another file or directory. Equivalent - to a shortcut under Windows. - - - - - - System administrator - - - The person responsible for administration and maintenance of a - computer system. - - - - - - - - - - - -T - - Tar archive (tarball) - - - A file created using the tar (Tape ARchive) - program, which conglomerates multiple files, or even a whole - directory tree, into one file for easy storage or transfer. These - archives are often compressed using the gzip - program and given a filename extension of - .tar.gz. - - - - - - TCP/IP - - - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol; pair of - protocols used for all communication between computers on - the Internet and most local networks. TCP/IP serves as a - basis for higher level protocols (FTP, telnet, SMTP, - …): all information sent from one computer to another - on the Internet, be it an e-mail message or a Web page, is - sent as a collection of TCP/IP packets. - - - - - - - Telnet - - A protocol allowing logging into your computer account - via Internet or local network from another computer; also, the - command using this protocol. For more - information, see manual page for telnet. - - - - - - Terminal - - Originally, a physical device, a monitor capable of - showing text output with a connected keyboard. Nowadays, mostly - used to refer to a window on your screen which emulates one of - these terminals and provides a command line prompt for entering - commands and running text-based applications. - - - - - Theme - - - An integrated collection of graphical elements intended to give - the desktop a certain look and feel. Common theme components - include matching backgrounds, icons, and window decorations. - - The look of GNOME desktop is determined by 2 themes: a - GTK theme, which determines the look of application menus, - toolbars and other widgets, and window manager theme, which - determines window borders, buttons, and window title font. - - - - - - - - - - -U - - - Unicode - - - A character set which strives - to include all symbols in all human alphabets, and all special - symbol used by people. It is a work in progress; the latest - version of Unicode (3.0) includes 49,194 characters and covers - languages ranging from English to Chinese to Cherokee. For - more information, see Unicode - Consortium Web site. - - - - - - - UNIX - - - An operating system originally developed at Bell Labs in the early - 1970s by Ken Thompson and Dennis Ritchie; any of a large number of - operating systems sharing many features with the original UNIX - operating system, such as Sun's Solaris - or IBM's AIX. - - For legal reasons, operating systems such as - FreeBSD and - Linux can not be called UNIX, but - they do share all important features with UNIX systems; thus, - they are commonly called UNIX-like. - - - - - - - USB - - Universal Serial Bus; an interface for connecting - various peripherals, from keyboard to digital cameras, to the - computer. - - - - - - - - User - - - An actual person who uses a computer system, identified by a - unique username, or a virtual - person or role similarly identified by a unique - username. Virtual users may be used to run daemons or other software. - - - - - - Username - - - A string of alphanumeric characters uniquely identifying a user of a computer system. Most usernames - are based on the user's real name, so Mary Smith might have the - username mary or msmith. - - - - - - - - Uniform Resource Locator (URL) - - An address, or location, of - a document. Most common URL types are a Web address (such as - http://www.gnome.org), a file on a - FTP server (e.g., - ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub), or a file - on your own local system (e.g., - file:/usr/doc/). Formal definition - of URL (which is a subset of more general notion, Uniform - Resource Identifier (URI)) is given in RFC2396, - (beware: as any formal deinition, this one is way too - technical for greater majority of users). - - - - - - - - - -V - - - Virtual desktop - - - Some window managers allow - the user to have several virtual desktops;you - could have application windows open and working on all of - them, even though at every moment, only one of the virtual - desktops is shown on your screen. Similar to having several - physical desks in your office so that you can put your - papers on all of them, even though you can only work at one - desk at a time - - - - - - - - - - -W - - - Widget - - - A single element of a graphical user interface, such as a button, - scrollbar, or text input area. - - - - - - Window - - - The interface element used to display most applications under a - windowing GUI such as X Window - System. Windows typically consist of a main area in - which typing or other work occurs, a title bar (which may - contain buttons to minimize, maximize or close the window), - window-specific menus, and a scroll bar down either side of the - window if required. - - - - - - Gestor de ventanas - - -Un programa que amplia las funcionalidades del -sistema de ventanas X proporcionando - - - A program which extends the capabilities of the X Window System by providing - most of the user-friendly widgets - people expect from a windowing system, such as window borders, - buttons and menus, ways of moving, resizing, and hiding - windows, placing the icons on your desktop, and so on. Examples of - window managers include Sawfish and - Windowmaker. - - - - - - Espacio de trabajo(«Workspace») - - -Lo mismo que el escritorio virtual. - Same as virtual desktop. - - - - - - - - La telaraña de paginas de Internet. «World Wide Web» (WWW) - - -La parte nas visible de Internet; -la telaraña de paginas de Internet esta formada por todas las paginas -web disponibles en Internet y todos los enlaces entre ellas. - - - - - - - - - - - -X - - - Sistema de ventanas X - - -Un sistema grafico comunmente usado en los sistemas operativos Unix; -tambien conocido como X11 o simplemente X. X es responsable de situar -las ventanas, iconos, texto, y otros elementos graficos en la pantalla. -X se usa siempre en combinacion con un -gestor de ventanas, que proporciona -las funciones de lato nivel, como mover, minimizar, y maximizar las -ventanas. - - - - - - X11 - - - - - XFree86 - - -Una implementacion del sistema de ventanas X -de libre distribucion que se ejecuta en los sistemas operativos de tipo -Unix ( y en OS/2). Para mas informacion, visite la -pagina web XFree86. - - - - - - - Servidor X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gmenu.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gmenu.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bba9885..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gmenu.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,259 +0,0 @@ - - -Edición del Menú Principal - -Introducción - - - - -Menú Principal - -Edición - - -El Menú Principal es un repositorio para sus aplicaciones y podrá localizarlo -en el panel. El Menú Principal se carga conjuntamente con GNOME pero puede -configurarse para que se adapte a sus hábitos de trabajo. El Menú Principal se -divide en tres subdirectorios principales: Programas (menús de sistema), -Favoritos (menús de usuario) y Apliques (apliques del panel). -Dispone del Editor de Menú para añadir nuevas aplicaciones al -Menú Principal pero no podrá añadir aplicaciones al menú de sistemas a no -ser que sea el administrador del sistema («root»). En esta sección aprenderá -como añadir aplicaciones al Menú Principal. - - - - - - -Uso del editor de menús - - -El Editor de Menús es una herramienta de configuración del Menú Principal. -El Editor de Menús se arranca pulsando en el lanzador del Menú Principal -o en el submenú Programas del menú global (el menú de la huella de un pie) -y seleccionando - - -Configuración - -Editor de menús - - -en el - -Menú principal - -. - - - -
-El Editor de menú - - -El editor de menús - - - -
- - - -El Editor de menú se divide en dos secciones principales. La parte -izquierda contiene el menú tal y como se muestra actualmente. La parte -derecha contiene un formulario con dos etiquetas que permite añadir nuevas -aplicaciones al menú. - - - - -En el árbol de menús del lado izquierdo podrás apreciar la existencia -de dos listas principales de menús, una para favoritos (menús de usuario) y -otra para programas (menús de sistema). Los menús de usuario son los del -usuario actual y los menús de sistema están definidos para todos los -usuarios del sistema. Las aplicaciones incluidas de serie se encuentran -todas en los menús de sistema. - - - - -Dentro de la lista de menús de la izquierda podrá abrir y cerrar -carpetas y ver lo que hay en el menú actual pulsando en el -pequeño símbolo más al lado de los menús. - - - - -Añadir un nuevo elemento al menú - - -Menú Principal -Añadir un nuevo elemento al menú - - -Si quiere añadir un nuevo elemento al menú pulse el botón - -Nuevo elemento - -en la barra de herramientas. -Un nuevo elemento de menú se añadira allí donde el menú este resaltado. -Si no tiene ningún menú seleccionado, se colocara en la parte superior -del árbol de menús. Seleccione el nuevo elemento y complete la información del -elemento en el formulario de la derecha. Una vez que complete la información -pulse el botón - -Guardar - -y el nuevo elemento se insertará -en la posición resaltada del árbol de menús de la derecha. Puede entonces -moverlo pulsando los botones 'hacia arriba' y 'hacia abajo' en la -barra de herramientas. También puede moverse un elemento de menú arrastrándolo -con el botón izquierdo del ratón. - - - -IMPORTANTE - - -Tenga en cuenta que no puede cambiar los menús de sistema a no ser halla iniciado -la sesión como «root». Un usuario normal solo podrá añadir, borrar, y editar -los menús de usuario. - - - - - -Arrastrar y soltar en el menú principal - - -En el Editor de Menú - El editor de menús soporta la funcionalidad de -arrastrar y soltar que hará más fácil su trabajo. Puede arrastrar aplicaciones -hasta las carpetas donde quiera que residan o reorganizar sus carpetas -completamente. - - - - -Hasta el Panel - Si quiere colocar un elemento de menú en el panel, puede arrastrar -y soltar desde el menú hasta el Panel y este colocará allí un lanzador con todas -la propiedades necesarias. Si prefiere no usar la función arrastrar y soltar -puede también pulsar el botón derecho sobre el elemento de menú y elegir del menú - -desplegable - -la opción - -Añadir este lanzador al panel - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide-es.omf b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide-es.omf deleted file mode 100644 index b837b3f..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide-es.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Guía de usuario de GNOME - - - GNOME|Núcleo del Escritorio - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 8cd8882..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnome-users-guide.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,208 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -]> - - - - - - Guía de usuario de GNOME - - - Guía de usuario de GNOME - Equipo de documentación - - - - - - - Esta es la versión oficial 1.4.0-1 de la guía de usuario de GNOME. - - - - - - 1.0 - - - 03.12.2001 - - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Eazel Inc., - Helix Code, Inc., - Red Hat, Inc., - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban, - Eric Baudais, - James Cope, - John Ellis, - John Fleck, - Tom Gilbert, - Kenny Graunke, - Telsa Gwynne, - Michael Hall, - Vera Horiuchi, - Alexander Kirillov, - Emese Kovacs, - Gregory Leblanc, - Chris Lyttle, - Oliver Maruhn, - David Mason, - Dan Mueth, - Spiros Papadimitriou, - Arjan Scherpenisse, - Aaron Weber, - David A. Wheeler - - - - - - 2001 - -Manuel de Vega y grupo Gnome-es de Linux Landia (traducción al Castellano). - - - - - -Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, - no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license - can be found here. - -Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and - services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any - GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members - of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps - or initial caps. - - - - -Esta nota sobre los derechos de uso no se traduce por motivos legales. Para mas información vease - - - - - - - - - - -&WHEELER; - -&WM; - -&PANEL; - -&GMENU; - -&DESKTOP; - -&NAUTILUS; - -&GNOMECC; - -&GNOME-APPLETS; - -&NEWBIES; - -&AUTHORS; - - -&FDL; - -&GPL; - -&LICENCIAS; -&FDLES; -&GPLES; - -&TRADUCCION; - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnomecc.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnomecc.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 26a4924..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gnomecc.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1041 +0,0 @@ - - - - El Centro de Control de GNOME - - Introducción - -El Centro de Control de GNOME le permite configurar diversas partes de su sistema -usando una colección de herramientas llamadas apliques de configuración, «apliques C». -Estos apliques C pueden estar asociados al -conjunto general de aplicaciones de GNOME o a otras aplicaciones para las que los programadores hayan escrito -apliques C. - - -Su Centro de Control puede contener más apliques de los aquí documentados -dependiendo de las aplicaciones instaladas en su sistema. - - -El Centro de Control se divide en dos secciones principales, el menú de -apliques de configuración y el espacio de trabajo principal. - - -Trabajar con el Centro de Control requiere simplemente elegir de un -aplique del menú izquierdo y pulsar dos veces sobre él. Una vez hecho -esto, el espacio de trabajo cambiará, permitiéndole configurar el elemento elegido. - - - Puede arrancar el Centro de Control de dos maneras distintas. Para lanzar el - Centro de Control sin ningún aplique concreto seleccione la opción - Centro de Control GNOME del submenú - Configuración dentro del Menú Principal. - También puede arrancar - el Centro de Control desde el panel sin usar el menú principal si su panel - incorpora el lanzador del centro de control. - - - Si sabe que aplique C quiere utilizar puede arrancar este aplique - seleccionando la entrada oportuna del menú Configuración. - - - - - - - Escritorio - - La sección Escritorio controla las opciones visuales más importantes de - su entorno GNOME. - - - El aplique C de Propiedades del tapiz - - - El centro de control de GNOME - Escritorio - -Las propiedades de la imagen del fondo pueden fijarse desde aquí bien -eligiendo un color o una imagen. Si elige un color tiene la opción de -usar un color sólido o un degradado. Si elige un degradado puede elegir -entre un color sólido, un degradado horizontal o vertical y escoger el -segundo color en el que termina el degradado. - - -Si decide usar una imagen como fondo puede buscar la imagen que desee usar. -Una vez que haya encontrado la imagen deberá decidir si quiere que -forme un mosaico a toda pantalla, esté centrada, se redimensione conservando su aspecto, -o simplemente se redimensione para ocupar toda la pantalla. Una que haya cambiado las propiedades del -tapiz puede pulsar el botón - -Probar - -en la parte -inferior del Centro de Control para realizar los cambios. - - -Si quiere configurar el fondo de cualquier otra forma, puede deshabilitar -este aplique desactivando la casilla - -Usar GNOME para definir el fondo. -
- El aplique C de propiedades del tapiz - - El aplique C de propiedades del tapiz - - - -
- - - - - - Preferencias globales del Panel - -Este aplique C lo proporciona el panel GNOME y se describe en - - - - - - El aplique C Salvapantallas - - - Centro de control GNOME - Salvapantallas - -En este aplique puede cambiar las propiedades del salvapantalla. Este -aplique contiene una lista de los salvapantallas disponibles para su -elección y una ventana de demostración. Debajo de estas ventanas de dialogo -pueden verse un conjunto de herramientas que le permiten cambiar los valores -de las propiedades globales de los salvapantallas. Si el salvapantalla que -ha escogido tiene propiedades particulares puede cambiarlas pulsando el botón - -Propiedades - -que aparece debajo de la lista de salvapantallas. - - - Configuración del salvapantalla - En esta - sección del aplique puede cambiar - los valores del temporizador, la necesidad de clave, el - uso del gestor de consumo. Puede decidir cuánto tiempo quiere que espere - el salvapantalla antes de mostrarse tecleando el numero de minutos en la - casilla de texto - - Activar después de. - -Si desea una clave para volver al escritorio active el botón de opción - -Requiere contraseña. - - La clave de su cuenta de acceso es la clave solicitada por el salvapantalla. - - - Dispone también de la opción de usar la gestión de energía -- si su monitor - está preparado para ello. Puede fijar el tiempo de espera antes de apagar el - monitor tecleando el valor en la casilla de texto - -Apagar el monitor. -
- El aplique Propiedades del Salvapantallas - - El aplique Propiedades del Salvapantallas - - - -
- - - - Selector de Temas - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Selector de Temas - -El aplique C de aspecto contiene el Selector de Temas que le permite elegir -qué tema GTK desea utizar. - - - Los temas GTK son un conjunto de parámetros coordinados que le permiten - al widget set GTK cambiar su aspecto. - El conjunto de «widget» (widget set) es el grupo de herramientas que proporciona - los botones, barras de deslizamiento, casillas, etc. de las aplicaciones. - Las aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME usan el grupo de herramientas GTK - (GTK tool set) por lo que la mayoría de las aplicaciones GNOME cambiarán - su aspecto si cambia el tema GTK. - - - Para cambiar el tema GTK elija un tema de la lista de Temas disponibles - en el lado izquierdo del espacio principal de trabajo. Si está activada - la Auto Previsualización podrá ver el aspecto del tema en la ventana de - previsualización mostrada abajo. Si le gusta el tema pulse el botón -Probar - en la parte inferior del Centro de Control - GNOME para instalarlo. - - -Unos pocos temas GTK vienen ya cargados con GNOME al instalarlo. Si quiere -más temas puede buscarlos en sitios de Internet como - -el sitio web de Temas GTK. -Una vez que haya localizado y descargado un tema de su gusto, pulse el botón -Instalar un nuevo tema.... -Esto arrancará un buscador de ficheros que le permitirá localizar el tema -que acaba de descargar. Los ficheros del tema deberían estar en formato -tar.gz -o -.tgz -(también conocido como -un «tarball», bala de paja). Una vez que haya localizado el fichero pulse -el botón -Aceptar -y GNOME instalará el tema automáticamente. -Puede ahora buscar en la lista de Temas disponibles el tema que acaba de -instalar. - - -Una vez que el tema se haya desempaquetado en el directorio -.themes, -aparecerá en la ventana de temas disponibles la siguiente vez que arranque -el Centro de Control GNOME. -
- El aplique C Selector de Temas - - El aplique C Selector de Temas - - - -
- - - Si quiere cambiar la fuente usada por el tema actual puede hacerlo - seleccionando la casilla -Usar una fuente personalizada - y eligiendo la fuente mediante el botón de fuentes debajo de esta. - Esto abrirá un formulario de selección de fuentes que le permitirá - la elección de una fuente, su estilo, y tamaño. - size. - - - Aplique C Gestor de ventanas - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Gestor de ventanas"Gestor de ventanas" - - Dado que GNOME no depende de ningún gestor de ventanas, este aplique - le permite elegir el gestor de ventanas que desee usar. - El aplique C Gestor de ventanas sólo muestra los gestores de ventanas compatibles - con GNOME; si quiere usar otros gestores de ventanas, debe indicárselo al aplique C - Gestor de ventanas. - -
- Aplique C Gestor de ventana - - Aplique C Gestor de ventana - - - -
- - El aplique Gestor de ventanas tiene una lista de los gestores de - ventanas que puede elegir. El gestor de ventanas activo se indica con - la palabra Actual. - - - Si quiere añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas a la lista principal, - debe pulsar el botón - Añadir... -. Se desplegará el formulario -Añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas. - -
- Añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas - - Añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas - - - -
- -En el formulario -Añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas -puede especificar el nombre que quiera darle al gestor de ventanas, -el comando para arrancar este gestor de ventanas, y el comando para -arrancar cualquier herramienta de configuración que pueda estar -disponible para este gestor de ventanas. - - -Si sabe que el gestor de ventanas es totalmente compatible con GNOME -y pueden controlarse sus sesiones de trabajo, puede seleccionar -el botón -El gestor de ventanas es manejado por el gestor de sesiones -Si no está seguro, consulte la documentación de su gestor de ventanas. - - -Pulse -Aceptar -cuando todo este listo. - - -Una vez que haya terminado de añadir el gestor de ventanas, verá como aparece -en la lista principal de gestores de ventanas. Si necesita modificar -cualquiera de las características indicadas en el formulario -Añadir un nuevo gestor de ventanas -, puede seleccionar el gestor de ventanas en la lista principal usando -el ratón y pulsar el botón -Editar.... - - -También puede eliminar cualquier gestor de ventanas de la lista -principal, seleccionándolo con el ratón y pulsando el botón -Borrar. - - -Si esta listo para cambiar el gestor de ventanas actual, puede -seleccionar el gestor que quiera ejecutar de la lista principal -y pulsar el botón -Probar -. Si quiere ejecutar la herramienta de configuración -, asegúrese de seleccionar el gestor que desee configurar y pulse -el botón -Lanzar la herramienta de configuración de [nombre del gestor de ventanas]. - - - - - - Manejadores de documentos - -La sección de Manejadores de Documentos del Centro de Control GNOME permite cambiar la -manera de presentar, editar o manipular ciertos tipos de ficheros y funciones. - - - Propiedades Gnome edit - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Editor por defecto - -El aplique C Propiedades Gnome edit permite seleccionar cual será -el editor por defecto durante el uso de GNOME. Esto permitirá a -aplicaciones como el gestor de ficheros de GNOME arrancar el editor correcto -cuando intente abrir ficheros asociados con la edición. Todos los editores -populares disponibles están incluidos en la lista de selección. -Este aplique es muy similar al aplique Tipos Mime, pero se usa en -asociación con algunas aplicaciones. - -
- Propiedades Gnome edit - - Propiedades del editor por defecto - - - -
- - - Tipos Mime GNOME - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Tipos Mime GNOME - -El aplique tipos Mime permite determinar como quiere manejar -algunos tipos de ficheros, o tipos Mime. Mime significa extensiones -multiproposito para correo internet, «Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions», -y se desarrollaron originalmente para permitir que el correo electrónico -transportara varios tipos de datos. En GNOME puede definir la forma en que -desea manejar algunos tipos Mime. Por ejemplo, si usa a menudo ficheros -.sgml y quiere usar siempre Emacs para editarlos, puede configurar el tipo -Mime .sgml para que siempre lo maneje Emacs. Esto significa que cualquier -programa que vaya a presentarle ese tipo Mime, deberá utilizar -Emacs. Esto incluye el doble click sobre el fichero en el -gestor de ficheros GNOME. - -
- Tipos Mime en GNOME - - Tipos Mime en GNOME - - - -
- -Para añadir un nuevo tipo mime pulse el botón -Añadir... -. Esto desplegará el formulario -Añadir un tipo Mime -en el que podrá definir nuevos tipos Mime. - - -Para editar un tipo Mime ya existente, puede seleccionarlo con el -cursor del ratón y pulsar el botón de edición. Se desplegara el -formulario -Definir las acciones para... -. Puede definir el icono usado para cada tipo Mime, -en las siguientes acciones: -Abrir -, -Ver -y -Editar. - - - - Manejadores de URL - -El aplique C Navegador de URL permite detern¡minar que visualizador es -responsable de varios tipos de URL. Los URL son localizadores uniformes de -recursos - es decir, "direcciones" usadas para localizar ciertos documentos o -ficheros. Cuando teclea una dirección de web en un navegador está usando un -URL. Los tipos por defectos de los URL son: - - - - - default - -es cualquier URL que no esté espeficado de otra manera. Por ejemplo una página -web. - - - - - ghelp - -es cualquier fichero de ayuda GNOME. Por defecto lo manejará el Visualizador -de ayuda de GNOME, pero puede visualizar los ficheros en otro navegador. - - - - - info - -es el sistema de documentación "info". Puede ver estos ficheros con el -Visualizador de ayuda de GNOME, pero puede manejarlos con otra aplicación. - - - - - man - -es el sistema de documentación "man". Puede ver estos ficheros con el -Visualizador de ayuda de GNOME, pero puede manejarlos con otra aplicación. - - - - -Para cambiar el visualizador por omisión para cualquiera de estos tipos de URL, -simplemente cambie el visualizador en el campo de texto -selector: en la parte superior del aplique C y pulse -el botón Definir. Si quiere eliminar un manejador de URL -pulse el botón Quitar. - -
- Aplique C Navegador de URL - - Manejadores de URL - - - -
- - - - - Multimedios - -El aplique C Multimedios proporciona control sobre el sonido y otras funciones -multimedia de GNOME. - - - Sonido - -El aplique Propiedades Sonidos permite fijar los sonidos de su sesión GNOME. -Hay dos etiquetas seleccionables en el aplique Propiedades Sonido: -General y eventos de sonido. - - - Etiqueta general - -De momento dispone de dos opciones entre las que escoger en la -etiqueta general, activar los sonidos para GNOME y para los eventos. -Si selecciona -Activar el lanzamiento del servidor de sonido -deberá asegurarse -que el dispositivo de sonido GNOME (ESD) arranca en cada sesión -GNOME. -Sonidos para los eventos -hará sonar cualquier fichero de sonido que haya activado en la etiqueta -Eventos de sonido -cuando estos eventos ocurran. Con estos -dos elemntos activos podrá utilizar el gestor de sesiones que recordará sus -opciones de sonido cada vez que entre o salga del panel. - -
- Aplique C Propiedades Sonido - - Aplique C de sonidos GNOME - - - -
- - Etiqueta eventos de sonido - -Esta etiqueta permite controlar los sonidos emitidos por varios programas y -eventos en GNOME. - - -Para cambiar un sonido asociado con un evento GNOME, escoja el evento en la -lista jerárquica de la izquierda y pulse el botón -Buscar -para localizar un fichero de sonido en su sistema que pueda asociarse a ese -evento. Pulse el -botón -Tocar -para probarlo. - -
- Aplique C Propiedades Sonidos - - Aplique C de sonidos GNOME - - - -
- - - - - - Periféricos - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Periféricos - -Los apliques de esta sección del Centro de Control GNOME le ayudarán a -configurar los dispositivos de entrada hardware incluyendo las propiedades del - teclado y del ratón. Puede disponer además de otros dispositivos periféricos -que dispongan de apliques C en el Centro de Control GNOME. Por favor utilice -la documentación suministrada con cualquier otro aplique C de dispositivo que -pueda tener. - - - El aplique Propiedades de Teclado - - - Centro Control GNOME - Teclado - -Actualmente hay tres características del teclado en esta etiqueta. -Puede cambiar las propiedades de la -Auto-repetición -, las del -Clic del teclado -y las de -bip del teclado. - - -La - - -Auto-repetición - - - -permite -obtener la repetición del carácter a la velocidad y con el retardo -fijados en este aplique C al -mantener pulsada una tecla. - - -El Clic del teclado -activa un suave sonido clic cada vez que se pulsa una tecla. Si está activado -puede cambiar el volumen a su gusto. - - -La sección Bip del teclado permite cambiar el sonido de -aviso producido por el altavoz del ordenador cuando se produce un error -de teclado o se envía un mensaje. - - -Volumen cambia el volumen actual de la alarma. - - -El indicador de tono cambia el tono de la nota emitida. Por defecto -es de 440 Hz, o la nota Do («A above middle C»). - - - -Duración cambia el intervalo de tiempo durante el cual se emite la nota. - - -El botón de -Prueba -le permitirá escuchar el ajuste actual del bip del teclado. - -
- El aplique C Propiedades de Teclado - - El aplique C alarma del teclado - - - -
- - - El aplique C Propiedades del ratón - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Ratón - -El aplique C de Propiedades del ratón permite intercambiar la función de -los botones izquierdo y derecho del ratón y definir las propiedades de -Aceleración -y de -Punto de activación. - - -El valor de la -Aceleración -permite cambiar la relación -entre la velocidad con la que mueve el ratón en la pantalla y el movimiento -del ratón en la alfombrilla. El valor del -Punto de activación -permite fijar la velocidad a la que debe mover el ratón antes de que entre en -juego la aceleración que haya definido en el parámetro de -Aceleración. -
- El aplique C Propiedades del ratón - - El aplique C propiedades del ratón - - - -
- - - - - - - - Sesión - -El grupo sesión proporciona métodos para controlar las diversas acciones que suceden -durante el arranque de GNOME. Esto incluye los programas iniciales y los consejos -iniciales. - - - Consejos iniciales - -Este aplique C permite seleccionar los consejos iniciales o los mensajes mostrados -cuando se presenta inicialmente en el entorno GNOME. El aplique C permite escoger -entre varias fuentes de mensajes. - - -La casilla Activar consejos al entrar permite activar o desactivar esta -funcionalidad. - - -La casilla Mostrar consejos normales mostrará una serie de consejos -sobre el uso de GNOME. Esta es una buena elección para los nuevos usuarios de GNOME. - - -La casilla Mostrar fortunes en vez de consejos permite usar la aplicación -fortune que presenta diversas citas y dichos. Por favor dirígase a la -documentación de fortune para ver como configurarla. - - -La casilla Mostrar mensaje del día en lugar de consejos -permite definir un mensaje del día que se presentará en lugar de los consejos o las citas. -La caja de texto Archivo del mensaje del día a usar permite -definir el fichero de texto que se usará como mensaje. Esta es una buena opción para -que los administradores de sistemas informen a muchos usuarios de las noticias diarias. - -
- Aplique C consejos iniciales - - Aplique C consejos iniciales - - - -
- - - Programas de Inicio - -Puede haber preguntado a varias personas acerca de de los elementos de los -programas de inicio. -Le habrán hecho bonitas presentaciones o le pueden haber explicado que -Programas de Inicio es un menú dentro del árbol del -Centro de Control. -La razón es sencilla; -Programas de Inicio es el nombre dado a todas las opciones que arrancan -aplicaciones en GNOME, incluyendo el gestor de sesiones, en el -Centro de Control. -Las opciones de los Programas de Inico controlan el comportamiento del -gestor de sesiones de GNOME. -La gestión de sesiones puede ser una herramienta muy útil en su uso de GNOME y de las aplicaciones -GNOME. - - -El principal concepto detrás del gestor de sesiones de GNOME -es guardar su trabajos y configuraciones, en cualquier situación, cuando termina una -sesión. Probablemente una de las carcateristicas mas útiles del gestor de sesiones es la -habilidad de arrancar las aplicaciones que estaban abiertas cuando terminó la sesión. -Verá como las aplicaciones reaparecen en su escritorio en la misma posición y con las mismas opciones -que tenían antes de cerrar la anterior sesión. -El gestor de sesiones le permite cerrar la sesión GNOME y cuando vuelva -a iniciar una sesión todo aparecerá tal y como lo dejó. -La idea detrás de la gestión de sesiones es sencilla, pero las herramientas -usadas para conseguir estas tareas son potentes. - -
- Aplique C de programas de inicio - - Aplique C de programas de inicio - - - -
- -El formulario propiedades de la sesión (Session Properties) monitoriza el -estado de las aplicaciones y apliques C en ejecución. Permite cambiar el estilo -y la prioridad de cada programa. Puede parar aplicaciones, si lo desea, y esas -aplicaciones se eliminaran de su sesión GNOME. Las aplicaciones en -propiedades de la sesión son generalmente aplicaciones -de bajo nivel y no deberían pararse. De todas formas, si hay alguna parte de -GNOME que no desee ejecutar, como el panel, es aquí -donde debe pararla y evitar que sea arrancada cuando inicie GNOME en el futuras -ocasiones. - - - - Nota: - -Los programas que no son compatibles con GNOME no son manejados a nivel de -sesión, por lo que no serán rearrancados si no figuran en esta lista. No -necesita poner aquí aplicaciones GNOME, debe simplemente dejarlas arrancadas y -guardar la sesión actual cuando se cierre la sesión. - - - -El orden de prioridades determina el orden en que se -ejecutan los programas y apliques. Esto permite que aplicaciones y -apliques arranquen después de otras aplicaciones o apliques de los que -dependan. La mayoría de las aplicaciones tienen usualmente como numero de -orden 50. Si la aplicación o aplique forma parte del gestor de ventanas u otro -sistema crítico, deberá asignarsele un numero de orden menor. - - - Importante: - -El orden de prioridades es solo para usuarios avanzados. -A no ser que este familiarizado con el orden de prioridades, debería dar a -sus aplicaciones en ejecución una prioridad de 50. - - - -La opción estilo determina el tipo de aplicación en -ejecución. Actualmente hay cuatro estilos de aplicaciones y apliques. - - - - - Normal - Este estilo ejecuta la aplicación -con el estilo por omisión. Se usa para ejecutar las aplicaciones que no -tienen ninguna propiedad especial atribuida. La gran mayoría de las -aplicaciones que ejecutara tendrán este estilo y es conveniente asumirlo en -caso de duda. - - - - - Reinicio - Este estilo arranca la aplicación -o el aplique de nuevo cada ver que se cierre. Se usa principalmente para las -aplicaciones o apliques que necesitan ejecutarse en todo momento para asegurar -el funcionamiento de GNOME, independientemente de la intervención del usuario. -Dos ejemplos de aplicaciones que se ejecutan en modo -reinicio son el -gestor de sesiones y el -panel de GNOME. - - - - -Papelera - Este estilo indica a las aplicaciones o apliques -que son sólo temporales. Las aplicaciones y apliques con este estilo no -arrancarán de nuevo si cierra la sesión. - - - - - Configuración - Este estilo se usa para -aplicaciones o apliques utilizados únicamente para almacenar y transmitir -parámetros a GNOME y a las aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME. Estas aplicaciones -y apliques tienen usualamente un orden de prioridad menor que la mayoría de las -aplicaciones y apliques. - - - - - - Importante: - -La opción estilo es sólo para usuarios avanzados. -A no ser que este familiarizado con las opciones de -estilo debería dejar las aplicaciones ejecutándose -con un estilo Normal. - - -
- Propiedades del gestor de sesiones - - Captura de la pantalla propiedades del gestor de sesiones - - - -
- - - - - - - - Interfaz de usuario - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Opciones de la interfaz de usuario - -Las Opciones de la interfaz gráfica permiten cambiar la apariencia de las aplicaciones -compatibles con GNOME. Puede reconocer estas aplicaciones como las que vienen -preinstaladas con GNOME y las que están programadas con Gtk (el kit de herramientas de GIMP). - - Aplicaciones - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Configuración del comportamiento de las aplicaciones GNOME - -El aplique C Aplicación permite cambiar ciertos aspectos de la -interfaz de usuario de las aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME. - - - Importante - -A pesar de que este aplique C proporciona un interesante control sobre la presentación -de las aplicaciones, debe considerarse estas herramientas sólo para uso exclusivo de usuarios avanzados. - - - - - -Menúes desprendibles y desplazables - Por defecto las barras de menús de las aplicaciones -GNOME pueden arrastrarse de su posición habitual y situarlas en cualquier parte de la aplicación o del -escritorio. Si no desea utilizar esta funcionalidad puede desactivarla. - - - - -Menúes con bordes en relieve - Por defecto las barras de menús tienen los bordes en relieve. -Si no desea utilizar esta funcionalidad puede desactivarla. - - - - -Los submenúes pueden desprenderse - Esta opción permite separar los submenus que tengan una linea -discontínua en su parte superior y utilizarlos como una pequeña ventana móvil. - - - - - -Menúes con iconos - Algunos elementos del menú en las aplicaciones pueden tener iconos. -Si no se quiere ver los iconos en las aplicaciones que los usen puede desactivar esta funcionalidad. - - - - -Barra de estado interactiva siempre que sea posible - -Algunas aplicaciones permiten separar la barra de estado presentada en la parte inferior en su -propia ventana. Si quiere que estas aplicaciones puedan separar la barra de estado en otra ventana -debe activar esta opción. - - - - -Barra de progresión a la derecha de la barra de estado - Algunas aplicaciones tienen -indicadores de progreso en la barra de estado. Por defecto estos indicadores de progreso -están a la derecha de la barra de estado. Si quiere que esté a la izquierda puede desactivar esta -funcionalidad. - - - - -Barras de iconos desprendibles y desplazables - Por defecto las barras de herramientas de -las aplicaciones GNOME pueden arrastrarse de su posición habitual y situarse en cualquier parte de la -aplicación o del escritorio. Si no desea utilizar esta funcionalidad puede desactivarla. - - - - -Barras de iconos con bordes en relieve - Por defecto las barras de herramientas -tienen bordes en relieve. Si no desea esta presentación puede desactivar esta funcionalidad. - - - - -Botones de la barra de iconos con bordes en relieve - Por defecto los botones -de las barras de herramientas tienen bordes en relieve en su estado de reposo. Además cambian -cuando el ratón esta sobre ellos. Si quiere que estén en relieve en todo momento puede activar -esta funcionalidad. - - - - -Barra de iconos con lineas de separación - Por defecto los botones de las barras de herramientas -tienen finas lineas de separación entre ellos. Si no desea tener estas lineas de separaciones puede -desactivar esta opción. - - - - -Barra de iconos con texto - Por defecto los botones de la barra de herramientas -tiene imágenes y texto para identificarlas. Si esta familiarizado con los botones y no necesita los -textos puede desactivar esta funcionalidad. - - - -
- Aplique C Aplicación - Comportamiento de las aplicaciones GNOME - - Aplique C Aplicación - Comportamiento de las aplicaciones GNOME - - - -
- - Diálogos - - - Centro Control GNOME - Formularios - -El aplique C de Diálogos (formularios) le permitirá cambiar los parámetros por defecto de los formularios de -las aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME. Un formulario es una ventana que abren las aplicaciones para -facilitar la realización de tareas necesarias para esa aplicación. Un ejemplo de formulario es el -formulario de impresión que aparece cuando se pulsa el botón de impresión. El formulario permite -determinar las opciones de impresión y arrancar el proceso de impresión. El aplique C de Diálogos -le permitirá cambiar las siguientes opciones: - - -Botones de diálogo - Elegir usar los botones por omisión, espaciar los botones, -poner los botones sobre los lados, justificar los botones a la izquierda, -y justificar los botones a la derecha. - - -Botones de diálogo con iconos - Algunos botones de -los formularios contienen botones. Por defecto con esta funcionalidad tienen los -iconos activados. Si no quiere verlos puede desactivar esta funcionalidad. - - -Usar barra de estado en vez del diálogo siempre que sea posible - Puede indicar a -las aplicaciones que usen la barra de estado en lugar de un formulario si la aplicación lo permite. -Esto sólo funciona con los formularios informativos, no con los que requieren interacción. - - -Posición de las ventanas de diálogo - Esta opción permite elegir como se presentan los -formularios cuando se abren. Puede dejar que el gestor de ventanas decida (o lo haga según -se halla definido en la configuacion del gestor de ventanas), centrar los formularios en la pantalla, -o dejarlos allí donde estaba el puntero del ratón cuando se abren. - - -Tratamiento - Permite cambiar el comportamiento de los formularios de -consejos, pequeños letreros que aparecen cuando movemos el ratón encima de un ratón o parte de un -formulario. Puede elegir entre manejar estos consejos como las demás ventanas, o dejar que el gestor -de ventanas decida cómo presentarlos. - - -Poner las ventanas de diálogo encima de las aplicaciones siempre que sea posible - -Puede elegir situar los formularios sobre las aplicación cuando sea posible, lo que ayudara a mantener -organizadas las ventanas en la pantalla. Si esta familiarizado con otros sistemas operativos debe -dejar activada esta opción ya que es la forma en que muchos sistemas operativos manejan los formularios. - - - Importante - -A pesar de que este aplique C proporciona un interesante control sobre la presentación de las -aplicaciones, debe considerarse estas herramientas sólo para uso exclusivo de usuarios avanzados. - - -
- Aplique C de Diálogo - - Aplique C de Diálogo - - - -
- - - Multidocumento - - - Centro de Control GNOME - Multidocumento - -El aplique C Multidocumento permite cambiar las opciones MDI de las aplicaciones GNOME. MDI significa -interfaz de documentos múltiples y se refiere a la forma en que se presenta más de un -documento en las aplicaciones GNOME. - - - Importante - -A pesar de que este aplique C proporciona un interesante control sobre la presentación de -las aplicaciones, debe considerarse estas herramientas sólo para uso exclusivo de usuarios -avanzados. - - - -El modo por omisión para MDI en la aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME es el de Bloc de notas o -"libreta". Si no le gusta esta presentación puede cambiarlo en esta sección. - - - Modo MDI por omisión - -Además del modo Bloc de notas, encontrará, Primer plano y Modal. Bloc de notaas es la presentación por omisión -de carpetas, Primer plano muestra sólo el documento activo en la vista superior hasta que se -cierre, y Modal tiene solo un nivel superior que contiene cualquiera de los documentos en un momento -dado, aunque sólo puede mostrarse uno. Si ha usado -Emacs, Modal es muy similar a la forma en que -Emacs maneja los bufers. - - - Posición de la etiqueta del bloc de notas MDI - -Si elige el estilo bloc de notas puede escoger donde aparecerán las etiquetas en las aplicaciones. Pueden -situarse arriba, a la izquierda, a la derecha o abajo en la aplicación. Tenga en cuenta que -estas opciones afectarán unicamente a las aplicaciones compatibles con GNOME. - -
- Aplique C MDI - - Aplique C MDI - - - -
- - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-appendix.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-appendix.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 6aa6b96..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-appendix.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,453 +0,0 @@ - - GNU General Public License - - - - Version 2, June 1991 - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of - this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - - - - - Preamble - - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your - freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public - License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change - free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. - This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software - Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit - to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered - by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it - to your programs, too. - - - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. - Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the - freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this - service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you - want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free - programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone - to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These - restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute - copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or - for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You - must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you - must show them these terms so they know their rights. - - - - We protect your rights with two steps: - - - - - copyright the software, and - - - - - offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, - distribute and/or modify the software. - - - - - - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that - everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If - the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its - recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any - problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' - reputations. - - - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. - We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will - individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program - proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be - licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification - follow. - - - - - - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - - Section 0 - - This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice - placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms - of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such - program or work, and a work based on the Program means either - the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a - work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with - modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation - is included without limitation in the term modification.) Each - licensee is addressed as you. - - - - Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by - this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not - restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents - constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running - the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - - - - Section 1 - - You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you - receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately - publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; - keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any - warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License - along with the Program. - - - - You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at - your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - - - - Section 2 - - You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus - forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications - or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided - that you also meet all of these conditions: - - - - - You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that - you changed the files and the date of any change. - - - - - You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or - in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be - licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of - this License. - - - - - If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you - must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most - ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate - copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying - that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program - under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. - - - Exception: - - If the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an - announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an - announcement.) - - - - - - - - - - These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections - of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered - independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, - do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when - you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the - Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose - permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and - every part regardless of who wrote it. - - - - Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights - to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control - the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. - - - - In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program - (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium - does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. - - - - - Section 3 - - - You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under - Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of - Sections 1 and 2 above provided that - you also do one of the following: - - - - - Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which - must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any - third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source - distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, - to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily - used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute - corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial - distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form - with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - - - - - - - The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications - to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules - it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control - compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source - code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or - binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system - on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. - - - - If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a - designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place - counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to - copy the source along with the object code. - - - - - Section 4 - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided - under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the - Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, - parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their - licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - Section 5 - - - You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing - else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. - These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying - or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance - of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or - modifying the Program or works based on it. - - - - - Section 6 - - - Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient - automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify - the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions - on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing - compliance by third parties to this License. - - - - - Section 7 - - - If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other - reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, - agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you - from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously - your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence - you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit - royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or - indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be - to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - - - - If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, - the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply - in other circumstances. - - - - It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property - right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of - protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public - license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software - distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up - to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other - system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. - - - - This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the - rest of this License. - - - - - Section 8 - - - If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents - or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License - may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that - distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License - incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - - - - Section 9 - - - The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License - from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ - in detail to address new problems or concerns. - - - - Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of - this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms - and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. - - - - - Section 10 - - - If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution - conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted - by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions - for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all - derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - - - - NO WARRANTY - Section 11 - - - BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT - PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR - OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, - INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR - PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE - PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - - - - Section 12 - - - IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR - ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU - FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE - USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED - INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH - ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH - DAMAGES. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-es.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-es.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 45fda64..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/gpl-es.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,518 +0,0 @@ - - - - - -Licencia Pública General de GNU - - - - -Versión 2, Junio 1991 - - - - -Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - - - - -59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA - - - - -Se permite la copia y distribución de copias literales -de este documento, pero no se permite su modificación. - - - - - -Nota del traductor. - - - - -Cualquier duda que surja en la -interpretación de estas licencias, derivada de la traducción de la misma, -deberá resolverse utilizando el documento original en ingles, que se -encuentra disponible en los servidores de BSD, del consorcio X y de -GNU. - - - - - -Preámbulo - - - - -Las licencias que cubren la mayor parte del software están diseñadas -para quitarle a usted la libertad de compartirlo y modificarlo. Por el -contrario, la Licencia Pública General de GNU pretende garantizarle -la libertad de compartir y modificar software libre, para asegurar que el -software es libre para todos sus usuarios. Esta Licencia Pública -General se aplica a la mayor parte del software de la Free Software -Foundation y a cualquier otro programa cuyos autores se comprometen a -utilizarla. (Existe otro software de la Free Software Foundation que -está cubierto por la Licencia Pública General de GNU para Bibliotecas). -Si quiere, Ud. también puede aplicarla a sus propios programas. - - - - -Cuando hablamos de software libre, estamos refiriéndonos a libertad, -no a precio. Nuestras Licencias Públicas Generales están diseñadas -para asegurarnos de que Ud. tenga la libertad de distribuir copias de -software libre (y cobrar por ese servicio si quiere), de que reciba -el código fuente o que pueda conseguirlo si lo quiere, de que -pueda modificar el software o usar fragmentos de él en nuevos -programas libres, y de que sepa que puede hacer todas estas -cosas. - - - - -Para proteger sus derechos necesitamos hacer algunas restricciones que -prohiban a cualquiera negarle a usted estos derechos o pedirle que -renuncie los derechos. Estas restricciones se traducen en ciertas -obligaciones que le afectan si Ud. distribuye copias del software, o -si lo modifica. - - - - -Por ejemplo, si usted distribuye copias de uno de estos programas, -ya sea gratuitamente o por cobrar, Ud. debe dar a todos los -recibidores todos los derechos que Ud. tiene. Ud. debe asegurarse de que -ellos también reciban o puedan conseguir el código fuente. Y debe -mostrarles estas condiciones de manera que ellos pueden conocer sus -derechos. - - - - -Nosotros protegemos sus derechos con estas dos medidas: (1) -Ponemos el software bajo copyright y (2) le ofrecemos esta licencia -que le da permiso legal a copiar, distribuir y/o modificar el software. - - - - -También, para la protección tanto de cada autor como la de -nosotros mismos, queremos asegurar que todos entiendan que no hay -garantía alguna para este software libre. Si alguien más ha modificado y -distribuido el software, queremos que sus recibidores sepan que no es -el original, de manera que cualquier problema que otro introduzca no -afecte la reputación de los autores originales. - - - - -Finalmente, cualquier programa libre se ve constantemente -amenazado por los patentes de software. Deseamos evitar el peligro de -que los redistribuidores de un programa libre individualmente -obtengan patentes, con el efecto de convertir el programa en un -programa propietario. Para evitar esto, hemos dejado claro que -cualquier licencia de patente debe ser conseguido para a el uso libre -de todos o no debe conseguirse. - - - - -Los términos y condiciones exactas para la duplicación, distribución y -modificación se elaboran a continuación. - - - - -TÉRMINOS Y CONDICIONES PARA LA DUPLICACIÓN, DISTRIBUCIÓN Y -MODIFICACIÓN - - - - - - -Esta licencia se aplica a cualquier programa u otra obra que -contenga un aviso de parte del propietario del copyright diciendo que -se puede distribuir bajo los términos de esta Licencia General -Pública. En adelante, ``Programa'' se refiere a cualquier dicho -programa u obra, y ``obra basada en el Programa'' quiere decir ya sea -el programa o cualquier obra derivada de él bajo las leyes de -copyright. Es decir, una obra que contenga el Programa o una porción -del mismo, ya sea literal o con modificaciones y/o traducido a otro -idioma. (De aquí en adelante se incluye la traducción sin limitación en -el término ``modificación''.) Se dirige a cada licenciatario como -``Ud.'' - - - - -Esta licencia no cubre otras actividades fuera de la duplicación, -distribución y modificación; éstas están fuera de su alcance. El acto -de ejecutar el Programa no está restringido, y los datos que resultan -de su uso están cubiertos solamente cuando constituyen una obra -basada en el Programa, independientemente del hecho de haber sido -producido por la ejecución del programa. El caso de que sea así o no -depende de qué es lo que hace el Programa. - - - - - - -Ud. puede hacer y distribuir copias literales del código fuente -del Programa tal como Ud. lo recibió, en cualquier medio, con tal de -que publique en cada copia, de manera visible y apropiada, un aviso -sobre el copyright y repudiación de garantía; mantenga intactos todos -los avisos que refieren a esta Licencia y la ausencia de garantía; y -proporcione a cualquier otro recibidor del Programa una copia de esta -Licencia junto con el Programa. - - - - -Ud. puede cobrar un honorario por el acto físico de transferir una copia, -y a opción suya puede ofrecer protección de garantía a cambio de un -honorario. - - - - - - -Ud. puede modificar su copia o copias del Programa o cualquier -porción del mismo, y así formar una obra basada en el Programa, y -duplicar y distribuir dichas modificaciones u obra bajo los términos -de la antedicha apartado 1, con tal de que también cumpla con todas las -siguientes condiciones: - - - - - - -Ud. debe hacer que los ficheros modificados lleven avisos -indicando que Ud. ha cambiado los ficheros, con la fecha de cualquier -cambio. - - - - - - -Ud. debe hacer que cualquier obra que distribuya o publique -que contenga o sea derivada del Programa o de una parte del mismo, ya -sea en su integridad o en parte, sea licenciada en su integridad sin -costo a todas las terceras partes bajo los términos de esta licencia. - - - - - - -Si el programa modificado normalmente lee órdenes -interactivamente al ejecutarse, usted debe hacer que, al iniciar dicho -uso interactivo en la manera más habitual, el programa muestre un -mensaje incluyendo un aviso apropiado de copyright y un aviso de que -no hay garantía (o diciendo que Ud. ofrece una garantía) y que los -usuarios pueden redistribuir el programa bajo estas condiciones y -avisando al usuario como ver esta Licencia. (Excepción: si el -Programa mismo es interactivo pero no suele mostrar un mensaje de -este tipo, entonces no se requiere que su obra basada en el Programa -muestre un mensaje.) - - - - - - -Estos requisitos son aplicables a la obra modificada en su -integridad. Si secciones identificables de dicha obra no están -derivadas del Programa y pueden ser razonablemente consideradas obras -independientes y separadas en sí, entonces esta Licencia y sus -términos no se aplican a esas secciones cuando Ud. los distribuye como -obras separadas. Pero cuando distribuye las mismas secciones como -parte de una integridad que es una obra basada en el Programa, la -distribución del todo debe ser bajo los términos de esta Licencia, -cuyos permisos para otros licenciatarios se extienden a la integridad -de la obra y por consiguiente a todas y cada una de sus partes, -sin considerar de quien la haya escrito. - - - - -Por lo tanto, no es la intención de este apartado reclamar -derechos o disputar sus derechos sobre obras escritas enteramente por Ud. -Más bien, la intención es de ejercer el derecho de controlar la -distribución de obras derivadas o colectivas basadas en el Programa. - - - - -Adicionalmente, la simple agregación de otra obra no basada en el -Programa junta con el Programa (o con una obra basada en el Programa) -en un volumen de un medio de almacenamiento o de distribución no -extiende el alcance de esta Licencia a la otra obra. - - - - - - -Ud. puede duplicar y distribuir el Programa (o una obra basada en -ella, bajo el apartado 2) en forma de código objeto o ejecutable -bajo los términos de los antedichos apartados 1 y 2, con tal de que -también haga uno de los siguientes: - - - - - - -Acompañarlo con el código fuente completo correspondiente en -una forma legible por máquina, el cual debe ser distribuido bajo los -términos de los antedichos apartados 1 y 2 en un medio -habitualmente utilizado para el intercambio de software; o - - - - - - -Acompañarlo con una oferta por escrito, válida por un mínimo de -tres años, de proporcionar a cualquier tercera parte por un honorario -que no exceda del costo de físicamente realizar la distribución de -los fuentes, una copia completa en forma legible por máquina del -código fuente correspondiente, el cual debe ser distribuido bajo los -términos de los antedichos apartados 1 y 2 en un medio -habitualmente utilizado para el intercambio de software; o - - - - - - -Acompañarlo con la información que Ud. recibió en cuanto a la oferta de distribución del código fuente correspondiente. (Esta alternativa sólo es permitido para distribución no comercial y solamente si Ud. recibió el Programa en forma de código objeto o ejecutable con dicha oferta de acuerdo con el subapartado b anterior.) - - - - - - -El "código fuente" de una obra significa la forma preferida de la -obra para hacer modificaciones a la misma. Para una obra ejecutable, -el "código fuente completo" quiere decir todo el código fuente para -todos los módulos que contiene, más cualesquier ficheros asociados de -definición de interfaz, más los scripts que se utilizan para -controlar la compilación e instalación del ejecutable. Sin embargo, -como una excepción especial, el código fuente distribuido no necesita -incluir algo que normalmente se distribuye (ya sea en forma de código -fuente o en forma binaria) con los componentes principales -(compilador, núcleo, etc.) del sistema operativo con el cual el -ejecutable funciona, a no ser que dicho componente mismo acompañe el -ejecutable. - - - - -Si la distribución del ejecutable o código objeto se hace al -ofrecer acceso para copiarlo de un lugar designado, entonces el -ofrecer acceso equivalente para copiar el código fuente del mismo -lugar cuenta como distribución del código fuente, aunque no se exija -a terceras partes que copien el código fuente junto con el código -objeto. - - - - - - -Ud. no puede copiar, modificar, sublicenciar o distribuir el -Programa excepto de la manera expresamente previsto por esta -licencia. Cualquier intento de copiar, modificar, sublicenciar o -distribuir el Programa de otra manera es inválido y terminará sus -derechos bajo esta Licencia automáticamente. Sin embargo, otras -partes que hayan recibido copias o derechos de Ud. bajo esta Licencia -no perderán sus derechos mientras dichas partes sigan en pleno -cumplimiento. - - - - - - -Dado que no lo ha firmado, Ud. no está obligado a aceptar esta -licencia. Sin embargo, no hay nada más que le dé permiso para -modificar o distribuir el Programa o sus obras derivadas. Estas -acciones son prohibidas por la ley a no ser que Ud. acepte esta -Licencia. Por lo tanto, al modificar o distribuir el Programa (o -cualquier obra basada en el Programa), Ud. indica su aceptación de -esta Licencia para hacerlo, y de todos sus términos y condiciones sobre -la duplicación, distribución o modificación del Programa u obras -basadas en él. - - - - - - -Cada vez que Ud. redistribuye el Programa (o cualquier obra basada -en el Programa), el que lo recibe automáticamente recibe una licencia del -licenciante original para copiar, distribuir o modificar el Programa, -sujeto a estos términos y condiciones. Ud. no puede imponer al -recibidor ninguna restricción adicional sobre el ejercicio de los -derechos concedidos en la presente. Ud. no es responsable de hacer -que terceras partes cumplan con esta Licencia. - - - - - - -Si como consecuencia de un fallo judicial o de una alegación de -infracción de patente o por cualquier otra razón (no limitándose a -cuestiones de patentes), se le imponga a Ud. condiciones (ya sea por -una orden judicial, acuerdo o de otra manera) que contradigan las -condiciones de esta Licencia, éstas no le eximen de las condiciones -de esta licencia. -Si Ud. no puede distribuirlo de manera que satisfaga simultáneamente -sus obligaciones bajo esta licencia y cualquier otra obligación -perteneciente, entonces en consecuencia Ud. no puede distribuir el -programa. Por ejemplo, si una licencia de patente no permite a todos -los que reciban copias de Ud., ya sea directamente o indirectamente, -redistribuir del Programa libre de regalías, entonces la única manera -en que Ud. puede cumplir tanto con ella como con esta Licencia sería -de abstenerse del todo de la distribución del Programa. - - - - -Si cualquier parte de este apartado es considerado inválido o -imposible de hacer cumplir bajo alguna circunstancia particular, el -resto del apartado debe aplicarse y el apartado en su integridad debe -aplicarse en otras circunstancias. - - - - -No es el propósito de este apartado inducirlo a infringir algún -patente u otro derecho de propiedad o a alegar contra la validez de -algún derecho reclamado; este apartado tiene el único propósito de -proteger la integridad del sistema de distribución de software libre, -el cual se pone en práctica mediante licencias públicas. Muchas -personas han hecho contribuciones generosas a la amplia gama de -software distribuida mediante este sistema, confiando en la aplicación -uniforme de dicho sistema. Depende del autor o donador decidir si -está dispuesto a distribuir software mediante algún otro sistema y un -licenciatario no puede imponer esa elección. - - - - -Este apartado pretende hacer abundantemente claro lo que -se cree ser una consecuencia del resto de esta Licencia. - - - - - - -Si la distribución y/o el uso del Programa está restringido en -ciertos países debido a patentes o interfaces bajo copyright, -el titular original del copyright que pone el Programa bajo esta -Licencia puede añadir una limitación geográfica explícita a la -distribución, excluyendo dichos países, de manera que la distribución -quede permitido solamente en o entre países no así excluidos. En -dicho caso, esta Licencia incorpora la limitación así como si -estuviera escrita en el cuerpo de esta Licencia. - - - - - - -La Free Software Foundation puede publicar versiones modificadas -y/o nuevas de la Licencia Pública General de vez en cuando. Dichas -versiones nuevas serán similares en espíritu a la versión presente, -pero pueden ser diferentes en detalles para abarcar nuevos problemas o -situaciones. - - - - -A cada versión se le dará un número de versión que lo distingue de -otras. Si el Programa especifica un número de versión que se le -aplica y "cualquier versión posterior", Ud. tiene la opción de -cumplir con los términos y condiciones ya sea de esa versión o de -cualquier versión posterior que publique la Free Software Foundation. -Si el Programa no especifica un número de versión de esta Licencia, -Ud. puede escoger cualquier versión que la Free Software Foundation -haya en algún momento publicado. - - - - - - -Si Ud. desea incorporar partes del Programa en otros programas -libres cuyos condiciones para la distribución son diferentes, escriba -al autor pidiendo permiso. Para software cuyo titular del copyright -es la Free Software Foundation, escriba a la Free Software -Foundation; en veces hacemos excepciones para esto. Nuestra decisión -será guiada por las dos metas de preservar el estado libre de todos -los derivados de nuestro software libre y de promover que se comparta -y reutilice el software en general. - - - - -AUSENCIA DE GARANTÍA - - - - - - -DEBIDO A QUE EL PROGRAMA SE LICENCIA LIBRE DE CARGAS, NO HAY -GARANTÍA ALGUNA SOBRE EL PROGRAMA, EN LA MEDIDA PERMITA POR LAS -LEYES APLICABLES. LOS TITULARES DEL COPYRIGHT Y/U OTRAS PARTES -PROVEEN EL PROGRAMA "TAL Y COMO ESTÁ" SIN GARANTÍA DE -NINGUNA CLASE, YA SEA EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO SIN -LIMITACIÓN LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD -Y APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO ESPECÍFICO, EXCEPTO CUANDO LO -CONTRARIO SEA DECLARADO POR ESCRITO. TODO EL RIESGO EN CUANTO A LA -CALIDAD Y ACCIÓN DEL PROGRAMA LO ASUME UD. SI EL PROGRAMA SE -COMPRUEBA DEFECTUOSO, UD. ASUME TODO EL COSTO DE TODO SERVICIO, -REPARACIÓN O CORRECCIÓN QUE SEA NECESARIO. - - - - - - -NINGÚN TITULAR DE COPYRIGHT NI OTRA PARTE QUE PUEDA MODIFICAR -Y/O REDISTRIBUIR EL PROGRAMA SEGÚN SE PERMITE EN ESTA LICENCIA -SERÁ RESPONSABLE ANTE UD. JAMÁS POR PERJUICIOS, INCLUYENDO -CUALQUIER PERJUICIO GENERAL, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENTE -DEBIDO AL USO O LA IMPOSIBILIDAD DE PODER USAR EL PROGRAMA -(INCLUYENDO SIN LIMITACIÓN LA PÉRDIDA DE DATOS O QUE DATOS -SE VUELVAN INCORRECTOS O PÉRDIDAS SOSTENIDAS POR UD. O POR -TERCERAS PARTES O LA IMPOSIBILIDAD DEL PROGRAMA A OPERAR CON -ALGÚN OTRO PROGRAMA), A NO SER QUE LEYES APLICABLES LO REQUIERAN -O HAYA SIDO ACORDADO POR ESCRITO, AUNQUE DICHO TITULAR U OTRA PARTE -HAYA SIDO AVISADO DE LA POSIBBILIDAD DE TALES PERJUICIOS. - - - - - - -FIN DE LOS TÉRMINNOS Y CONDICIÓNES - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml deleted file mode 100755 index b3d51fb..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1313 +0,0 @@ - -
- - Introducción a GNOME - - - Gnome - Equipo de documentación - - - - - - Este es un borrador de la introducción a Gnome para Gnome 1.4 - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Red Hat, Inc., David A. Wheeler, Alexander Kirillov - - - -2001 -Manuel de Vega Barreiro y grupo Gnome-es (traducción al Castellano) - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any Gnome documentation, and those trademarks - are made aware to the members of the Gnome Documentation - Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. - - - - Se permite la copia, distribución y/o modificación de este - documento bajo los términos de la licencia de documentación libre - de GNU, versión 1.1 o cualquier versión posterior publicada por la - fundación para el software libre; sin secciones invariantes, sin - portada, y sin contraportada. - Una copia de esta licencia esta disponible en la fundación para el - software libre y puede leerse en - linea. - - - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por las compañías para diferencias sus - productos y servicios son reclamados como marcas registradas. Allí - donde estos nombres aparezcan en la documentación de Gnome, y cuando - los miembros del proyecto de documentación Gnome hayan sido informados - de esas marcas registradas, los nombres estarán impresos en mayúsculas - o como nombres propios. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¿Qué es GNOME? - -GNOME es un entorno gráfico (escritorio de trabajo) amigable para Unix y -sistemas tipo Unix, que permite a los usuarios usar y configurar sus ordenadores -de una forma sencilla. -GNOME incluye un panel (para arrancar aplicaciones y presentar el estado de -funcionamiento), un escritorio ( donde se pueden situar los datos y las -aplicaciones), un conjunto estándar de aplicaciones y herramientas de -escritorio, y un conjunto de convenciones que facilitan la operación y -consistencia de las aplicaciones entre sí. Los usuarios de otros sistemas -operativos y entornos se sentirán como en casa cuando usen el potente entorno -gráfico que proporciona GNOME. Gnome se puede ejecutar en un buen numero de -sistemas de tipo Unix, incluyendo Linux, FreeBSD, y Solaris. - - -GNOME está basado en su totalidad en código abierto (software libre), -desarrollado por cientos -de programadores en todo el mundo. Tanto el código fuente como los binarios -de Gnome listos para ejecutar están disponibles para su descarga en Internet; -se distribuyen bajo los términos de -la licencia pública general GNU (y sus primas, La licencia publica general «Lesser» y -La licencia de documentación libre -para las librerías y la documentación, respectivamente). -Mas concretamente, esto significa que cualquiera es libre de usar, copiar o distribuir -Gnome. -Si quiere saber más sobre el proyecto Gnome puede visitar la - -página web de Gnome. - - -También puede encontrar documentación Gnome en Castellano en la -página web de Gnome-es -y en la -página de Gnome España - -. - - - -GNOME es altamente configurable, permitiéndole ajustar su escritorio con -el aspecto que desee. GNOME soporta muchos idiomas, y se añaden más cada -mes. GNOME soporta incluso varios protocolos de arrastrar y -soltar (drag and drop D&D) para una máxima interoperabilidad con -aplicaciones que no sean compatibles con GNOME. - - - -GNOME es un acrónimo de 'GNU Network Object Model Environment', entorno de trabajo -en red orientado a objetos. GNOME forma parte del más amplio -proyecto GNU. El proyecto GNU nació en 1984 con el objetivo de desarrollar un -sistema operativo tipo Unix completamente libre. Si te interesa saber más -acerca del Proyecto GNU, puedes leer acerca de él en -http://www.gnu.org. - - - - -Esta guía describe Gnome 1.4, última versión de Gnome (al menos en Febrero de -2001). - - - - - - - - Acerca de esta Guía - -Esta guía le dará una breve introducción a Gnome. No esta destinada a -cubrir todos los detalles de Gnome; si necesita mas información, debería -leer los detallados manuales indicados en . -Además, esta guía asume que ya tiene Gnome instalado; si necesita ayuda -para instalar Gnome, por favor consulte las instrucciones en la -página Gnome. - - - -Los autores de esta guía son los miembros del grupo de documentación de Gnome (GDP). -Si quiere hacer cualquier comentario o sugerencia acerca de esta guía, o si puede -ofrecer cualquier otra ayuda para mejorar o traducir documentación Gnome, por favor -envíe un mensaje a docs@gnome.org, o visite la -pagina web de GDP -. - - -La traducción es obra del grupo -Gnome-es, si tienes algún comentario o sugerencia dirigete a la -lista del grupo. - -. - - -Los autores de están guía asumen que esta usando la configuración por omisión de -Gnome ( esto es, el tema GTK por omisión y el gestor de ventanas sawfish -con el micro-tema MicroGUI. Gnome es altamente configurable, -así que es fácil cambiar no solo el aspecto, sino también el comportamiento de -Gnome; en cualquier caso, recomendamos hacerlo únicamente cuando tenga algo de -experiencia con Gnome. - - - - - - - Convenios sobre le ratón utilizados en esta guía - -Antes de describir Gnome, permitanos introducir algunos términos usados -no solo es esta guía sino en todos los documentos Gnome. Principalmente, -necesitamos aclarar el uso de los botones del ratón y sus pulsaciones. - - -La mayoría de los documentos Gnome asumen que está usando un ratón -estándar (en Unix) de 3 botones y hablan de los botones izquierdo, -derecho y central; si un documento indica pulsar sin -especificar de forma explicita ningún botón, se asume que se trata -del botón izquierdo. Algunos documentos usa la notación 1º botón -del ratón, 2º botón del ratón y 3º botón -del ratón (o MB1, MB2, MB3 para abreviar) para los botones -izquierdo, central y derecho respectivamente. - - -Si esta usando un ratón de dos botones, puede emular el botón central -pulsando de forma simultanea los botones izquierdo y derecho; si dispone -de un ratón con rueda, la rueda puede usarse en sustitución del botón -central. - - -Puede intercambiar las funciones de los botones usando el -Centro de control Gnome. Muchos usuarios zurdos deciden -invertir los botones izquierdo y derecho. Si ha hecho esto último, debe usar el -botón derecho siempre que en el documento se le -pida una pulsación, y el botón izquierdo del ratón -siempre que se pida pulsar el botón derecho o el 3º -botón del ratón. - - -Si utiliza un ratón con alguna disposición inusual de los botones, -un «trackball», o algún otro tipo de dispositivo de entrada, necesita -localizar los botones derecho, -izquierdo y centrales correspondientes; -esta información puede normalmente encontrarse en el manual que se -entrega con el dispositivo. Normalmente, el botón izquierdo - (MB1) es el que cae bajo el dedo índice. - - - - - - - - Un primer vistazo a Gnome: el escritorio y el panel - - muestra un ejemplo de Gnome en plena -ejecución. Gnome es muy configurable, así que su pantalla puede tener -un aspecto bastante diferente. - - -
- Ejemplo de pantalla Gnome. - - Ejemplo de pantalla Gnome - - - -
- - - - Panel - -La barra larga en la parte inferior de es el -panel Gnome. Contiene un montón de cosas útiles, como - - - El Menú principal: es el botón -con una estilizada huella de un pie. Si pulsamos este botón se abre un -menú que contiene todas las aplicaciones y comandos de Gnome, incluyendo -el comando para terminar la sesión. - - - - -Los lanzadores de aplicaciones: son botones que arrancan varias programas. -Por ejemplo, el botón con una caja de herramientas arranca el Centro de -control Gnome (para configurar su sistema). - - - - -Apliques del panel: son pequeñas aplicaciones diseñadas para funcionar -dentro del panel. Por ejemplo, el aplique reloj -en el extremo derecho muestra la hora actual, y el aplique -lista de tareas muestra una lista de las ventanas -de aplicaciones de su escritorio ( esto ultimo se discutirá en detalle -en ). - - - - - -Al igual que todos los componentes Gnome, el panel es altamente configurable: -puede añadir o eliminar lanzadores de aplicaciones y apliques, editar -el Menú principal, cambiar el fondo del panel, -o incluso crear nuevos paneles. Por ejemplo para mover un objeto, arrastrelo -hasta la nueva posición usando el botón central del ratón; para configurar -un objeto, obtener ayuda acerca de el, o para eliminarlo del panel, -pulse el botón derecho sobre el y elija el elemento apropiado del -menú desplegable. Para ocultar el panel cuando no -este usándolo, pulse sobre uno de los -botones de ocultación (con pequeñas flechas) en los -extremos del panel. - - -Hay mas operaciones accesibles desde el menú del Panel, -y puede acceder a ellas pulsando el botón derecho sobre un espacio vacío -del panel (por ejemplo, en las flechas de ocultación) y seleccionando -Panel en el menú. El menú del panel también -contiene el -manual del panel, que describe -todas estas opciones y otras mas. - - - - - - - - Escritorio - -Cualquier cosa fuera del panel se conoce como escritorio. -Puede situar iconos representando ficheros, aplicaciones, y otros elementos -en el escritorio (con Gnome se instala por defecto un conjunto de iconos), -y después pulsar dos veces sobre un elemento para usarlo: - - - - -Si el elemento es un programa, el programa arrancara. - - - - -Si es un fichero de datos, se arrancara el programa apropiado con esos -datos cargados. - - - - - -Si es un directorio, se arrancara el gestor de ficheros y se mostrara el -contenido de ese directorio. Su escritorio tendrá probablemente un icono -que muestra una casa y esta etiquetado como -directorio personal. Si pulsa dos veces sobre este -icono el gestor de ficheros arrancara mostrando su directorio personal. - - - - -La forma mas fácil de situar un elemento en el escritorio es arrastrar y -soltar un fichero desde la ventana del gestor de ficheros. Esto se -discutirá con mas detalle en . Una vez que el -elemento este situado en el escritorio, puede moverlo por el escritorio -usando el botón izquierdo del ratón, o puede pulsar el botón derecho sobre -el para abrir el menú desplegable que permite eliminar -el elemento o cambiar sus propiedades. - - - - - - - - Uso del ratón - -Como ya hemos visto, puede hacer prácticamente cualquier cosa con tan -solo pulsar el ratón. A continuación damos una serie de convenciones que -funcionan prácticamente en cualquier parte de Gnome: - - - - -Al pulsar sobre un elemento con el botón izquierdo del ratón se selecciona -(destaca) este elemento. Si necesita seleccionar varios objetos, mantenga -pulsada la tecla CTRL mientras la pulsa. - - -Al pulsar dos veces sobre un elemento se ejecuta la acción por omisión para -este elemento (ejecución del una aplicación, apertura de un fichero, etc.) - - -Al pulsar sobre un elemento con el botón derecho se abre un menú dependiente -del contexto, que contiene todos los comandos y la información disponible -para este elemento. Si tiene seleccionado un grupo de elementos, al pulsar -el botón derecho sobre cualquiera de ellos se abre un menú dependiendo del -contexto que se aplica a todos estos elementos. - - -Puede seleccionar texto en cualquier punto de la pantalla usando el botón -izquierdo del ratón, y insertarlo después en cualquier otra parte de la -pantalla que acepte una entrada de texto, pulsando el -botón central del ratón. - - - -Además, pulsando el botón derecho del ratón sobre un espacio vació de su -escritorio se abre un menú desplegable, que permite -cambiar el fondo del escritorio u otras de sus propiedades, o añadir -un nuevo elemento en el escritorio. Al pulsar en el escritorio con el -botón central del ratón se abre el menú por omisión de su gestor de -ventanas (véase ). - - - - - - Terminar la sesión - - -Para terminar la sesión Gnome, pulse sobre el icono del -Menú principal y elija la opción -Terminar sesión. -Gnome le pedirá confirmación; le ofrecerá también la opción de -salvar la sesión — esto es, se salvara información acerca -de las aplicaciones actualmente abiertas y su posición en la -pantalla, de forma que cuando se conecte la próxima vez, -encuentre las mismas aplicaciones en los mismos sitios (esto solo -funciona para aplicaciones totalmente compatibles con Gnome). - - - - - - - - - Trabajar con ventanas - -El sistema gráfico usado por todos los sistemas operativos de tipo Unix, -el sistema de ventanas X, permite tener varias ventanas en la pantalla, -con aplicaciones diferentes ejecutándose cada una en una de las ventanas. -Sin embargo, por si mismo, el sistema de ventanas X solo puede realizar -operaciones de muy bajo nivel, así que se usa siempre en conjunción con -otro paquete de software, llamado gestor de ficheros. -Un gestor de ventanas proporciona los bordes de las ventanas y los botones, -permite mover, cerrar, y cambiar el tamaño de las ventanas, etc. Gnome -puede trabajar con muchos gestores de ventanas. -Los mas populares son: - - Enlightenment y - Sawfish (oficialmente -conocido como Sawmill). -Cada gestor de ventanas puede usar muchos estilos diferentes de decoración -de ventanas y botones ( que se conocen como -temas del gestor de ventanas). -Como es imposible abarcarlos todos, en esta sección describiremos solo el -gestor de ventanas entregado por defecto con Gnome, -Sawfish, y su tema por omisión. -(MicroGUI). -En se muestra un ejemplo de borde de las -ventanas en el tema MicroGUI. - - - -
- Borde de las ventanas en el estilo MicroGUI. - - Borde de las ventanas en el estilo MicroGUI - - - -
- - -¿Entonces, que se puede hacer con las ventanas? - - - - - Cerrar, minimizar, y maximizar ventanas - - - -Para cerrar una ventana, pulse el botón con una pequeña x -amarilla en lado derecho del borde de la ventana. Si la aplicación tiene -datos que no se han salvado, le preguntara si desea salvarlos. - - -Para maximizar una ventana, esto es hacerla que ocupe toda la pantalla (a -excepción de la parte ocupada por los paneles), pulse el botón con una -pequeña flecha amarilla apuntado hacia arriba. Pulsando de -nuevo sobre esta flecha devolverá la ventana a su tamaño original. - - -Para minimizar (ocultar o iconificar) una ventana, pulse el botón con una -pequeña flecha amarilla apuntado hacia abajo. La ventana -desaparecerá de la pantalla. sin embargo, no se abra perdido para siempre -— la aplicación de esta ventana continua ejecutándose, no se pierden -los datos — esta solamente oculta de forma temporal. Todas las -ventanas minimizadas se muestran en el aplique lista de tareas y pueden -recuperarse como se indica mas adelante. - - -Una alternativa practica a minimizar las ventanas es -enrollarlas. Cuando se enrolla una ventana, se -enrolla sobre su propia barra de titulo, de forma que -la barra de titulo es la única parte de la ventana que permanece en la -pantalla. Para enrollar una ventana, pulse dos veces sobre la barra -de titulo; para desenrollarla, pulse dos veces de nuevo. ¡Pruebelo! - - - - - - - - Pasar a primer o segundo plano las ventanas - - - -Las ventanas pueden estar superpuestas en la pantalla, de forma que una -de las ventanas estará sobre las demás. -Puede pasar a primer plano una ventana (esto es, ponerla -por encima de todas las demás) pulsando en la barra de título de la -ventana. También puede pasar una ventana del primer plano a un segundo -plano pulsando el botón derecho del ratón -sobre la barra de titulo de la ventana, o pulsando el botón derecho del ratón -mientras se mantiene pulsada la tecla ALT en cualquier parte -del interior de la ventana. - - - - - - Foco - - - -De todas las ventanas de la pantalla, solo una esta activa (en la jerga de -la computación, «focused»), lo que significa que cualquier cosa -teclee en el teclado se enviara a la aplicación que este ejecutándose en esta -ventana. (Esto no significa que las aplicaciones que se ejecutan en otras -ventanas estén ociosas — pueden también estar en plena ejecución). -Para ayudarle a ver que ventana tiene el foco, la barra de titulo de esta -ventana tiene un color diferente (la parte izquierda es azul, en contraposición -al gris del resto de las ventanas). Para cambiar el foco a otra ventana, -simplemente pulse en cualquier parte de esta ventana. Puede también pulsar en la -barra de titulo para activar y llevar a primer plano de forma simultanea -una ventana. - - - - - - - - - Mover y cambiar el tamaño de las ventanas - - - -Para mover una ventana, arrastre su barra de titulo hasta una nueva posición -usando el botón izquierdo del ratón (esto es, pulse sobre la barra de titulo -y mueva el ratón sin soltar el ratón). Puede también mover una ventana -pulsando en cualquier punto del interior de la ventana manteniendo pulsada -la tecla ALT. - - -Para cambiar el tamaño de una ventana, sitúe el cursor del ratón en cualquiera -de los bordes de la ventana (a excepción del superior) o en las esquinas. -El cursor del ratón se transformara en una flecha que empuja una linea o una -esquina, permitiendo arrastrar el borde o la esquina a una nueva posición. - - - - - - - - Lista de tareas - -Todas las ventanas del escritorio (incluidas las minimizadas) se muestran -en la Lista de tareas, situada en el panel. -Para cada ventana, se muestra un mini-icono y el principio del titulo de -la ventana. Para restaurar una ventana minimizada, pulse simplemente sobre -su titulo en la lista de tareas. Al pulsar con el botón derecho sobre -el titulo de la ventana se abre un menú desplegable, que -permite enrollar la ventana, cerrarla, o matar la aplicación que se ejecuta -en la ventana. La ultima opción debería usarse solamente cuando la aplicación -esta bloqueada y no responda al comando Cerrar ventana. Si -mata una aplicación, pierde todos los datos que no haya salvado! - - - - - - Menú de manejo de ventanas - - Sawfish también proporciona un menú -para cada ventana; este menú contiene todas las operaciones posibles -para esta ventana descritas anteriormente. Para acceder es este menú, -pulse sobre el botón situado a la izquierda de la barra de titulo de -la ventana (con un pequeño triángulo apuntando hacia abajo). Puede también -invocar este menú pulsando el botón derecho sobre el título de la ventana -o pulsando en cualquier parte de la ventana con el -botón central del ratón mientras mantiene -pulsada la tecla ALT. - - - - - - Menú del escritorio - -Finalmente, Sawfish también proporciona un -menú de escritorio; se puede acceder a el pulsando -el botón central del ratón en cualquier -espacio vació del escritorio. Contiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Ventanas - - - -Proporciona una lista de todas las ventanas, incluyendo las minimizadas. -Si seleccionamos una de ellas, se restaurara (si estaba minimizada) y -pasara a primer plano, por encima del resto de las ventanas. Muy cómodo si -tiene tantas ventanas que la que necesita esta completamente tapada por -las demás. - - - - - - Escritorios - - - -Permite saltar de un escritorio a otro, crear y eliminar escritorios. Véase -mas detalles en el manual de Sawfish. - - - - - - Programas - - - -Igual a la sección Programas del -Menú principal. - - - - - - Configurar - - - -Permite al usuario personalizar todas las propiedades del comportamiento -de Sawfish. Para los usuarios noveles, -recomendamos probar varios valores de la Apariencia, -pero dejar como están el resto de las subsecciones. - - - - - - Ayuda - - - -Proporciona enlaces a las paginas de Sawfish, -al manual de Sawfish (cuidado: esto no es -un manual de usuario, sino un manual para las personas que escriben -extensiones/personalizaciones para la aplicación -Sawfish usando el lenguaje de programación -LISP), un enlace a la Guía de usuario Gnome, -y a la Página web de Gnome. - - - - - - - - - - - - Nautilus: el gestor de ficheros de Gnome, un navegador para ayudas, y mas - -Gnome 1.4 incluye un interprete de comandos gráfico, - Nautilus. -Combina un gestor de ficheros, un navegador para ayudas, un navegador para la web, un cliente -FTP, y mucho mas. Para ejecutarlo, seleccione Nautilus en el -Menú principal, o simplemente pulse dos veces en cualquier icono -de directorio de su escritorio. - - - Manejo de ficheros con Nautilus - - -Como los mas modernos gestores de ficheros gráficos, Nautilus -muestra el contenido de los directorios seleccionados usando iconos para representar -los ficheros y subdirectorios. los ficheros o directorios se abren al pulsar dos veces -sobre ellos (para los ficheros de datos, se arranca la aplicación apropiada para -abrir este fichero). Al pulsar con el botón derecho sobre un fichero o directorio se -abre un menú desplegable. Usando este menú, se puede borrar -o renombrar el fichero, ver o cambiar sus propiedades o permisos, y mas cosas. - - -Nautilus también proporciona una forma fácil de mover -ficheros entre directorios. Para mover un fichero de un directorio a otro, abra -cada directorio en una ventana diferente de Nautilus -seleccionado Nueva ventana en el menú -Archivo de Nautilus. -Seleccione el fichero que necesita, y arrastrelo de una ventana a la otra. -Puede también arrastrar un fichero o directorio al escritorio. - - Nautilus proporciona muchas otras -herramientas para manipular ficheros. Es también altamente configurable, de forma -que puede fácilmente cambiar la forma en que se presentan los ficheros (por ejemplo, -puede elegir un icono personalizado para un determinado fichero). Para una -descripción detallada de todas estas posibilidades, lea el -manual de Nautilus. - - - - - - Lectura de documentación con Nautilus - -Además de ser un gestor de ficheros, Nautilus es -también un navegador de ayudas: puede usarlo para leer documentación instalada -en su ordenador. Esto incluye no solo la documentación de Gnome, sino también -las paginas de manual al estilo Unix («manpages»), las paginas info de GNU -(formato de documentación de la utilidades del proyecto GNU), y otros -tipo de documentación. Para ver la lista de toda la documentación instalada en -su sistema, pulse en la solapa Ayuda en la parte izquierda -del panel de Nautilus. - - - - - - - - Personalización - -Gnome es altamente configurable — puede cambiar prácticamente -cualquier cosa: el color del fondo, las acciones asociadas a las teclas, -la posición de los paneles, el contenido del Menú principal, -y mas cosas. La mayoría de estos cambios se realizan usando el -Centro de control de Gnome, que puede encontrarse -en el submenú Configuración del -Menú principal. El -Centro de control de Gnome dispone de su propia -documentación detallada que debería consultar antes de realizar cambio -alguno. - - -Aquí nos gustaría dar únicamente un vistazo a las opciones mas comúnmente -utilizadas del centro de control de Gnome. - - - - Fondo - - -Puede cambiar el fondo del escritorio seleccionado -Propiedades del tapiz en la sección -Escritorio del -centro de control de Gnome. -(una alternativa mas rápida para acceder a esta sección es pulsar con el -botón derecho del ratón sobre un espacio vació del escritorio y seleccionar -Configurar la imagen de fondo en el menú -desplegable). - - - - - Selector de temas - - - - El Selector de temas permite cambiar el tema -del escritorio (también conocido como tema GTK). Esto cambia la apariencia -del Menú principal, así como los menús, barras de -herramientas, barras deslizantes, botones de selección y otros elementos -gráficos de la interfaz de usuario para todas las aplicaciones Gnome. -Muchos usuarios encuentran el tema por defecto demasiado gris, así que -la primera cosa que hacen es cambiarlo por otro. - - - - - El gestor de ventanas Sawfish - - - -Esta sección permite cambiar las características del gestor de ventanas. En -particular, en la subsección Apariencia puede cambiar -el estilo de los marcos (tema), que determina los bordes de las ventanas y -los botones. También puede cambiar la tipografía usada en la barra de titulo -de las ventanas. Si es un usuario novel, le recomendamos que no cambie otras -cosas. - - - - - Sesión - - - -En esta sección puede definir los programas iniciales (esto es, los programas -que se ejecutan cada vez que se conecta en el sistema), activar o desactivar -los consejos durante el arranque y los formularios de confirmación de -fin de sesión. - - - - - -Además, puede cambiar las propiedades de varios elementos — especialmente, -las de los paneles e iconos del escritorio — pulsando sobre ellos -con el botón derecho del ratón y seleccionando -Propiedades en el menú desplegable. -De esta manera, se puede cambiar el titulo de un icono, el tamaño y el color de -fondo (o incluso la imagen de fondo) del panel, y mas cosas. - - - -Casi todas las aplicaciones tienen sus propios parámetros de configuración -(busque los menús de Preferencias o -Configuración), así que puede cambiar, por ejemplo, los -colores usados por el terminal de Gnome o hacerlo transparente — las -posibilidades son ilimitadas! - - - - - - - Aplicaciones y utilidades Gnome - -Gnome se entrega con muchas aplicaciones y utilidades; además, Gnome permite -utilizar aplicaciones de terceros como Netscape), -aplicaciones de KDE, y otras aplicaciones y utilidades instaladas en su -sistema. A continuación se incluye una lista de algunas de las mas útiles -aplicaciones y utilidades que podrá encontrar en el Menú principal -de Gnome (¡no es una lista completa!). - - - - Aplicaciones - - - -Incluye aplicaciones de oficina y aplicaciones tales que - - - - Gnumeric - — una hoja de calculo compatible con Excel y totalmente funcional. - - - - AbiWord — un procesador de textos ligero. - - - - Calendario de Gnome para ayudarle a gestionar su -saturada agenda - - - Varios editores de texto, desde el simple y fácil de usar -gedit, hasta el (posiblemente) mas poderoso editor de -textos jamas creado, Emacs (que no es una aplicación -Gnome). - - - - - - - - Gráficos - - - - - Gimp — -programa de edición de imágenes para usuarios avanzados; rival de - Photoshop. - - - -Visualizadores de imágenes como el Ojo de Gnome, -GQview y xv. - - - - - - - Utilidades - - - -Junto a otras cosas, aqui encontrara - - - - Calculadora - - - - Herramienta de búsqueda de Gnome que puede -usar para buscar ficheros en su sistema - - - - gfloppy para formatear disquetes - - - - GDict para -buscar palabras en uno de los diccionarios libremente disponibles en Internet - - - - - - - Multimedia - - - -Aquí encontrara el - lector de CD, el - Mezclador (que también puede -usarse para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces), y el lector de MP3 - XMMS. - - - - - - Sistema - - - -Este submenú contiene utilidades para manejar su sistema. Puede encontrar información -detallada acerca del procesador, la memoria, y el sistema operativo usando la -información del sistema, chequear cuanto espacio queda -libre en sus discos usando el disco libre Gnome, o ver todos -los procesos (tareas) que se están ejecutando en su ordenador usando el - Monitor del sistema. -Además, el Monitor del sistema también muestra el -nivel de carga del procesador y la memoria, y permite matar los procesos bloqueados -o no deseados por otros motivos. - - -Este submenú también contiene herramientas para gestionar el software instalado -en su sistema, llamadas GnoRPM y -Actualizaciónes Helix Gnome (si esta usando la distribución -de Gnome preparada por la empresa Helix Code). -GnoRPM permite ver todos los paquetes de software -instalados en su sistema (si esta usando una distribución de Linux basada en paquetes -RPM, como Red Hat, SuSe, o Mandrake); también permite eliminar, actualizar, o instalar -nuevos paquetes. -Actualizaciónes Helix Gnome proporciona una extremadamente -sencilla forma, casi una sola pulsación de ratón, de actualizar su instalación de -Gnome. Ambas utilidades, en cualquier caso, requieren disponer de privilegios -de administración (root). - - -Y finalmente, el mismo submenú contiene también varios emuladores de terminal -(xterm, xterm a color, -terminal de Gnome) que le permiten utilizar la mas -poderosa (aunque no la mas intuitiva) interfaz jamas creada — el -interprete de linea de comandos. - - - - - Red - - - -Aqui, encontrara el navegador Netscape, -X-Chat para las retransmisión de charlas -en Internet (IRC), Gnome-ICU para hablar con -otras personas usando el protocolo ICQ, y gftp -una herramienta gráfica para transferir ficheros vía FTP. -Observe que el gestor de ficheros, Nautilus, -también dispone de capacidades FTP empotradas, así que gftp -se necesita solo en los raros casos en que necesite algo realmente complejo -(por ejemplo, la transferencia de ficheros usando versiones seguras de FTP, -basadas en ssh). - - - - - Juegos - - - - Montones de juegos — ¡simplemente pruebelos! - - - - - - - - - - - - Ayuda - Tengo problemas! - -Todo el mundo se encuentra con problemas tarde o temprano. A continuación -se dan algunos consejos para enfrentarse a los problemas mas -comunes: - - - - Matar una aplicación bloqueada - -Si una aplicación se bloquea o cuelga — esto es, si no responde -a las pulsaciones de ratón y a los comandos de teclado, puede o bien -esperar y confiar en que vuelva a responder, o bine puede matarla. -Si decide matarla (Aviso: perderá todos los datos no salvados), arranque -el monitor de sistema Gnome -(desde el submenú Sistema del -Menú principal), pulse con el botón derecho sobre -el nombre de la aplicación colgada, y seleccione -Matar inmediatamente. -El uso del monitor de sistema Gnome permite -también localizar y matar todos los procesos de apoyo arrancados por -esta aplicación. - - -Si una aplicación Gnome se bloquea o casca (muere de forma inesperada) -de forma repetida, debería rellenar un informe de error tal y como se -describe en . - - - - Mi sistema completo se bloqueo! - - -Si el sistema entero se bloquea y no responde, no se apresure a -pulsar el botón de reset del ordenador — -esta es generalmente la peor solución. -Probablemente, no sera el sistema operativo mismo el que esta bloqueado -(los sistemas Unix son conocidos por su estabilidad), sino únicamente -la parte gráfica, el sistema de ventanas X. En este caso, puede probar -a arrancar de nuevo el sistema de ventanas X pulsando simultáneamente -CTRL-ALT-Backspace. -Esto debería funcionar en la implementación del sistema de ventanas X -usada con Linux y *BSD, XFree86 — a no ser que su administrador de -sistemas lo haya deshabilitado. Por supuesto, con este método también -se pierden todos los datos no salvados, pero el menos no corre el riesgo -de estropear todo el sistema de ficheros. - - - - - - - Se perdió la configuración completa de Gnome! - -Si tiene problemas mas serios que la simple desordenación de los iconos -del escritorio — la solución radical es eliminar todos los ficheros -de configuración de Gnome y arrancar desde cero. Esta es una solución de -emergencia, ya que pierde todos los parámetros de configuración y deberá -configurar sus menús, paneles, etc. desde cero de nuevo, esto es, a partir -de la configuración por omisión de Gnome. En cualquier caso, esto solo -afecta a la configuración de Gnome, así que sus ficheros de datos y los -parámetros de las aplicaciones Gnome permanecen intactos. - - -Para eliminar todos los ficheros de configuración de Gnome y volver a -la configuración original de Gnome, termine la sesión y conectese de -nuevo manteniendo pulsadas las teclas CTRL y -SHIFT (inmediatamente después de introducir su clave -en el formulario de acceso). Se le presentara un formulario, ofreciéndole -la posibilidad de resetear la sesión salvada (esto es, las aplicaciones -que tenia abiertas la ultima vez que termino la sesión); o resetear los -parámetros de la configuración de Gnome; o ambas. - - -Finalmente, si tiene realmente serios problemas y su sistema se bloquea -o queda inutilizable en cualquier otra forma, nada mas conectarse, queda -una ultima opción. Puede seleccionar una sesión del tipo -prueba de fallos en vez de la sesión -por defecto Gnome en la pantalla de acceso. -Tanto el gestor de acceso de Kde como el de Gnome soportan esta opción. -En este tipo de sesión, no se arranca Gnome; en su lugar, se accede -con un única ventana de tipo terminal. Esto al menos garantiza un arranque -correcto, y , si sabe como usar las herramientas de linea de comandos, -tiene una oportunidad de localizar y corregir el problema. En caso -contrario, consulte a un experto. - - - - - - - - ¿Donde encontrar mas información? - - Documentación incluida con Gnome - -Gnome incluye documentación detallada de la mayoría de las aplicaciones, -utilidades y de otros componentes, como el panel o el gestor de ficheros -nautilus. Puede ver la lista de todos los documentos de Gnome instalados -en su sistema usando la carpeta Contenido de la ayuda -en Nautilus. Por tanto, si desea -saber mas acerca de uno de estos componentes, lea el manual apropiado. - - -Además de los manuales de los componentes individuales, la documentación -Gnome incluye también: - - - - - - Preguntas frecuentemente formuladas - - - - -Este documento contiene las respuestas a algunas de las preguntas sobre -Gnome mas frecuentemente formuladas. - - - - - - - Si es nuevo en el mundo UNIX/Linux... - - - - -Este breve documento le da la mínima información necesaria sobre Unix -y los sistemas operativos de tipo Unix, incluyendo cosas como los -nombres de ficheros,enlaces simbólicos y la mas confusa de todas ellas, -la noción de montaje. Si no ha usado nunca antes un -sistema Unix, no olvide leerlo. - - - - - - Glosario - - - -Ofrece una breve explicación de algunos de los términos relacionados con -ordenadores que podrá ver en la documentación Gnome, desde ASCII hasta -el sistema de ventanas X. - - - - - - - Recursos Gnome en Internet - -Además de la documentación entregada con Gnome, hay también información -abundante disponible en Internet. Un buen sitio donde empezar es, por -supuesto, la pagina web de Gnome. Allí -encontrara instrucciones para instalar Gnome, revisiones y trucos, -información de desarrollo, y mas cosas. - - -También puede encontrar documentación Gnome en Castellano en la -página web de Gnome-es -y en la -página de Gnome España - -. - - -Si no encuentra allí la respuesta a su pregunta, puede preguntar a otros -usuarios y desarrolladores de Gnome en la lista de correo de Gnome -(las instrucciones para suscribirse puede encontrarse -aquí). -Tenga en cuenta, sin embargo, que esta lista es solo para cuestiones -relacionadas con Gnome (no pregunte como configurar el sistema de ventanas -X, por ejemplo), y es de mala educación (por decirlo suavemente) formular -una pregunta sin comprobar primero que no este ya contestada en los -documentos disponibles como las FAQ de Gnome. - - - - - No todo es Gnome - -Se dará cuenta que Gnome es solo una parte de su ordenador. -Si desea descubrir todo el potencial de su ordenador, deberá comprender -no solamente Gnome, sino también el sistema operativo oculto debajo -(Unix/linux/FreeBSD), varias herramientas y utilidades incluidas con el, -y su sistema gráfico (el sistema de ventanas X). Cada uno de estos -componentes vienen normalmente con su propia documentación. La mayoría -de los comandos y utilidades Unix están documentadas en las así llamadas -paginas de manuales, «man pages» abreviado en Ingles. -Puede verlas usando Nautilus -(véase ). Esta documentación es normalmente -muy detallada y mas técnica de lo que la mayoría de los usuarios -quisieran. Otro formato de documentación usado por las utilidades del -proyecto GNU es el de las paginas info. -Pueden también visualizarse usando Nautilus. -Muchas aplicaciones tienen también documentación en otros formatos. -Algunas veces no es fácil localizar documentación de un determinada -aplicación — pruebe a mirar en el directorio -/usr/doc. - - -La documentación del sistema operativo mismo varía de un sistema a otro. -El mejor consejo es buscar en el manual impreso que se entrega con su -sistema. Para Linux, una buena fuente de información es el proyecto -de documentación Linux (LDP); puede leer su documentación en Internet -(en http://www.linuxdoc.org). -Virtualmente todos las distribuciones de Linux incluyen también copia -de los documentos de LDP; normalmente se encuentran en - /usr/doc/LDP o - /usr/doc/HOWTO. - - -Muchos de los documentos del proyecto LDP se encuentran también traducidos al castellano.Podras -encontarlos en las -páginas de los proyectos: -Lucas para los -manuales -, -Insflug -para los documentos como («HOWTO»), y -Grupos-es para otros proyectos de traducción de documentación. - -. - - - -Y por supuesto, hay un buen numero de libros disponibles acerca de todas -la variaciones de Unix/Linux, Gnome, y acerca de cualquier cosa en la -que este interesado. Busque en su librería local. - - - - - «feedback» - -Si tiene cualquier comentario, sugerencia, o queja sobre esta guia, por favor -envielas al proyecto de documentación Gnome en - docs@gnome.org. - - -Si encuentra algún fallo en una de las aplicaciones Gnome, por favor -reportelo! Los desarrolladores leerán estos informes y trataran de -corregir todos los fallos reportados. La forma mas fácil de enviar -un informe de fallo es usar la herramienta para informar de -errores de Gnome, que se encuentra en el submenú -Utilidades del Menú principal. -Esta herramienta arrancara de forma automática cuando una aplicación -Gnome falla. También debería usarse para enviar sugerencias o peticiones -de nuevas funcionalidades para las aplicaciones Gnome: -simplemente seleccione Prioridad: mejora en la -ventana apropiada de la herramienta para informar de -errores de Gnome. - - -Si tiene preguntas sobre Gnome, o desea discutir acerca de Gnome -con otros usuarios y desarrolladores, debería suscribirse a la lista -de correo de Gnome en la forma descrita en . - - -
- - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/licencias.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/licencias.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index a9fdb3c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/licencias.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ - - - -Licencias (traduccion al Castellano a titulo informativo) - - - -Se permite la copia, distribucion y/o modificacion de este documento bajo los terminos -de la licencia de documentacion libre Gnu, version 1.1 o cualquier -version posterior publicada por la sociedad para el software libre; -con las secciones invariantes apareciendo listadas en los creditos, con el texto de la portada -aparciendo listado, y con el texto de la contra portada apareciendo listado. -Una copia de esta licencia esta incluida en -. - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por las compañias para diferencias sus productos -y servicios son reclamados como marcas registradas. Alli donde estos nombres aparezcan -en la documentacion de Gnome, y cuando los miembros del proyecto de documentacion Gnome -hayan sido informados de esas marcas registradas, los nombres estaran impresosos -en mayusculas o como nombres propios. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/nautilus-user-manual.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/nautilus-user-manual.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b859d18..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/nautilus-user-manual.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3717 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - Manual del Usuario de Nautilus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Introducción a Nautilus - - - Nautilus es un componente del núcleo del ambiente de escritorio GNOME. - Nautilus provee una forma sencilla para usted de ver, manejar y personalizar sus - archivos y carpetas como así también navegar por Internet. - - - - Nautilus integra su accesos a archivos, aplicaciones, medios, - recursos basados en Internet, y la Web, haciendo más fácil - y rápido localizar y usar todo los recursos disponibles que tenga - a su disposición. - - - - La Ventana de Nautilus - -
- La ventana de Nautilus - - Diagrama de Nautilus - - - -
- - - barra del menú - - - - Los ocho menúes contienen opciones para la mayoría de las tareas - que se realizan sobre archivos y carpetas, y le dejan personalizar - la vista de todas las aplicaciones, carpetas, y archivos que contenga - en su disco rígido. El menú de Preferencias representado por el símbolo - que se encuentra a la derecha del menú Ayuda le deja especificar su - nivel de experiencia en Linux y GNOME. - - - - barra de herramientas - - - - La barra de herramientas le permite con un solo clic navegar y buscar - en las carpetas de su computadora, como así también en Internet. Haga - clic en el botón Servicios para acceder instantáneamente a los Servicios - Eazel, un conjunto de servicios especialmente diseñados para satisfacer - la necesidades de los usuarios de Linux. - - - - barra de dirección - - - - Use la barra de dirección para ingresar rutas de archivos, direcciones - Web (URLs) u otro tipo de direcciones. El menú pop-up que esta sobre el - final del lado derecho de la barra le permite elegir diferentes vistas, - por ejemplo, Ver como íconos ó como una Lista. Haga clic en el signo + - y - para agrandar o reducir los íconos en las vistas icono o lista. - También puede hacer clic el la Lupa para volver a ver lo íconos en su - tamaño original. (Si ha cambiado el tema por omisión de Nautilus la lupa pudo haber sido cambiada - por otro símbolo.) - - - - barra lateral - - - - La barra lateral muestra información sobre el archivo o la carpeta - actual. Cada una de las cuatro solapas que están en la base de la barra - proveen ayuda o información adicional: - - - - - - - La solapa árbol muestra el árbol - una vista jerárquica de la - organización de archivos y carpetas en su computadora - - - - - - - La solapa Histórico contiene una lista de rutas o direcciones de - lugares que usted ha visitado previamente durante su sesión de trabajo con - Nautilus. - - - - - - La solapa Ayuda le brinda un acceso rápido a los recursos - de información - manuales, páginas info de GNOME, páginas man de Linux - y más también. - - - - - - La solapa Notas provee un espacio donde puede dejar comentarios - acerca de la carpeta actual. - - - - - - - Nota: Si su nivel de usuario esta configurado como Principiante o - si usted ha cambiado las preferencias de la barra lateral puede ocurrir - que no vea las cuatro solapas. - - - - Panel Principal - - - - El panel principal en la ventana de Nautilus es donde usted lleva - a cabo la mayoría de la navegación. Archivos, carpetas y aplicaciones - son mostradas aquí. Usted tiene varias opciones para modificar y personalizar - sus vistas. - - - - - - El Escritorio de Nautilus - - - El escritorio es el área posterior de su pantalla. Si Nautilus fué - pre-instalado en su sistema GNOME entonces Nautilus será el encargado de dibujar el escritorio. - El escritorio de su computadora puede verse como su escritorio físico - - puede estar lleno de carpetas, íconos y trabajos pendientes, o puede - estar completamente limpio. Nautilus le deja organizarlo de la forma en - que usted desee. - - Si Nautilus no dibuja el escritorio en este momento en su sistema haga esto: - - - Abra el menú preferencias (mostrado a continuación) y seleccione Preferencias. - En la sección Escritorio seleccione "Usar Nautilus para dibujar el Escritorio" - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - -
- El menu Preferencias - - Captura de Pantalla del menu Preferencias - - - -
- - - - - Al principio el escritorio contiene tres elementos: un ícono - de una casa que representa su directorio personal , un ícono de - una papelera y un icono de Servicios Eazel que lo llevará hasta - el sitio Web de Eazel. - - - - Usted puede crear carpetas en el escritorio, o arrastrar archivos - y carpetas adicionales desde la ventana de Nautilus hacia su escritorio. - Por ejemplo: puede crear una carpeta que contenga sus proyectos actuales - y dejarla en el escritorio para poder accederla de forma sencilla. También - puede montar discos (podrían ser discos flexibles o discos compactos) - en el escritorio. - - - - Para ver las opciones de uso que tiene su escritorio haga un - clic con el botón derecho de su mouse en cualquier lugar libre - donde no haya una ventana. - - - - - - - Acerca de GNOME - - - Nautilus es desarrollado por Eazel, un miembro fundador de la - GNOME Foundation, con la ayuda de la comunidad GNOME. Nautilus es - un proyecto de software libre desarrollado bajo la Licencia Pública - General GNU (GPL). - - - - - - - - - - Navegando en su computadora y en Internet - - - Esta sección de la guía explica como usar Nautilus para ver las - carpetas y los archivos en su computadora, como asi también - como navegar por páginas Web en Internet. - - - - Contenidos de esta sección: - - - - Observando su directorio personal - - - Navegando en sus archivos y carpetas - - - El árbol - - - Visualizando y abriendo archivos - - - Visualizando y escuchando archivos MP3 - - - Montando las disqueteras y unidades de CDROM - - - Navegando en Internet - - - Observando el Histórico de su Navegación - - - Marcando sus direcciones favoritas - - - - - - - - Observando su directorio personal - - - Cuando ejecuta Nautilus por primera vez verá su directorio personal en - la ventana de Nautilus. Tres áreas de la ventana de Nautilus contienen - información sobre su carpeta: - - - - - - - La barra lateral, la cual contiene un ícono de - una carpeta representando la carpeta actual. - - - - - - El Panel Principal, donde puede ver íconos - representando los elementos que se encuentran en su carpeta. - - - - - - La barra de direcciones, que contiene la - ruta de la carpeta actual. - - - - - -
- barra de dirección, barra lateral, y Panel Principal - - Diagrama de Nautilus - - - -
- - - Su Directorio Personal también aparece en su escritorio, representado - por un ícono de una casa. Haciendo doble clic en el ícono de la casa - se abrirá una nueva ventana de Nautilus, conteniendo su Directorio Personal. - - - - Nota acerca del Directorio Personal: Dependiendo de su nivel de - usuario su Directorio Personal puede ser la carpeta de Nautilus - por omisión, la cual contiene información básica sobre su computadora - y enlaces hacia algunas aplicaciones muy útiles, o el Directorio - Personal definido para usted en las configuraciones de Linux - (normalmente /home/su_nombre). - - - - - - - Navegando en sus archivos y carpetas - - - Puede moverse por sus carpetas utilizando los botones de navegación - que se encuentran en la barra de herramientas y los íconos en - la ventana de Nautilus. - - - - Intente lo siguiente - - Usando su directorio personal como punto de referencia navegue - su disco rígido: - - - - - - - Para ver su directorio personal haga clic en el botón - inicio. - - - - - - Para moverse hacia la carpeta que contiene su directorio personal - - esto es para moverse una carpeta hacia arriba en la jeraquía - haga - clic en el botón Arriba. - - - - - - Para volver al directorio personal haga clic en el - botón Atrás. - - - - - - Para ver los contenidos de cualquier carpeta haga doble - clic en su ícono (normalmente es un ícono de carpeta). - - - - - - Si piensa que los contenidos de una carpeta han cambiado mientras - usted estaba viendola haga clic en el botón Actualizar - para actualizar la información. - - - - - - Para detener la carga de una elemento haga clic en el - botón Parar. - - - - - - - - - - - El árbol - - - Puede obtener una vista de todas las carpetas y todos los archivos - de su computadora utilizando el árbol. Mucha gente encuentra que - utilizar el árbol para navegar es más rápido que seleccionar y abrir - carpetas. - - - - Para ver el árbol, haga clic en la solapa árbol que esta - en la parte inferior de la barra lateral. Haga clic en la - solapa una vez más para quitar el árbol de su vista. - - - - Si no ve la solapa Árbol haga un clic con el botón derecho del mouse - y elija Árbol en el menú contextual que aparecerá. - - - - El punto de inicio - la cima del árbol - es el directorio raíz, - representado por una barra (/). Haga clic en el triangulo que se - encuentra cerca del directorio raíz para abrir o cerrar la lista de - todas sus carpetas y archivos. Los elementos en su computadora son - acomodados de una forma jerarquica. El directorio raíz puede listar - direcciones de red además de direcciones de su computadora. (Nota: - Además del directorio raíz identificado por / hay un directorio - llamado "root.") - - - - Intente lo siguiente: - - Abrir y cerrar una carpeta en el árbol: - - - - - - - Para abrir o cerrar una carpeta en el árbol haga clic - en su triangulo. - - - - - - Para ver el contenido de una carpeta en el panel principal - haga clic en el nombre de la carpeta en el árbol. - - - - - - - - - - - Visualizando y abriendo archivos - - Vistas Icono y Lista - - - La primera vez que ejecuta Nautilus puede ver las carpetas y - los archivos representados como íconos. Esta es la vista ícono. - - - - Intente lo siguiente: - - Observando sus archivos y carpetas de dos formas: - - - - - - - Para ver los contenidos de una carpeta como lista haga clic - en el menú pop-up Ver como y elija - Ver como Lista. - - - - - - Para ordenar los elementos mostrados en la vista lista haga - clic en las cabeceras de las columnas (Nombre, Tamaño, Tipo y Fecha - de Modificación). - - - - - - Para volver a la vista ícono abra el menú pop-up - Ver como y elija Ver como - Iconos. - - - - - - Para ordenar los elementos en la vista ícono abra el menú - Ver, luego elija Ordenar Elementos - y entonces elija una opción de ordenamiento. (Para aprender más acerca de - las opciones de ordenamiento vea Seleccionando el Orden de - Elementos.) - - - - - - -
- El menú pop-up Ver como - - Captura de Pantalla de menú - - - -
- - - Agrandando y Encogiendo - - - - Puede agrandar o encoger el tamaño de los elementos ya sea en - la vista lista o la vista ícono y redimensionar íconos individualmente - sólo en la vista ícono. - - - - Intente lo siguiente - - Agrandando y Encongiendo íconos en la vista ícono o la vista lista: - - - - - - - Para agrandar o encoger todos los íconos al mismo tiempo - haga clic en los símbolos + y - en la - barra de dirección. - - - - - - Para devolverlos a su tamano orginal haga clic en - el símbolo que se encuentra entre los símbolos suma - y resta (normalmente es una lupa). - - - - - - - - Intente lo siguiente - - Redimensionar un ícono en la vista ícono: - - - - - - - Seleccione el ícono que desea redimensionar haciendo - un clic sobre él. - - - - - - Abra el menú Edición y escoja Redimensionar Icono. Aparecerá una - caja alrededor del ícono seleccionado previamente con - "tiradores" en cada esquina. - - - - - - Haga clic en un tirador y arrastre el mouse para redimensionar el - ícono. Para cancelar el redimensionado presione la tecla Escape. - - - - - - Para quitar los tiradores del ícono haga un clic fuera del ícono. - - - - - - - - Para dejar un ícono en su tamaño normal seleccione el ícono y - entonces abra el menú Edición y elija Restaurar los Iconos a su Tamaño Normal. - - - - Previsualizando Archivos en la Vista Icono - - - - - Puede previsualizar muchos archivos en la ventana de Nautilus con solo - observar sus íconos in el Panel Principal - no necesita abrir los archivos. - - - - - - - - Archivos de Texto: Los íconos para la mayoría de los archivos de - texto muestran sólo las primeras palabras o líneas de texto del archivo. - Si agranda un ícono de un archivo de texto usando Agrandar o - redimensionandolo puede ver un poco más de su contenido. - - - - - - Archivos de Imagen: Los íconos para la mayoría de las ímagenes aparecen - como pequeñas muestras de las mismas. - - - - - - Archivos de Música: Puede realizar una escucha previa para los - tipos más comunes de archivos de música colocando el puntero - del mouse sobre los íconos. La Música sonará mientras - mantenga el puntero del mouse sobre el ícono del archivo de música. - - - - - - - Usando Nautilus como un Visualizador - - - - Puede usar la ventana de Nautilus para ver los contenidos de - un archivo sin tener que abrirlo para editarlo en una aplicación. - Utilizar Nautilus como un visualizador en vez de abrir una - aplicación puede ahorrarle tiempo y memoria de su sistema. - - - - La mayoría de los archivos de texto automáticamente aparecen en la - ventana de Nautilus cuando hace un doble clic en sus íconos. De todos - modos algunos archivos se abren automáticamente en sus aplicaciones. - Para manejarse con archivos de este último tipo haga un clic encima - de su ícono utilizando el botón derecho del mouse y seleccione la - opción Abrir con, recién entonces seleccione el visualizador apropiado. - - - - Nota: Puede controlar con que visualizador o aplicación se abrirá - automaticamente un archivo. Vea Seleccionando Aplicaciones para Manejar Archivos. - - - - Aquí se muestran algunos de los tipos de archivos con los cuales una - ventana de Nautilus puede trabajar como Visualizador: - - - - - - - - Texto - Texto ASCII, HTML - - - Imagenes - JPEG, PNG, GIF (no animados), XPM, SVG (sin caracteristicas interactivas) - - - Música - MP3 (para archivos MP3 que están en el disco rígido), AIFF, WAV, RIFF - - - Paquetes - RPM (para archivos RPM que están en el disco rígido) - - - - - - - - Abriendo Archivos Individualmente - - - - Puede abrir archivos en Nautilus de varias formas: - - - - - - - Haciendo doble clic en el ícono del archivo (al menos que - haya cambiado las preferencias para hacerlo con un solo clic). - - - - - - Hacer clic en ícono del archivo, luego abrir el menú Archivo - y elegir Abrir o Abrir - Con. - - - - - - Haciendo clic con el botón derecho sobre el ícono del archivo - y luego seleccionado algunas de las opciones Abrir o - Abrir Con. - - - - - - Haciendo clic en el ícono del archivo y presionando la tecla Enter. - - - - - - - Nota: Si la aplicación que quiere usar no esta en la lista que - Configurando Aplicaciones Auxiliares. - - - - - - - Visualizando y escuchando archivos MP3 - - - Nautilus provee una conjunto especial de caracteristicas que le ayudan - a disfrutar sus archivos MP3. Usando la opción Ver como Música puede - configurar una carpeta de archivos MP3 como si fuese un albúm, conteniendo - temas de su elección y representados por una tapa (una imagen personalizada) que - usted puede especificar. - - - - Intente lo siguiente - - Use su colección de archivos MP3 para crear un albúm de música personalizado: - - - - - - - Vaya a la carpeta que contiene sus archivos MP3. - - - - - - Haga clic en el menú pop-up Ver como y elija Ver como Música. - - - - - - -
- El Menú Pop-Up Ver Como - - Captura de ver com musica - - - -
- - - Sólo los archivos MP3 en su carpeta son visibles en esta vista. - Por cada archivo puede ver una lista de titulos, artistas, velocidad - de muestreo y tiempo de ejecución. - - - - Para empezar a ejecutar uno de los temas en su album haga clic en - el botón Tocar de su reproductor. El tema seleccionado empezará a - reproducirse; cuando termine el siguiente tema empezará automáticamente. - También puede hacer un doble clic sobre un tema para reproducirlo. - - -
- El Reproductor de Música - - Captura de Pantalla del Reproductor de Música - - - -
- - - Si lo desea puede escojer una imagen para la portada del album para - su carpeta de música: - - - - - - - Vaya a la carpeta que contiene sus archivos MP3. - - - - - - Click the View as menú and choose - View as Music. - Haga clic en el menú Ver como y - elija Ver como Música. - - - - - - Haga clic en el botón Establecer Portada - que se encuentra en la parte inferior derecha de la ventana de Nautilus. - - - - - - Navegue para encontrar el gráfico que quiere usar, luego - seleccionelo. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - - - - - Montando las disqueteras y unidades de CDROM - - - Si tiene un disco insertado en unidad de CD-ROM o una disquetera puede - montarlo desde el escritorio. Haga lo siguiente: - - - - - - - Asegurece de que el disco esta insertado en la unidad. - - - - - - Haga clic con el botón derecho del mouse en cualquier lugar del - escritorio (fuera de una ventana) y elija desde el menú pop-up - las siguiente opciones Discos - Disquetera o Discos - CD-ROM. - - - - - - - - - - Navegando en Internet - - - Puede usar Nautilus como una navegador para ver páginas Web y - sitios FTP. - - - - Para ver una página Web escriba su dirección de Web (URL) en la - barra de dirección. - - - - Intente lo Siguiente: - - Conectese al sitio Web de Eazel escribiendo eazel.com - en la barra de dirección y presionando luego la tecla Enter. No - es necesario escribir "http://" o "www." - - - -
- La barra dirección - - Captura de Pantalla de la barra de dirección - - - -
- - - Cuando esta viendo una página Web Nautilus le da opciones adicionales - del Navegador en caso de que quiera usar un navegador externo. Para - seleccionar un navegador diferente haga clic en alguno de los botones - que aparecen en la barra lateral. - - - - - - - - - Observando el Histórico de su Navegación - - - Cuando usted navega en su computadora o en Internet puede querer - regresar a una página, archivo o carpeta que haya visto previamente. - - - - Puede ver su Histórico de Navegación de tres formas diferentes: - - - - - - - Fíjese en la parte inferior del menú Ir para - obtener una lista de las cosas que ha visto durante la sesión de - trabajo actual. - - - - - - Haga clic en la solapa Histórico que se - encuentra en la parte inferior de la barra lateral. (Para quitar de - su vista la solapa Histórico haga clic en la misma nuevamente.) - - - - - - Haciendo un clic con el botón derecho sobre los botones - Atrás o Adelante. - - - - - - - Puede necesitar que Nautilus limpie la lista de las direcciones - que ha visitado previamente. Esto quita la direcciones anteriores - listadas en el menú Ir, la solapa Histórico y lo que este debajo de - los botones Atrás y Adelante. - - - - Para limpiar la lista de direcciones visitadas previamente: - - - - - - Abra el menú Ir y seleccione - Borrar Historial. - - - - - - - - - Marcando sus direcciones favoritas - - - Probablemente descubra que frecuentemente visita cierto tipo de - direcciones - páginas Web, carpetas en su computadora y sus fotos - o textos favoritos -. Puede Marcar estos elementos en Nautilus, de - esta forma puede volver a ellos de una forma más sencilla. - - - - Creando un Marcador - - - - Para marcar un elemento: - - - - - - - Vaya al elemento que quiere marcar. Por ejemplo vaya a http://www.linux.org.ar - - - - - - Abra el menú Marcadores y seleccione - Agregar Marcador. - - - - - - Para usar su marcador abra el menú Marcadores y - seleccione su marcador desde la parte inferior del menú. - - - - - - - Usando lo Marcadores Internos - - - - Nautilus viene con algunos marcadores internos ordenados en carpetas - en la parte media del menú Marcadores. Estos lo llevaran a sitios Web - de organizaciones y compañías de interés para usuarios de Linux. - - - - Si su nivel de usuario esta configurado como Intermedio o Avanzado - puede desactivar los marcadores internos: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Preferencias y seleccione - Preferencias. - - - - - - En la columna del lado izquierdo de la caja de dialogo Preferencias - haga clic en Navegación. - - - - - - Seleccione No Incluir los Marcadores Internos en el menú Marcadores. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - -
- El menú Preferencias - - Captura de pantalla del menú Preferencias - - - -
- - - Editando sus Marcadores - - - - Puede renombrar un marcador. cambiar su dirección o quitarlo - todo junto en un mismo lugar: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Marcadores y seleccione - Editar Marcadores. - - - - - - Seleccione el marcador que quiere editar. - - - - - - Escriba un nombre o dirección nuevo para el marcador o haga clic en Quitar. - - - - - - Cuando haya finalizado de editar sus marcadores cierre la caja de dialogo. - - - - - - - - - - - - Buscando en su computadora y en Internet - - - Nautilus ofrece una opción de búsqueda para localizar archivos y directorios - en su computadora y una opción de búsqueda Web para buscar páginas Web. - - - - Contenidos de esta sección: - - - Buscando elementos en su computadora - Búsquedas Simples - Búsquedas Complejas - Buscando en Internet - - - - - - - Buscando elementos en su computadora - - - Cuando busca elementos en su propia computadora usará una de estas - utilidades de búsqueda de Nautilus: - - - - - - - Búsquedas Simples: Si su nivel de usuario esta configurado con Principiante entonces - Nautilus realiza una búsqueda rápida y sencilla por nombre de archivo. - - - - - - Búsquedas Complejas: Si su nivel de usuario esta configurado como Intermedio o Avanzado - entonces Nautilus busca archivos en su computadora - por nombre de archivo, creador, tipo de archivo y otros atributos, así también - como por el actual contenido de los archivos. - - - - - - - Búsquedas Rápidas Versus Búsquedas Lentas - - - - Nautilus utiliza Medusa (un proceso), el cual es una pieza de software - que se ejecuta en segundo plano. - Medusa crea un índice de todos los elementos que hay en su disco rígido y - en las unidades que se encuentren montadas, incluyendo dentro de este los - nombres de archivo, tamaño, fecha de creación y otros atributos. Además - Medusa indexa el contentido de cada archivo - de este - modo usted puede buscar cualquier palabra o frase en cualquier archivo de - su computadora cuando haga una búsqueda por contenido. - - - - Medusa corre cuando su computadora esta desocupada, de este modo no interrumpe sus actividades. - - - - Si Medusa no ha terminado de indexar su sistema o no se esta ejecutando - en su computadora entonces cuando realice una búsqueda puede aparecerle - un mensaje advirtiendole que Nautilus no puede realizar una búsqueda rápida. - - - - Si sospecha que Medusa no esta ejecutandose haga lo siguiente: - - - - - - - Abra un ventana de terminal. - - - - - - Conectese a su sistema como root. - - - - - - Ingrese el siguiente comando en la línea de comandos: medusa-searchd - - - - - - Si Medusa aún no esta ejecutandose haga esto: - - - - - Abra el menú Preferencias y seleccione Preferencias. - - - - - - Desde el lado izquierdo de la caja de dialogo de Preferencias seleccione la opción Búsqueda - - - - - - En la sección Búsqueda Rápida active la opción "Habilitar Búsqueda Rápida". - - - - - - - - - Búsquedas simples - - - Para buscar un elementos en su disco rígido (nivel de usuario Principiante): - - - - - - - Haga clic en el botón Buscar que se encuentra - en la barra de herramientas. La barra de dirección entonces es - reemplazada por la barra de búsqueda. - - - - - - Ingrese el nombre del elemento que quiere buscar en el - campo Buscar:. - - - - - - Luego haga clic en Buscar. - - - - - - Cuando la búsqueda haya finalizado haga clic nuevamente en el - botón Buscar para asi ocultar la - barra de búsqueda. - - - - - - - - - - Búsquedas Complejas - - - Para buscar un elemento en su disco rígido (Nivel de usuario Intermedio o Avanzado): - - - - - - - Haga clic en el botón Buscar de la barra de herramientas. - - - - - - De los dos menúes pop-up escoja el criterio para definir su búsqueda. - La opciones son explicadas a continuación. - - - - - - (Opcional) Para refinar su búsqueda haga clic en Más Opciones y - seleccione criterios adicionales. - - - - - - Ingrese el elemento que quiere buscar - un nombre de archivo en particular, - fecha de modificación y demás cosas dentro del campo de búsqueda. - - - - - - Haga clic en el botón Buscar. - - - - - - Cuando haya finalizado la búsqueda haga clic en el botón - Buscar para ocultar la barra de Búsqueda. - - - - - - - - - - - Categoría de Búsqueda - Modificador - Campo de búsqueda o Lista - - - - - Nombre: Nautilus buscará los nombres de archivos en su disco rígido. - - - - Especifique si los archivos deben tener un nombre que contenga, - comienze con ó terminen con los caracteres que usted escribe. - También puede elegir "coincidencias globales" o "coincide con expresión regular" - para hacer búsquedas con comodines Linux. - - - - Ingrese parte o todo el nombre de archivo que quiere buscar. - - - - - - - - Contenido: Nautilus buscará el contenido de archivos en su disco rígido. - - - - Especifique si los archivos tienen un contenido que incluye todo, - alguna, cualquiera o ninguna de las palabras o frases que usted - escribe. - - - - Ingrese una palabra o frase que quiere buscar dentro del contendo de los archivos - que se encuentrar en su disco rígido. - - - - - - - - Tipo: Nautilus buscará los archivos que usted especifique. - - - - Elija "es" o "no es" para incluir o excluir tipos de archivos de la búsqueda. - - - - Elija un tipo de archivo desde el menú pop-up. - - - - - - - Tamaño - - - Especifique si los archivos deberán se más grandes ó más pequeños que - el número que usted escribe. - - - Escriba un tamaño en KB (Kilobytes) - - - - - - Con Marca - - - Especifique si los archivos deberían estar marcados o no marcados con una determinada marca. - - - Elija una marca. - - - - - - Ultima Modificación - - - Elija una opción para restringir la fecha de última modificación de los archivos. - - - - Ingrese una fecha. Por omisión se utiliza la fecha actual, pero - puede borrarla y escribir cualquier fecha que usted desee. - - - - - - - Dueño - - - Elija "es" o "no es" para incluir o excluir archivos adueñados por un usuario en particular. - - - - Ingrese el nombre de un usuario que posea archivos en su sistema. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Buscando en Internet - - - Para buscar páginas en la Web haga clic en el botón Búsqueda Web que - se encuentra en la barra de herramientas. Entonces aparecerá la página - de búsqueda de Eazel. Escriba la palabra o frase por la que quiere - buscar y luego haga clic en Buscar. - - - - Puede elegir un motor de búsqueda entre algunos de los listados a continuación - de la caja de búsqueda. Por ejemplo, elija Google haciendo clic en el - enlace Google. - - - - Si le interesa puede configurar el botón de Búsqueda Web para que lo - lleve a su servicio de búsqueda Favorito: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Preferencias y seleccione Preferencias. - - - - - - En el lado izquierdo de la caja de dialogo Preferencias haga clic sobre - Búsqueda. - - - - - - En la sección Búsqueda Web ingrese la dirección Web (URL) de - su servicio de búsqueda favorito. - - - - - - Haga clic en OK. - - - - - -
- El menú preferencias - - Captura de Pantalla del menú Preferencias - - - -
- - - - - - - Administrando sus archivos y carpetas - - - Esta sección explica como utilizar Nautilus para organizar sus archivos y carpetas. - - - - Contenidos de esta sección: - - - Moviendo y Copiando Archivos y Carpetas - Creando Carpetas Nuevas - Archivos y Carpetas en el Escritorio - Duplicando Archivos y Carpetas - Renombrando Archivos y Carpetas - Borrando Archivos y Carpetas - Cambiando los permisos de los archivos - - - - - - - Moviendo y Copiando Archivos y Carpetas - - - La forma más sencilla de mover un archivo o una carpeta es trabajar con dos ventanas de Nautilus a la vez. - - - - Para mover un archivo o una carpeta a una nueva dirección haga esto: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción - Nueva Ventana. Ahora tiene dos ventanas - de Nautilus. - - - - - - En una ventana ubique el archivo o la carpeta que quiere mover. En la otra ventana ubique la carpeta de destino. - - - - - - Usando el botón izquierdo del mouse haga clic en el archivo o carpeta que quiere mover y - arrástrelo hacia la otra ventana. - - - - - - - Nota: Si su disco rígido esta dividido en particiones (volumenes) al arrastrar un - archivo o carpeta desde una partición hacia otra el archivo o carpeta es copiado en vez - de movido. - - - - Para copiar un archivo o carpeta a una carpeta nueva reteniendo el original haga esto: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción Nueva Ventana. Ahora - tiene dos ventanas de Nautilus. - - - - - - En una ventana ubique el archivo o carpeta que quiere copiar. En la - otra ventana ubique la carpeta de destino. - - - - - - Haga clic con el botón derecho sobre el elemento y mantengalo presionado, luego arrástrelo a la - carpeta de destino. Aparecerá un menú pop-up. - - - - - - Seleccione la opción Copiar aquí para dejar una copia del elemento en - la carpeta de destino. Seleccione Enlazar aquí para crear un enlace al - elemento. - - - - - - - - - - Creando Carpetas Nuevas - - - Puede crear una carpeta nueva en cualquier lugar en la jerarquía de carpetas que hay en - su computadora siempre y cuando tenga los permisos apropiados. - - - - Intente hacer lo siguiente: - - - - - - - Vaya a la carpeta que contendrá la nueva carpeta. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción - Nueva Carpeta. - - - - - - - Nautilus creará una carpeta nueva dentro de la carpeta actual. Está tendrá como nombre - "Carpeta sin titulo." Puede renombrar la nueva carpeta. - - - - - - - Archivos y Carpetas en el Escritorio - - - Puede considerar al escritorio como una extensión de la ventana de Nautilus y de ese modo - mover, copiar y crear carpetas en ese lugar. - - - - Para mover un archivo o carpeta al escritorio use el botón izquierdo del mouse - para seleccionarlo y luego arrastrarlo hacia el escritorio. Puede poner el archivo - o carpeta en cualquier lugar que desee dentro del escritorio. - - - - Para poner una copia de un elemento en el escritorio o crear un enlace hacia este haga esto: - - - - - - - En la ventana de Nautilus ubique el archivo o la carpeta que quiere copiar - - - - - - Haga clic encima del elemento y luego arrástrelo hacia el escritorio. Aparecerá un menú pop-up. - - - - - - Seleccione la opción Copiar aquí para dejar una copia del - elemento en el escritorio. Seleccione Enlazar aquí para crear - un enlace hacia el elemento. - - - - - - - Para crear una carpeta nueva en el escritorio haga clic con el botón derecho en - cualquier lugar en el escritorio (fuera de una ventana) y seleccione Nueva Ventana desde - el menú pop-up que aparecerá. - - - - Consejo: Si esta trabajando en el escritorio y quiere abrir una ventana de Nautilus - haga clic con el botón derecho en cualquier lugar en el escritorio y seleccione - Nueva Ventana desde el menú pop-up. - - - - - - - Duplicando Archivos y Carpetas - - - Para duplicar un elemento haga esto: - - - - - - - Haga clic en el ícono del elemento que quiere duplicar. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción Duplicar. - - - - - - - Se agrega entonces un copia del elemento a la carpeta actual. Entonces puede - renombrar el nuevo elemento. - - - - Atajo: En cualquiera de la dos vistas, ícono o lista, puede hacer clic con - el botón derecho sobre el elemento que desea duplicar y luego seleccionar - la opción Duplicar desde el menú pop-up que aparecerá. - - - - - - - Renombrando Archivos y Carpetas - - - Para renombrar un elemento estando en la vista ícono haga esto: - - - - - - - Haga clic sobre el ícono del elemento que desea renombrar. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción Renombrar. - La etiqueta del ícono ahora tiene una caja de texto. - - - - - - Escriba un nombre nuevo para el elemento y presione la tecla Enter. - - - - - - - Para renombrar un elemento estando en la vista lista haga esto: - - - - - - - Haga clic sobre el elemento que quiere renombrar. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción Ver Propiedades. - - - - - - Escriba un nombre nuevo para el elemento en el espacio provisto dentro de la solapa llamada Básico. - - - - - - Cierre la caja de dialogo. - - - - - - - Atajo: Estando en cualquiera de las dos vistas, lista ó ícono haga clic con el botón derecho sobre el elemento que - quiere renombrar. El la vista ícono seleccione la opción Renombrar que aparece en el menú contextual, en la vista - lista seleccione Mostrar Propiedades. - - - - - - - Borrando Archivos y Carpetas - - - Para borrar un elemento haga lo siguiente: - - - - - - - Haga clic en el ícono del elemento que quiere borrar. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción - Mover a la Papelera. - - - - - - Para vaciar la Papelera abra el menú Archivo y luego seleccione - Vaciar Papelera. (Vacie la Papelera sólo si esta absolutamente - seguro de que quiere borrar los elementos permanentemente) - - - - - - - Atajos: Estando en cualquiera de las dos vistas, ícono ó lista, haga clic con el botón derecho - sobre el elemento que quiere borrar y seleccione Mover a la Papelera desde el menú pop-up que aparecerá. - O haga clic sobre el elemento y luego arrástrelo hacia el ícono de la Papelera que se encuentra en su - escritorio. - - - - - - - Cambiando los permisos de los archivos - - - Puede cambiar los permisos de las carpetas y de los archivos que posee. - Si esta conectado como root (sólo para expertos) puede cambiar los - permisos de cualquier carpeta y archivos que tenga en su computadora. - - - - - - - Haga clic sobre el elemento al que quiera cambiarle los permisos. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione la opción - Ver Propiedades. Se abrirá entonces - la caja de dialogo con las Propiedades del elemento que ha seleccionado. - - - - - - Haga un clic sobre la solapa Permisos. - - - - - - Desde el menú Grupo seleccione el - grupo al que pertenece el elemento seleccionado. - - - - - - En la tabla haga clic para poner una marca debajo de cada tipo de permiso - que quiera otorgar. Por ejemplo usted puede darle al dueño y los usuarios - de un grupo permisos para leer (ver), escribir (editar) y ejecutar el archivo y - darle otros permisos para leer archivos, pero no para escribirlos. - - - - - - Cuando haya terminado de administrar los permisos cierre la caja de dialogo. - - - - - - - Nota: Ejecutar normalmente se usa solo para programas y para carpetas con - contenidos que usted desea poner a disposición. - - - - - - - - - Personalizando Nautilus - - - Puede personalizar Nautilus de muchas formas para que su apariencia y - comportamiento se ajusten a sus necesidades y gustos. Esta sección explica como. - - - - Contenidos de esta sección: - - - Configurando su nivel de usuario - Configurando las Preferencias - Mostrar y Ocultar Barras - Escogiendo el orden de los archivos - Cambiando Temas y Fondos - Personalizando los íconos y sus descripciones - Seleccionando un fondo de escritorio - - - - - - - Configurando su nivel de usuario - - - Cuando ejecutó Nautilus por primera vez tuvo que seleccionar un - nivel de usuario: Principiante, Intermedio o Avanzado. El nivel de - usuario determina la cantidad de detalles que verá mientras navegue - sus archivos y carpetas: - - - - - - - Principiante: Para usuarios que no tienen experiencia previa con GNOME o Linux. - - - - - - Intermedio: Para usuarios que tienen alguna experiencia con Linux o GNOME pero - no quieren ver todos los detalles de su sistema. - - - - - - Avanzado: Para usuarios que quieren ver cada detalle de su sistema. - - - - - - - Para cambiar su nivel de usuario abra el menú Preferencias y seleccione el nivel que quiera. - - -
- El menú Preferencias - - Captura de pantalla del menú Preferencias - - - -
- - - Una forma de ver las diferencias entre los niveles es ir a su directorio personal y entonces - comparar lo que puede ver con cada cambio de nivel. Asegurece de regresar al nivel con el que - se siente confortable una vez que haya terminado de hacer las pruebas. - - - - - - - Configurando las Preferencias - - - Varias configuraciones de Preferencias que usted puede ajustar se encuentran en la - caja de dialogo Preferencias. Las configuraciones disponibles dependen de su nivel - de usuario - Los usuarios Intermedios y Avanzados tienen acceso a más configuraciones - que los Principiantes. - - - - Las configuraciones de Preferencias ajustan la Apariencia de Nautilus, el - comportamiento de archivos y carpetas cuando usted hace clic sobre ellos, - el tipo de búsquedas ejecutadas cuando hace clic en los botones Buscar - y Búsqueda Web y muchas cosas más. - - - - Para abrir la caja de dialogo Preferencias use el menú Preferencias mostrado aquí. - - -
- El menú Preferencias - - Captura de Pantalla del menú Preferencias - - - -
- - - Para personalizar las Preferencias: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Preferencias y seleccione la opción Preferencias. - - - - - - Del lado izquierdo de la caja de dialogo de Preferencias seleccione el tipo - de configuración que quiere ajustar (por ejemplo, las vistas Icono y Carpeta). - - - - - - Ajuste cada grupo de configuraciones como lo desee. - - - - - - Cuando termine haga clic en el botón OK para cerrar la ventana. - - - - - - - - - - Mostrar y Ocultar Barras - - - La ventana de Nautilus muetra por omisión las siguientes barras: - - - - barra lateral - barra de herramientas - barra de dirección - barra de estado (en la parte inferior de la ventana de Nautilus) - - -
- La ventana de Nautilus - - Diagrama de Nautilus - - - -
- - - Puede querer ocultar una o mas de estas barras para ahorrar espacio en su pantalla. - - - - Para ocultar y mostrar barras: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Ver y seleccione una de las opciones de la - segunda sección. Por ejemplo para ocultar la barra lateral haga clic en - Ocultar barra lateral. - - - - - - Para ver la barra de nuevo, abra el menú Ver y seleccione alguna de la opciones Mostrar. - - - - - - - Nota: Si oculta una barra en su ventana de Nautilus y luego abre otra - ventana de Nautilus la barra no estará oculta en la nueva ventana. Para - especificar que barras deben ocultarse o mostrarse en las nuevas ventanas haga esto: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Preferencias (que se muestra a continuación) y seleccione la opción - choose Preferencias. - - - - - - Del lado izquierdo de la caja de dialogo Preferencias haga clic en la opción - Apariencia. - - - - - - En la sección Vistas desmarque cualquier barra que quiera ocultar en las ventanas nuevas. - - - - - - Haga clic en OK. - - - - - -
- El menú Preferencias - - Captura de Pantalla del menú Preferencias - - - -
- - - - - Escogiendo el orden de los archivos - - - Orden de archivos en la vista ícono - - - - Para cambiar el orden de los archivos que esta viendo abra el menú Ver - y seleccione Ordenar elementos. Luego seleccione como quiere que los - archivos sean ordenados. - - - - - - - - Manualmente - Puede arrastrar los íconos y acomodarlos como mas les guste. - - - - Por Nombre - Los íconos son ordenados en orden alfabetico. - - - - Por Tamaño - Los archivos son mostrados de Mayor a Menor. - - - - Por Tipo - - Los archivos son ordenados en grupos, como textos, imagenes y demás. - Todas las carpetas son agrupadas juntas. - - - - - Por Fecha de Modificación - Los archivos modificados mas recientemente aparecen primero en el orden. - - - - Por Marcas - - Si le ha agregado marcas a los íconos, los archivos son agrupados de acuerdo a las marcas - (los archivos sin marcas se ponen al final del orden). - - - - - Disposición Ajustada - Los íconos se agrupan de la forma mas ajustada posible. - - - - Orden Inverso - Invierte el orden que usted haya seleccionado previamente. - - - - - - - - Orden de archivos en la vista lista - - - - En la vista Lista puede cambiar el orden de los archivos haciendo clic en los - encabezados de las columnas. Por ejemplo, para ordenar los archivos por su tipo haga - clic en el encabezado de la columna correspondiente a Tipo. Haga clic de nuevo en la - misma columna para invertir el orden. - - - - Vea también Visualizando y Abriendo Archivos. - - - - - - - Cambiando Temas y Fondos - - - Puede personalizar la decoración de su ventana de Nautilus seleccionado - un tema y cambiando el color o la imagen del fondo de objetos especificos. - - - - Seleccionando un Tema Nuevo - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione Temas de Nautilus. - - - - - - Seleccione un tema. La apariencia cambia inmediatamente de este modo usted - puede ver como se ve el tema que ha seleccionado. - - - - - - Cuando termine haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - - Cambiando Fondos - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione la opción - Fondos y Marcas. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo de Fondos y Marcas seleccione - Fondos o Colores. - - - - - - Arrastre una muestra hacia una parte de la ventana de Nautilus. Por ejemplo, - cambie el color de la barra lateral arrastrando el color amarillo. Para restaurar - el color original arrastre la muestra que dice "Reset". - - - - - - Cuando haya terminado haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - - Nota: La caja de dialogo de Fondos y Marcas también le deja arrastrar - marcas para adosarlas individualmente a los iconos de - archivos y carpetas. - - - - Agregar y Quitar Fondos Personalizados - - - - Si su nivel de usuario esta configurado como Intermedio o Avanzado puede - agregar y quitar fondos y colores a la opciones de personalización. - - - - Cualquier archivo de imagen puede ser un Fondo. Para agregar un fondo a las - opciones de personalización: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione Fondos y Marcas. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo Fondos y Marcas seleccione Fondos. - - - - - - Haga clic en Agregar un fondo. - - - - - - Ubique la imagen que quiere agregar al conjutno de fondos. - - - - - - Seleccione el archivo de imagen y luego haga clic en Aceptar. - La imagen es agregada como una nueva muestra. - - - - - - - Para agregar un color nuevo a las opciones de color de fondo: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione la opción - Fondos y Marcas. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo de Fondos y Marcas seleccione Colores. - - - - - - Haga clic en Agregar un Color. - - - - - - En el circulo de color haga clic sobre el color que desea usar y para terminar haga clic en - Aceptar. - - - - - - Escriba un nombre para el color y luego haga clic en Aceptar. - El color se ha agregado como una muestra nueva. - - - - - - - Para quitar colores o fondos personalizados de un conjunto de muestras de fondos y colores: - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione Fondos y Marcas. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo de Fondos y Marcas seleccione - Fondos o Colores. - - - - - - Haga clic en Quitar un Fondo o Quitar un Color - - - - - - Cualquier fondo o color que haya agregado previamente son mostrados en la caja de dialogo. - Haga clic en el que quiera quitar. - - - - - - Repita los pasos 3 y 4 para cualquier color o fondo que quiera quitar. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar cuando haya terminado. - - - - - - - Nota: Si quita un fondo o un color que ya habia aplicado como un fondo a un objeto el - objeto continua mostrando ese fondo o ese color. - - - - - - - Personalizando los íconos y sus descripciones - - - Los íconos aparecen con información en sus descripciones - normalmente el nombre del directorio y el - número de elementos de ese directorio y también el nombre y tamaño de los archivos. Si usted Agranda - la vista para ver los íconos de más cerca aparece más información. - - - - Personalizando las descripciones de los íconos - - - - Puede personalizar la información que aparece debajo de los íconos, sin embargo - el nombre del archivo aparecerá siempre primero, puede especificar que otra información - mostrar y cambiar el orden de esa información. - - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione Texto de los íconos. - - - - - - Haga clic en el primer botón y seleccione de la lista. La información - que elija será la primera cosa que aparecerá por debajo de un ícono luego - del nombre de archivo. - - - - - - Repita los pasos 2 para el segundo y tercer botón - - - - - - Cuando termine de personalizar las descripciones de los íconos cierre la caja de dialogo. - - - - - - - Nota: Para ver toda la descripción de un ícono debe agrandar la vista todo lo que pueda (haciendo clic en el símbolo + que - se encuentra en la barra de dirección). - - - - Personalizando Iconos - - - - Puede cambiar el ícono para una carpeta o archivo en particular dandole un ícono personalizado. - - - - - - - Haga clic en el ícono del archivo o la carpeta. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione Ver Propiedades. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo Propiedades haga clic en Seleccionar Icono Personal - - - - - - Busque y seleccione la imagen que quiera usar como un ícono personal, luego haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - Cierre la caja de dialogo Propiedades. - - - - - - - También puede arrastrar un archivo de imagen hacia un ícono que quiera personalizar: - - - - - - - Si tiene una solapa (árbol,Notas,Histórico o Ayuda) abierta en la barra lateral - cierrela para que de ese modo pueda ver el ícono que quiera personalizar. - (Para cerrar una solapa haga clic sobre ella.) - - - - - - Haga doble clic en el elemento que quiera personalizar para que de ese modo su ícono sea - visible en la barra lateral. - - - - - - Arrastre una imagen hacia el ícono. La imagen reemplazará al ícono. - - - - - -
- Creando un ícono personalizado - - Captura de Pantalla de Icono Personalizado - - - -
- - - Consejo: Puede trabajar con dos ventanas de Nautilus cuando - personalice un ícono . Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione - Ventana Nueva. Puede arrastrar una imagen desde una de las ventanas hacia - la otra ventana donde esta el ícono que quiere personalizar. - - - - Agregando Marcas a los Iconos - - - - Las Marcas le dejan caracterizar archivos individuales como Urgente, Favorito y demás. - Para agregar una marca a un ícono: - - - - - - - Asegurece que la carpeta o archivo al que quiere agregar una marca - esta visible en la ventana de Nautilus. Puede usar la vista lista o - la vista ícono. - - - - - - Abra el menú Editar y seleccione la opción Fondos y Marcas. - - - - - - En la caja de dialogo de Fondos y Marcas seleccione Marcas. - - - - - - Seleccione una marca y arrastrela hacia el icono que quiere personalizar. - Para quitar marcas arrastre la marca que lleva el nombre "Erase" sobre el ícono. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - - Puede agregar al ícono tantas marcas como desee. - - - - Intente esto: - - Usar marcas para organizar sus archivos. - - - - - Agregue la marca Oh No! o Urgente a los archivos que necesitan atención inmediata, luego abra el menú - Ver y seleccione la opcion Ordenar Elementos/por Marcas. Los archivos con marcas se muestran - al principio en la vista ícono y primeros en la vista lista. - - - - Si usa marcas puede también buscar por marca. - - - - - - - Eligiendo un fondo de Escritorio - - - Puede cambiar los colores de su escritorio o darle un nuevo Fondo de Pantalla. Haga esto: - - - - - - - Ponga el puntero del mouse sobre un área libre del escritorio y haga clic con el botón derecho, luego - seleccione la opción Configurar Imagen de fondo del menú pop-up que aparece. - Entonces se abrirá el Centro de Control GNOME. - - - - - - Para usar una imagen como fondo seleccione un elemento desde menú pop-up de Fondo o haga clic en - Buscar para encontrar un archivo de imagen en su computadora. - - - - - - Si esta usando una imagen como fondo seleccione el efecto que quiere - Mosaico,Centrado o - Redimensionado. Haga clic en - Probar para ver como se ven los diferentes estilos. - - - - - - Para usar un color como fondo haga clic en la muestras de Color Primario y luego - en Color Secundario y seleccione colores desde la rueda de color. - - - - - - Desde el menú pop-up de Color seleccione Sólido, - Degradado Horizontal o Degradado Vertical. - Luego haga clic en Probar para ver como se ven los diferentes estilos. - - - - - - Asegurese de que la opción Usar GNOME para definir el fondo esta seleccionada. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar, luego cierre el Centro de Control de GNOME. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Seleccionando Aplicaciones para Manejar Archivos - - - Esa sección explica como personalizar la forma en que los archivos son abiertos para ser vistos o editados. - - - - Contenidos de esta sección: - - - - - ¿Qué son los tipos MIME? - - - - Agregando y quitando Aplicaciones - - - - Cambiando la Aplicación por Omisión - - - - Configurando Aplicaciones Adicionales (Avanzado) - - - - Agregando un tipo MIME nuevo (Avanzado) - - - - - - - - ¿Qué son los tipos MIME? - - - Los tipos MIME son una forma estandar para identificar archivos, de este modo estos - pueden ser transmitidos facilmente por Internet. MIME significa "Multipurpose Internet - Mail Extention." (Extención Multipropósito de Correo Internet). Cada tipo de archivo - es asignado a un tipo determinado MIME. Por ejemplo el tipo MIME para los archivos - HTML es "text/html" y el tipo MIME para los archivos JPEG es "image/jpeg". El tipo MIME - de un archivo le dice a las aplicaciones de Internet como Navegadores y programas - de correo electrónico que tipo de archivo esta siendo intercambiado, como codificarlo para - transmitirlo y como decodificarlo al recibirlo. - - - - Al menos que haya especificado que una aplicación o un visualizador en particular debe abrir el archivo - este normalmente se abre automáticamente en una aplicación que sea la apropiada para ese archivo. - Por ejemplo, un archivo JPEG normalmente se abrirá automáticamente en una aplicación - que maneje gráficos. - - - - Usted puede elegir que aplicación o visualizador abrirá automáticamente - un tipo de archivo en particular. También puede configurar nuevas aplicaciones - para manejar este tipo de archivos en particular. - - - - - - - Agregando y Quitando Aplicaciones - - - Cuando selecciona una archivo y luego elije la opción Abrir con... usted ve - una lista de aplicaciones que pueden abrir ese archivo en particular. También - tiene las opciones Otra Aplicación y Otro Visualizador, las cuales le dejan usar - una aplicación que no esta en la lista para ver o abrir ese archivo. - - - - Usted puede modificar la lista de las aplicaciones que ve cuando elije la opción Abrir con: - - - - - - - Haga clic en el ícono del archivo para el cual quiere cambiar la opciones de Abrir Con. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione Abrir con - Otra aplicación. Aparecerá una caja de dialogo con una lista - de todas las aplicaciones que actualmente pueden abrir ese tipo de archivo. Algunas aplicaciones - en la lista están marcadas "en el menú" para este tipo de archivo, otras estan marcadas como - "No en el menú." - - - - - - Seleccione una aplicación en la lista y haga clic sobre Modificar. - - - - - - Seleccione la opción que quiera. Puede elegir agregar o quitar la - aplicación desde el menú para este archivo en particular o para todos - los archivos del mismo tipo. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. (Si quiere abrir el archivo ahora haga clic en Elegir.) - - - - - - - Para modificar la lista de los visualizadores que ve cuando selecciona Abrir Con - siga los pasos 1 a 6 mostrados anteriormente pero seleccione Otro visualizador en vez de - Otra Aplicación en el paso 2. (Un visualizador le deja ver pero no editar un archivo. - Al abrir un archivo puede ahorrar tiempo y memoria del sistema.) - - - - - - - - Cambiando la Aplicación por Omisión - - - La aplicación o visualizador por omisión abre un archivo automáticamente cuando - selecciona dicho archivo y elige Abrir desde el menú Archivo. Para especificar - la Aplicación por Omisión: - - - - - - - Haga clic en el ícono del archivo para el cual quiere cambiar la Aplicación por Omisión. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione Abrir Con - Otra Aplicación - - - - - - Seleccione la aplicación que quiera usar por omisión y luego haga clic en Modificar. - - - - - - Seleccione la opción que quiera. Puede elegir usar la aplicación como predeterminada para este - archivo en particular o para todos los archivos de su tipo. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. (Si quiere abrir el archivo ahora haga clic en Elegir.) - - - - - - - Para cambiar el visualizador por omisión siga los pasos del 1 al 6 que se - mencionaron anteriormente pero seleccione Otro Visualizador en vez de Otra Aplicación en - en paso 2. - - - - - - - Configurando Aplicaciones Adicionales (Avanzado) - - - La caja de dialogo Abrir Con Otro (descripta anteriormente) lista todas las - aplicaciones que Nautilus puede usar actualmente para abrir un archivo. - Su computadora puede tener aplicaciones adicionales que pueden abrir el - archivo pero pueden no estar en la lista. Puede configurar aplicaciones - adicionales para que ellas aparezcan en la lista. - - - - - - - Haga clic para seleccionar el archivo que quiere configurar como nueva aplicación. - - - - - - Abra el menú Archivo y seleccione las opciones - Abrir Con Otra Aplicación - - - - - - En la sección Tipos de Archivos y Programas ha -ga clic en en botón "Ir ahí". - Se abrirá el Panel de Control de GNOME en la sección de preferencias ee - Tipos de Archivos y Programas. - - - - - - En la lista, busque el tipo de archivo que se corresponde con el archivo con el cual esta trabajando. - Por ejemplo si esta configurando una aplicación adicional para un archivo de texto ubique la entrada - para archivos de texto en la lista. (Haciendo clic en las cabeceras de las columnas puede ordenar la información.) - - - - - - Una vez que haya encontrado el tipo de archivo haga clic sobre el para seleccionarlo. - - - - - - En la sección de Acción por Omisión haga clic sobre Editar Lista. - - - - - - Haga clic sobre Agregar Aplicación. - - - - - - Escriba el nombre de la aplicación y el comando que ejecuta la aplicación. - El comando es el mismo que escribiria si estuviese ejecutando la aplicación - desde la ventana de la terminal de GNOME. - - - - - - Haga clic en el botón Aceptar en cada una de las siguiente tres - ventanas de dialogo para aplicar los cambios. - - - - - - - Para editar el nombre o el comando de una aplicación siga los pasos - del 1 hasta el 9 pero haga clic en Editar Aplicación en vez de Agregar Aplicación - en el paso 7. - - - - Para quitar una aplicación siga los pasos desde el 1 hasta el 9 pero haga clic - sobre Borrar Aplicación en vez de Agregar Aplicación en el paso 7. - - - - - - - Agregando un Nuevo Tipo MIME (Avanzado) - - - Puede configurar aplicaciones por omisión para nuevos tipos de archivos que no - estan configurados actualmente en su sistema. - - - - Primero, agregue el nuevo tipo de archivo: - - - - - - - Abra el Menú Principal de GNOME y seleccione - Programas - Configuración Centro de Control GNOME. - - - - - - Seleccione Tipos de Archivos y Programas desde la columna - del lado izquierdo del Centro de Control GNOME. - - - - - - Haga clic en Agregar nuevo tipo MIME. - - - - - - En la caja de dislogo de Agregar Tipo MIME ingrese el tipo MIME y una - descripción. Por ejemplo, si tiene una nueva clase de imagen del tipo "alf" - (para archivos alfie), debería ingresar "imagen/x-alf" como el tipo MIME - y "Imagen Alfie" como la descripción. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. Recién entonces su nuevo tipo MIME se agregará a la lista. - - - - - - - Segundo, asociar un extensión de archivo: - - - - - - - Seleccione su nuevo tipo MIME en la lista y haga clic en - Cambiar Extenciones de Archivos. - - - - - - Haga clic en Agregar. - - - - - - Escriba una extensión de archivo (por ejemplo, ".alf" para los archivos de imagen "alfie" usados en el ejemplo) - y luego haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar. - - - - - - - Tercero, especifique un ícono: - - - - - - Seleccione su nuevo tipo MIME en la lista y luego haga clic sobre - Cambiar Icono. - - - - - Seleccione un ícono y haga clic en - Aceptar. - - - - - - Cuarto, defina la/s aplicacion/es que pueden abrir archivos de este tipo: - - - - - - - Seleccione su nuevo tipo MIME en la lista. - - - - - - En la sección Acción por Omisión haga clic en Editar Lista. - - - - - - Haga clic en Agregar Aplicación. - - - - - - Escriba el nombre de la aplicación y el comando que ejecuta esa aplicación. - El comando es el mismo que escribiria si estuviese ejecutando la aplicación - desde la ventana de la terminal de GNOME. - - - - - - Haga clic en Aceptar en cada una de las siguientes tres - cajas de dialogo para aplicar los cambios. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Servicios Eazel - - - Los servicios Eazel son herramientas basadas en Internet diseñadas para simplificar - la administración del sistema para usarios de Linux. Nautilus y los Servicios Eazel - trabajan juntos para hacer su vida lo más fácil posible. - - - - Los servicios Eazel incluyen: - - - - - - - Almacenamiento en línea Eazel, para resguardo de archivos. - - - - - - Capacidad para compartición de archivos - - - - - - Catalogo de Software Eazel para una instalación fácil de los programas. - - - - - - El instalador Nautilus - - - - - - - Registrandose con Eazel - - - - - Cuando Nautilus fué ejecutado por primera vez se le preguntó si queria - registrarse para los Servicios Eazel. Si se registró en ese momento haga - clic en el botón Servicios en la ventana de Nautilus e ingrese usando su - nombre de usuario y clave de acceso. - - - - Si aún no se registró haga clic en el botón Servicios para ver la - pantalla de registración. Luego siga la instrucciones para registrarse. - - - - - - - Atajos con el Teclado en Nautilus - - - Estos atajos con el teclado estan disponibles cuando tu estas trabajando - en la ventana de Nautilus o en el escritorio de Nautilus. - - - - - - - - Combinación de Teclas - Resultado - - - Ctrl-B - Agregar al Bookmark - - - Ctrl-X - Cortar Texto - - - Ctrl-C - Copiar Text - - - Ctrl-V - Pegar Text - - - Ctrl-A - Selecciona Todo (selecciona todo el texto, selecciona todos los archivos, etc.) - - - Ctrl-N - Nueva Carpeta - - - Ctrl-O - Abrir - - - Ctrl-W - Cerrar Ventana - - - Shift-Ctrl-W - Cerrar Todas las Ventanas - - - Ctrl-I - Mostrar Propiedades - - - Ctrl-T - Mover a la Basura - - - Ctrl-D - Duplicar - - - Ctrl-L - Crear Enlace - - - Ctrl-F - Buscar - - - Shift-Ctrl-F - Buscar en el Web - - - Ctrl-[ - Volver - - - Ctrl-] - Avanzar - - - Ctrl-U - Subir un Nivel - - - Ctrl-H - Principal - - - Ctrl-R - Refrescar - - - Ctrl-= - Acercar - - - Ctrl-- - Alejar - - - - - - - - - - Marcas por omisión - - - Nautilus aplica marcas automáticamente a los íconos de archivos que - son de sólo lectura, y a íconos que son enlaces (alias) hacia otros - archivos o carpetas. - - - - Las marcas por omisión cambian dependiendo de su tema. Las que se muestran - aquí pertenecen a dos temas de Nautilus, pero si utiliza un tema personalizado - sus marcas pueden verse diferentes. - - -
- Sólo Lectura - - Captura de pantalla de la marca de sólo lectura - - - -
- - - Sólo lectura: Usted tiene permisos para ver este archivo o carpeta, pero - no puede modificarlos. - - -
- Sin permisos de lectura o escritura - - Capura de pantalla de marca sin permisos - - - -
- - - Usted no puede ver no modificar este archivo p esta carpeta. - - - - - - Un ícono de enlace denota un archivo que no tiene contenido por sus propios medios, pero - apunta a un archivo o carpeta localizada en cualquier otro lugar de la computadora. - Haciendo clic en este ícono se abrirá la carpeta o el archivo al que se encuentre enlazado. - (Un enlace similar a un acceso directo en Windows o un alias en el sistema operativo de Mac). - - - - - - - - - Licencias - - - Licencia del Software Nautilus - - - Este programa es software libre, usted puede redistribuirlo y/o - modificarlo bajo los términos de la - Licencia Pública General GNU como - es publicada por la Free Software Foundation ya sea la versión 2 de la misma - o (como lo desee) cualquier versión posterior. - Junto con el programa se provee una copia de la licencia dentro del archivo - COPYING-DOCS. - - - - Este programa es distribuido con la esperanza de que le sea de suma utilidad, pero - sin NINGUN TIPO DE GARANTIA, sin siquiera la garantía implicita de - MERCANTIBILIDAD o con la CUMPLIR UN PROPOSITO EN PARTICULAR. Vea la - GNU General Public License para mas detalles. - - - - - - Licencia del Manual del Usuario de Nautilus - - - Esta permitido copiar, distribuir y modificar este documento - bajo los términos de la GNU Free Documentation - License, en su versión 1.1 o cualquier otra versión - posterior de la misma publicada por la Free Software Foundation sin - Secciones Invariantes, sin Textos en el Frente y sin Textos en la Parte Posterior. - - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por compañías para distingir sus productos y - servicios son reclamados como marcas comerciales. Donde estos nombres aparezcan - en cualquier documentación de GNOME, y esas marcas comerciales hayan sido - advertidas por los miembros del Proyecto de Documentación GNOME esos nombres - han sido impresos en mayúsculas o capitalizados. - - - - - - - - - - Acerca de la traducción - - - Traductores de la versión 1.0 - - - Esta es una lista de la gente que colaboró con la traducción de esta guía. - - - - - - - Ivan Avila [ivan@avila.org] - - - - - - Manuel de Vega Barreiro [barreiro@arrakis.es] - - - - - - Mauricio Araya P. [mauricio@eazel.com] - - - - - - Miguel Guirao [thinkfreemx@yahoo.com.mx] - - - - - - Pablo Gonzalo del Campo [pablodc@bigfoot.com] - - - - - - René Espíndola [rene@univerciudad.com] - - - - - - - - - Aviso - - - Cuando leas la guía de Nautilus ten en cuenta que, aunque hemos intentado no descuidar - la calidad del trabajo, ninguno de nosotros es traductor profesional y esta es - una de las primeras versiones del documento. Así que si encuentras errores, - imprecisiones e incluso faltas de ortografía, no dudes - en enviarnos un mensaje con tus correcciones y comentarios. - - - - - - Licencia de la traducción al Castellano - - - Esta traducción se distribuye bajo licencia GDPL con las siguientes partes invariantes: - - - - - - - Portada del documento. - - - - - - Apéndice "Acerca de la traducción". - - - - - - - Esta restricción no busca otra cosa que el respeto al trabajo de todos los voluntarios - que colaboraron en esta traducción. - - - - Si usas un extracto de este trabajo, deberías citar la fuente del trabajo e incluir un - enlace al trabajo completo. - - - - - - Agradecimientos - - - Una pequeña lista de agradecimientos: - - - - - - - A todo el equipo de desarrollo de GNOME. - - - - - - A Linus y a todos los que hace posible Linux día a día. - - - - - - A Carlos Perelló Marín por todo su apoyo y su empeño en coordinar todo el trabajo de traducción de GNOME 1.4. - - - - - - A Gabriela Galtero por todo su asesoramiento en castellano/inglés y toda su paciencia. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/newbies.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/newbies.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b328630..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/newbies.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,804 +0,0 @@ - - Introducción a Linux/Unix - - - Uno de los objetivos de Gnome es hacer su sistema fácil de usar, - sin que usted necesite aprender los detalles técnicos sobre el sistema -operativo. No obstante, hay algunas nociones básicas de Unix - con las que debe familiarizarse, incluso cuando utilice la interfaz - gráfica amigable suministrada por Gnome. Para los nuevos usuarios, - estos comandos se engloban en este documento. Si usted necesita más - información acerca de UNIX, debe leer la documentación que vino con - su sistema, existen también numerosos libros y guías Internet que - están disponibles para todas las versiones de UNIX. - - - La siguiente guía se aplica a todas las versiones de UNIX y todos - los sistemas operativos parecidos a UNIX , incluidos ambos: comerciales - como Solaris y sistemas operativos de código - abierto como BSD y Linux. - Parte del material de esta guía está basado en la guía - Instalación de Linux e Inicio, escrito por - Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, Sean Dreilinger, - Robert Kiesling, Evan Liebovitch, y Henry Pierce. La guía está disponible - para descargar o consultar directamente en la dirección URL - Proyecto de - Documentación Linux o del - Grupo de Escritores de Código Abierto. - - - - Usuarios - UNIX es un sistema operativo multiusuario: fue designado para - permitir a varios usuarios trabajar en la misma computadora, ya sea - simultáneamente (utilizando varios terminales o en conexiones de red) - o en turnos. En sistemas UNIX, para identificarse usted en el sistema, - debe conectarse, lo que conlleva introducir su nombre de - acceso (el nombre que el sistema utiliza para - identificarle) y su contraseña, que es su clave - personal para introducirse en su cuenta personal. Porque sólo usted - conoce su clave de acceso, nadie más puede introducirse en el sistema - con su nombre de acceso. Normalmente se escoge el nombre, el apellido - o alguna variación de éstos como su nombre de acceso, por lo que si - su nombre es: Sasha Beilinson, su nombre de acceso podría ser: - Sasha. - - Cada usuario tiene un espacio separado para guardar sus - documentos (llamado directorio personal). - UNIX posee un sistema de permisos (ver ), - por lo cual en un Sistema UNIX apropiadamente configurado, un usuario - no puede cambiar archivos pertenecientes a otro usuario o al sistema. - Esto también permite a cada usuario, configurar varios aspectos del - sistema — para sí mismo, sin afectar a otros. - - En cada sistema UNIX, hay un usuario especial, llamado - administrador del sistema, con el nombre de - acceso root. Este usuario tiene - completo control sobre el sistema — - incluyendo acceso total a todos los archivos de sistema y de los - usuarios. Tiene autoridad para cambiar las claves de acceso de los - usuarios existentes y añadir nuevos usuarios, instalar y desinstalar - software, además de otras cosas. El administrador del Sistema, es - normalmente la persona responsable del correcto funcionamiento - del sistema, por lo que si presenta algún problema, debe acudir a él. - - - IMPORTANTE - Incluso si usted es el único usuario en su ordenador (por - ejemplo, si es ordenador personal), por lo que usted también es el - administrador del sistema, es importante que cree una cuenta de - usuario y la utilice para su trabajo diario, accediendo como - administrador ("root") sólo cuando sea necesario para el - mantenimiento del sistema. Dado que "root" puede hacer cualquier - cosa, es fácil cometer errores que tengan consecuencias catastróficas. - Imagine el usuario "root" como un sombrero mágico que le da a usted - mucho poder, con el que puede, con un movimiento de manos, crear o - destruir ciudades enteras. Ya que es fácil mover las manos de forma - destructiva, no es una buena idea utilizar el sombrero mágico - cuando no es necesario, a pesar de lo maravilloso que se siente. - - - - - Archivo y nombres de archivos - En la mayoría de los sistemas operativos (incluyendo UNIX), - existe el concepto de archivo, que es sólo - un conjunto de información con un nombre (llamado nombre - del archivo. Ejemplos de archivos, podrían ser su examen - final de historia, un mensaje de correo electrónico, o un programa - que pueda ser ejecutado. Esencialmente, cualquier cosa guardada - en disco es guardado en un archivo individual. - - - Nombres de archivos - - Los archivos son identificados por sus nombres. Por ejemplo, el - archivo que contiene una conferencia hablada, puede ser guardada - bajo el nombre de archivo talk.txt. No existe - un formato estándar para los nombres de los archivos, como existe - en MS-DOS y otros sistemas operativos; en general, el nombre de un - archivo puede contener cualquier carácter (excepto el carácter – - vea la explicación de los caminos de nombres debajo) y es limitado - ,en su extensión, a 256 caracteres. - - - IMPORTANTE - - A diferencia de MS-DOS, los nombres de archivo en UNIX son sensibles - a mayúsculas o minúsculas: midocumento.txt - y MiDocumento.txt, son considerados como - dos archivos diferentes. - - - - También debe conocer algunas convenciones en UNIX, que si bien no - son obligatorias, normalmente es una buena idea seguirlas. - - - Es costumbre utilizar el formato - nombrearchivo.extensión, para nombres - de archivo, en el que la extensión indica el tipo de archivo; - por ejemplo, la extensión txt es - normalmente utilizada para archivos de texto simple; - en tanto que la extensión jpeg es utilizada para gráficos en - formato JPEG, y así. En particular, la aplicación - Gestor de Archivos de Gnome - (Nautilus) utiliza extensiones para - determinar el tipo de archivo. Usted puede ver o cambiar - todas las - extensiones de archivo reconocidas por - Gnome, - escogiendo la opción - - tipos MIME - - de la sección - - Manejadores de documentos - - en el - Centro de control de GNOME. - - Observe que la convención estándar en UNIX es que los - ejecutables no tienen extensiones. - - - - - Los archivos y directorios cuyos nombres comienzan con - un punto (.), son normalmente, archivos de - configuración, esto significa que estos archivos - contienen propiedades y preferencias para varias aplicaciones. - Por ejemplo, Gnome guarda todos sus configuraciones en varios - archivos en los directorios .gnome y - .gnome-desktop en el directorio personal - del usuario. Como la mayor parte del tiempo usted no necesita - editar estos documentos manualmente, ni siquiera conocer su - preciso nombre o localización, - Nautilus - no suele mostrar estos archivos. Usted puede cambiar la - configuración como se indica en el manual de Nautilus. - - - - - Los archivos cuyos nombres terminan con (~), por lo - general son archivos de soporte (copias de seguridad) creados - por varias aplicaciones. Por ejemplo, cuando usted edita - un archivo miarchivo.txt con - emacs, se guarda la versión previa - en el archivo miarchivo.txt~. - - - - - - - Caracteres comodín - - Cuando usted entra órdenes desde la línea de comandos, - puede utilizar los llamados Caracteres comodín, - en lugar de un nombre de archivo exacto. El carácter comodín más - común es *, que corresponde a cualquier secuencia de símbolos - (incluyendo una línea vacía). Por ejemplo, la orden - ls *.txt va a listar todos los archivos con la - extensión txt, y la orden - rm capítulo* va a borrar todos los archivos cuyos - nombres comiencen con capítulo - (ls y rm son órdenes UNIX para - listar o borrar archivos). Otro carácter comodín es ?, - que corresponde a cualquier símbolo individual: por ejemplo: - rm capítulo?.txt borrará todos los archivos - capítulo1.txt, capítulo2.txt, pero no el - capítulo10.txt - - Muchos de los nuevos usuarios de GNOME prefiere utilizar el - Gestor de Archivos GNOME para - realizar las operaciones con los archivos, antes que hacerlo - desde la línea de comandos. Los caracteres comodín también - son útiles para Nautilus en los - diálogos de selección de archivos y de visualización de filtros. - - - - - - Uso de espacios, comas, etc. en los nombres de ficheros - -Como se menciono anteriormente, un nombre de fichero puede contener no solo letras -y números, sino también espacios, comas, etc. — cualquier carácter destino -de la barra (/). Sin embargo, si esta usando comandos tecleados en la linea de comandos, -debe tener cuidado cuando use estos ficheros. Para evitar problemas, es recomendable que -ponga entre comillas (') los nombres de ficheros cualquier otra cosa que no sea -letras, números, y puntos: para borrar Mi Fichero, debe teclear -rm 'Mi Fichero' en vez de rm Mi Fichero. - - -Por supuesto, si usa exclusivamente herramientas gráficas como el gestor de -ficheros de Gnome, no deberá preocuparse de estas cosas: para borrar el fichero -Mi Fichero, simplemente arrastrelo a la papelera. - - - - - - - Directorios y rutas - - Estructura de directorios - - Ahora, discutiremos el concepto de directorios. Un - directorio es una colección de archivos. - Se puede pensar como una carpeta que contiene muchos - documentos diferentes. A los directorios se les da nombres, - por los que pueden ser identificados. Más aún, los directorios - se mantienen en una estructura como de árbol, es decir, - el directorio puede contener otros directorios. El directorio de - más nivel es llamado el directorio raíz y denotado por - /; que contiene los archivos de su sistema. - - - Rutas - - Una ruta ("path") es realmente -el nombre completo del fichero; contiene no solo el -nombre del fichero, sino tambien su situación.Usted puede referirse -a un archivo por su ruta, - que se hace del nombre del documento, precedido por el nombre - del directorio que contiene ese documento. Este, a su vez, es - precedido por el nombre del directorio que contiene - este directorio y así. Una ruta típica - puede ser así: /home/sasha/talk.txt que - se refiere al archivo talk.txt en el - directorio sasha, el cual a su vez es un - subdirectorio de /home. - - - Como puede ver, el directorio y el nombre del archivo están - separados por una sola barra (/). Por esta razón los nombres - de los archivos no pueden contener en sí mismos el carácter /. - Los usuarios de MS-DOS encontrarán familiar esta convención, - a pesar de que en el mundo del MS-DOS se utiliza la barra - invertida (\). El directorio que contiene un subdirectorio dado, - es conocido como el directorio padre. - Aquí el directorio home es el padre del - directorio sasha. - - - Cada usuario tiene un directorio personal ("home"), el cual es - el directorio aparte que utiliza ese usuario para guardar - sus archivos. Normalmente, los directorios personales de los - usuarios están contenidos bajo /home, y son - nombrados por el usuario que posee ese directorio, por lo que el - directorio personal del usuario sasha - sería /home/sasha. - - - - - Nombres de directorios relativos - - En cualquier momento, las órdenes que usted introduce son asumidas - como relativas al directorio actual de trabajo. - Usted puede pensar que su directorio de trabajo es el directorio en - el que está actualmente localizado. Cuando usted se conecta - por primera vez, su directorio de trabajo es su directorio personal - — para el usuario sasha, esto sería - /casa/sasha. Cuando quiera referirse a un - archivo lo puede hacer en relación con su actual directorio - de trabajo, en lugar de especificar el nombre completo de la ruta - del archivo. - - - Por ejemplo, si su directorio actual es - /home/sasha, y tiene ahí un archivo llamado - talk.txt, puede referirse a éste por el nombre - del archivo: una orden como emacs talk.txt - ejecutada desde el directorio /home/sasha - es equivalente a emacs /home/sasha/talk.txt - (emacs es un editor extremadamente - poderoso para documentos de texto; los nuevos usuarios pueden - preferir algo más simple, tal como gnotepad, - pero para un usuario avanzado, emacs - es indispensable). - - - Similarmente, si en /home/sasha tiene un - subdirectorio llamado textos y, en ese - subdirectorio un archivo llamado - teoria_campo.txt, usted puede referirse a - éste como textos/teoria_campo.txt. - - Si usted comienza un nombre de un archivo (como - textos/teoria_campo.txt) con otro carácter - que no sea /, usted se está refiriendo al archivo en términos - relativos a su actual directorio de trabajo. Esto es conocido como - una ruta relativa. Por otro lado, si usted comienza el nombre del - archivo con un /, el sistema interpreta esto como una ruta completa - — esto es, una ruta que incluye la ruta completa al archivo, - comenzando por el directorio raíz, /.El uso de una ruta completa - es conocido como una ruta absoluta. - - - - Convenciones de ruta - - Aquí hay algunas convenciones estándar que puede utilizar en las rutas: - - - ~/ — directorio personal del usuario - - - ./ — directorio actual de trabajo - - - ../ — directorio padre del directorio - actual - - - Por ejemplo, si el directorio actual del usuario sasha es - /home/sasha/papers, puede referirse al - archivo /home/sasha/talk.txt como - ~/talk.txt o como - ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permisos - - Cada archivo en su sistema tiene un dueño — - uno de los usuarios (normalmente el que ha creado este archivo), y un - sistema de permisos que regula el acceso a éste archivo. - - - Para archivos ordinarios, existen 3 tipos de permisos de acceso: - leer, escribir y ejecutar ("Read", "Write", "eXecute") ( el último - sólo tiene sentido para archivos ejecutables). Estos permisos pueden - ser establecidos independientemente para 3 categorías de usuarios: - el dueño del archivo, los usuarios en el grupo que posee el archivo - y todos los demás. Las discusiones de grupos de usuarios van más allá - del alcance de este documento; las otras dos categorías se explican - por sí mismas. - Por tanto si los permisos en un archivo - /home/sasha/talk.txt están establecer para leer - y escribir por el usuario sasha, quien es el dueño del documento, y ser - leído solo por todos los demás, sólo sasha podrá modificar este - archivo. - - - - Todos los nuevos archivos creados llevan algunos permisos estándar, - por lo general leer/escribir para el usuario creador y leer sólo para - todos los demás. Usted puede ver los permisos utilizando el - Gestor de Archivos de GNOME, apretando el botón derecho del ratón en - el archivo, y escogiendo Propiedades en el - menú desplegable, y entonces la pestaña Permisos. - Utilizando este diálogo, puede también cambiar los permisos — - sólo presione en el cuadrado que representa el permiso para modificar - su estado. Por supuesto, sólo el dueño del archivo o el administrador - del sistema puede cambiar los permisos de un archivo. Los usuarios - avanzados también pueden cambiar los permisos de los archivos cuando - se establecen en la creación de los mismos — vea las páginas - del manual para su entorno de líneas de comandos, "shell" (normalmente - bash, csh o - tsch) y consulte la orden umask. - - - - Un archivo también puede tener propiedades especiales de permiso - como UID, GID y bit sticky. Estos permisos son sólo -para usuarios - avanzados — no los cambie a menos que usted sepa lo que está - haciendo. (Si usted es curioso: estos permisos son típicamente - utilizados en archivos ejecutables para permitir al usuario ejecutar - algunas órdenes para leer o modificar archivos - para los cuales el propio usuario no tiene acceso.) - - - Al igual que los archivos, los directorios también tienen permisos - especiales. Otra vez, existen 3 posibles permisos: leer, escribir y - ejecutar (Read,Write y - eXecute). No obstante, tienen diferente - significado: el llamado permiso de leer para un directorio, significa - permiso para listar el contenido del directorio o buscar un archivo; - escribir significa permiso para crear y eliminar archivos en el - directorio, y ejecutar significa permiso para acceder a los - archivos en el directorio. - - - Note que los permisos otorgados a un archivo dependen de los permisos - del directorio en el cual el documento está localizado: para ser capaz - de leer un archivo, el usuario necesita tener el permiso de leer para - el propio archivo y el permiso ejecutar para el directorio que lo - contiene. Por tanto, si el usuario sasha no quiere que nadie más vea - sus archivos, puede lograr esto eliminando los permisos de ejecución - de su directorio personal para todos los demás usuarios. De esta manera, - sólo él (y, por supuesto, el administrador root) podrán leer - cualquiera de sus archivos, sin importar cuales sean los permisos - individuales de los archivos. - - Una explicación detallada del sistema de permisos puede ser - encontrada, por ejemplo, - - -en las -páginas info -del paquete de Utilidades de Archivos GNU. - - - - - Enlaces simbólicos - - Además de los archivos regulares, UNIX tiene también archivos - especiales llamados enlaces simbólicos - ("symbolic links" o symlinks, para acortar). - Estos archivos no contienen datos; en su lugar solo son - "apuntadores" o "atajos" a otros archivos. Por ejemplo, sasha puede - tener un symlink llamado ft.txt que apunta al - documento pruebas/teoriacampo.txt; de esta manera - cuando un programa trata de acceder al archivo - ft.txt, el archivo - pruebas/teoriacampo.txt será abierto en su lugar. - Como puede ver por este ejemplo, el symlink y el archivo destino pueden - tener nombres diferentes y ser localizados en directorios diferentes. - - Note que eliminar, mover o renombrar un documento symlink no tiene - efecto en el archivo destino: si sasha trata de eliminar el - archivo ft.txt, es el symlink lo que se eliminará, - y el archivo pruebas/teoriacampo.txt seguirá - inalterado. También los permisos del symlink no tienen significado - alguno, son los permisos del archivo destino los que determinan - si el usuario tiene acceso a éste. - - - Los symlinks también pueden apuntar a directorios. Por ejemplo, - en el servidor de FTP de GNOME (ftp.gnome.org), - existe un archivo /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, que en el - momento en que se escribe este manual, es un enlace simbólico al -directorio - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53. -— como podra imaginar, October Gnome es simplemente -otro nombre de la versión 1.0.53 de Gnome. - - - - Montando y desmontando dispositivos - - Como hemos mencionado anteriormente, los directorios en un entorno - UNIX están organizados en un árbol, cuyo directorio raíz es - /. A diferencia de otros sistemas operativos - como MS-DOS, no hay nombres especiales para los archivos en - la unidad de disquete o en el CD-ROM: todos - los archivos accesibles por su sistema deben aparecen en él - árbol de directorios principal que empieza por /. - - - Por tanto, antes de que usted tenga acceso a los archivos en un - disquete o CD-ROM, usted debe dar a su sistema una orden para - incorporar los contenidos del disquete en el árbol directorio - principal, al cual se le refiere como montaje - del disquete. -Puede verlo como el equivalente software a la conexion del dispositivo -a su sistema. -Típicamente, los contenidos del CD-ROM aparecen bajo - el nombre mnt/cdrom; los del disquete bajo - /mnt/floppy (éstos son los llamados - puntos de montaje y son definidos en el - archivo especial de configuración, /etc/fstab). - El acceso a una unidad, de esta manera, no significa que el sistema - copiará todos los archivos del CD al directorio - /mnt/cdrom. En su lugar, esto significa que el - directorio /mnt/cdrom - representa al CD-ROM: Cuando un programa trata - de tener acceso, digamos a un archivo llamado - /mnt/cdrom/index.html, el sistema buscará el - archivo index.html en el CD-ROM. - - - Por tanto, en pocas palabras: antes de que usted pueda utilizar - archivos en una unidad, usted debe "montarlo". Similarmente - antes de sacar el disco del lector, usted debe - desmontarlo. - - - Cuando utilice GNOME, usualmente no tiene que preocuparse por montar - y desmontar: GNOME busca el archivo con la configuración apropiada y - localiza los iconos para todas las unidades en su escritorio. Al hacer - doble clic en cualquiera de estos iconos, automáticamente se monta la - unidad correspondiente (si no estaba montado ya) y ejecuta el - gestor de archivos en el directorio apropiado. Similarmente, si usted - hace doble clic en el icono unidad y escoge la orden Sacar - disco del menú desplegable, GNOME desmonta - automáticamente antes de sacarlo. Usted puede también montar/desmontar - una unidad presionando con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de su - escritorio y escogiendo Montar unidad o - Desmontar unidad del menú desplegable, o - utilizando el aplique de montaje de discos. - - - Note que usted no puede desmontar una unidad si está siendo utilizado - por algún programa; por ejemplo, si usted tiene abierta una ventana - terminal en el directorio de la unidad que usted está tratando de - desmontar. Entonces, recibe el mensaje de error "Controlador ocupado" - mientras intenta desmontar la unidad, asegúrese de que ninguna de sus - aplicaciones abiertas esté teniendo acceso a un archivo o directorio - en esta unidad. - - - No obstante GNOME no puede impedir que usted saque el disco manualmente - de la unidad &mdash, en este caso es su responsabilidad el desmontar la - unidad antes de hacerlo. Para unidades de CD o Zip, el sistema bloquea - el botón de sacado de la unidad mientras la unidad esté montado, para - los disquetes, esto es técnicamente imposible. - - - - IMPORTANTE - - Si usted saca un disquete utilizando un botón de sacado de la unidad - sin desmontarlo primero, usted puede perder sus datos! - - - - Algunos sistemas tienen programas especiales como -supermount o magicdev, - que montan automáticamente una unidad cuando - se inserta un disco y desmonta la unidad si ésta no se ha utilizado - por un período de tiempo específico. En este caso, usted nunca - deberá preocuparse de montar/desmontar unidades usted mismo; no -necesita por tanto ni leer esta sección. - - - El permitir a los usuarios el montar y desmontar unidades conlleva - algunos riesgos de seguridad, muchos sistemas multiusuarios se - configuran de modo - que sólo el usuario administrador "root" puede montar y desmontar - una unidad. Esta es la causa mas probable de los errores al intentar - montar un dispositivo. En este caso, plantee este problema al - administrador de su sistema. - - - Si la computadora es su estación de trabajo personal o el ordenador - personal de casa y no le preocupa la seguridad, usted puede - dar permiso de montar unidades a usuarios ordinarios. La manera más - fácil de permitir ello es el uso de la aplicación - linuxconf (que sólo - puede ser ejecutada por el usuario administrador "root"). Sólo - seleccione la unidad a la que quiere acceder en la sección - Unidades de acceso local de la pestaña - Opciones de la opción - Montable por usuarios. Su unidad será ahora - montable por los usuarios. - - - Si linuxconf no está - disponible, usted debe editar el archivo - /etc/fstab para incluir acceso a usuarios. Esto - se hace añadiendo el atributo del "usuario" a la unidad. Por ejemplo: - - - Si su archivo fstab contiene una línea como ésta: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - añada la palabra "usuario" a la cuarta columna: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - - Controladores y dispositivos - -En Unix, la palabra dispositivo se usa para todos los dispositivos -periféricos conectados al ordenador; esto incluye los discos duros, disqueteras -y CDROM, tarjetas de vídeo y audio, puertos serie y paralelo, y demás cosas. -Cada dispositivo tiene un nombre, como /dev/hda. Los nombres -mas comunes se listan a continuación (para Linux; otras variedades de Unix pueden -usar nombres de dispositivos ligeramente diferentes). - - - /dev/hd* (donde *=a,b,c, - …): son los dispositivos IDE, como discos duros, -lectores CDROM y dispositivos ZIP. /dev/hda representa -el dispositivo maestro del primer controlador IDE (usualmente el primer disco -duro, /dev/hda en windows), /dev/hdb -es el dispositivo esclavo del primer controlador (puede ser un segundo disco -duro o un CDROM), y así sucesivamente. -Véase también la nota mas abajo acerca -de los dispositivos ZIP. - - - - /dev/sd* (donde *=a,b,c, …): -son los dispositivos SCSI, normalmente discos duros. - - - - - NOTA - -Si los acrónimos IDE y SCSI son nuevo para usted, he aquí una breve -explicación: hay dos tipos de interfaces para discos duros y otros -dispositivos similares: IDE ( y sus parientes como EIDE, ATAPI, etc.) -y SCSI. SCSI proporciona mejores prestaciones, pero es mas caro, así que -se usa solo en los servidores. Si no esta seguro del tipo de dispositivos -que tiene, lo mas probable es que sean IDE. - - - - - /dev/fd* (donde *=0,1, etc) -son las disqueteras; /dev/fd0 es la primera -disquetera (corresponde con A: en windows), -/dev/fd1 es la segunda - (B:), etc. - - - - /dev/lp* (donde *=0,1, etc) -son los puertos paralelos; generalmente, estos puertos se usan -para conectar impresoras a su ordenador. -/dev/lp0 corresponde con - LPT1 en Windows, - /dev/lp1 con LPT2, - etc. - - - /dev/ttyS* (donde *=0,1, - etc) son los puertos serie; estos puertos se usan generalmente -un ratón o un módem. /dev/ttyS0 corresponde con - COM1 en Windows, - /dev/ttyS1 con COM2, - etc. - - - - /dev/audio y - /dev/dsp — -estos dos dispositivos se usan para la tarjeta de audio (no hay equivalentes, -ya que se usan para diferentes tipos de ficheros de audio). - - - - -Además, es una practica común disponer de enlaces simbólicos, -/dev/floppy, /dev/modem y /dev/cdrom, -apuntando a los nombres reales de los dispositivos que correspondan -con la disquetera, módem, y CDROM, respectivamente. - - -En raras ocasiones necesitara usar los nombres de los dispositivos. -En particular, si necesita acceder a un fichero en dispositivo, no -usara el nombre del dispositivo (como /dev/fd0); -en su lugar, primero montara el dispositivo de forma que su contenido -como un subdirectorio (por ejemplo, /mnt/floppy) -en el árbol de directorios principal, y usara entonces ese directorio -para acceder a los ficheros; -Véase para mas información. Prácticamente el -único momento en que necesitara usar los nombres de los dispositivos -sera cuando este configurando algún nuevo programa. -Por ejemplo, un programa de fax puede pedirle el nombre del dispositivo -que representa su módem ( en cuyo caso puede o bien darle el nombre real -del dispositivo, como /dev/ttyS1, o bien usar -simplemente un enlace simbólico /dev/modem). - - -Y solo para satisfacer su curiosidad: también hay un dispositivo -llamado /dev/null que actúa como un -agujero negro: puede enviar allí cualquier información, -y jamas volverá. Así que si no quiere que le molesten los mensajes de -error, redirijalos a /dev/null -:). - - - - Particiones - -Observe que se puede subdividir un disco duro (o un dispositivo similar) -en partes que se comportan a todos los efectos como discos independientes, -aunque residan físicamente en el mismo disco. -Estas partes se llaman particiones (en Windows, se conocen -como discos lógicos). -Por ejemplo, puede decidir el disco duro en varias particiones, e instalar -diferentes sistemas operativos en diferentes particiones; puede formatear -de nuevo cada partición independientemente del resto. -la división del disco duro se realiza normalmente durante la instalación -del sistema operativo; para mas información remitase a su guia de instalación. - - -Si se ha dividido su disco duro, entonces cada partición se considera como -un dispositivo separado. Por ejemplo, si su disco duro es -/dev/hda, entonces nos referiremos a la primera partición de este -dispositivo como /dev/hda1, la segunda como -/dev/hda2, y así sucesivamente. - - - Particionar discos ZIP - - -Por razones que desconocemos, los disco ZIP preformateados a la venta -en las tiendas o formateados usando las herramientas ZIP de Iomega en Windows -están particionados de una forma curiosa: -tienen solo una partición (de tipo windows, por supuesto). De este modo, si -su dispositivo ZIP es /dev/hdc, el nombre correcto del -dispositivo que debería usar para estos discos es /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - Interfaz gráfica de usuario: el sistema de ventanas X, el gestor de ventanas, y los entornos de escritorios. - -Unix es un sistema modular: se compone de muchos componentes de forma que el -usuario (o el administrador de sistemas) pueda escoger aquellos componentes -que necesite. En particular, hay varias capas de software responsables de la -interfaz gráfica de usuario. Estas capas son: el sistema de ventanas X, el gestor -de ventanas, y el entorno de escritorio. - - El -sistema de ventanas X (También conocido como X, o X11) es -el componente de los sistemas Unix responsable de virtualmente todas las operaciones -gráficas básicas — en particular, de dibujar los iconos, los fondos, y -las ventanas en las que se ejecutan las aplicaciones. -Sin las X, solo tendríamos la linea de comandos. X11 determina la resolución de -la pantalla y la profundidad de color, mueve el cursor del ratón alrededor de -la pantalla, etc. Sirve de base para otros componentes de la interfaz gráfica -de usuario como los gestores de ventanas y los entornos de escritorio. - - Los -gestores de ventanas extienden las capacidades del sistema -de ventanas X poniendo bordes y botones alrededor de la ventanas, lo que permite -al usuario moverlas, cerrarlas, ocultarlas o cambiar su tamaño. -X11 se usa casi siempre en combinación con un gestor de ventanas, ya que seria -prácticamente inutilizable sin el. -Hay muchos gestores de ventanas disponibles para X11; los mas populares -son -fvwm, - mwm, kwm - (usado por KDE), Enlightenment, y - Sawfish. - - -Finalmente, un entorno de escritorio va un paso mas -allá del gestor de ventanas, añadiendo un gestor gráfico de ficheros desde -el cual podrá arrastrar y soltar elementos sobre su escritorio, un panel -que puede usarse para lanzar las aplicaciones usadas frecuentemente, y -un conjunto de aplicaciones y utilidades. -Hay varios entornos de escritorio disponibles para todas las versiones -de Unix; Los mas populares son -GNOME, -KDE y -CDE -(pronto sustituido por GNOME). - - -casi todos los entornos de escritorio contienen un gestor de ventanas -como parte integral; por ejemplo, KDE contiene su propio gestor de -ficheros, kwm (es posible usar KDE con otro -gestor de ventanas, pero poca gente lo hace). Gnome no dispone de su -propio gestor de ventanas; le permite escoger cualquier gestor de ventanas -que tenga ya en su sistema. Para hacer la vida mas fácil a los nuevos -usuarios, se distribuye generalmente el gestor de ventanas -Sawfish con Gnome y se usa por defecto; -puede cambiar a otro gestor de ventanas usando el -Centro de control de GNOME. -Observe en cualquier caso que necesita un gestor de ventanas compatible con -Gnome para usar algunas de las funcionalidades de Gnome, como el gestor de -sesiones, el aplique barra de tareas, etc. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/panel.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/panel.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 46164b3..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/panel.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2246 +0,0 @@ - - - Panel GNOME - - Introducción - - - Panel - - El Panel Gnome es el corazón de la interfaz - GNOME y actúa como un depósito para el Menú - principal, los menús de usuario, - lanzadores de aplicaciones, apliques (aplicaciones que se ejecutan - enteramente dentro del panel),cajones - , y numerosos objetos especiales. - El Panel se diseño para ser altamente - configurable. Puede - personalizar su aspecto y apariencia fácilmente y - añadir y quitar objetos para - adaptarse a sus necesidades y preferencias personales. Puede incluso - tener múltiples paneles, cada uno - con su propia apariencia, propiedades, y contenidos. Esta flexibilidad - le permite crear fácilmente un confortable y eficiente entorno - de escritorio personalizado. - - - Este manual describe la versión 1.4 del Panel - Gnome. - - - - - - Lo básico - - El uso del panel de Gnome es muy simple y - es fácil de usar para todo aquel que haya usado un entorno de - escritorio gráfico. Esta sección le dará instrucciones básicas - que le ayudaran en sus comienzos, y las siguientes secciones - presentaran los distintos objetos y funciones en mayor detalle. - - - - Introducción a los objetos del panel - - Un panel puede contener muchos tipos de - objetos. El panelde ejemplo en - muestra cada uno de los tipos - de objetos de panel. - -
- Un ejemplo de panel - - Un ejemplo de panel. - - - -
- - - Este ejemplo de panel contiene los siguientes - objetos: - - - - Menús - - Los menús son listas de ítem, cada uno de los cuales puede - arrancar una aplicación, ejecutar un comando, o ser un submenú. - En el ejemplo de panel en , el icono mas a la izquierda - después de la flecha es un estilizado icono de una huella - de un pie (el logo de Gnome). Este es el Menú - principal , uno de los objetos mas importantes en el - panel. Este menú proporciona acceso a - la mayoría de las aplicaciones, comandos, y opciones de - configuración disponibles en Gnome. El menú - principal se describe en detalle en . el segundo icono mostrado es un carpeta, - el icono usado por omisión para los menús de usuario. Gnome - permite a los usuarios crear sus propios menús con contenidos - personalizados para usarlos en unión del menú - principal. Para abrir un menú, simplemente pulse - sobre el icono con el botón izquierdo del ratón. Para obtener - más información sobre los menús, véase . - - - - - - Lanzadores - - Los lanzadores son botones que o bien arrancan una aplicación - o bien ejecutan un comando cuando se pulsan (pulsar con - el botón izquierdo del ratón). el tercer icono en el - panel de ejemplo es un lanzador que - arranca la hoja de cálculo Gnumeric. - Para obtener más información sobre lanzadores, véase . - - - - - - Apliques - - Los apliques son aplicaciones que se ejecutan ocupando una - pequeña parte del Panel. Los iconos del - cuarto al octavo en el Panel de ejemplo - son apliques. El primer aplique mostrado es el aplique - el tiempo de Gnome , - - que periódicamente descarga la actuales condiciones atmosféricas - de la Web y muestra la información. El segundo aplique - mostrado es el montador de dispositivos, - que muestra cuando un disco (en este caso, un disquete) está - montado y permite montar y desmontar el dispositivo con una - simple pulsación de ratón. El tercer aplique mostrado es el - lanzador rápido, que actúa como un - contenedor para lanzadores, pero ahorra espacio al no situar - los lanzadores directamente en el Panel. - En el ejemplo mostrado el aplique lanzador - rápido contiene seis lanzadores de aplicaciones. - Después está el paginador de escritorio Gnome, - que permite controlar múltiples escritorios virtuales, cada - uno de los cuales puede tener múltiples pantallas. Puede - moverse entre escritorios y pantallas pulsando con el botón - izquierdo del ratón. El ultimo aplique mostrado es la - lista de tareas, que permite controlar - las ventanas de aplicaciones de distintas maneras, incluyendo - cambiar del foco, iconificar ventanas, cerrar ventanas, y matar - ventanas. La lista de tareas mostrada - corresponde a una pantalla con dos ventanas, ambas con la aplicación - Ojos eléctricos (Electric Eyes). Para - obtener más información sobre apliques, véase . - - - - - - Cajones - - Los cajones son esencialmente extensiones del - Panel que pueden abrirse o cerrarse. Puede - contener cualquier cosa que pueda contener el - Panel. El icono marrón de un cajón en - el Panel de ejemplo es el icono por - omisión para los cajones, pero se puede usar cualquier icono. - Pulse en el icono del cajón con el botón - izquierdo del ratón para abrirlo y cerrarlo. Para obtener más - información sobre los cajones, véase . - - - - - - Objetos especiales - - Los objetos especiales son elementos que puede añadir en el - Panel para realizar funciones que no - están generalmente disponibles a través de otros objetos del - Panel. El ultimo ítem en el - Panel de ejemplo es un objeto especial - llamado Botón de salida. Al pulsar el - botón izquierdo sobre él, comienza la secuencia de salida de la - sesión Gnome. Para obtener más información acerca de los - objetos especiales, véase . - - - - - - - Cada uno de estos tipos de objetos se describe en detalle en las - siguientes secciones. Puede añadir, mover, o quitar fácilmente - objetos del Panel (véase ). - - - - - Menú del botón derecho - - Al pulsar con el botón derecho del ratón sobre cualquier objeto - del Panel se abre el menú del botón derecho. - Este menú contiene los ítem Quitar del panel - para eliminar objetos del Panel, - Mover para mover objetos dentro del - Panel o entre dos Paneles, - el submenú de Panel descrito más abajo, - y generalmente uno o mas menús específicos al objeto. Para los - cajones, menús, y lanzadores el único ítem especifico al objeto es - Propiedades... que permite personalizar - las propiedades y parámetros del objeto. Para los apliques, el menú - botón derecho contiene a menudo el ítem - Acerca... para mostrar información sobre el - aplique como el nombre del autor y la versión del aplique, - Ayuda para ver la documentación del aplique, - y Propiedades... para configurar las - preferencias y parámetros del aplique. Los apliques tienen a menudo - otros controles específicos en su menú de botón derecho. - - - El submenú Panel permite crear y eliminar Paneles - y añadir objetos al - Panel. Permite también modificar las - propiedades del Panel en que se esté - particularmente interesado, usando el ítem de menú - Propiedades (véase ) - o las propiedades de todos los Paneles usando - el ítem de menú Propiedades globales... - (véase ). - - - Puede también pulsar con el botón derecho en el - Panel mismo. Esto abrirá el - Menú principal. Más concretamente, este - menú también contiene el submenú Panel - descrito anteriormente. - - - - - Ocultando el panel - - - Panel Botones para ocultar - - - Panel Ocultar - - Los iconos representado flechas que pueden verse en los extremos - izquierdo y derecho del Panel y en - se usan para ocultar el Panel. -
- Botón de ocultar - - Botón de ocultar - - - -
- - - Pulsando una de estas flechas ocultara el Panel - deslizándolo en la dirección de la flecha pulsada, de forma que la - única parte del Panel que permanecerá visible - será el botón de Ocultar mismo. Pulsándolo - una segunda vez expandirá el Panel. - - - Los Paneles pueden configurarse para que se - oculten automáticamente cuando no se están usando, y reaparecer - cuando se mueva el ratón a la parte visible del - panel en la pantalla. Esta es una característica - muy útil si no puede utilizar su sistema con en una pantalla de - alta resolución. Podrá aprender como hacer que el - Panel se auto-oculte en . - - - - - Terminar la sesión - - Para terminar la sesión Gnome, pulse el botón derecho sobre el - Panel y elija la opción - Terminar sesión. Se abrirá el formulario - Terminar, mostrado en . - -
- Formulario terminar - - Terminar - - - -
- - Si quiere salvar la configuración actual, marque la casilla - Guardar la configuración actual. Se salvará - cualquier aplicación Gnome que tenga abierta y los cambios - realizados en el Centro de control. - - - La forma habitual de terminar la sesión es usando la opción - Terminar sesión, que termina la sesión Gnome - pero no apaga el ordenador. Dependiendo de la configuración de - su sistema, dispondrá también de la opción - Apagar el equipo, que apaga el ordenador, - y de la opción Reiniciar el equipo, que - reiniciará el ordenador. - - - Nota para usuarios avanzados - - Las opciones Apagar y Reiniciar - sólo se mostrarán si dispone de permisos para ejecutar el comando - /usr/bin/shutdown. - - - - Si no quiere terminar la sesión, pulse el botón - No y volverá a la sesión Gnome. - En caso contrario pulse el botón Sí para - terminar la sesión. - - - Opción terminar la sesión y los gestores de ventanas - - Si se esta ejecutando un gestor de ventanas compatible con - Gnome, la función terminar sesión, cerrará tanto el gestor de - ventanas como Gnome. Si se está ejecutando un gestor de ventanas - no compatible, deberá cerrar el gestor de ventanas usted mismo. - - - - Puede deshabilitar el formulario Terminar sesión - de forma que al seleccionar el ítem de menú - Terminar sesión se terminará la sesión Gnome - sin realizar pregunta alguna. Para conseguirlo, arranque el - Centro de control seleccionando - Menú principalConfiguración - Programas de inicio - y desactivando el botón Preguntar al salir de la - sesión. - - - - - - - Bloquear la pantalla - - Algunas veces se quiere dejar su ordenador ejecutando Gnome y no - permitir a terceros usar o ver la sesión Gnome. Gnome permite - hacerlo bloqueando la pantalla, y pidiendo una clave para - desbloquearla. Para bloquear la sesión Gnome, pulse el botón - derecho del ratón sobre cualquiera de los extremos del - Panel y elija - Bloquear la pantalla. Alternativamente, - si tiene el Icono de bloqueo (véase - ) en uno de los - Paneles, puede simplemente pulsar este - icono para bloquear la pantalla. Para desbloquear la pantalla, - teclee simplemente su clave de acceso. - - - Salva pantallas y icono de bloqueo - - El icono bloqueo de pantalla usa una de - las funcionalidades del programa xscreensaver - . Este es el mismo programa que usa el - Centro de control para activar el salva pantallas. - Con el fin de que el icono bloqueo de pantalla - funcione de forma correcta, debe habilitar un salva pantallas - en el Centro de control. - - - - - - - - El menú principal - - - El menú principal - - El icono huella de pie situado en la parte izquierda del - Panel de ejemplo (véase ) y en - tenemos el Menú principal (si, tiene razón, - es la huella de pie de Gnome). Este menú nos da acceso a casi - todas las funciones de Gnome — todas las aplicaciones, - herramientas de configuración, indicador de linea de comandos, - comandos para Terminar sesión y - Bloquear de pantalla, y mucho mas. - Para acceder a cualquiera de estos ítem, pulse con el ratón en el - Menú principal. Debe soltar el botón del - ratón después de pulsar en el botón Menú principal - para disfrutar así del resto de las funcionalidades activadas - a través del ratón en el Menú principal como - los menús desplegables activados con el botón derecho y las - funciones arrastrar y soltar desde el menú hacia el escritorio - o hacia el Panel. - - - - También puede acceder al Menú principal haciendo - clic en el Panel con el botón derecho del ratón. - Si lo desea, puede tener varios botones menú principal - en diferentes Paneles. - - - - Menú Globales - - Además del Menú principal que tiene al apretar - el icono de la huella, GNOME también le proporciona un Menú - Global, que contiene los mismos comandos pero que no es - atado a ningún botón. Para acceder al Menú Global, - apriete el botón derecho del ratón en un lugar vacío del - Panel. También puede acceder al - Menú Global apretando - Alt F1 - . (Puede cambiar esta tecla por defecto para activar - Menú Global en la pestaña Miscelánea del - diálogo Preferencias - Globales del Panel.) - - - Observe que el Menú Global se configura - independientemente del Menú Principal, - mediante la pestaña Menú en el - diálogo Preferencias - Globales del Panel. - - - - - Componentes del menú principal - - El componente primario del Menú principal es - el submenú Programas, que contiene una - lista de elementos de menús y submenús preconfigurados. Encontrará - aquí todas las aplicaciones Gnome, desde la hoja de calculo - Gnumeric hasta el juego - Free Cell, así como un buen número de - otras aplicaciones no de Gnome, como el navegador - Netscape y el editor de textos - emacs. Además, el submenú - Programas también contiene los siguientes - comandos: - - - - - Gestor de ficheros — Arranca el - gestor gráfico de ficheros Gnome. - - - - - Sistema de ayuda — arranca el - Visualizador de ayudas Gnome. El - Visualizador de ayudas Gnome proporciona - acceso a la mayoría de la documentación instalada en su sistema — - no solo la documentación Gnome (la guia de usuario Gnome, los - manuales de aplicaciones, …), si no también otros tipos - de documentos (paginas de manual, paginas info, &hellip:). - - - - - Ademas del submenu Programas, el - Menú principal contiene también un buen número - de submenús y utiles comandos. Dependiendo de su configuracion, - puede que no aparezca nada de esto. Además, algunos de ellos - pueden mostrarse como submenus, y otros incluidos como parte del - Menú principal, separados por lineas horizontales - de las demás partes. Estos submenus y comandos adicionales son: - - - - - Favoritos. Este submenu, que está - originalmente vacio, es el lugar donde puede poner sus - aplicaciones favoritos para un acceso rapido. Puede editar este - menú usando el Editor de menus, al que - puede acceder desde el Menú principal eligiendo - propiedadesEditor - de menús. Puede además añadir cualquier - ítem desde cualquier otro menu (en particular, desde el menu - Programas) al menu Favoritos - pulsando con el boton derecho del ratón sobre un ítem y - seleccionando Añadir al menu personal. - - - - - Apliques. Este submenú contiene todos - los apliques instalados en su sistema. Al seleccionar un aplique, - este se añadira a su Panel. - - - - - Menus Kde. Muestra los menús del entorno - de escritorio K (Kde) si lo tiene instalado en su sistema. - - - - - Menús "Anotherlevel" y Menús - Debian. Estos submenús muestran los menús de - aplicaciones por defecto de Red Hat Linux y Debian Gnu/Linux, - respectivamnete. Solo se presentarán a los usuarios de estas - distribuciones concretas. - - - - - Panel. Este submenú puede usarse para - cambiar las propiedades del Panel (tanto - para Paneles individuales - como para - globales, o sea para todos los Paneles), - añadir un objeto al Panel, - Quitar este Panel - ,Crear un nuevoPanel - , o ver el Manual del panel. - - - - - Escritorio — Este submenú contiene - Terminar sesión, que termina su sesión - Gnome (véase ), y Bloquear - la pantalla (véase ). - - - - - lanzar … — Este submenú - abre el diálogo lanzar programa para ejecutar - comandos de la línea de comandos (véase ). - - - - - - - Configurar el menú principal - - Para cambiar la configuración del Menú principal, - pulse el botón del Menú principal con el botón - derecho (mostrado en ) y elija - Propiedades … del menú desplegable. - Se mostrará el formulario Propiedades del menú. - En este formulario, para cada uno de los submenús del - Menú principal listado mas abajo - (Programas, Favoritos, - …) puede escoger si quiere que se muestre como parte del - Menú principal, como un submenú, o que no se - muestre en modo alguno. - - -
- Formulario de propiedades de menú - - Formulario de propiedades de menú - - - -
- - - Puede también editar el contenido del submenú - Favoritos (o, si es el administrador de sistemas, - también el submenú Programas) usando el - Editor de menús Gnome. Para arrancarlo, - pulse el botón derecho del ratón sobre el icono del - Menú principal y elija Editar - menús …. Alternativamente, puede arrancar el - Editor de menús Gnome seleccionando - Programas Propiedades - Editor de menús - en el mismo Menú principal. - - - - - - - - - Menús - - Además del Menú principal, presentado en , puede también añadir "menús normales" al - Panel. Un ejemplo de menú, en este caso el menú - Favoritos contiene tres lanzadores de aplicaciones y - un submenú llamado Juegos, se muestra en - . A diferencia del Menú - principal, los menús normales solo contienen cualquier - lanzador o submenú que ponga en ellos - no hay submenús por omisión, - comando Lanzar..., etc., como los - que hay en el menú principal. Puede también añadir cualquier submenú al - menú Favoritos o al menú Programas - como un menú separado en el Panel; para conseguirlo, - abra este submenú en el Menú principal, pulse sobre - el título del submenú con el botón derecho del ratón, y elija - Añadir este menú al panel. - -
- Un ejemplo de menú - - Un ejemplo de menú - - - -
- - - Añadir un menú en el panel - - Para aprender como añadir un menú en el Panel, - véase . - - - - - Extraer un menú - - Todos los menús de Gnome incluyen la funcionalidad de extracción: - si pulsa con el botón izquierdo en la línea perforada (fina línea - de guiones en la parte superior del menú, justo encima del título - del menú), el menú se convertirá en una ventana separada en su - escritorio, la cual permanecerá allí incluso después de que se - mueva el ratón a otro cualquier otro sitio. Esto es muy práctico - si va a usar el mismo comando de un profundo menú anidado - frecuentemente. Para eliminar este menú extraído de su escritorio, - pulse el botón Cerrar en el título de la - ventana (su apariencia y situación depende del gestor de ventanas que - esté usando, pero usualmente el botón mas a la derecha, etiquetada - con una "x"). - - - - - Configurar un menú - - Puede cambiar fácilmente el nombre y el icono de un menú (solo - para algunos menús de usuario, no para los submenú del - Menú principal). Para hacerlo, pulse con el botón - derecho en el menú (en la parte superior de la lista, encima del - resto de elementos), y seleccione Propiedades… - del menú desplegable. Esto abrirá el formulario Propiedades - del ítem de escritorio, muy similar al formulario de - Propiedades del lanzador - . - - - Para añadir un nuevo ítem en el menú, pulse el botón derecho en el - nombre del menú, y seleccione Añadir un nuevo ítem en - este menú. Esto abrirá el formulario - Crear un ítem de menú, en el que podrá - introducir el nombre del ítem, comentario, comando, y tipo (véase - para mayor información). Para eliminar - un elemento del menú, pulse el botón derecho sobre el elemento y - seleccione Eliminar este elemento. - - - Finalmente, una pregunta frecuentemente planteada es: - "¿Como puedo cambiar el tipo de letra y al fondo usado por los menús?" - La respuesta es que vienen dada por el actual tema Gtk, que puede - cambiarse en el Centro de control Gnome - seleccionando Menú principal - Parámetros - interfaz de usuario - Temas. - - - - - - - Lanzadores - - Los lanzadores son básicamente botones que residen en el panel y - arrancan una aplicación o ejecutan un comando cuando se pulsan. - Un lanzador puede usar cualquier icono y tiene un consejo - personalizado que muestra un mensaje cuando el cursor sobrevuela - el lanzador. - - - Puede cambiar propiedades del lanzador, como el icono que usa y - su nombre, pulsando sobre él con el botón derecho y eligiendo - Propiedades del menú desplegable. Se abrirá - el formulario propiedades del lanzador mostrado - en . El mismo formulario se usa al - crear un lanzador (véase ). Tenga también en - cuenta que, internamente, Gnome no diferencia los ítem de menú y - los lanzadores: son dos caras de la misma moneda. Puede poner - cualquier ítem de menú en el panel y se - presentará como un lanzador. Así pues, toda la información a - continuación se aplica de igual modo a los ítem de menú y a los - lanzadores. - -
- Diálogo crear un lanzador/propiedades del lanzador - - Diálogo crear un lanzador/propiedades del lanzador - - - -
- - Este diálogo tiene dos carpetas Básico y - Avanzado. En la carpeta Básico, - puede indicar lo siguiente: - - - - - Nombre — - Es el nombre de la aplicación, por ejemplo, - Terminal Gnome. Este nombre se usará - posteriormente si pone el lanzador en un menú. - - - - - Comentario — - Es una breve explicación de lo que hace la aplicación, - por ejemplo,Programa de emulación de terminal. - Se usará para los consejos. - - - - - Comando — - El comando que se usa para ejecutar la aplicación, por ejemplo, - gnome-terminal. - - - - - Tipo — - Debería ser Application; no lo cambie a - no ser que quiera crear algo que no sea un lanzador de - aplicaciones. - - - - - Icono — - Este es el icono que se utilizará para identificar al lanzador - en el Panel. Si no se especifica un icono, - se utilizará el icono por defecto. Para cambiar el icono - simplemente apriete en él para ejecutar el navegador de iconos. - - - - - Ejecutar en terminal — - Esta opción indica que una aplicación se debe ejecutar desde - un terminal. Si la aplicación no abre ninguna ventana marque - esta opción. Si no está seguro déjelo desmarcado. - - - - - - La carpeta Avanzado se muestra a continuación. - Está destinada a usuarios avanzados; la mayoría de las veces, - no necesitará realizar ningún cambio en estas opciones. - -
- Diálogo propiedades avanzadas del lanzador - - Diálogo propiedades avanzadas del lanzador - - - -
- - En esta carpeta, puede activar las siguientes características: - - - - - Probar esto antes de usar — - Puede teclear un comando, y Gnome comprobará si este comando - puede ejecutarse. Si no puede, el lanzador (o el ítem de menú) - no se mostrará aunque los añada en un panel o en un menú. - Está destinado a la gente que prepara distribuciones Gnome: por - ejemplo, el menú principal por defecto de - Gnome contiene un ítem para el programa de correo electrónico - TkRat, pero no se mostrará a no ser - que TkRat esté instalado en su sistema. - - - - - Documentación — - Sin uso en la actualidad. - - - - - Traducción para el nombre/comentario — - Puede introducir aquí la traducción del - nombre y del comentario - a otros idiomas. Por ejemplo, para el GNOME - Terminal, la traducción al Español (es) del - nombre es: Terminal UNIX de GNOME y - del comentario es: Emulador de terminal GNOME. - De esta forma si el usuario escoge como idioma el Español - al identificarse en el sistema (puede hacerlo seleccionando - el idioma apropiado en el menú idiomas del - gestor de presentación Gnome (GDM)), verá Terminal - UNIX de GNOME en el menú y Emulador de - terminal GNOME en los consejos. Por supuesto, - el comando utilizado para ejecutar el terminal permanecerá - inalterado. - - - Para añadir una nueva traducción, tecleé el código de dos - letras del idioma y las traducciones del nombre - y del comentario comentario en los campos - vacíos debajo de la lista de las traducciones actuales, y pulse - el botón Añadir/Definir. Para cambiar una - de las traducciones existentes, selecciónela en la lista, edite - los campos deseados, y pulse el botón Añadir/Definir - . Para eliminar una las traducciones existentes, - selecciónela y pulse el botón Borrar. - - - Puede encontrar una lista con todos los idiomas soportados por - Gnome con sus códigos de 2 letras en las Preguntas más - frecuentes acerca de Gnome. - - - - - - Todos los cambios realizados en el formulario Propiedades - del lanzador surtirán efecto cuando pulse - Aplicar o Aceptar. Al - pulsar Aceptar se cerrará el formulario; pulsar - Aplicar permitirá continuar modificando las - propiedades. - - - - - - Apliques - - Los apliques son aplicaciones Gnome que residen en el - Panel. El aspecto de un aplique indica - generalmente el estado del aplique u otra información, Los apliques - disponen a menudo de botones, mandos deslizantes, campos, y otros - métodos que le permitirán controlar su comportamiento. - -
- Ejemplo de apliques - - Ejemplo de apliques - - - -
- - Más abajo se muestran varios ejemplos de apliques. A la izquierda - del todo tenemos el aplique mesa de mezclas - que permite cambiar el nivel del volumen y enmudecer el sonido. - A continuación tenemos el aplique monitor de sonido - , que muestra el volumen de sonido actual y permite - controlar varias características del sonido. el tercer aplique es el - aplique GTCD, un lector de Cd con todos sus - controles disponibles en el aplique y que muestra la pista y el tiempo - de ejecución. El siguiente aplique es el aplique montador - de dispositivos, usado para montar y desmontar - dispositivos con una simple pulsación de ratón. Le sigue el - aplique guia del escritorio que muestra el - escritorio y las aplicaciones que se están ejecutando en el. El - último aplique mostrado es el aplique lista de tareas - que le permite controlar ciertos aspectos de cada - aplicación o que ventana tiene abierta. - - - Gnome dispone de muchos aplique útiles. Pulse simplemente con el - botón derecho sobre el Panel y añada alguno de - los apliques a su panel para conocer los disponibles y cuáles son - los mejores para usted. Apriete el botón derecho en cada aplique - para ver el menú desplegable con la lista de comandos y operaciones - que el aplique puede hacer y tener acceso a la documentación del - aplique. - - - - - - - Cajones - - La forma más sencilla de ver los cajones es - como contenedores que puede almacenar cosas. Generalmente se usan - los cajones para recoger múltiples lanzadores relacionados entre sí - de alguna manera, como la diversas aplicaciones de la oficina Gnome. - Los cajones en el Panel Gnome dan un paso mas - allá al hacer del cajón una extensión del mismo Panel. - De esta forma, un cajón es una rama colapsable de un - Panel existente. Puede contener cualquier cosa - que puede contener un Panel, incluyendo lanzadores, - apliques, y otros cajones. - -
- Un cajón abierto - - Un cajón abierto - - - -
- - Una vez colocado un cajón en el Panel, puede - pulsar sobre el para abrirlo, apareciendo su contenido. Puede - entonces añadir elementos en el cajón de la misma forma en que añadiría - elementos en el panel, pulse el botón derecho en la parte final del cajón, - adornada con una flecha. Puede cerrar el cajón pulsando en su icono - de nuevo o pulsando en la flecha al final del mismo. - - - Puede configurar las propiedades del cajón pulsando con el botón - derecho sobre el icono del cajón y seleccionando - Propiedades. Esto abrirá el formulario - Propiedades del cajón. Allí podrá elegir el - icono usado por el cajón pulsando sobre el icono. Se puede teclear - un consejo el campo Consejo/Nombre. Este consejo - se mostrará cada vez que el ratón sobre-vuela el cajón para recordarnos - su contenido. también se puede elegir si debe mostrarse un - botón para ocultar y una flecha al final del cajón. - -
- Formulario propiedades del cajón - - Formulario propiedades del cajón - - - -
- - Puede también controlar el color o la imagen del fondo del cajón. - Pulse simplemente con el botón derecho sobre el cajón y seleccione - Propiedades... para abrir el formulario - estándar Propiedades del cajón. Entonces - seleccione la pestaña fondo para abrir el formulario - estándar fondo del panel - (véase ). - - - - - - Objetos especiales del panel - - Existen varios objetos especiales del panel que no pueden - considerarse menús, apliques, o lanzadores. Estos objetos especiales - se describen a continuación. - - - Botón bloquear pantalla -
- Botón bloquear pantalla - - Botón bloquear pantalla - - - -
- - El botón bloquear pantalla es un botón del - Panel que arranca el salva-pantallas para - bloquear la pantalla. Para cerrar el salva-pantallas y acceder de - nuevo a la sesión Gnome, debe introducir su clave. Para más - información sobre el bloqueo de la pantalla, véase - . - - - - Botón cerrar sesión -
- Botón cerrar sesión - - Botón cerrar sesión - - - -
- - El botón cerrar sesión se usa para abandonar - el entorno de escritorio Gnome. Inicia la secuencia de apagado, - abriendo el formulario terminar sesión, tal - y como se describe en . - - - - Botón ejecutar -
- Botón ejecutar - - Botón ejecutar - - - -
- - El botón Ejecutar abre el formulario - Ejecutar programa, mostrado en . Este le permite acceder a la - línea de comandos. No es una "shell" completa, por l o que no - es un sustituto del Terminal de GNOME, - pero es útil cuando necesita introducir un sólo comando - rápidamente. También puede abrir el formulario Ejecutar - programa utilizando el acelerador de teclado. Que - por defecto es - - Alt F2 - - pero puede cambiarlo en la pestaña - Miscelánea del formulario - Preferencias globales - del Panel. - -
- Formulario del programa ejecutar - - Formulario del programa ejecutar - - - -
- - La entrada de comandos tiene un histórico que le permite ejecutar - una orden ejecutada previamente apretando el icono flecha - hacia abajo localizado a la derecha del campo texto y - seleccionando el comando deseado. También tiene un botón - Buscar…, que le permite seleccionar un archivo — - este archivo se añadirá al final de su comando. Por ejemplo, puede - escribir emacs (un editor de textos - extremadamente potente) en la línea de comandos y luego utilizar - el botón Buscar… para seleccionar - el archivo a editar. - - - - Aplicaciones miniaturizadas - - El Panel Gnome permite ejecutar aplicaciones - que no sean apliques dentro del Panel como si - fueran apliques. Las aplicaciones que se ponen dentro del - Panel, aun en el caso de que no sean apliques - Gnome, se conocen como aplicaciones miniaturizadas. Las aplicaciones - no tienen que se compatibles con Gnome para miniaturizarse. En general, - la única limitación para miniaturizar una aplicación es que la - aplicación debe ser lo suficientemente pequeña para caber en el - Panel y debe conocerse el titulo de la ventana - que desea miniaturizar. En muchos casos, la aplicación puede reducirse - hasta que quepa en el Panel, tal y como se - especifica en el formulario crear una aplicación - miniaturizada. Si la aplicación no es suficientemente - pequeña para caber en el Panel, el - Panel generalmente crecerá para permitir a la - aplicación caber. - -
- formulario crear una aplicación miniaturizada - - formulario crear una aplicación miniaturizada - - - -
- - El título de la aplicación a miniaturizar es el - título de la ventana, normalmente mostrado en la parte superior - izquierda de la ventana. (Observe que en el título de la ventana - se distinguen la mayúsculas y minúsculas). El ancho y el alto - determina el tamaño en puntos de la aplicación miniaturizada en - el panel. - - - Si deja el campo comando vació, el formulario - creará una ventana vacía en el panel del tamaño indicado, que - permanecerá a la espera de la aparición de una aplicación con el - título indicado en su escritorio. Tan pronto como aparezca esa - ventana (por ejemplo, cuando elija el elemento apropiado en el menú), - será miniaturizada. - - - Puede también teclear cualquier comando en el campo - Comando; Este comando se ejecutará antes de - añadir la ventana miniaturizada al Panel - (y cada vez que se rearranque nuevamente el panel). Esto se usa - normalmente para arrancar una aplicación que quiere tener - miniaturizada en el Panel. - - - - Tablón de estado - - El tablón de estado es un objeto del - Panel que puede contener notas de estado - — pequeñas ventanas que las aplicaciones ponen en el - tablón de estado para suministrar información - de su estado. Las notas de estado pueden también usarse para - controlar la aplicación. Esencialmente, los "enganchables" son - pequeños (tanto en tamaño como en complejidad) apliques. - Actualmente Gnome no dispone de demasiadas aplicaciones - que puede poner "enganchables" en el tablón de estado. - Sin embargo, el tablón de estado Gnome es compatible con el del - entorno de escritorio K (KDE), así que las aplicaciones Kde, - como kscd, pueden poner sus "enganchables" - de estado en el tablón de estado Gnome. - Futuras versiones de las aplicaciones Gnome harán uso de este recién - incorporado objeto del Panel. - -
- Ejemplo de tablón de estado con un "enganchable" - - Ejemplo de tablón de estado con un "enganchable" - - - -
- - El ejemplo anterior muestra el tablón de estado - con el "enganchable" de estado del programa lector de CD - kscd. Este "enganchable" concreto se usa - para abrir y cerrar la ventana principal de - kscd sin cerrar el programa. - - - - - - - Añadir, mover, y eliminar objetos al panel - - Mover objetos - - Para mover cualquier objeto en el Panel a una - posición diferente, simplemente arrástrelo con el botón central del - ratón hasta la posición deseada.O, puede pulsar el botón derecho y - elegir Mover. Puede moverlo a una posición - diferente en el mismo Panel, o a un - Panel diferente. Si durante este desplazamiento - toca otros objetos, el comportamiento dependerá de las propiedades - globales activas (véase ): El objeto que - está moviendo puede intercambiar su posición con otros objetos, - "empujar" todos los objetos que encuentre, o "saltar" sobre todos - los demás objetos sin molestarlos. Puede también no seguir la - conducta por defecto manteniendo pulsada la tecla Shift - (para "empujar"), Ctrl (para el modo "intercambio"), - o Alt (para el modo "libre", esto es saltar sobre - los demás objetos sin molestarlos) mientras lo arrastra. - - - - - Eliminar objetos del panel - - Para eliminar un objeto del Panel, pulse el botón - derecho sobre él y elija Quitar del panel en - el menú desplegable. - - - - Añadir objetos al panel - - - Panel adding applications - to - - Por omisión, el Panel Gnome contiene unos pocos - objetos básicos, como el Menú principal. Sin embargo, - hay unas muchos objetos que puede añadirle. Por ejemplo, cada uno de - los elementos del Menú principal o sus submenús - pueden añadirse al panel como un lanzador de aplicaciones. Gnome - también tiene un buen numero de apliques que pueden añadirse al panel, - desde el aplique imprimir, que imprime un - fichero cuando se arrastrar y suelta sobre este aplique, hasta el - pez Wanda. Si estos no fueran suficientes, - en Internet hay también un buen numero de apliques Gnome disponibles. - - - - Apliques - - - Para añadir un aplique, pulse el botón derecho sobre el - Panel y seleccione - Añadir al panelAplique - en menú del Panel. - Se presentará un menú con todos los apliques de su sistema, - divididos en categorías; al elegir cualquier aplique de este - menú se añadirá al Panel. - - - - - - Lanzador de aplicaciones - - - Para crear un nuevo lanzador de aplicaciones, seleccione - Añadir al panel - Lanzador del menú - Panel. Se abrirá el formulario - Crear lanzador, mostrado mas abajo. - En este formulario debe teclear un nombre para el lanzador, - un comentario, y la linea de comando que arranca la aplicación. - Este formulario es virtualmente idéntico al formulario - propiedades del lanzador, así que - remitimos al lector a para una - descripción detallada. - -
- Formulario crear lanzador - - Formulario crear lanzador - - - -
- - También puede añadir al Panel cualquier - elemento de menú o cualquier lanzador situado en su escritorio: - simplemente arrástrelo hasta el panel y suéltelo allí. Tenga - cuidado de soltarlo sobre un espacio vació en el panel y no sobre - un objeto existente: por ejemplo, si lo suelta sobre el aplique - imprimir, se imprimirá. Para los elementos de menú, puede - también pulsar el botón derecho sobre el elemento y seleccionar - Añadir este lanzador al panel. Después - de esta operación, puede cambiar cualquier opción de este lanzador - pulsando el botón derecho del ratón sobre él y seleccionando - el elemento de menú Propiedades. - - - - - - Menús - - - Para añadir un menú, seleccione Añadir - al panelMenú - del menú Panel. Se ofrece las opciones - menú principal, menú de programas - , y menú de favoritos. - - - Puede también añadir el menú principal o - cualquiera de sus submenús como un nuevo menú en el panel - pulsando el botón derecho en el título del menú (la línea - superior del menú, separada de los ítem de menú por una fina - línea) y seleccionando añadir este menú al - panel. - - - Los usuarios avanzados pueden también crear menús manualmente. - Para hacerlo, deben saber que internamente, Gnome representa - un menú como un directorio, con los elementos de menú - representados por ficheros de tipo especial (ficheros - .desktop — estos ficheros también - representan a los lanzadores de aplicaciones), y los submenús - representados por subdirectorios. Por ejemplo, el menú - Favoritos se corresponde con el directorio - ~/.gnome/apps (donde ~ - representa nuestro directorio inicial), y el menú - Programas se corresponde con el directorio - /usr/share/gnome/apps. Así, puede crear un - nuevo directorio, usando el gestor de ficheros Gnome, arrastrar y - soltar cualquier fichero .desktop desde - cualquier otro de los directorios que tenga (por ejemplo, de - /usr/share/gnome/apps) o desde el escritorio, - y entonces arrastrar y soltar este directorio desde el gestor - de ficheros hasta el Panel. Esto añadirá - este directorio como un menú en el Panel. - - - Después de añadir un menú en el Panel - usando cualquiera de los métodos descritos previamente, puede - modificar sus propiedades (por ejemplo, añadir nuevos elementos - a este menú o cambiar el icono usado por el menú), como se - describe en . - - - - - - Cajones - - - Para añadir un cajón vació, seleccione - añadir al panel canon - en el menú Panel. Después de - hacerlo, puede pulsar el botón derecho sobre el cajón y - seleccionar Propiedades para cambiar - sus propiedades (por ejemplo, el icono que usa). Puede añadir - nuevos elementos a este cajón de la misma forma que añade - elementos al panel: todos los métodos - para añadir nuevos objetos al panel - descritos en esta sección funcionan también para añadir nuevos - elementos al cajón. - - - Puede también añadir el menú principal o - cualquiera de sus submenús como un nuevo cajón en el panel - pulsando con el botón derecho sobre el título del menú y - seleccionando Añadir este cajón al panel. - - - - - - Aplicaciones miniaturizadas - - - Para añadir una nueva aplicación miniaturizada, seleccione - Añadir al panel - aplicación miniaturizada - en el menú Panel. Se abrirá un formulario - crear aplicación miniaturizada, como el - mostrado en . Para mas detalles, - véase . - - - - - - - - - - - Crear, mover, y eliminar paneles - - Crear nuevos paneles - - - Panel adding new - - Para añadir un nuevo Panel en su escritorio, - elija el comando Crear un panel del menú - Panel. Puede elegir entre los siguientes tipos: - - - - - - Panel Edge - - Panel de Menú — el Panel de - Menú es un panel Panel especial - que siempre se sitúa en la parte superior de la pantalla y contiene - varios menús desplegables. Estos son Programas, - Favoritos, Configuración, - Escritorio, y un menú especial que proporciona - acceso rápido a los recursos de GNOME relacionados con Internet - (mirar al icono de agujero de bala). Este Panel - también puede contener otros objetos del mismo modo que hace cualquier - otro Panel, pero no tiene las propiedades de - configuración que tienen otros Paneles. Observe - que el Panel de Menú es más restrictivo que - otros Paneles, y algunas operaciones normales - de Panel, como mover el Panel - , no se pueden realizar con él. - - - - - Panel de lado — Un panel de lado es - exactamente igual que el Panel principal - que arranca con Gnome; se extiende a lo largo de uno de los lados - de la pantalla. Si elige este tipo de Panel, - puede añadir un nuevo Panel en otro de los - lados de su pantalla para disponer de más funcionalidad. - - - - - Panel alineado — un Panel - alineado se sitúa también en uno de los lados de la - pantalla. Pero a diferencia del Panel de lado, - el Panel alineado no se extiende a lo largo de - toda la pantalla donde este situado: se extenderá únicamente lo - necesario para mostrar los iconos y apliques que contenga. - Puede situarse bien en una de las esquinas (en este caso, se - extenderá hacia la esquina opuesta), o bien en el centro del - lateral (en este caso, se extenderá en ambas direcciones, - centrándose automáticamente cuando se añadan nuevos objetos). - - - Si el panel alineado está alineado con una - de las esquinas, los botones de ocultación funcionarán de forma - ligeramente diferente que en el panel de lado. - El botón de ocultación más cercano a la esquina de la pantalla - ocultará el Panel de la forma habitual, pero - el otro botón de ocultación enviará el Panel - entero a la esquina opuesta. Cuando se realice este último - movimiento, no se ocultará el Panel ya que se - está cambiando el lado de la pantalla donde está situado. Si quiere - ocultar el panel deberá pulsar de nuevo el botón de ocultación. - - - - - Panel deslizante — Este tipo de panel es - muy similar al Panel alineado, pero puede - colocarse en cualquier lugar a lo largo del lateral de la pantalla, - no necesariamente en una de las esquinas o en el centro. Según se - añadan objetos, crecerá únicamente en una de las direcciones — - no se centrará de forma automática. - - - - - Panel flotante — Este tipo de panel puede - situarse en cualquier parte de la pantalla, no necesariamente a lo - largo de uno de los lados. - - - - - - Cambiar el tipo de panel - - - Panel changing type - of - - Puede también cambiar el tipo de los paneles existentes — por - ejemplo, convertir un panel de lado en un panel flotante, véase - . - - - - - - Mover paneles - - - Panel moving - - Cualquier Panel que tenga en su escritorio puede - moverse usando el botón central del ratón, o pulsando simultáneamente - los botones izquierdo y derecho del ratón, para arrastrar el panel al - lado deseado en la pantalla. Si no dispone de un ratón de tres botones - y no configuro el ratón para emular el botón central puede también - mover un panel Panel cambiando su situación en el - formulario Propiedades del panel. Puede leer más - sobre este tema en de la documentación. - - - - - Eliminar paneles - - Para eliminar un panel existente, pulse el botón derecho sobre el y - elija el comando Quitar este panel del menú - del Panel. Si el Panel - no está vacío se le pedirá confirmación. - - - Eliminar el último panel - - En todo momento, debe tener al menos un Panel. - Gnome no le permitirá eliminar el último panel. - - - - - - - - Propiedades globales del panel - - Panel - Global Panel Preferences - - Para comenzar la configuración del panel Gnome, elija - Propiedades globales en el submenú - Panel del Menú principal. - - - Esto abrirá el formulario de Configuración global del panel - . (este formulario es uno de los componentes del centro - de control Gnome). Con esta ventana de diálogo podrá fijar las - propiedades compartidas por todos los Paneles . -
- El formulario de configuración global del panel - - El formulario de configuración global del panel - - - -
- - - El formulario de Configuración global del panel - contiene las siguientes cinco carpetas («tabs»): - animación, botones, - apliques, menú, y - varios.Cada una de estas carpetas se describe a - continuación. - - - - Carpeta de animación - - - - Activar las animaciones — - Permite la animación en los Paneles y - cajones como el ocultarse o aparecer. - - - - - Animaciones con velocidad constante — - Por omisión, la animaciones empiezan despacio, pero van - acelerándose. Si activa esta opción, las animaciones no usarán - ninguna aceleración. - - - - - [Velocidad de la animación] auto-escondido — - Controla cuanto tarda en ocultarse el panel si tiene activada - su ocultación automática. El menor valor posible es 1, el mayor, 100. - - - - - [Velocidad de la animación] ocultación explicita - — Controla la velocidad de ocultación cuando se pulsa - el botón Ocultación del Panel - . El menor valor posible es 1, el mayor, 100. - - - - - [Velocidad de la animación] cajón — - Controla la velocidad de aparición del menú de cajón cuando se - pulsa un botón de cajón en el panel. El menor valor posible es 1, - el mayor, 100. - - - - - [Auto escondido] Demora (ms) — - Si tiene un Panel que se minimiza - automáticamente después de perder el foco esto le - permite controlar cuanto tiempo pasa antes que se oculte. - El Panel empezará a contar el tiempo - cuando el cursor salga de él. Y aparecerá de nuevo cuando el - ratón pase por encima de la porción de Panel - que resta visible. El tiempo se mide en milisegundos. - - - - - [Auto escondido] Tamaño (puntos, «pixels») - — Determina el numero de puntos que se mostrarán mientras - el Panel para cualquier Panel - configurado para ocultarse automáticamente. Para - volver a mostrar el Panel el puntero deberá - situarse sobre este área. - - - - - - - Carpeta botones - - Esta carpeta controla la apariencia de varios tipos de botones - del panel: botones de lanzadores, botones de menús, botones de - cajoneras, y botones especiales (p.e., - Salida de sesión y Bloqueo de - pantalla). - - - - - Tipo de botón — - Selecciona el tipo de botón que va a configurar - - - - - Mosaico activado — - Este conmutador activará el dibujo de fondo para todos los iconos - del Panel. - - - - - Mosaico normal — - Muestra la imagen usada como fondo en posición sin pulsar (inactivo). - Para elegir otro fichero de imagen, pulse sobre la imagen, y se - abrirá el buscador de iconos. Los mosaicos deben estar activados - para acceder a esta opción. - - - - - Mosaico en posición pulsado — - Este es el nombre y el camino del fichero con el dibujo que se - usará en el fondo en posición pulsado (activo). Para elegir otro - fichero de imagen, pulse sobre la imagen, y se abrirá el buscador - de iconos. Los mosaicos deben estar activados para acceder a esta - opción. - - - - - Espesor del borde (solo fondo) — - Determina el ancho del borde alrededor del icono. Por ejemplo, si - pone 5 como ancho del borde, se asegura que al menos se mostrarán - 5 puntos del mosaico en cada lado del icono; si fuera necesario, - se recortará el icono. Es muy útil si tienes un icono que normalmente - tapa todo el dibujo del fondo. Los mosaicos deben estar activados - para acceder a esta opción. - - - - - Profundidad (desplazamiento al pulsar) — - Determina la profundidad en el desplazamiento del icono cuando - se pulsa. Los dibujos de fondo deben estar activos para acceder - a esta opción. - - - - - Esta carpeta contiene también 3 opciones que afectan - simultáneamente a todos los tipos de botones: - - - - - Hacer que los botones alinear con el lateral del - panel. — - Permite alinear los botones con el lateral del Panel - . Si esta opción no está activa se ignorarán el ancho - del borde. Por defecto esta opción está desactivada. - - - - - Mostrar el mosaico del botón solo cuando el cursor - este sobre él — Si esta opción esta activa, - el mosaico solo aparecerá cuando el cursor del ratón esté - sobre el botón. - - - - - oscurecer los botones cuando el ratón no este sobre - ellos — Esta opción oscurece los botones del panel; - los botones se iluminarán cuando los sobrevuele el cursor del ratón. - - - - - - - Carpeta de apliques - - Esta carpeta controla algunas opciones relacionadas con la posición - de los objetos en el panel. - - - - - Modos de movimiento por defecto — - Aquí se puede elegir el modo de movimiento de los objetos en el - Panel. Las posibles variantes son: - - - - - Alternado — - Cuando un objeto en movimiento toca otro objeto, intercambian - sus posiciones. - - - - - Libre — - Cuando un objeto en movimiento toca otro objeto, salta sobre - él, de forma que no se alteran los otros objetos. Esta es una - buena opción si le gusta la disposición actual de los objetos - en el panel y quiere conservarla. - - - - - Presionado — - El objeto en movimiento empuja todos los demás objetos delante - de él, como una bola de nieve. - - - - - Puede saltarse el método de movimiento por defecto arrastrando - los objetos mientras mantiene pulsada la tecla Ctrl - (para los movimientos alternados), Alt (para los - movimientos libres), o Shift (para los movimientos - presionados). - - - - - Separación de apliques — - cambia el espacio (separación) entre objetos en el - Panel. Se mide en puntos. - - - - - - - Carpeta de menús - - En esta carpeta se controla la apariencia de los menús del - Panel. - - - - - Usar iconos grandes — - Se usarán iconos grandes (mayores que el tamaño por defecto) en - los menús. Solo resulta práctico para que dispongan de monitores - de alta resolución (1280x1024 y superiores). - - - - - mostrar botones con "..." — - Activa la opción que muestra tres pequeños puntos (...) en los - elementos del Menú principal. Apretando en - ese botón con el botón izquierdo del ratón aparecerá el menú - desplegable para ese elemento, es decir, el - mismo menú que se obtiene apretando en el elemento del menú - con el botón derecho del ratón. - - - - - Mostrar menús desplegables fuera de los - paneles. — - Cuando este conmutador está activo, permite que los menús - desplegables aparezcan fuera del Panel. - Cuando está desactivado, los menús desplegables aparecerán sobre - el panel. Esto puede resultar útil para - las pantallas pequeñas y escritorios abarrotados. - - - - - Mantener los menús en memoria — - Permite mantener los menús en memoria de forma que no se examinan - de nuevo en busca de nuevos elementos. Esto puede incrementar - la velocidad de GNOME pero puede también provocar que no aparezcan - los nuevos elementos añadidos a su menú. - - - - - Menú principal — - Permite configurar el Menú - principal que se obtiene pulsando el botón derecho - sobre el Panel, o usando el atajo de teclado. - Para cada uno de los posibles submenús - (Programas, Favoritos, - etc.), puede decidir cuando se incluirán como parte del - Menú principal, como un submenú, o no se incluirán. - una descripción de estos submenús puede encontrarse en . - - - - - - - Carpeta varios - - La carpeta Varios contiene opciones para varios - formatos visuales (apariencia) que no encajan en otro sitio. - - - - - Consejos activos — - Esta opción determina cuando debe Gnome mostrar un consejo al - situar el puntero del ratón sobre un elemento del - Panel. - - - - - Cerrar un cajón al accionar uno de sus - lanzadores — - Por defecto los cajones permanecerán abiertos cuando elige uno - de sus elementos. Esto puede resultar incómodo ya que el cajón - permanecerá abierto hasta que lo cierre con una pulsación de ratón. - Con esta opción los cajones indicados se cerrarán automáticamente - cuando elija uno de sus elementos. - - - - - Alzar los paneles al sobrevolarlos el cursor — - Si está usando un gestor de ventanas no compatible con Gnome - puede que no se entienda con él Panel. - Esto puede ocasionar las aplicaciones tapen el - Panel. Si habilita esta funcionalidad el - Panel pasará al primer plano automáticamente - cuando el ratón esté sobre él. - - - - - Mantener el panel detrás de las ventanas — - Si está usando un gestor de ventanas compatible con Gnome, el - gestor de ventanas se entenderá con el Panel. - Si habilita esta funcionalidad el gestor de ventanas y Gnome - permitirán que las aplicaciones aparezcan sobre el - panel. Esto puede ser útil en las pantallas - más pequeñas. - - - - - Confirmar la eliminación de paneles con un - diálogo — - Si se habilita esta opción, Gnome pedirá confirmación antes de - eliminar un Panel. - - - - - Esta carpeta permite también configurar algunos aceleradores de - teclado. Puede definir aceleradores para el Menú principal - (en concreto Menú desplegable y para el - formulario de Ejecución de - comandos. (Las teclas aceleradoras para - estas acciones son - - Alt - F1 - - y - - Alt - F2 - - respectivamente.) Para cambiar estas teclas aceleradoras, - seleccione una tecla de la lista desplegable o presione el - botón Grabar tecla… y entonces - presione la tecla deseada. - - - Utilizando las teclas de Menú y de Windows - - Si tiene problemas usando las teclas Menú o - Windows, la explicación mas probable es que el - servidor X esta mal configurado: el tipo de teclado escogido - durante la instalación no corresponde con su tipo de teclado. - Si está utilizando el servidor XFree86, - puede corregirlo a mano editando el fichero de configuración. - Este fichero, llamado XF86Config, está - normalmente situado en los directorios /etc - o /etc/X11. Abra este fichero con cualquier - editor de textos (¡no con un procesador de textos!), busque la - línea que contiene la palabra XkbModel y - cámbiela por XkbModel "pc104". - Debe ser root (administrador de sistema) para hacerlo. Ahora, - salga de Gnome y rearranque el servidor de X pulsando de forma - simultanea las teclas - - Ctrl - Alt - Delete - . - - - - Vigile cuando edite el archivo XF86Config - - Si cometemos un error el editar el fichero - XF86Config podemos terminar con un teclado o - una pantalla no utilizable desde las ventanas X. Así que, por - favor tenga cuidado, haga una copia de seguridad de este fichero - y asegúrese que sabe como restaurarlo del la copia de - seguridad sin usar las ventanas X, por ejemplo, desde un terminal. - Si tiene dudas, no lo edite en ningún caso. - - - - - - - - Propiedades individuales de los paneles - - Panel - Propiedades individuales de los paneles - - Panel - propiedades - - Además de las propiedades globales de los paneles, descritas en - , algunas propiedades pueden - configurarse de forma individual para cada Panel. - Estas propiedades son el tipo de Panel (de lado, - alineado, deslizante, flotante), tamaño, posición, color de fondo, - y política de escondido. Para cambiar estas propiedades en un - Panel, pulse el botón derecho del ratón sobre - él y seleccione Panel - propiedades. También puede pulsar - el botón Menú principal y elegir - Panelpropiedades - . - - - Del submenú Propiedades, puede elegir - Todas propiedades, que abrirá el formulario - Propiedades del panel. Si ya está familiarizado - con este formulario, puede también cambiar rápidamente - algunas de las propiedades — como el tamaño del panel o el tipo - del Panel — seleccionando el elemento - apropiado en el menú de Propiedades. - - - El formulario de Propiedades de panel contiene - dos carpetas para ayudarle a configurar las propiedades del - Panel activo: Panel de lado - (o Alineado, &hellip - dependiendo del tipo de panel) - y Fondo. Estas dos carpetas se describen a - continuación. - - - - Carpeta panel de lado -
- Formulario propiedades de panel de lado - - Formulario propieades de panel de lado - - - -
- - - - Posición del panel — - Cambia la posición del Panel en la pantalla. - Para los Paneles de lado, debe especificar - un lado (superior, derecho, - izquierdo, o inferior. - Para los Paneles alineados, debe especificar - un lado y uno de los extremos o el centro. Para los - Paneles deslizantes, debe indicar el lado y - el desplazamiento ("offset") desde una de las esquinas (en pixels). - Finalmente, para los Paneles flotantes debe - indicar la orientación (horizontal o vertical) y la posición de - la esquina superior izquierda del Panel - (relativa a la esquina superior izquierda de la pantalla y medida - en pixels). - - - El Panel cambiará de posición una vez - pulsado el botón Aplicar o el botón - Aceptar. - - - Mover el panel manualmente - - También puede cambiar la posición de un Panel - Gnome arrastrándolo con el botón central del ratón a la nueva - posición. - - - - - - - Tamaño del panel — - Permite elegir el ancho del Panel. El tamaño - por omisión es 48 pixels, que es también el tamaño por omisión - de los iconos usados en Gnome. Los usuarios con pantallas de baja - resolución pueden disminuir el tamaño del Panel - para liberar espacio en la pantalla; por contra, los usuarios con - pantallas de alta resolución pueden probar usando - Paneles de mayor tamaño. - - - El cambio de tamaño del Panel redimensiona - automáticamente todos los iconos del Panel, - lo que puede provocar cierta perdida de calidad. También, el - Panel pedirá a todos los apliques que - ellos mismos adecuen su tamaño. La mayoría de los apliques - responderán a la petición; en cualquier caso, si algunos apliques - no atienden a la petición, entonces el Panel - adecuará su tamaño para acoger todos los apliques. - - - - - - Panel - Auto ocultación - - Ocultar— - En esta sección, puede decidir si quiere que el - panel se auto-oculte— - esto es, que el panel se oculte de forma - automática cuando el ratón no esté sobre el. Los parámetros - del auto-escondido se pueden configurar en el - Formulario de propiedades globales. - Si escoge la auto-ocultación puede deshabilitar los botones de - escondido aquí mismo. Puede también desactivar las flechas de - ocultación de los paneles. - - - - - - - Carpeta de fondo - Panel - Fondo - -
- Formulario de propiedades del fondo del panel - - Formulario de propiedades del fondo del panel - - - -
- - - Estas opciones le permiten cambiar el fondo del Panel - mismo. Puede elegir, si lo desea, tener el fondo - Estándar, Mapa de puntos, o - de Color. La imagen estándar para el - Panel la determina el tema GTK que esté - ejecutando en ese momento. (pude configurar el tema Gtk usando el - Centro de control Gnome). La opción - Mapa de puntos permite escoger una imagen - de fondo o escalada para el Panel. La opción - de Color permite especificar un determinado color - para el Panel. - - - - - Color a utilizar: — - Si elige usar un color de fondo en el Panel - este botón desplegará un formulario para permitirle elegir el - color a utilizar. - - - - - - Imagen — - Si desea utilizar un Mapa de puntos para el fondo - de su Panel, aquí se le permitirá elegir que - imagen utilizar. Si pulsa el botón Buscar podrá - buscar el fichero que desee utilizar. El fichero utilizado en este - momento se muestra a la derecha del botón. la ventana inferior es - una muestra del fondo. - - - - - - Arrastrar y soltar imágenes - - Una forma sencilla de cambiar el fondo de su - Panel es arrastrar y soltar un fichero de - imagen desde el gestor de ficheros GNOME - hasta el Panel. Esto cambiará automáticamente - el fondo del Panel a esta imagen. - - - - - - - No Redimensionar imagen— - Si esta casilla está marcada, la imagen de fondo formará un - mosaico para cubrir todo el Panel, en - lugar de redimensionarse. - - - - - - Redimensionar imagen (conservar aspecto) — - Si esta casilla está marcada, la imagen de fondo se redimensionará - conservando en la medida de lo posible las proporciones de la imagen, - y después se utilizará la imagen redimensionada como mosaico en el - Panel. - - - - - - Estirar la imagen (cambia los proporciones) — - Si esta casilla está marcada, la imagen de fondo será estirada en - ambas direcciones hasta el tamaño del Panel. - - - - - - Rotar la imagen para paneles verticales — - Si esta casilla está marcada, se rotará la imagen cuando cambie la - orientación del Panel (horizontal/vertical). - - - - - - - - - Actuales errores y limitaciones - - La mayoría de las cosas aquí mencionadas no son realmente errores; - por el contrario describen situaciones en las que el comportamiento - del Panel no es el esperado. - - - - No puede colocar ficheros ordinarios ni directorio en el - Panel. Si arrastra y suelta un fichero desde - la ventana del gestor de ficheros hasta el Panel, - no funcionará. El único tipo de fichero que puede colocar en el - Panel es el tipo .desktop, - que describe a los lanzadores (y archivos .kdelnk, - que describen lanzadores en el formato utilizado por el entorno de - escritorio K, KDE); cualquier directorio soltado en el - Panel será interpretado como un menú — - esto es, todos los ficheros que no sean del tipo - .desktop serán ignorados. - - - - Editar menús distintos del Menú principal es mas - bien confuso. El Editor de Menús no puede - usarse por el momento para ello, y el elemento - Propiedades en el menú de botón derecho - tampoco ayuda demasiado - por ejemplo, no le permite cambiar los - iconos de los menús (vea las instrucciones para hacerlo en - ) Esto mejorará en la siguiente versión. - - - - El Menú Global (que se obtiene la pulsar la tecla - AltF1 en el teclado o, - pulsando el botón derecho sobre el propio Panel, - y el Menú Principal (que se obtiene al pulsar el - icono con un pie) se configuran de forma separada. La razón es que - puede tener varios botones Menús principales - en diferentes paneles. - - - - El botón de bloqueo de pantalla no bloquea la - pantalla si la opción "sin salva pantallas" - está activa en el Centro de control GNOME. - - - - La única forma de cambiar el tipo de Panel - (de lado, aliñado, etc.) es seleccionando - PanelPropiedades - Tipo desde el - Menú Principal o del Menú Global: - no puede cambiar el tipo de Panel en el formulario - Propiedades del panel. Por el contrario, - PropiedadesTipo de fondo - permite cambiar el tipo de fondo - (mapa de puntos/color/estandar), pero no elegir el color - actual o la imagen que se usará. - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/traduccion.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/traduccion.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 36cbb07..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/traduccion.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,565 +0,0 @@ - - -Acerca de la traducción - - - - -Breve historia - - - - -La traducción de la -'Guía de usuario GNOME' se empezó con la idea de que GNOME -dispusiera desde su primera versión de documentación de usuario en castellano. -Los trabajos se iniciaron a primeros de Enero de 1999 usando la versión 1.7 -del repositorio cvs de GNOME. A finales de Marzo, con la aparición de la -versión oficial inglesa 1.0, el grupo se puso manos a la obra con la versión -definitiva. -Este grupo de voluntarios realizó un notable esfuerzo durante -esos meses, fruto del cual surgio la primera traduccion completa de la guia -a mediados del verano de 1999, a la que siguieron distintas revisiones. - - -A mediados de Abril de 2000 se inician los trabajos de traducción de la -versión 1.2 de la guía de usuario Gnome, coincidiendo con su aparición en -el repositorio cvs de Gnome. Nuestro objetivo es nuevamente que la nueva -versión de Gnome cuente cuanto antes con un completo manual para los -usuarios de habla Hispana. - - -Los trabajos de la versión 1.4 se iniciaron incluso antes de la aparición de -la versión oficial en Inglés. Pero dada la extensión de la tarea, la -versión completa vió la luz con algún retraso respecto a la aparición de -la versión 1.4 de Gnome. - - - -Cuando leas el manual ten en cuenta que, aunque hemos intentado no descuidar -la calidad del trabajo, ninguno de nosotros es traductor profesional y esta es -una de las primeras versiones del documento. Así que si encuentras errores, -imprecisiones e incluso faltas de ortografía, no dudes -en enviarnos un mensaje con tus correcciones y comentarios. - - - - - - -Licencía de la traducción al Castellano - - -Esta traducción se distribuye bajo licencia GDPL con las siguientes partes invariantes: - - - -Portada del documento - - - - -Apendice acerca de la traducción - - - - - -Esta restricción no busca otra cosa que el respeto al trabajo de todos los voluntarios -que colaboraron en esta traducción. - - -Si usas un extracto de este trabajo, deberías citar la fuente del trabajo e incluir un -enlace al trabajo completo. - - - - -El equipo de la versión 1.4 - -Formaron parte del grupo de traducción de la versión 1.4: -(provisional) - - - -Manuel de Vega Barreiro - - - - -Pablo del Campo - - - - -Gabriel Caffarena - - - - -Susana Tejeda - - - - -Miguel Guirao - - - - -Miquel Jordana - - - - - - - -También colaboraron con sus revisiones, comentarios y capturas de pantallas : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -El equipo de la versión 1.2 - -Formaron parte del grupo de traducción de la versión 1.2: -(provisional) - - - -Manuel de Vega Barreiro - - - - -Cristina - - - - -Miquel Jordana Vilamitjana - - - - -Carlos Perello - - - - -Igor - - - - -Javier Terradas - - - - -Lucas 'Basurero' Vieites - - - - -Federico Gonzalez - - - - -Fredy - - - - -Leon H.G. - - - - -Jorge Llopis - - - - - - -También colaboraron con sus revisiones, comentarios y capturas de pantallas : - - - - - -Javier LNR - - - - - - - - - - - - - -El equipo de la versión 1.0 - - - - - -Formaron parte del grupo de traducción de la versión 1.0: - - - - - -Manuel de Vega Barreiro - - - - - - -Rodolfo Pilas - - - - - - -Joaquín Cuenca - - - - - - -Aguilar Bravo - - - - - - -Agustín Ríos - - - - - - -Víctor Robles - - - - - - -Arnold Hennig - - - - - - - -También colaboraron con sus revisiones, comentarios y capturas de pantallas : - - - - - -Carlos García - - - - - - -Mauricio José - - - - - - -Javier (LNR) - - - - - - -Pablo Saratxaga - - - - - - - - - - - - -Ultimas revisiones - - - - -Puedes encontrar la ultima versión de la traducción - - - -española en la página oficial del proyecto: - - - - -http://www.croftj.net/~barreiro/spanish/gnome-es/ - - - y copias en distintos formatos en el - -servidor ftp - -de - -Linux Landia - - - - - - -También encontraras copias en las siguientes direcciones: - - - - -Si tienes una copia de la traducción en tu servidor y quieres que -incluya un enlace, indícamelo. De esta forma podré avisarte cuando aparezcan -nuevas versiones. - - - - - - -Revisión 1.3.05 (alpha), 3 de Agosto de 2001, basada en la versión 1.4. - - - - -Revisión 1.3.04 (alpha), 7 de Julio de 2001, basada en la versión 1.4. - - - - -Revisión 1.3.03 (alpha), 15 de Abril de 2001, basada en la versión 1.4. - - - - -Revisión 1.3.02 (alpha), 29 de Marzo de 2001, basada en la versión 1.4. - - - - -Revisión 1.3.01 (alpha), 24 de Marzo de 2001, basada en la versión 1.4. - - - - - - - -Revisión 1.2.0 (beta), 13 de Enero de 2001, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.98 (alfa), 26 de Diciembre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.97 (alfa), 26 de Noviembre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.93 (alfa), 5 de Noviembre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.92 (alfa), 22 de Octubre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.91 (alfa), 30 de Septiembre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.9 (alfa), 15 de Septiembre de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 -(1.52 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.8 (alfa), 2 de Julio de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 (1.49 cvs y -1.52 cvs para utilidades y apliques). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.7 (alfa), 11 de Junio de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 (1.49 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.6 (alfa), 5 de Junio de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 (1.49 cvs). - - - - -Revisión 1.1.5 (alfa), 28 de Mayo de 2000, basada en la versión 1.2 (1.49 cvs). - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.6, 25 de Marzo de 2000, basada en la versión 1.0.6 (1.38 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.5e, 20 de Septiembre de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0.5 (1.32 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.5d, 3 de Septiembre de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0.5 (1.32 cvs). -Segunda Beta. - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.5c, 23 de Agosto de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0.5 (1.32 cvs). -Primera Beta. - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.5b, 26 de Junio de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0.5 (1.32 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0.5a, 13 de Junio de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0.5 (1.32 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 1.0, 15 de Abril de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0 (1.24 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 0.9, 31 de Marzo de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0 (1.24 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 0.8, 28 de Febrero de 1999, basada en la versión 1.0 (1.24 cvs). - - - - - - -Revisión 0.7, 15 de Febrero de 1999, basada en la versión 1.7 cvs . - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Agradecimientos - - - - -Al grupo de desarrollo de GNOME. - - - - -A Linus y todos los que han hecho posible el sistema operativo Linux. - - - - -A Joe de Croftj Internet Services por el espacio en su servidor. - - - -Manuel de Vega Barreiro. - - -A la memoria de Aurora. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/ug-applets.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/ug-applets.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 80f4d3c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/ug-applets.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,446 +0,0 @@ - - - Apliques GNOME - - - - Lo básico de los apliques - - - - ¿Qué son los apliques? - -Los apliques son uno de los más populares y útiles objetos que puede añadir -al Panel para personalizar el escritorio. Un aplique -es una pequeña aplicación que se ejecuta en un área pequeña del -Panel. Se han escrito apliques para un amplio rango de -propósitos. Algunos son muy poderosas herramientas interactivas, como el -aplique lista de tareas que permite controlar de -forma sencilla todas las aplicaciones principales. Otros son simples -monitores del sistema, mostrando información de la cantidad de energía -que queda en la batería del portátil (véase monitor - de carga de la batería o información del tiempo (véase - El clima según GNOME. Algunos son simples -entretenimientos (véase Pez). - - - - -Los apliques se parecen a las aplicaciones reducidas en que ambas residen en el -Panel. Sin embargo las aplicaciones reducidas son en general -aplicaciones no diseñadas para correr en el Panel. -Típicamente se reducirá una aplicación que ya exista en el área del -escritorio principal, llevándola dentro del Panel. -La aplicación continuara ejecutándose en el Panel hasta que se -cierre o se devuelva a su tamaño natural, situándola de nuevo en el área principal -del escritorio cuando se la necesite. - - - -
- Ejemplos de apliques - - Ejemplos de apliques - - - -
-En se muestran varios ejemplos de apliques. De izquierda -a derecha, tenemos: -(1)Aplique aplique mezclador de sonido, que permite activar o desactivar el sonido y -controlar su volumen pulsando en el aplique. -(2)ApliqueMonitor de sonido, que muestra el volumen actual del sonido -interpretado y permite controlar varias de sus características. -(3)Aplique GTCD, un lector de CD con todos sus controles disponibles -desde le aplique y con visualización de la pista y tiempo. -(4)Aplique montador de discos, usado para montar y desmontar -dispositivos con una simple pulsación de ratón. -(5)Mapa del escritorio que permite ver y controlar las múltiples -pantallas virtuales. -(6)Aplique Lista de tareas que permite controlar las distintas ventanas y -aplicaciones. - - -Hay muchos otros apliques entre los que escoger. En el resto de esté capitulo se dará la -información básica para permitirle empezar a añadir, mover, y eliminar apliques de los -paneles y a hacer uso de ellos. Los siguientes capítulos recorren -cada uno de los apliques estándar de GNOME describiéndolos en detalle. Hay además apliques -adicionales que podrá descargar de la Web. Véase en -el mapa de software -GNOME la lista de aplicaciones y apliques adicionales de GNOME. - - -Según lea el resto de este capitulo, debería probar a añadir y eliminar apliques del -panel y experimentar con ellos libremente. - - - - - - Añadir, mover, y eliminar apliques - - - Añadir apliques al panel - -Para añadir un aplique al panel, pulse el botón derecho sobre el -panel y seleccione PanelAñadir al panel - Aplique. Esto mostrara un menú con todos los apliques del sistema, -divididos en categorías. Al escoger cualquier aplique de este menú se añadirá al -panel. - - - - - Mover apliques en o entre paneles - -Es fácil mover apliques en un panel o entre dos -paneles. Si se tiene un ratón de tres botones, mueva simplemente el ratón sobre el -aplique, arrastre el el aplique hasta su nueva posición manteniendo pulsado el botón central del ratón, y finalmente -suelte el botón central del ratón. Observe que puede arrastrar de esta manera apliques dentro de un -panel o entre dos paneles. Si no se dispone de un ratón de tres botones, -pulse simplemente el botón derecho sobre el aplique y elija Mover. El cursor se transformara -en una cruz y el aplique se moverá siguiendo al ratón hasta que se pulse cualquier botón del ratón para indicar el -fin del desplazamiento. -Si, en el transcurso del movimiento, esta sobre otro objeto, el comportamiento dependerá de las preferencias globales -fijadas para los paneles en el centro de control GNOME: el aplique -que se esta moviendo puede intercambiar su posición con otros objetos, "empujar" todos los objetos que encuentre a su -paso, o "saltar" sobre todos los demás objetos sin alterarlos. Se puede también obviar el comportamiento por defecto -manteniendo pulsada la tecla Shift (para el modo "empujar"), Ctrl (para el modo -"intercambiar"), o Alt (para el modo "libre", esto es saltando sobre otros objetos sin alterarlos) -mientras lo arrastra. - - -Para cambiar las propiedades globales del panel, pulse el botón derecho sobre cualquier aplique o sobre le -Panel y elija - - panel - Propiedades globales... - . -El movimiento por defecto esta debajo de la solapa objetos del panel. - - - - - Eliminar apliques del panel - -Para eliminar un aplique del panel, pulse el botón derecho sobre el aplique y -elija Quitar del panel.... - - - - - - - - El menú desplegable del botón derecho - -Pulsando el botón derecho del ratón sobre cualquier aplique dispara un menú desplegable. -Este menú siempre contiene ciertos elementos de menú estándar y a menudo tiene ítem adicionales que varían -dependiendo del aplique particular. - - - Ítem estándar del menú desplegable - -Todos los apliques tienen los siguientes ítem en su menú desplegable del botón derecho: - - - Quitar del panel - - -El ítem de menú Quitar del panel elimina este aplique del -panel. - - - - - - Mover - - -Después de eligir Mover, el puntero del ratón cambiara de apariencia (generalmente -a una cruz con flechas en cada dirección). Según se mueva el ratón, el aplique le seguirá. Cuando se termine -el desplazamiento del aplique, pulse cualquier botón del ratón y el aplique se quedara en su posición actual. -Observe que los apliques pueden moverse de esta manera entre paneles. - - - - - - panel - - -El submenú panel contiene varios ítem y submenús para añadir y eliminar -paneles y apliques y para cambiar la configuración. - - - - - - Ayuda - - -El ítem de menú Ayuda presenta el manual de ayuda del aplique. - - - - - - Acerca - - -El ítem de menú Acerca... presenta un cajetín de texto con diversa -información acerca del aplique, típicamente se incluye el nombre del aplique, la versión, el -autor, los derechos de autor, la licencia y su descripción. - - - - - - - - - - Otros ítem comunes del menú desplegable - -Muchos apliques tienen también otros ítem en los menús desplegables del botón derecho. Algunos de -los mas comunes son: - - - Propiedades... - - -El ítem de menú Propiedades... abre el formulario propiedades -(véase ) del aplique. Muchos aplique tienen formularios de -propiedades, que permiten configurar el comportamiento y la apariencia del aplique. - - - - - Lanzar... - - -El ítem de menú Lanzar... generalmente invoca un programa -relacionado de alguna manera con el aplique pero que se ejecuta en su propia ventana -en vez de hacerlo en el panel. Por ejemplo: - - - - -El aplique Carga de la CPU, que monitoriza los programas en -ejecución, tiene el ítem de menú Lanzar gtop.... Al seleccionar -este ítem de menú arranca GTop, que permite ver y controlar -los programas en ejecución. - - - - -El aplique Lector de CD tiene el ítem de menú -Lanzar gtcd... que arranca el Lector de CD -de GNOME cuando se selecciona, y que tiene mas funciones que el aplique. - - - - - - - - - - - Formulario de propiedades del aplique - -Muchos apliques tienen propiedades personalizables. Estos aplique dispondrán de un -ítem de menú Propiedades... en el menú desplegable -del botón derecho que presentara el formulario Propiedades donde -se podrá alterar la apariencia y comportamiento del aplique. -
- Un ejemplo de formulario de propiedades de aplique - - Un ejemplo de formulario de propiedades de aplique - - - -
-Todos los formularios propiedades disponen de los siguientes -botones de dialogo: - - - - Aceptar — -Al pulsar Aceptar se activara cualquier cambio en las -propiedades que se haya realizado y se cerrara el formulario Propiedades. - - - - - Aplicar — -Al pulsar en cualquier momento Aplicar se activaran los cambios sin cerrar -el formulario Propiedades. Esto resulta útil si se quiere probar los efectos -de los cambios realizados, pero se quiere continuar cambiado propiedades. - - - - - Cerrar — -Al pulsar Cerrar se cerrara el formulario Propiedades. -Únicamente las propiedades aplicadas previamente con el botón Aplicar permanecerán -activas. Los otros cambios no se activaran. - - - - - Ayuda — -Al pulsar Ayuda se presentara el manual de la aplicación, -abriéndose en la pagina que describe el formulario Propiedades. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Amusements Applets - - &FIFTEEN; - &FISH; - &GEYES; - &LIFE; - &ODOMETER; - - - - - - Monitor Applets - - &BATTERY; - &CPULOAD; - &CPUMEMUSAGE; - &DISKUSAGE; - &LOADAVG; - &MEMLOAD; - &NETLOAD; - &SWAPLOAD; - - - - - - - Multimedia Applets - - &CDPLAYER; - &MIXER; - &SOUNDMONITOR; - - - - - - - Network Applets - - &MAILCHECK; - &MODEMLIGHTS; - &WEBCONTROL; - - - - - - - - Utility Applets - - &CHARPICK; - &DESKGUIDE; - &DRIVEMOUNT; - &GKB; - &GNOTES; - &GWEATHER; - &MINICOMMAND; - &PRINTER; - &QUICKLAUNCH; - &SCREENSHOOTER; - &TASKLIST; - &TICKASTAT; - &WHEREAMI; - - - - - - - - Clock Applets - - &ANOTHERCLOCK; - &ASCLOCK; - &CLOCK; - &CLOCKMAIL; - &JBC; - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wheeler.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wheeler.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 06086e2..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wheeler.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,458 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Introducción a GNOME - - - - - -¿Qué es GNOME? - - - - -GNOME es un entorno gráfico (escritorio de trabajo) amigable que -permite a los usuarios -usar y configurar sus ordenadores de una forma sencilla. -GNOME incluye un panel (para arrancar aplicaciones y presentar el estado de -funcionamiento), un escritorio ( donde se pueden situar los datos y las -aplicaciones), un conjunto estándar de aplicaciones y herramientas de -escritorio, y un conjunto de convenciones que facilitan la operación y -consistencia de las aplicaciones entre sí. Los usuarios de otros sistemas -operativos y entornos se sentirán como en casa cuando usen el potente entorno -gráfico que proporciona GNOME. - - - - -GNOME es en su totalidad código abierto (software libre), con el código -fuente -disponible libremente y desarrollado por cientos de programadores en todo el -mundo. Si quiere saber más sobre el proyecto Gnome puede visitar la página -web de Gnome en - - - -página web de Gnome - - - - - -También puede encontrar documentación Gnome en Castellano en la - -página web de Gnome-es - - - - -. - - - - -GNOME tiene una serie de ventajas para los usuarios. -GNOME facilita el uso y la configuración de aplicaciones usando una -simple pero potente interfaz gráfica. - - - -(console). - - - - -GNOME es altamente configurable, permitiéndole ajustar su escritorio con -el aspecto que desee. El gestor de sesiones de GNOME recuerda la configuración -previa, de manera que una vez que haya configurado las cosas a su gusto, las -mantendrá así. GNOME soporta muchos idiomas, y puede añadir más sin -cambiar el software. GNOME soporta incluso varios protocolos de arrastrar y -soltar - - - -(drag and drop D&D) para una máxima interoperabilidad con aplicaciones que no sean -compatibles con GNOME. - - - - -GNOME tiene también una serie de ventajas para los programadores que -indirectamente benefician también a los usuarios. Los programadores no -necesitan comprar - - - -una cara licencia de software para hacer compatibles sus -aplicaciones comerciales. De hecho, GNOME es independiente de cualquier -compañía - ningún componente del interfaz esta controlado únicamente por -una compañía o tiene restringidas la modificación o redistribución. -Las aplicaciones GNOME pueden desarrollarse en - - - -una gran variedad de lenguajes de -programación, - - - -por lo que el programador no se ve limitado a un solo lenguaje de programación. -GNOME usa la arquitectura universal de agentes de petición de objetos (CORBA) -para permitir que los componentes software interactúen 'sin costuras', -independientemente del lenguaje en el que estén implementados, o incluso -de la máquina en la que se estén ejecutando. Finalmente, GNOME funciona en -numerosos sistemas operativos de tipo Unix, incluido Linux. - - - - -GNOME es un acrónimo de 'GNU - - - -Network Object Model Environment', entorno de trabajo -en red orientado a objetos, por lo que GNOME forma parte del más amplio -proyecto GNU. El proyecto GNU nació en 1984 con el objetivo de desarrollar un -sistema operativo tipo Unix completamente libre. Si te interesa saber más -acerca del Proyecto GNU, puedes leer acerca de él en - - - -http://www.gnu.org - - - -. - - - - - - -Acerca de esta Guía - - - - -Esta guía de usuario se diseñó para ayudarle a defenderse con soltura -usando GNOME. Tanto los novatos como los usuarios con experiencia en -ordenadores se beneficiaran de esta guía. Si - - - -GNOME o incluso los ordenadores son algo nuevo -para usted, se hará una idea de como usar su escritorio. Si es un usuario -avanzado de Linux, podrá usar consejos para expertos que le ayudarán a -familiarizarse con GNOME. - - - - -Aunque - - - -esta guía escribió originalmente en - - - -ingles, hay muchas traducciones ya disponibles o a punto de aparecer. Si te interesa obtener esta -guía en otra lengua deberías comprobar tu distribución de Linux o visitar la - - - -página web de GNOME - - - -para encontrar más información sobre las traducciones. - - - -dict -Gnome esta en constante desarollo, de manera que algunas partes de esta -guia pueden no estar al dia; en estos casos, por favor use la ayuda en -linea de la aplicacion con la que tenga problemas. - - - - -Dave Mason (dcm@redhat.com), -Chris Lyttle (chris@wilddev.net) -y -Alexander Kirillov (kirillov@math.sunsyb.edu) escribieron -este manual con algunas ayudas de otros miembros del proyecto de -documentación de Gnome. Por favor envíe sus comentarios y sugerencias -acerca de este manual al - -Proyecto de documentación de Gnome enviando un mensaje de -correo electrónico a docs@gnome.org. También puede -añadir sus comentarios en vivo usando la - -Tabla de estado de la documentación de Gnome. - - - - - - - -Inicio rápido de GNOME - - - - - -Primera visita a GNOME - - - - - -La figura 1 muestra un ejemplo de GNOME ejecutándose. GNOME es muy configurable, así que tu pantalla puede tener un aspecto muy diferente. - - -
- - -Muestra de pantalla de GNOME. - - - - - -Muestra de pantalla de GNOME. - - - - - -
- - - - -Inicio rápido - - - - -La barra larga de la parte baja de la -Figura 1 -es un Panel de GNOME que contiene un conjunto de menús, de útiles apliques -de panel [panel applets] y de lanzadores de aplicaciones. -El botón con una estilizada huelle de un pie es el botón del menú principal -(el tipo de menú mas común); con solo pulsar el botón del menú principal -podrá ver un menú con las opciones y aplicaciones cargadas en la instalación, -incluyendo el comando para terminar la sesión. - -Los apliques de panel son pequeños programas diseñados para ser -colocados en un panel; por ejemplo, el aplique guía del escritorio situado -en el extremo derecho muestra 4 escritorios virtuales donde situar sus -aplicaciones. Los lanzadores de aplicaciones son botones que, al pulsarlos, -arranca de forma inmediata programas (incluyendo utilidades Gnome y -aplicaciones de oficina). En este ejemplo el botón caja de herramientas -arranca el centro de control (para configurar su sistema), el botón con un -símbolo de interrogación arranca el navegador de ayudas de Gnome (para leer -documentación), el de la pantalla arranca el terminal (si prefiere usar una -interfaz textual), y el del mundo arranca su navegador de web. -Las flechas de los lados del panel ocultan (y despliegan) el panel. - - - -El botón del panel que muestra una estilizada huella de un pie es el -Botón del Menú Principal. -Simplemente pulsa sobre el -Botón del Menú Principal - y verás un menú de aplicaciones y acciones precargadas, incluyendo un comando de salida. - - - - - - - -El resto del espacio de la pantalla se llama "Escritorio". Coloca en tu escritorio los elementos que uses - - - -habitualmente y podrás usar uno de dichos elementos pulsando dos veces (doble clic) sobre él con el botón izquierdo del ratón: - - - - - - -Si el elemento es un programa, éste se - - - -ejecutará. - - - - - - -Si son datos, se arrancará el programa adecuado con estos datos cargados. - - - - - - -Si es un directorio, el administrador de archivos Nautilus se iniciará y -mostrará el contenido de ese directorio. -Tu escritorio tendrá, probablemente, un icono -con forma de carpeta llamando "Directorio personal" o "Home directory". -Pulsando dos veces sobre él se iniciará un administrador de archivos -Nautilus desde el directorio inicial de tu cuenta personal. - - - - - - -El administrador de archivos Nautilus te permite -manejar tus -archivos (ficheros). -La parte izquierda de su ventana muestra el directorio actual con solapas -para la ayuda, historia y notas, -mientras que el derecho muestra el contenido del directorio seleccionado: - - - - - - -Para mover - - - -un fichero o directorio, simplemente arrástralo y suéltalo. - - - - - - -Para copiar un fichero, mantén pulsada la tecla - -CTRL - -mientras lo arrastras. - - - - - - -Para ejecutar un programa o editar un archivo de datos, pulsa dos veces sobre él. - - - - - - -Para realizar otras operaciones sobre un fichero (como renombrar o borrar), seleccionalo usando el botón derecho del ratón y escogiendo después la operación -deseada. Puede usar esto ultimo para escoger la aplicación con la que abrir -el fichero. - - - - - - - -Para seleccionar más de un elemento a la vez, pulsa sobre los elementos, después de seleccionar el primero, mientras mantienes pulsada la tecla - -Ctrl - -. - - - - - - -Puedes mover o copiar ficheros entre directorios, fácilmente, arrancando dos administradores de archivos, mostrando cada uno un directorio distinto. Si quieres colocar un fichero en tu escritorio, simplemente arrástralo desde el administrador de archivos hasta allí. De hecho, en GNOME, arrastrar y soltar elementos sobre otros elementos, por lo general, "realiza la acción correcta", haciendo fácil llevar a cabo el trabajo. - - - - -GNOME es muy configurable; por ejemplo, puedes tener múltiples paneles (horizontal y verticalmente), escoger qué va en ellos y hacer que se oculten automáticamente. Hay multitud de apliques de panel que puedes incluir en tu panel. También puedes cambiar el aspecto de la pantalla como se explicará en posteriores apartados. - - - - -GNOME sigue varias convenciones de UNIX - - - -que debes tener en cuenta. El botón izquierdo del ratón se usa para seleccionar y arrastrar elementos. El botón derecho - - - -hace aparecer un menú para el objeto seleccionado (si puede aplicarse uno). La mayoría de los ratones UNIX tienen 3 botones y el botón del centro se usa para pegar texto (en un área de texto) o para mover cosas. Si sólo tienes dos botones, presiona ambos simultáneamente para simular el botón del centro. -Para copiar texto, mantén presionado el botón izquierdo mientras arrastras -el cursor por el texto que deseas copiar, desplaza el cursor del ratón al -lugar donde quieras que esté el texto y presiona el botón del centro (o la -rueda del ratón). - - - - -Cuando se muestra una ventana de aplicación, aparecen algunos botones en la barra de título para controlar la ventana - - - -como pueden ser: minimizar, maximizar y cerrar la ventana. Se puede configurar su apariencia y se controla a través de un componente llamado "gestor de ventana" - - - - -Un ejemplo de estilos de borde es el estilo Microgui -( Figura 2), un tema de gestor de ventanas usados -por Sawmill y Enlightenment. Puede leer mas acerca de los gestorres de -ventanas en . - - - -En estilo de borde Microgui, la flecha hacia abajo significa minimizar, la -flecha hacia arriba significa maximizar (usar la pantalla completa), y el -boton X significa cerrar la ventana, y el triangulo con la punta hacia -abajo abre la ventana de menú. - -
- estilo de borde Microgui - - Estilo de borde limpio - - - -
- -Si no ha usado nunca antes un sistema Unix o Linux, puede tiene -una introducción en Appendix A también -de gran utilidad. - -Las siguientes secciones entran en mas detalles, describiendo cada componente -del sistema: - - -el gestor de ventanas, el panel, -el menu principal, - el escritorio, -el gestor de ficheros, -el centro de controlcontrol centerw y -los apliques - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wms.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wms.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index d478f93..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/es/wms.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,169 +0,0 @@ - - - - - -GNOME y los gestores de ventanas - - - - - -Acerca de los gestores de ventanas - - - - -En Unix y Linux, prácticamente todas las aplicaciones gráficas -usan el -"sistema de ventanas X" -como la capa de software intercalada entre el hardware y la interfaz -gráfica de usuario (GUI). - -El gestor de ventanas es la parte del software que controla la -presentación de las ventanas en el 'Entorno de ventanas X'. -La posición, bordes, y estilo -de cualquier ventana la maneja el gestor de ventanas. -Gnome trabaja conjuntamente con el gestor de ventanas para presentar -las ventanas de las aplicaciones en la pantalla. - - - -GNOME no depende de ningún gestor de ventanas en particular. Si decide cambiar -de gestor de ventanas, Gnome mantendrá una interfaz consistente en las aplicaciones. -Gnome dialoga con el gestor de ventanas para obtener información acerca de las -ventanas de la pantalla. En cualquier caso, algunas de las funcionalidades de Gnome -requieren un "gestor de ventanas compatible con Gnome" para funcionar correctamente, -en particular la guía del escritorio así como la función arrastrar y soltar en el -escritorio. Recomendamos a los nuevos usuarios usar un gestor de ventanas compatible -con Gnome. - - - - -Algunos de los gestores de ventanas parcial o totalmente compatibles en -el momento de redactar esta versión de la 'Guía de usuario GNOME' eran: - - - - - - - - -Sawfish - - (mas conocido como Sawmill) - - - - - - - -Icewm - - - - - - - - - - -Windowmaker - - - - - - - - - - - -Enlightenment - - - - - - - - - - - - -Afterstep - - - - - - - - - - - -Fvwm - - - - - - - -Existen muchos gestores de ventanas en desarrollo que funcionarán con -GNOME. Encontrara algunos de estos gestores en - - - -Índice de software GNOME - - - -. - - - - - - -Cambiando de gestor de ventanas - - - - -Cada vez que quiera cambiar de gestor de ventanas, deberá usar el -aplique C del gestor de ventanas en el Centro de Control. Puede -leer más acerca de este aplique C en - - - - - - -IMPORTANTE - - - - -Tenga - - - -siempre presente que el gestor de ventanas que decida usar puede -no ser compatible con GNOME, - - - -e impedirle beneficiarse de algunas de las funcionalidades de GNOME en caso de usarlo. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/AUTHORS b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/AUTHORS deleted file mode 100644 index 4c918ac..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/AUTHORS +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ -traduttori impegnati nella users-guide: - -Christopher R. Gabriel -Leandro Noferini -Eugenia Franzoni -Marco Bazzani \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/Makefile.am b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 0c38ed9..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -docname = gnome-users-guide -lang = it -omffile = gnome-users-guide-it.omf -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook -sgml_ents = \ - authors.sgml \ - desktop.sgml \ - fdl.sgml \ - gmenu.sgml \ - gnomecc.sgml \ - gpl-appendix.sgml \ - unix-primer.sgml \ - ug-applets.sgml \ - wheeler.sgml \ - wms.sgml -figs = diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/README b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/README deleted file mode 100644 index eb9b391..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -This is the italian translation of the Gnome User Guide. - -Ask Christopher R. Gabriel for anything -regarding these files. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -Questa e' la traduzione italiana per la Guida Utente di Gnome. - -Chiedere a Christopher R. Gabriel per -qualunque cosa riguardo a questi file. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 92a9ce3..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/anotherclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,245 +0,0 @@ - - Orologio Analogico - - L'applet Orologio Analogico vedi , è un semplice orologio analogico (simile a - quello presente sul pannello di CDE, Common Desktop Environment). Per - aggiungerlo ad un Pannello, cliccate con il tasto - destro sul Pannello e selezionate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Orologi - Orologio Analogico - . - - -
- Applet Orologio Analogico - - Applet Orologio Analogico - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello - indicando l'ora corrente del computer. - - - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la finestra - di dialogo Impostazioni dell'orologio. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra le - informazioni riguardo l'applet Orologio - Analogico come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare Orologio Analogico - cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionando - Proprietà…. Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Impostazioni dell'orologio (vedi ) che permette di modificare molte - impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Impostazioni dell'orologio - - Finestra di dialogo Impostazioni dell'orologio - - - -
- - - Le impostazioni modificabili sono: - - - - - Colore dell'orologio — Questa opzione è ancora disabilitata, - ma in futuro sarà reso possibile modificare il colore dello sfondo - dell'orologio. - - - - - - Colore della lancetta delle ore — Imposta il colore preferito - per la lancetta delle ore dell'orologio. - - - - - - Colore della lancetta dei minuti — Imposta il colore preferito - per la lancetta dei minuti dell'orologio. - - - - - - Colore della lancetta dei secondi — Imposta il colore preferito - per la lancetta dei secondi dell'orologio. - - - - - - Mostra lancetta dei secondi — se viene premuto questo bottone, - viene mostrata anche la lancetta dei secondi. - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Impostazioni dell'orologio. Per annullare le - modifiche e tornare alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - - - - Se si modifica l'orologio del computer usando il comando - date, l'orologio smetterà di funzionare fino a che - l'ora del computer non raggiunge quella mostrata - dall'orologio; successivamente questo funzionerà normalmente. - - - - - - - - - Autori - - Orologio Analogico è stato scritto da - Iñigo Serna (inigo@gazletan.bi.ehu.es). Inviate - tutti i commenti, suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking - database. (Le istruzioni per riportare errori possono essere - trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel - Menù Principale, per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) and Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. <81>È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata fatta da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - webmaster@www.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/asclock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/asclock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 5762891..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/asclock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ - - Orologio AfterStep - - L'orologio AfterStep è una applet che - mostra l'ora corrente sia in formato analogico che digitale assieme - alla data e al giorno della settimana. È ispirata, nell'aspetto, - all'orologio di NeXTStep. Fa parte del pacchetto gnome-core in October - GNOME (gnome-core-1.0.53) e parte di gnome-applets nelle release - successive. Questa guida è stata scritta riferendosi all'orologio - distribuito nel pacchetto gnome-applets-.1.1.2. - - - La applet Orologio AfterStep è stata - scritta da Beat Christen (spiff@longstreet.ch) e - Patrick Rogan (rogan@lycos.com). Comunicate gli errori - tramite il Gnome Bug - Tracking System. È possibile eseguire questa operazione - seguendo le istruzioni presenti sul sito web oppure utilizzando - bug-buddy da linea di comando. Nella voce - "package" inserite gnome-applets. - - - Può essere aggiunto al pannello premendo il - 3 pulsante in uno spazio vuoto del - pannello e eseguendo la sequenza - - Applet - Orologi - Orologio AfterStep - - oppure lanciando il comando asclock_applet - --activate-goad-server=asclocak_applet - - - - Uso - - Con questa applet non è possibile fare qualcosa di particolare. - Risiede nel vostro pannello e mostra l'ora corrente. Sono disponibili - molte opzioni tramite l'uso del mouse: - - - - - - La pressione del primo tasto del mouse - non ha alcun effetto. - - - - - La pressione continuata del secondo tasto del mouse - permette di postare l'orologio all'interno del - pannello, come qualunque altro oggetto che risiede in quest'ultimo. - - - - - La pressione del terzo tasto del mouse - mostra le opzioni standard disponibili per tutte le applet, incluso - un menu Proprietà..., spiegato più avanti. - - - - - - - Proprietà - - La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà (che si fa chiamare "Impostazioni - ASClock" piuttosto che proprietà) è divisa in due sezioni, una per le - opzioni generali, e una per il fuso orario. - - - - - Proprietà Generali - - - La sezione delle proprietà Generali ha - tre opzioni: - - - - Visualizza l'ora nel formato 12 ore (AM/PM) - - - Selezionando questa opzione si potrà, indovinate un pò, - visualizzare nel formato 12 ore. Viene mostrata, nel modo - predefinito, l'ora nel formato 24 ore. - - - - - Elementi lampeggianti dell'orologio - - - Quando viene avviata la applet dell'orologio AfterStep - per la prima volta questa mostrerà i due punti, tra - l'ora e i minuti, in modo lampeggiante. Selezionando questa opzione - verrà disattivato questa caratteristica (i due punti non - lampeggieranno più). - - - - - Tema Orologio - - - La applet orologio AfterStep può - assumere diversi aspetti. È possibile selezionare, in questa - finestra, il tema preferito. - - - - - - - - Timezone - - - Le opzioni per il Timezone (Fuso orario) mostrano - una simpatica visualizzazione del globo terrestre, centrata rispetto - al timezone selezionato correntemente, e una lista di timezone dai - quali poter scegliere. Questa lista è molto lunga. - Se non viene selezionato nessun timezone, l'ora locale corrente - del sistema viene utilizzata come predefinita. - - - - - - - - Bugs e limitazioni - - - - Non è possibile cambiare l'ora attraverso le proprietà - dell'orologio. Questo non è propriamente un bug, visto che - è necessario essere utente root per alterare - l'ora di sistema, utilizzando il comando date. - - - - - Se modificate l'ora di sistema utilizzando il comando - date, l'orologio smetterà di funzionare - finchè il sistema non raggiungerà l'ora mostrata dalla applet. - Tutto ricomincierà a funzionare nel migliore dei modi. - - - - - Passando/cambiando attraverso molti temi oppure molte timezone - sembra che la applet occupi spropositate quantità di memoria. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/battery-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/battery-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 10a8c67..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/battery-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,462 +0,0 @@ - - - Applet Controllo carica della batteria - - L'applet Controllo carica della batteria, mostrata - in , mostra lo stato della carica - della batteria del vostro computer portatile. Per imparare come aggiungere - questa applet al pannello, fate riferimento a - . - - - - - Per poter funzionare correttamente, il Controllo carica della - batteria necessita che sul sistema sia configurato per il - supporto del Advanced Power Management. - - - -
- Controllo carica della batteria - - Controllo carica della batteria - - - -
- - - Uso - - Questa applet risiede nel pannello controllando lo stato di carica - della batteria del vostro computer. Premendo il tasto - sinistro del mouse sulla applet è possibile - cambiare il tipo di visualizzazione, dalla percentuale al grafico, descritte - in e , rispettivamente. - - - - Carica - - La visualizzazione della carica mostra lo stato corrente della batteria - tramite una icona e del testo. In questa modalità l'applet mostra le - seguenti informazioni: - - - - - Icona della Batteria - - - La rappresentazione tramite icona di una batteria sulla sinitra - dell'applet, che mostra lo stato di carica. L'area colorata della - batteria rappresenta la carica rimanente della batteria, dove - la testa della batteria rappresenta la carica totale. - - - - Il colore della batteria cambia quando la carica scende sotto la - Soglia di carica bassa (). - Il colore predefinito è il verda per lo stato normale, mentre diventa - rosso quando scende sotto la Soglia di carica - bassa. - - - - Quando il computer è alimentato dalla rete elettrica, un piccolo - fulmine appare sulla batteria, per rappresentare che la batteria - è alimentata dalla rete e viene ricaricata. Un esempio viene mostrato - in . È possibile inoltre - configurare il colore della batteria quando è alimentata da rete o - meno. Maggiori informazioni in . - - -
- Controllo della carica della batteria quando il computer è - alimentato dalla rete elettrica - - Controllo carica della batteria - - - -
- - - - - - Percentuale rimamente - - - La percentuale indicata in alto a destra della applet rappresenta il - livello di carica della batteria attuale. - - - - - - Tempo rimanente - - - Il tempo rimanente mostrato in basso a destra mostra il tempo - di autonomia rimasto alla batteria. Viene espresso nella forma - ore:minuti. - - - - - - - - Grafico - - La vista a grafico mostra la percentuale di carica rimamente nella batteria - attraverso un grafico in movimento. Gli assi orizzontali rappresentano il - tempo mentre quelli verticali la carica della batteria, con il massimo in - testa al grafico. Il colore predefinito del grafico è verde quando il - computer è connesso alla rete elettrica e blu quando alimentato da - batteria. Il grafico inoltre cambia colore quando la carica della batteria - scende sotto la Soglia di carica bassa. - - -
- Controllo di carica della batteria - grafico - - Controllo di carica della batteria - grafico - - - -
- - - - - Menu a tendina (tasto destro del mouse) - - In aggiunta alle voci standard del menu a tendina, ottenibile con la - pressione del tasto destro, questa applet offre le seguenti scelte: - - - - Proprietà... — Questo voce del menu apre - una finestra di dialogo chiamata Proprietà che - permette di personalizzare l'aspetto e il comportamento di questa applet. - - - - - - - - Proprietà... - - È possibile configurare la applet Controllo della carica della - batteria premendo il tasto destro del mouse su quest'ultima e - scegliendo la voce del menu Proprietà.... Questa - operazione permetterà di aprire la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà, con quattro gruppi di opzioni di - configurazione, divisi come segue: - Generali, - Carica, - Grafico e - Messaggi di carica - della batteria. - - - - Proprietà — Generali - -
- Dialogo delle proprietà — Generali - - Dialogo delle proprietà — Generali - - - -
- - - - - Utilizza la dimensione del pannello — indica - alla applet di ridimensionarsi quando il pannello cambia - dimensione. Questa opzione è predefinita. È necessario disabilitarla per - poter utilizzare le opzioni Altezza applet e - Larghezza applet. - - - - - - Altezza applet & Larghezza applet — - questi due selettori vi permettono di specificare le dimensioni della - applet in modo molto preciso, espresse in pixels. Per poter utilizzare - queste impostazioni è necessario che l'opzione Utilizza la - dimensione del pannello sia disabilitata. Il valore predefinito - è uguale a 48. - - - - - Impostando questi valori al di sotto dei 28 pixels può verificarsi che - l'icona della batteria non venga disegnata correttamente per mancanza - dello spazio necessario. - - - - - - - Intervallo di aggiornamento — specifica in - secondi l'intervallo di aggiornamento delle informazioni mostrate dalla - applet. Il valore predefinito è uguale a 2. - - - - - - Soglia di carica bassa — è il valore, in - percentuale, della carica della batteria sotto la quale viene visualizzato - un avviso, quando la carica appunto sta per terminare. Ad esempio, questa - informazione viene utilizzata per cambiare il colore della icona che - rappresenta la batteria. Il valore predefinito è uguale a 25. - - - - - - Modo di funzionamento — le due opzioni - Carica e - Grafico sono un altro metodo per scegliere quale - modalità di visualizzazione utilizzare. - - - - - - - Proprietà — Carica - - - Le impostazioni presenti in questo spazio modificano unicamente l'aspetto - della applet quando utilizzata in modalità di visualizzazione - Carica. - - - - Tutti i rettangoli colorati presenti in questa parte della finestra sono - cliccabili con il tasto sinistro del mouse per visualizzare il selettore di - colori. Questo permette di scegliere i colori che preferite al posto di - quelli predefiniti. - - -
- Dialogo proprietà — Carica - - Dialogo Proprietà — Carica - - -
- - - - - Colore alimentazione da rete — specifica il - colore dell'icona della batteria quando il vostro computer viene - alimentato dalla rete elettrica. Il colore predefinito è il verde. - - - - - - Colore alimentazione a batteria — specifica il - colore dell'icona della batteria quando il vostro computer non è connesso - alla rete elettrica e viene alimentato a batteria. Il colore predefinito è - il verde. - - - - - - - Colore batteria scarica — specifica il colore - dell'icona della batteria quando la percentuale di carica scende sotto la - Soglia di carica bassa. Il colore predefinito è il - rosso. - - - - - - - Proprietà — Grafico - - - Le impostazioni presenti in questo spazio modificano unicamente l'aspetto - della applet quando utilizzata in modalità di visualizzazione - Grafico, descritta nella . - - - - Tutti i rettangoli colorati presenti in questa parte della finestra sono - cliccabili con il tasto sinistro del mouse per visualizzare il selettore di - colori. Questo permette di scegliere i colori che preferite al posto di - quelli predefiniti. - - -
- Dialogo proprietà — Grafico - - Dialogo proprietà — Grafico - - -
- - - - - - Colore alimentazione a batteria — specifica il - colore del grafico quando il vostro computer viene - alimentato dalla rete elettrica. Il colore predefinito è il verde. - - - - - - Colore alimentazione a batteria — specifica il - colore del grafico quando il vostro computer non è connesso - alla rete elettrica e viene alimentato a batteria. Il colore predefinito è - il verde. - - - - - - Colore batteria scarica — specifica il colore - del grafico quando la percentuale di carica scende sotto la - Soglia di carica bassa. Il colore predefinito è il - rosso. - - - - - Colore marche del grafico — specifica il colore - delle line di divisione del grafico che delimitano il 25%, il 50% e il 75% - della carica. Il colore predefinito è grigio scuro. - - - - - Direzione del grafico — - specifica la direzione nella quale il grafico si muove. La direzione - predefinita è Da destra a sinistra. - - - - - - - Proprietà — Messaggi di carica della batteria - -
- Dialogo proprietà — Messaggi di carica della batteria - - Dialogo proprietà — Messaggi di carica della batteria - - -
- - - - - Avverti se la carica è inferiore a: - — specifica la percentuale di carica alla quale verrà visualizzato - una finestra di avviso che la carica sta per terminare. Questo messaggio - viene visualizzato solo se l'opzione Abilita avviso di - batteria scarica è selezionata. Il valore predefinito è 5%. - - - - - - Abilita avviso di batteria scarica — - specifica se la applet deve visualizzare una finestra di dialogo che - avvisa la percentuale di carica della batteria è scesa sotto il livello di - attenzione specificata in Avverti se la carica è inferiore - a:. - Questa opzione, nel suo valore predefinito, è selezionata. - - - - - - Abilita notifica di carica completa — - specifica se la applet deve visualizzare un messaggio indicante la - completa ricarica della batteria. Il messaggio non viene, in modo - predefinito, visualizzato. - - - - - - - Altre informazioni - - Per maggiori informazioni sulla finestra di dialogo - Proprietà, incluse le descrizioni dei pulsanti - OK, Applica, - Chiudi e Aiuto, vedere - . - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e limitazioni - - Succedono cose strane se avviate questa applet su un computer che non ha il - supporto per la Gestione Avanzata dell'Energia (APM). Questo provoca la - visualizzazione della finestra di dialogo che indica il termine della carica - della batteria, cosa che può non essere sempre vera. - - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Nat Friedman nat@nat.org. La - documentazione di questa applet è stata scritta da James Cope - jcope@bcs.org.uk. La traduzione italiana è stata effettuata da - Christopher R. Gabriel cgabriel@pluto.linux.it. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0012f74..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cdplayer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,164 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Lettore CD - - - L'applet Lettore CD, mostrata nella , permette di controllare l'ascolto di un CD - audio tramite il pannello. Per aggiungere questa - applet in un Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro - del mouse sul Pannello e selezionate - - Panello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Multimedia - Lettore CD - . - - -
- Applet Lettore CD - - Applet Lettore CD - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Quest'applet viene utilizzata, in modo non appariscente, per ascoltare i - CD audio mentre lavorate seriamente oppure state giocando a - FreeCell. Per utilizzarla, basta premere i - piccoli pulsante nella applet come in un vero lettore CD. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sulla applet, compare un menù che contiene - le seguenti voci: - - - - - - Esegui Lettore CD … - — - avvia le il lettore CD di GNOME, che - ha più funzioni della applet stessa, come l'automatizzazione delle - informazioni riguardanti le canzoni tramite un un server CDDB, - controllo del volume, e visualizzazione del titolo per ogni - traccia. - - - - - - Aiuto — visualizza questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su...… — - mostra le informazioni di base sulla applet Lettore - CD, come la versione dell'applet e il nome - dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Problemi conosciuti e limitazioni - - Non sono stati rilevati problemi riguardanti questa applet - - - - - - - - Autori - - La applet Lettore CD è stata scritta da Tim - Gerla (timg@means.net). Si prega di spedire commenti, - suggerimenti, e errori riscontrati al Database degli errori di GNOME. (Una spiegazione su - come spedire il rapporto sugli errori on-line. Se - state utilizzando GNOME 1.1 o una versione successiva, è possibile - utilizzare Il programma di rapporto degli - errori (bug-buddy), avviandolo dal - sotto-menu Utilità presente nel Menù - principale, per riportare gli errori riscontrati. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Chris Lyttle - (chris@wilddev.net). Si prega di spedire i commenti e i - suggerimenti al GNOME - Documentation Project inviando una e-mail a - docs@gnome.org. È possibile spedire eventuali commenti - online utilizzando la pagine Tabella dello stato - documentazione di GNOME. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata eseguita da Marco Bazzani - (visitors@libero.it). Inviate tutti i commenti e suggerimenti - riguardanti questa traduzione a webmaster@www.it.gnome.org - oppure all'autore della traduzione stessa. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/charpick-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/charpick-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 63febd2..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/charpick-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,331 +0,0 @@ - - Character Picker Applet - - - L'applet Selettore dei caratteri, vedi - , permette di scrivere facilmente molti - caratteri che non sono disponibili sulle tastiere normali, come ad esempio - lettere accentate, alcuni simboli matematici, simboli di interpunzione e - altri simboli speciali. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro sul - Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al Pannello - Applet - Utilità - Selettore dei caratteri - . - - -
- Applet Selettore dei caratteri - - Applet Selettore dei caratteri - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Innanzitutto portate il cursore sull'applet Selettore dei - caratteri cliccando con il tasto sinistro del mouse su uno - dei caratteri mostrati nell'applet stessa. Specificate il gruppo di - caratteri premendo il tasto corrispondente sulla tastiera. (Per una lista - completa dei gruppi di caratteri e i tasti corrispondenti vedi .) Per esempio per avere le varie - versioni di a accentata premete il tasto "a". Quando avete trovato la - lettera o il simbolo desiderati cliccate con il tasto sinistro per - copiarlo nel buffer. A questo punto il carattere dovrebbe apparire come un - bottone schiacciato. Tutto ciò è simile al comune comando Copia - disponibile in molti programmi. Per copiare il carattere in una finestra - basta cliccare con il tasto centrale (o con i due tasti - contemporaneamente, nel caso di mouse a soli due tasti). Molte - applicazioni che hanno il comando Copia e Incolla permettono di usare il - comando Incolla. - - - - Supporto del charset ISO-8859-1 (Latin-1) - - Notate che alcune applicazioni non supportano i caratteri - ISO-8859-1. Queste applicazioni non mostrano alcuni caratteri - nell'applet Selettore dei caratteri. - - - - - Copia e incolla in X - - Il sistema X Windows vi permette di copiare e incollare del testo - selezionandolo prima premendo il primo tasto del mouse per copiarlo e - poi premendo il tasto centrale per incollarlo. Notate che - Selettore dei caratteri usa lo stesso buffer - di X per registrare i propri caratteri. Così, quando selezionate un - carattere in Selettore dei caratteri, questo - rimpiazza ogni eventuale testo proveniente da una selezione - precedente. Allo stesso modo, se avete selezionato un carattere in - Selettore dei caratteri e poi selezionate del - testo in un'altra finestra, quest'ultima selezione sovrascrive la - precedente e il bottone relativo al carattere selezionato non pparirà - più schiacciato. - - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù con le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà … — che apre la - finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. - - - - - - Aiuto — che mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — che - mostra le informazioni riguardo Selettore dei - caratteri, come la versione dell'applet e il nome - dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Selettore dei - caratteri cliccandoci con il tasto destro e scegliendo - Proprietà … . Apparirà così la finestra - di dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ) da dove è possibile modificare - molti settaggi. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le voci nella sezione Dimensione sono: - - - - - Utilizza le dimensioni del pannello — Se viene selezionato - questo bottone l'applet Selettore dei - caratteri determinerà automaticamente l'appropriato - numero di colonne e righe per adattarsi alla dimensione del - Pannello. - - - - - - Numero minimo di celle: (per autosize) — Così si seleziona il - numero minimo di pulsanti caratteri (detti "celle") da - mostrare. Il numero effettivo di pulsanti di caratteri può essere - superiore a questo a seconda dalla dimensione del - Pannello e del numero scelto. Notate che se - questo numero è troppo piccolo alcuni caratteri potrebbero non - essere visibili. (Questo settaggio non influenza il layout delle - celle se non è selezionato il bottone Utilizza le - dimensioni del pannello.) - - - - - - Numero di colonne di pulsanti: — Questo determina il numero di - pulsanti caratteri (detti "celle") da mostrare nell'applet. (Questo - settaggio non influenza il layout delle celle se viene selezionato - il bottone Utilizza le dimensioni del - pannello.) - - - - - - Numero di colonne di pulsanti: — Questo determina il numero di - colonne di pulsanti caratteri (detti "celle") da mostrare - nell'applet. (Questo settaggio non influenza il layout delle celle - se viene selezionato il bottone Utilizza le dimensioni del - pannello.) - - - - - - Dimensione del pulsante: (pixels) — Questa è la dimensione (in - pixel) di ogni pulsante carattere nell'applet. - - - - - - - - Le voci nella sezione Lista predefinita sono: - - - - - Lista predefinita di caratteri — Questa è la lista di - caratteri che viene mostrata nell'applet quando viene premuta la - barra spaziatrice della tastiera. Questo è un modo comodo per tenere - la lista dei caratteri più frequentemente usati. Semplicemente - indicate in questo campo i caratteri usati con più frequenza in - questo campo. - - - - - - - - Dopo che avete compiuto i cambiamenti voluti cliccate su - OK per applicare i cambiamenti e chiudere la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. Per uscire senza - salvare i cambiamenti cliccate sul bottone Chiudi. - - - - - - Caratteri - - L'applet Selettore dei caratteri contiene tutti - i caratteri del set ISO-8859-1 (Latin-1) che non si trovano nelle tastiere - americane standard. Questi caratteri vengono mappati sui caratteri - standard come mostrato in . I caratteri in grassetto nella - prima colonna di ogni metà pagina e a sinistra delle linee tratteggiate - sono i caratteri da digitare nell'applet Selettore dei - caratteri per ottenere i corrispondenti caratteri mostrati a - destra. - -
- Caratteri da digitare in Selettore dei caratteri - - Caratteri da digitare in Selettore dei caratteri - - - -
- - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - Selettore dei caratteri è stata scritta da - Alexandre Muñiz (munizao@xprt.net). Inviate tutti i - commenti, suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking - database. (Le istruzioni per riportare errori possono essere - trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel Menù - Principale, per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata fatta da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clock-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clock-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 781be02..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clock-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,257 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Orologio - - - L'applet Orologio, mostrata in , è una semplice applet che mostra l'ora (ed anche - la data a richiesta) usando diversi formati. Per aggiungere questa applet - al Pannello cliccate sul - Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Orologi - Orologio - . - - -
- Applet Orologio - - Applet Orologio - - - -
- - - - Uso - - L'applet Orologio non richiede nessun input da - parte dell'utente. Può essere configurata come descritto più avanti. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni a proposito dell'Applet - Orologio, come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Orologio - cliccando con il tasto destro e scegliendo - Proprietà…. Si aprirà così la finestra - di dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), da dove è possibile cambiare molte - impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - Formato dell'ora — Potete selezionare il formato 12 - ore per una data in formato AM/PM oppure - 24 ore per un orologio a 24 ore. - - - - - - Mostra la data nell'applet — Selezionate questa casella per - mostrare la data dentro l'applet. - - - - - - Mostra la data come suggerimento — Selezionate questa casella - per mostrare la data come un suggerimento che appare brevemente - quando muovete il puntatore del mouse sopra l'applet. - - - - - - Utilizza il GMT — Selezionate questa casella per mostrare - l'ora secondo il Tempo Medio di Greenwich, invece del fuso orario - locale. - - - - - - Ora Unix — Selezionate questa casella per mostrare il tempo, - in secondi, passato dal 1° Gennaio del 1970. - - - - - - - - Dopo aver fatto i cambiamenti voluti, cliccate sul bottone - OK per applicare i cambiamenti e chiudere la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. Per non salvare i - cambiamenti e per tornare ai precedenti valori cliccate sul bottone - Applica. - - - - Impostare l'ora - - L'applet Orologio vi mostra soltanto l'ora: - per poter modificare l'ora di un sistema Linux o Unix dovete usare il - comando date. Ad esempio per impostare l'ora alle - 11:43:01PM e la data del 4 Aprile dovete digitare date - --set="Apr 4 23:43:01", con l'avvertenza che per fare ciò - dovete esservi loggati come root. Maggiori informazioni sul comando - date sono disponibili dalla pagine del manuale di date. Per impostare il - vostro fuso orario dovete usare il comando timeconfig - oppure tzselect a seconda della distribuzione Linux - che state usando. - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Orologio è stata scritta da Miguel de - Icaza (miguel@kernel.org), Federico Mena - (quartic@gimp.org), e Stuart Parmenter - (pavlov@innerx.net). Inviate i commenti, suggerimenti e - segnalazioni di bug al GNOME - bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per inviare le segnalazioni di - bug possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando GNOME 1.1 o più recente potete usare anche il - Bug Report Tool (bug-buddy), - disponibile nel sottomenù Utilità del menù - Programmi,per inviare segnalazioni di bug. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardanti questo manuale al GNOME Documentation - Project inviando un messaggio a - docs@gnome.org. Potete inviare i commenti anche via rete - usando il GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - Traduzione italiana a cura di Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti sulla - traduzione a webmaster@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3044fd3..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/clockmail-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,247 +0,0 @@ - - Orologio e Controllo Posta - - La applet di GNOME Orologio e controllo posta - (oppure clockmail_applet, in breve) è una - applet che mostra l'ora corrente e la quantità di posta si trova - nella vostra cartella. Quando nuova posta è in attesa, lampeggia. - - - Fino a GNOME di Ottobre si trovava in gnome-core, ma adesso viene - distribuita nel pachetto gnome-applets. Questa parte delle guida - si riferisce alla applet distribuita nel pacchetto gnome-applets-.1.1.2. - - - Per aggiungere la clockmail_applet al vostro - pannello, premete il terzo pulsante del mouse in - una zona vuota e seguite la sequenza: - - Applet - Orologi - Orologio e controllo posta - - oppure digitate nella linea di comando: - clockmail_applet --activate-goad-server=clockmail_applet - - - Questa applet è stata scritta da John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Comunicate gli errori - tramite il Gnome Bug - Tracking System. È possibile eseguire questa operazione - seguendo le istruzioni presenti sul sito web oppure utilizzando - bug-buddy da linea di comando. Nella voce - "package" inserite gnome-applets. - - - - Uso - - Non farete niente di speciale con questa applet. Risiede nel vostro pannello - mostrando l'ora corrente e la quantità di posta in attesa. Sono disponibili - molte opzioni legate all'uso del mouse: - - - - - - La pressione del primo tasto del mouse - permette di visualizzare un suggerimento che - mostra la data corrente. Può inoltre avviare un altro programma - (tipicamente Balsa, il programma di posta) se questa opzione è stata - selezionata nella finestra delle impostazioni generali. - - - - - La pressione continuata del secondo tasto del mouse - permette di postare l'orologio all'interno del - pannello, come qualunque altro oggetto che risiede in quest'ultimo. - - - - - La pressione del terzo tasto del mouse - mostra le opzioni standard disponibili per tutte le applet, incluso - un menu Proprietà..., spiegato - più avanti. - - - - - - - Proprietà - - La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà (che si fa chiamare "Impostazioni - ClockMail" piuttosto che proprietà) è divisa in due sezioni, una per le - opzioni generali, e una per i temi. - - - - - Proprietà Generali - - - La sezione delle proprietà Generali permette - di selezionare molteplici opzioni: - - - - Visualizza l'ora nel formato 12 ore (AM/PM) - - - Quando questa casella è selezionata, l'ora viene mostrata nel - formato 12 ore. La modalità predefinita vede questa opzione - disattivata e l'ora mostrata nel formato 24 ore. - - - - - Visualizza l'ora relativa a GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) - - - È possibile modificare il timezone che utilizzato dall'applet. - È inoltre permesso di digitare direttamente nella casella di testo - oppure utilizzando le piccole freccie per scorrere le opzioni. L'ora - può essere qualunque cosa inclusa da 12 ore avanti e 12 ore indietro - rispetto al GMT. Ricordatevi di selezionare la casella, altrimenti il - nuovo timezone non verrà utilizzato. - - - - - File della posta - - - Questo è il file che viene controllato per la posta in arrivo. - La versione predefinita cerca in - /var/spool/mail/vostro_username - o qualcosa di simile. Se filtrate e/o spostate la posta da qualche - altra parta, modificate queste opzione. Non è possibile elencare - più file. La applet ne può controllare uno soltanto. - - - - - Quando arriva nuova posta esegui: - - - È possibile far accadere qualcosa quando arriva nuova posta. - Ad esempio, è molto comune far emettere un suono quando questa - arriva. È possibile inserire in questa casella di testo il comando - da eseguire (assicurandosi di aver selezionato la casella apposita). - Se desiderate inserire più di un comando, è possibile separarli - trami un punto e virgola. Ad esempio: - - - - - esdplay /full/path/to/file.wav - - - - - cd /path/to/directory ; esdplay file.wav - - - - - Questi due comandi ottengono lo stesso effetto. È necessario - inserire il percorso completo, senza utilizzare scorciatoie come - cd ~ . - - - - - Lampeggia quando della posta è in attesa - - - If you select this checkbox, then the - graphic will blink until you read your unread email. Normally, - this is off, and the blinking lasts a few seconds only. - - - - - Dimensione mailbox da considerare piena - - - Se la mailbox è piena, alcuni temi lo mostreranno. - Questa impostazione vi permette di decidere a quanto - corrisponde il "piena". - - - - - Dopo un click, esegui... - - - Quando attivata questa opzione, premendo il primo - pulsante del mouse sulla applet verrà eseguito - il comando prescelto. Nelle opzioni predefinite viene eseguito - il programma di posta Balsa (se questo è installato. Se non è - installato, non accadrà niente). Se non desiderate eseguire qualcosa, - semplicamente cancellate il contenuto della casella di posta. - - - - - - - - Temi - - - Questa applet fornisce una lunga lista di temi, tutti quelli che trova - in $PREFIX/clockmail/. L'impostazione predefinita - non usa nessuno di questi. Notare che non tutti questi temi mostrano - sia l'ora che lo stato della casella di posta. Alcuni di questi - ne mostrano uno soltanto. Selezionate un tema e premete il pulsante - Applica per effettuare le modifiche. - - - - - - - - Bugs e limitazioni - - - - Non è possibile cambiare l'ora attraverso le proprietà - dell'orologio. Questo non è propriamente un bug, visto che - è necessario essere utente root per alterare - l'ora di sistema, utilizzando il comando date. - - - - - Se modificate l'ora di sistema utilizzando il comando - date, l'orologio smetterà di funzionare - finchè il sistema non raggiungerà l'ora mostrata dalla applet. - Tutto ricomincierà a funzionare nel migliore dei modi. - - - - - Il tema mailcounter mostra il numero di messaggi di posta in attesa in - modo sbagliato. - - - - - Molti temi non si adattano alla dimensione di un pannello verticale - e forzano la larghezza del pannello. - - - - - Non gestisce multiple caselle di posta. - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3e26dcd..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpuload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,336 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - L'applet Carico CPU - - - - L'applicazione cpuload_applet è una piccola - applet di controllo che si aggiunge ad un pannello e che mostra quanto - viene usata la CPU. - - - - - Uso - - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge al pannello e lì - gira. Ci sono però molte opzioni per modificarne l'aspetto. - - -
- Applet Carico CPU - - Applet Carico CPU - - - -
- - - cpuload_applet divide l'uso della CPU in - quattro modi: - - - - Utente - - - Questo misura l'uso della CPU nello "spazio utente", cioè tutto ciò - che non sta comunicando direttamente con il kernel. Il colore - predefinito è il giallo. - - - - - - Sistema - - - Questo misura l'uso della CPU da parte di ciò che lavora con il - kernel, cioè ciò che lavora con memoria e dischi. Il colore - predefinito è grigio chiaro. - - - - - - Nice - - - Questo misura l'uso della CPU da parte di ciò che non è "nice", cioè - che gira ad alta priorità. Il colore predefinito è grigio normale. - - - - - - Inattività - - - Misura la capacità del processore che non viene usata. Il colore - predefinito è nero. - - - - - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù del tasto destro contiene anche - le seguenti: - - - - - - - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Con questo si apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet descritta più avanti con la - quale si possono modificare le proprietà di default di questa e di - altre applet di controllo. - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Questo apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet in cui si possono modificare - le proprietà solo di cpuload_applet. - - - - - - Avvia gtop... - - - Questa voce avvia il programma gtop, Monitor di - Sistema di GNOME. gtop offre un controllo - molto più dettagliato del sistema e cose vi sta accadendo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - -
- - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà con i valori predefiniti - - - Finestra di dialogo dell'applet Carico CPU con valori - predefiniti - - - -
- - - Come in molte altre applet di controllo, - cpuload_applet ci sono due modi per selezionare - le proprietà. Si può cambiare contemporaneamente tutte le applet che - appartengono a questo gruppo (cpuload_applet, - memload_applet, - swapload_applet, - netload_applet e - loadavg_applet) in una sola grande finestra di - dialogo. Può essere utile nel caso si usino una o più di queste applet e - queste proprietà vengono usate di default. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare - sulla voce Proprietà... del menù. - - -
- - Finestra di dialogo specifica per l'Applet Carico CPU - - - Finestra di dialogo specifica per l'Applet Carico - CPU - - - -
- - - È anche possibile modificare solo le proprietà per - cpuload_applet. Può essere utile se viene usata - soltanto quest'applicazione oppure se si vogliono provare nuove - combinazioni. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare sulla voce - Proprietà del menù. - - - - Se si usa la voce Proprietà... e si - modificano le proprietà solo per questa applet è necessario - deselezionare il bottone Utilizza impostazioni - predefinite prima di poter modificare le impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà di Carico CPU - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà di Carico CPU - - - -
- - - Le modifiche che possono essere fatte sono tre: - - - - - Colori - - - Si possono modificare i colori usati per i diversi usi dell'uso - della CPU cliccando sui bottoni con i colori; apparirà così la - finestra di dialogo dei colori di GNOME. - - - - - - Velocità - - - Si può modificare la velocità con cui procede il grafico. L'unità di - misura è il millisecondo; il valore massimo è 1.000.000.000 (un - milione) e il minimo è 1 con valore predefinito pari a 500. - - - - - - Dimensione - - - Si può così modificare la dimensione della applet. L'unità di misura - è il pixel. Il valore predefinito è 40 e si può variare da 1 pixel a - piacere. Nei pannelli verticali il valore si riferisce all'altezza, - in quelli orizzontali la larghezza. - - - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Ridimensionando e modificando l'orientamento del pannello può provocare - problemi intermittenti che dovrebbero però stabilizzarsi rapidamente. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 327f216..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/cpumemusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - L'applet Utilizzo Memoria/CPU - - - Utilizzo Memoria/CPU è una piccola applet di - controllo che si aggiunge ad un pannello e che indica l'uso del processore - (CPU), della memoria e dello swap. Per aggiungere questo applet ad un - pannello cliccare con il tasto destro del mouse su - Pannello e selezionare - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Controllo - Utilizzazione Memoria/CPU - . - - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello e - lì gira. - - - L'applet mostra tre barre di scorrimento, una per il processore, una per - la memoria e una per lo swap. Se il pannello in cui si trova l'applet è - orizzontale, la barra in alto è quella che indica l'uso del processore, - nel mezzo la memoria e in basso lo swap; se invece il pannello è verticale - la barra di destra è quella che indica il processore, nel centro la - memoria e a sinistra lo swap. - - -
- Applet Utilizzazione Memoria/CPU - - Applet Utilizzazione Memoria/CPU - - - -
- - - - Processore - - - In questa barra vengono utilizzati tre colori: il giallo indica le - attività del processore che non riguardano il kernel; il grigio le - attività dei programmi che comunicano con il kernel (tipicamente - attività con notevole carico di lettura e scrittura come muovere - elementi fra la memoria e i dischi); infine il nero di background - indica i tempi in cui il processore non viene usato. - - - - - Memoria - - - In questa barra vengono usati quattro colori: il giallo indica la - memoria condivisa, cioè usata in contemporanea da più di un - programma; il grigio indica la memoria usata per i buffer (in cui - vengono messi i dati prima di venire scritti sui dischi); il - giallo-verdognolo indica usi differenti ed infine il verde indica la - memoria libera. - - - - - Swap - - - In questa barra vengono usati due colori: il rosso per indicare lo - swap usato e il verde per quello libero. Lo swap è una parte - dell'hard-disk dove vengono il kernel copia dalla memoria le parti - dei programmi che non sono attualmente in uso, da dove possono essere - facilmente recuperati nel momento in cui tornino necessario. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Questa applet non contiene bug conosciuti. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta Radek Doulik - (rodo@ucw.cz). Inviate le notifiche di problemi a GNOME bug tracking system. - Per fare questo è possibile seguire le indicazioni del sito oppure usare - bug-buddy dalla linea di comando. Per questa - applet indicare gnome-applets. - - - Questa guida è stata scritta da Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu) ed è quasi completamente basata sulla - precedente documentazione presente nella Guida dell'Utente di GNOME 1.0.53 - di David Mason (dcm@redhat.com) e David Wheeler. Inviate - tutti i commenti e i suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation - Project mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È - possibile anche spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 21581d4..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/desk-guide-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,593 +0,0 @@ - - - Desk Guide Applet - - - L'applet Desk Guide, mostrata in , vi permette di scorrere i vostri desktop - virtuali in modo grafico. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse sul - Pannello e selezionare - - Applet - Utilità - Desk Guide - . - - -
- Desk Guide - - Desk Guide - - - -
- - Uso - - - - L'applet Desk Guide vi aiuta a scorrere i - desktop virtuali disponibili nel vostro sistema. Il sistema X - Window funziona utilizzando un programma chiamato "gestore - di finestre", il quale vi permette di creare più scrivanie virtuali (dette anche - workspace) per organizzare il lavoro dividendo la varie applicazioni fra le - varie scrivanie; ognuna di queste scrivanie può ancora essere divisa - ulteriormente in spazi di lavoro, detti "desk areas". Questa applet è - un'applicazione che vi permette di scorrere le varie scrivanie e desk areas - visualizzandoli in una piccola mappa nel Pannello di GNOME e di cambiare - quello attuale facilmente. - - - - L'applet Desk Guide funziona insieme al gestore - di finestre, il programma (come ad esempio Sawfish, Enlightenment) che - controlla l'aspetto e le funzioni delle finestre; il gestore di finestre - disegna i bordi, vi permette di ridimensionare le finestre, di piazzarle e - di muoverle sullo schermo e gestisce inoltre le varie scrivanie. L'applet - Desk Guide gestisce la "navigazione" fra le varie - scrivanie. - - - - L'applet Desk Guide mostra una versione - miniaturizzata delle scrivanie disponibili, oltre ad una finestra evidenziata - che rappresenta le applicazioni che stanno girando in ogni scrivania, - delle quali quella attiva viene evidenziata. Cliccando sulla - rappresentazione di una scrivania vi permette di cambiare quella attiva - sul vostro monitor. - - - Nota - - I vari gestori di finestre usano termini diversi per descrivere i desktop - virtuali e gli ulteriori workspace al loro - interno. Enlightenment divide il vostro - spazio di lavoro in "desktops", a loro volta divisi in - "screens". Sawfish, già conosciuto come - Sawmill, la divide invece in "workspaces" - divisi a loro volta in colonne e righe. Questa applet usa il termine - "scrivanie" per i workspace e "viste" per le aree interne. Leggete la - documentazione del vostro gestore di finestre per maggiori informazioni su - come impostare e gestire i vostri workspace virtuali. - - - - - Cliccando sulla freccia sul lato sinistro dell'applet Desk - Guide mostra la finestra Lista - Task, mostrata in . - - -
- Vista a task del Desk Guide - - Vista a task del Desk Guide - - - -
- - - La lista delle finestre mostra le varie applicazioni in funzione sul - vostro computer: cliccando con il tasto sinistro su una di queste elencate - nella Lista Task sposta il focus sull'applicazione - relativa, cioè la finestra diventa in primo piano e l'input dalla tastiera - viene indirizzato all'applicazione che sta girando in quella finestra. - - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale (vedi ), il menù del tasto destro - contiene anche le seguenti voci: - - - - Proprietà... — Questa voce apre - la finestra di dialogo Proprietà (vedi - ) dalla quale è possibile - modificare l'aspetto e il comportamento dell'applet. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Desk Guide - cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionando - Proprietà.... Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà con quattro pagine evidenziate - dalle quali potete configurare le varie opzioni - visualizzazione, task, geometria, avanzate. - - - - Properties - Display - - La prima finestra di Proprietà, mostrata in , vi permette di controllare - l'aspetto dell'applet. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - Le opzioni disponibili sono: - - - - Scambia la freccia — scambia il lato - sul quale viene mostrata la freccia usata per aprire la finestra - della lista dei task. - - - - - - Mostra unicamente la scrivania corrente nel - pager — permette di visualizzare solo la - scrivania attiva, comprese le varie viste. - - - - - - Mostra la griglia sopra i tasks — Se - usate varie viste (non solo scrivanie multiple) nel vostro gestore - di finestre, Desk Guide disegna una griglia - delle viste nella scrivania attiva. È possibile far disegnare la - griglia sia sopra che sotto le finestre. - - - - - - Mostra i suggerimenti di Desk Guide — - Mostra i suggerimenti relativi ai vari componenti - dell'applet. La freccia è il solo componente che mostra un - suggerimento. - - - - - - Ritardo dei suggerimenti [ms] — il - ritardo, in millisecondi, prima che il suggerimento venga - mostrato. È possibile digitare direttamente il numero oppure usare - la freccia per modificarlo. - - - - - - Mostra i nomi delle scrivanie come - suggerimenti — Alcuni window manager, come ad - esempio Enlightenment, permettono di - dare un nome alle vostre scrivanie; quest'opzione permette a - Desk guide di mostrare dei - suggerimenti contenenti questi nomi. - - - - - - Ritardo per i suggerimenti dei nomi delle scrivanie - [ms] — il ritardo, in millisecondi, prima che il - suggerimento venga mostrato. È possibile digitare direttamente il - numero oppure usare la freccia per modificarlo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - Lista task - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Lista task - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Lista task - - - -
- - Le opzioni disponibili sono: - - - - Mostra applicazioni nascoste, Mostra - le applicazioni non visibili nella lista, - Mostra le applicazioni non mostrate nella - taskbar — Queste quattro voci permettono a - Deskguide di mostrare le applicazioni - che stanno girando con delle opzioni impostate perché non vengano - mostrate da programmi come quest'applet. Per esempio il - Pannello è impostato come nascosto - (HIDDEN), non visibile nella lista delle finestre - (HIDE_FROM_WINLIST) né dalle taskbar - (HIDE_FROM_TASKBAR). Selezionando queste opzioni si permette a - Deskguide di rendere lo stesso visibili - queste applicazioni. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - Geometria -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Geometria - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Geometria - - - -
- Le opzioni dispononibili sono: - - - - Altezza della scrivania (in pixels) — - imposta l'altezza delle scrivanie; di default questa opzione non è - modificabile perché il Pannello la imposta - automaticamente. Per modificarla direttamente deselezionate la - casella Ignora l'altezza della scrivania con la dimensione - del pannello. - - - - - - Ignora l'altezza della scrivania con la dimensione del - pannello — forza Desk - Guide a seguire la dimensione del - Pannello. Deselezionandola vi permette di - impostare manualmente l'altezza usando l'impostazione - Altezza della scrivania di cui sopra. - - - - - - Dividi l'altezza per il numero di aree - verticali — divide l'altezza totale dell'applet - per il numero di colonne delle desktop areas visibili. - - - - - - Righe di desktop — imposta il numero di - righe create da Desk Guide nella mappa - disegnata nel Pannello per rappresentare - tutte le vostre scrivanie. - - - È il vostro gestore di finestre, non l'applet Desk - Guide, a controllare il numero di scrivanie - disponibili nel vostro sistema: questa opzione imposta solo la - modalità con la quale Desk Guide li - mostra. - - - - - - - - Dividi l'altezza per il numero di righe — - forza Desk Guide a disegnare tutte le - colonne di scrivanie nell'altezza specificata sopra, sia che venga - specificata manualmente sia che venga determinata automaticamente - per rispettare l'altezza del Pannello). Non - selezionando questa casella, se avete più di una colonna di scrivanie, - l'applet può assumere l'altezza doppia e anche maggiore. - - - - - - Le opzioni per Aspetto Verticale sono identiche a - quelle per l'aspetto orizzontale già viste, ma hanno effetto sulla - larghezza invece che sull'altezza e sulle colonne invece che sulle - righe. - - - - - Proprietà - Avanzate -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Avanzate - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - Avanzate - - - -
- - - Le Opzioni Avanzate vi permettono di controllare il comportamento di - Desk Guide quando si usano specifici gestori - di finestre, oltre ad altre cose. - - - - - - Disegna i desktop con un doppio buffer - (raccomandato) — controlla il modo con cui - Desk Guide disegna le scrivanie. Senza - questa opzione è probabile che il disegno venga tremolante su - computer più lenti, ma con questa opzione le performance sono più - basse su connessioni di rete. - - - - - - Il gestore di finestre sposta le decorazioni - — Selezionate questa casella se quando muovete una finestra - con il tasto centrale del mouse questa poi rimane ferma. Se avete - dei dubbi selezionate quest'opzione nel caso stiate usando uno di - questi gestori di finestre: - (AfterStep, - Enlightenment, - FVWM, IceWM, o - Sawmill, ora conosciuto come - Sawfish). - - - - - - Il gestore di finestre cambia l'area attiva su tutte le - scrivanie — Se avete più di una scrivania, con - dentro ognuna diverse aree di lavoro, potete usare quest'opzione per - forzare il gestore di finestre a cambiare l'area attiva all'interno - di tutte le scrivanie contemporaneamente se cambiate l'area di - lavoro su una sola. - - - - - - Il gestore di finestre si aspetta che il modifichi le - proprietà della scrivania e dell'area — Ancora - non ha alcun effetto. - - - - - Visualizza automaticamente i processi nel menu a - tendina — Fa apparire automaticamente la vista - dei task dopo che avete cliccato su un'applicazione sull'elenco dei - task. Se non viene selezionata dovete cliccare due volte per vedere - la finestra. - - - - - - - Maggiori Informazioni - Tutte le finestre di dialogo Proprietà hanno - questi tre bottoni nel parte inferiore della finestra: - - - - OK — Premendo - OK renderete attivi tutti i cambiamenti - nelle proprietà che avete scelto e chiuderete la finestra di - dialogo. - - - - - Applica — Premendo - Applica in qualsiasi momento renderete - attivi tutti i cambiamenti senza chiudere la finestra di - dialogo. Questo risulta comodo per provare gli effetti dei - cambiamenti richiesti senza però dover smettere di continuare a - cambiarli. - - - - - Chiudi — Premendo - Chiudi chiuderete la finestra di dialogo; - solo i cambiamenti già applicati con il bottone - Applica verranno salvati, mentre gli altri - saranno persi. - - - - - Aiuto — Premendo - Aiuto appare il manuale per l'applicazione - alla pagina dove viene spiegata la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. - - - - - - - - Voci Standard del menù Pop-Up - - Tutte le applet dovrebbero avere le seguenti voci nel menù che appare - cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro: - - - Rimuovi dal pannello - - - La voce Rimuovi dal pannello serve - per rimuovere l'applet dal Pannello. - - - - - - Sposta - - - Dopo aver selezionato Sposta, il - puntatore del vostro mouse cambierà aspetto (diventando - normalmente una croce); come muoverete il mouse l'applet lo - seguirà fino a quando non premerete un altro tasto qualsiasi, - posizione nella quale l'applet si fermerà. Nota bene che in - questo modo è possibile spostare le applet fra differenti - Pannelli. - - - - - - Informazioni su... - - - La voce Informazioni su... fa apparire - una finestra di dialogo contenente svariate informazioni - sull'applet, come il nome, la versione, l'autore, il copyright, - la licenza e la descrizione. - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - L'opzione Il gestore di finestre si aspetta che il modifichi le - proprietà della scrivania e dell'area nelle - proprietà avanzate non ha ancora alcun effetto. - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Desk Guide è stata scritta da Tim - Janik (timj@gtk.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e le - segnalazioni di bug al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - inviare le notizie dei bug possono essere trovate - on-line. Se state usando GNOME 1.1 o più nuovo potete usare anche - Bug Report Tool (bug-buddy), - disponibile nel sottomenù Utilità del menù - Programmi, per inviare le segnalazioni dei bug. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti a proposito di questo manuale al GNOME Documentation - Project inviando un messaggio di posta elettronica a - docs@gnome.org. Potete inviare i vostri commenti anche usando - il GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - Traduzione italiana a cura di Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org. Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti a webmaster@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - Licenza - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or - modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software Foundation; - either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. - - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General - Public License for more details. - - - A copy of the GNU - General Public License is included with the GNOME - documentation. You also may obtain a copy from the Free Software - Foundation by visiting their - Web site or by writing to -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330 - Boston, MA 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3e939f5..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/diskusage-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ - - - Applet Utilizzo del disco - - - - L'applet Utilizzo del disco, mostrata nella , fornisce un controllo all'interno del - pannello relativo allo spazio in uso o disponibile sui dischi. Per - aggiungere questa applet al pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro del - mouse sul pannello e selezionate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Controllo - Utilizzo del disco - - - - -
- Applet Utilizzo del disco - - Applet Utilizzo del disco - - - -
- - - - - - Uso - - - L'applet Utilizzo del disco fornisce un controllo - in tempo reale dello spazio disponibile sul vostro disco. - - - Fornisce tre tipi di informazione. Il grafico a torta colorato rappresenta - graficamente quanto spazio è usato e quanto è libero. - MP: indica il mount point del disco controllato. - av: indica lo spazio disponibile sul disco - selezionato, in kilobytes. Cliccando sull'applet potete cambiare il disco - controllato. Cliccando ripetutamente cambia ciclicamente fra tutti i - dischi disponibili. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet viene mostrato il menù - contenente le seguenti voci: - - - - File system — permette di cambiare - il file system che l'applet Utilizzo del disco - controlla. - - - - - Proprietà...— apre la finestra - - Proprietà... - - - - - - - Aggiorna — può essere utilizzato - per forzare l'applet ad aggiornare la lista dei file system - controllati da questa. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra il manuale di questa - applet. - - - - - - Informazioni su... — mostra - informazioni riguardo la applet Utilizzo del - disco, come la versione di questa e il nome del suo - autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Utilizzo del - disco cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse e - selezionando Proprietà. Con questo fate - partire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà…, che - permette di cambiare alcuni parametri. - -
- - Preferenze - - - Preferenze - - - -
- - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - - Colori — - Per cambiare i colori usati dall'applet, cliccate sui - bottoni colorati accanto a Spazio - Usato, Spazio disponibile, - Colore del testo e Colore dello - sfondo. Apparirà un selettore di colori con le - opzioni per i colori da cambiare. Quando avrete finito cliccate sul - bottone OK del selettore dei colori. - - - - - - Dimensione — - Dimensione dell'applet e può essere utilizzato - per cambiare l'altezza (per un pannello orizzontale) o la larghezza - (per un pannello verticale) dell'applet. - - - - Cliccando sulla casella di spunta Scegli automaticamente - la dimensione ottimale è possibile forzare l'applet - Utilizzo del disco a scegliere - automaticamente la dimensione appropriata per il pannello. - - - - - - Font — Cliccando sulla barra di questa - finestra viene mostrata una finestra di dialogo per cambiare il font - utilizzato nell'applet. - - - - - Frequenza di aggiornamento — cambia il - periodo di tempo, in secondi, fra gli aggiornamenti dell'applet - Utilizzo del disco. - - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - - Autori - - - L'applet Utilizzo del disco è stata scritta da - Dave Finton dfinton@d.umn.edu, Bruno Widmann - bwidmann@tks.fh-sbg.ac.at and Martin Baulig - martin@home-of-linux.org. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f95b84d..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/drivemount-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,558 +0,0 @@ - - - Applet Montadischi - - - - L'applet Montadischi, mostrata in , permette di montare e smontare rapidamente - e facilmente svariati tipi di dischi e file system del computer. Per - aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello cliccate con - il tasto destro del mouse sul Pannello e selezionare - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utility - Montadischi - . - - -
- - Applet Montadischi - - - Applet Montadischi - - - -
- - - - Informazioni iniziali per Principianti - - - Molti file system su sistemi Linux e Unix devono essere montati e smontati - manualmente. Dopo che un file system è stato montato è possibile leggerci - e scriverci. È importante smontare dischi removibili, come ad esempio i - floppy e i dischi Zip prima di toglierli perché i sistemi Linux e Unix - spesso non scrivono immediatamente i cambiamenti. Questi spesso lasciano - in buffer i cambiamenti richiesti per aumentare la velocità di tutto il - sistema. Le partizioni su dischi fissi, come i dischi rigidi, normalmente - vengono montate automaticamente quando il computer viene acceso e smontate - quando viene spento. Dischi removibili devono essere montati e smontati - direttamente dall'utente, usando ad esempio l'applet - Montadischi. - - - Il "file system root" è il file system principale del computer indicato da - "/" (root). Altri file system sono associati a directory all'interno del - file system root.. Queste sono chiamate "mount point" e sono semplici - directory vuote. Quando un file system è montato i suoi contenuti sono - visibili all'interno della directory. Ad esempio, molti sistemi creano un - mount point "/mnt/floppy" che è semplicemente una directory vuota se il - floppy non è montato e che invece mostra il contenuto del floppy se questo - è montato. - - - - - - - Uso - - - Per montare o smontare un disco, è sufficiente cliccare sull'incona - dell'applet Montadischi con il tasto sinistro - del mouse. Per i drive che possono espellere i dischi, come molti lettori - di cdrom e i drive JAZ, è possibile espellere il disco cliccando - sull'icona con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionare - Espelli. Per visualizzare il contenuto del - disco con il file manager di GNOME selezionare - Sfoglia. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet fa apparire un menù che contiene - le seguenti voci: - - - - - Sfoglia … — mostra il - contenuto del disco del drive usando il file manager di GNOME. Il - disco deve essere montato perché possa essere fatto. - - - - - - Espelli — espelle il disco per i - drive che possono essere espulsi, come ad esempio cdrom e drive - JAZ. - - - - - - Proprietà... — apre la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra il manuale di questa - applet. - - - - - - Informazioni su... — mostra - informazioni riguardo l'applet - Montadischi, come la versione - dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - Il mount point e lo stato attuale di un disco vengono mostrati da un - suggerimento se il cursore del mouse è lasciato sopra l'applet per un po' - di tempo, come mostrato in . -
- Applet Montadischi che mostra un suggerimento - - Applet Montadischi che mostra un suggerimento - - - -
- - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Montadischi - cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionando - Proprietà.... Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), che permette di cambiare molti - parametri. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - Mount point &mdask; Questo è il mount point usato per montare il - disco. I mount point sono directory vuote che contengono il - contenuto del disco quando questo verrà montato. I mount point - possono essere in qualunque punto del file system ma è convenzione - mettere tutti i mount point nella directory /mnt. - - - - - - Aggiornamento in secondi — Questo è l'intervallo nel quale - Montadischi aggiorna l'icona verificando - lo stato del drive. Questo è utile solo nel caso in cui si smontino - i drive usando applicazioni o comandi oltre a - Montadischi. - - - - - - Icona — Questa indica l'icona (diversa nel caso che sia - montato o smontato) usata per il drive. Ci sono set di icone per i - drive più diffusi (floppy, cdrom, Zip, hard disk a JAZ). Nella - figura si possono vedere. È - possibile selezionare anche - Personalizzato che permette di indicare - la propria icona preferita. - -
- Icone per dischi montati e smontati di svariati tipi - - Icone per dischi montati e smontati di svariati tipi - - - -
- - - Nota che mostra le icone - per gli stati montato e smontato (da sinistra a destra) di floppy, - cdrom, Zip, JAZ e hard disk. - - - - - - - Icona personalizzata per i drive montati — Un'icona - personalizzata che viene usata quando il drive è - montato. Quest'opzione risulta disponibile solo se - Icona: è selezionata su "Personalizzata". - - - - - - Icona personalizzata per i drive smontati — Un'icona - personalizzata che viene usata quando il drive è - smontato. Quest'opzione risulta disponibile solo se - Icona: è selezionata su "Personalizzata". - - - - - - Ridimensiona in base al pannello — Selezionando quest'opzione - la dimensione dell'icona montata e smontata viene adattata a quella - del Pannello. Se questa opzione non viene - selezionata la dimensione dell'icona è fissa, indipendentemente dalla - dimensione del Pannello. Selezionando - quest'opzione si ottiene normalmente un miglior aspetto. Per - Pannelli di dimensioni veramente ridotte, non - selezionando questa opzione può risultare utile, perché così si può - forzare l'applet ad apparire ruotata e più larga, il che la può - rendere più facile da vedere. - - - - - - Usa test di stato compatibile con automount — Selezionare - questa opzione solo se viene usato automount, altrimenti lasciarla - non selezionata. - - - Informazioni per Utenti Esperti - - Il comando di default usato da - Montadischi per verificare se il drive - è montato è stat e può montare il drive - comunque montato se è in uso - automount. Se viene selezionato questo - bottone, il comando usato è invece mount che - impedisce a automount di montare il - drive. La ragione per cui questo bottone non viene selezionato di - default è che il comando mount crea un carico - per il processore più pesante di stat. - - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - Configurazione del sistema - - - - Per Utenti Esperti - - Questa sezione è pensata per amministratori di sistema e utenti esperti. - - - - - Per far sì che l'applet Montadischi funzioni - correttamente, è probabile che il sistema debba essere configurato dal suo - amministratore usando i privilegi di root. In questa sezione troverete - un'introduzione assolutamente di base. - - - - La informazioni che indicano i mount point e i tipi di file system di ogni - drive si trova nel file /etc/fstab. Questo file può - essere configurato direttamente oppure usando il programma - linuxconf. Per i drive che non usano sempre un - solo tipo di file system (come ad esempio il drive dei floppy disk che può - usare sia ext2 e il file system msdos), si dovrebbe usare "auto" per - indicare il tipo di file system. Ogni drive viene indicato su una linea in - /etc/fstab in questo modo - - /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy auto noauto,rw,user 0 0 - - Questa voce descrive il primo drive dei floppy disk (/dev/fd0) con un - mount point in /mnt/floppy, un tipo di file system - che può cambiare e che viene stabilito automaticamente, e con le seguenti - configurazioni: "noauto"— Il drive non viene montato automaticamente - quando il computer parte, "rw"— Il drive viene usato in lettura e - scrittura, e "user"— Gli utenti hanno i permessi per montare il - drive. Queste voci, insieme agli ultimi due campi che non vengono spiegati - qui, sono spiegati in dettaglio nella pagina manuale di fstab, ottenibili - con il comando man fstab o usando il programma - Guida di Gnome. - - - - Il programma linuxconf fornisce un'interfaccia - grafica per controllare questi file system. Per far partire - linuxconf, basta dare il comando - linuxconf in una finestra con una shell (devi entrare - come root). Scegli - - Config - File systems - Access local drive - - Per modificare una voce basta - selezionarla. linuxconf è pensata per essere - facile da usare, e contiene un suo sistema di aiuto interno per guidare - lungo il lavoro. Possono essere aggiunte anche altre voci selezionando il - bottone Add. - - - - - - - Risoluzione degli errori e Spiegazione dei Messaggi d'Errore - - - Se il vostro sistema non è configurato correttamente è probabile che - possiate verificare degli errori quando provate a montare o usare alcuni - drive. Questo è l'elenco di alcuni errori comuni e le loro cause: - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 is not a valid block device - — La causa più comune di quest'errore è che il drive - (in questo esempio, /dev/fd0, corrispondente al drive del floppy) è - vuoto. - - - - - mount: only root can mount /dev/fda on /mnt/floppy - — Non avete i permessi per montare il disco. Nel caso - contattare l'amministratore del sistema, il quale può assegnarvi i - permessi corretti. - - - - Nota per gli amministratori di Sistema - - - È possibile configurare un drive perché sia montabile e smontabile - dagli utenti aggiungendo "user" alle opzioni di mount (nella - quarta colonna) in /etc/fstab. Può essere - fatto a mano oppure usando linuxconf - con l'opzione Local Volume in - - Config - File Systems - Access local drive - - Dopo aver selezionato il drive corretto dalla lista verrà mostrata - Volume specification. Cliccando sulla voce - Options e selezionando il bottone - User mountable. - - - - - - mount: wrong fs type, bad option, bad superblock on - /dev/cdrom, or too many mounted file systems - — - Questo errore può essere causato da molti problemi. Più comunemente - viene causato dal fatto che il tipo di file system indicato è - sbagliato, come ad esempio se si prova a montare un cdrom musicale - come se contenesse dati oppure un floppy formattato dos come se - fosse formattato ext2. - - - - - - umount: can't find /mnt/floppy in /etc/fstab or /etc/mtab - — - Questo indica che il sistema non è stato configurato per usare il - mount point che state tentando di usare. Nella maggior parte dei - casi è probabile che abbiate indicato male la voce mount point in - Mount point ne Finestra di dialogo - Proprietà (vedi anche ). Per determinare quale mount - point deve essere usato contattate l'amministratore del sistema. - - - - Nota per utenti avanzati - - - Ogni device (che sia un file system o un disco) che può essere - montato deve essere indicato nel file di configurazione - /etc/fstab. Leggendo questo file è possibile - vedere quali siano i device configurati nel vostro sistema. Per - aggiungere o modificare le voci è possibile modificare - direttamente il file oppure usare il programma - linuxconf. - - - - - - mount: /dev/fd0 already mounted or /mnt/floppy busy - mount: according to mtab, /dev/fd0 is mounted on /mnt/floppy - — - Questo errore si verifica nel caso in cui ci sia un device (nel caso - d'esempio /dev/fd0) configurato per essere usato su diversi mount - point e si è provato ad usare un mount point mentre il device è - stato montato su un altro. Normalmente non è necessario avere più - mount point per un solo device. - - - - - mount: the kernel does not recognize /dev/sda4 as a - block device(maybe 'insmod driver'?) - — - Contattate l'amministratore del vostro sistema. (L'errore indica che - il kernel non è configurato correttamente per caricare i moduli che - servono per leggere il device). - - - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - - Espelli non funziona sempre perché se si prova ad - Espellere un disco montato non viene dato alcun avviso che spieghi perché - il disco non può uscire. - - - - - - - - - Autori - - - L'applet Montadischi è stato scritto da John - Ellis (johne@bellatlantic.net). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c7e8b8c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fifteen-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Quindici - - - L'applet Quindici, mostrata nella figura , è una versione del vecchio gioco che consiste - nello spostare quindici pedine all'interno di una scacchiera per metterle in - ordine numerico. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello cliccate con il tasto destro sul - Pannello e indicate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Divertimento - Quindici - . - - -
- Applet Quindici - - Applet Quindici - - - -
- - - - Uso - - L'applet parte con le pedine nell'ordine corretto, ordine che deve essere - ripristinare. Per iniziare una nuova partita cliccate con il tasto destro - sull'applet e selezionate Mischia i - pezzi. Muovete poi le pedine cliccandoci sopra con il tasto - sinistro fino a quando non avete ottenuto nuovamente le loro posizioni - originali. Quando avrete raggiunto quest'ordine vedrete una finestra di - dialogo con scritto Hai vinto!. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Mischia i pezzi — mescola a caso le - posizioni delle pedine. Usate questo comando per iniziare un nuovo - gioco. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni a proposito di Quindici come - la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Quindici è stata scritta da Federico - Mena Quintero (federico@nuclecu.unam.mx)ed è basata sul - gioco descritto da Sam Lloyd nel 1878. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata fatta da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fish-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fish-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3fc3a0e..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/fish-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,246 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Pesce - - - L'applet Pesce, mostrata in , mostra un piccolo pesce nel vostro - Pannello e non fa niente altro di utile oltre a - ciò. Per aggiungere questa applet al Pannello - cliccate sul Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Divertimento - Pesce - . - - -
- Applet Pesce - - Applet Pesce - - - -
- - - - Uso - - A differenza di altri pesci questo richiede un po' di cura ma non ha - bisogno che gli puliate l'acquario: nuota felice nella sua acqua e se - glieli chiedete vi fornirà interessanti pensieri. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni a proposito dell'Applet - Pesce, come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Pesce - cliccando con il tasto destro e scegliendo - Proprietà…. Si aprirà così la finestra - di dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), da dove è possibile cambiare molte - impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - Il nome del tuo pesce GNOME — Potete cambiare il nome del - vostro pesce: quello predefinito è Wanda. - - - - - - File dell'animazione: Potete selezionare un differente insieme di - immagini: la directory predefinita per le immagini è - $PREFIX/pixmaps/fish/, da dove potete - scegliere, ma è possibile scegliere un'altra directory contenente - altre immagini. - - - - - - Numero di frame nell'animazione — Il numero di frame che - costituiscono l'animazione: il valore predefinito è tre ma si può - variare da 1 a 255. - - - - - - Pausa per frame (s) — Il ritardo in secondi per aggiornare - l'immagine: il valore predefinito è un secondo ma si può variare da - 0,10 a 10 secondi. - - - - - - Ruota nei pannelli verticali — Questa casella di spunta viene - usata per i pannelli verticali e quando viene selezionata il pesce - nuoterà verso il basso quando si trova su un - Pannello verticale; se invece non viene - selezionata apparirà nello stesso modo come su un - Pannello orizzontale, costringendo il - Pannello verticale ad assumere la sua - dimensione. - - - - - - - - - Dopo aver fatto i cambiamenti voluti, cliccate sul bottone - OK per applicare i cambiamenti e chiudere la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. Per non salvare i - cambiamenti e per tornare ai precedenti valori cliccate sul bottone - Applica. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Quest'applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - Pesce è stato scritto da George Lebl - (jirka@5z.com). Inviate i commenti, suggerimenti e - segnalazioni di bug al GNOME - bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per inviare le segnalazioni di - bug possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando GNOME 1.1 o più recente potete usare anche il - Bug Report Tool (bug-buddy), - disponibile nel sottomenù Utilità del menù - Programmi,per inviare segnalazioni di bug. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Inviate i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardanti questo manuale al GNOME Documentation - Project inviando un messaggio a - docs@gnome.org. Potete inviare i commenti anche via rete - usando il GNOME - Documentation Status Table. - - - - Traduzione italiana a cura di Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti sulla - traduzione a webmaster@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/geyes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/geyes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 845dcd4..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/geyes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ - - Applet gEyes - - - L'applet gEyes, vedi , è composta da un paio di occhi che seguono il - puntatore del mouse sullo schermo. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello cliccate con il tasto destro sul - Pannello e indicate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Divertimento - . - - -
- Applet gEyes - - Applet gEyes - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Guardate gli occhi che guardano il vostro mouse. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - Proprietà … — apre la - finestra di dialogo Impostazioni di gEyes. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni sull'Applet gEyes come - la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet gEyes - cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro ed indicando la voce - Proprietà … . Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Impostazioni di gEyes (mostrata in ) che vi permetterà di cambiare il tema. - - -
- Impostazioni di gEyes - - Impostazioni di gEyes - - - -
- - - Questa finestra mostra una lista dei temi installati per - gEyes. Selezionate il tema che volete usare. - - - - Dopo che avete selezionato il vostro nuovo tema cliccate sul bottone - OK per applicare i cambiamenti e chiudere la - finestra di dialogo Impostazioni di gEyes. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Con l'eccezione del tema Default-tiny molti dei temi sono troppo grandi - per le dimensioni di alcuni Pannelli, forzando così - il Pannello ad asssumere una dimesione maggiore di - quella scelta. - - - - - - - - Autori - - gEyes è stata scritta da Dave Camp - (campd@oit.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk) e Arjan Scherpenisse - (acscherp@wins.uva.nl). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gkb-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gkb-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ae2628b..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gkb-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,295 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Tastiera internazionale GKB - - - L'applet GNOME KeyBoard, mostrata nella sua - configurazione standard in , permette di - modificare facilmente e velocemente la mappatura della tastiera per - differenti paesi. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse sul - Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilità - Tastiera internazionale GKB - . - - -
- Applet Tastiera internazionale GKB - - Applet Tastiera internazionale GKB - - - -
- - - - - Uso - - Una volta configurata l'applet GNOME Keyboard - vi permetterà di modificare la mappatura della tastiera fra due diversi - paesi. Sarà sufficiente cliccare sull'applet con il tasto sinistro del - mouse per cambiare la mappatura. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet apparirà un menù - contenenti le seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà … — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Proprietà GKB. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni riguardo Applet Tastiera internazionale - GKB, come la versione dell'applet e il nome - dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet GNOME - KeyBoard cliccandoci con il tasto destro del mouse e - scegliendo Proprietà…. Apparirà così la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), che permette di aggiungere, - configurare ed eliminare la varie mappature. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà GKB - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà GKB - - - -
- - - GNOME KeyBoard normalmente contiene due - mappature. Ognuna di queste ha la sua sezione, con un'etichetta indicante - il linguaggio o il paese a cui si riferisce. In , ci sono US (per - una tastiera statunitense) e HU (per una - ungherese). È possibile eliminare ogni mappatura selezionandola e premendo - il bottone Delete this keymap. Per aggiungere - un'altra mappatura premere il bottone New keymap - facendo apparire una nuova sezione da personalizzare. - - - - Ogni sezione relativa ad una mappatura contiene le seguenti proprietà: - - - - - Nome della mappatura — Questo è il nome della mappatura che - viene mostrato nella sezione in alto. - - - - - - Percorso delle icone — Questa è il percorso per l'icona usata - per la mappatura in uso. Cliccando sull'immagine della bandiera si - ottiene una lista di bandiere di molti paesi. Se si usano queste - icone non importa indicare direttamente il path all'icona. - - - - - - Comando da usare — Questo è il comando con il quale - GNOME KeyBoard cambia effettivamente la - mappatura. Per default viene usato il comando - setxkbmap LC, dove a - LC deve essere sostituito dalle due - lettere del codice del linguaggio desiderato. Per impostare una - mappatura statunitense ad esempio si può usare il comando - setxkbmap us. - - - Se questo non dovesse funzionare è possibile anche provare a - impostare la tastiera usando il comando gkb_xmmap - LC (ad esempio - gkb_xmmap fr per usare una tastiera - francese). Infine, se volete usare un layout della tastiera - personale in un file per xmodmap impostate il comando - xmodmap - xmodmap-filename (ad esempio, - xmodmap ~/xrus/yawerty.koi8.xmm per usare il - layout della tastiera per la codifica dei caratteri cirillici in - koi8). Visitate per - maggiori informazioni. - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul bottone OK - per salvare i cambiamenti e chiudere la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà GKB.Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - Informazioni tecniche - - Normalmente non è necessario conoscere questi dettagli, ma nel caso in cui - qualcosa non stesse funzionando oppure nel caso in cui siate semplicemente - curiosi, leggete pure. - - - GNOME Keyboard cambia la mappatura della - tastiera con un comando ad X Window System. X Window System ha due modi - per impostare la mappatura della tastiera: la più vecchia è quella - chiamata "xmodmap" e quella più nuova basata su "Xkb extension". Se avete - abilitato Xkb dovete usare questo e cambiare mappatura con il comando - setxkbmap LC. Questo viene - fornito con molti file contenenti i layout per svariate tastiere che si - trovano normalmente nella directory - /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xkb/symbols. - - - Se non avete abilitato l'estensione Xkb oppure se in questa non è compreso - il linguaggio che volete usare dovete usare il più vecchio meccanismo di - xmodmap. In questo caso dovete avere un file che - descrive il layout della tastiera in un formato speciale (vedi la pagina - del manuale di di xmodmap per i dettagli), e il comando - deve essere xmodmapfilename - . GNOME Keyboard include una serie di - file di layout che vengono installati nella directory - /usr/share/xmodmap con nomi del tipo - xmodmap.de. Per usare uno di questi file potete usare - il comando gkb_xmmap LC che - è equivalente al comando xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.LC: ad - esempio gkb_xmmap hu è lo stesso di xmodmap - /usr/share/xmodmap/xmodmap.hu. - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - La sequenza con cui vengono indicate le mappature non viene salvata sopo - aver chiuso la finestra di dialogo Proprietà GKB. - - - - - - - - Autori - - GNOME KeyBoard è stata scritta da Szabolcs Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - (shooby@gnome.hu) e Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata realizzata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 817e41a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gnotes-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,243 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet GNOTES! - - - - L'applet GNOTES! (vedi Figure 1) permette di coprire il desktop di - GNOME con dei piccoli promemoria gialli e virtuali. Per aggiungere questo - applet ad un Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro - sul Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilità - GNotes! - . - - - -
- - GNOTES! - - - GNOTES! - - - -
- - - - Uso - - - Questa applet mette un promemoria giallo sul vostro desktop. Per usarla - cliccate con il tasto sinistro sull'icona di GNOTES! per far apparire una - nuova nota sul desktop. Dopo aver creato una nuova nota cliccate con il - tasto sinistro all'interno dell'area gialla del promemoria per scriverci - il testo. - - - - - - Voci del Menù Pop-Up del tasto destro - - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù che appare cliccando con il - tasto destro contiene le seguenti voci: - - - - Proprietà... — - Questo voce del menù apre la finestra di dialogo Proprietà - nel quale potete personalizzare l'aspetto e il comportamento - dell'applet. - - - - - Alza le note — Questa voce - sovrappone tutte le note a tutte le altre finestre. - - - - - Abbassa le note — Questa voce mette - tutte le vostre note sotto le altre finestre. - - - - - Nascondi note — - Questa voce nasconde le note rendendole invisibili, ma non le cancella. - - - - - Visualizza note — - Questa voce rende visibili le note se prima era stato usato il - comando Nascondi note. - - - - - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sul bordo sinistro delle singole note - - - È possibile anche cliccare con il tasto destro sul bordo sinistro di ogni - nota presente sul desktop per modificare le loro proprietà individuali. - - - - Alza nota — - Questa voce sovrappone la nota a tutte le altre finestre. - - - - - Abbassa nota — - Questa voce nasconde la nota sotto tutte le altre finestre. - - - - - Nascondi nota — - Questa voce rende invisibile la nota ma non la cancella. - - - - - Cancella nota — - Questa voce elimina definitivamente la nota dalla - scrivania. Diversamente da Nascondi nota - non è più possibile poi recuperare la nota cancellata. - - - - - - - - - Proprietà - - - È possibile configurare l'applet GNOTES! - cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet e scegliendo la voce - Proprietà... del menù. Così apparirà la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà, come mostrato in - Figura 2. - - -
- - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Per cambiare la dimensione prestabilita usata dai promemoria si può - cliccare sulle frecce up e - down oppure digitare direttamente il valore (in - pixel) dentro ai campi accanto alle voci Default - Height e Default Width. - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e limitazioni - - - Usando Default Height o Default - Width può causare un crash di tutto - GNOTES. - - - - Dopo aver aggiunto GNOTES! al vostro - Pannello, cliccando sulla prima nota può farne - apparire un'altra sul desktop. - - - - - - - - Autori - - - Questa applet è stata scritta da spoon spoon@ix.netcom.com - e dres dres@debian.org. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel - Menù Principale, per riportare errori. - - - - La documentazione per questa applet che state ora leggendo è stata - scritta da Michael Hall mphall@cstone.net. Inviate tutti - i commenti e i suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation - Project mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È - possibile anche spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gweather-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gweather-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c117884..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/gweather-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,573 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME Weather Applet - - - L'applet GNOME Weather, mostrata in , riceve e mostra alcune informazioni sulle - condizioni atmosferiche. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse - sul Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilità - GNOME Weather - . - - -
- Applet GNOME Weather - - Applet GNOME Weather - - - -
- - - - Uso - - GNOME Weather mostra la temperatura e le - condizioni atomsferiche correnti in forma numerica e di icona all'interno - dell'applet. Per ottenere ulteriori informazioni cliccate due volte - sull'applet stessa, aprendo così la finestra Weather Information - Window, mostrata in dove vengono mostrate le informazioni - delle condizioni attuali e le previsioni per uno e cinque giorni (queste - previsioni sono però disponibili solo per località statunitensi). - - -
- Finestra Weather Information - - Finestra Weather Information - - - -
- - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù - contenente le seguenti voci: - - - - - Aggiorna — aggiorna le informazioni - sulle condizioni atmosferiche e le mostra. - - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni riguardo Applet GNOME - Weather, come la versione dell'applet e il nome - dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet GNOME - Weather cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro del mouse e - scegliendo Proprietà…. Apparirà così la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), con la quale è possibile modificare - alcune impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le proprietà nella sezione Semplice sono: - - - - - Intervallo di aggiornamento — Questa opzione determina - l'intervallo di tempo fra una connessione al server e la successiva - in cui GNOME Weather ottiene le - informazioni metereologiche (condizioni correnti, previsioni e mappa - radar, se abilitata). - - - Nota sull'Intervallo di Aggiornamento - - Notare che l'Intervallo di aggiornamento - determina solo quante volte il vostro computer ottiene le - informazioni dal server. L'aggiornamento mostrato nella sezione - Condizioni Attuali (visibile cliccando due - volte sull'applet) indica quando sono state effettuate le - misurazioni sul server e non quando sono state ottenute. - - - - Disabilitare l'Aggiornamento automatico e usare - l'Aggiornamento Manuale - - È possibile disabilitare l'aggiornamento automatico deselezionando - il bottone Aggiornamento abilitato. D'altra - parte è anche possibile forzare GNOME - Weather ad effettuare un aggiornamento indicando - l'opzione corrispondente dal menù popup. Queste due opzioni sono - molto utili se siete connessi ad internet non in modo continuo, - come ad esempio usando un computer portatile o una connessione via - modem. - - - - - - - Aggiornamento abilitato — Selezionate questa opzione se volete - far sì che GNOME Weather si connetta - automaticamente per ottenere le informazioni metereologiche - aggiornate ad ogni intervallo indicato in - Aggiorna. Deselezionando questa opzione potrete - ottenere gli aggiornamenti solo cliccando con il tasto destro del - mouse sull'applet e indicando Aggiorna. - - - - - - Usa la metrica — come default GNOME - Weather usa il sistema metrico degli Stati Uniti - d'America (Imperiale). Selezionando questo bottone verrà usato il - sistema metrico europeo, come mostrato in . - - - - Unità di Misura - - - - Quantità - Metrica - Imperiale - - - - - Temperatura - gradi Celsius - gradi Farenheit - - - Velocità del vento - km/h - mph - - - Pressione - mmHg - inHg - - - Visibilità - km - miles - - - -
- - - - - Previsioni dettagliate — Selezionate questa opzione se volete - che GNOME Weather scarichi le previsioni - complete per più di cinque giorni per la vostra area. Notate però - che le previsioni non sono disponibili per alcune zone. - - - Le previsioni ottenute se questo bottone non è premuto sono relative - solo ad un'area ristretta intorno alla zona selezionata e sono - validi normalmente solo per cinque giorni. - - - Disponibilità delle Previsioni - - Notate che la previsioni dettagliate ottenute da IWIN sono - disponibili solo per le città degli Stati Uniti d'America. - - - - - - - - - - - Le proprietà nella sezione Network possono essere - usate nel caso in cui il vostro computer si trova dietro ad un firewall e - sono: - - - - - Usa server proxy — Selezionate questo bottone se il vostro - computer è dietro ad un firewall e dovete usare un proxy HHTP per - accedere al Web. - - - - - - Server Proxy — Indicate qui il numero IP del server proxy (nel - caso lo stiate usando). - - - - - - Utente — Indicate qui il nome dell'utente da usare sul server - proxy (nel caso questo sia necessario). - - - - - - Password — Indicate qui la vostra password sul server - proxy. (Notate che questa password verrà salvata in un file di - configurazione privato ma che non verrà criptata). - - - - - - - - La sezione Posizione permette di specificare la - posizione geografica che volete venga usata dall'applet GNOME - Weather per mostrare le informazioni - metereologiche. Cliccate sul simbolo "+" per espandere un ramo o sul - simbolo "-" per ridurlo. Selezionate la città o la regione cliccando con - il tasto destro del mouse. - - - - Le posizioni sono organizzate con una gerarchia a tre livelli. Il livello - più in alto contiene le aree geografiche più ampie, la seconda le - sotto-regioni comprese nelle prime e nell'ultimo si trovano le posizioni - particolari. Questa gerarchia rispecchia il modo in cui vengono - immagazzinate queste informazioni da parte dell'US NWS (National Weather - Service), ed è per questa ragione che gli Stati Uniti d'America e il - Canada appaiono al livello più alto. - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - Ulteriori informazioni - - GNOME Weather ha una homepage a http://gweather.dhs.org/. Qui è - possibile trovare la versione più aggiornata del file Posizioni, che viene - periodicamente aggiornato con nuove città spedite da altri utenti. Se la - vostra città non è inclusa nella distribuzione spedite una email a Spiros - Papadimitriou (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) con le informazioni - necessarie e questa verrà inclusa nella versione successiva. - - - - È possibile anche visitare l'homepage se siete curiosi di vedere cosa c'è di nuovo. - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Input/Output bloccante - - Anche se adesso GNOME Weather usa adesso un - sistema di Input/Output di tipo non blocccante per ricevere i dati dalla - rete, ci sono alcuni piccoli passi che possono bloccare l'esecuzione del - programma. Più precisamente, stabilire una connessione TCP con un server - remoto è un'operazione che può comportare il bloccamento - dell'applicazione; poiché i server web di NWS e IWIN sono spesso molto - sovraccarichi, questo passo può durare molto tempo e durante questo - periodo l'applicazione non può rispondere alle richieste CORBA - provenienti dal Pannello. Nella sua versione - attuale il Pannello interagisce con tutte le - applicazioni e invia frequentemente richieste CORBA (ad esempio per - sapere lo stato del salvataggio). Se un'applet non può rispondere per - una qualsiasi ragione allora il Pannello si - bloccherà in attesa di una risposta - - - - Mentre il Pannello è bloccato non potrà - rispondere a nessuna richiesta dell'utente (o di un'altra - applicazione). Per esempio i movimenti e i menù (quelli che - apparirebbero cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse) del - Pannello non funzionano. Le altre applet presenti - sul Pannello dovrebbero comunque continuare a - funzionare (a meno che non debbano inviare richieste CORBA al - Pannello, ad esempio per conoscere la dimensione - del Pannello). Appena l'operazione che ha causato - il blocco di GNOME Weather termina le cose - dovrebbero tornare al normale (e le richieste dell'interfaccia utente - bufferizzate vengono eseguite). - - - - Esiste una versione sperimentale di GNOME - Weather che usa thread separati lavorando sull'HTTP, - versione che verrà inclusa temporaneamente nella prossima - versione. Comunque la soluione finale sarà - gnome-vfs che farà parte di GNOME 2.0 e che - permetterà supporto multi-piattaforma per operazioni di Input/Output - completamente asincrone. - - - - - - - - - - - Domande poste frequentemente (FAQ) - - - Questa è una lista di domande poste freuqentemente a proposito di - GNOME Weather. Per ulteriori informazioni e - aggiornamenti visitate la homepage - di GNOME Weather. Se la vostra domanda rimane ancora senza - risposta scrivete all'autore: - spapadim+gweather@cs.cmu.edu. - - - - Perché GNOME Weather blocca il mio Pannello? - - Questo è dovuto al fatto che alcune operazioni sulla rete bloccano le - altre operazioni (vedi anche ) ed è dovuto - al modo in cui lavora attualmente il Pannello. - - - - - Perché la lista delle posizioni mi appare vuota? - - Questo è dovuto al fatto che il file Posizioni non - è stato installato nel posto corretto, normalmente perché - GNOME Weather e GNOME non sono stati - configurati allo stesso modo. Il file contenente le posizioni dovrebbe - essere installato nella sottodirectory gweather, - all'interno della directory dei dato di gnome, verificabile con il - comando gnome-config --datadir. - - - - Se avete compilato da soli le applet di gnome assicuratevi di aver usato - il seguente comando: configure --prefix=`gnome-config --prefix` - --sysconfdir=`gnome-config --sysconfdir`. Le distribuzioni - binarie in RPM assumono che prefix e sysconfdir siano rispettivamente in - /usr e /etc. Se avete - compilato GNOME da soli con opzioni differenti dovete scaricare e - compilare le applet da soli. - - - - - Perché GNOME Weather mostra un punto interrogativo e dei puntini - per le condizioni correnti? - - Questo accade se GNOME Weather non riesce a - connettersi al server NWS per una ragione qualsiasi, come ad esempio nel - caso in cui la connessione di o il server NWS rete siano inattivi, - oppure il server non abbia a disposizione le informazioni per la vostra - posizione. - - - - - Perché GNOME Weather mi segnala che la previsione non è - disponibile? - - Se avete selezionato la previsione dettagliata allora è possibile che - questa non sia disponibile per la vostra posizione. Nel caso provate a - disabilitare la previsione dettagliata. - - - - Un'altra possibile ragione è che il server IWIN non sia attivo e che - GNOME Weather non possa ricevere le - informazioni sulle previsioni. Il problema in questo caso dovrebbe - scomparire appena il server IWIN torna attivo. - - - - - - - - - - - Autori - - GNOME Weather è stata scritta da Spiros - Papadimitriou (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu). Inviate tutti i - commenti, suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking - database. (Le istruzioni per riportare errori possono essere - trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel Menù - Principale, per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Spiros Papadimitriou - (spapadim+@cs.cmu.edu) e Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/jbc-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/jbc-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 178e96a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/jbc-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,226 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Orologio Binario di Jon - - - L'applet Orologio Binario di Jon, mostrata in - , mostra l'ora in una forma inusuale: cifre - codificate in binario. Contiene ventiquattro LED che rappresentano le - ore, i minuti e i secondi illuminando il LED appropriato. Per aggiungere - questa applet ad un Pannello, cliccate con il tasto - destro del mouse sul Pannello e indicate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Orologi - Orologio Binario - . - - -
- Applet Orologio Binario di Jon - - Applet Orologio Binario di Jon - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Non c'è niente di speciale da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge nel - pannello e mostra le sue luci per voi. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù - contenente le seguenti voci: - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni su Applet Orologio Binario di - Jon, come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Decifrare le Luci - - BCD significa cifre codificate in binario, un modo di rappresentare le - cifre (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) così come li chiamano i programmatori - "una serie di numeri binari in quattro bit, rimuovendo il numero A ad - F". Se questo non ha senso per voi, deve essere chiaro che questo - orologio è semplicemente uno scherzo per programmatori e non ha uno scopo - particolarmente utile. - - - Può aiutare leggere questo orologio all'incontrario! Iniziate dal basso e - salite fino in cima. - - - La coppia destra di colonne mostra le cifre dei secondi: l'unità sulla - destra e i decimali sulla sinistra. La coppia di colonne al centro mostra - le cifre dei minuti e la coppia di colonne a sinistra quelle delle ore. - - - Dovete aggiungere il numero dei LED illuminati per ogni colonna, ottenendo - in ognuna una cifra compresa fra zero e nove, unendo le quali otterrete il - numero esatto. - - - - - Il LED in basso rappresenta 1 quando è illuminato. - - - - - - Il LED successivo rappresenta il 2 quando è illuminato. - - - - - - Il LED successivo rappresenta il 4 quando è illuminato. - - - - - - Il LED in alto rappresenta 8 quando è illuminato. - - - - - - Probabilmente è più semplice capire il funzionamento cercando di decifrare - innanzitutto i secondi, che cambiano continuamente. - - - - Ad esempio, proviamo a leggere l'ora in . Partiamo con le ore; nella prima colonna è - accesso solo un LED nella seconda posizione dal basso, dicendoci così - 2 come prima cifra delle ore: nella seconda colonna non ci - sono LED accesi indicandoci così 0 per la seconda - cifra. Otteniamo così le ore 20. Guardando i minuti vediamo - lo 0 come prima cifra e 1 come seconda dato - che è acceso solo il primo LED in basso. Otteniamo così le ore - 20:01. Infine per i secondi abbiamo accesi i due LED in basso, il primo ci - dà 1 e il secondo 2 per un totale di 3; nella seconda - colonna abbiamo acceso il LED in alto che ci dà - 8. Otteniamo così le ore 20:01:38. - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Se aggiungete questa applet ad un pannello verticale, questa assume una - dimensione corretta; se poi viene mossa in un pannello orizzontale - modifica correttamente la sua dimensione, ma se la muovete ancora in un - pannello verticale non modifica ulteriormente la sua dimensione, - costringendo così il pannello ad allargarsi. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'Applet Orologio Binario di Jon è stata scritta - da Jon Anhold (jon@snoopy.net. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/life-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/life-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index d7c9999..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/life-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,213 +0,0 @@ - - L'applet Gioco della Vita - - Il Gioco della Vita del pannello di GNOME è - un'applet che fa girare il gioco della vita secondo le regole - di Conway in una piccola griglia nel vostro pannello, con colori per gli - organismi e per il background che cambiano continuamente. Fa parte del - pacchetto delle applet di GNOME. - - - Per aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello, cliccate - con il tasto destro del mouse sul Pannello e - scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Divertimento - Game of Life - . - Oppure è possibile digitare il seguente comando dalla linea di comando: - life_applet --activate-goad-server=life_applet & - - -
- Applet Gioco della Vita - - Applet Gioco della Vita - - - -
- - - Uso - - Una volta che questa applet è presente nel pannello non c'è altro da fare, - girerà tranquillamente da sola. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù con le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Casuale — che rende casuale il - gioco smettendo così di ripetere sempre gli stessi motivi - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra - informazioni sull'Applet Gioco della Vita - come la versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - Regole - - Il Gioco della Vita, così come è stato descritto da Conway nel 1970 segue - queste regole: - - - - - Inizia con una griglia (normalmente un quadrato) di quadratini. Si - riempie una parte di questa griglia con delle cellule in ordine casuale - e questa è la generazione zero. - - - - - Ogni cellula che abbia due o tre altre cellule vicine sopravvive nella - generazione successiva. - - - - - In ogni quadrato che invece non ha cellule ma ne ha tre vicine viene - creata una nuova cellula. In ogni altro quadrato non viene creata - alcuna cellula - - - - - Ripeti la generazione. - - - - - - Il gioco finisce eventualmente in uno di questi casi: - - - - - - La morte di tutte le cellule (questo è possibile teoricamente ma - avviene raramente). - - - - - Un equilibrio statico in cui ogni cellula presente può sopravvivere ma - non ne vengono create altre. - - - - - Un equilibrio statico in cui il gioco continua ruotando sempre fra - stesse configurazioni. - - - - - - Come valore di partenza la griglia dell'applet è di 78 per 78 e viene - riempita al 50 per cento. - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Nessuno conosciuto. - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Gioco della Vita è stata scritta da - George Lebl (jirka@5z.com). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - Traduzione italiana curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 90dbfb1..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/loadavg-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,306 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet Carico Medio - - - - L'applicazione loadavg_applet è una - piccola applet di controllo che si aggiunge all'interno del pannello e - che mostra il carico medio corrente. - - - - Il carico medio di una macchina è un numero abbastanza arbitrario che - rappresenta quanto è "occupata" la macchina. Viene calcolato come una media - (abbastanza rozza) del numero di processi ci sono sia che siano veramente - in funzione sia che stiano aspettando una chiamata da parte del kernel. È - molto utile per comparare l'uso di una stessa macchina nel tempo, ma non è - invece molto utile per fare comparazioni fra computer - differenti. Normalmente viene rappresentato da una funzione. - -
- Applet Carico Medio - - Applet Carico Medio - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello. Ci - sono molte opzioni per modificarne l'aspetto. - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù del tasto destro contiene anche - le seguenti: - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Con questo si apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet descritta più avanti con la - quale si possono modificare le proprietà di default di questa e di - altre applet di controllo. - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Questo apre la finestra di dialogo multiload_applet - dialogue box descritta - più avanti con cui si possono modificare solo le proprietà - dell'applet loadavg_applet. - - - - - - Avvia gtop... - - - Questa voce avvia il programma gtop, Monitor di - Sistema di GNOME. gtop offre un controllo - molto più dettagliato del sistema e cose vi sta accadendo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - -
- - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà con i valori predefiniti - - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà Applet Carico Medio - - - -
- - - Come in molte altre applet di controllo, - loadavg_applet ci sono due modi per selezionare - le proprietà. Si può cambiare contemporaneamente tutte le applet che - appartengono a questo gruppo (cpuload_applet, - memload_applet, - swapload_applet, - netload_applet e - cpuload_applet) in una sola grande finestra di - dialogo. Può essere utile nel caso si usino una o più di queste applet e - queste proprietà vengono usate di default. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare - sulla voce Proprietà... del menù. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo specifica per l'Applet Carico Medio - - Finestra di dialogo specifica per l'Applet Carico - Medio - - - -
- - - Oppure è possibile modificare solo le proprietà di - loadavg_applet. Può essere utile se viene usata - soltanto quest'applicazione oppure se si vogliono provare nuove - combinazioni. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare sulla voce - Proprietà del menù. - - - - Se si usa la voce Proprietà... e si - modificano le proprietà solo per questa applet è necessario - deselezionare il bottone Utilizza impostazioni - predefinite prima di poter modificare le impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle proprietà di Carico Medio - - Finestra di dialogo delle proprietà di Carico Medio - - - -
- - - I cambiamenti possibili sono quattro: - - - - - Colori - - - Si possono modificare i colori usati dall'applet cliccando sui - bottoni con i colori; apparirà così la finestra di dialogo dei - colori di GNOME. I nomi usati sono leggermente scorretti: "Used" è - il carico medio corrente e "free" è il colore dello sfondo. - - - - - - Velocità - - - Si può modificare la velocità con cui procede il grafico misurato in - millisecondi. Il valore predefinito è 500. - - - - - - Dimensione - - - Si può così modificare la dimensione dell'applet. L'unità di misura - è il pixel. Il valore predefinito è 40 e si può variare da 1 pixel a - piacere. Nei pannelli verticali il valore si riferisce all'altezza, - in quelli orizzontali la larghezza. - - - - - - Massimo - - - Questo il valore massimo dell'asse delle verticale (cioè il carico - medio più alto che verrà mostrato). Il valore predefinito è 10. - - - - Questa opzione è disponibile solo da Default - Properties menu option, e non appare nella - finestra di dialogo Properties menu - option. - - - - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Ridimensionando e modificando l'orientamento del pannello può provocare - problemi intermittenti che dovrebbero però stabilizzarsi rapidamente. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2f7be31..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mailcheck-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,341 +0,0 @@ - - L'applet Controllo Posta - - - L'applet controllo posta è un'applet che si - piazza nel vostro Pannello e vi comunica quando avete - nuova posta. Per aggiungere questa applet al - Pannello cliccate sul Pannello - e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Rete - Controllo Posta - - - -
- Applet Controllo Posta - - Applet Controllo Posta - - - -
- - - Uso - - Non dovete fare niente di particolare con questa applet: configurandola - per la vostra posta funzionerà tranquillamente. Sono comunque disponibili - le seguenti opzioni: - - - - - - Cliccando con il tasto 1 del mouse non - succede niente a meno che non l'abbiate configurata per far partire un - programma come descritto più - avanti. - - - - - Tenendo premuto il tasto 2 del mouse potete - spostarla nel Pannello (e fra pannelli diversi). - - - - - Cliccando con il tasto 3 del mouse appare - il classico menù delle applet, dove si trovano le - informazioni e le proprietà. - - - - - - - Preferenze - - La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà di Controlla - Posta è divisa in due sezioni, di cui la prima per le funzioni dell'applet - e l'altra per le impostazioni della posta. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà &mdash Sezione Controllo di Posta - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà &mdash Sezione Controllo di Posta< - - - -
- - - - Opzioni di Controlla Posta - - - La sezione Controllo di posta è divisa in sei sottosezioni: - - - - - Esegui...Prima di ogni aggiornamento - - - Spesso dovete avviare un qualche programma, come ad esempio - fetchmail prima che l'applet - controlli se c'è nuova posta: per questo selezionate la - casella e riempite lo spazio con il programma che volete usare. - - - - - - Esegui...Quando arriva nuova posta - - - Spesso dovete avviare qualche programma anche quando arriva - nuova posta: ad esempio può essere utile far suonare un - qualche avviso, così potete selezionare questa casella e - scrivere - mpg123sillynoise.mpg - oppureesdplaysillynoise.wav. - - - - - - Esegui...Quando premuto - - - Inserite qui il nome del programma che volete avviare premendo - il tasto 1 del mouse: normalmente - un programma di lettura della posta come ad esempio - balsa oppure - spurce. - - - - - - Controlla la posta ogni... - - - Potete impostare l'intervallo che deve trascorrere fra due - controlli della posta fra 1440 minuti (cioè una volta al - giorno) oppure 0 (cioè mai). Il valore predefinito è ogni due - minuti. - - - - - - Emetti un suono quando arriva nuova posta - - - Il suono emesso se selezionate questa - casella è una campanella d'allarme e si - trova in - $prefix/sound/events/mailcheck.soundlist; - se volete un altro suono modificatelo e mettetelo in - $prefix/sounds/. - - - - - - Seleziona animazione - - - Cliccando sul bottone con i nomi delle - animazioni potete vedere la lista delle varie - immagini con diverse animazioni che si attivano quando c'è - nuova posta. - - - - - - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà &mdash Sezione Casella della Posta - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà &mdash Sezione Casella della Posta - - - -
- - - - Opzioni della casella della posta - - - Le opzioni della Casella della Posta è divisa in quattro - sottosezioni, alcune delle quali possono essere disattivate. - - - - Cliccando sul bottone con le varie posizioni della - posta si può scegliere dove l'applet Controllo Posta - deve andare a cercare la posta in arrivo. - - - - - Quando si usano spool locali per la posta (come il mailspool o - le maildir) dovete indicare qui i dettagli del file (uno solo) - dove andare a cercare la posta in arrivo. In questo caso la - sezione dei server di posta verrà disabilitata. - - - - - Quando si usano server remoti POP3 o IMAP dovete indicare qui i - dettagli per accedere ai server come lo username e la password - (se non la scrivete qui vi verrà chiesta ogni volta che la posta - dovrà essere controllata). In questo caso la sezione per i file - locali verrà disabilitata. - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - - - L'impostazione Esegui...Prima di ogni - aggiornamento può bloccare l'applet e il - Pannello tutto. - - - - - A volte l'animazione si blocca dopo periodi di uso prolungato. - - - - - Se usate programmi per filtrare la posta come - procmail, i quali dividono i messaggi in - arrivo in diverse cartelle, l'applet potrà controllarne una sola - perché controlla un solo file. - - - - - - - - - Autori - - Controlla Posta è stata scritta da Miguel de - Icaza (miguel@gnu.org), Jacob Berkman - (jberkman@andrew.cmu.edu), Jaka Mocnik - (jaka.mocnik@kiss.uni-lj.si) e Lennart Poettering - (poettering@gmx.net). Inviate i commenti, suggerimenti e - segnalazioni di bug al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - inviare le segnalazioni di bug possono essere trovate on-line. Se state usando GNOME 1.1 o più recente - potete usare anche il Bug Report Tool - (bug-buddy), disponibile nel sottomenù - Utilità del menù Programmi,per - inviare segnalazioni di bug. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org). Inviate i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardanti questo manuale al GNOME Documentation - Project inviando un messaggio a - docs@gnome.org. Potete inviare i commenti anche via rete - usando il GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - - Traduzione italiana a cura di Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti sulla - traduzione a webmaster@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/memload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/memload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f56aab8..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/memload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,328 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet Carico Memoria - - - L'applicazione memload_applet è una piccola - applet che si aggiunge ad un pannello e che mostra quanta memoria viene - usata. - - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello. Ci - sono molte opzioni per modificarne l'aspetto. - - -
- Applet Carico Memoria - - Applet Carico Memoria - - - -
- - - L'applet mostra quattro differenti usi della memoria: - - - - Libera - - - La memoria libera è quella che non è usata da nessun programma. Il - colore predefinito è il verde. - - - - - - Buffer - - - I buffer contengono i dati che ancora non sono stati scritti su - disco e quelli che sono stati letti di recente dal disco, lasciati - lì nel caso che debbano servire ancora. Il colore predefinito è il - grigio. - - - - - - Condivisa - - - La memoria condivisa è quella usata contemporaneamente da più - programmi, cosa molto comune su sistemi UNIX. Molti programmi GNOME - usano molta memoria condivisa, cosa che abbatte di molto il totale - della memoria usata. Il colore predefinito è il giallo. - - - - - - Altro - - - La memoria usata in tutti gli altri modi viene indicata in questa - categoria. Il colore di default è un giallo-verdognolo. - - - - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù del tasto destro contiene anche - le seguenti: - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Con questo si apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet descritta più avanti con la - quale si possono modificare le proprietà di default di questa e di - altre applet di controllo. - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Questo apre la finestra di dialogo multiload_applet - dialogue box descritta più avanti con cui si possono modificare solo le proprietà - dell'applet memload_applet. - - - - - - Avvia gtop... - - - Questa voce avvia il programma gtop, Monitor di - Sistema di GNOME. gtop offre un controllo - molto più dettagliato del sistema e cosa vi sta accadendo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite dell'Applet - Carico Memoria - - - -
- - - Come in molte altre applet di controllo, - memload_applet ci sono due modi per selezionare - le proprietà. Si può cambiare contemporaneamente tutte le applet che - appartengono a questo gruppo (cpuload_applet, - loadavg_applet, - swapload_applet, - netload_applet e - cpuload_applet) in una sola grande finestra di - dialogo. Può essere utile nel caso si usino una o più di queste applet e - queste proprietà vengono usate di default. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare - sulla voce Proprietà... del menù. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet Carico Memoria - - Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet Carico - Memoria - - - -
- - - Oppure è possibile modificare solo le proprietà di - loadavg_applet. Può essere utile se viene usata - soltanto memload_applet oppure se si vogliono - provare nuove combinazioni. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare sulla voce - Proprietà del menù. - - - - Se si usa la voce Proprietà... e si - modificano le proprietà solo per questa applet è necessario - deselezionare il bottone Utilizza impostazioni - predefinite prima di poter modificare le impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet Carico - Memoria - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet Carico - Memoria - - - -
- - - I cambiamenti possibili sono tre: - - - - - Colori - - - Si possono modificare i colori usati per le varie categorie di - memoria che vengono mostrate dall'applet cliccando sui bottoni con i - colori; apparirà così la finestra di dialogo dei colori di GNOME. - - - - - - Velocità - - - Si può modificare la velocità con cui procede il grafico misurato in - millisecondi. Il valore predefinito è 500. - - - - - - Dimensione - - - Si può così modificare la dimensione dell'applet. L'unità di misura - è il pixel. Il valore predefinito è 40 e si può variare da 1 pixel a - piacere. Nei pannelli verticali il valore si riferisce all'altezza, - in quelli orizzontali la larghezza. - - - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Ridimensionando e modificando l'orientamento del pannello può provocare - problemi intermittenti che dovrebbero però stabilizzarsi rapidamente. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ad91527..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mini-commander-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,395 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Mini-Commander - - - L'applet Mini-Commander, mostrato in , aggiunge una linea di comando al - vostro Pannello. Fra le sue caratteristiche ci sono - il completamento e la storia dei comandi, macro modificabili (che possono - essere usate per molti scopi) e un orologio interno opzionale. Con questa - applet è possibile avviare un programma o una macro, vedere una pagina html, - cercare pagine man o info e altro. Mini-Commander - può essere staccato dal Pannello usando una - maniglietta opzionale, cosa utile se lo state usando su pannelli verticali. - - - Per aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello, cliccate - con il tasto destro del mouse sul Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilità - Mini-Commander - . - - -
- Applet Mini-Commander - - Applet Mini-Commander - - - -
- - - - Uso - - - Per avviare un programma o un comando basta semplicemente digitarli e - premere invio. Oppure è possibile cercarli sul vostro file-system - cliccando sul piccolo cerchietto nell'angolo in basso. - - - Mini-Commander ha il completamento dei comandi - come molte altre shell. Con questa caratteristica spesso non dovrete - digitare l'intero comando ma solo i primi caratteri e poi potrete premere - il tasto tab. Mini-Commander - cercherà di completare il nome del comando allo stesso modo di molte altre - shell UNIX. - - - Mini-Commander ha anche la storia dei comandi, - che permette di richiamare comandi digitati precedentemente usando i tasti - freccia su o freccia giù, allo stesso - modo sempre delle shell UNIX. Notate che i comandi non vengono - memorizzati nel caso in cui siano già presenti per evitare ripetizioni; è - possibile accedere alla storia dei comandi premendo la piccola - freccia in giù nell'applet e selezionando il - comando direttamente dalla lista. - - - Mini-Commander ha anche la capacità di usare - macro, di cui alcune sono state già inserite. Ad esempio se digitate il - comando term:command viene - eseguito command in una - finestra di terminale. Se invece inserite un URL viene avviato il vostro - browser Web per visualizzarlo. È possibile definire le macro oppure - cambiare quelle predefinite. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà … — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Proprietà del mini-commander. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra - le informazioni sull'Applet - Mini-commander come la versione dell'applet e il nome - dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet - Mini-Commander cliccandoci sopra con il tasto - destro e scegliendo Proprietà…. Apparirà - così la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del - mini-commander (mostrata in ), con la quale è possibile - modificare molte impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà del mini-commander: Sezione - Generali - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà del mini-commander: Sezione - Generali - - - -
- - - Le proprietà nella sezione Generali sono: - - - - - Visualizza l'ora — Se viene selezionato questo bottone viene - visualizzata l'ora nell'angolo in basso dell'applet. - - - - - - Visualizza la data — Se viene selezionato questo bottone viene - visualizzata la data nell'angolo in basso dell'applet. - - - - - - Mostra gestore — Se viene selezionato questo bottone viene - visualizzato un gestore all'inizio dell'applet permettendo così di - staccarla dal Pannello. È possibile poi - riattaccare l'applet al Pannello - trascinandocela sopra nuovamente. - - - - - - Mostra cornice — Se viene selezionato questo bottone viene - mostrata una piccola cornice intorno all'applet. - - - - - - Abilita auto-completamento in base alla lista — Se viene - selezionato questo bottone Mini-Commander - cercherà automaticamente di completare i comandi usando la storia - dei comandi precedenti. - - - - - - Larghezza applet — Immettete la larghezza desiderata. - - - - - - Lunghezza applet — Immettete la lunghezza desiderata. - - - - - - Altezza linea di comando — (Questa opzione è disabilitata) - - - - - - Colore della linea di comando — Selezionate il colore per il - testo che immettete. - - - - - - Sfondo della linea di comando — Selezionate il colore dello - sfondo della linea di comando - - - - - - - - - - La sezione Macro consiste in una lista di 99 macro - ognuna composta da un'espressione regolare (Suffisso) - e da una macro (Macro). Immettete l'espressione - regolare da cercare in Mini-Commander nella - colonna di sinistra e la macro da avviare corrispondentemente nella - colonna di destra. La configurazione predefinita contiene delle macro già - definite che possono aiutare a definirne altre. - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del - mini-commander. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare alle - impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - Domande poste frequentemente (FAQ) - - - Vengono qui elencate le domande poste con maggiore frequenza e le relative - risposte. - - - - - - - Perché non riesco a dare il focus della tastiera a - Mini-Commander? - - - - - Questo è un problema confuso creato da molte ragioni e che può - verificarsi solo in alcune circostanze. - - - - Se non riuscite mai a dare il focus della tastiera all'applet - Mini-Commander potrebbe essere un - problema dato dal vostro window-manager. In questo caso potrebbe - essere utile una vostra segnalazione al mio indirizzo in merito a - quale window-manager state usando (specificandone il nome e la - versione). - - - - A volte può accadere che possiate dare il focus della tastiera - all'applet Mini-Commander solo la prima - volta e poi non siate più in grado di ridarlo. Attualmente la - ragione di questo bug è sconosciuta. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - A volte è impossibile dare il focus della tastiera a - Mini-Commander dopo la prima volta. - - - - - - - Ulteriori informazioni - - Per maggiori informazioni sull'applet - Mini-Commander potete guardare l'home page di - riferimento - http://www.maruhn.com/mini-commander/. - - - - - - - Autori - - Mini-Commander è stata scritta da Oliver Maruhn - (oliver@maruhn.com). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Oliver Maruhn - (oliver@maruhn.com). Alcune piccole modifiche e aggiornamenti - sono stati scritti da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mixer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mixer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 5100d29..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/mixer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,187 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Mixer - - - L'applet Mixer, vedi , fornisce un'interfaccia comoda e semplice per - controllare il volume dell'audio e per lanciare il programma - GMIX. Per aggiungerlo ad un - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro sul - Pannello e selezionate - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Multimedia - Mixer - . - - -
- Applet Mixer - - Applet Mixer - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Per regolare il volume, scorrere la barra di scorrimento in alto (per - alzare il volume) o in basso (per abbassarlo). Per abbassare - definitivamente (muto) o per riportarlo al livello iniziale volume - cliccate sull'icona con l'altoparlante. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet viene mostrato il menù contenente - le seguenti voci: - - - - - Esegui gmix … — avvia il - programma GMIX. Le voci contenute di - questo mixer audio possono variare a seconda delle caratteristiche - della scheda sonora; comunque questo normalmente permette di - controllare il volume dei vari dispositivi di input come ad esempio - il lettore CD, il microfono e la linea di ingresso. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni riguardo l'applet Mixer come - la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - Una nota a proposito dell'audio di GNOME - - Per ottenere l'audio di GNOME, si deve abilitare in Control - Center; per configurarlo cliccate sul bottone - Menù Principale (quello con l'icona del piede) - e selezionate - - Programmi - Impostazioni - Multimedia - Suono - . - Ricordate di abilitare l'audio nella sezione Impostazioni - Generali e provate le varie configurazioni nella - sezione Eventi sonori. Nota bene che si deve uscire - e riavviare GNOME per far funzionare l'audio dopo averlo abilitato per - la prima volta nel Control Center. - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Mixer è stata scritta da Michael - Fulbright (msf@redhat.com). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. S - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usa S - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fb6939d..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/modemlights-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,306 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Modem Lights - - - L'Applet Modem Lights, mostrata in , controlla il vostro modem mentre sta lavorando. - Per aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello, cliccate - con il tasto destro sul pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Network - Modem Lights - - - - -
- Applet Modem Lights - - Applet Modem Lights - - - -
- - - - - Uso - - Questa applet per sapere se il vostro modem sta lavorando e per verificare - il suo comportamento e le sue prestazioni. Può essere anche configurato - per chiamare uno script o un programma per connettere e disconnettere il - vostro modem cliccando sul bottone con una singola lucina - verde. - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse appare un menù con le seguenti voci: - - - - Proprietà— apre la finestra di - dialogo - Proprietà . - - - - - - Aiuto — Mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su — mostra le - informazioni su Applet Modem Lights, come - la versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare Applet Modem Lights - cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse e scegliendo - Proprietà…. Appare così la finestra di - dialogo Impostazioni Modem Lights (mostrato in , da dove è possibile modificare molte - impostazioni. - -
- Finestra di dialogo Impostazioni Modem Lights - - Finestra di dialogo Impostazioni Modem Lights - - - -
- - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - Mostra il tempo di connessione e le prestazioni - &mdash espande l'Applet Modem Lights con - due piccoli display che mostrano la velocità (massima) di - trasferimento e la durata della connessione (in basso). - - - Comando di connessione: e Comando di - disconnessione: — Per usare l'Applet - Modem Lights per iniziare una connessione indicate - nel primo il comando che usate per connettervi e nel secondo - quello per sconnettervi. Cliccando sul bottone singolo sull'applet - potrete così connettervi o disconnetervi. - - - - - Conferma connessione — Mostra una - finestra di dialogo per confermare la richiesta di connessione. - - - - - Aggiornamenti per secondo — Imposta la - velocità di aggiornamento del display dell'Applet Modem - Lights. - - - - - Mostra il tempo di connessione e le prestazioni - — aggiunge due finestre di testo che mostrano il tempo di - connessione e la velocità di traferimento. Questo è un buon sistema - per valutare le prestazioni del vostro modem. - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare alle impostazioni - precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante Chiudi. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Avanzate - - Finestra di dialogo Avanzate - - - -
- - La Finestra di dialogo Avanzate - dell'Applet Modem Lights permette di - controllare alcune opzioni avanzate dell'applet. - - - - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - File di lock del modem: — in cui si - specifica il file creato dal computer quando il modem è connesso, - permettendo così ad altri programmi di - saperlo. /var/lock/LCK..modem è l'impostazione - di default ed è quella più comune nel caso in cui nel vostro sistema - venga usato un link simbolico a /dev/modem al - vero dispositivo del modem. Contattate l'amministratore del vostro - sistema per sapere quale device è usato e quale sia il file di - lock. Applet Modem Lights ha bisogno di - questa informazione per trovare il vostro modem. - - - - - - Verifica il possessore del file di lock — - verifica che il file di lock appartenga veramente al demone ppp che - sta girando e che non sia stato invece lasciato da un altro chiuso - in precedenza. Questa opzione è abilitata di default e non dovrebbe - essere cambiata. - - - - - - - Dispositivo — Normalmente il dispositivo - ppp0 su un computer con Linux è l'interfaccia - di rete usata dal modem. Se ppp0 non è corretta - per il vostro computer controllate la documentazione per il vostro - sistema per quella corretta. - - Altre possibili interfacce di rete sono: - ippp0 per ISDN su Linux; - isp0 per ISDN su BSD e - ipdptp0 per PPP su Solaris. - - - - - - Usa ISDN — Se state usando un modem ISDN - selezionate il bottone Use - ISDN. L'applet Modem Lights - ignorerà così tutte le impostazioni relative ai modem normali. - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo Impostazioni - Modem Lights. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare alle - impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Il bottone Verifica il possessore del file di lock - dovrebbe essere lasciato abilitato e probabilmente verrà eliminato nelle - prossime versioni dell'Applet Modem Lights. - - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'Applet Modem Lights è stata scritta da John - Ellis (johne@bellatlantic.net) e Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/netload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/netload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 88d1082..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/netload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,333 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet NetLoad - - - L'applicazione netload_applet è una piccola - applet di controllo che si aggiunge ad un pannello e che mostra il carico - del traffico di rete sulle varie interfacce. - - - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello. Ci - sono molte opzioni per modificarne l'aspetto. - - -
- Applet NetLoad - - Applet NetLoad - - - -
- - - Mostra i dettagli per quattro diversi tipi di interfaccia di rete: - - - - SLIP - - - SLIP è il protocollo per linee seriali. Non viene più usato - comunemente essendo stato quasi ovunque rimpiazzato dal PPP ma - rimane pur sempre un modo per connettere un computer ad altre - macchine che era molto usato con i modem. - - - - - - PPP - - - PPP sta per Point to Point Protocol e serve per connettere un - computer ad un altro. Ha largamente rimpiazzato il precedente - protocollo SLIP poiché è efficiente e flessibile ma non veloce come - l'Ethernet. È comunque il modo più comune per collegarsi ad Internet - da casa. - - - - - - ETH - - - Ethernet è l'altro metodo per connettere macchine. Richiede una - scheda ethernet all'interno dei vari computer e del cavo ethernet - per connettere le varie macchine. È molto più veloce del PPP. - - - - - - Other - - - Sono disponibili altri sistemi di rete, come per esempio modi di - comunicazione via raggi infrarossi (IRDA), via radio di tipo - amatoriale (AX25) e reti token-ring. Tutto ciò che l'applet trova e - che non è né SLIP, né PPP né ethernet viene visualizzato come 'other'. - - - - - - - Se nel computer ci sono due interfacce di rete dello stesso tipo - contemporaneamente (ad esempio quando ci sono due schede di rete collegate - a macchine differenti) ciò che viene mostrato è la somma delle due poiché - l'applet non le divide in due parti. - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù del tasto destro contiene anche - le seguenti: - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Con questo si apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet descritta più avanti con la - quale si possono modificare le proprietà di default di questa e di - altre applet di controllo. - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Questo apre la finestra di dialogo multiload_applet - dialogue box descritta più avanti con cui si possono modificare solo le proprietà - dell'applet netload_applet. - - - - - - Avvia gtop... - - - Questa voce avvia il programma gtop, Monitor di - Sistema di GNOME. gtop offre un controllo - molto più dettagliato del sistema e cosa vi sta accadendo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite dell'Applet - NetLoad - - - -
- - - Come in molte altre applet di controllo, in - netload_applet ci sono due modi per selezionare - le proprietà. Si può cambiare contemporaneamente tutte le applet che - appartengono a questo gruppo (cpuload_applet, - loadavg_applet, - swapload_applet, - memload_applet e - cpuload_applet) in una sola grande finestra di - dialogo. Può essere utile nel caso si usino una o più di queste applet e - queste proprietà vengono usate di default. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare - sulla voce Proprietà... del menù. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet NetLoad - - Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet NetLoad - - - -
- - - Oppure è possibile modificare solo le proprietà dell'applet - netload_applet. Può essere utile se viene usata - soltanto netload_applet oppure se si vogliono - provare nuove combinazioni. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare sulla voce - Proprietà del menù. - - - - Se si usa la voce Proprietà... e si - modificano le proprietà solo per questa applet è necessario - deselezionare il bottone Utilizza impostazioni - predefinite prima di poter modificare le impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet NetLoad - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet - NetLoad - - - -
- - - I cambiamenti possibili sono tre: - - - - - Colori - - - Si possono modificare i colori usati per le differenti interfacce di - rete cliccando sui bottoni con i colori; apparirà così la finestra - di dialogo dei colori di GNOME. - - - - - - Velocità - - - Si può modificare la velocità con cui procede il grafico misurato in - millisecondi. Il valore predefinito è 500. - - - - - - Dimensione - - - Si può così modificare la dimensione dell'applet. L'unità di misura - è il pixel. Il valore predefinito è 40 e si può variare da 1 pixel a - piacere. Nei pannelli verticali il valore si riferisce all'altezza, - in quelli orizzontali la larghezza. - - - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Ridimensionando e modificando l'orientamento del pannello può provocare - problemi intermittenti che dovrebbero però stabilizzarsi rapidamente. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/odometer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/odometer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 4ceacdc..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/odometer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,302 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Odometer - - - L'applet del pannello di GNOME Odometer, mostrata - in è un'applet che traccia e misura i - movimenti del puntatore del vostro mouse nel desktop. Questa applet fa parte - del pacchetto delle gnome-applets. Per aggiungerla ad un - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse sul - Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Divertimento - Odometer - . - - -
- Applet Odometer - - Applet Odometer - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Una volta che è presente non c'è niente da fare con odometer. Si piazza - silenziosamente nel vostro pannello e tiene traccia di tutti i movimenti - del vostro mouse. Inoltre, muovendo il puntatore del mouse sopra - l'odometer appare un suggerimento che dice se la - distanza è espressa in unità metriche (centimetri, metri, chilometri) - oppure in piedi (pollici, piedi, miglia). Il valore in alto indica la - distanza percorsa in totale e il valore in basso la distanza parziale, che - viene azzerata ogni volta. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù - contenente le seguenti voci: - - - - - Ripristina — Che resetta l'applet - odometer a zero. - - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo Opzioni odometer. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni sull'Applet odometer come la - versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet odometer - cliccandoci con il tasto destro e scegliendo - Proprietà…. Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Opzioni odometer (mostrata in ) da dove è possibile modificare molte - impostazioni. - - - - La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà (chiamata - "Opzioni odometer") è divisa in due sezioni, una per le opzioni - generali e una per i temi. - - - Generali - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà (sezione preferenze - generali) - - Sezione preferenze generali - - - -
- - - La sezione delle preferenze generali, - mostrata in , mostra quattro - opzioni: - - - - Usa la metrica - - - Se viene selezionata la casella di spunta - usa la - metrica le distanze percorse dal puntatore del - mouse vengono mostrate nella misura metrica (centimetri, - metri e chilometri); se invece non viene selezionato le - distanze vengono mostrate nella misura anglosassone - (pollici, piedi e miglia). Muovendo il puntatore del mouse - sopra l'applet diventa visibile un - suggerimento che dice quale metrica è - in uso. - - - - - auto_reset - - - Se viene selezionata la casella di spunta - - auto_reset i numeri di odometer vengono azzerati - ogni volta che si avvia la sessione, permettendo così di - valutare la distanza percorsa nella giornata se avviate la - sessione di gnome tutte le mattine. - - - - - abilitato - - - Se viene selezionata la casella di spunta - - abilitato l'odometer continuerà a contare la - distanza percorsa dal puntatore; altrimenti se non viene - selezionata odometer rimarrà a zero finché non viene - riabilitato. - - - - - numeri presenti - - - Il campo - numeri presenti stabilisce - quante cifre deve mostrare odometer. Il valore predefinito è - quattro e l'intervallo permesso è fra 1 e 10. - - - - - - - - - Tema - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà (sezione tema) - - Sezione preferenze Tame - - - -
- - - La sezione delle preferenze Tema, mostrata in - , mostra una varietà di temi - da scegliere. Si trovano di default in - $PREFIX/odometer/. - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti, - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet odometer è stata scritta da Fabrice - Bellet (Fabrice.Bellet@creatis.insa-lyon.fr), e si basa su - Mouspedometa per KDE di Armen Nakashian, che si - basa a sua volta su Xodometer basata sulle - librerie Motif fatta da Mark H. Granoff. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Arjan Scherpenisse - (acscherp@wins.uva.nl). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/printer-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/printer-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b7b12a0..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/printer-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,234 +0,0 @@ - - - Applet Stampante - - - L'applet Stampante, mostrata in , vi permette di stampare i file trascinandoceli sopra - direttamente dalla scrivania o dal file - manager. Per aggiungere questa applet al - Pannello cliccate sul Pannello - e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Utilità - Stampante - . - - - - -
- Applet Stampante - - Applet Stampante - - - -
- - - Uso - - - Per stampare un file dalla vostra scrivania o dal - vostro file manager trascinatelo sopra all'applet - stampante. - - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Cliccando con il tasto destro sull'applet appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà dalla quale - potete personalizzare l'aspetto e il comportamento dell'applet. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni a proposito dell'Applet - Stampante, come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - Proprietà - - Potete configurare l'applet Stampante - cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro e scegliendo la voce - Proprietà; si aprirà così la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà, mostrata in . - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Per cambiare l'etichetta visualizzata nella parte inferiore dell'applet - Stampante, ("Print" in ) digitate un nuovo nome nel campo Nome - Stampante. Questa impostazione è comoda se avete disponibili - più di una stampante e volete aggiungere un'applet - Stampante per ogni stampante. Il campo - Nome Stampante non determina su quale stampante verrà - inviato il vostro file ma serve solo per distinguere le diverse stampanti - a cui si riferiscono i vari applet presenti sul - Pannello. - - - - Per cambiare il comando usato per stampare dall'applet - Stampante dovete inserire quello nuovo nel campo - Comando di stampa. Il valore predefinito è - lpr, comune a molti sistemi, anche se il vostro potrebbe - differire. Se non siete sicuri controllate la documentazione del vostro - sistema. - - - Note per utenti avanzati - - Se avete più di una stampante dovete indicare a quale stampante volete - inviare i vostri file cambiando il campo Comando di - stampa. Per esempio se il vostro sistema usa il comando - lpr, per stampare un file sulla stampante denominata - "ljet5" dovete cambiare il campo Comando di stampa - a lpr -Pljet5. - - - - - Dopo aver fatto i cambiamenti voluti, cliccate sul bottone - OK per applicare i cambiamenti e chiudere la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà. Per non salvare i - cambiamenti e per tornare ai precedenti valori cliccate sul bottone - Applica. - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - Autori - - L'Applet Stampante è stata scritta da Miguel de - Icaza (miguel@kernel.org) e Federico Mena - (quartic@gimp.org).Inviate i commenti, suggerimenti e - segnalazioni di bug al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - inviare le segnalazioni di bug possono essere trovate on-line. Se state usando GNOME 1.1 o più recente - potete usare anche il Bug Report Tool - (bug-buddy), disponibile nel sottomenù - Utilità del menù Programmi,per - inviare segnalazioni di bug. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Michael Hall - (mphall@cstone.net. Inviate i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardanti questo manuale al GNOME Documentation - Project inviando un messaggio a - docs@gnome.org. Potete inviare i commenti anche via rete - usando il GNOME Documentation - Status Table. - - - Traduzione italiana a cura di Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti sulla - traduzione a webmaster@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0bdd7ad..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/quicklaunch-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - - Applet QuickLaunch - - - QuickLaunch è un'applet che contiene i pulsanti - per far partire le vostre applicazioni preferite. Riduce le icone alla - dimensione minima per risparmiare spazio sul vostro pannello. Nell'immagine - di esempio di Applet QuickLaunch mostrata in contiene otto pulsanti per avviare - altrettante applicazioni GNOME in un Pannello di - dimensioni normali. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un - Pannello cliccate con il tasto destro sul - Pannello e indicate - - Pannrllo - Aggiungi al panel - Applet - Utilità - QuickLaunch - . - - -
- Applet QuickLaunch - - Applet QuickLaunch - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Per aggiungere un pulsante all'applet - QuickLaunch è sufficiente trascinarlo dalla - posizione normale (ad esempio dal Pannello o dal - Menù Principale) all'interno dell'applet - QuickLaunch usando il tasto sinistro del - mouse. Per eliminare un pulsante dall'applet - QuickLaunch è sufficiente cliccare con il tasto - destro sul pulsante e selezionare Elimina - Launcher. Per configurare le proprietà di un pulsante che si - trova nell'applet QuickLaunch cliccate con il - tasto destro del mouse sul pulsante stesso e selezionate - Proprietà Launcher…. - - - La barra verticale dell'estremità sinistra dell'applet serve per spostarla - comodamente all'interno del Pannello usando il - tasto centrale o quello di sinistra del mouse. Questa barra verticale - serve anche per attivare il menù dell'applet cliccandoci con il tasto - destro del mouse. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sulla barra verticale che si trova - all'estremità sinistra dell'applet appare un menù con le seguenti voci: - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra le - informazioni sull'Applet Launcher come la - versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Non è possibile modificare la disposizione dei pulsanti all'interno - dell'applet QuickLaunch. Inoltre non è - possibile avere diversi applet QuickLaunch con - differenti impostazioni. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet QuickLaunch è stata scritta da Fabio - Gomes de Souza (fabiofb@altavista.net). Inviate tutti i - commenti, suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking - database. (Le istruzioni per riportare errori possono essere - trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel Menù - Principale, per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index bb82039..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/screenshooter-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,877 +0,0 @@ - - Applet per gli Screen-Shot - - - Screen-Shooter è una comoda e piccola - applicazione per catturare le immagini del desktop molto semplice da - usare. Si piazza nel vostro pannello e vi permetterà di catturare immagini - del vostro desktop o di una sola finestra cliccando con il mouse. - - - - Per aggiungere l'applet al Pannello cliccate con il - tasto destro del mouse in una zona libera da applet e menù sul - Pannello e selezionate - - Applet - Utilità - ScreenShooter - . - - - - Uso - - - - Per catturare l'immagine di tutto il desktop - cliccate con il tasto sinistro sull'immagine del - monitor. In un normale Pannello - orizzontale questo è il bottone che si trova più in basso, mentre in - un Pannello orizzontale laterale o in uno - verticale è il bottone a destra. - - - - - Per catturare l'immagine di solo una finestra - cliccate sull'immagine di una finestra. In un - normale Pannello orizzontale questo bottone si - trova in alto mentre in un Pannello orizzontale - laterale o in uno verticale si trova a sinistra. Il bottone rimarrà - premuto e il cursore diventerà una croce; potete così muovere il - cursore sulla finestra di cui volete l'immagine e cliccare per - selezionarla. - - - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse appare un menu - che contiene le opzioni comuni alle altre applet, inclusa un'opzione - Proprietà - descritta più avanti. - - - - - Impostazioni - - Screen-Shooter può essere configurato in molti - aspetti cliccando sull'applet con il terzo bottone (normalmente quello - destro) e selezionando Proprietà dal menù - popup. La finestra di dialogo - Preferenze contiene sette sezioni descritte più - avanti, di cui cinque sono sempre visibili mentre altre due solo se viene - selezionata un'altra opzione. - - - - - Preferenze Generali - - - - - Cattura le decorazioni del gestore di finestre - - - - La casella di spunta cattura le decorazioni - permette di includere o di escludere dall'immagine di una - finestra la barra del - titolo e le cornici. È utile solo nel caso in cui - Screen-Shooter sta prendendo l'immagine - di una singola finestra e non di tutto lo - schermo o di una sua parte. L'impostazione di default è di includere - le nell'immagine le decorazioni. - - - - - - - Effetto sonoro utilizzando l'altoparlante - - - - La casella di spunta effetto sonoro imposta - il beep emesso da Screen-Shooter al - momento della cattura dell'immagine. La configurazione di default è - di emettere il beep. - - - - - - - Mostra opzioni spurie - - - - La casella di spunta Mostra opzioni spurie - rende visibili alcune opzioni più "esoteriche". La configurazione - di default è di nasconderle (cioè di non renderle - disponibili). Nel caso vengano le rendiate visibili appariranno - due finestre di dialogo mostrate in Spurious 1 e Spurious 2. - - - - - - - Ritardo prima di catturare l'immagine - - - - Quando si vogliono catturare immagini di tutto il - desktop è possibile impostare un ritardo,fino - ad un minuto, con cui Screen-Shooter - cattura l'immagine. Questa opzione può risultare utile nel caso - vogliate impostare il focus su una particolare - finestra o se volete far apparire un - menu. - - - - - - - Qualità della compressione - - - - La qualità della compressione non si riferisce a quanto viene - compresso il file ma alla quantità di dettagli da mantenere - nell'immagine risultante dalla compressione. Più alta è la qualità - della compressione maggiori dettagli rimangono ma più grande è la - dimensione del file risultante. Serve solo per immagini JPEG, MIFF o - PNG. La qualità impostata di default è del 75%. - - - - - - - Crea immagine monocromatica - - - - Un'opzione che si spiega da sola: se viene selezionata l'immagine - risultante sarà monocromatica. Questa opzione è disabilitata di - default. - - - - - - - Inverti i colori nell'immagine - - - - Un'altra opzione che si spiega da sola: se viene selezionata i - colori dell'immagine risultante saranno invertiti, cioè i bianchi - saranno trasformati in neri, i viola chiari in verdognoli e - viceversa anche per tutti gli altri. Bellina ma raramente utile! - Questa opzione è disabilitata di default. - - - - - - - - File, Applicazioni - - - - - Directory in cui salvare i file - - - - La directory dove devono essere salvate le immagini deve esistere - perché Screen-Shooter non le crea. Nel - caso in cui proviate a salvare le immagini in una directory che non - esiste queste non verranno salvate. L'impostazione di default è la - vostra directory home ~/. - - - - - - - Nomi per i file delle immagini - - - - Screen-Shooter è concepito per dare la - massima flessibilità nel nominare ogni immagine. Il campo per il - nome del file (così come il campo della directory) viene passato ad - una shell per una normale shell expansion prima di essere usato, - permettendo così di usare l'output di programmi, script o variabili - di ambiente per dare il nome al file dell'immagine, ottenendo così - nomi sicuramente unici. Di default - Screen-Shooter crea un nome ottenuto - sull'ora e sulla data nella quale l'immagine è stata catturata e - questo dovrebbe essere sempre unico, ovviamente. Il nome usato di - default è `date +%Y_%m_%d_%H%M%S`_shot.jpg, - usando l'output del comando date nel - momento in cui viene catturata l'immagine creando così un file con - nome basato sul giorno e l'ora ricavati dai simboli di percentuale e - lettere della stringa e aggiungendo tutto ciò che sta fuori dagli - apici. La spiegazione dei criptici simboli di percentuale può essere - ricavata dalla lettura di man date, ma questi - sono gli argomenti di default: - - - - %H - - L'ora del giorno (dalle 00 alle 23) - - - - %M - - Il minuto dell'ora (da 00 a 59) - - - - %S - - Il secondo del minuto (da 00 a 59) - - - - %d - - Il giorno del mese (da 01 a 31) - - - - %m - - Il mese dell'anno (da 01 a 12) - - - - %y - - Le ultime due cifre dell'anno - - - - - - Altri esempi di nomi di file possono essere: - - - - - screenshot-`date +%Y%m%d-%H%M%S`.jpg - - - - - pic-`date +%H%M%S`.png - - - - - myshot.jpg - - - - - `my_own_script_to_create_a_filename`.jpg - - - - - - L'estensione del nome del file determina il tipo di immagine - salvata. Screen-Shooter supporta un - numero talmente elevato di tipi di immagine che può essere solo - definito ridicolo. Provate la sorte! Per un elenco completo di tutti - i tipi supportati digitate man convert. Potete - anche usare .html per creare una mappa di immagini e cose assurde - del genere. - - - - Se l'estensione che usate non è comprensibile da parte di - Screen-Shooter o non la indicate proprio - viene salvata un'immagine in formato MIFF, dalla quale potete poi - ricavarne altre usando successivamente il comando - convert. - - - - - - Visualizza immagine dopo la cattura - - - La casella di spunta Visualizza immagine dopo la - cattura di default non è selezionata. Se viene - selezionata l'immagine catturata viene visualizzata subito dopo la - cattura usando il programma che indicate: il default è - ee, che avvia il programma di visualizzazione - immagini Electric Eyes. - - - - - - - - - Anteprime - - - - - Crea anche una piccola anteprima dell'immagine - - - - Nessuna delle opzioni successive ha effetto se non avete selezionato - crea anteprime così com'è il default. - - - - - - - Dimensione delle anteprime - - - - Questa è la percentuale della dimensione originale che verrà data - all'anteprima il cui default è il 25%. - - - - - - - Compressione dell'anteprima - - - - Questa è la qualità delle compressione da usare; così come nelle - preferenze generali, migliore è la qualità della compressione - maggiori dettagli saranno salvati e maggiore sarà la dimensione del - file dell'anteprima. Il valore di default è il 50%. - - - - - - - Prefisso da attaccare al nome del file - - - - Questo è il prefisso da attaccare al nome del file dell'anteprima - per distinguerla dall'immagine completa. Se questo campo viene - lasciato vuoto l'anteprima sovrascriverà l'immagine completa che - verrà conseguentemente perduta. Il prefisso di default è "thumb-". - - - - - - - Utilizza un mediatore di alta qualità per generare le - anteprime - - - - La casella di spunta mediatore di alta - qualità di default non è selezionata. Se viene - selezionata l'anteprima creata è un'immagine di tipo MIFF. Un tipo - file 'lossy' è un tipo di immagine in cui i dati e i dettagli - vengono definitivamente perduti ma che producono file di dimensioni - molto minori della stessa immagine salvata in formato di tipo - 'non-lossy'. Il tipico esempio di tipo 'lossy' è il JPEG. - - - - - - - - - Altre elaborazioni - - - Queste opzioni necessitano di moltissima potenza di - calcolo in più rispetto a quelle delle precedenti sezioni. Il loro - compito è quello di produrre uno stadio intermedio dell'immagine - catturata sul quale fare delle elaborazioni, onde per cui, una volta - attivate, occorrerà molto più tempo per ottenere l'immagine definitiva. - - - - - - - Normalizza l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta normalizza l'immagine - trasforma l'immagine per occupare tutto l'intervallo di colori. Di - default è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Equalizza l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta equalizza l'immagine - abilita una equalizzazione basata su un istogramma, processo che - cerca di compensare il basso contrasto di un'immagine per ottenere - maggiori dettagli. Di default è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Evidenzia l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta evidenzia l'immagine fa - sì che Screen-Shooter cerchi di ripulire - al meglio l'immagine riducendone il rumore. Di default è - disabilitata. - - - - - - - Effetto Despeckle - - - - La casella di spunta effetto Despeckle applica - un tipo filtro che riduce le macchie eliminando singoli pixel il cui - colore è molto diverso dai pixel vicini. Di default è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Sharpen image by factor - - - - Sharpening the image sharpens the image. The default is a factor - of zero, but it can be raised to 100%. - - - - - - - Ruota l'immagine in senso orario - - - - - Con questo campo è possibile impostare i gradi con cui ruotare - l'immagine in senso orario. - - - - - - - Aggiusta la gamma - - - - La casella di spunta gamma permette di - impostare la gamma; questo valore ha a che fare con l'intensità e la - luminosità dell'immagine (in modo peraltro abbastanza - complicato). L'intervallo utilizzabile è compreso fra 0,8 e 2,3 con - un valore di default di 1,6. La scala utilizzata non è di tipo - lineare perciò è necessario fare qualche prova considerando che - abbassando la gamma si ottiene un'immagine più scura e viceversa, - alzando questo valore se ne ottiene un più luminosa. - - - - - - - - Frills - - - - Crea una cornice intorno all'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta crea una cornice è - disabilitata di default. Selezionandola si ottiene una cornice - intorno all'immagine; questa cornice è sempre di colore grigio ma - Tom Gilbert afferma che - if anybody requests it, I'll add options for setting its - colour (se qualcuno lo richiede potrei aggiungere un'opzione - per impostare il colore della cornice). - - - - - - - Dimensione della cornice - - - - Questa opzione imposta la dimensione in pixel della cornice con un - intervallo da uno a cinquanta con un valore di default di sei pixel. - - - - - - - Ruota l'immagine verticalmente - - - - Questa opzione restituisce l'immagine speculare verticalmente e può - essere combinata con le opzioni successive. Di default è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Ruota l'immagine orizzontalmente - - - - Questa opzione restituisce l'immagine speculare orizzontalmente e può - essere combinata con le opzioni successive. Di default è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Filtro Emboss - - - - Applicando il filtro Enboss si ottiene un'immagine in cui sono stati - eliminati molti colori e con il disegno in rilievo. Di default - questa casella di spunta è disabilitata. - - - - - - - Invia l'immagine e l'anteprima a... - - - - Immettendo il nome di un programma o di uno script in questo campo e - selezionando la casella di spunta invia a è - possibile avviare il programma o lo script indicati automaticamente - con i file immagine e anteprima come argomenti. Può essere usato per - stampare le immagini automaticamente, per avviare uno script di - catalogazione o per aggiungerle ad un sito web automaticamente. Uno - script di esempio è disponibile con la distribuzione di - Screen-Shooter. - - - - - - - - Opzioni spurie: parte 1 - - - Tom Gilbert afferma These options are all just plain silly. But - they're fun. So I included them (Queste opzioni sono poco più di - un gioco ma poiché sono divertenti le ho incluse). Inoltre necessitano - di molta potenza di calcolo allo stesso modo delle opzioni Altre - Elaborazioni di cui sopra. - - - - - Per poter usare le opzioni elencate in questa e nella prossima sezioneè - necessario aver abilitato Mostra opzioni spurie - nella sezione Preferenze - Generali altrimenti non risultano disponibili. - - - - - - Sfuma l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta sfuma immagine è - disabilitata di default e il valore di sfumatura è impostato a - zero. Selezionando la casella di spunta e modificando il valore è - possibile sfumare l'immagine. Anche al valore massimo (100) un font - tipico sdi una tipica finestra di terminale risulta sempre leggibile. - - - - - - - Crea effetto carboncino - - - - La casella di spunta carboncino è - disabilitata di default e il valore di sfumatura è impostato a - zero. Applicando questo filtro si ottiene un'immagine monocromatica - con una leggera "affumicatura" che aumenta aumentando il valore - dell'effetto. Ciò che si ottiene non esalta però un gran che il - testo. Il valore massimo è 100. - - - - - - - Esalta contorni - - - - La casella di spunta esalta contorni è - disabilitata di default e il valore è impostato a zero. Usando - questa opzione viene prodotta un'immagine monocromatica in cui, - invece di esaltare aree di colori differenti, vengono esaltati i - confini fra le aree di colore differente, molto utile per mappe e - fotografie astronomiche. Il valore massimo è 100. - - - - - - - Implodi l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta implodi l'immagine è - disabilitata di default e il valore è impostato a zero. Usando - questa opzione l'immagine risultante è simile a quella in cui un - peso è stato appoggiato al centro. Il valore massimo è 100. - - - - - - - - Opzioni spurie: parte 2 - - - - - Applica effetto impressionista - - - - La casella di spunta effetto impressionista è - disabilitata di default e il valore è impostato a zero. Usando - questa opzione con un valore di raggio di circa 5 produce un effetto - simile ad un quadro impressionista. Impostando un valore di 50 farà - lavorare il vostro processore come un matto per almeno dieci minuti - su un computer di potenza ragionevole e con il valore massimo di 100 - è necessario avere un computer molto potente e molta pazienza. - - - - - - - Solarizza l'immagine - - - - La casella di spunta solarizza è - disabilitata di default e il valore è impostato a zero. Solarizzare - è un effetto inizialmente notato nello sviluppare fotografie da - negativi e produce un'immagine in negativo (come nell'opzione - "Inverti i colori" delle preferenze generali) però con colori - leggermente differenti; un valore di 5 produce un risultato - splendente ma il valore massimo ammesso è 100. - - - - - - - Spread image pixels - - - The spread image checkbox is off by default - and the factor is set to zero. The result of spreading the image - pixels by a radius of about 5 is similar to looking through - lightly frosted glass; for heavily-frosted glass, try 25. - The maximum is 100. - - - - - - - Effetto spirale - - - - La casella di spunta effetto spirale è - disabilitata di default e il valore è impostato a zero. Applicare - l'effetto a spirale produce un'immagine distorta simile all'effetto - implosione solo che l'immagine in questo caso sembra ruotare lungo - una spirale intorno al punto centrale invece che cadere verso di - esso. Un valore pari a 20 per il raggio produce simile ad uno - specchio "fairground"(?) non proprio un'immagine speculare; un - valore di 90 una versione accentuata (il testo rimane comunque - sempre leggibile); a 180 tutta l'immagine è ruotata e al valore - massimo di 360 viene creato proprio un effetto a spirale. - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - - - - Spesso immagini salvate usando il formato PNG vengono mostrate in modo - scorretto usando Netscape o - GNOME Help Browser. Questo è dovuto a bug - di Netscape e nelle librerie di manipolazione di immagini di GNOME e - non a bug di Screen-Shooter. È possibile - visualizzare queste immagini usando altri programmi di - visualizzazione, oppure provare a modificare il livello di - compressione nella finestra di dialogo Preferenze, cosa che - spesso può aiutare a risolvere il problema. - - - - - - - Autori - - L'applet Screen-Shooter è stato scritto da Tom - Gilbert (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). Inviate tutti - i commenti, suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking - database. (Le istruzioni per riportare errori possono essere - trovate on-line. Se state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o - una più recente è possibile usare anche il programma - bug-buddy (bug-buddy), che - si trova nel sotto-menù Utilità nel Menù - Principale, per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Tom Gilbert - (gilbertt@tomgilbert.freeserve.co.uk). Inviate tutti i - commenti e i suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index a0125e9..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/sound-monitor-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,491 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Sound Monitor - - - L'applet Sound Monitor, mostrato con il suo tema - di default in , è un visore del - volume del suono e un'interfaccia per controllare ESD (l'Enlightened Sound - Daemon) - il componente di GNOME che controlla l'output sonoro. Per - aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello, cliccate con - il tasto destro sul Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Multimedia - Sound Monitor - . - - -
- Applet Sound Monitor - - Applet Sound Monitor - - - -
- - - - Il suono in GNOME - - In GNOME viene usato uno speciale programma, chiamato ESD (Enlightened - Sound Daemon), come un intermediario fra le varie applicazioni e la scheda - sonora. ESD permette di mixare il suono proveniente da svariate - applicazioni così che sia possibile giocare ad un gioco con gli effetti - sonori mentre state ascoltando un CD musicale. Per sentire i suoni delle - applicazioni di GNOME ESD deve essere in esecuzione. Normalmente GNOME - viene configurato perché ESD parta ogni volta che fate partire GNOME; se - per qualche ragione non fosse così cliccate sul bottone del - Menù Principale (quello con l'icona del piedone) e - scegliete - - Programmi - Impostazioni - Multimedia - Suono - - ed abilitate l'opzione Abilita avvio server del - suono, in modo che ESD venga avviato la volta successiva che - farete partire GNOME. È possibile avviare e fermare il demone ESD anche - usando l'applet Sound Monitor come spiegato più - avanti. - - - Le applicazioni non scritte specificatamente per GNOME normalmente non - possono usare ESD e necessitano di controllare direttamente la scheda - audio -- perciò non è possibile in questo caso l'uso promiscuo della - scheda sonora con altre applicazioni. Questo significa che con queste - applicazioni è possibile usare la scheda sonora o con GNOME o con queste - ma non contemporaneamente. In molti casi questo comporta di dover fermare - temporaneamente ESD per poter usare queste applicazioni (altrimenti - otterrete messaggi di errore del tipo Device /dev/dsp - busy. - - - - - - Uso - - Sound Monitor mostra continuamente in modo - grafico il volume di suono prodotto dal vostro sistema. È possibile - controllare il suono spengendo e accendendo ESD cliccando con il tasto - destro del mouse sull'applet e selezionando Place Esound in - standby oppure Resume Esound come - descritto più avanti. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù - contenente le seguenti voci: - - - - - Manager … — fa apparire la - finestra di dialogo - Sound Monitor Manager da dove è - possibile vedere e modificare le impostazioni di ESD. - - - - - - Metti Esound in - standby/Riavvia - Esound/Avvia Esound — - si può avere solo una di questa voci disponibili, a seconda dello - stato di ESD. Le prime due permettono di mettere ESD in standby - temporaneamente e di renderlo nuovamente attivo. Questo è utile nel - caso in cui abbiate un'applicazione musicale che non può funzionare - con ESD attivo ma che deve interfacciarsi direttamente con il device - della scheda sonora. La terzo opzione permette di avviare - Esound nel caso in cui questo non sia - stato già avviato. - - - - - - - Proprietà … — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Sound monitor applet settings. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su … — mostra le - informazioni su Sound Monitor, come la - versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Sound - Monitor cliccandoci con il tasto destro del mouse e - scegliendo Proprietà…. Apparirà così la - finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor Applet settings - (mostrata in ), da dove è - possibile modificare le seguenti impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor Applet settings - - Finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor Applet settings - - - -
- - - Le proprietà modificabili nella sezione Generali sono: - - - - - Indicatore di picco — Questo controlla il comportamento - dell'indicatore di picco (la linea luminosa che indica il - raggiungimento del volume di picco), che può essere impostata a - spenta (off), impostata perché segua il volume - di picco al massimo (active), oppure perché - segua questo in modo più avanzato (smooth), in - modo che sia leggermente inferiore al picco, il quale può essere - leggermente più alto. - - - - - - Velocità di ritorno dell'indicatore di picco — Con questo si - può impostare la velocità con cui l'indicatore torna al volume zero - (per il modo active) o si muove verso il volume corrente (per il - modo smmoth). - - - - - Spettro (scala 1:X, dove X=?) — Con questo di può impostare la - scala per l'asse delle ascisse (il tempo) per i temi di - Sound Monitor nei quali è visualizzato - uno spettro. (Poiché il tema di default non è uno spettro, questa - impostazione non modifica niente se non viene modificato il tema, - come verrà descritto più avanti). Un valore di 1 significa che sul - display un pixel corrisponde ad un campionamento, preso a 44,1 kHz. - - - - - - Connetti i punti nel grafico — Questo permette di disegnare punti - connessi da una retta per i temi che hanno l'aspetto di uno spettro. - - - - - - Velocità di aggiornamento del grafico (frame per secondo) — - Questo imposta il numero di volte in cui il display di - Sound Monitor è aggiornato ogni secondo. - - - - - - - Le proprietà nella sezione Tema sono: - - - - - File del tema (directory) — Da qui è possibile scegliere il tema - da usare per Sound Monitor, che determina - l'aspetto di tutta l'applet. Si può selezionare il tema dalla lista - Themes:, oppure digitare direttamente il nome - del tema scelto nel campo Theme directory. Alcuni temi standard sono - mostrati in . - -
- Esempi di temi per Sound Monitor - - Esempi di temi per Sound Monitor - - - -
- - - - - - - - - Le proprietà nella sezione Avanzate sono: - - - - - Host ESD da controllare — Questa opzione permette di ascoltare il - suono generato da ESD di un altro computer. Per fare questo - inserite l'indirizzo di rete (o l'indirizzo IP) del computer al - quale volete connetervi, nel formato - host:port. Il computer indicato deve - avere attivato ESD in modo "unlocked" in modo da permettere anche ad - altri computer di connettersi. La porta di default di ESD è la - 5001. Lasciate questo campo vuoto per usare ESD del computer locale. - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor - Applet settings. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare alle - impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - Il Sound Monitor Manager - - Per avviare Sound Monitor Manager, cliccate con il - tasto destro del mouse e scegliete - Manager…. Apparirà così la finestra di - dialogo Sound Monitor - Manager (mostrata in ), dalla quale è possibile vedere - e modificare alcune impostazioni di ESD. - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor Manager - - - -
- - - La sezione Server mostra le seguenti informazioni: - - - - - Server information — Questa è una breve descrizione dello - stato attuale del demone esound, che comprende il rate di output - alla scheda sonora, il numero dei suoni in esecuzione (connected - streams), e il numero di quelli in cache sul server. - - - - - - - - Le proprietà della sezione Streams sono: - - - - - Connected Streams — Mostra una lista di informazioni dei suoni - in esecuzione suo server. L'utente può variare il volume e il - bilanciamento di uno stream selezionandolo e poi modificandoli con - gli appositi slide. - - - - - - - - Le proprietà nella sezione Samples sono: - - - - - Cached Samples — Mostra una lista di informazioni sui suoni in - cache nel server. L'utente può variare il volume e il - bilanciamento di uno stream selezionandolo e poi modificandoli con - gli appositi slide. Per passare dalla visualizzazione della - lunghezza del suono in byte o in tempo (nel formato MM:SS,S) - cliccate sull'intestazione della colonna della lunghezza o del - tempo. - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo Sound Monitor - Applet settings. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare alle - impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - - L'Esound Persistent Volume Daemon (ESDPVD) - - Insieme all'applet Sound Monitor viene fornito - il programma chiamato Esound Persistent Volume - Daemon (ESDPVD), che può girare in background e registra i - volumi di tutti gli stream che si connettono al server. Lo scopo - principale di ESDPVD è di essere usato insieme - al Manager dell'applet Sound - Monitor per memorizzare i volumi di ogni stream che si - connette al server ESD. - - - Per esempio, supponendo che stia attualmente girando il programma - GTCD, che è un CD Player e che vogliate - abbassare i volumi usando la finestra di - Manager. Normalmente le impostazioni del volume - verrebbero perse quando il programma (nel nostro caso - GTCD) viene chiuso e riavviato. Però se - esdpvd sta girando e - GTCD viene riavviato il volume viene - ripristinato al livello precedente (nel nostro caso più basso). - - - Se GNOME viene configurato per avviare ESDPVD - ad ogni avvio (usando la sezione Programmi di - startup del control-center), il - programma ESDPVD memorizza il volume e il - bilanciamento in tutte le sessioni successive. - - - ESDPVD memorizza anche il volume e il - bilanciamento per i suoni in cache (usati spesso per i suoni degli per - l'interfaccia come click sui bottoni, menù ed altro). - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e limitazioni - - Questa applet mostra soltanto il volume del suono prodotto da applicazioni - di GNOME (per la precisione, dei suoni che passano attraverso ESD); non - può perciò mostrare il volume del suono prodotto da applicazioni che si - connettono direttamente alla scheda sonora. - - - - - - - - Autori - - Sound Monitor è stata scritta da John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu) e John Ellis - (johne@bellatlantic.net). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/swapload-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/swapload-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index df1cfdc..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/swapload-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,291 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet Carico dello Swap - - - - L'applicazione swapload_applet è una piccola - applet di controllo che si aggiunge ad un pannello e che mostra quanto swap - è correntemente occupato. - - - - Lo swap è una parte dell'hard disk che non fa parte del file system. Quando - il kernel stabilisce che un programma in memoria non viene usato molto ma - che potrebbe essere usato entro poco, il kernel sposta parte del programma - dalla memoria nello swap, da dove può essere facilmente recuperato. Spostare - i dati fra la memoria e lo swap può essere un processo lento così se si sta - usando una grossa parte dello swap può far verificare un generale - rallentamento del computer. - - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunché da fare con questa applet. Si aggiunge ad un pannello. Ci - sono molte opzioni per modificarne l'aspetto. - - -
- Applet Carico dello Swap - - Applet Carico dello Swap - - - -
- - - - - Voci del menù del tasto destro - - Oltre alle voci del menù normale, il menù del tasto destro contiene anche - le seguenti: - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Con questo si apre la finestra di dialogo - multiload_applet descritta più avanti con la - quale si possono modificare le proprietà di default di questa e di - altre applet di controllo. - - - - - - Proprietà... - - - Questo apre la finestra di dialogo multiload_applet - dialogue box descritta più avanti con cui si possono modificare solo le proprietà - dell'applet swapload_applet. - - - - - - Avvia gtop... - - - Questa voce avvia il programma gtop, Monitor di - Sistema di GNOME. gtop offre un controllo - molto più dettagliato del sistema e cosa vi sta accadendo. - - - - - - - - Proprietà - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà Predefinite dell'Applet - Carico dello swap - - - -
- - - Come in molte altre applet di controllo, in - swapload_applet ci sono due modi per selezionare - le proprietà. Si può cambiare contemporaneamente tutte le applet che - appartengono a questo gruppo (cpuload_applet, - loadavg_applet, - netload_applet, - memload_applet e - cpuload_applet) in una sola grande finestra di - dialogo. Può essere utile nel caso si usino una o più di queste applet e - queste proprietà vengono usate di default. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare - sulla voce Proprietà... del menù. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet Carico dello swap - - Finestra di dialogo specifica dell'Applet Carico dello - swap - - - -
- - - Oppure è possibile modificare solo le proprietà - swapload_applet. Può essere utile se viene usata - soltanto swapload_applet oppure se si vogliono - provare nuove combinazioni. Per arrivarci si deve cliccare sulla voce - Proprietà del menù. - - - - Se si usa la voce Proprietà... e si - modificano le proprietà solo per questa applet è necessario - deselezionare il bottone Utilizza impostazioni - predefinite prima di poter modificare le impostazioni. - - - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet Carico dello - swap - - Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà dell'Applet Carico dello - swap - - - -
- - - I cambiamenti possibili alle proprietà sono tre: - - - - - Colori - - - Si possono modificare i colori usati per lo swap in uso e quello - libero cliccando ai mottoni con i colori; apparirà così la finestra - di dialogo dei colori di GNOME. - - - - - - Velocità - - - Si può modificare la velocità con cui procede il grafico misurato in - millisecondi. Il valore predefinito è 500. - - - - - - Dimensione - - - Si può così modificare la dimensione dell'applet. L'unità di misura - è il pixel. Il valore predefinito è 40 e si può variare da 1 pixel a - piacere. Nei pannelli verticali il valore si riferisce all'altezza, - in quelli orizzontali la larghezza. - - - - - - - - Errori conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Ridimensionando e modificando l'orientamento del pannello può provocare - problemi intermittenti che dovrebbero però stabilizzarsi rapidamente. - - - - - Autori - - Questa applet è stata scritta da Martin Baulig - (martin@home-of-linux.org). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gywnne - (telsa@linuxchix.org) e Eric Baudais - (baudais@okstate.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index f963317..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/tickastat-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,512 +0,0 @@ - - Tick-a-Stat Applet - - - L'applet Tick-a-Stat, mostrato in , controlla molti aspetti del vostro - computer e mostra informazioni quando avvengono degli eventi. Per esempio - è in grado di controllare il carico del processore e avvisarvi quando - questo è sovraccarico per la presenza di troppi processi. Per aggiungere - questa applet ad un Pannello cliccate sul - Pannello e scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilità - Tick-a-Stat - . - - -
- Applet Tick-a-Stat - - Applet Tick-a-Stat - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Dopo che è stato configurato Tick-a-Stat, - girerà continuamente e non richiederà alcun input da parte vostra. La - configurazione generale di Tick-a-Stat viene - spiegata in . Ci sono molti moduli che - possono essere usati, la cui funzione e configurazione viene descritta in - . - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù con le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà… — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. - - - - - - Controllo eventi… — apre la - finestra di dialogo - Controllo eventi. - - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni a proposito dell'Applet - Tick-a-Stat come la versione e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'applet Tick-a-Stat - cliccandoci con il tasto destro del mouse e scegliendo - Proprietà…. Si apre così la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà (mostrata in ), da dove è possibile modificare molte - impostazioni. - - -
- Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - La sezione Moduli elenca i vari moduli - abilitabili. Selezionate un modulo dall'elenco Moduli - sulla sinistra per configurarlo nella parte destra. Ogni modulo e le sue - proprietà configurabili sono descritti in . - - - - Le proprietà nella sezione Generali sono: - - - - Abilita il log degli eventi — Se questo bottone è - selezionato viene scritto un log da di tutti gli eventi individuati - dai moduli abilitati nel file indicato nel campo Percorso - del Log. - - - - - - Percorso del log — Questo è il file usato per il log degli - eventi. - - - - - - - La proprietà nella sezione Visualizzazione sono: - - - - - Scorrimento intelligente — Selezionando questo bottone i - vecchi eventi scorrono in alto solo quando ne avvengono di nuovi, - invece di scorrere continuamente. - - - - - - Tipo di scorrimento intelligente — Selezionando questo bottone - il nuovo testo scorre nell'applet lentamente come se venisse - digitato invece di scorrere rapidamente. - - - - - - Ritardo del ritorno a capo — Questo è il ritardo (in decimi di - secondo) con cui viene ritornato a capo il testo di un messaggio che - oltrepassa il limite destro dell'applet. - - - - - - Velocità di scorrimento fra le linee — Questa è la velocità - con cui le linee vengono scorse in alto. - - - - - - Larghezza — Questa è la larghezza (in pixel) dell'applet. - - - - - - Usa tutto lo spazio sul pannello — Selezionando questo bottone - l'applet occuperà tutto lo spazio disponibile sul - Pannello (fino all'oggetto successivo, se - esiste). - - - - - - Altezza — Questa è l'altezza (in pixel) dell'applet. - - - - - - Usa la dimensione del pannello — Selezionando questo bottone - l'applet si dimensionerà usando la dimensione del - Pannello. - - - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - - Moduli - - Tick-a-Stat contiene molti moduli. Ognuno di - questi controlla una certa parte del vostro sistema e risponde a - determinati eventi. Ne possono essere usati molti contemporaneamente. I - moduli standard di Tick-a-Stat vengono - descritti più avanti. - - - - Modulo di prova - - Il Modulo di Prova è un semplice modulo che scrive semplicemente - Questa è la descrizione del modulo di prova nell'applet - ogni pochi secondi. - - - - - Modulo di ricerca di Core Dump - - Il modulo Controllo Dump cerca in un determinato percorso file di core - dump e nel caso questi vengano trovati questi vengono datati e ne - archivia la backtrace. Viene anche mostrato un logo del core dump e un - messaggio nell'applet principale, così come mostrato in ed opzionalmente viene aperta una - finestra dove viene mostrata la backtrace. - -
- Tick-a-Stat che mostra un Core Dump - - Tick-a-Stat che mostra un Core Dump - - - -
- - - Le impostazioni del modulo Core Dump sono: - - - - - Abilita questo modulo — Selezionando questo bottone il - modulo viene attivato. - - - - - - Mostra la finestra delle backtrace per i nuovi core dump — - Selezionando questo bottone Tick-a-Stat - apre una finestra di dialogo che mostra la backtrace ogni volta - che viene generato un nuovo file core. - - - - - - Percorso da controllare — Immettete il percorso della - directory che volete controllare per nuovi file di core dump. - - - - - - - - Modulo Carico Medio - - Il Modulo Carico Medio controlla l'uso del processore e vi avvisa quando - il numero di processi (programmi) che lo stanno usando è troppo - alto. (In questa eventualità sono possibili basse prestazioni di ogni - processo e può essere dovuta da un programma o un demoni - sballati). Quando il carico sul processore è alto viene mostrato un - avviso come mostrato in . Per - ogni carico ancora più alto viene sempre mostrato un avviso. - -
- Tick-a-Stat che mostra un avviso di Carico Alto - - Tick-a-Stat che mostra un avviso di Carico Alto - - - -
- - - Le impostazioni del modulo Carico Medio sono: - - - - - Abilita questo modulo — Selezionando questo bottone il - modulo viene attivato. - - - - - - Controlla ogni (Secondi) — Imposta l'intervallo (in secondi) - entro il quale viene fatto il controllo del carico. - - - - - - Mostra finestra di dialogo per questo evento — Selezionando - questo bottone appare una finestra di dialogo ogni volta che viene - generato un avviso (o un allarme). (Questa opzione è valida sia - per le sezioni Avviso e Allarme). - - - - - - Livello di Carico Medio (threshold) — Impostate questo valore - al carico (il numero medio di programmi che girano - contemporaneamente sul processore). (Questa opzione è valida sia - per le sezioni Avviso e Allarme). - - - - - - - - Testo da mostrare — Immettete il testo che deve essere - mostrato quando il carico raggiunge il livello. - - - - - - - - - - File Tailer Module - - The File Tailer module shows any lines which are added to the - end of a given file. This is typically used to monitor the - output log files created by many programs. - - - - - The File Tailerr module settings are: - - - - - Enable this module — Selecting this button activates the - module. - - - - - - Path to tail — Set this to the name of the file you - wish to tail. (The term "tail" refers to watching the tail, - or end, of a file. In a shell, one can do this using the - tail command, typically with the "-f" - flag.) - - - - - - Show pop-up dialog for new line — Select this - to have a pop-up dialog showing the new line open each time a - new line is added to the file. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Log degli eventi - - Il log degli eventi serve per tener traccia di eventi registrati da - Tick-a-Stat. Il file usato per il log degli - eventi e per qualunque altro log abilitato vengono specificati nella - sezione Generali della finestra di dialogo Proprietà. Per - vedere il log degli eventi cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse - sull'applet e scegliete Log degli - eventi…. - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'Applet Tick-a-Stat è stata scritta da John - Ellis (johne@bellatlantic.net). Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dan Mueth - (d-mueth@uchicago.edu). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c2ef15c..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/webcontrol-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,242 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Telcomando Web - - - L'Applet Telecomando Web, mostrato in , permette di avviare il browser - Netscape con l'URL indicato nel campo testo - URL. Per aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello - cliccate con il tasto destro del mouse sul Pannello e - scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al Pannello - Applet - Network - WebControl - - - - -
- Applet Telcomando Web - - Applet Telcomando Web - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Per usare questa applet digitate l'indirizzo del documento che volete - visualizzare nel campo testo. Per un URL di Internet dovete digitare il - prefisso http:// seguito dall'indirizzo web, come ad - esempio http://www.gnome.org. Per un file locale è - sufficiente digitare il nome del file. - - - - Se volete lanciare una nuova finestra del browser invece di usare quelle - già aperte cliccate sulla casella di spunta Nuova - finestra. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sull'applet appare un menù con le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Proprietà— apre la finestra di dialogo - Properties . - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - Informazioni su — mostra - informazioni sull'applet Telcomando Web - come la versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Personalizzazione - - È possibile personalizzare l'Applet Telcomando - Web cliccandoci sopra con il tasto destro e scegliendo - Proprietà … . Si aprirà così la finestra - di dialogo Proprietà (mostrato in ), da dove è possibile modificare molte - impostazioni. - -
- Finestra di dialogo delle Proprietà di Telcomando Web - - Finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - - -
- - - Le proprietà sono: - - - - - Visualizza URL — mostra il testo - Url: alla sinistra del campo di testo - nell'applet. - - - - - - - Visualizza l'opzione "nuova finestra" — - mostra la casella di spunta nella finestra dell'applet permettendovi - così di decidere se aprire il documento richiesto in una nuova - finestra del browser o di usarne una già aperta. - - - - - - - Fatti i cambiamenti voluti cliccate sul pulsante OK - per salvarli e chiudete la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. Per annullare le modifiche e tornare - alle impostazioni precedenti, cliccate sul pulsante - Chiudi. - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - L'applet Telcomando Web può avviare solo - Netscape. Se non possedete - Netscape non funziona. Anche se usate un altro - browser come URL handler l'Applet Telcomando - Web avvierà lo stesso Netscape. - - - L'Applet Telcomando Web non può ridimensionarsi - per rispettare la dimensione del Pannello nel caso - in cui la dimensione del Pannello è minore della - larghezza o lunghezza normali di Applet Telcomando - Web. Questo effetto si verifica sia nei pannelli verticali - che quelli orizzontali. - - - - - - - - - Autori - - L'Applet Telcomando Web è stata scritta da - Garrett Smith gsmith@serv.net. Inviate tutti i commenti, - suggerimenti e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da John Fleck - (jfleck@inkstain.net). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@lists.it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/whereami-ug.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/whereami-ug.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b46662d..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/applets/whereami-ug.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ - - Applet Dove mi trovo? - - - L'applet Dove mi trovo? mostrata in , mostra la posizione del puntatore del vostro - mouse sullo schermo, scrivendo le coordinate come x - e y, dove x è l'ascissa e - y è il verticale. La dimensione di un'area dello - schermo può essere così determinata trascinando il cursore dopo che - l'applet Dove Mi Trovo? è stata avviata. - - - Per aggiungere questa applet ad un Pannello cliccate - con il tasto destro del mouse sul Pannello e - scegliete - - Pannello - Aggiungi al pannello - Applet - Utilitèà - Dove Mi Trovo? - . - - -
- Applet Dove Mi Trovo? - - Applet Dove Mi Trovo? - - - -
- - - - Uso - - Non c'è alcunchè da fare per usare questa applet. Vi riporta la posizione - del cursore mentre voi muovete il vostro mouse. Cliccando sull'applet - Dove Mi Trovo? il cursore del mouse verrà - "catturato" cambiandone la forma a croce, e dopo che è stato catturato - potete trascinarlo per misurare la dimensione di un'area dello schermo. Un - ulteriore click sull'applet riporterà il tutto alla condizione normale. - - - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse appare un menù contenente le - seguenti voci: - - - - - Aiuto — mostra questo documento. - - - - - - Informazioni su… — mostra - informazioni sull'applet Dove Mi Trovo? - come la versione dell'applet e il nome dell'autore. - - - - - - - - - - - - Bug conosciuti e Limitazioni - - Questa applet non ha bug conosciuti. - - - - - - - - Autori - - Dove mi trovo? è stata scritta da John Kodis - (kodis@jagunet.com). Inviate tutti i commenti, suggerimenti - e notifiche di errori al GNOME bug tracking database. (Le istruzioni per - riportare errori possono essere trovate on-line. Se - state usando la versione di GNOME 1.1 o una più recente è possibile usare - anche il programma bug-buddy - (bug-buddy), che si trova nel sotto-menù - Utilità nel Menù Principale, - per riportare errori. - - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Telsa Gwynne - (hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk). Inviate tutti i commenti e i - suggerimenti riguardo questo manuale allo GNOME Documentation Project - mandando un email a docs@gnome.org. È possibile anche - spedire commenti on-line usando lo GNOME Documentation Status - Table. - - - - La traduzione italiana è stata curata da Leandro Noferini - (lnoferin@cybervalley.org). Inviate tutti i commenti e - suggerimenti riguardo questa traduzione a - gnome-i18n@it.gnome.org. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/authors.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/authors.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 21442c8..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/authors.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ - - Il team della guida utente di GNOME - - La guida utente è stata creata dalle seguenti persone - - - Scrittori - - - - - David C. Mason - - - David A. Wheeler - - - Alexander Kirillov - - - Dan Mueth - - - Telsa Gwynne - - - Eric Baudais - - - John Fleck - - - Aaron Weber - - - Kenny Graunke - - - John Ellis - - - Havoc Pennington - - - Emese Kovacs - - - Spiros Papadimitriou - - - Oliver Maruhn - - - Chris Lyttle - - - James Cope - - - Michael Hall - - - Tom Gilbert - - - John Kodis - - - Gregory Leblanc - - - Vera Horiuchi - - - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban - - - Arjan Scherpenisse - - - - Traduttori - - - - - Christopher R. Gabriel, cgabriel@pluto.linux.it - - - Leandro Noferini, lnoferin@cybervalley.org - - - Eugenia Franzoni, eugenia@pluto.linux.it - - - Marco Bazzani - - - Simo Sorce, idra@samba.org - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/desktop.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/desktop.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 9cfee02..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/desktop.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,210 +0,0 @@ - - - - Il desktop GNOME - - Introduzione - - - Il Desktop GNOME - - Il Desktop GNOME fornisce le funzionalità di qualunque sistema operativo - tradizionale per il desktop. È possibile trascinare file, programmi e - cartella sul desktop. È possibile inoltre trascinare questi oggetti - all'interno di applicazioni compatibili con GNOME, permettendo un facile - accesso alle risorse del calcolatore. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Il Desktop di GNOME è attualmente fornito ad un processo sottostante al File - Manager di GNOME. Se, per qualunque motivo, questo processo termina la sua - esecuzione è possibile avviare nuovamente il File Manager e il vostro - desktop tornerà a funzionare. Se dovrete mai eseguire questa operazione non - sarà comunque necessario mantenere aperte le finestre del File Manager. - - - - - Usare il Desktop - - Usare il desktop è semplice come trascinare gli oggetti che desiderate - utilizzare più spesso su di questo. Il desktop predefinito includa una - cartella per la vostra directory home (solitamente /home/[nome - utente]. Inoltre, la finestra predefinta del File Manager apparirà - in modo da poter accedere rapidamente ad altre aree del sistema. - - - Una volta che un oggetto si trova sul desktop è possibile eseguire su questo - un doppio-click per attivare l'azione predefinta oppure cliccarci sopra con - il tasto destro del mouse per visualizzare, in un menu, le possibili azioni - associate a quel tipo di oggetto. L'azione predefinta dipende appunto dal - tipo di oggetto: se questo è un programma, quel programma verrà avviato, se - sono dati, verrà avviato il programma appropriato per gestirli, e se invece è - una directory, verrà aperta una finestra del file manager per mostrarne il - contenuto. - - - Per utilizzare il drag and drop è necessario avere una applicazione GNOME o - Motif compatibile. GNOME è compatibile con il drag and drop di Motif, - scoprirete che funzionerà con molte delle applicazione che avete installato. - - - Tutti gli oggetti che si trovano sul desktop vengono inseriti nella seguente - directory: - - $/home/[nome utente]/.nautilus/desktop/ - - Questo può risultare utile da ricordare nel caso in cui il vostro desktop - contenga un oggetto per il quale non è possibile utilizzare il drag and drop. - - - - Il Desktop GNOME - Periferiche Hardware - - Una volta avviato GNOME è possibile montare il CDROM o il lettore floppy - collegati al sistema cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sul desktop e - selezionando il menu Dischi. Verrà mostrata una - icona sul vostro desktop che vi permetterà di accedere a queste periferiche. - - - IMPORTANTE - - È necessario avere il permesso per montare le periferiche mostrate sul - desktop prima di poterle utilizzare. Se non avete i permessi per montare i - dischi qualcuno con accesso root, come il vostro amministratore di sistema, - ad esempio, può fornirveli, nel modo che segue. Maggiori informazioni su - queste componenti del sistema sono presenti ne . - - - - Montare i dischi - - Fornisce accesso agli utenti ordinari per il montaggio/smontaggio dei dischi - può essere fatto semplicemente se possedete - linuxconf installato sul - sistema. Selezionate il disco al quale desiderate dare accesso nella sezione - Access local drive. Nella sezione - Options selezionate l'opzione User - Mountable. Adesso il disco può essere montato dagli utenti. - - - Se linuxconf non è - disponibile qualcuno con accesso root deve editare il file - /etc/fstab per aggiungere l'accesso agli utenti. Questo - viene eseguito aggiungendo al disco l'attributo - user. Ad esempio: - - - Se il vostro file fstab contiene una riga come questa: - - /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - Aggiungete "user" alla quarta colonna: - - /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - A seconda del sistema utilizzato o dell'ambiente di lavoro, possono esistere - alcuni rischi di sicurezza nel permette agli utenti di montare i - dischi. Consultate il vostro amministratore di sistema prima di eseguire - queste operazioni. - - - - - Aree del Desktop - - - Aree del Desktop - - - Desktop Multipli - - Le aree del desktop vi permettono di tenere un sistema molto ben organizzato - quando si necessita eseguire più operazioni allo stesso tempo. Proprio come - aggiungere un nuovo tavolo da lavoro quando il materiale che avete non entra - più su quello che utilizzate normalmente, le aree del desktop vi permettono - di spostarvi in una nuova zona per avviare nuovi programmi. - - - GNOME è conscio delle aree del desktop anche se queste sono controllate da un - altro programma chiamato 'gestore di finestre'. È possibile impostare il - numero di aree del dekstop attraverso la configurazione del gestore di - finestre che utilizzate. Se state utilizzando il gestore predefinto oppure se - il vostro gestore di finestre fornisce uno strumento di configurazione - grafico sarete in grado di avviare questo tramite la capplet Window Manager. - - - IMPORTANTE - - La maggior parte dei gestori di finestre vi offrono l'opzione di avere - desktop multipli, che sono diversi dalle aree del desktop. Le aree del - desktop sono estensioni virtuali di un singolo desktop, mentre i desktop - multipli sono separati l'uno dell'altro. - - - Le impostazioni predefinite di GNOME sono per utilizzare le aree del desktop - con un solo unico desktop. Qyesto perchè con alcune applicazioni, ad esempio - quelle che utilizzano Motif, gli utenti possono trovarsi davanti a problemi - di drag and drop attraverso i desktop. - - - - Altri menu del Desktop - - - Il Desktop GNOME - Menu del desktop - - Ci sono alcuni menu dek desktop che possono essere utilizzati in - GNOME. Questi menu sono accessibili cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse - sul desktop stesso. Verrà visualizzato un menu contestuale con le seguenti - voci: - - - - - Nuova finestra - Questa voce avvia una nuova - finestra del File Manager, che visualizzerà la vostra directory home. - - - - - Nuova cartella - Questa voce crea una nuova - cartella sul vostro desktop all'interno della quale è possibile inserire - dei file: un modo comodo per ordinare il proprio desktop. - - - - - Nuovo terminale - Questa voce avvia un nuovo - Terminale GNOME che automaticamente si posizionerà nella directory - /home/[nome utente] - - - - - Riordina per nome - Questa voce ordina le icone - del desktop in ordine alfabetico. - - - - - Dischi - Tramite questo sottomenu si accede - alla periferiche rimovibili. - - - - - Cambia sfondo del desktop - Questa voce apre la - configurazione dello sfondo del GNOME control-center, che vi permettere di - riconfigurare lo sfondo del vostro desktop. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl-it.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl-it.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c462536..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl-it.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,638 +0,0 @@ - - GNU Free Documentation License (traduzione italiana) - - - - Questa è semplicemente una traduzione della licenza che accompagna - questo documento, e non ha valore legale. Riferirsi alla versione originale - in lingua inglese, acclusa in questo documento, per ogni questione di - rilievo. - - - - Versione 1.1, Marzo 2000 - - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 9 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- Chiunque può copiare e  distribuire copie letterali di questo - documento di licenza, ma non ne è permessa la modifica. - - - - - 0. PREAMBOLO - - - Lo scopo di questa licenza è di rendere un manuale, un testo o - altri documenti scritti "liberi" nel senso di assicurare a tutti la - libertà effettiva di copiarli e redistribuirli, con o senza - modifiche, a fini di lucro o no. In secondo luogo questa licenza prevede - per autori ed editori il modo per ottenere il giusto riconoscimento del - proprio lavoro, preservandoli dall'essere considerati responsabili per - modifiche apportate da altri. - - - - Questa licenza è un "copyleft": ciò vuol dire che i lavori - che derivano dal documento originale devono essere ugualmente - liberi. È il complemento alla GNU General Public License, che - è una licenza di tipo "copyleft" pensata per il software libero. - - - - Abbiamo progettato questa licenza al fine di applicarla alla - documentazione del software libero, perché il software libero ha - bisogno di documentazione libera: un programma libero dovrebbe - accompagnarsi a manuali che forniscano la stessa libertà del - software. Ma questa licenza non è limitata alla documentazione del - software; può essere utilizzata per ogni testo che tratti un - qualsiasi argomento e al di là dell'avvenuta pubblicazione - cartacea. Raccomandiamo principalmente questa licenza per opere che - abbiano fini didattici o per manuali di consultazione. - - - - - 1. APPLICABILITÀ E DEFINIZIONI - - - - Questa licenza si applica a qualsiasi manuale o altra opera che contenga - una nota messa dal detentore del copyright che dica che si può - distribuire nei termini di questa licenza. Con "Documento", in seguito ci - si riferisce a qualsiasi manuale o opera. Ogni fruitore è un - destinatario della licenza e viene indicato con "voi". - - - Una "versione modificata" di un - documento è ogni opera contenente il documento stesso o parte di - esso, sia riprodotto alla lettera che con modifiche, oppure traduzioni in - un'altra lingua. - - - Una "sezione secondaria" è - un'appendice cui si fa riferimento o una premessa del documento e riguarda esclusivamente il - rapporto dell'editore o dell'autore del documento con l'argomento generale del - documento stesso (o argomenti - affini) e non contiene nulla che possa essere compreso nell'argomento - principale. (Per esempio, se il documento è in parte un manuale di - matematica, una sezione secondaria - non può contenere spiegazioni di matematica). Il rapporto con - l'argomento può essere un tema collegato storicamente con il - soggetto principale o con soggetti affini, o essere costituito da - argomentazioni legali, commerciali, filosofiche, etiche o politiche - pertinenti. - - - - Le "sezioni non modificabili" sono - alcune sezioni secondarie i cui - titoli sono esplicitamente dichiarati essere sezioni non modificabili, nella nota che - indica che il documento è - realizzato sotto questa licenza. - - - - I "testi copertina" sono dei - brevi brani di testo che sono elencati nella nota che indica che il - documento è realizzato sotto questa licenza. - - - - Una copia "trasparente" del - documento indica una copia leggibile - da un calcolatore, codificata in un formato le cui specifiche sono - disponibili pubblicamente, i cui contenuti possono essere visti e - modificati direttamente, ora e in futuro, con generici editor di testi o - (per immagini composte da pixel) con generici editor di immagini o (per i - disegni) con qualche editor di disegni ampiamente diffuso, e la copia deve - essere adatta al trattamento per la formattazione o per la conversione in - una varietà di formati atti alla successiva formattazione. Una copia - fatta in un altro formato di file trasparente il cui markup è - stato progettato per intralciare o scoraggiare modifiche future da parte - dei lettori non è trasparente. Una copia che non è - trasparente è "opaca". - - - Esempi di formati adatti per copie trasparenti sono l'ASCII puro senza - markup, il formato di input per Texinfo, il formato di input per LaTex, - SGML o XML accoppiati ad una DTD pubblica e disponibile, e semplice HTML - conforme agli standard e progettato per essere modificato - manualmente. Formati opachi sono PostScript, PDF, formati proprietari che - possono essere letti e modificati solo con word processor proprietari, - SGML o XML per cui non è in genere disponibile la DTD o gli - strumenti per il trattamento, e HTML generato automaticamente da qualche - word processor per il solo output. - - - La "pagina del titolo" di un - libro stampato indica la pagina del titolo stessa, più qualche - pagina seguente per quanto necessario a contenere in modo leggibile, il - materiale che la licenza prevede che compaia nella pagina del titolo. - Per opere in formati in cui non sia contemplata esplicitamente la pagina - del titolo, con "pagina del - titolo" si intende il testo prossimo al titolo dell'opera, - precedente l'inizio del corpo del testo. - - - - - 2. COPIE ALLA LETTERA - - - - Si può copiare e distribuire il documento con l'ausilio di qualsiasi - mezzo, per fini di lucro e non, fornendo per tutte le copie questa licenza, - le note sul copyright e l'avviso che questa licenza si applica al documento, e che non si aggiungono altre - condizioni al di fuori di quelle della licenza stessa. Non si possono usare - misure tecniche per impedire o controllare la lettura o la produzione di - copie successive alle copie che si producono o distribuiscono. Però - si possono ricavare compensi per le copie fornite. Se si distribuiscono un - numero sufficiente di copie si devono seguire anche le condizioni della - sezione 3. - - - Si possono anche prestare copie e con le stesse condizioni sopra - menzionate possono essere utilizzate in pubblico. - - - - - - 3. COPIARE IN NOTEVOLI QUANTITÀ - - - - Se si pubblicano a mezzo stampa più di 100 copie del documento, e la nota della licenza indica che - esistono uno o più testi - copertina, si devono includere nelle copie, in modo chiaro e leggibile, - tutti i testi copertina indicati: il testo della prima di copertina in - prima di copertina e il testo di quarta di copertina in quarta di - copertina. Ambedue devono identificare l'editore che pubblica il - documento. La prima di copertina deve presentare il titolo completo con - tutte le parole che lo compongono egualmente visibili ed evidenti. Si - può aggiungere altro materiale alle copertine. Il copiare con - modifiche limitate alle sole copertine, purché si preservino il - titolo e le altre condizioni viste in precedenza, è considerato - alla stregua di copiare alla lettera. - - - Se il testo richiesto per le copertine è troppo voluminoso per - essere riprodotto in modo leggibile, se ne può mettere una prima - parte per quanto ragionevolmente può stare in copertina, e - continuare nelle pagine immediatamente seguenti. - - - Se si pubblicano o distribuiscono copie opache del documento in numero superiore a 100, si deve - anche includere una copia trasparente leggibile da un - calcolatore per ogni copia o menzionare per ogni copia opaca un indirizzo di una rete di - calcolatori pubblicamente accessibile in cui vi sia una copia trasparente completa del documento, spogliato di materiale - aggiuntivo, e a cui si possa accedere anonimamente e gratuitamente per - scaricare il documento usando i protocolli standard e pubblici - generalmente usati. Se si adotta l'ultima opzione, si deve prestare la - giusta attenzione, nel momento in cui si inizia la distribuzione in - quantità elevata di copie opache, ad assicurarsi che la - copia trasparente rimanga - accessibile all'indirizzo stabilito fino ad almeno un anno di distanza - dall'ultima distribuzione (direttamente o attraverso rivenditori) di - quell'edizione al pubblico. - - - È caldamente consigliato, benché non obbligatorio, contattare - l'autore del documento prima di - distribuirne un numero considerevole di copie, per metterlo in grado di - fornire una versione aggiornata del documento. - - - - - - 4. MODIFICHE - - - Si possono copiare e distribuire versioni - modificate del documento - rispettando le condizioni delle precedenti sezioni 2 e 3, purché la versione modificata sia realizzata - seguendo scrupolosamente questa stessa licenza, con la versione modificata che svolga il ruolo - del "documento", così da - estendere la licenza sulla distribuzione e la modifica a chiunque ne - possieda una copia. Inoltre nelle versioni modificate si deve: - - - - - Usare nella pagina del titolo - (e nelle copertine se ce ne sono) un titolo diverso da quello del documento, e da quelli di versioni - precedenti (che devono essere elencati nella sezione storia del documento ove presenti). Si può - usare lo stesso titolo di una versione precedente se l'editore di quella - versione originale ne ha dato il permesso. - - - - - - Elencare nella pagina del - titolo, come autori, una o più persone o gruppi - responsabili in qualità di autori delle modifiche nella versione modificata, insieme ad almeno - cinque fra i principali autori del documento (tutti gli autori principali - se sono meno di cinque). - - - - - - Dichiarare nella pagina del titolo - il nome dell'editore della versione modificata in qualità - di editore. - - - - - - Conservare tutte le note sul copyright del documento originale. - - - - - - Aggiungere un'appropriata licenza per le modifiche di seguito - alle altre licenze sui copyright. - - - - - - Includere immediatamente dopo la nota di copyright, un avviso di licenza - che dia pubblicamente il permesso di usare la versione modificata nei termini di - questa licenza, nella forma mostrata nell'addendum alla fine di questo - testo. - - - - - - Preservare in questo avviso di licenza l'intera lista di sezioni non modificabili e testi copertina richieste come previsto - dalla licenza del documento. - - - - - - Includere una copia non modificata di questa licenza. - - - - - - Conservare la sezione intitolata "Storia", e il suo titolo, e aggiungere - a questa un elemento che riporti al minimo il titolo, l'anno, i nuovi - autori, e gli editori della versione - modificata come figurano nella pagina del titolo. Se non ci sono - sezioni intitolate "Storia" nel documento, createne una che riporti il - titolo, gli autori, gli editori del documento come figurano nella pagina del titolo, quindi aggiungete un - elemento che descriva la versione - modificata come detto in precedenza. - - - - - - Conservare l'indirizzo in rete riportato nel documento, se c'è, al fine del - pubblico accesso ad una copia trasparente, e possibilmente - l'indirizzo in rete per le precedenti versioni su cui ci si è - basati. Questi possono essere collocati nella sezione "Storia". Si - può omettere un indirizzo di rete per un'opera pubblicata almeno - quattro anni prima del documento - stesso, o se l'originario editore della versione cui ci si - riferisce ne dà il permesso. - - - - - - In ogni sezione di "Ringraziamenti" o "Dediche", si conservino il - titolo, il senso, il tono della sezione stessa. - - - - - - Si conservino inalterate le sezioni non - modificabili del documento, - nei propri testi e nei propri titoli. I numeri della sezione o - equivalenti non sono considerati parte del titolo della sezione. - - - - - - Si cancelli ogni sezione intitolata "Riconoscimenti". Solo questa sezione - può non essere inclusa nella versione modificata. - - - - - - Non si modifichi il titolo di sezioni esistenti come "miglioria" o per - creare confusione con i titoli di sezioni non modificabili. - - - - - - Se la versione modificata comprende - nuove sezioni di primaria importanza o appendici che ricadono in "sezioni secondarie", e non - contengono materiale copiato dal documento, si ha facoltà di - rendere non modificabili quante sezioni si voglia. Per fare ciò - si aggiunga il loro titolo alla lista delle sezioni immutabili nella nota di - copyright della versione - modificata. Questi titoli devono essere diversi dai titoli di - ogni altra sezione. - - - - Si può aggiungere una sezione intitolata "Riconoscimenti", a patto - che non contenga altro che le approvazioni alla versione modificata prodotte da vari - soggetti--per esempio, affermazioni di revisione o che il testo è - stato approvato da una organizzazione come la definizione normativa di uno - standard. - - - Si può aggiungere un brano fino a cinque parole come Testo Copertina, e un brano fino a 25 - parole come Testo di Retro - Copertina, alla fine dell'elenco dei Testi Copertina nella versione modificata. Solamente un brano - del Testo Copertina e uno del - Testo di Retro Copertina possono - essere aggiunti (anche con adattamenti) da ciascuna persona o - organizzazione. Se il documento - include già un testo copertina per la stessa copertina, - precedentemente aggiunto o adattato da voi o dalla stessa organizzazione - nel nome della quale si agisce, non se ne può aggiungere un altro, - ma si può rimpiazzare il vecchio ottenendo l'esplicita - autorizzazione dall'editore precedente che aveva aggiunto il testo - copertina. - - - L'autore/i e l'editore/i del "documento" non ottengono da questa - licenza il permesso di usare i propri nomi per pubblicizzare la - versione modificata o rivendicare l'approvazione di ogni versione modificata. - - - - - - 5. UNIONE DI DOCUMENTI - - - Si può unire il documento con - altri realizzati sotto questa licenza, seguendo i termini definiti nella - precedente sezione 4 per le - versioni modificate, a patto che si includa l'insieme di tutte le Sezioni Invarianti di tutti i documenti - originali, senza modifiche, e si elenchino tutte come Sezioni Invarianti della sintesi di - documenti nella licenza della stessa. - - - Nella sintesi è necessaria una sola copia di questa licenza, e - multiple sezioni invarianti possono - essere rimpiazzate da una singola copia se identiche. Se ci sono multiple - Sezioni Invarianti con lo stesso - nome ma contenuti differenti, si renda unico il titolo di ciascuna sezione - aggiungendovi alla fine e fra parentesi, il nome dell'autore o editore - della sezione, se noti, o altrimenti un numero distintivo. Si facciano gli - stessi aggiustamenti ai titoli delle sezioni nell'elenco delle Sezioni Invarianti nella nota di - copiright della sintesi. - - - Nella sintesi si devono unire le varie sezioni intitolate "storia" nei - vari documenti originali di partenza per formare una unica sezione - intitolata "storia"; allo stesso modo si unisca ogni sezione intitolata - "Ringraziamenti", e ogni sezione intitolata "Dediche". Si devono - eliminare tutte le sezioni intitolate "Riconoscimenti". - - - - - - 6. RACCOLTE DI DOCUMENTI - - - Si può produrre una raccolta che consista del documento e di altri - realizzati sotto questa licenza; e rimpiazzare le singole copie di questa - licenza nei vari documenti con una sola inclusa nella raccolta, solamente - se si seguono le regole fissate da questa licenza per le copie alla - lettera come se si applicassero a ciascun documento. - - - Si può estrarre un singolo documento da una raccolta e distribuirlo - individualmente sotto questa licenza, solo se si inserisce una copia di - questa licenza nel documento estratto e se si seguono tutte le altre - regole fissate da questa licenza per le copie alla lettera del documento. - - - - - - 7. RACCOGLIERE INSIEME A LAVORI INDIPENDENTI - - - Una raccolta del documento o sue derivazioni con altri documenti o lavori separati o - indipendenti, all'interno di o a formare un archivio o un supporto per la - distribuzione, non è una "versione - modificata" del documento - nella sua interezza, se non ci sono copiright per l'intera - raccolta. Ciascuna raccolta si chiama allora "aggregato" e questa licenza - non si applica agli altri lavori contenuti in essa che ne sono parte, per - il solo fatto di essere raccolti insieme, qualora non siano però - loro stessi lavori derivati dal documento. - - - Se le esigenze del Testo - Copertina della sezione - 3 sono applicabili a queste copie del documento allora, se il documento è inferiore ad un - quarto dell'intero aggregato i Testi Copertina del documento possono essere piazzati in - copertine che delimitano solo il documento all'interno - dell'aggregato. Altrimenti devono apparire nella copertina dell'intero - aggregato. - - - - - - 8. TRANSLATION - - - La traduzione è considerata un tipo di modifica, e di conseguenza - si possono distribuire traduzioni del documento seguendo i termini della sezione 4. Rimpiazzare sezioni non modificabili con traduzioni - richiede un particolare permesso da parte dei detentori del diritto d'autore, ma si - possono includere traduzioni di una o più sezioni non modificabili in aggiunta alle - versioni originali di queste sezioni immutabili. Si può fornire una - traduzione della presente licenza a patto che si includa anche l'originale - versione inglese di questa licenza. In caso di discordanza fra la - traduzione e l'originale inglese di questa licenza la versione originale - inglese prevale sempre. - - - - - - 9. TERMINI - - - Non si può applicare un'altra licenza al documento, copiarlo, modificarlo, o - distribuirlo al di fuori dei termini espressamente previsti da questa - licenza. Ogni altro tentativo di applicare un'altra licenza al documento, copiarlo, modificarlo, o - distribuirlo è deprecato e pone fine automaticamente ai diritti - previsti da questa licenza. Comunque, per quanti abbiano ricevuto copie o - abbiano diritti coperti da questa licenza, essi non ne cessano se si rimane - perfettamente coerenti con quanto previsto dalla stessa. - - - - - - 10. REVISIONI FUTURE DI QUESTA LICENZA - - - La Free Software - Foundation può pubblicare nuove, rivedute versioni - della Gnu Free Documentation License volta per volta. Qualche nuova - versione potrebbe essere simile nello spirito alla versione attuale ma - differire in dettagli per affrontare nuovi problemi e concetti. Si veda - http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. - - - Ad ogni versione della licenza viene dato un numero che distingue la - versione stessa. Se il documento - specifica che si riferisce ad una versione particolare della licenza - contraddistinta dal numero o "ogni versione successiva", si ha la - possibilità di seguire termini e condizioni sia della versione - specificata che di ogni versione successiva pubblicata (non come bozza) - dalla Free Software Foundation. Se il documento non specifica un numero di - versione particolare di questa licenza, si può scegliere ogni - versione pubblicata (non come bozza) dalla Free Software Foundation. - - - - - - Come usare questa licenza per i vostri documenti - - - Per applicare questa licenza ad un documento che si è scritto, si - includa una copia della licenza nel documento e si inserisca il seguente - avviso di copiright appena dopo la pagina del titolo: - - - Copyright (c)  ANNO  VOSTRO NOME. - - - È garantito il permesso di copiare, distribuire e/o modificare - questo documento seguendo i termini della GNU Free Documentation License, - Versione 1.1 o ogni versione successiva pubblicata dalla Free Software - Foundation; con le Sezioni Non - Modificabili ELENCARNE I TITOLI, con i Testi Copertina ELENCO, e con i Testi di Retro Copertina ELENCO. Una copia - della licenza è acclusa nella sezione intitolata GNU Free - Documentation License. - - - - Se non ci sono Sezioni non - Modificabili, si scriva "senza Sezioni non Modificabili" invece di - dire quali sono non modificabili. Se non c'è Testo Copertina, si scriva "nessun Testo - Copertina" invece di "il testo Copertina è ELENCO"; e allo stesso - modo si operi per il Testo di Retro - Copertina. - - - Se il vostro documento contiene esempi non banali di programma in codice - sorgente si raccomanda di realizzare gli esempi contemporaneamente - applicandovi anche una licenza di software libero di vostra scelta, come - ad esempio la GNU General Public - License, al fine di permetterne l'uso come software libero. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 57c82f4..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/fdl.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,636 +0,0 @@ - - GNU Free Documentation License - - Version 1.1, March 2000 - - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license - document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - 0. PREAMBLE - - - The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other - written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone - the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without - modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, - this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get - credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for - modifications made by others. - - - - This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative - works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It - complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft - license designed for free software. - - - - We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free - software, because free software needs free documentation: a free - program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the - software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it - can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or - whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License - principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. - - - - - 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS - - - This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a - notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed - under the terms of this License. The "Document" , below, refers to any such - manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is - addressed as "you". - - - - A "Modified Version" of the - Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, - either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into - another language. - - - - A "Secondary Section" is a named - appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the - relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to - related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within - that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of - mathematics, a Secondary Section - may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter - of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or - of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position - regarding them. - - - - The "Invariant Sections" are - certain Secondary Sections whose - titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - The "Cover Texts" are certain - short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that - says that the Document is released - under this License. - - - - A "Transparent" copy of the - Document means a machine-readable - copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the - general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and - straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of - pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available - drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or - for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input - to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup - has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by - readers is not Transparent. A - copy that is not "Transparent" - is called "Opaque". - - - - Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain - ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML - or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple - HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include - PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only - by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or - processing tools are not generally available, and the - machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output - purposes only. - - - - The "Title Page" means, for a - printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are - needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear - in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title - page as such, "Title Page" - means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, - preceding the beginning of the body of the text. - - - - - - 2. VERBATIM COPYING - - - You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either - commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the - copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies - to the Document are reproduced in - all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those - of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or - control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or - distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for - copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must - also follow the conditions in section - 3. - - - - You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and - you may publicly display copies. - - - - - - 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY - - - If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and - the Document's license notice - requires Cover Texts, you must - enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all - these Cover Texts: Front-Cover - Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both - covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of - these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all - words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other - material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to - the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, - can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. - - - - If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit - legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit - reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent - pages. - - - - If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you - must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each - Opaque copy, or state in or - with each Opaque copy a - publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete - Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which - the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at - no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the - latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin - distribution of Opaque copies - in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus - accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the - last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your - agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. - - - - It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the - Document well before - redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to - provide you with an updated version of the Document. - - - - - - 4. MODIFICATIONS - - - You may copy and distribute a Modified - Version of the Document - under the conditions of sections 2 - and 3 above, provided that you - release the Modified Version under - precisely this License, with the Modified - Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution - and modification of the Modified - Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you - must do these things in the Modified - Version: - - - - - - Use in the Title Page (and - on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of - previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in - the History section of the Document). You may use the same - title as a previous version if the original publisher of that - version gives permission. - - - - - - List on the Title Page, as - authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for - authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at - least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal - authors, if it has less than five). - - - - - - State on the Title Page - the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the - publisher. - - - - - - Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. - - - - - - Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications - adjacent to the other copyright notices. - - - - - - Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license - notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms - of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. - - - - - - Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required - Cover Texts given in the - Document's license notice. - - - - - - Include an unaltered copy of this License. - - - - - - Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add - to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and - publisher of the Modified Version - as given on the Title - Page. If there is no section entitled "History" in the - Document, create one stating - the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item - describing the Modified - Version as stated in the previous sentence. - - - - - - Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a - Transparent copy of the - Document, and likewise the - network locations given in the Document for previous versions it - was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. You - may omit a network location for a work that was published at - least four years before the Document itself, or if the - original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. - - - - - - In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", - preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all - the substance and tone of each of the contributor - acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. - - - - - - Preserve all the Invariant - Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text - and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not - considered part of the section titles. - - - - - - Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may - not be included in the Modified - Version. - - - - - - Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to - conflict in title with any Invariant Section. - - - - - - If the Modified Version includes - new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no - material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate - some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their - titles to the list of Invariant - Sections in the Modified - Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from - any other section titles. - - - - You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains - nothing but endorsements of your Modified - Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer - review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the - authoritative definition of a standard. - - - - You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up - to 25 words as a Back-Cover - Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of - Front-Cover Text and one of - Back-Cover Text may be added by - (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text - for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by - the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; - but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the - previous publisher that added the old one. - - - - The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give - permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply - endorsement of any Modified Version - . - - - - - - 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS - - - You may combine the Document with - other documents released under this License, under the terms defined - in section 4 above for modified - versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the - Invariant Sections of all of the - original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined - work in its license notice. - - - - The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and - multiple identical Invariant - Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are - multiple Invariant Sections with - the same name but different contents, make the title of each such - section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of - the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a - unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the - list of Invariant Sections in the - license notice of the combined work. - - - - In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" - in the various original documents, forming one section entitled - "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", - and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections - entitled "Endorsements." - - - - - - 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS - - - You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released - under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License - in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the - collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for - verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. - - - - You may extract a single document from such a collection, and - distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a - copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this - License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that - document. - - - - - - 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS - - - A compilation of the Document or - its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or - works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not - as a whole count as a Modified - Version of the Document, - provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. - Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this License does not - apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being - thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the - Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies - of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the - entire aggregate, the Document's - Cover Texts may be placed on - covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise - they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. - - - - - - 8. TRANSLATION - - - Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may - distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations - requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may - include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the - original versions of these Invariant - Sections. You may include a translation of this License - provided that you also include the original English version of this - License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the - original English version of this License, the original English version - will prevail. - - - - - - 9. TERMINATION - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided - for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense - or distribute the Document is - void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this - License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from - you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long - as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - - 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE - - - The Free - Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the - GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions - will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in - detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. - - - - Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version - number. If the Document specifies - that a particular numbered version of this License "or any later - version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and - conditions either of that specified version or of any later version - that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Document does - not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software - Foundation. - - - - - - Addendum - - - To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of - the License in the document and put the following copyright and - license notices just after the title page: - - - - Copyright © YEAR YOUR NAME. - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or - any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the - Invariant Sections being LIST - THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover - Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy - of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free - Documentation License. - - - - If you have no Invariant - Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" instead of saying - which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write "no - Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise - for Back-Cover Texts. - - - - If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we - recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of - free software license, such as the GNU General Public - License, to permit their use in free software. - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gmenu.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gmenu.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2ad68ff..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gmenu.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - - - - Modificare il Menu Principale - - Introduzione - - - Menu Principale - modifica - - Il Menu Principale è il contenitore delle vostre applicazioni e si trova nel - pannello. Il Menu Principale è predefinto con GNOME ma può essere - personalizzato per adattarsi alle vostre esigenze. Il Menu Principale è - spezzato in tre principali sezioni: Programmi (Menu di sistema), Preferiti - (Menu dell'utente) e Applets (Applicazioni del pannello). L'Editor dei Menu è - a vostra disposizione per aggiungere nuove applicazioni al Menu Principale ma - non vi è permesso aggiungere applicazioni al Menu di sitstema se non avete i - permessi di amministratore (utente root). In questa sezione imparerete come - aggiungere applicazione al vostro Menu Principale. - - - Usare l'Editor dei Menu - - L'Editor dei Menu è uno strumento di configurazione per il Menu - Principale. L'Editor dei Menu si avvia cliccando la voce - ImpostazioniEditor dei - menu dal Menu Principale. - -
- L'Editor dei Menu - - L'Editor dei Menu - - - -
- - - L'Editor dei Menu è suddiviso in due sezioni principali. Il lato sinistro - contiene il menu nel suo stato predefinito. Il lato destro contiene un - dialogo che vi permette di aggiungere nuove applicazioni al menu. - - - Sul lato sinistro noterete all'interno dell'albero del menu che sono - elencati due liste di menu, una per i Preferiti (menu utente) e una per i - Programmi (menu di sistema). I Menu Utenti sono esclusivi dell'utente - corrente mentre il Menu di Sistema è uguale per tutti gli utenti del - calcolatore. Le voce del menu predefinite si trovano tutte le Menu di - Sistema. - - - All'interno della lista dei menu sul lato sinistro è possibile aprire e - chiudere le cartelle e vedere cosa è contenuto nel menu corrente cliccando - sul piccolo segno di addizione accanto a questo. - - - - Aggiungere una nuova voce al Menu - - - Menu Principale - Aggiungere una nuova voce al Menu - - Se desiderate aggiungere una nuova voce del menu premete il pulsante - Nuovo Elemento, presente sulla barra degli - strumenti. Una nuova voce di menu verrà aggiunta al menu correntemente - selezionato. Se non avete selezionato un menu, questa nuova voce verrà - posizionata in testa all'albero del menu. Selezionate il nuovo elemento e - digitate le informazioni per questo nel dialogo presente nella parte destra - della finestra. Una volta inserite tutte le informazioni necessarie, premete - il pulsante Salva e la nuova voce verrà inserita - nella parte sinistra della finestra. È possibile spostare verso l'alto o - verso il basso questa nuova voce premendo gli appositi pulsanti presenti - sulla barra degli strumenti. È inoltre possibile spostare le voci del menu - trascinandole con l'uso del mouse. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Tenete bene in mente che non è possibile cambiare il menu di sistema a meno - che non siete loggato sul sistema come utente - root. Gli utenti ordinari possono aggiungere, - cancellare e modificare il Menu Utente. - - - - - Drag and Drop nel Menu Principale - - All'interno dell'Editor dei Menu - L'Editor dei Menu supporta le - funzionalità di drag and drop, che semplificheranno, se utilizzate, il - vostro lavoro. È possibile trascinare applicazioni nelle cartelle che - desiderate, o riorganizzare completamente il contenuto di queste. - - - Verso il pannello - Se desiderate posizionare una voce del menu nel - pannello, è possibile trascinare la voce dal menu sul pannello, dove verrà - convertita in un pulsante di avvio con tutte le impostazioni - appropriatamente configurate. Se preferite non utilizzare il drag and drop è - possibile cliccare con il tasto destro del mouse sulla voce del menu e - selezionare la voce Aggiungi questo pulsante di avvio al - pannello dal menu a tendina. - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide-it.omf b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide-it.omf deleted file mode 100644 index 0e42930..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide-it.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Guida Utente di GNOME - - - GNOME|Core Desktop - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 987f54a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnome-users-guide.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -]> - - - - - - Guida Utente di GNOME - - - Team della - Guida Utente di GNOME - - - - - - - Questa e' la release 1.4.0-1 ufficiale della Guida Utente di GNOME. - - - - - - 1.0 - - - 12 Marzo 2001 - - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Eazel Inc., - Helix Code, Inc., - Red Hat, Inc., - Szabolcs (Shooby) Ban, - Eric Baudais, - James Cope, - John Ellis, - John Fleck, - Tom Gilbert, - Kenny Graunke, - Telsa Gwynne, - Michael Hall, - Vera Horiuchi, - Alexander Kirillov, - Emese Kovacs, - Gregory Leblanc, - Chris Lyttle, - Oliver Maruhn, - David Mason, - Dan Mueth, - Spiros Papadimitriou, - Arjan Scherpenisse, - Aaron Weber, - David A. Wheeler - - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, - no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license - can be found here. - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and - services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any - GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members - of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps - or initial caps. - - - - - - - -&WHEELER; - -&WM; - - - -&GMENU; - -&DESKTOP; - - - -&GNOMECC; - -&GNOME-APPLETS; - -&NEWBIES; - -&AUTHORS; - -&FDL; - -&FDLITALIAN; - -&GPL; - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnomecc.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnomecc.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c4d5d2a..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gnomecc.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1578 +0,0 @@ - - GNOME Control Center - - Introduzione - - Il Gnome Control Center vi permette di configurare - diversi aspetti del vostro sistema utilizzando una serie di strumenti - chiamati capplets. Queste possono essere associate con il - nucleo principale delle applicazioni Gnome o ad altre applicazioni per le - quali gli sviluppatori hanno scritto delle capplets. - - - Il vostro Control Center può contenere - più capplets di quelle documentate qui a seconda del numero di - applicazioni installate nel vostro sistema. - - - Control Center è parte dell'ambiente - desktop Gnome; è situato nel pacchetto - control-center. Questo manuale descrive la versione 1.4 - del Control Center. - - - È possibile avviare il Control Center in tre - modi. Per lanciare il Control Center senza alcuna - particolare capplet attivata selezionate Control - Center dal menu Impostazioni dentro il - Menu Principale o digitando il comando - gnomecc al prompt dei comandi. - - - Se conoscete quale capplet desiderate utilizzare, è possibile avviarla - selezionando la voce corretta dal menu Impostazioni. - - - - - - Usare il Control Center - - Il Control Center è diviso in due - sezioni principali, il menu delle capplets configurabili sulla - sinistra e lo spazio di lavoro principale sulla destra. - Nel menu le capplets sono raggruppate per sezioni, come - Desktop, Multimedia, ecc. Ognuna di - queste sezioni è discussa in dettaglio più avanti. Come per ogni menu di - questo tipo potete collassare l'intera sezione cliccando sul - piccolo tringolino a sinistra del titolo della sezione. Per espandere una - sezione collassata, cliccate nuovamente sul triangolino. - - - Lavorare con il Control Center richiede - semplicemente che voi selezioniate una capplet dal menu sulla sinistra e ci - clicchiate sopra. Fatto questo, lo spazio di lavoro cambierà, permettendovi - di configurare l'oggetto. - - - Dopo avere fatto i vostri cambiamenti alla configurazione, - potete premere il pulsante OK per confermare i - cambiamenti o Annulla per ripristinare la precedente - configurazione. Se volete testare la nuova configurazione prima di decidere, - premete il pulsante Prova; questo applicherà la nuova - configurazione in modo da vedere come apparirà, ma ricorderà anche la vecchia - configurazione. Dopo avere provato le nuove configurazioni, potete premere il - pulsante OK per renderle permanenti, o premere - Ripristina per ritornare alla vecchia configurazione. - - - - - - - Desktop - - La sezione Desktop controlla le impostazioni più visibili del - vostro ambiente Gnome. - - - Capplet Proprietà dello Sfondo - - - Gnome Control Center - Desktop - - Le proprietà del vostro sfondo possono essere impostate qui - selezionando un colore o un'immagine. Se selezoinate un colore - avrete l'opzione di averne uno Uniforme, - a Sfumatura Orizzontale (il colore cambia - gradatamente da sinistra a destra) oppure a Sfumatura - Verticale (il colore cambia dall'alto verso il basso). - Per gli sfondi a sfumatura, dovete selezionare due colori: - primario e secondario. - - - Se decidete di avere un immagine sullo sfondo potete sfogliare - le vostre cartelle per trovare l'immagine che desiderate utilizzare. - Una volta trovata dovete decidete se desiderate avere l'immagine - ripetuta sullo schermo (affiancata), centrata, ridimensionata ma - mantenendo le proporzioni, o semplicemente ridimensionata in - modo da occupare tutto lo schermo. Una volta cambiate le - proprietà del vostro sfondo potete premere il pulsante - Prova nella parte bassa del Control - Center per visualizzare la modifica. - - - Se desiderate utilizzare altri metodi per impostare il vostro sfondo - potete disabilitare questa capplet deselezionando la checkbox - Utilizza GNOME per impostare lo sfondo. -
- Capplet Proprietà dello Sfondo - - Capplet Proprietà dello Sfondo - - - -
- - - - - Proprietà globali del pannello - - Questa capplet è fornita dal Pannello di Gnome ed è documentata nel - Manuale del Pannello - - - - - La Capplet Salvaschermo - - - Gnome Control Center - Salvaschermo - - In questa capplet è possibile cambiare le proprietà del vostro - salvaschermo. Questa capplet contiene una lista di salvaschermi - disponibili tra i quali scegliere e uno schermo di anteprima. - Sotto queste due finestre di dialogo è possibile vedere una serie di - strumenti che vi permettono di cambiare le impostazioni globali - del salvaschermo. Se il salvaschermo che selezionate ha particolari - impostazioni è possibile cambiarle premendo il pulsante - Impostazioni che appare sotto la lista dei - salvaschermi. - - - Impostazioni globali del salvaschermo — - In questa sezione della capplet è possibile cambiare le proprietà del - tempo, della password e della gestione dell'energia. È possibile decidere quanto - tempo deve passare prima che il salvaschermo parta digitando il - numero di minuti nella casella di testo Avvia - dopo. Se desiderate che vi sia richiesta una password per - sbloccare il salvaschermo cliccate il pulsante Richiedi - Password. La password utilizzata è la stessa del vostro - account. - - - Avete anche la possibilità di usare la gestione dell'energia — se - il vostro monitor lo supporta. È possibile impostare quanto tempo debba - aspettare prima che il monitor si spenga scrivendo il tempo in - minuti nella casella di testo Spegni il monitor. -
- Capplet Proprietà Salvaschermo - - Capplet Proprietà Salvaschermo - - - -
- - - - Selettore Temi - - - Gnome Control Center - Selettore Temi - - La capplet Selettore Temi vi permette di scegliere quale tema - GTK desiderate utilizzare. - - - I temi GTK sono una serie di impostazioni che definiscono - l'aspetto e il funzionamento di alcuni elementi dell'interfaccia - grafica come i pulsanti, i menu, le barre di scorrimento, ecc. - di tutte le applicazioni Gnome (e più in generale di tutte le - applicazioni che usano il GIMP Toolkit (GTK), da cui il nome). - - - Per cambiare il vostro tema GTK selezionate un tema dalla lista dei - Temi disponibili nella parte sinistra dello - spazio di lavoro principale. Se avete Anteprima - Automatica selezionata, potrete vedere come appare - il tema scelto nella finestra di anteprima che c'è sotto. - Tenete in conto che la finestra di anteprima è viva: - è possibile cliccare su un pulsante, inserire del testo nella - casella di testo di esempio, ecc. Se vi piace il tema, premete il - pulsante Prova nella parte bassa di - Gnome Control Center per installarlo. - - - Ci sono alcuni temi GTK precaricati con Gnome quando lo installate. - Se desiderate avere più temi è possibile cercare su internet presso siti - come quello dei Temi - GTK. Trovato e scaricato il tema che vi piace, premete il - pulsante Installa nuovo tema. Questo - avvierà un selettore di file che vi permetterà di selezionare il tema - appena scaricato. I file dei temi dovrebbero esere in formato - tar.gz o .tgz (altrimenti - noto come tarball). Una volta trovato questo file - premete OK e Gnome installerà il tema nella - directory appropriata (~/.themes) - automaticamente. Ora è possibile guardare tra la lista dei Temi - disponibili per trovare il tema appena installato. - - -
- Capplet Selettore Temi - - Capplet Selettore Temi - - - -
- - - Se desiderate cambiare il font utilizzato nel tema corrente, è possibile - farlo selezionando l'opzione Usa font - personalizzato e cliccando sul pulsante dei font sotto - di essa. Questo farà apparire la finestra di dialogo del selettore - dei font che vi permetterà di specificare il font, il suo stile e - la dimensione. - - - Capplet Window Manager - - - Gnome Control Center - Window Manager"Window - Manager" - - Poichè Gnome è indipendente dai Window Manager questa capplet vi - permette di scegliere quale window manager desiderate utilizzare. La capplet - Window Manager mostra unicamente gli window manager Gnome-compliant; - se desiderate utilizzare altri window manager, dovete aggiungerlo nella - capplet Window Manager. - -
- Capplet Window Manager - - Capplet Window Manager - - - -
- - La capplet Window Manager contiene una lista dei window manager che - è possibile utilizzare. Il vostro window manager corrente verrà indicato - con l'etichetta Corrente. - - - Se desiderate aggiungere un nuovo window manager alla lista, è possibile - premere il pulsante Aggiungi. Questo - lancerà la finestra di dialogo Aggiungi un altro Window - Manager. - -
- Aggiungi un altro Window Manager - - Aggiungi un altro Window Manager - - - -
- - Nella finestra di dialogo Aggiungi un altro Window - Manager è possibile specificare il nome che desiderate dare - al window manager, il comando per lanciare tale window manager, - e il comando per lanciare lo strumento di configurazione che può - essere disponibile per quel window manager. - - - Se siete certi che questo window manager sia completamente Gnome - compliant e supporta il controllo di sessione è possibile selezionare - la checkbox Il window manager supporta il controllo di - sessione. Se non siete sicuri dovreste leggere la - documentazione del vostro window manager. - - - Premete OK quando avete finito. - - - Quando avrete aggiunto il nuovo window manager lo vedrete apparire - nella lista dei window manager. Se avete bisogno di cambiare una - qualsiasi delle proprietà che avete impostato nella finestra di - dialogo Aggiungi un altro Window Manager - è possibile selezionare con il mouse il window manager dalla lista e premere - il pulsante Impostazioni. - - - È possibile anche cancellare un qualsiasi window manager selezionandolo - dalla lista e premendo il pulsante Rimuovi. - - - Se siete pronti per eseguire il nuovo window manager, è possibile - selezionare quello che desiderate eseguire dalla lista e premere - il pulsante Prova. Se desiderate lanciare - lo strumento di configurazione, assicuratevi che il window manager - che desiderate configurare sia selezionato e premete il pulsante - Avvia configurazione di [nome window manager]. - - - - - - - - - Document Handlers - - La sezione Document Handlers di Gnome Control - Center vi permette di cambiare il modo in cui - certi tipi di file sono visualizzati, modificati o manipolati. - - - Impostazione Editor - - - Gnome Control Center - Impostazione Editor - - La Capplet Impostazione Editor vi permette di scegliere quale - sarà l'editor preferito mentre usate Gnome. Questo permette - alle applicazioone tipo il Gnome File Manager di eseguire il - corretto editor quando cercate di aprire un file editabile. - Tutti i più popolari editor sono inclusi nella lista di selezione. - -
- La Capplet Impostazione Editor - - La Capplet Impostazione Editor - - - -
- - - - Gestori URL - - La Capplet Gestori URL vi permette di determinare quale browser utilizzare - per i vari tipi di URL. URL o Uniform Resource Locators sono gli - indirizzi utilizzati per trovare certi documenti o - file. Quando scrivete un indirizzo internet in un browser, state usando una - URL. I tipi di URL predefiniti sono: - - - - Default - - - - Default &mdash questa è una URL che non - è stata definita in nessun altro modo. Per esempio una pagina - web. - - - - - - ghelp - - - Questo tipo di URL è utilizzato per tutta la documentazione Gnome. - Normalmente questo è gestito da Nautilus (Gnome file manager - e help browser) ma è possibile decidere di vedere questi files con - un altro browser. - - - - - - info - - - Questo tipo di URL è usato per la documentazione in formato - info. Nautilus può visualizzare questi documenti ma voi è - possibile decidere di utilizzare un'altra applicazione per vederli. - - - - - - man - - - Questa URL è utilizzata per le cosiddette man - pages, un formato di documentazione standard per - gli strumenti a riga di comando. Nautilus è in grado di - mostrare questi documenti ma è possibile scegliere di vederli con - un'altra applicazione. - - - - - - Per cambiare il browser preferito per ognuna di questi tipi - di URL semplicemente cambiate browser nella casella di testo - gestore nella parte alta della Capplet e - premete il pulsante Imposta. Se desiderate - rimuovere il gestore di URL premete il pulsante - Rimuovi. - -
- La Capplet Gestori URL - - La Capplet Gestori URL - - - -
- - - - - - - - Tipi MIME - - Questa capplet vi permette di configurare come i vari tipi di file - vanno trattati. I tipi di file (precedentemente chiamati tipi MIME) - descrivono quale tipo di dati e in quale formato il file contiene. - Per ogni tipo di file, è possibile impostare quale icona deve essere - usata dal File Manager, l'applicazione preferita che deve essere - usata per aprire i file di questo tipo, ecc. Per esempio il tipo - di file image/jpeg è usato per i file di - immagini in formato JPEG; normalmente, queste - sono aperte usando il visualizzatore integrato nel File Manager. - - - - Visualizzare i tipi di file disponibili - - La cpplet Tipi di file mostra tutti i tipi di file attualmente - noti a Gnome. Per ogni tipo di file, mostra una breve descrizione - (es: PDF document), il nome del tipo di file - (es: application/pdf), ecc. Cliccando su un - tipo di file nella lista, vi verranno mostrate più informazioni - su di esso, ovvero: - - - - Breve descrizione (es: PDF document) - - - - - Nome ufficiale del tipo di file, o tipo MIME - (es: application/pdf). Questi nomi - devono essere nella forma tipo/sottotipo, - dove tipo descrive un tipo generale di - dati (immagini, testo, audio, video o applicazione) e - sottotipo da una completa specifica. - - - - - Icona che deve essere utilizzata dal File Manager per mostrare - questo tipo di file. - - - - - Azione predefinita che deve essere svolta quando si clicca su - un file dentro una finestra del File Manager. - Ci sono due possibili tipi di azione predefinita: visualizzare - il file utilizzando uno dei visualizzatori - interni del File Manager o aprire il file utilizzando - un'applicazione esterna. Nei fatti, è possibile avere un'intera - lista di applicazioni che possono essere usate per aprire - il file. Ona di queste sarà quella utilizzata in automatico - quando cliccate su un file; le altre saranno incluses in un - menu pop-up (per aprire il menu pop-up cliccate sul file, - dentro la finestra del File Manager, con il tasto destro - del mouse e selezionate Apri con). - - - - - Estensioni: queste sono utilizzate dal File Manager e altre - applicazioni Gnome per determinare il tipo di file di un - certo file. Il metodo più comune e facile di farlo è - testando l'estensione del file: per esempio, l'estensione - pdf è utilizzata per i tipi di file - application/pdf. - - - - - NOTA PER GLI UTENTI ESPERTI - - In realtà, il File Manager di Gnome può utilizzare anche - metodi più elaborati per determinare il tipo di file che - semplicemente testare l'estensione. Gli utenti esperti che - vogliono conoscere qualcosa in più, possono vedere il file - PREFIX/mime-info/gnome-vfs.mime, dove - PREFIX=/usr/share o - /usr/local/share a seconda della vostra - configurazione di sistema. - - - - - Modificare un tipo di file - - La cosa più comune che si fa quando si modifica un tipo di file è - cambiare l'azione predefinita associata a un tipo di file. - Per farlo: - - - - - Cliccate sul tipo di file nella lista. - - - - - Selezionate il tipo di azione predefinita - (Usa visualizzatore o Apri - con l'applicazione) - - - - - Selezionate l'applicazione/il visualizzatore che desiderate - sia impostato come predefinito dalla lista drop-down. - Se non riuscite a vedere l'applicazione che desiderate nella - lista, cliccate sul pulsante Modifica Lista. - Questo vi mostrerà la lista di tutte le applicazioni - attualmente incluse nel menu pop-up per questo tipo di file. - Ora cliccate sul pulsante Aggiungi - applicazione e inserite il nome dell'applicazione - (es: Gnome PS viewer) e il comando - usato per lanciarla (es: ggv). - - - - - - È possibile anche cambiare altre proprietà di un tipo di file: - - - - - Per cambiare l'icona usata per un tipo di file, cliccate - sul pulsante Cambia icona. - - - - - Per cambiare la descrizione del tipo di file, basta semplicemente - cliccare dentro il campo di testo contenente la descrizione - e modificarla. - - - - - Per editare una lista di estensioni associate con un tipo di file - cliccate sul pulsante Cambia estensione file. - Questo vi mostrerà una finestra con una lista di estensioni - attualmente associate a questo tipo di file. Per rimuovere - un'estensione dalla lista, selezionatela con il mouse e poi - cliccate il pulsante Rimuovi. Per - aggiungere una nuova estensione, cliccate sul pulsante - Aggiungi e inserite l'estensione nella - finetra di dialogo che vi apparirà. Non scrivete il punto - iniale: se desiderate aggiungere l'estensione pdf, - dovrete inserire pdf e non - .pdf. - - - - - Per modificare la lista delle applicazioni associate ad un tipo - di file (queste applicazioni appaiono nel menu quando cliccate - con il tasto destro su un file di questo tipo nel File Manager e - selezionate Apri con), cliccate sul - pulsante Modifica Lista. Questo vi - mostrerà la lista delle applicazioni associate a quasto tipo - di file. È possibile rimuovere qualsiasi applicazione della lista, - modoficarne una esistente (questo vi permette di cambiare il - nome con il quale l'applicazione appare nel menu e il comando - utilizzato per lanciarla), o aggiungerne una nuova. Invece di - rimuovere un'applicazione dalla lista è possibile anche disabilitarla - temporaneamente.una applicazione disabilitata non verrà mostrata - nel menu per questo tipo di file. - - - - - - Aggiungere e rimuovere tipi di file. - - Per rimuovere un tipo di file, selezionatelo nella lista dei - tipi di file e premete il pulsante Rimuovi questo - tipo MIME. Per aggiungere un nuovo tipo di file, - premete il pulsante Aggiungi un nuovo tipo - MIME. Vi verrà richiesto di inserire il nome del - tipo di file e la sua descrizione. E' fortemente consigliato - seguire gli standard MIME: il nome del tipo di file dovrebbe - essere nella forma tipo/sottotipo, - dove tipo è uno dei seguenti tipi - standard: text, - audio, image, - video oppure - application (l'ultimo dovrebbe essere - utilizzato se nessuno degli altri quattro si addice). - - - Dopo aver inserito il nome del tipo di file e la descrizione, - il nuovo tipo di file viene aggiunto alla lista. - Ora è possibile selezionarlo dalla lista e aggiungere un'icona, - l'estensione del file e un'azione predefinita per il file - come descritoo in . - - - - - - Ripristinare le impostazioni di sistema originali - - Se voi (o qualcun'altro) fate qualcosa di sbagliato in questa - capplet, è possibile eliminare tutte le modifiche e ripristinare - i valori di sistema originali per tutte le impostazioni - controllate da questa capplet (cioè: tipi di file, azioni - predefinite, icone, ecc.). Per farlo, cliccate sul pulsante - Ripristina impostazioni originali. - E' da notare che questa operazione eliminerà tutte le vostre - modifiche; non è possibile tornare indietro dopo questa operazione. - - - - - - - - - - Launch feedback - - Questa capplet vi permette di configurare il launch feedback - delle applicazioni, cioè un indicatore che vi avvisa che - un'applicazione è in caricamento. Questi indicatori, che possono - prendere diverse forme (cioè, l'icona di una clessidra a fianco del - puntatore del mouse o una stella pulsante) appaiono nel momento - in cui cliccate sul pulsante di lancio di un'applicazione o la - selezionate dal menu e rimanete in attesa sul menu finchè - l'applicazione non parte o passa un determinato lasso di tempo. - Questi indicatori possono essere molto comodi in caso che - l'applicazione ci metta molto tempo a partire: senza di essi, non - potreste sapere se l'applicazione ci stà semplicemente mettendo - molto tempo a partire o qualcosa è andato storto (es: l'applicazione - è andata in crash in partenza oppure non avete cliccato per - niente sul pulsante). - -
- The Launch Feedback capplet - - The Launch Feedback capplet - - - -
- - - Indicatori abilitati - - - In questa sezione è possibile selezionare quali indicatori di lancio - abilitare. È possibile sceglierne più di uno; è possibile anche disabilitarli - tutti se lo desiderate. - - - - Tasklist (invisible window) - - - This is the default selection. This option adds to the - list of windows in your taskbar the window with the name - of the application being started and with hourglass icon - next to it. (This will only work if your taskbar is - configured to show normal. i.e. non-iconified - applications.) - - - - - Hourglass mouse cursor - - - This option will put an hourglass icon next to the mouse - cursor. It doesn't affect mouse opertaions: you can still - use the mouse for clicking and dragging. - - - - - Splashscreen - - - This option puts a small window saying Starting - (Application Name) in the middle of your screen - - - - - Animated star - - - This option put a small yellow blinking star in the upper - left corner of your screen. - - - - - - - - Miscellaneous - - - Timeout - - This parameter specifies maximal time the - indicators can be on; after this, the indicators will - disappear even if the application has not yet started. - - - - - Do not distinguish between windows - (compatibility mode) - - This option controls the behavior of the indicators when - you are launching several applications simultaneosly (or - in quick succession). Since this is not a very common - situation, new users may skip this section. - - - If this section is disabled (which is the default), the - indicators will track each of the applications you are - launching separately, and the indicators will stay on - until all the applications have started. This is - the right thing to do. Unfortunately, in - some (rare) cases it can also cause problems, sometimes - even leading to system crash. In such situations, you - should enable this option. - - - If this option is enabled, the indicators will work - in a more primitive (but safer) way. Namely, they will - go away as soon as the first of the applications you are - launching starts. - - - - - - - - - - - Multimedia - - La capplet Multimedia fornisce il controllo sull'audio e altre - funzioni multimediali di Gnome. - - - Audio - - La capplet Audio vi permette di impostare i suoni di sistema - per la vostra sessione - Gnome. Contiene due etichette, Impostazioni - generali e Eventi sonori. - - - Impostazioni generali - A questo punto - avete due opzioni tra cui scegliere, abilitare i suoni per - Gnome e per gli eventi. Se selezionate Abilita avvio - del server audio sarete sicuri che il motore audio - di Gnome (ESD) verrà avviato quando fate partire Gnome. ESD è - usato da tutte le applicazioni Gnome che producono suoni, così - se desiderate sentire un qualsiasi suono dalle applicazioni Gnome - dovete abilitare questa opzione. - - - NOTE - - Alcune applicazioni non-Gnome non funzionano bene con ESD. - Perciò se non sentite suoni dal vostro gioco preferito - xgalaga o vi compare un messaggio - di errore del tipo Device /dev/dsp busy, - dovreste sospendere temporaneamante ESD. È possibile farlo utilizzando - l'applet Sound Monitor. - - - - Suoni per eventi abiliterà l'uso dei - suoni per accompagnare alcuni eventi, come - la chiusura di una finestra o un messaggio di errore. - È possibile selezionare i suoni associati ai vari eventi nella - sezione Eventi Sonori. Con queste due - opzioni attivate Gnome ricorderà i vostri settaggi audio - quando entrate o uscite da Gnome. - -
- La Capplet Audio - - La Capplet Audio - - - -
- - Etichetta Eventi sonori - Questa sezione - vi permette di controllare i suoni emessi da vari programmi - ed eventi in Gnome. - - - Per cambiare il suono associato ad un evento Gnome, selezionate - l'evento dalla lista gerarchica sulla sinistra e premete il - pulsante Sfoglia per trovare un file sonoro - nel vostro sistema (il file deve essere in formato - wav). Premete il pulsante - Suona per provare il suono. - -
- La Capplet Audio - - La Capplet Audio - - - -
- - - - - - - Periferiche - - - Gnome Control Center - Periferiche - - Le Capplet in questa sezione del Control Center vi aiuteranno - a configurare dispositivi quali la tastiera e il mouse. Potreste - avere anche altre dispositivi periferici oltre a quelli per i - quali è disponibile una capplet per Gnome Control Center. - Fate riferimento alla documentazione fornita con ogni - altra capplet di perferica doveste avere. - - - La Capplet Proprietà della Tastiera - - - Gnome Control Center - Tastiera - - Ci sono attualmente tre opzioni per la tastiera in questa capplet. - È possibile cambiare le proprietà di Auto-ripetizione, - il Suono della tastiera e il Segnale - acustico. - - - Auto-ripetizione vi permette ti tenere premuto - un tasto sulla tastiera e far sì che esso sia continuamente ripetuto - alla velocità e con il ritardo definiti in questa capplet. - - - Suono della tastiera abilita il suono di un - piccolo click ad ogni presione di un tasto. Se abilitato è possibile - cambiare il volume a vostro gusto. - - - La sezione Segnale acustico vi permette di - cambiare il suono che viene prodotto dal vostro CPU speaker quando - un messaggio di errore di tastiera viene inviato. - - - Volume cambia il volume del suono. - - - La barra della frequenza, cambia la frequenza della nota suonata. - Normalmente e impostata a 440Hz, o il La appena sopra il Do medio. - - - Durata cambia la durata del suono. - - - Il pulsante Prova vi permette di ascoltare - l'impostazione corrente del segnale acustico della tastiera. - -
- La Capplet Proprietà di Tastiera - - La Capplet Proprietà di Tastiera - - - -
- - - La Capplet Proprietà del Mouse - - - Gnome Control Center - Mouse - - La capplet Proprietà del Mouse vi permette di cambiare tra - tasti per Mancino o Destro e di definire le proprietà di - Accelerazione e Soglia. - - - L'impostazione Accelerazione vi permette di - cambiare la velocità con la quale il mouse si muove sullo schermo - in relazione alla velocità con cui esso si muove sul tappettino - del mouse. L'impostazione Soglia vi permette - di impostare la velocità alla quale dovete muovere il mouse - prima che abbia effetto l'accelerazione definita nell'opzione - Accelerazione. -
- La Capplet Proprietà del Mouse - - La Capplet Proprietà del Mouse - - - -
- - - - - - - - - Sessione - - Il gruppo Sessione vi fornisce la possibilità di controllare - varie cose che accadono dalla partenza della vostra sessione - Gnome. Questi comprendono opzioni di sessione, partenza automatica - dei programmi all'avvio e suggerimenti all'avvio. - - - Suggerimenti - - I suggerimenti sono brevi messaggi mostrati quando fate login; - essi contengono aiuti sull'uso di Gnome e altre piccole - informazioni che vi possono essere utili. Questa capplet vi - permette di configurare questi suggerimenti. - - - L'opzione Abilita i suggerimenti al login - vi permette di abilitare e disabilitare i suggerimenti - - - L'opzione Mostra i suggerimenti normali - mostrerà un gruppo di aiuti su come usare Gnome. Questa è una - buona scelta per nuovi utenti. - - - L'opzione Mostra i fortune invece che i - suggerimenti vi permette di usare l'applicazione - fortune che mostra vari detti e - fortunes. Fate riferimento alla documentazione di - fortune per la configurazione. - - - La checkbox Mostra il messaggio del giorno invece dei - suggerimenti vi mostrerà il messaggio del giorno al - posto dei suggerimenti. La casella di testo Nome del - file per i messaggi del giorno vi permette di selezionare - il file di testo che sarà utilizzato come messaggio. Questa è - una buona scelta per amministratori di sistema che vogliono - informare gli utenti con notizie giornaliere. - -
- La Capplet Suggerimenti - - La Capplet Suggerimenti - - - -
- - - Session Options and Startup Programs - - The Session Options and Startup Programs capplet allows you to - control what programs are started at login time. Gnome - has the concept of session management. In simple terms, it - means that you can save your session (that is, - information about currently working applications, their status - and position on the screen) at any stage, and at your next - login the same applications will reappear on your screen in - the same positions, allowing you to continue your work. Note, - however, this only works for Gnome compliant applications. - - - Gnome also provides another way of starting applications at - login. You can explicitly specify one or more commands to - run, and Gnome will execute them at login in addition to the - applications from your saved session. This works for all - kinds of applications, whether Gnome compliant or not. - - - Session Options and Startup Programs capplet allows you to configure - all of these options, as described below. - -
- Session Options Capplet - - Session Options Capplet - - - -
- - - - Show splash screen on login - - - - This option controls whether the splash screen should be - shown at startup. It does nothing useful, but is an eye - candy, so why not? - - - - - Prompt on logout - - - - If this option is enabled, a confirmation dialog will - appear at logout. Among other things, this dialog provides - checkbox Save current setup (unless - you have set the checkbox Automatically save - session, see below). If you check this box, - the current session will be saved and will be restored at - your next login. Otherwise, the previous saved session - will be used. - - - - - Automatically save session - - - - This option determines whether your current session will - be automatically saved at logout time or not. Note that - you can also manually save your session at any time by - selecting - - Settings - Session - Save Current Session - from the Main Menu. - - - - - Choose Current Session - - - - This section allows you to configure more complicated - features of session management. These features are - currently being developed and should be used by advanced - users only. - - - Gnome allows you to define several sessions. For - example, you could have session - Work in which you are using office - applications such as Gnumeric - spreadsheet, and another session - Net in which you have - Netscape, - X-Chat (IRC chat client) and - Evolution mail client - open. This way, you can keep the setups (i.e., - information about open applications and their position - on screen) for work and for net surfing separate, - making it easy to switch from one to - another. Unfortunately, at the moment the only way to - switch from one session to another is by using command - gnome-session - . - In the future, an easier way of - switching will be provided. - - - In this part of Session Properties capplet you can - explicitly specify under which session name you current - setup should be saved, but a save won't occur until you - specifically do so. Here, you can also create new - sessions, edit and delete existing sessions. - - - To add a new session, press the Add - button and enter in a new session name. This name must be - different from existing session names. - - - To edit an existing session name, highlight the session - name you wish to edit, press the Edit button - and edit the existing session name. The new name must be - different from existing session names. - - - To delete an existing session name, highlight the session - name you wish to delete, press the Delete - button. - - - - -
- Startup Programs Capplet - - Startup Programs Capplet - - - -
- - - - Non-session managed startup programs - — In this section, you can explicitly specify the - commands that should be executed during login. This is - mostly used for programs that are not - Gnome-compatible. For Gnome applications, it is easier - just to leave them running and then save your session at - logout — this will ensure that they will be - restarted at your next login. - - To add a new command, press - Add button and enter the command to - run in the appearing dialog window. For example, if you want - Netscape to start every time - you login, just enter netscape in the - Startup command field. - - You can also specify priority, which determines the - order in which the programs will be started: programs with - lower values are started before the ones with higher - values. The default value is 50, which means that the - program will be started after all core Gnome - components. Unless you know what you are doing, it is better - to use this default value. - - - You can also edit or remove previously entered programs using - Edit... and - Remove... buttons. - - - - - Browse currently running programs — - This button will launch Session - properties dialog which shows the state of your - current Gnome session — in other words, which - programs are currently running, their status, priorities, - and more. It can also be used to remove one of the core - Gnome programs, such as Panel, from your session, thus - making sure that it won't be started next time you - login. - - - -
- Session Properties Manager - - Screenshot of the session properties manager. - - - - -
- - - - - - - - Interfaccia utente - - - Gnome Control Center - Impostazione dell'Interfaccia Utente - - L'Impostazione dell'Interfaccia Utente vi permette di cambiare - l'aspetto delle applicazioni che sono Gnome compliant. È possibile - riconoscere queste applicazioni dal fatto che sono pre-installate - con Gnome o che riportano di essere state costruite con GTK - (the GIMP Toolkit). - - Applicazioni - - - Gnome Control Center - Applicazioni - - La Capplet Applicazioni vi permette di cambiare alcuni aspetti - dell'interfaccia utente delle vostre applicazioni Gnome. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Sebbene questa capplet vi dia un grande controllo sull'aspetto - delle vostre applicazioni, dovreste considerare questi strumenti - per l'uso solo da parte di utenti esperti. - - - - - - E` possibile staccare e spostare i menu - — Normalmente le barre dei menu possono essere trascinate - dalla loro posizione naturale ovunque all'interno - dell'applicazione o sul desktop. Se non desiderate utilizzare - questa possibilità la è possibile disabilitare. - - - - - I menu hanno il bordo in rilievo — - Normalmente le barre dei menu hanno i bordi in rilievo. Se - non vi piace il loro aspetto è possibile disabilitare questa - opzione. - - - - - I sottomenu possono essere staccati — - Questo permette ai menu di avere delle line perforate che - vi permettono di staccare un menu e ottenere una piccola - finestra mobile. - - - - - Gli elementi del menu contengono icone - — Alcune applicazioni hanno menu che contengono icone. - Se non desiderate vedere icone nelle applicazioni che ne fanno - uso è possibile disabilitare questa opzione. - - - - - La barra di stato è interattiva quando - possibile — Alcune applicazioni permettono - che la barra di stato in basso sia staccata e separata in una - propria finestra. Se desiderate che questo sia possibile è possibile - abilitare questa opzione. - - - - - Indicatore di progresso della barra di stato sulla - destra — Alcune applicazioni contengono un - indicatore di progresso nella loro barra di stato. Normalmente - questi indicatori stanno nella parte destra della barra. Se - desiderate che siano messi sulla sinistra disabilitate questa - opzione. - - - - - E` possibile staccare e spostare le barre degli - strumenti — Normalmente nelle applicazioni - Gnome le barre degli strumenti possono essere staccate e - trascinate ovunque sul desktop. Se non desiderate che questo sia - possibile disattivate questa opzione. - - - - - Le barre degli strumenti hanno il bordo in - rilievo — Normalmente le barre degli strumenti - hanno il bordo in rilievo. Se non vi piace il loro aspetto - è possibile disabilitare questa opzione. - - - - - i pulsanti delle barre degli strumenti hanno il - bordo in rilievo — normalmente i pulsanti - delle barre degli strumenti non hanno il bordo in rilievo - allo stato naturale. Essi, comunque, cambiano quando il - mouse passa sopra di essi. Se desiderate che stiano tutto il tempo - in rilievo abilitate questa opzione. - - - - - Le barre degli strumenti contengono linee di - separazione — Normalmente i pulsanti delle - barre degli strumenti hanno piccole linee di separazione tra - loro. Se non desiderate vedere queste linee disabilitate questa - opzione. - - - - - Le barre degli strumenti contengono testo - — Normalmente ipulsanti delle barre degli strumenti - contengono immagini e testo pre essere identificati. Se - avete familiarità con i pulsanti e non avete bisogno di - vedere il testo, è possibile disabilitare questa opzione. - - - -
- La Capplet Applicazioni - - La Capplet Applicazioni - - - -
- - Finestre di dialogo - - - Gnome Control Center - Finestre di dialogo - - La Capplet Finestre di dialog vi permette di cambiare le - impostazioni delle Finestre di dialogo per le applicazioni Gnome - compliant. Una Finestra di dialogo è una finestra che viene mostrata - da un'applicazioni per aiutare l'utente a fare determinate azioni - necessarie all'applicazione. Un esempio di finestra di dialogo è - la finestra di stampa che appare quando premete il pulsante di - stampa. Questa finestra di dialogo vi permette di impostre le opzioni - di stampa e di lanciare il processo di stampa. La capplet Finestre - di dialogo vi permette di cambiare le seguenti opzioni. - - - - IMPORTANTE - - Sebbenie questa capplet vi dia un grande controllo sull'aspetto - delle vostre applicazioni, dovreste considerare questi strumenti - per l'uso solo da parte di utenti esperti. - - - - Pulsanti delle finestre di dialogo — - È possibile scegliere di usare il valore predefiniti, di distribuire - i pulsanti uniformemente, di mettere i pulsanti sui lati, - giustificare i pulsanti a sinistra o a destra. - - - I pulsanti delle finestre di dialogo contengono - icone — Alcuni pulsanti delle finestre di - dialogo (per esempio OK) possono - contenere icone. Normalmente le applicazioni che hanno questi - pulsanti mosttano le loro icone. Se non desiderate vederle è possibile - disabilitare questa opzione. - - - Usa la barra di stato invece di una finestra di dialogo - quando possibile — È possibile indicare all'applicazione - di utilizzare la barra di stato al posto delle finestre di dialogo - se l'applicazione lo permette. Questo funziona solo con finestre di - dialogo che forniscono informazioni, non con quelle che richiedono - interazione. - - - Posizione delle finestre di dialogo — - Questa opzione vi permette di decidere come devono apparire le - finestre di dialogo quando vengono mostrate. È possibile lasciare - decidere al window manager (o è possibile definire come farlo nella - configurazione del window manager), farle apparire al centro dello - schermo, o farle apparire nel punto in cui si trovava il puntatore - del mouse quando sono state lanciate. - - - Dialog hints — This will let you change - the behavior of the dialog hints which are the tooltips that - appear when you move your mouse button over a button or part - of the dialog. You may choose to have hints handled like - other windows, or let the window manager decide how to - display them. - - - Posiziona le finestre di dialogo sopra alla finestra - dell'applicazione se possibile — È possibile scegliere - di mettere le finestre di dialogo sopra le applicazioni quando - possibile, cosa che vi aiuterà a mantenere le vostre finestre - ben disposte sullo schermo. Se avete familiarità con altri - sistemi operativi dovreste mantenere questa opzione abilitata - poichè questo è il modo in cui la maggiorparte dei sistemi - operativi si comporta. - -
- La Capplet Finetre di dialogo - - La Capplet Finetre di dialogo - - - -
- - - MDI - - - Gnome Control Center - MDI - - La capplet MDI vi permette di cambiare il modo MDI per le - applicazioni Gnome. MDI sta per Multiple Document Interface - (ndt, Interfaccia a Documenti Multipli) e si riferisce al modo - in cui vengono visualizzati più documenti nelle applicazioni - Gnome. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Sebbenie questa capplet vi dia un grande controllo sull'aspetto - delle vostre applicazioni, dovreste considerare questi strumenti - per l'uso solo da parte di utenti esperti. - - - - Lo stile predefinito per le applicazioni Gnome-compliant per - lo MDI è normalmente l'uso di etichette o notebook: - appare come un'agenda, i vostri documenti sono le - etichette di questo notebook, e voi è possibile - spostarvi tra di esse usando le etichette. Se non vi piace come - appaiono le etichette, è possibile modificare il loro aspetto qui. - - - Modo MDI predefinito — In aggiunta al - Notebook, potrete trovare - Toplevel e Modale. - Notebook è l'aspetto predefinito, come - descritto prima; Toplevel mostra solo il - documento attivo finchè esso non viene chiuso e - Modale ha solo un toplevel che può contenere - ogni documento in ogni momento, comunque solo uno può essere - visualizzato. Se avete mai usato Emacs, - Modale è molto simile al modo in cui - Emacs gestisce i buffer. - - - Posizione delle etichette del notebook — - Se scegliete di utilizzare lo stile Notebook - è possibile decidere dove devono apparire le etichette nelle - vostre applicazioni. È possibile averle in alto, a sinistra, a destra - o in basso. Ricordate che questa impostazione ha effetto solo - sulle applicazioni ch sono Gnome-compliant. - -
- La Capplet MDI - - La Capplet MDI - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-appendix.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-appendix.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 124fe28..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-appendix.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,455 +0,0 @@ - - GNU General Public License - - - - Version 2, June 1991 - - - Copyright © 2000 -
- Free Software Foundation, Inc. - 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, - Boston, - MA - 02111-1307 - USA -
- - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of - this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - - - - - - - - - - - - Preamble - - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your - freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public - License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change - free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. - This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software - Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit - to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered - by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it - to your programs, too. - - - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. - Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the - freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this - service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you - want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free - programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone - to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These - restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute - copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or - for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You - must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you - must show them these terms so they know their rights. - - - - We protect your rights with two steps: - - - - - copyright the software, and - - - - - offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, - distribute and/or modify the software. - - - - - - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that - everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If - the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its - recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any - problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' - reputations. - - - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. - We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will - individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program - proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be - licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification - follow. - - - - - - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - - Section 0 - - This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice - placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms - of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such - program or work, and a work based on the Program means either - the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a - work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with - modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation - is included without limitation in the term modification.) Each - licensee is addressed as you. - - - - Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by - this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not - restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents - constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running - the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - - - - Section 1 - - You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you - receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately - publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; - keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any - warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License - along with the Program. - - - - You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at - your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - - - - Section 2 - - You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus - forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications - or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided - that you also meet all of these conditions: - - - - - You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that - you changed the files and the date of any change. - - - - - You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or - in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be - licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of - this License. - - - - - If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you - must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most - ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate - copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying - that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program - under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. - - - Exception: - - If the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an - announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an - announcement.) - - - - - - - - - - These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections - of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered - independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, - do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when - you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the - Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose - permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and - every part regardless of who wrote it. - - - - Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights - to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control - the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. - - - - In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program - (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium - does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. - - - - - Section 3 - - - You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under - Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of - Section 1 and 2 above provided that - you also do one of the following: - - - - - Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which - must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any - third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source - distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, - to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily - used for software interchange; or, - - - - - Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute - corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial - distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form - with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - - - - - - - The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications - to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules - it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control - compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source - code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or - binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system - on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. - - - - If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a - designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place - counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to - copy the source along with the object code. - - - - - Section 4 - - - You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided - under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the - Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, - parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their - licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. - - - - - Section 5 - - - You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing - else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. - These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying - or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance - of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or - modifying the Program or works based on it. - - - - - Section 6 - - - Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient - automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify - the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions - on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing - compliance by third parties to this License. - - - - - Section 7 - - - If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other - reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, - agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you - from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously - your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence - you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit - royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or - indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be - to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - - - - If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, - the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply - in other circumstances. - - - - It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property - right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of - protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public - license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software - distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up - to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other - system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. - - - - This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the - rest of this License. - - - - - Section 8 - - - If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents - or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License - may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that - distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License - incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - - - - Section 9 - - - The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License - from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ - in detail to address new problems or concerns. - - - - Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of - this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms - and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software - Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. - - - - - Section 10 - - - If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution - conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted - by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions - for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all - derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - - - - NO WARRANTY - Section 11 - - - BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT - PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR - OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, - INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR - PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE - PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - - - - Section 12 - - - IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR - ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU - FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE - USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED - INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH - ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH - DAMAGES. - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-it.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-it.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 8584184..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/gpl-it.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,375 +0,0 @@ - - LICENZA PUBBLICA GENERALE (GPL) DEL PROGETTO GNU - - Versione 2, Giugno 1991 - - - Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - - - 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA - - - Tutti possono copiare e distribuire copie letterali di questo - documento di licenza, ma non e` permesso modificarlo. - - Preambolo - - - Le licenze per la maggioranza dei programmi hanno lo scopo di togliere - all'utente la liberta` di condividerlo e di modificarlo. Al contrario, - la Licenza Pubblica Generica GNU e` intesa a garantire la liberta` di - condividere e modificare il free software, al fine di assicurare che i - programmi siano ``liberi'' per tutti i loro utenti. Questa Licenza si - applica alla maggioranza dei programmi della Free Software Foundation - e ad ogni altro programma i cui autori hanno scelto questa Licenza. - Alcuni altri programmi della Free Software Foundation sono invece - coperti dalla Licenza Pubblica Generica per Librerie (LGPL). Chiunque - puo` usare questa Licenza per i propri programmi. - - Quando si parla di free software, ci si riferisce alla liberta`, non - al prezzo. Le nostre Licenze (la GPL e la LGPL) sono progettate per - assicurare che ciascuno abbia la liberta` di distribuire copie del - software libero (e farsi pagare per questo, se vuole), che ciascuno - riceva il codice sorgente o che lo possa ottenere se lo desidera, che - ciascuno possa modificare il programma o usarne delle parti in nuovi - programmi liberi e che ciascuno sappia di potere fare queste cose. - - Per proteggere i diritti dell'utente, abbiamo bisogno di creare delle - restrizioni che vietino a chiunque di negare questi diritti o di - chiedere di rinunciarvi. Queste restrizioni si traducono in certe - responsabilita` per chi distribuisce copie del software e per chi lo - modifica. - - Per esempio, chi distribuisce copie di un Programma coperto da GPL, - sia gratuitamente sia facendosi pagare, deve dare agli acquirenti - tutti i diritti che ha ricevuto. Deve anche assicurarsi che gli - acquirenti ricevano o possano ricevere il codice sorgente. E deve - mostrar loro queste condizioni di Licenza, in modo che conoscano i - loro diritti. - - Proteggiamo i diritti dell'utente attraverso due azioni: (1) - proteggendo il software con un diritto d'autore (una nota di - copyright), e (2) offrendo una Licenza che concede il permesso legale - di copiare, distribuire e/o modificare il Programma. - - Infine, per proteggere ogni autore e noi stessi, vogliamo assicurarci - che ognuno capisca che non ci sono garanzie per i programmi coperti da - GPL. Se il Programma viene modificato da qualcun altro e - ridistribuito, vogliamo che gli acquirenti sappiano che cio` che hanno - non e` l'originale, in modo che ogni problema introdotto da altri non - si rifletta sulla reputazione degli autori originari. - - Infine, ogni programma libero e` costantemente minacciato dai brevetti - sui programmi. Vogliamo evitare il pericolo che chi ridistribuisce un - Programma libero ottenga brevetti personali, rendendo percio` il - Programma una cosa di sua proprieta`. Per prevenire questo, abbiamo - chiarito che ogni prodotto brevettato debba essere reso disponibile - perche` tutti ne usufruiscano liberamente; se l'uso del prodotto deve - sottostare a restrizioni allora tale prodotto non deve essere - distribuito affatto. - - Seguono i termini e le condizioni precisi per la copia, la - distribuzione e la modifica. - - - - - Questa Licenza si applica a ogni Programma o altra opera che - contenga una nota da parte del detentore del diritto d'autore che dica - che tale opera puo` essere distribuita nei termini di questa Licenza - Pubblica Generica. Il termine ``Programma'' nel seguito indica ognuno - di questi programmi o lavori, e l'espressione ``lavoro basato sul - Programma'' indica sia il Programma sia ogni opera considerata - ``derivata'' in base alla legge sul diritto d'autore: cioe` un lavoro - contenente il Programma o una porzione di esso, sia letteralmente sia - modificato e/o tradotto in un'altra lingua; da qui in avanti, la - traduzione e` in ogni caso considerata una ``modifica''. Vengono ora - elencati i diritti dei detentori di licenza. - - Attivita` diverse dalla copiatura, distribuzione e modifica non sono - coperte da questa Licenza e sono al di fuori della sua influenza. - L'atto di eseguire il programma non viene limitato, e l'output del - programma e` coperto da questa Licenza solo se il suo contenuto - costituisce un lavoro basato sul Programma (indipendentemente dal - fatto che sia stato creato eseguendo il Programma). In base alla - natura del Programma il suo output puo` essere o meno coperto da - questa Licenza. - - - - E` lecito copiare e distribuire copie letterali del codice - sorgente del Programma cosi` come viene ricevuto, con qualsiasi mezzo, - a condizione che venga riprodotta chiaramente su ogni copia una - appropriata nota di diritto d'autore e di assenza di garanzia; che si - mantengano intatti tutti i riferimenti a questa Licenza e all'assenza - di ogni garanzia; che si dia a ogni altro acquirente del Programma una - copia di questa Licenza insieme al Programma. - - E` possibile richiedere un pagamento per il trasferimento fisico di - una copia del Programma, e` anche possibile a propria discrezione - richiedere un pagamento in cambio di una copertura assicurativa. - - - E` lecito modificare la propria copia o copie del Programma, o - parte di esso, creando percio` un lavoro basato sul Programma, e - copiare o distribuire queste modifiche e questi lavori secondo i - termini del precedente comma 1, a patto che vengano soddisfatte queste - condizioni: - - - - - Bisogna indicare chiaramente nei file che si tratta di - copie modificate e la data di ogni modifica. - - - - Bisogna fare in modo che ogni lavoro distribuito o - pubblicato, che in parte o nella sua totalita` derivi dal - Programma o da parti di esso, sia utilizzabile gratuitamente - da terzi nella sua totalita`, secondo le condizioni di questa - licenza. - - - - Se si solito il programma modificato legge comandi - interattivamente quando viene eseguito, bisogna fare in modo - che all'inizio dell'esecuzione interattiva usuale, stampi un - messaggio contenente una appropriata nota di diritto d'autore - e di assenza di garanzia (oppure che specifichi che si offre - una garanzia). Il messaggio deve inoltre specificare agli - utenti che possono ridistribuire il programma alle condizioni - qui descritte e deve indicare come consultare una copia di - questa licenza. Se pero` il programma di partenza e` - interattivo ma normalmente non stampa tale messaggio, non - occorre che un lavoro derivato lo stampi. - - - - Questi requisiti si applicano al lavoro modificato nel suo complesso. - Se sussistono parti identificabili del lavoro modificato che non siano - derivate dal Programma e che possono essere ragionevolmente - considerate lavori indipendenti, allora questa Licenza e i suoi - termini non si applicano a queste parti quando vengono distribuite - separatamente. Se pero` queste parti vengono distribuite all'interno - di un prodotto che e` un lavoro basato sul Programma, la distribuzione - di questo prodotto nel suo complesso deve avvenire nei termini di - questa Licenza, le cui norme nei confronti di altri utenti si - estendono a tutto il prodotto, e quindi ad ogni sua parte, chiunque ne - sia l'autore. - - - Sia chiaro che non e` nelle intenzioni di questa sezione accampare - diritti su lavori scritti interamente da altri, l'intento e` piuttosto - quello di esercitare il diritto di controllare la distribuzione di - lavori derivati o dal Programma o di cui esso sia parte. - - - Inoltre, se il Programma o un lavoro derivato da esso viene aggregato - ad un altro lavoro non derivato dal Programma su di un mezzo di - memorizzazione o di distribuzione, il lavoro non derivato non ricade - nei termini di questa licenza. - - - - E` lecito copiare e distribuire il Programma (o un lavoro basato - su di esso, come espresso al comma 2) sotto forma di codice oggetto o - eseguibile secondo i termini dei precedenti commi 1 e 2, a patto che - si applichi una delle seguenti condizioni: - - - - Il Programma sia corredato dal codice sorgente completo, in - una forma leggibile dal calcolatore e tale sorgente deve - essere fornito secondo le regole dei precedenti commi 1 e 2 su - di un mezzo comunemente usato per lo scambio di programmi. - - - - Il Programma sia accompagnato da un'offerta scritta, valida - per almeno tre anni, di fornire a chiunque ne faccia richiesta - una copia completa del codice sorgente, in una forma leggibile - dal calcolatore, in cambio di un compenso non superiore al - costo del trasferimento fisico di tale copia, che deve essere - fornita secondo le regole dei precedenti commi 1 e 2 su di un - mezzo comunemente usato per lo scambio di programmi. - - - - Il Programma sia accompagnato dalle informazioni che sono - state ricevute riguardo alla possibilita` di ottenere il - codice sorgente. Questa alternativa e` permessa solo in caso - di distribuzioni non commerciali e solo se il programma e` - stato ricevuto sotto forma di codice oggetto o eseguibile in - accordo al precedente punto b). - - - Per ``codice sorgente completo'' di un lavoro si intende la forma - preferenziale usata per modificare un lavoro. Per un programma - eseguibile, ``codice sorgente completo'' significa tutto il codice - sorgente di tutti i moduli in esso contenuti, piu` ogni file associato - che definisca le interfacce esterne del programma, piu` gli script - usati per controllare la compilazione e l'installazione - dell'eseguibile. In ogni caso non e` necessario che il codice sorgente - fornito includa nulla che sia normalmente distribuito (in forma - sorgente o in formato binario) con i principali componenti del sistema - operativo sotto cui viene eseguito il Programma (compilatore, kernel, - e cosi` via), a meno che tali componenti accompagnino l'eseguibile. - - Se la distribuzione dell'eseguibile o del codice oggetto e` effettuata - indicando un luogo dal quale sia possibile copiarlo, permettere la - copia del codice sorgente dallo stesso luogo e` considerata una valida - forma di distribuzione del codice sorgente, anche se copiare il - sorgente e` facoltativo per l'acquirente. - - - - Non e` lecito copiare, modificare, sublicenziare, o distribuire - il Programma in modi diversi da quelli espressamente previsti da - questa Licenza. Ogni tentativo contrario di copiare, modificare, - sublicenziare o distribuire il Programma e` legalmente nullo, e fara` - cessare automaticamente i diritti garantiti da questa Licenza. - D'altra parte ogni acquirente che abbia ricevuto copie, o diritti, - coperti da questa Licenza da parte di persone che violano la Licenza - come qui indicato non vedranno invalidare la loro Licenza, purche` si - comportino conformemente ad essa. - - - - L'acquirente non e` obbligato ad accettare questa Licenza, - poiche` non l'ha firmata. D'altra parte nessun altro documento - garantisce il permesso di modificare o distribuire il Programma o i - lavori derivati da esso. Queste azioni sono proibite dalla legge per - chi non accetta questa Licenza; percio`, modificando o distribuendo il - Programma o un lavoro basato sul programma, si accetta implicitamente - questa Licenza e quindi di tutti i suoi termini e le condizioni poste - sulla copia, la distribuzione e la modifica del Programma o di lavori - basati su di esso. - - - - Ogni volta che il Programma o un lavoro basato su di esso vengono - distribuiti, l'acquirente riceve automaticamente una licenza d'uso da - parte del licenziatario originale. Tale licenza regola la copia, la - distribuzione e la modifica del Programma secondo questi termini e - queste condizioni. Non e` lecito imporre restrizioni ulteriori - all'acquirente nel suo esercizio dei diritti qui garantiti. Chi - distribuisce programmi coperti da questa Licenza non e' comunque - responsabile per la conformita` alla Licenza da parte di terzi. - - - - Se, come conseguenza del giudizio di un tribunale, o di una - imputazione per la violazione di un brevetto o per ogni altra ragione - (anche non relativa a questioni di brevetti), vengono imposte - condizioni che contraddicono le condizioni di questa licenza, che - queste condizioni siano dettate dal tribunale, da accordi tra le parti - o altro, queste condizioni non esimono nessuno dall'osservazione di - questa Licenza. Se non e` possibile distribuire un prodotto in un modo - che soddisfi simultaneamente gli obblighi dettati da questa Licenza e - altri obblighi pertinenti, il prodotto non puo` essere distribuito - affatto. Per esempio, se un brevetto non permettesse a tutti quelli - che lo ricevono di ridistribuire il Programma senza obbligare al - pagamento di diritti, allora l'unico modo per soddisfare - contemporaneamente il brevetto e questa Licenza e' di non distribuire - affatto il Programma. - - Se parti di questo comma sono ritenute non valide o inapplicabili per - qualsiasi circostanza, deve comunque essere applicata l'idea espressa - da questo comma; in ogni altra circostanza invece deve essere - applicato il comma 7 nel suo complesso. - - Non e` nello scopo di questo comma indurre gli utenti a violare alcun - brevetto ne` ogni altra rivendicazione di diritti di proprieta`, ne` - di contestare la validita` di alcuna di queste rivendicazioni; lo - scopo di questo comma e` solo quello di proteggere l'integrita` del - sistema di distribuzione del software libero, che viene realizzato - tramite l'uso della licenza pubblica. Molte persone hanno contribuito - generosamente alla vasta gamma di programmi distribuiti attraverso - questo sistema, basandosi sull'applicazione consistente di tale - sistema. L'autore/donatore puo` decidere di sua volonta` se - preferisce distribuire il software avvalendosi di altri sistemi, e - l'acquirente non puo` imporre la scelta del sistema di distribuzione. - - Questo comma serve a rendere il piu` chiaro possibile cio` che - crediamo sia una conseguenza del resto di questa Licenza. - - - - Se in alcuni paesi la distribuzione e/o l'uso del Programma sono - limitati da brevetto o dall'uso di interfacce coperte da diritti - d'autore, il detentore del copyright originale che pone il Programma - sotto questa Licenza puo` aggiungere limiti geografici espliciti alla - distribuzione, per escludere questi paesi dalla distribuzione stessa, - in modo che il programma possa essere distribuito solo nei paesi non - esclusi da questa regola. In questo caso i limiti geografici sono - inclusi in questa Licenza e ne fanno parte a tutti gli effetti. - - - - All'occorrenza la Free Software Foundation puo` pubblicare - revisioni o nuove versioni di questa Licenza Pubblica Generica. Tali - nuove versioni saranno simili a questa nello spirito, ma potranno - differire nei dettagli al fine di coprire nuovi problemi e nuove - situazioni. - - Ad ogni versione viene dato un numero identificativo. Se il Programma - asserisce di essere coperto da una particolare versione di questa - Licenza e ``da ogni versione successiva'', l'acquirente puo` scegliere - se seguire le condizioni della versione specificata o di una - successiva. Se il Programma non specifica quale versione di questa - Licenza deve applicarsi, l'acquirente puo` scegliere una qualsiasi - versione tra quelle pubblicate dalla Free Software Foundation. - - - Se si desidera incorporare parti del Programma in altri - programmi liberi le cui condizioni di distribuzione differiscano da - queste, e` possibile scrivere all'autore del Programma per chiederne - l'autorizzazione. Per il software il cui copyright e` detenuto dalla - Free Software Foundation, si scriva alla Free Software Foundation; - talvolta facciamo eccezioni alle regole di questa Licenza. La nostra - decisione sara` guidata da due scopi: preservare la liberta` di tutti - i prodotti derivati dal nostro software libero e promuovere la - condivisione e il riutilizzo del software in generale. - - NESSUNA GARANZIA - - - - POICHE` IL PROGRAMMA E` CONCESSO IN USO GRATUITAMENTE, NON C'E` - ALCUNA GARANZIA PER IL PROGRAMMA, NEI LIMITI PERMESSI DALLE VIGENTI - LEGGI. SE NON INDICATO DIVERSAMENTE PER ISCRITTO, IL DETENTORE DEL - COPYRIGHT E LE ALTRE PARTI FORNISCONO IL PROGRAMMA "COSI` COM'E`", - SENZA ALCUN TIPO DI GARANZIA, NE` ESPLICITA NE` IMPLICITA; CIO` - COMPRENDE, SENZA LIMITARSI A QUESTO, LA GARANZIA IMPLICITA DI - COMMERCIABILITA` E UTILIZZABILITA` PER UN PARTICOLARE SCOPO. L'INTERO - RISCHIO CONCERNENTE LA QUALITA` E LE PRESTAZIONI DEL PROGRAMMA E` - DELL'ACQUIRENTE. SE IL PROGRAMMA DOVESSE RIVELARSI DIFETTOSO, - L'ACQUIRENTE SI ASSUME IL COSTO DI OGNI MANUTENZIONE, RIPARAZIONE O - CORREZIONE NECESSARIA. - - - - NE` IL DETENTORE DEL COPYRIGHT NE` ALTRE PARTI CHE POSSONO - MODIFICARE O RIDISTRIBUIRE IL PROGRAMMA COME PERMESSO IN QUESTA - LICENZA SONO RESPONSABILI PER DANNI NEI CONFRONTI DELL'ACQUIRENTE, A - MENO CHE QUESTO NON SIA RICHIESTO DALLE LEGGI VIGENTI O APPAIA IN UN - ACCORDO SCRITTO. SONO INCLUSI DANNI GENERICI, SPECIALI O INCIDENTALI, - COME PURE I DANNI CHE CONSEGUONO DALL'USO O DALL'IMPOSSIBILITA` DI - USARE IL PROGRAMMA; CIO` COMPRENDE, SENZA LIMITARSI A QUESTO, LA - PERDITA DI DATI, LA CORRUZIONE DEI DATI, LE PERDITE SOSTENUTE - DALL'ACQUIRENTE O DA TERZE PARTI E L'INABILITA` DEL PROGRAMMA A - LAVORARE INSIEME AD ALTRI PROGRAMMI, ANCHE SE IL DETENTORE O ALTRE - PARTI SONO STATE AVVISATE DELLA POSSIBILITA` DI QUESTI DANNI. - - - - FINE DEI TERMINI E DELLE CONDIZIONI - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/ug-applets.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/ug-applets.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 49bd181..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/ug-applets.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,506 +0,0 @@ - - - - Le Applet di GNOME - - - - Applet: Nozioni basilari - - - - Cosa sono le applet? - - Le Applet sono fra gli oggetti maggiormente popolari e utili che - possiate aggiungere al vostro Pannello per - personalizzare la vostra scrivania. Un'applet è un piccolo programma che - gira all'interno di una piccola area del vostro - Pannello. Ne sono state scritte per moltissimi - scopi differenti: alcune sono potenti tool interattivi, come ad esempio - l'Applet Mixer che vi permette di controllare - facilmente il suono del vostro computer; altre sono invece semplici - controlli che vi mostrano lo stato della batteria del portatile (vedi - Controllo della carica della batteria) o - informazioni sulle previsioni metereologiche (vedi Applet - GNOME per il meteo); altre invece sono semplici - divertimenti (come gEyes). - - - - Le Applet sono simili ad applicazioni inglobate in quanto sono, come - quest'ultime, stanno dentro al Pannello; la - differenza però sta nel fatto che le applicazioni inglobate normalmente - non vengono progettate per girare dentro al - Pannello ma sono applicazioni che già stanno - girando nella scrivania e che continuano a girare - nel Pannello fino a quando non le fermate o le - spostate da lì. - - - -
- Esempi delle Applet - - Esempi delle Applet - - - -
- Nella figura sono mostrati alcuni - esempi di applet. Da sinistra a destra: (1) Applet - Mixer che permette di accendere e spengere il suono e - di controllarne il volume cliccando sull'applet; (2) - Controllo di Esound che mostra il volume - attuale del suono e che permette di controllarne alcune - caratteristiche; (3) l'applet Lettore CD, - con tutti i controlli e che mostra il numero della traccia e il tempo; - (4) l'applet Montaggio Dischi usata per - montare e smontare i dischi con un click del mouse; (5) - Desk Guide che permette di controllare le - finestre e le applicazioni. - - - Ci sono molte altre applet da scegliere. In questo capitolo verranno - date le informazioni di base per avviare, aggiungere, muovere ed - eliminare le applet dai vostri Pannelli e per - usarle. Nei capitoli successivi verranno invece spiegate una ad una in - dettaglio le singole applet che trovate standard in GNOME. Oltre a - queste ne esistono molte altre che possono essere scaricate dalla rete; - vedi The GNOME Software - Map per un elenco di applicazioni e applet per GNOME. - - - Via via che leggete questo capitolo dovreste provare ad aggiungere ed - eliminare le applet dal vostro Pannello e di fare - tranquillamente qualche prova. - - - - - - Aggiungere, muovere ed eliminare le applet - - - Aggiungere applet ad un Pannello - - Per aggiungere un'applet ad un Pannello - cliccate con il tasto destro sul Pannello e - selezionate la voce - PannelloAggiungi al - pannelloApplet; vi - apparirà un menù contenente tutte le applet disponibili, divise per - categoria; scegliendone una verrà aggiunta al - Pannello. - - - - - Muovere le applet all'interno dei pannelli o fra pannelli diversi - - È molto semplice muovere le applet all'interno dello stesso - Pannello o fra Pannelli - diversi. Se state usando un mouse a tre bottoni, portate il puntatore - sull'applet che volete spostare, premete il tasto centrale e spostate - l'applet nella posizione voluta, rilasciando il tasto; in questo modo - potete spostare le applet all'interno dello stesso - Pannello o fra Pannelli - diversi. Se non avete un mouse a tre bottoni cliccate sopra all'applet - con il tasto destro e scegliete la voce - Sposta; il cursore del mouse diventerà una - croce e l'applet comincerà a muoversi insieme fino a che non premerete - un qualunque tasto per significare che avete terminato lo - spostamento. Se nel corso di questo spostamento l'applet incontra - altri oggetti il comportamento seguente dipende dalle impostazioni - generali che avete scelto per i vostri Pannelli - nel Centro di Controllo di GNOME: l'applet - che state muovendo può scambiare il posto con gli altri oggetti, - "spingerli" oppure "saltarli" senza disturbarli. Si possono ignorare - queste impostazioni tenendo premuto, mentre si esegue lo spostamento, - il tasto Shift per farle "spingere", il tasto - Control perché vengano scambiati i posti oppure il - tasto Alt per il modo "libero" cioè di non spostare - gli oggetti incontrati. - - - Per cambiare le preferenze generali per il - Pannello, cliccate con il tasto destro su una - qualsiasi applet oppure sul Pannello e - selezionate - - Pannello - Proprietà Globali... - . - La Modalità default per lo spostamento viene - impostata dalla sezione Oggetti del pannello. - - - - - Rimuovere le Applet dal Pannello - - Per rimuovere un'applet da un Pannello cliccate - con il tasto destro sull'applet e selezionate la voce - Rimuovi dal pannello. - - - - - - - - Il menù del tasto destro - - Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse su un'applet appare un - menù a comparsa, il quale contiene sempre - delle voci predefinite oltre ad alcune che dipendono dall'applet in - questione. - - - Voci standard del menù del tasto destro - - Tutte le applet contengono le seguenti voci nel menù a - comparsa del tasto destro: - - - Rimuovi dal pannello - - - La voce Rimuovi dal pannello - permette di eliminare l'applet dal - Pannello. - - - - - - Sposta - - - Cliccando su Sposta il puntatore - del mouse cambierà aspetto, normalmente diventando a forma di - croce con frecce in tutte le direzioni. Potrete allora muovere - l'applet muovendo il cursore, la quale ne seguirà il puntatore - fino a quando non cliccherete nuovamente, dove l'applet si - fermerà. Con questo sistema potrete muovere le applet anche - fra Pannelli diversi. - - - - - - Pannello - - - La voce Pannello contiene altre voci - da cui potrete aggiungere e rimuovere - Pannelli e applet e per cambiare la - configurazione. - - - - - - Aiuto - - - La voce Aiuto fa apparire l'aiuto - specifico dell'applet. - - - - - - Informazioni su... - - - La voce Informazioni su... fa - apparire una finestra di dialogo contenente alcune - informazioni sull'applet, come il nome dell'applet e - dell'autore, il copyright, la versione, la licenza di - distribuzione e una descrizione. - - - - - - - - - - Altre voci comuni del menù a comparsa - - Molte applet hanno anche altre voci nel menù a comparsa del tasto - destro, come ad esempio: - - - Proprietà... - - - La voce Proprietà... fa apparire la - finestra di dialogo Proprietà dell'applet (vedi ). Molte applet hanno - questa finestra di dialogo dalla quale potete configurarne il - comportamento e l'aspetto. - - - - - - Avvia... - - - La voce Avvia... normalmente serve - per avviare un programma in qualche modo collegato all'applet - ma che poi girerà in una sua finestra invece che nel - pannello. Ad esempio: - - - - - L'applet Carico CPU, che serve - per controllare i programmi che stanno girando sul vostro - computer ha una voce Avvia - gtop... con la quale potete avviare il - programma GTop che permette di - vedere e controllare i programmi che stanno girando. - - - - - L'applet Lettore CD ha la voce - Avvia Lettore CD... che serve - per avviare il Lettore CD di - GNOME, che ha maggiori funzioni dell'applet. - - - - - - - - - - - La finestra di dialogo Proprietà - - Molte applet hanno delle caratteristiche che possono essere - personalizzate. Questo può essere fatto cliccando sulla voce - Proprietà... del loro menù a - comparsa del tasto destro che farà apparire la finestra di - dialogo Proprietà da dove è possibile - modificare il comportamento e l'aspetto delle applet. -
- Un esempio di finestra di dialogo Proprietà di un'Applet - - Un esempio di finestra di dialogo Proprietà di un'Applet - - - -
- Tutte le finestre di dialogo Proprietà - presentano i seguenti pulsanti: - - - - OK — Premendo il pulsante - OK chiudete la finestra di dialogo - salvando e attivando i cambiamenti fatti. - - - - - Applica — Premendo il pulsante - Applica rende attivi i cambiamenti fatti - in qualunque momento senza chiudere la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà; questo può essere utile se - volete provare gli effetti dei cambiamenti senza chiudere la - finestra di dialogo. - - - - - Chiudi — Premendo il pulsante - Chiudi si chiude la finestra di - dialogo; verranno attivati solo i cambiamenti salvati - precedentemente con il pulsante Applica, - mentre quelli fatti successivamente non verranno attivati. - - - - - Aiuto — Premendo il pulsante - Aiuto fa apparire il manuale per - l'applicazione alla pagina che descrive la finestra di dialogo - Proprietà. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Applet Divertimento - - &FIFTEEN; - &FISH; - &GEYES; - &LIFE; - &ODOMETER; - - - - - - Applet Controllo - - &BATTERY; - &CPULOAD; - &CPUMEMUSAGE; - &DISKUSAGE; - &LOADAVG; - &MEMLOAD; - &NETLOAD; - &SWAPLOAD; - - - - - - - Applet Multimedia - - &CDPLAYER; - &MIXER; - &SOUNDMONITOR; - - - - - - - Applet Rete - - &MAILCHECK; - &MODEMLIGHTS; - &WEBCONTROL; - - - - - - - - Applet Utilità - - &CHARPICK; - &DESKGUIDE; - - &GKB; - &GNOTES; - &GWEATHER; - &MINICOMMAND; - &PRINTER; - &QUICKLAUNCH; - &SCREENSHOOTER; - - &TICKASTAT; - &WHEREAMI; - - - - - - - - Applet Orologi - - &ANOTHERCLOCK; - &ASCLOCK; - &CLOCK; - &CLOCKMAIL; - &JBC; - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/unix-primer.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/unix-primer.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 16742e6..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/unix-primer.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,799 +0,0 @@ - - - Se sei agli inizi con Linux/UNIX - - - Uno degli obbiettivi di GNOME è quello di rendere il vostro computer - facile da usare, senza richiedere la conoscenza di dettagli tecnici del - vostro sistema operativo. Nonostante tutto rimangono alcune nozioni - relative a UNIX che dovrebbero diventarvi familiari anche se usate la - semplice interfaccia grafica di GNOME. Per venire incontro ai nuovi utenti - questo documento raccoglie queste nozioni di base. Se avete necessità di - ulteriori informazioni su UNIX dovreste leggere la documentazione - provvista insieme al vostro sistema, oppure uno dei tanti libri e di guide - che si trovano on-line disponibili per tutte le versioni di UNIX. - - - - La seguente guida è valida per tutte le versioni di UNIX e tutti i sistemi - operativi a questo assimilabili, compresi sia gli UNIX commerciali come - Solaris e sistemi open-source come - FreeBSD e Linux. Alcune - parti di questo testo sono tratte dalla guida Linux - Installation and Getting Started di Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, - David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, Sean Dreilinger, Robert Kiesling, Evan - Leibovitch, e Henry Pierce. Questa guida è disponibile sia per essere - scaricata che consultata in linea al link Linux Documentation - Project o Open Source Writers - Group. - - - - Utenti - - UNIX è un sistema operativo multi-utente, cioè è stato progettato per - permettere a più utenti di operare sullo stesso computer, sia - contemporaneamente (mediante diversi terminali o connessioni di rete), sia - alternativamente. Usando UNIX per identificarsi nel sistema dovete - effettuare il log-in, che significa immettere il vostro nome di - login (cioè il nome usato dal sistema per identificarvi) e - successivamente la vostra password, cioè la vostra - chiave personale per entrare nel sistema. Poiché solo voi conoscete la - vostra password nessun altro la potrà usare per entrare a vostro nome nel - sistema. Normalmente si usa scegliere il proprio nome o il proprio cognome - o variazioni di questi come nome di login: così se ad esempio il vostro - nome reale è Sasha Beilinson il vostro nome potrebbe essere - sasha. - - - Ogni utente ha uno spazio separato per tenere i propri file personali - (detta la sua home directory). UNIX possiede un - sistema di permessi (vedi ), in modo che, se - il sistema non è mal configurato, un utente non ha la possibilità di - cambiare i file del sistema o di altri utenti. Questo permette inoltre ad - ogni utente di personalizzare molti aspetti del sistema — in - particolare il comportamento di GNOME — senza influire sugli altri - utenti. - - - Su molti sistemi UNIX esiste anche un utente speciale, detto - amministratore del sistema che usa il login - root. Questi ha il controllo - completo del sistema — compreso il completo - accesso a tutti i file di sistema e quelli di tutti gli utenti; ha la - possibilità di cambiare la password degli utenti esistenti, di aggiungere - nuovi utenti, installare e disinstallare il software e molto - altro. Normalmente l'amministratore è il responsabile del corretto - funzionamento del sistema, così se avete problemi dovete chiedere a lui. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Anche se siete l'unico utente del vostro computer (ad esempio se questo - è la vostra workstation personale), cioè siete anche l'amministratore, è - importante che creiate un account normale e che lo usiate per il lavoro - quotidiano, usando l'accesso come root solo quando realmente necessario - per la manutenzione del sistema; visto che root può fare tutto è facile - combinare pasticci che possono avere conseguenze - disastrose. Immaginatevi l'accesso di root come una sorta di incantesimo - che vi dona un potere immenso con il quale, solo muovendo le mani, - potete creare o distruggere intere città, e visto che è molto semplice - muovere le mani, anche in maniera pericolosa, non è una buona idea di - invocare questa magia quando non necessario anche se la sensazione di - potere può apparire meravigliosa. - - - - - File e nomi dei file - - Come in molti altri sistemi operativi anche in UNIX esiste il concetto di - file, che è un insieme di informazioni a cui viene - dato un nome (il nome file). Esempi di file possono - essere la vostra ricerca di storia, un messaggio di posta elettronica o un - programma che può essere eseguito, ma essenzialmente tutto ciò che si - trova sul disco è salvato su un file individuale. - - - Nomi dei file - - I file vengono identificati dal loro nome; ad esempio il file che - contiene il testo del vostro intervento alla conferenza potrebbe essere - salvato con il nome talk.txt. Non esiste un formato - standard per i nomi dei file come nell'MS-DOS e in altri sistemi - operativi; in generale un nome di file può contenere qualsiasi carattere - (eccetto il carattere / — vedi la discussione sui nomi dei path - più avanti) ed è limitato a 256 carattere. - - - IMPORTANTE - - A differenza dell'MS-DOS, i nome dei file in UNIX sono sensibili alle - maiuscole (in gergo si dice case-sensitive): - miofile.txt e MioFile.txt - vengono considerati come due file differenti. - - - - Dovreste anche conoscere alcune convenzioni tipiche di UNIX, per le quali, - pur non essendo obbligatorie, è buona norma seguirle. - - - - la prima è quella di usare il formato - nome.estensione, dove l'estensione indica il - tipo di file; ad esempio l'estensione txt è - normalmente usata per i file contenenti testo semplice, mentre - l'estensione jpeg è usata per le immagini nel - formato JPEG e via così. In particolare il File - Manager di GNOME - Nautilus) usa le estensioni per - determinare il tipo del file. Potete vedere o modificare le - estensioni riconosciute da GNOME - selezionando la sezione Document - HandlersTipi - MIME - nell'Pannello di controllo di - GNOME. Notate che la convenzione standard in UNIX è - di non usare alcuna estensione per i programmi - eseguibili (cioè i file dei programmi). - - - - - - I file e le directory il cui nome comincia con un punto (.) sono - normalmente file di configurazione; ad - esempio GNOME tiene tutte le sue impostazioni in molti file - contenuti nella directory .gnome e - .gnome-desktop nella home directory - dell'utente. Poiché normalmente non c'è necessità di modificare - questi file direttamente e neanche di conoscere i loro nomi e - posizioni precisamente Nautilus non - li mostra sempre (così come tutti gli altri file manager, NDT); è - possibile modificare questo comportamento come descritto nel - Manuale di - Nautilus. - - - - - - i file il cui nome termina con una tilde (~) sono normalmente file - di backup creati dalle applicazioni; ad esempio quando modificate - un file miofile.txt con - emacs, questo salva la versione - precedente nel file miofile.txt~. - - - - - - - Metacaratteri - - - Quando date comandi dalla linea di comando potete usare i cosiddetti - metacaratteri (in inglese wildcards) invece del - nome del file esatto. Il metacarattere più comune è l'asterisco (*), il - quale comprende ogni sequenza di simboli, compresa una stringa vuota: ad - esempio il comando ls *.txt mostrerà tutti i file con - estensione txt, mentre il comando rm - chapter* cancellerà tutti i file il cui nome comincia con - chapter (ls e - rm sono i comandi di UNIX per elencare ed eliminare i - file). Un altro metacarattere molto utile è il punto interrogativo (?) - il quale comprende ogni singolo simbolo: ad esempio rm - chapter?.txt eliminerà i file - chapter1.txt e chapter2.txt ma - non chapter10.txt. - - - La maggior parte dei nuovi utenti di GNOME preferiscono usare il - File Manager di GNOME per operare con i file - invece che lavorare direttamente dalla linea di comando. I metacaratteri - possono essere usati anche da Nautilus nelle - finestre di dialogo seleziona e mostra. - - - - Usare gli spazi, le virgole e altro nei nomi dei file - - Come detto prima un nome di file può non contenere solo lettere e numeri - ma anche spazi, virgole e quant'altro — in pratica ogni carattere - tranne lo slash (/). Comunque se state lavorando con questi file usando - la riga di comando dovete porre particolare attenzione perché per - evitare problemi dovete usare le virgolette semplici (queste -> ') per - indicare i nomi che contengono caratteri che non siano semplici lettere, - numeri o punti: per cancellare il file My file - dovete digitare rm 'My file' invece che rm - My file. - - - Naturalmente se invece state usando un programma grafico come il - File Manager di GNOME per cancellare il file - basta che lo trasciniate nel cestino. - - - - - - Directory e percorsi - - Struttura delle directory - - Affrontiamo adesso il concetto di directory. Una - directory è un insieme di file. Può essere pensata - come una cartella contenente tanti fogli. A queste - directory vengono assegnati dei nomi per identificarle. Inoltre vengono - tenute in una struttura ad albero di modo che delle directory possano - contenerne altre. La directory iniziale viene chiamata directory - root e viene indicata con il simbolo / e - contiene tutti i file del vostro sistema. - - - Persorsi - - Un percorsi è il nome completo di - un file, contenente cioè non solo il nome ma anche la sua posizione; è - costituito dal nome del file, preceduto dalla directory che lo - contiene preceduta a sua volta dalla directory che contiene - questa e via così. Un percorso tipico è - /home/sasha/talk.txt che indica il file - talk.txt nella directory - sasha la quale a sua volta è una sotto-directory - di /home. - - - Come potete vedere, la directory e il nome del file vengono separate - da una slash singola (/); per questa ragione i nomi dei file non - possono contenere il carattere slash (/). Gli utenti che provengono - dal sistema operativo MS-DOS troveranno familiare questa convenzione, - anche se in quel sistema operativo veniva invece usata la back-slash - (\). La directory che contiene quella attuale viene chiamata la - directory superiore. Ad esempio in questo caso la - directory home è la directory superiore di - sasha. - - - Ogni utente ha una propria home directory che normalmente è la - directory che contiene tutti i file personali dell'utente; normalmente - queste directory si trovano dentro di /home e - prendono il nome dall'utente proprietario così che la home directory - dell'utente sasha sarà - /home/sasha. - - - - - Nomi relativi delle directory - - In ogni momento i comandi inseriti vengono considerati - relativi alla vostra directory corrente, la quale - la potete pensare come la directory in cui trovate in quel - momento. Quando entrate nel sistema all'inizio la directory - corrente è la vostra home directory — per il solito utente sasha - sarà /home/sasha. Ogni volta che dovete riferirvi - ad un file potete farlo riferendovi alla vostra directory corrente - invece che specificarne il percorso completo. - - - Ad esempio se la vostra directory corrente è - /home/sasha, e qui avete un file chiamato - talk.txt potete farci riferimento solo con il suo - nome: il comando emacs talk.txt dato dalla directory - /home>sasha è equivalente a emacs - /home/sasha/talk.txt (emacs è un - potente editor per file di testo, forse poco indicato per nuovi utenti - che possono preferire cose più semplici come - gnotepad, ma per gli utenti avanzati - emacs risulta indispensabile). - - - Allo stesso modo, se in /home/sasha avete una - sotto-directory chiamata papers nella quale si - trova il file chiamato fieldtheory.txt, potete - riferirvi a questo come papers/fieldtheory.txt. - - - Se il primo carattere che usate quando vi riferite ad un file non è lo - slash (/) (come papers/fieldtheory.txt) allora - state usando un percorso relativo, cioè il nome è relativo alla - directory corrente. In altre parole se iniziate il nome del vostro file - con il carattere slash (/) il sistema lo interpreta come un percorso - completo — cioè un percorso che comprende l'indirizzo completo - fino al file partendo dalla directory root /. Questo modo di indicare i - file si dice percorso assoluto. - - - - Convenzioni sui percorsi - - Di seguito alcune convenzioni standard usate negli indirizzi: - - - ~/ — la directory home dell'utente - - - ./ — la directory corrente - - - ../ — parent of the current directory - - - Ad esempio se la directory corrente di sasha è - /home/sasha/papers, si può riferire al file - /home/sasha/talk.txt come - ~/talk.txt oppure come - ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permessi - - Ogni file sul vostro sistema ha un proprietario (NDT: - owner in inglese) — uno degli utenti (normalmente quello che ha - creato effettivamente il file stesso) e un sistema di - permessi che regolano l'accesso al file. - - - Per il file normali esistono tre tipi di permessi di accesso: lettura - (read), scrittura (write) ed esecuzione (execute), il quale ha senso solo - per i file eseguibili). Questi permessi possono essere impostati - separatamente per tre categorie di utenti: il proprietario del file, gli - utenti del gruppo che possiede il file e tutti gli altri. L'argomento dei - gruppi di utenti va al di là degli scopi di questo scritto e gli altri due - si spiegano da soli.. - In questo modo, se i permessi sul file - /home/sasha/talk.txt sono impostati per leggere e - scrivere per l'utente sasha, che ne è anche il proprietario, e di sola - lettura per tutti gli altri solo sasha potrà modificarlo. - - - - Ogni file appena creato "eredita" i permessi standard, normalmente lettura - e scrittura per l'utente e sola lettura per tutti gli altri. Potete - visualizzare questi permessi usando il File Manager di - GNOME cliccando sopra al file con il tasto destro e - scegliendo Proprietà nel menù a comparsa e poi - la voce Permessi. Usando questa finestra di dialogo - potete anche cambiare i permessi — basta cliccare su un quadratino - che rappresenta un permesso per modificarlo. Naturalmente solo il - proprietario del file o l'amministratore possono cambiare i permessi di un - file. Gli utenti avanzati possono anche cambiare i permessi standard che - vengono assegnati a tutti i nuovi file — leggete la pagina del - manuale della vostra shell predefinita (normalmente - bash, csh o tcsh) - e cercate il comando umask. - - - - Un file può anche avere permessi con speciali proprietà come UID, GID e il - bit sticky che servono solo per gli utenti avanzati — - non li cambiate a meno che non sappiate esattamente quello che fate. (Se - siete curiosi: questi permessi sono usati normalmente sui file eseguibili - per permettere ad utenti normali di eseguire alcuni - comandi che devono leggere o modificare file a cui l'utente stesso - normalmente non potrebbe accedere). - - - - Così come i file anche le directory hanno i permessi con le stesse tre - possibilità: lettura, scrittura ed esecuzione. Nel caso delle directory - però questi tre permessi hanno significati diversi: il permesso di - scrittura per una directory significa la possibilità di - elencare i file presenti nella directory oppure di effettuarvi ricerche; - il permesso di scrittura significa la possibilità di creare - ed eliminare file all'interno della directory e il permesso di - esecuzione dà la possibilità di accedere ai file della - directory. - - - Notate che i permessi dati ad un file dipendono dai permessi associati - alla directory nella quale si trova il file: per poter leggere un file - l'utente deve avere il permesso di scrittura sul file stesso e il permesso - di esecuzione per la directory. In questo modo, nel caso in - cui l'utente sasha non vuole che nessun altro possa vedere i suoi file può - semplicemente eliminare il permesso di esecuzione per la sua directory - home per tutti gli altri utenti; nessun altro (escluso chiaramente - l'amministratore) potrà così leggere i suoi file, indipendentemente dai - permessi di questi. - - - Una spiegazione dettagliata del sistema di permessi può essere letta, ad - esempio nella pagina info - del pacchetto GNU File Utilities. - - - - - Link simbolici - - Oltre ai file regolari, Unix possiede anche dei file speciali chiamati - link simbolici (in inglese/gergo - symlinks), file che non contengono dati ma che sono - soltanto puntatori o scorciatoie - ad altri file. Ad esempio sasha può avere un symlink chiamato - ft.txt che punta al file - papers/fieldtheory.txt in modo che, quando un - programma accede al file ft.txt verrà aperto invece - l'altro file papers/fieldtheory.txt. Come potete - capire dall'esempio, i link simbolici e i file reali - possono avere nomi differenti e possono trovarsi in directory diverse. - - - Notate che cancellare, muovere o cambiare nome ai link simbolici non ha - alcun effetto sui file reali: se sasha prova a cancellare il file - ft.txt verrà cancellato il link simbolico ma il file - papers/fieldtheory.txt rimarrà invece invariato. Allo - stesso modo i permessi sui link simbolici non hanno significato per gli - altri perché sono i permessi su quest'ultimi a determinare se un utente - può o meno accedervi. - - - - I link simbolici possono puntare anche alle directory; ad esempio nel - server FTP di GNOME(ftp.gnome.org) c'è un file - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, che è - semplicemente un link simbolico alla directory - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53 — come - avrete capito October GNOME è solo un altro nome per la - versione 1.0.53 di GNOME. - - - - Montare e smontare i dischi - - Come abbiamo accennato prima, le directory di un sistema Unix vengono - organizzate secondo una struttura ad albero, struttura nella quale il - livello più basso è rappresentato dalla directory - /. A differenza di altri sistemi operativi, come ad - esempio l'MS-DOS, non esistono dei nomi speciali per i file presenti sul - vostro disco floppy o sul vostro CD-ROM: tutti i - file accessibili dal vostro sistema devono apparire nella struttura delle - directory che parte dalla root /. - - - Per questa ragione, prima di poter accedere ai file presenti su un - dischetto floppy o su un CD-ROM dovete dare al vostro sistema un comando - per incorporare il contenuto di questi dischi nella - directory principale, comando che viene detto montare - il dischetto (o il CD-ROM). Potete pensare questo comando come ad - un'analogia con il collegamento hardware del lettore al vostro - computer. Normalmente il contenuto del CD-ROM apparirà sotto il nome - /mnt>cdrom, il floppy sotto - /mnt/floppy, directory che vengono chiamate - mount point e che vengono definite in un file di - configurazione speciale, /etc/fstab. Questo non - significa però che il sistema copi il contenuto del CD-ROM o del floppy - nelle directory suddette, ma che rappresenta il - contenuto di questi dentro quella directory: ad esempio, se un programma - prova a leggere il file /mnt/cdrom/index.html il - sistema cercherà il file index.html presente nel CD-ROM. - - - In breve, prima che possiate accedere ai file presenti su un lettore - removibile come un CD-ROM o un floppy, dovete montare - questi dispositivi. E di conseguenza prima di poter togliere i - dischi da questi lettori dovete smontarli. - - - Quando usate GNOME normalmente non dovete preoccuparvi di montare e - smontare i dischi perché GNOME legge i file di configurazione e mette le - icone di tutti i dischi sulla scrivania. In questo modo cliccando sopra - l'icona verranno automaticamente montati i dischi corrispondenti, sempre - che non siano già stati montati e avvia il file manager nella giusta - directory; cliccando invece con il tasto destro del mouse e scegliendo il - comando Espelli il disco dal menù a comparsa - GNOME smonterà il disco e poi lo espellerà. È possibile anche montare o - smontare un disco sempre cliccando sopra l'icona corrispondente e - scegliendo Monta il disco o Smonta - il disco dal menù a comparsa oppure usando l'applet - MontaDischi. - - - Notate che non potete smontare un disco se questo è in uso da parte di - qualche programma; ad esempio se avete una finestra terminale aperta su - una directory del disco che volete smontare otterrete il messaggio - d'errore device occupato se provate a smontarlo. - - - In ogni caso GNOME non può impedirvi di espellere un disco usando il - bottone fisico d'espulsione — in questo caso è vostra - responsabilità smontare il disco prima di espellerlo. Per - alcuni CD e per i dischi ZIP il sistema blocca il bottone d'espulsione se - il disco è montato ma per i floppy questo è tecnicamente impossibile. - - NDT: - - almeno nei computer del tipo PC-Compatibile - - - - - - IMPORTANTE - - Se espellete un floppy usando il bottone del lettore senza smontarlo - prima potreste perdere i vostri dati. - - - - - Alcuni sistemi possono avere in esecuzione programmi come - supermount o - magicdev con i quali i dischi vengono montati - automaticamente quando viene inserito un disco e smontati quando non - vengono più usati per un certo periodo; in questo caso non dovrete - preoccuparvi di montare o smontare i dischi e neanche di leggere questa - sezione di questo manuale. - - - Permettere agli utenti di montare e smontare i dischi può portare alcuni - problemi di sicurezza; per questa ragione molti sistemi sono configurati - in modo che solo l'utente root possa compiere queste azioni. Questa è la - ragione più probabile dei messaggi di errore che ottenete quando provate a - montare un disco, della qual cosa dovete informare il vostro - amministratore di sistema. - - - Se il computer in questione è la vostra workstation personale o il vostro - computer casalingo e non siete particolarmente preoccupati dei problemi - legati alla sicurezza potete dare il permesso di montare e smontare i - dischi agli utenti ordinari. Il modo più semplice è quello di usare il - programma linuxconf (che - però può essere usato solo da root). Selezionate il disco che volete far - montare e smontare ai vostri utenti nella sezione Access local - drive; nella sotto-sezione Opzioni - selezionate l'opzione User Mountable. A questo punto - il disco potrà essere montato dagli utenti. - - - Se non avete a disposizione - linuxconf dovete - modificare da soli il file /etc/fstab per permettere - l'uso da parte degli utenti; aggiungete l'attributo user al - disco. Ad esempio: - - - se il vostro file fstab contiene una linea simile a: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - aggiungete la parola user nella quarta colonna: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - Dischi e dispositivi (device) - - Nei Sistemi Operativi della famiglia Unix la parola - dispositivo (ma è molto più diffusa, conosciuta ed usata la - corrispondente parola inglese device) viene usata per - indicare tutte le periferiche connesse al vostro computer, comprendendo - perciò hard-disk, lettori CD-Rom, schede video e audio, porte seriali e - parallele e molto altro. Ogni dispositivo ha un nome proprio come ad - esempio /dev/hda. Elenchiamo i nomi dei dispositivi - più comuni (usati per Linux perché altri Unix usano nomi differenti): - - - - - /dev/hd* (dove *=a,b,c, …): sono i - dispositivi connessi al bus IDE, come ad esempio gli hard-disk, i - lettori di CD-Rom e ZIP che usano questo tipo di bus. Il nome - /dev/hda indica il primo disco del controller IDE - (normalmente il disco denominato master o anche disco - C: sotto Windows), /dev/hdb è - il disco slave, cioè il secondo disco del primo canale - del controller, disco che può anche essere un lettore CD-Rom e via - così. Vedi anche la nota più - avanti a proposito dei dischi ZIP. - - - - - - /dev/sd* (dove *=a,b,c, …): sono i - dispositivi connessi al bus SCSI, normalmente hard-disk. - - - - - - NOTA - - Se le sigle IDE e SCSI sono per voi sconosciute questa è una breve - spiegazione. Esistono due tipi di interfacce per gli hard-disk e altri - dispositivi simili: IDE (e i suoi cuginetti come EIDE, ATAPI ed altri) - e SCSI. La seconda offre maggiori prestazioni ma è più costosa e viene - usata principalmente sui server, per cui se non sapete quale tipo - abbiate voi a disposizione molto probabilmente state usando IDE. - - - - - - /dev/fd* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono i lettori dei - floppy: /dev/fd0 è il primo lettore (che - corrisponde al disco A: di Windows), - /dev/fd1 è il secondo (B: di - Windows), e via così. - - - - - /dev/lp* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono le porte - parallele. Comunemente queste porte vengono usate per connettere le - stampanti al computer. /dev/lp0 corrisponde a - LPT1 di Windows, /dev/lp1 a - LPT2, e via così. - - - - - /dev/ttyS* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono le porte - seriali, usate comunemente per connettere mouse oppure - modem. /dev/ttyS0 corrisponde a - COM1 di Windows, /dev/ttyS1 - a COM2, e via così. - - - - - /dev/audio and /dev/dsp - — questi due nomi di dispositivi vengono usati tutti e due per - la scheda audio, ma senza equivalenza perché vengono usati per due - differenti tipi di file sonori. - - - - - È uso comune avere dei link simbolici come - /dev/floppy, /dev/modem e - /dev/cdrom che puntano al dispositivo reale - corrispondente al vostro lettore floppy, al modem e al lettore di CD-Rom - rispettivamente. - - - Dovrete usare questi nomi raramente poiché se volete accedere ad un file - che si trova su un floppy non dovrete usare il dispositivo (come, nel - nostro esempio, /dev/fd0 oppure - /dev/floppy quale che sia) ma dovrete prima montare - il dispositivo così da poter vedere il suo contenuto dentro ad una - sotto-directory (che potrà essere ad esempio - /mnt/floppy oppure /floppy) - nella directory principale; vedi anche per - maggiori informazioni. Molto probabilmente dovrete usare questi nomi solo - quando dovrete configurare un nuovo programma; ad esempio un programma per - spedire fax potrebbe chiedervi il nome del dispositivo del vostro modem, - che potrebbe essere /dev/ttyS1 oppure il link - simbolico /dev/modem. - - - In puro spirito Unix esiste anche un dispositivo - /dev/null che funziona esattamente come un - buco nero poiché tutto ciò che viene inviato a questo viene - completamente cancellato. Ad esempio, se non volete essere disturbati dai - messaggi di errore potete inviarli a /dev/null e non - li vedrete più -:). - - - - Partizioni - - È possibile suddividere un hard-disk (o altri dispositivi simili) in - parti che si comportano in tutti gli usi come dischi differenti anche se - fisicamente stanno si tratta dello stesso disco. Queste parti vengono - chiamate partizioni (Windows usa il nome dischi - logici). Ad esempio è possibile suddividere un solo disco in - diverse partizioni ed installare in ognuna diversi sistemi operativi - poiché è possibile formattare ogni partizione in modo indipendente l'una - dalle altre. Questo partizionamento viene normalmente - fatto all'atto dell'installazione dei sistemi operativi; seguite le - istruzioni di installazioni per maggiori informazioni. - - - Se il vostro hard-disk è stato partizionato ogni partizione viene - considerata come un disco diverso: ad esempio se - /dev/hda è il vostro disco principale allora la - prima partizione è /dev/hda1, la seconda - /dev/hda2 e via così. - - - Partizionamento dei dischi ZIP - - - Per ragioni a noi sconosciute i dischi ZIP pre-formattati usando i - programmi per Windows della ditta IOMEGA produttrice di questi dischi, - sono partizionati in modo al quanto strano: hanno al loro interno una - sola partizione (di tipo Windows, chiaramente) che però ha il numero - 4. Così se il vostro lettore di dischi ZIP è - /dev/hdc, il dispositivo corretto che dovrete - usare è /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - - Interfacce utente grafiche: X Window System, gestori di finestre e - ambienti di desktop - - - Unix è un sistema modulare, che consiste cioè di molti componenti che - possono essere scelti dall'utente (o dall'amministratore del sistema) a - seconda dei gusti e delle necessità. In particolare ci sono molti livelli - di software responsabili dell'interfaccia grafica, livelli che sono - l'X Window System, i gestori di finestre e gli ambienti di - desktop. - - L'X Window System (conosciuto anche - semplicemente come X o X11) è il componente di Unix che gestisce tutti i - livelli grafici di base — in particolare disegna le icone, gli - sfondi e le finestre dove girano i programmi. Senza X potete usare solo - l'interfaccia grafica. X11 imposta la risoluzione dello schermo, la - quantità di colori disponibili, muove il cursore del mouse nello schermo e - altro; serve cioè come base per tutti gli altri componenti - dell'interfaccia utente grafica come i gestori di finestre e gli ambienti - di desktop. - - - I gestori di finestre estendono la possibilità dell'X - Window System disegnando bordi e bottoni intorno alle finestre, - permettendo così all'utente di muovere, chiudere, nascondere e - ridimensionare le finestre. Normalmente X11 deve essere usato sempre - insieme ad un gestore di finestre perché senza uno di questi rimane quasi - inutilizzabile. Esistono molti gestori di finestre per X11, dei quali i - più conosciuti sono fvwm, - mwm, kwm (usato da - KDE), Enlightenment, e - Sawfish. - - - Infine ci sono gli ambienti di desktop che vanno un - passo avanti dei gestori di finestre in quanto aggiungono un file manager - grafico dal quale potete usare il metodo drag-n-drop sui - vari elementi, un pannello contenente i programmi maggiormente usati e un - insieme di programmi e di utilità. Esistono alcuni ambienti di desktop - disponibili per tutte le versioni di Unix, delle quali le più conosciute - sono GNOME, KDE e CDE (che però verrà presto - rimpiazzato da GNOME). - - - Molti ambienti di desktop usano un gestore di finestre loro proprio: ad - esempio KDE contiene il suo gestore di finestre - kwm (anche se è possibile usare KDE con un - altro gestore di finestre nella pratica ben pochi utenti lo fanno). GNOME - non ha invece un proprio gestore di finestre, il che permette ad ogni - utente di usare quello già installato nel sistema. Per rendere le cose più - semplici possibili normalmente il gestore di finestre - Sawfish viene distribuito insieme a GNOME come - predefinito ma potete cambiarlo usando il Pannello di - Controllo, anche se dovete usare un gestore che sia - compatibile con GNOME per poter usare alcune caratteristiche come la - gestione delle sessioni, l'applet taskbar e altro. - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wheeler.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wheeler.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 720d3ae..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wheeler.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,285 +0,0 @@ - - - - Una introduzione a GNOME - - Cos'è GNOME - - GNOME è un ambiente desktop "user-friendly", che permette agli utenti di - usare e configurare faclmente il proprio computer. GNOME include un - pannello (per lanciare le applicazione e mostrare informazioni), un - desktop (dove possono essere posizionati dati e applicazioni), una serie di - utilità e applicazioni standard, e una serie di convenzioni che rendono - facile la cooperazione ela consistenza tra le applicazioni. Gli utenti di - altri sistemi operativi o ambienti si sentiranno a proprio agio utilizzando - il potnete ambiente grafico fornito da GNOME. - - - GNOME è completamente software libero, il codice sorgente, sviluppato da - centinaia di programmatori di tutto il mondo, è liberamente disponibile. Se - volete sapere di piu' sul progetto GNOME visitate il sito web di GNOME. - - - GNOME fornisce molti vantaggi agli utenti. GNOME rende facile usare e - configurare applicazioni grazie ad una semplice e potente ambiente - interfaccia grafica. - - - GNOME è altamente configurabile, permettendovi di impostare il vostro - desktop come volete. Il manager di sessione di GNOME, ricorda le - impostazioni precedentemente utilizzate di modo che una volta che avrete - impostato le cose come volete, esse rimaranno come le avete definite. - GNOME supporta molte lingue e potete aggiungerne altre senza modificare - il software. GNOME supporta anche diversi protocolli Drag and Drop per - fornire la massima interoperabilità anche con applicazioni che non sono - compatibili con GNOME. - - - GNOME fornisce anche una serie di vantaggi per gli sviluppatori, cosa che - indirettamente favorisce anche gli utenti. Gli sviluppatori non necessitano - di costose licenze per rendere le proprie applicazioni GNOME compliant. - Infatti GNOME è vendor neutral - nessun componente dell'interfaccia è - controllato da una sola azienda o presenta clausole che ne impediscano - la modifica e la redistribuzione. Le applicazioni GNOME possono essere - costruite con una varietà di linguaggi di programmazione, cosicchè non - siete obbligati adadotttare un singolo linguaggio. GNOME usa l'architettura - CORBA (Common Object Request Broker Architecture) per permettere ai - componenti software di interoperare facilmente, a prescindere dal linguaggi - di programmazione usati per implementarli o dalla macchina sulla quale sono - eseguiti. Infine, GNOME funziona su diversi sistemi operativi di tipo - Unix, Linux incluso. - - - GNOME è un acronimo per GNU Network Object Model Environment, quindi GNOME - è parte del più grande progetto GNU. Il progetto GNU è stato fondato nel - 1984 per sviluppare un sistema di tipo Unix completamente libero. Se volete - conoscere più a fondo il progetto GNU potete consultare il sito web GNU. - - - - Informazioni su questa Guida - - Questa guida utente è disegnata per aiutarvi a familiarizzare con GNOME - facilmente. Sia i nuovi utenti che gli utenti esperti possono beneficiare - di questa guida. Se è la prima volta che vedete GNOME o addirittura un - computer, vi farete un'idea di come usare il vostro desktop. Se siete - utenti già esperti, potete utilizzare i trucchi per esperti, che vi - aiuteranno a familiarizzare con GNOME. - - - Sebbene questo documento sia stato originariamente scritto in Inglese, ci - sono molte traduzioni della guida e altre saranno disponibili in futuro. - Se volete avere questa guida in un'altra lingua, dovrete consulatre - la distribuzione del vostro sistema operativo o visitare il sito web GNOME per - trovare altre informazioni sulle traduzioni. - - - Questa guida descrive GNOME 1.4, che è l'ultima (Marzo 2001) versione - di GNOME. GNOME si sta sviluppando rapidamente, quindi nel momento in - cui leggerete questo, alcune parti della guida potrebbero non essere - aggiornate; in questi casi, perfavore utilizzate l'aiuto on-line delle - applicazioni con cui vi trovate in difficoltà. - - - Questo manuale è stato scritto da Dave Mason (dcm@redhat.com), - Chris Lyttle (chris@wilddev.net) and Alexander Kirillov - (kirillov@math.sunysb.edu) con l'aiuto di altri membri dello - Gnome Documentation Project. Cortesemente, inviate ogni commento o - suggerimento su questo manuale allo Gnome Documention - Project mandando una email a - docs@gnome.org. Potete anche fornire i vostri commenti online - usando la Gnome Documentation - Status Table. - - - - - - - - GNOME Quick Start - - Una prima occhiata a GNOME - - Figura 1 mostra un esempio di GNOME in esecuzione. - GNOME è estremamente configurabile, perciò il vostro schermo può essere - molto differente. - -
- Schermata di esempio di GNOME. - - Schermata di esempio di GNOME. - - - -
- - - Quick Start - - La lunga bar nel parte bassa della figura 1 è un - pannello di GNOME, esso contiene una serie di menu, utili applets, e - pulsanti per lanciare applicazioni. Il pulsante contenente il piede - stilizzato è il pulsante del Menu Principale (il tipo di pulsante più - comune); semplicemente cliccando sul pulsante del Menu Principale vedrete - un Menu precaricato di applicazioni e opzioni, compreso il comando di - logout. Le applets del pannello sono priccoli programmi disegnati per - essere integrati nel pannello, per esempio, la Desk Guide applet nella - parte più a destra mostra 4 desktop virtuali dove mettere le vostre - applicazioni. - I pulsanti di avvio sono pulsanti che, premuti, eseguono immediatamente i - programmi (compreso le applicazioni di utilità e d'ufficio di GNOME). In - questo esempio il pulsante con la cassetta degli attrezzi lancia il GNOME - Control Center (che serve per configurare il vostro sistema), il pulsante con - il punto di domanda lancia la Guida di GNOME (per consultare la - documentazione), il pulsante con lo schermo lancia un terminale (se preferite - usare un'interfaccia a caratteri), e il pulsante con il mondo lancia il vostro - browser web. Le frecce ad ogni lato del pannello, permettono di nascondere (e - scoprire) il pannello. - - - Oltre il pannello c'e' il Desktop. Potete semplicemente trascinare oggetti - dal pannello sul desktop che usate più frequentemente e basterà fare doppio - click su un oggetto (con il pulsante sinistro del mouse) per usarlo: - - - - - Se l'oggetto è un programma, esso verrà lanciato. - - - - - Se è un file dati, verra lanciata l'applicazione più idonea per - visualizzarlo. - - - - - Se è una cartella, il file manager verra lanciato ed esso mostrerà il - contenuto della cartella. Il vostro desktop probabilmente conterrà una - cartella chiamata "Home". Facendo doppio click su questa cartella verrà - lanciato Nautilus che mostrerà il contnuto della vostra cartella personale - (home directory). - - - - - Il file manager vi permette di manipolare i vostri files. La parte sinistra - della finestra mostra la cartella corrente con linguette per il sistema di - Aiuto, History e Annotazioni, e la parte destra mostra il contenuto della - cartella: - - - - - Per muovere un file o una cartella, semplicemente trascinatelo col mouse - e lasciatelo dove volete. - - - - - Per copiare un file o una cartella, premete il tasto CTRL - mentre trascinate. - - - - - Per lanciare un programma o editare un file, fateci doppio click sopra. - - - - - Per eseguire altre operazioni su un file (come rinominare o cancellare), - selezionatelo utilizzando il tasto destro del mouse e scegliete - l'operazione che desiderate dal menu che comparirà. Potete usare questo - metodo anche per selezionare l'applicazione col quale aprire il file. - - - - - Per selezionare più di un oggetto alla volta, cliccate sugli oggetti dopo - il primo tenendo premuto il tasto CTRL. - - - - - Potete facilemte spostare o copiare files tra cartelle lanciando due file - managere, ognuno impostato su una differente cartella. Se volete mettere - un file sul desktop basta sempliecemente trascinarlo dal file manager sul - desktop. Infatti trascinare e lasciare oggetti su altri oggetti, in GNOME, - succede "la cosa giusta", rendendo semplice portare a termine il lavoro. - - - GNOME è estremamante configurabile; per esempio, potete avere più pannelli - (orizzonatali e verticali), scegliere cosa metterci, e far sì che si - nascondano automaticamente. Ci sono molti applets che potete includere nel - pannello. Potete anche cambiare il look dello schermo; In altre parti di - questo documento descriveremo come. - - - GNOME segue diverse convenzioni UNIX di cui dovete tenere conto. Il pulsante - sinistro del mouse è usato per selezionare e trascinare gli oggetti. Il - pulsante destro del mouse mostra un menu relativo all'oggetto selezionato (se - applicabile). La maggior parte dei mouse UNIX hanno 3 tasti, il tasto centrale - è utilizzato per incollare il testo (se siete in un area di testo) o per - muovere gli oggetti. Se avete un mouse con due soli pulsanti, premete - simultaneamente i tasti destro e sinistro per simulare il terzo tasto. Per - copiare il testo usate il tasto sinistro per selezionare il testo che volete - copiare e poi premete il tasto centrale (o la rotella del mouse). - - - Quando è visualizzata a finestra di una applicazione, vedrete sui bordi - alcuni pulsanti utili per controllare la finestra. Questi includono pulsanti - per minimizzare, massimizare e chiudere la finestra. Il loro aspetto è - configurabile ed è controllato da un componente chiamato "Window Manager" - (gestore delle finestre). - - - Un esempio di stile per i bordi è il MicroGUI (Figura - 2) che è un tema per window manager utilizzato sia in Sawmill - che Enlightenment. Potete documentarvi sui gestori di finestre in . - - - Nello stile MicroGUI, la freccia rivolta verso il basso significa - minimizzare, la freccia rivolta verso l'alto massimizzare (usare tutto - lo schermo), il pulsante a X serve a chiudere la finestra, e il triangolo - fa comparire il menu Window. - -
- Stile bordo MicroGUI - - Stile bordo Clean - - - -
- - Se non avete mai usato prima un sistema Unix o Linux, potete trovare - una panoramica abbastanza utile in - Appendice A - - - La seguenti sezioni andranno più in dettaglio, descrivendo ogni componente - del sistema: il gestore di finestre, pannello, menu - principale, desktop, file manager, control - center e applets. - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wms.sgml b/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wms.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3ae6d06..0000000 --- a/gnome-users-guide/gnome-users-guide-1.4/it/wms.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ - - - - GNOME e i gestori di finestre - - I gestori di finestre - - In Unix e Linux tutte le applicazioni grafiche utilizzano il "X Window System" come - software di base tra l'hardware e l'interfaccia utente (GUI). Il gestore di - finestre è il software che controlla le finestre sullo schermo in un ambiente - X Window. Il posizionamento, i bordi e le decorazioni di qualunque finestre - sono gestiti dal gestore di finestre. GNOME interagisce con questo per - visualizzare sullo schermo le finestre delle applicazioni. - - - GNOME non dipende da nessun gestore di finestre particolare. Se decidete di - cambiarlo GNOME manterrà una interfaccia coerente alle vostre - applicazioni. GNOME lavora con il gestore di finestre per ottenere le - informazioni sulle finestre presenti sullo schermo. Ad ogni modo, per poter - utilizzare alcune peculiarità di GNOME è richiesto un window manager - compatibile. Tra queste l'applet Desk Guide così come il drag and drop tra i - desktop. Per i nuovi utenti raccomandiamo l'utilizzo di un gestore di - finestre compatibile con GNOME. - - - Ecco la lista dei gestori finestre che hanno compatibilità parziale o - completa quando questa guida è stata scritta: - - - - - Sawfish (chiamato precedentemente Sawmill) - - - - - IceWM - - - - - WindowMaker - - - - - Enlightenment - - - - - AfterStep - - - - - FVWM2 - - - - - Ci sono molti altri gestori di finestre che stanno includendo il supporto per - GNOME. Potete reperirlo nella GNOME Software Map. - - - - Cambiare gestore di finestre - - In qualunque momento è possibile cambiare il gestore di finestre utilizzato - selezionandolo dalla capplet Window Manager del GNOME Control - Center. Maggiori informazioni sono disponibili in . - - - IMPORTANTE - - Tenete bene a mente che se scegliete di utilizzare un gestore di finestre - che non è compatibile con GNOME non potrete trarre i benefici di alcune - caratteristiche offerte da GNOME. - - - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/Makefile.am b/introduction-to-gnome/C/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 59b5233..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -figdir = figures -docname = introduction-to-gnome -lang = C -omffile = introduction-to-gnome-C.omf -include $(top_srcdir)/xmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook -entities = \ - legal.xml diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/README b/introduction-to-gnome/C/README deleted file mode 100644 index 205e804..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -This directory contains "Introduction to GNOME" - short document to -get users familiar with GNOME. It has been updated for GNOME 2.2 - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/desktop.png b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/desktop.png deleted file mode 100644 index 796a512..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/desktop.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/microguiborder.png b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/microguiborder.png deleted file mode 100644 index a712c05..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/microguiborder.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/naut_iconview_window.png b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/naut_iconview_window.png deleted file mode 100644 index fe483f5..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/naut_iconview_window.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.png b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.png deleted file mode 100644 index db53970..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.xcf b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.xcf deleted file mode 100644 index 4ba3eff..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/titlebar_anno_window.xcf and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.png b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.png deleted file mode 100644 index f01eec4..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.xcf b/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.xcf deleted file mode 100644 index 1394082..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/C/figures/typical_anno_desktop.xcf and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome-C.omf b/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome-C.omf deleted file mode 100644 index 382db62..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome-C.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ - - - - - dcm@redhat.com (Dave Mason) - - - kirillov@math.sunysb.edu (Alexander Kirillov) - - - Introduction to GNOME - - - 2002-07-11 - - - - - Introduction to GNOME - - - user's guide - - - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.sgml b/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1aa71b2..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1253 +0,0 @@ - -
- - Introduction to Gnome - - - Gnome - Documentation Team - - - - - This document was last updated on April 25, 2001. - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Red Hat, Inc., David A. Wheeler, Alexander Kirillov - - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any Gnome documentation, and those trademarks - are made aware to the members of the Gnome Documentation - Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. - - - - - - - - - What is Gnome? - - Gnome is a user-friendly graphical desktop environment for UNIX and - UNIX-like systems that enables users to easily use and configure - their computers. Gnome includes a panel (for starting - applications and displaying status), a desktop (where data and - applications can be placed), a set of standard desktop tools and - applications, and a set of conventions that make it easy for - applications to cooperate and be consistent with each other. - Users of other operating systems or environments should feel - right at home using the powerful graphics-driven environment - Gnome provides. Gnome runs on a number of UNIX-like operating - systems, including Linux, FreeBSD, and Solaris. - - Gnome is completely open source (free software) developed by - hundreds of programmers around the world. Both the source code - and ready-to-run binaries of Gnome are available for download on - the Internet; they are distributed under the terms of GNU General Public - License (and its cousins, Lesser General Public License and - Free Documentation - License for libraries and documentation - respectively). In particular, this means that everyone is free - to use, copy or distribute Gnome. If you would like to learn - more about the Gnome project please visit the Gnome web site. - - - Gnome is highly configurable, enabling you to set your desktop - the way you want it to look and feel. Gnome supports many human - languages, and more are added every month. Gnome even supports - several Drag and Drop protocols for maximum interoperability - with non-Gnome applications. - - - - Gnome comes from the acronym for the GNU Network Object Model - Environment (GNOME). Gnome is a part of the larger GNU project, - started in 1984 to develop a completely free UNIX-like operating - system. For more information, visit the GNU Website. - - - This guide describes Gnome 1.4 which the latest (as of March - 2001) release of Gnome. - - - - - - About This Guide - - This guide gives you a short introduction to Gnome. It is not - intended to cover all details of Gnome; if you need more - information, you should read detailed manuals listed in . Also, this guide assumes you already have - Gnome installed; if you need help installing Gnome, please check - the instructions on Gnome Website. - - - - This guide was written by the members of Gnome - Documentation Project (GDP). If you have any comments or - suggestions about this guide - or if you can offer any other help in improving or translating - Gnome documentation, please send an e-mail to - docs@gnome.org, or visit GDP Web - Site. - - The authors of this guide assume that you are - using the default configuration of Gnome (that is, default GTK - theme and sawfish window manager with - MicroGUI theme). Gnome is highly - configurable, so it is easy to change not only the look but also - the behavior of Gnome; however, we recommend that you do so only - after you already have some experience with Gnome. - - - - - Mouse Conventions Used in This Guide - - Before describing Gnome, let us introduce some terms used not - only in this guide but in all Gnome documents. Most importantly, - we need to clarify the use of mouse buttons and clicks. - - - Most Gnome documents assume that you are using a standard (for - UNIX) 3-button mouse and talk about left, right, and middle - mouse buttons; if a document says click without - explicitly specifying the button, the left button is - assumed. Some documents use notations mouse button - 1, mouse button 2 and mouse button - 3 (or MB1, MB2, MB3 for short) for left, middle, and - right buttons respectively. - - - If you are using a two-button mouse, you can emulate the middle - mouse button by pressing left and right buttons simultaneoulsy; - if you have a wheel mouse, the wheel can be used in place of the - middle mouse button. - - - You can switch the roles of the buttons using Gnome - Control Center. Many left-handers choose to reverse the - right and left buttons. If you have done so, you need to use the - right mouse button whenever document instructs you to click, and use - left mouse button whenever a document talks - about right-clicking or mouse button 3. - - - If you use a mouse with some unusual placement of buttons, a - trackball, or some other input device, you need to find out - which buttons correspond to right, - left and middle; this information - can usually be found in the manual which came with your - device. Usually, left button (MB1) is the one - under your index finger. - - - - - - - - First glance at Gnome: Desktop and Panel - - shows an example of Gnome - running. Gnome is very configurable, so your screen may look - quite different. - - -
- Sample Gnome Display. - - Sample Gnome Display - - - -
- - - - Panel - - The long bar at the bottom of is - a Gnome Panel. It contains a number of useful things, such as - - - The Main Menu: this is the - button with the stylized footprint. Clicking this button - brings up a menu containing all Gnome applications - and commands, including the logout command. - - - - - Application launchers: these are buttons that start - various programs. For example, the toolbox button - starts the Gnome Control Center - (for configuring your system). - - - - - Panel applets: these are are tiny programs designed to - work inside the Panel. For example, the - clock applet on the far right - shows the current time, and - tasklist applet (in the - middle of the panel) shows the list of all application - windows on your desktop (this will be discussed in - detail in ). - - - - - As with all Gnome components, Panel is highly - configurable: you can add or remove application launchers and - applets, edit the Main Menu, change Panel - background, or even create new Panels. For example, to move an - object, drag it to the new location using the middle mouse button; to configure - an object, get help on it, or remove it from the Panel, - right-click on it and select the appropriate item from the - pop-up menu. To hide the Panel when you are - not using it, click on one of the Hide - buttons (with small arrows) at the ends of the - Panel. - - More Panel operations are available from the - Panel menu, which you can open by - right-clicking in any empty space on the Panel (for example, - in the hide arrows) and selecting Panel - from the menu. The Panel menu also contains Panel manual, which describes - all these options and more. - - - - Desktop - - Everything outside the Panel is called - desktop. You can place icons for files, applications, - and other items on the desktop (a default collection of icons is - installed with Gnome), after which you can double-click on an item - to use it: - - - - - If the item is a program, that program will start. - - - - - If it is a data file, the appropriate program will start - up with that data loaded. - - - - - - If it is a directory, the File Manager will start and show - the contents of that directory. Your desktop will probably - have a icon showing a house and labeled - yourname's - Home. Double-clicking on this icon will start - the File Manager at your home directory. - - - - - The easiest way to place an item on the desktop is to - drag-and-drop a file from the File Manager window. This will be - discussed in more detail in . Once - the item is placed on the desktop, you can move it around the - desktop using the left mouse button, or you can click on it - with the right mouse button to bring up the - pop-up menu which allows you to delete the - item or change its properties. - - - - - - Using the Mouse - - As you have already seen, you can do almost anything just by - clicking with your mouse. Here are some conventions which work - almost anywhere in Gnome: - - - - - Clicking on an item with the left mouse button selects - (hilights) it. If you need to select several objects, hold down - CTRL key while clicking. - - - Double-clicking on an item runs the default action for - this item (running an application, opening the file, etc.) - - - Clicking on an item with the right mouse button brings up - the context menu, which contains all the commands and - information available for this item. If you have selected - a group of items, right-clicking on any of them will bring - up the context menu which applies to all of these items. - - - You can - select text anywhere on the screen using the left mouse - button, and then insert this text into any other place on - the screen which accepts text input, by clicking with the - middle mouse button. - - - - In addition, clicking with the right mouse button on any empty - space on your desktop brings up a pop-up - menu, which allows you to change desktop background or other - properties, or add a new item to the desktop. Clicking on the - desktop with the middle mouse button produces the default menu - for your window manager (see ). - - - - - - Logging Out - - To log out of Gnome, click on the Main Menu - button and select Log out. Gnome - will prompt you for confirmation; it will also give you an - option to save the session — that is, information about - currently open applications and their location on the screen - will be saved, so that when you login next time, the same - applications will be in the same places (this only works for - applications which are fully Gnome-compliant). - - - - - - - - Working With Windows - - The graphical system used by all UNIX-like operating systems, X - Window System, allows you to have several windows on your - screen, with a different application running each in each - window. By itself, however, X Window System can only do very - low-level operations, so it is always used in conjunction with - another piece of software, called window manager. A window - manager provides windows' borders and buttons, allows you to - move, close, and resize windows, etc. Gnome can work with many - window managers. The most popular are: - - Enlightenment and - Sawfish (formerly known as - Sawmill). Each window manager can use many different styles of - window decorations and buttons (this is referred to as - window manager theme). Since it is impossible to - cover them all, in this section we only describe the default - window manager shipped with Gnome, - Sawfish, and its default theme - (MicroGUI). An example of the window border in - the MicroGUI theme is shown in - - - -
- Window Border in MicroGUI Style. - - Window border in MicroGUI style - - - -
- - - So, what can you do with windows? - - - - - Closing, minimizing, and maximizing windows - - - - To close a window, click on the button with the - small yellow x in the right side of the window - border. If the application has any unsaved data, it will - prompt you to save it. - - - To maximize a window, i.e. make it fill the entire - screen (except for the part taken by the panels), click - on the button with small yellow up - arrow. Clicking on this arrow once again will restore - the window to its original size. - - To minimize (hide or iconify) a window, click on the - button with small yellow down arrow. The - window will disappear from screen. However, it is not - lost forever — the application in this window continues - running, no data is lost — it is just temporarily - hidden. All minimized windows are shown in the tasklist - applet and can be restored as described below. - - A convenient alternative to minimizing windows is - shading them. When you shade a window, it - rolls up into its own title bar, so the - title bar is the only part of the window left on - screen. To shade a window, double-click on the title - bar; to unshade, double-click again. Try it! - - - - - - Raising and lowering windows - - - Windows on your screen can overlap, so that one of - the windows is on top of another. You can - raise a window (i.e., put it on top of - all others) by clicking on the window title bar. You can - also switch a window from raised to lowered and back by - clicking on the title bar with the middle mouse button, or by - clicking anywhere inside the window with the right mouse - button while holding down ALT key. - - - - - - Focus - - - Of all the windows on your screen, only one is active - (in computer parlance, focused), which means - that anything you type on the keyboard will be sent to the - application running in that window. (It does not mean that the - applications in other windows are idle — they can - be running as well.) To help you see which window has - focus, the title bar of this window has different color - (left side is blue, as opposed to gray for all other - windows). To change focus to another window, just click - anywhere in this window. You can also click in the - window title bar to focus and raise the window - simultaneously. - - - - - - Moving and resizing windows - - - To move a window, drag its title bar to a new - location using left mouse button (i.e., click in the - title bar and move the mouse without releasing the - button). You can also move a window by clicking anywhere - inside the window while holding down the - ALT key. - - - To resize a window, place the mouse cursor on any of the - window borders (except the top one) or corners. The - mouse cursor will change to an arrow pushing a line or - corner, allowing you to drag the border or corner to a new - position. - - - - - - - - Tasklist - - All the windows on your desktop (including the minimized ones) - are shown in the tasklist, located - on your Panel. For each window, a mini-icon and beginning of - the window title is shown. To restore a minimized window, just click - on its title in the tasklist. Right-clicking on the window - title brings up the pop-up menu whihc - allows you to shade a window, close it, or kill the - application running in the window. The last option should only - be used when an application is frozen and does not respond to - close window command. If you kill an - application, you lose all unsaved data! - - - - - Window Operations Menu - - Sawfish also provides a menu for - each window; this menu contains all the operations for this - window described above, and then some. To access this menu, - click on the button in the left side of the window title bar - (with the small triangle pointing down). You can also invoke - this menu by right-clicking in the window title or clicking - anywhere in the window with the middle mouse button while holding - down the ALT key. - - - - Desktop Menu - - Finally, Sawfish also provides a - desktop menu; it can be accessed by clicking on any - empty space of the desktop with the middle mouse button. It - contains the following options: - - - - - Windows - - - - Provides list of all windows, including minimized - ones. Selecting one of these windows restores it (if it - was minimized) and raises it over other windows. Very - convenient if you have so many windows that the one you - need is completely covered by others. - - - - - - Workspaces - - - Allows you to switch from one workspace to another, - create and delete workspaces. See - Sawfish manual for details. - - - - - - Programs - - - - Same as Programs section - of the Main Menu. - - - - - - Customize - - - - Allows the user to customize all properties of the - Sawfish behavior. For a new - user, we recommend trying various - Appearance settings, but leaving - all other subsections alone. - - - - - - Help - - - - Provides links to Sawfish web - page, Sawfish manual (beware: - this is not a user's manual but rather a manual for - people who write extensions/customizations to - Sawfish using LISP - programming language), link to Gnome Users - Guide, and to Gnome Web - site. - - - - - - - - - - - Nautilus: Gnome File Manager, Help Browser, and More - - Gnome 1.4 includes a graphical shell, - Nautilus. It combines file manager, - help browser, web browser, FTP client, and much more. To launch - it, select Nautilus in the - Main Menu, or just dpuble-click on any directory - icon on your desktop. - - - Managing Your Files With Nautilus - - - As most modern graphic file managers, - Nautilus shows the contents of a - selected directory using icons to represent files and - subdirectories. Double-clicking on any file or directory opens - it (for data files, it starts the appropriate application - which opens this file). Right-clicking on a file or directory - produces a pop-up menu. Using this menu, - you can delete or rename the file, view and change file - properties or permissions, and more. - - Nautilus also provides an easy - way to move files between directories. To move move a file - from one directory to another, open each directory in a - different Nautilus window by selecting - New window from the - Nautilus File menu. - Select the file you need, and drag it from one window into another - using the mouse. You can also drag a file or directory to the desktop. - - Nautilus provides many more - tools to manipulate your files. It is also highly - customizable, so you can easily change the way files are - displayed (for example, you can choose a custom icon for a - given file). For detailed description of all these - possibilities, read Nautilus manual. - - - - Reading Documentation With Nautilus - - In addition to being a file manager, - Nautilus is also a help browser: - you can use it to read documentation installed on your - system. This includes not only Gnome documentation, but also - UNIX-style manual pages (manpages), GNU info pages - (documentation format used GNU project utilities), and other - types of documentation. To view the list of all documentation - installed on your system, click on the - Help tab in the left panel of - Nautilus. - - - - - - - Customizing - - Gnome is highly configurable — you can change almost - anything: background color, key bindings, location of panels - and contents of the Main Menu, and more. - Most of these changes are done using Gnome Control - Center, which can be found in - Settings submenu of the Main - Menu; this menu also allows you to access a specific - section of the Gnome Control Center. - The Control Center has its own - detailed documentation which you should consult before making - any changes. - - - Here we would like to give just an overview of the most commonly - used options of the Gnome Control - Center. - - - - Background - - - You can change the desktop background by selecting - Background in the - Desktop section of Gnome - Control Center. (A quicker alternative to - access this section is to right-click on any empty space on - your desktop and select Change Desktop - Background from the pop-up - menu). - - - - - Theme Selector - - - - Theme Selector allows you to change the - desktop theme (also known as GTK theme). This changes the - appearance of the Main Menu, as well as - menus, toolbars, scrollbars, checkbuttons and other elements - of graphical user interface for all Gnome applications. Many - users find the default GTK theme rather dull, so the first - thing they do is switching to another one. - - - - - Sawfish window manager - - - - This section - allows you to change settings for the window manager. In - particular, in the Appearance - subsection you can change the frame style (theme), which - determines the window borders and buttons. You can also - change the font used for window title bars. If you - are a new user, we recommend that you do not change - other settings. - - - - - Session - - - - In this section you can define - the startup programs (that is, programs that are run every - time you log in), enable or disable login hints and logout - confirmation dialog. - - - - - - In addition, you can change properties of various items — - most notably, panels and icons on your desktop — by - clicking on them with the right mouse button and selecting - Properties from the - pop-up menu. In this way, you can change the - caption of an icon, size and background color (or even - background image) of the Panel, and much more. - - - - Almost every Gnome application has its own - preferences settings (look for - Preferences or Settings in - the menus), so you can change, for example, colors used by the Gnome - Terminal or make it transparent — the possibilities are - unlimited! - - - - - - Gnome Applications and Utilities - - Gnome comes with many applications and utilities; in addition, - Gnome allows you to use any third party applications such as - Netscape), KDE applications, or other - applications and utilities installed on your system. Here is a - list of some of the most useful tools and applications which you - can find in Gnome's Main Menu (this is not a - complete list!) - - - - Applications - - - These include office and productivity applications - such as - - - Gnumeric - — a full-featured Excel-compatible spreadsheet - - - - AbiWord — a lightweight - word processing application - - - - Gnome Calendar to help - you manage your busy schedule - - - Several text editors, from simple and - easy to use gedit to the - (arguably) the most powerful text editor ever created, - Emacs (which is not a Gnome - appication) - - - - - - - - Graphics - - - - - Gimp — - image editing program for power users; rivals - Photoshop - - - Image viewers such as Eye of - Gnome, GQview and - xv - - - - - - - Utilities - - - Among other things, here you will find - - - Calculator - - - - Gnome Search - tool which you can use to find a file - on your system - - - - gfloppy for formatting - floppy disks - - - - GDictfor - looking up a word in one of the many dictionaries - freely available on the Internet - - - - - - - Multimedia - - - - Here you will find CD player, - Mixer (which also can be used - to adjust volume of your speakers), and an MP3 player - XMMS. - - - - - - System - - - - This submenu contains utilities for managing your - system. You can find out detailed information about your - processor, memory, and operating system using - System Info, check how much - space you have left on your disks using Gnome - DiskFree, or view all the processes (jobs) - which are currently running on your computer using - System monitor. In addition, - System monitor also shows you - load level for the processor and memory, and allows you to - kill a stalled or otherwise unwanted job. - - - This submenu also contains tools for managing software - installed on your system, namely - GnoRPM and Helix - Gnome Update (if you are using the - distribution of Gnome prepared by Helix Code, Inc.). - GnoRPM allows you to view all - software packages installed on your system (if you are - using a distribution of Linux based on RPM packages, such - as Red Hat, SuSe, or Mandrake); it also allows you to remove, - update, or install new packages. - Helix Gnome Update provides an - extremely easy, almost one-click, way to update your - Gnome installation. Both of these utilities , however, require - that you have system administrator (root) privileges. - - - And finally, the same submenu also contains various - terminal emulators (xterm, - Color xterm, - Gnome Terminal) letting you use - the most powerful (although not most user friendly) interface - ever created — the command line prompt. - - - - - Internet - - - - Here, you will find Netscape web - browser, X-Chat for Internet Relay - Chat (IRC), Gnome-ICU for talking - with other people using ICQ protocol, and - gftp which is a graphical tool - for FTP file transfers. Note that Gnome file manager, - Nautilus, also has built-in FTP - capabilities, so gftp is needed - only in those rare cases when you need something really - complicated (for example, transferring files using secure - version of FTP, based on ssh). - - - - - Games - - - - Lots of them — just try! - - - - - - - - - - - Help - I Am in Trouble! - - Everyone runs into trouble sooner or later. Here is some - advice on how to handle the most common problems: - - - - Killing a Stalled Application - - If an application is stalled or frozen — that is, if it - does not respond to your mouse clicks and keyboard commands, - you can either wait and hope that it wakes up, or kill it. If - you decide to kill it (NOTE: You will lose all unsaved data), - start the Gnome System monitor - (from System submenu of the - Main Menu), right-click on the frozen - application name, and select Kill - now. Using Gnome System - monitor also allows you to find and kill all - helper processes started by this application. - - - If a Gnome application freezes or crashes (unexpectedly dies) - repeatedly, you should file a bug report as described in . - - - - My Whole System Froze! - - If your whole system is frozen and is not responding, do not - hurry to push the reset button on the computer - — this is usually the worst solution. Most probably, it is - not the operating system itself that is frozen (UNIX systems are - known for stability), but just the graphical part, X Window - System. In this case, you can try to restart X Window System by - simultaneously pressing - - CTRL-ALT-Backspace. - This should work for - the implementation of X Window system used on Linux and *BSD, - XFree86 — unless it was disabled by your system - administrator. Of course, in this way you also lose all unsaved - data, but at least you do not risk to mess up the whole file - system. - - - - - - - My Whole Gnome Configuration is Messed Up! - - If you have more serious problems than just desktop icons — - for example, if your panel is missing — the radical solution - is to remove all your Gnome configuration files and start from - scratch. This is an emergency solution, as you lose all - configuration settings and will need to configure your menus, - panels, etc. again from scratch, that is, from the default Gnome - configuration. However, this only affects Gnome configuration, - so your data files and settings for non-Gnome applications - remain intact. - - To remove all your Gnome configuration files and return - to the original Gnome configuration, logout then log in again - holding down keys CTRL and - SHIFT (immediately after entering your - password in the login dialog). You will be presented a dialog, - offering you the choice to reset the saved session (that is, - which applications were open when you last logged out); reset - your Gnome configuration settings; or both. - - - Finally, if you have really severe problems and your system - freezes or becomes otherwise unusable as soon as you login, - you have one last option. You can select - Failsafe session type instead of - the default Gnome in the login - screen. Both Gnome and KDE Login Managers support this. In - this session type, Gnome is not started; instead, you are - presented with a single terminal window. This is almost - guaranteed to start OK, and if you know how to use - command-line tools to find and fix your problem, you have a - chance. Otherwise, ask an expert. - - - - - - - Where to Find More Information - - Documentation Included with Gnome - - Gnome includes detailed documentation for the majority - of applications, utilities and other components, such as Panel - or Nautilus file manager. You can view the list of all Gnome - documents installed on your system using the Help - Contents tab in Nautilus. So, if you want to - know more about one of these components, read the appropriate - manual. - - - In addition to the manuals for individual components, Gnome - documentation also includes: - - - - - - Gnome Users Guide - - - - In addtition to general overview, this users - guide also contains detailed documentation for core Gnome - components (Desktop, Panel, Nautilus, Control Center and - more). - - - - - - - If you are new to UNIX/Linux... - - - - - This short document gives the minimal necessary - information about UNIX and UNIX-like operating systems, - including such things as filenames, paths and - directories, permissions, symbolic links and most - confusing of them all, the notion of - mounting. If you never used UNIX system - before, be sure to read this. - - - - - - Glossary - - - Gives brief explanation of some of computer-related - terms you may see in Gnome documentation, from ASCII to X - Window System. - - - - - - - Gnome Resources on the Internet - - In addition to documentation shipped with Gnome, there is also - wealth of information available on the Internet. A good - starting point is, of course, the Gnome Website. There you - will find instructions for installing Gnome, reviews and tips, - developer information, and more. - - - If you can not find an answer to your question there, you - may ask other Gnome users and developers on Gnome mailing list - (subscription instructions can be found here). - Note, however, that this list is for Gnome-related questions - only (do not ask how to configure X Window System, for instance), - and it is impolite (to say the least) to ask a question without - first checking if this question is already answered in available - documents such as Gnome FAQ. - - - - Everything Not Gnome - - You should realize that Gnome is just part of your computer - system. If you want to unleash the full potential of your - computer, you need to understand not just Gnome but also the - underlying operating system (UNIX/Linux/FreeBSD), various - tools and utilities included with it, and its graphics system - (X Window System). Each of these components usually comes with - its own documentation. Most of UNIX commands and utilities are - documented in so-called manual pages, or man pages - for short. You can view them using Nautilus - (see ). This documentation is usually - very detailed and more technical than most users would like. - Another documentation format used by utilities from the - GNU project is called info pages. They, too, - can be viewed using Nautilus. Many - applications also have documentation in other formats. Sometimes - it is not easy to find documentation for a given application — - try looking in the directory /usr/doc. - - Documentation for operating system itself varies from one - system to another. The best advice is to check the printed manual - which came with your system. For Linux, a good source of information - is the Linux Documentation Project (LDP); you can read or their - documentation on the Internet (at http://www.linuxdoc.org). - Virtually all Linux distributions also include copies of LDP - documents; usually they are found at - /usr/doc/LDP or - /usr/doc/HOWTO. - - - And of course, there are a number of books available about all - flavors of UNIX/Linux, Gnome, and about anything else you might - be interested in. Check your local bookstore. - - - - - Feedback - - If you have any comments, suggestions, or complaints about this - guide, please send them to Gnome Documentation project at - docs@gnome.org. - - - If you find a bug in one of Gnome applications, please report - it! The developers do read these reports and try to fix all - reported bugs. The easiest way to send a bug report is to use - Gnome Bug Report Tool, found in the - Utilities submenu of the Main - Menu. This tool will be automatically started if a - Gnome application crashes. It should also be used for submitting - suggestions or requests for new features for Gnome applications: - just select Severity: enhancement in the - appropriate window of Gnome Bug Report - Tool. Detailed information about contacting - developers and reporting bugs can be found in Reporting GNOME bugs - and other feedback document, which you can - find in the Help tab of - Nautilus file manager. - - - If you have questions about Gnome, or want to discuss Gnome - with other users and developers, you should subscribe to the - Gnome mailing list as described in . - - -
- - - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.xml b/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 05fd0b8..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/introduction-to-gnome.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1983 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - -]> -
- - Introduction to GNOME V&manrevision; - - 2001 - 2003 - Alexander Kirillov - - - 2000 - 2001 - Red Hat, Inc. - - - 2000 - 2001 - David A. Wheeler - - - GNOME Documentation Project - - - &legal; - - - - Alexander - Kirillov - - GNOME Documentation Project -
kirillov@math.sunysb.edu
- - - - David - Mason - - Red Hat, Inc. -
dcm@redhat.com
- - - - David - Wheeler - - - - - Introduction to GNOME V&manrevision; - &date; - - - Alexander Kirillov - kirillov@math.sunysb.edu, - David C. Mason, David A. Wheeler - - GNOME Documentation Project - - - - Introduction to GNOME V2.0 - June 2002 - - - Alexander Kirillov - kirillov@math.sunysb.edu, - David C. Mason, David A. Wheeler - - GNOME Documentation Project - Updated for GNOME 2.0. Some descriptions and - screenshots are borrowed from GNOME Desktop 2.0 - User Guide (May 2002), by Sun GNOME - Documentation Team, - published by GNOME Documentation Project - - - - Introduction to GNOME - April 2001 - - Alexander Kirillov - kirillov@math.sunysb.edu, - David C. Mason, David A. Wheeler - - GNOME Documentation Project - This version described GNOME 1.4 - - - - - - - - This document was last updated in &date;. It describes GNOME - 2.2. - - Feedback To report a bug or - make a suggestion regarding this document, follow the directions - in the GNOME - Feedback Page. - - - - - - - - What Is GNOME? - - GNOME is a user-friendly graphical desktop environment for UNIX and - UNIX-like systems. GNOME includes a panel (for starting - applications and displaying status), a desktop (where data and - applications can be placed), a set of standard desktop tools and - applications, and a set of conventions that make it easy for - applications to cooperate and be consistent with each other. - Users of other operating systems or environments should feel - right at home using the powerful graphics-driven environment - GNOME provides. GNOME runs on a number of UNIX-like operating - systems, including Linux, FreeBSD, and Solaris. - - GNOME is completely open source (free software) developed by - hundreds of programmers around the world. Both the source code - and ready-to-run binaries of GNOME are available for download on - the Internet; they are distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public - License (and its cousins, Lesser General Public License and - Free Documentation - License for libraries and documentation - respectively). In particular, this means that everyone is free - to use, copy or distribute GNOME. If you would like to learn - more about the GNOME project please visit the GNOME website. - - - GNOME is highly configurable, enabling you to set your desktop - the way you want it to look and feel. GNOME supports many human - languages, and more are added every month. GNOME even supports - several drag and drop protocols for maximum interoperability - with non-GNOME applications. - - - - GNOME comes from the acronym for the GNU Network Object Model - Environment (GNOME). GNOME is a part of the larger GNU project, - started in 1984 to develop a completely free UNIX-like operating - system. For more information, visit the GNU website. - - - This guide describes GNOME 2.2 which is the latest (as of March - 2003) release of GNOME. - - - - - - Purpose of This Document - - This document gives you a short introduction to GNOME. It is not - intended to cover all details of GNOME; if you need more - information, you should read the detailed manuals listed in . Also, this document assumes you already have - GNOME installed; if you need help installing GNOME, please check - the instructions on the GNOME website. - - - This document was written by the members of the GNOME - Documentation Project (GDP). If you have any comments or - suggestions about this document or if you can offer any other - help in improving or translating GNOME documentation, please - send an e-mail to docs@gnome.org, or visit the GDP - website. - - The authors of this document assume that you are - using the default configuration of GNOME. GNOME is highly - configurable, so it is easy to change not only the look but also - the behavior of GNOME; however, we recommend that you do so only - after you already have some experience with GNOME. - - - - - Mouse Conventions Used in This Document - - Before describing GNOME, let us introduce some terms used not - only in this guide but in all GNOME documents. Most importantly, - we need to clarify the use of mouse buttons and clicks. - - - Most GNOME documents assume that you are using a standard (for - UNIX) 3-button mouse and talk about left, right, and middle - mouse buttons; if a document says click without - explicitly specifying the button, the left button is - assumed. - - - If you are using a two-button mouse, you can emulate the middle - mouse button by pressing left and right buttons simultaneously; - if you have a wheel mouse, the wheel can be used in place of the - middle mouse button. - - - You can switch the roles of the buttons using the Mouse - preference tool in the Desktop - Preferences submenu of - Applications menu. Many left-handers - choose to reverse the right and left buttons. If you have done - so, you need to use the right mouse button whenever a document - instructs you to click, and use the left mouse - button whenever a document talks about - right-clicking or mouse button 3. - - - If you use a mouse with an unusual placement of buttons, a - trackball, or some other input device, you need to find out - which buttons correspond to right, - left and middle; this information - can usually be found in the manual which came with your - device. Usually, the left button (MB1) is the one - under your index finger. - - - - - - - - First Glance at GNOME: Desktop and Panel - - shows an example of GNOME - running. GNOME is very configurable, so your screen may look - quite different. - - -
- Sample GNOME Display. - - - - - - Figure of GNOME desktop, with menu panel, usual - panel, Nautilus window, and standard desktop icons: home - folder, Start here and Trash - - - -
- - - - Panel - - The two long bars at the top and bottom of are panels. The - top one is called the menu panel, the bottom one is an edge - panel (you can have more than one edge panel). - Panels can contain a number of useful objects, such as - - - - - Applications and - Actions menus - - Applications menu gives you - access to all GNOME applications installed on your - system. Actions menu contains useful - commands such as Search for - files, Run - command, Open - recent (documents), and Log - Out command. In the screenshot above, you - can see both these menus on left side of the top - panel. - - - - - Other menus - - - Panels can also contain other menus. Most important of - them is the Main Menu (sometimes also - called GNOME Menu) which combines - Applications and - Actions menu. The panel can also - contain other menus created - by the user. - - - - - - Launchers - - These are buttons that start various programs. - - - - - - Applets - - These are tiny programs designed to - work inside the panel. For example, the - clock applet in the middle - of the top panel shows the current time, and the - Window List applet in the - left side of the bottom panel shows the list of all application - windows on your desktop (this will be discussed in - detail in ). - - - - - - - - As with all GNOME components, panels are highly - configurable: you can add or remove application launchers and - applets, edit the Applications menu, change - the panel background, or even remove and create new - panels. This will be discussed in . - - - NOTE - - The top panel in is called the - menu panel and has slightly different - properties than other panels. For example, you can not move - it to a different location. - - - - To configure an object, get help on it, or remove it - from the panel, right-click on it and choose the appropriate - item from the context menu. To hide the panel when you are not - using it, click on one of the Hide - buttons. They are the small arrows at the ends of the - panel. - - More panel operations are available from the - Panel menu, which you can open by - right-clicking in any vacant space on the panel (for example, - in the hide arrows). To learn more about using panel, choose - Help from the - Panel menu. - - - - - Desktop - - Everything outside the panel is called the desktop - background. You can place icons for files, - applications, and other items on the desktop background (a default - collection of icons is installed with GNOME). You can then - double-click on an item to use it: - - - - - If the item is a program, that program will start. - - - - - If it is a data file, the appropriate program will start - up with that data loaded. - - - - - - If it is a folder, the File - Manager will start and show the contents of - that directory. - - - - - The easiest way to place an item on the desktop is to drag a - file from a file manager window, as described in detail in - the Nautilus - manual. Once the item is placed on the desktop, you - can move it around the desktop using the left mouse button, or - you can click on it with the right mouse button to bring up - the context menu which allows you to delete the item or change - its properties. - - - By default, your desktop contains the following objects: - - - Home folder - This icon provides access to your home - folder. - - - - - Start Here - - This object provides access to special functions of - GNOME file manager, - Nautilus. These special - functions include menu editing (see ), desktop preference - tools (see ), and access to - machines on your local - local network (if you have any). - - - - - Trash can - Double-clicking on the trash can icon - shows all files you have removed using the file - manager. This gives you an opportunity to restore a - file which was removed by mistake. You can also empty - the trash can which permanently and irrevocably - deletes all these files. - - - - - - - - - - Using the Mouse - - As you have already seen, you can do almost anything just by - clicking with your mouse. Here are some conventions which work - almost anywhere in GNOME: - - - - - Clicking on an item with the left mouse button selects - (hilights) it. If you need to select several objects, hold down - the Ctrl key while clicking. - - - Double-clicking on an item runs the default action for - this item (running an application, opening the file, etc.) - - - Clicking on an item with the right mouse button brings up - the context menu, which contains all the commands and - information available for this item. If you have selected - a group of items, right-clicking on any of them will bring - up the context menu which applies to all of these items. - - - You can - select text anywhere on the screen using the left mouse - button, and then insert this text into any other place on - the screen which accepts text input, by clicking with the - middle mouse button. - - - - In addition, right-clicking on any vacant place on your - desktop background brings up the Desktop - Background menu, which allows you to change the - desktop background image or other properties, or add a new object to - the desktop. - - - - - Logging Out - - To log out of GNOME, click on the - Actions menu and choose Log - Out. GNOME will automatically save the current session (that - is, information about currently open applications and their - location on the screen), so that when you log in next time, the - same applications will be in the same places. Note this only - works for applications which are fully GNOME-compliant. - - - - - - - - Working With Windows - - As most modern desktop environments, GNOME allows you to have - several windows on your screen, with a different application - running in each window. This section describes various windows - operations: moving, resizing, closing, hiding. - - - Many of these operation are controlled by buttons located in the - window titlebar. Descriptions in this section assume - that you are using the default configuration of GNOME, so the - buttons in the window titlebar look as shown in - . - - - - -
- Window Titlebar Using Default Theme - - - - - - Titlebar in default style, focused. Window ops button in - the left side, minimize, maximize, and close buttons on - the right. - - - - -
- - - - Note for advanced users - - All the windows operations are actually managed by a piece of - software called window manager. By - default, GNOME uses Metacity window - manager, which is included with GNOME. GNOME can also be used - with other window managers, such as - Sawfish (which was used in GNOME - 1.4). To switch to Sawfish window - manager, open a terminal window and enter the following - command: killall metacity; sawfish&. If - everything worked smoothly, save current session by entering - the command gnome-session-save so that - next time you login, Sawfish is - started automatically. - - - - - So, what can you do with windows? - - - - - Closing, Minimizing, and Maximizing Windows - - - To close a window, click on - the Close Window button (with the - small x) in the right side of window - titlebar. If the application has any unsaved data, it - will prompt you to save it. You can also use keyboard - shortcut - AltF4. - - - To maximize a window, i.e. make it - fill the entire screen (except for the part taken by the - panels), click on the Maximize - button (middle button on the right side). Clicking on - this button once again will restore the window to its - original size. - - To minimize (sometimes also - called hide or iconify) a window, click on the - Minimize button. The window will - disappear from the screen. However, it is not lost: the - application in this window continues running, no data is - lost — it is just temporarily hidden. All - minimized windows are shown in the Window List - applet and can be restored as described below. - - A convenient alternative to minimizing windows is - to shade it, or roll up a - window into its own titlebar, so the titlebar is the - only part of the window left on the screen. You can roll - up and unroll a window by double-clicking on the - titlebar. - - - - - - Raising and Lowering Windows - - - Windows on your screen can overlap, so that one of - the windows is on top of another. You can - raise a window (i.e., put it on top of - all others) by clicking anywhere in that window. - - - - - - Focus - - - Of all the windows on your screen, only one is active - (in computer parlance, focused), which means - that anything you type on the keyboard will be sent to the - application running in that window. (It does not mean that the - applications in other windows are idle — they can - be running as well.) To help you see which window has - focus, the titlebar of this window has a different color - (the left side is blue, as opposed to gray for all other - windows). By default, clicking in a window both raises it - and gives focus to it. - - - You can also use the Alt - Tab shortcut to switch - between windows. This cyclically switches between all existing - windows. The window to which you switch is raised and - given focus. - - - - - - Moving and Resizing Windows - - - To move a window, drag its titlebar to a new - location using the left mouse button. You can also move - a window by clicking anywhere inside the window while - holding down the Alt key. - - - To resize a window, place the mouse cursor on any of the - window borders or corners. The - mouse cursor will change to an arrow pushing a line or - corner, allowing you to drag the border or corner to a new - position. - - - - - - - - Window List Applet - - All the windows on your desktop (including the minimized ones) - are shown in the Window List - applet, located on your panel. For each window, a mini-icon - and the beginning of the window title is shown. To restore a - minimized window, just click on its title in the - Window List - applet. Right-clicking on the window title brings up the - context menu which allows you to shade a - window, close it, etc. - - - - - Window Menu - - GNOME also provides a menu for - each window; this menu contains all the operations for this - window described above, and then some. To access this menu, - click on the Window Menu button at the - left side of the window titlebar, or use keyboard shortcut - AltSpace. - - - - - - - - Nautilus: GNOME File Manager - - GNOME includes a graphical shell, - Nautilus. It combines a file manager, - a web browser, an FTP client, and much more. It also provides access - to tools for customizing GNOME (thus replacing the - GNOME Control Center which was - included in GNOME 1.4 and earlier releases). - - - To open a new Nautilus window, - choose Home folder from the - Applications menu, or double-click on any - folder icon on your desktop, such as the Home - icon. - - - - Managing Your Files With Nautilus - -
- Nautilus Window - - - - - - Nautilus Window, in icon mode - - - - -
- - - - As most modern graphic file managers, - Nautilus shows the contents of a - selected folder using icons to represent files and - subfolders. Double-clicking on any file or folder opens it - (for data files, it starts the appropriate application which - opens this file, as configured in the File Types and - Programs preference tool). Right-clicking on a - file or folder produces a context menu. Using this menu, you - can delete or rename the file, view and change file properties - or permissions, and more. - - - Nautilus also provides an easy - way to move and copy files between folders. To move a file - from one folder to another, open these folders in separate - Nautilus windows (you can use the - FileNew - window command). Select the file - you want to move, and drag it from one window into another - using the mouse. You can also drag a file or folder to the - desktop. To copy a file, press-and-hold the Ctrl - key while dragging the file. You can also copy and move files - using keyboard shortcuts - CtrlC, - CtrlX, and - CtrlV - (see Nautilus manual for details). - - - To delete files, drag them to the trash can icon on your - desktop. - - Nautilus provides many more - tools to manipulate your files. It is also highly - customizable, so you can easily change the way files are - displayed (for example, you can choose a custom icon for a - given file). For a detailed description of all these - possibilities, read the Nautilus manual, - available from the Help menu of - Nautilus. - - - - - - Accessing Floppies and Other Removable Media - - To access files on floppy disks, CD-ROMs and other removable - media, insert the disk in drive. Depending on configuration of - your sytem, it may automatically recognize an inserted disk - and put an icon for it on the desktop (in technical language, - this is called automounting). Otherwise, - right-click on any vacant spot on the desktop and choose the - required media from the Disks submenu - of the Desktop Background menu. (This - assumes your system is correctly configured, that is, you have - the appropriate entry in /etc/fstab - file.) This will place an icon for the disk on the - desktop. Double-clicking on this icon will open a - Nautilus window showing the - contents of the selected media. - - - WARNING - - Before removing a floppy disk or other removable media - from the drive, you must - - - - Close all windows accessing files on this - disk, including Nautilus - windows, terminal windows, and others - - - - - Unmount the disk by right-clicking on the disk icon on - the desktop and choosing Unmount - volume from the context menu. - - - - If you remove the disk without unmounting it first, you may - lose data! - - - - - Other Features of Nautilus - - In addition to the basic features listed above, - Nautilus has many other advanced - and exciting capabilities. Here we list some of them, - referring the reader to the Nautilus - manual for detailed descriptions. - - - - Nautilus can be customized - in many ways. In particular, you can change the background and - icons used for files and folders, and the fonts used for captions. - - - - You can assign a custom icon to a specific file, or - rescale the icon for a specific file, so that the most - important files really stand out. - - - - You can assign an emblem (such as - New or Favorite) - to a file. This emblem will be put on top of the file icon. - - - - Files can be sorted by name, type, modification date, - or the emblem you assigned to them. - - - - Nautilus can also be used - as a Web browser (with limited capabilities) and FTP client: - just enter the URL (for example, - ftp://ftp.gnome.org) in the - Go To field. - - - - - Nautilus can also be used - as a music player: just open a folder containing music files - in MP3 format, and Nautilus - switches to music player mode. - - - - - - - - - - Customizing GNOME - - GNOME is highly configurable — you can change almost - anything: background color, key bindings, location of panels, - contents of the GNOME Menu, and more. To see - examples of different customizations of the GNOME desktop, take a - look at the screenshots in GNOME - users gallery and notice how different they look. - - - The following sections list - some of the most common customizations. In addition, you can - change properties of various items — most notably, panels - and icons on your desktop — by clicking on them with the - right mouse button and choosing - Properties from the context menu. - - - Almost every GNOME application has its own preferences settings - (look for Preferences or - Settings in the menus), so you can change, - for example, colors used by the GNOME - Terminal or make it transparent — the - possibilities are unlimited! - - - Desktop Preferences - - To customize the appearance of your desktop and user - interface, use special desktop preference - tools, which can be found in the Desktop - Preferences submenu of the Applications - menu. You can also access the preferences tools by - double-clicking on the Start Here icon on your - desktop. This will open a Nautilus - window. Double-click on Preferences and - then on the tool you require. - - - Below you will find an overview of the most commonly - used preferences tools. - - - - Background - - - This tool allows you to change desktop background. You can - select solid color, gradient (visual effect where one - color blends gradually into another color), or an image - file. - - - TIP - - You can also change the desktop background color by - right-clicking on the desktop background and choosing - Change Desktop Background, or - by dragging a color from another window or dialog to - the desktop background. - - - - - - Theme - - - - This tool allows you to change the desktop theme. A - theme is a collection of settings - that determine the look of your desktop and all GNOME - applications. It consists - of the following components: - - - - Controls This component - (sometimes also called widget theme) - determines the appearance of menus, panels, toolbars, - buttons, and other elements of user interface in all - GNOME applications. - - - - - - Window borders - - This component determines the appearance of - window borders, titlebar, and buttons placed in the - titlebar. - - - - - - Icon theme - - This component determines the set of icons - used by GNOME file manager and other applications - for files of various types. These icons are also - used on the desktop, for files you place there and - for standard objects such as home directory or - Start Here location. - - - - - - NOTE - - Users upgrading from GNOME 2.0 will notice that the - layout of this tool and terminology has changed: GNOME - 2.2 uses the word theme to refer to the - complete collection of appearance settings, so a theme - now consists of several components. In GNOME 2.0, this - was called a metatheme. - - - - The theme tool allows you to select one of the themes - installed as part of your GNOME distribution. You can - also create a custom theme by selecting individual theme - components (Icon, Window border). To do so, click on - Details button. Finally, you can - download and install more themes from the Internet. In - particular, you can find many themes at the GNOME - theme website. Please note that this site (as - well as many other Interent resources) use more - technical (and more precise) terminology: the - Controls component is called a - GTK2 theme, and Window - borders component is called a Metacity - theme. - - - - - - Font - - - - This tool allows you to choose the default font which will - be used by menus, dialogs, and other user interface - elements. You can also choose fonts to be used for icon - captions on the desktop and for windows titlebars. - - - - - - - - Customizing Panels - - You can customize the GNOME panels as follows: - - - To remove a panel, right-click on a vacant space on the - panel and choose Remove this - panel from the panel context menu. - - - To create a new panel, right-click on a vacant space on - any existing panel and choose Create - panel from the panel context menu. - - - To move an existing panel to a new location, drag it - with the middle mouse button. - - - NOTE - The menu panel can not be moved. - - - - To modify a panel's properties (background, size, - auto-hide), right-click on a vacant space on the - panel and choose Properties - from the panel context menu. - - - To remove an object (menu, applet, or application launcher) - from the panel, right-click on the object and choose - Remove from panel from the - object context menu. - - - To add a new object to the panel, right-click on a - vacant space on the panel and choose - Add to panel - from the panel context menu. Alternatively, to add an - application from one of the menus as a launcher to the - panel, right-click on the menu - item and choose Add this launcher to - panel from the context menu. - - - To move a panel object, drag it with the middle mouse - button. You can even drag an object from one panel to - another. - - - To configure a panel object, right-click on it and choose - Properties from the context - menu. - - - - - - - Customizing Menus - - To modify the appearance of menus, use - Theme and - Font preference tools described in - . You can also customize - the contents of the - Applications menu. To do this, open - Start Here object on the desktop and - double-click on Applications icon. This - will show the contents of the Applications - menu as if it were a folder. Now you can move, add, and delete - items in this menu in the same way you move or delete - files. For more information, see Working With - Menus chapter of GNOME User - Guide. - - - - - - - - GNOME Applications and Utilities - - GNOME comes with many applications and utilities; in addition, - GNOME allows you to use any third party applications such as - Netscape, KDE applications, or other - applications and utilities installed on your system. You can - also use GNOME 1.x applications under GNOME 2.2 (if you have - installed appropriate GNOME 1.x libraries). Note, however, that - GNOME 1.x applications will not use font and theme settings of - GNOME 2.2, so their appearance will differ from that of GNOME - 2.2 applications. - - - - Below is a partial list of some of the most useful tools and - applications found in the Applications and - Actions menus. You can access these menus by - clicking on the corresponding button in the Menu - Panel, or by using keyboards shortcut - AltF1. - - - - - Actions Menu - - This menu contains the following utilities. - - - - - - - Run Program - - - This allows you to manually enter a command to run, - saving you from starting full-blown terminal emulator. - This dialog can also be used for quick access to files: - enter a filename (without any command), and this file - will be opened using the default application for this - file type. Finally, you can also use this dialog to - quickly access documentation such as manpages (see for details). - - - TIP - - You can also start the Run - Program dialog by using the - AltF2 - shortcut. - - - - - - - Search for Files - - - This utility allows you to search for files and - folders on your system. - - - - - - Screenshot - - - - This utility takes a screenshot of your desktop and saves it in a - file. - - - - - - - Open Recent - - - - This utility shows the list of files you have recently - accessed. You can choose one of these files to open it - using the appropriate application. - - - - - - Lock Screen - - - - This utility locks the screen, starting a - screensaver. In order to unlock the screen and continue - the work, you will need to enter your password. This is - useful when you need to leave the computer running unattended - for some time. - - - - - Log Out - - - - This finishes your GNOME session, stopping all running - applications and returning you to login screen. - - - - - - - - Core GNOME Applications - - Applications menu contains all GNOME applications installed on - your system. In addition, it also shows many non-GNOME - applications which are installed on your system. Here we list - those GNOME applications which form part of GNOME Desktop - environment. These applications are included in the standard - GNOME distributions and must be available on any system - running GNOME. - - - - - - Accessories - - - These include productivity applications - such as: - - - - Calculator - - - Character - Map, which allows you to select any - symbol in virtually any human alphabet (provided - that you have fonts to show these symbols). This is - a quick way to insert in text you are typing a - symbol that can not be directly entered from the - keyboard. - - - - File Roller, a utility - for viewing, unpacking and creating compressed - archive files. - - - - Text Editor - (gedit), a lightweight text editor capable of - handling multilanguage texts. - - - - Dictionary, allowing you - to look up a word in one of the many freely available - dictionaries on the Internet. - - - - - - - - - - Desktop Preferences - - - This submenu contains preferences tools used to - customize your desktop; see for details. - - - - - - Games - - - Lots of them — just try! - - - - - - Graphics - - - - - Eye of - GNOME image viewer - - - - - Ggv Postscript Viewer, - which can also be used for viewing PDF files. - - - - - - - - Programming - - Bug Report tool. Use this - tool to make suggestions and report bugs in GNOME - applications. - - - - - - Sound & Video - - - Here you will find a CD player, - Volume Control, and - Sound Recorder. - - - - - - System Tools - - - This submenu contains various tools used for managing - your system, such as: - - - - System Monitor. This - application can be used to view all processes (tasks) - currently running on your system and the resources - (memory and processor time) - they use. You can also use the System - Monitor to kill a stalled or otherwise - misbehaving application. - - - - - Configuration - Editor. This tool is only recommended - for advanced users. It allows you to change - all settings used by GNOME - applications (unlike preferences - tools which only cover some of the - settings). However, it provides little assistance - or safeguards; it can easily make your system - completely unusable if you do not know what you are - doing. - - - - - Floppy Formatter, a tool - for formatting floppy disks. - - - - - Terminal, which gives you - access to the most powerful (but not the most user - friendly) interface ever created — the command - line prompt. - - - - - This submenu may also contain tools for managing - software installed on your system, such as - Red Carpet (if you are using - the distribution of GNOME prepared by Ximian, Inc.). - Red Carpet provides an - extremely easy, almost one-click, way to update your - GNOME installation. This - requires that you have system administrator (root) - privileges. - - - - - - Help - - - This starts the GNOME help browser, - Yelp, described in . - - - - - - Home Folder - - - This opens a new Nautilus - window showing the contents of your home folder. - - - - - - - - - - Other Applications - - In addition to the core applications listed above, there is - also a variety of GNOME applications that can be installed - separately. Most likely, you will find many of them already - installed on your system and shown in the - Applications menu. Here we list the most - important of them. A full list of software available for - GNOME with links to individual projects' web pages and - download locations can be found in GNOME Software - Map. - - - - - - - - - Internet - - - - - Galeon, a fast web - browser based on Mozilla - - - - - Evolution, an email - client, calendar and contact manager. - - - X-Chat, an - Internet Relay Chat (IRC) client. - - - GNOME-ICU for talking - with other people using ICQ protocol. - - - gftp, a graphical - tool for file transfers, supporting FTP, HTTP, and - SSH protocols. Note that the GNOME file manager, - Nautilus, also has - built-in FTP capabilities. - - - - - - - - Graphics - - - - - The GIMP, professional - grade image editing program. - - - - - gThumb, a program for - viewing and organizing collections of images (for - examples, digital camera photos). - - - - - - - - - - - - Sound & Video - - - - XMMS, player for - audio CDs and aduio files in MP3 and Ogg - Vorbis formats. - - - - Rhythmbox, an audio - player for MP3 and Ogg Vorbis files. It also has - powerful capabilities for organizing large music - collections, creating and editing playlists, - searching for songs by artist, name, or other - parameters, and more. - - - - - Totem video player, - based on Xine project. It can hanlde most of video - formats and codecs available. It can also be used - for viewing Video CDs and DVDs. Viewing DVDs - requires special decryption software, whose legal - status is unclear in the US. For this reason, this - software is usually not installed by default but can - be downloaded separately if it is legal in your - locality. - - - - - - - - Office - - - - - Gnumeric, a full-featured - Excel-compatible sreadsheet. - - - - - AbiWord, a fast and light - word processor. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Help — I Am in Trouble! - - Everyone runs into trouble sooner or later. Here is some - advice on how to handle the most common problems: - - - - Killing a Stalled Application - - If an application is stalled or frozen — that is, if it - does not respond to your mouse clicks and keyboard commands, - you can either wait and hope that it wakes up, or kill it. If - you decide to kill it (NOTE: You will lose all unsaved data), - start the System Monitor - (from Applications - System Tools ). Select - the application you want to kill and click on End - process button at the bottom. You can also - right-click on the application name and choose - End process; if it doesn't help, - right-click and choose Kill - process. Using the GNOME System - monitor also allows you to find and kill all - helper processes started by this application. - - - If a GNOME application freezes or crashes (unexpectedly dies) - repeatedly, you should file a bug report as described in the - GNOME feedback - page. - - - - My Whole System Froze! - - If your whole system is frozen and is not responding, do not - hurry to push the power button on the computer - — this is usually the worst solution. Most probably, it is - not the operating system itself that is frozen (UNIX systems are - known for stability), but just the graphical part, the X Window - System. In this case, you can try to restart the X Window System by - simultaneously pressing - - CtrlAltBackspace - . This should work for - the implementation of the X Window system used on Linux and *BSD, - XFree86 (unless it was disabled by your system - administrator). Of course, in this way you also lose all unsaved - data, but at least you do not risk harming the whole file - system. - - - - - - - - - Where to Find More Information - - GNOME Help System - - GNOME includes detailed documentation for the majority - of applications, utilities and other components, such as the panel - or the Nautilus file manager. To view a manual for an application, - choose the Help menu in the - application, or press F1. To - view help about the panel or panel objects, right-click on it - and choose Help from the context - menu. This will automatically launch the GNOME help browser, - Yelp, showing the appropriate - manual. - - - You can also start Yelp by - choosing Applications - Help . This will show the - top-level help system page, listing all GNOME documents - conveniently organized by topic. - - - In addition to the manuals for individual applications, - GNOME documentation also includes: - - - - - - GNOME Desktop 2.2 User Guide - - - - This user - guide provides a general overview of GNOME and detailed - documentation for core GNOME - components (such as the desktop, panel, Nautilus, and desktop - preferences tools). - - - - - - - Introduction to GNOME - - - - This is the document you are reading. - - - - - - - GNOME 2.2 System Administrator Guide - - - - This guide provides in-depth discussion of GNOME - internals. In particular, it explains where GNOME stores - various configuration settings (both per-user and - system-wide). It also contains instructions on setting - system-wide GNOME preferences. It is mostly intended for - system administrators; however, advanced users may also - find it useful. - - - - - - - Yelp can also be used for - viewing non-GNOME documentation, such as man pages and info - pages (see below). - - - - - GNOME Resources on the Internet - - In addition to documentation shipped with GNOME, there is also - a wealth of information available on the Internet. A good - starting point is the GNOME website. There you - will find instructions for installing GNOME, reviews and tips, - developer information, and more. - - - If you can not find an answer to your question there, you may - ask other GNOME users in one of the forums on GNOME User's - Board. Before asking a question, please make sure - that it has not been answered in avaialble documents such - as GNOME User - Guide. - - - Finally, if you use IRC (Internet Relay Chat), you can find - other GNOME users and developers and ask questions on the - #gnome and - #gnome-help channels on - irc.gnome.org. - - - - Everything Not GNOME - - You should realize that GNOME is just part of your computer - system. If you want to unleash the full potential of your - computer, you need to understand not just GNOME but also the - underlying operating system (UNIX/Linux/FreeBSD), various - tools and utilities included with it, and its graphics system - (the X Window System). Each of these components usually comes with - its own documentation. Most of UNIX commands and utilities are - documented in so-called manual pages, or man pages - for short. You can view them using the - Yelp help browser - (see ). This documentation is usually - very detailed and more technical than most users would like. - Another documentation format used by utilities from the - GNU project is called info pages. They, too, - can be viewed using Yelp. - - - TIP - - A quick way to acces manual pages and info pages is to open - Run Program - dialog - (CtrlF2 ) - and enter in it - man:commandname - (without spaces) or - info:commandname. - The corresponding manpage or info page will be opened in - GNOME Help browser, Yelp. - - - - - - Many third-party applications also have documentation in - other formats, such as plain text or HTML. Sometimes it is not - easy to find documentation for a given application — try - looking in the directories /usr/share/doc - and /usr/doc. - - Documentation for the operating system itself varies from one - system to another. The best advice is to check the printed manual - which came with your system. For Linux, a good source of information - is the Linux Documentation Project (LDP); you can read their - documentation on the Internet at http://www.tldp.org. - Virtually all Linux distributions also include copies of LDP - documents; usually they are found at - /usr/share/doc/LDP or - /usr/share/doc/HOWTO. - - - And of course, there are a number of books available about all - flavors of UNIX/Linux, GNOME, and about anything else you might - be interested in. Check your local bookstore. - - - - Feedback - - If you have found a bug in one of the GNOME applications, or have - some comments or suggestions regarding GNOME applications or - documentation, please let us know! Instructions for submitting - bug reports and comments are given in the GNOME Feedback Page. - - - -
- - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/C/legal.xml b/introduction-to-gnome/C/legal.xml deleted file mode 100644 index ac97e1d..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/C/legal.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published - by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, - no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find - a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS - distributed with this manual. - - This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals - distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this - manual separately from the collection, you can do so by - adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in - section 6 of the license. - - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of - the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those - trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial - capital letters. - - - - DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED - UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE - WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: - - - - DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, - WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR - IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES - THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE - DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR - A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE - RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE - OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE - DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR - MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, - YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY - CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY - SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER - OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS - LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED - VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER - EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND - - - - UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL - THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), - CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, - INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY - DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION - OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH - PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY - DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR - CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER - INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS - OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR - MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR - LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE - DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, - EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF - THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/Makefile.am b/introduction-to-gnome/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 42ffacc..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -SUBDIRS = C diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/README b/introduction-to-gnome/README deleted file mode 100644 index 1a90b06..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ -This directory contains "Introduction to GNOME" - short document to -get users familiar with GNOME. It has been updated for GNOME 2.2 - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/es/Makefile.am b/introduction-to-gnome/es/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 1edaa43..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/es/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -figs = \ - figures/desktop.png \ - figures/microguiborder.png -docname = introduction-to-gnome -lang = es -omffile = introduction-to-gnome-es.omf -sgml_ents = -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/desktop.png b/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/desktop.png deleted file mode 100644 index 543518e..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/desktop.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/microguiborder.png b/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/microguiborder.png deleted file mode 100644 index a712c05..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/es/figures/microguiborder.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome-es.omf b/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome-es.omf deleted file mode 100644 index 8f29188..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome-es.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Introducción a GNOME - - - GNOME - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml b/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index b3d51fb..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/es/introduction-to-gnome.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1313 +0,0 @@ - -
- - Introducción a GNOME - - - Gnome - Equipo de documentación - - - - - - Este es un borrador de la introducción a Gnome para Gnome 1.4 - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Red Hat, Inc., David A. Wheeler, Alexander Kirillov - - - -2001 -Manuel de Vega Barreiro y grupo Gnome-es (traducción al Castellano) - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any Gnome documentation, and those trademarks - are made aware to the members of the Gnome Documentation - Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. - - - - Se permite la copia, distribución y/o modificación de este - documento bajo los términos de la licencia de documentación libre - de GNU, versión 1.1 o cualquier versión posterior publicada por la - fundación para el software libre; sin secciones invariantes, sin - portada, y sin contraportada. - Una copia de esta licencia esta disponible en la fundación para el - software libre y puede leerse en - linea. - - - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por las compañías para diferencias sus - productos y servicios son reclamados como marcas registradas. Allí - donde estos nombres aparezcan en la documentación de Gnome, y cuando - los miembros del proyecto de documentación Gnome hayan sido informados - de esas marcas registradas, los nombres estarán impresos en mayúsculas - o como nombres propios. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¿Qué es GNOME? - -GNOME es un entorno gráfico (escritorio de trabajo) amigable para Unix y -sistemas tipo Unix, que permite a los usuarios usar y configurar sus ordenadores -de una forma sencilla. -GNOME incluye un panel (para arrancar aplicaciones y presentar el estado de -funcionamiento), un escritorio ( donde se pueden situar los datos y las -aplicaciones), un conjunto estándar de aplicaciones y herramientas de -escritorio, y un conjunto de convenciones que facilitan la operación y -consistencia de las aplicaciones entre sí. Los usuarios de otros sistemas -operativos y entornos se sentirán como en casa cuando usen el potente entorno -gráfico que proporciona GNOME. Gnome se puede ejecutar en un buen numero de -sistemas de tipo Unix, incluyendo Linux, FreeBSD, y Solaris. - - -GNOME está basado en su totalidad en código abierto (software libre), -desarrollado por cientos -de programadores en todo el mundo. Tanto el código fuente como los binarios -de Gnome listos para ejecutar están disponibles para su descarga en Internet; -se distribuyen bajo los términos de -la licencia pública general GNU (y sus primas, La licencia publica general «Lesser» y -La licencia de documentación libre -para las librerías y la documentación, respectivamente). -Mas concretamente, esto significa que cualquiera es libre de usar, copiar o distribuir -Gnome. -Si quiere saber más sobre el proyecto Gnome puede visitar la - -página web de Gnome. - - -También puede encontrar documentación Gnome en Castellano en la -página web de Gnome-es -y en la -página de Gnome España - -. - - - -GNOME es altamente configurable, permitiéndole ajustar su escritorio con -el aspecto que desee. GNOME soporta muchos idiomas, y se añaden más cada -mes. GNOME soporta incluso varios protocolos de arrastrar y -soltar (drag and drop D&D) para una máxima interoperabilidad con -aplicaciones que no sean compatibles con GNOME. - - - -GNOME es un acrónimo de 'GNU Network Object Model Environment', entorno de trabajo -en red orientado a objetos. GNOME forma parte del más amplio -proyecto GNU. El proyecto GNU nació en 1984 con el objetivo de desarrollar un -sistema operativo tipo Unix completamente libre. Si te interesa saber más -acerca del Proyecto GNU, puedes leer acerca de él en -http://www.gnu.org. - - - - -Esta guía describe Gnome 1.4, última versión de Gnome (al menos en Febrero de -2001). - - - - - - - - Acerca de esta Guía - -Esta guía le dará una breve introducción a Gnome. No esta destinada a -cubrir todos los detalles de Gnome; si necesita mas información, debería -leer los detallados manuales indicados en . -Además, esta guía asume que ya tiene Gnome instalado; si necesita ayuda -para instalar Gnome, por favor consulte las instrucciones en la -página Gnome. - - - -Los autores de esta guía son los miembros del grupo de documentación de Gnome (GDP). -Si quiere hacer cualquier comentario o sugerencia acerca de esta guía, o si puede -ofrecer cualquier otra ayuda para mejorar o traducir documentación Gnome, por favor -envíe un mensaje a docs@gnome.org, o visite la -pagina web de GDP -. - - -La traducción es obra del grupo -Gnome-es, si tienes algún comentario o sugerencia dirigete a la -lista del grupo. - -. - - -Los autores de están guía asumen que esta usando la configuración por omisión de -Gnome ( esto es, el tema GTK por omisión y el gestor de ventanas sawfish -con el micro-tema MicroGUI. Gnome es altamente configurable, -así que es fácil cambiar no solo el aspecto, sino también el comportamiento de -Gnome; en cualquier caso, recomendamos hacerlo únicamente cuando tenga algo de -experiencia con Gnome. - - - - - - - Convenios sobre le ratón utilizados en esta guía - -Antes de describir Gnome, permitanos introducir algunos términos usados -no solo es esta guía sino en todos los documentos Gnome. Principalmente, -necesitamos aclarar el uso de los botones del ratón y sus pulsaciones. - - -La mayoría de los documentos Gnome asumen que está usando un ratón -estándar (en Unix) de 3 botones y hablan de los botones izquierdo, -derecho y central; si un documento indica pulsar sin -especificar de forma explicita ningún botón, se asume que se trata -del botón izquierdo. Algunos documentos usa la notación 1º botón -del ratón, 2º botón del ratón y 3º botón -del ratón (o MB1, MB2, MB3 para abreviar) para los botones -izquierdo, central y derecho respectivamente. - - -Si esta usando un ratón de dos botones, puede emular el botón central -pulsando de forma simultanea los botones izquierdo y derecho; si dispone -de un ratón con rueda, la rueda puede usarse en sustitución del botón -central. - - -Puede intercambiar las funciones de los botones usando el -Centro de control Gnome. Muchos usuarios zurdos deciden -invertir los botones izquierdo y derecho. Si ha hecho esto último, debe usar el -botón derecho siempre que en el documento se le -pida una pulsación, y el botón izquierdo del ratón -siempre que se pida pulsar el botón derecho o el 3º -botón del ratón. - - -Si utiliza un ratón con alguna disposición inusual de los botones, -un «trackball», o algún otro tipo de dispositivo de entrada, necesita -localizar los botones derecho, -izquierdo y centrales correspondientes; -esta información puede normalmente encontrarse en el manual que se -entrega con el dispositivo. Normalmente, el botón izquierdo - (MB1) es el que cae bajo el dedo índice. - - - - - - - - Un primer vistazo a Gnome: el escritorio y el panel - - muestra un ejemplo de Gnome en plena -ejecución. Gnome es muy configurable, así que su pantalla puede tener -un aspecto bastante diferente. - - -
- Ejemplo de pantalla Gnome. - - Ejemplo de pantalla Gnome - - - -
- - - - Panel - -La barra larga en la parte inferior de es el -panel Gnome. Contiene un montón de cosas útiles, como - - - El Menú principal: es el botón -con una estilizada huella de un pie. Si pulsamos este botón se abre un -menú que contiene todas las aplicaciones y comandos de Gnome, incluyendo -el comando para terminar la sesión. - - - - -Los lanzadores de aplicaciones: son botones que arrancan varias programas. -Por ejemplo, el botón con una caja de herramientas arranca el Centro de -control Gnome (para configurar su sistema). - - - - -Apliques del panel: son pequeñas aplicaciones diseñadas para funcionar -dentro del panel. Por ejemplo, el aplique reloj -en el extremo derecho muestra la hora actual, y el aplique -lista de tareas muestra una lista de las ventanas -de aplicaciones de su escritorio ( esto ultimo se discutirá en detalle -en ). - - - - - -Al igual que todos los componentes Gnome, el panel es altamente configurable: -puede añadir o eliminar lanzadores de aplicaciones y apliques, editar -el Menú principal, cambiar el fondo del panel, -o incluso crear nuevos paneles. Por ejemplo para mover un objeto, arrastrelo -hasta la nueva posición usando el botón central del ratón; para configurar -un objeto, obtener ayuda acerca de el, o para eliminarlo del panel, -pulse el botón derecho sobre el y elija el elemento apropiado del -menú desplegable. Para ocultar el panel cuando no -este usándolo, pulse sobre uno de los -botones de ocultación (con pequeñas flechas) en los -extremos del panel. - - -Hay mas operaciones accesibles desde el menú del Panel, -y puede acceder a ellas pulsando el botón derecho sobre un espacio vacío -del panel (por ejemplo, en las flechas de ocultación) y seleccionando -Panel en el menú. El menú del panel también -contiene el -manual del panel, que describe -todas estas opciones y otras mas. - - - - - - - - Escritorio - -Cualquier cosa fuera del panel se conoce como escritorio. -Puede situar iconos representando ficheros, aplicaciones, y otros elementos -en el escritorio (con Gnome se instala por defecto un conjunto de iconos), -y después pulsar dos veces sobre un elemento para usarlo: - - - - -Si el elemento es un programa, el programa arrancara. - - - - -Si es un fichero de datos, se arrancara el programa apropiado con esos -datos cargados. - - - - - -Si es un directorio, se arrancara el gestor de ficheros y se mostrara el -contenido de ese directorio. Su escritorio tendrá probablemente un icono -que muestra una casa y esta etiquetado como -directorio personal. Si pulsa dos veces sobre este -icono el gestor de ficheros arrancara mostrando su directorio personal. - - - - -La forma mas fácil de situar un elemento en el escritorio es arrastrar y -soltar un fichero desde la ventana del gestor de ficheros. Esto se -discutirá con mas detalle en . Una vez que el -elemento este situado en el escritorio, puede moverlo por el escritorio -usando el botón izquierdo del ratón, o puede pulsar el botón derecho sobre -el para abrir el menú desplegable que permite eliminar -el elemento o cambiar sus propiedades. - - - - - - - - Uso del ratón - -Como ya hemos visto, puede hacer prácticamente cualquier cosa con tan -solo pulsar el ratón. A continuación damos una serie de convenciones que -funcionan prácticamente en cualquier parte de Gnome: - - - - -Al pulsar sobre un elemento con el botón izquierdo del ratón se selecciona -(destaca) este elemento. Si necesita seleccionar varios objetos, mantenga -pulsada la tecla CTRL mientras la pulsa. - - -Al pulsar dos veces sobre un elemento se ejecuta la acción por omisión para -este elemento (ejecución del una aplicación, apertura de un fichero, etc.) - - -Al pulsar sobre un elemento con el botón derecho se abre un menú dependiente -del contexto, que contiene todos los comandos y la información disponible -para este elemento. Si tiene seleccionado un grupo de elementos, al pulsar -el botón derecho sobre cualquiera de ellos se abre un menú dependiendo del -contexto que se aplica a todos estos elementos. - - -Puede seleccionar texto en cualquier punto de la pantalla usando el botón -izquierdo del ratón, y insertarlo después en cualquier otra parte de la -pantalla que acepte una entrada de texto, pulsando el -botón central del ratón. - - - -Además, pulsando el botón derecho del ratón sobre un espacio vació de su -escritorio se abre un menú desplegable, que permite -cambiar el fondo del escritorio u otras de sus propiedades, o añadir -un nuevo elemento en el escritorio. Al pulsar en el escritorio con el -botón central del ratón se abre el menú por omisión de su gestor de -ventanas (véase ). - - - - - - Terminar la sesión - - -Para terminar la sesión Gnome, pulse sobre el icono del -Menú principal y elija la opción -Terminar sesión. -Gnome le pedirá confirmación; le ofrecerá también la opción de -salvar la sesión — esto es, se salvara información acerca -de las aplicaciones actualmente abiertas y su posición en la -pantalla, de forma que cuando se conecte la próxima vez, -encuentre las mismas aplicaciones en los mismos sitios (esto solo -funciona para aplicaciones totalmente compatibles con Gnome). - - - - - - - - - Trabajar con ventanas - -El sistema gráfico usado por todos los sistemas operativos de tipo Unix, -el sistema de ventanas X, permite tener varias ventanas en la pantalla, -con aplicaciones diferentes ejecutándose cada una en una de las ventanas. -Sin embargo, por si mismo, el sistema de ventanas X solo puede realizar -operaciones de muy bajo nivel, así que se usa siempre en conjunción con -otro paquete de software, llamado gestor de ficheros. -Un gestor de ventanas proporciona los bordes de las ventanas y los botones, -permite mover, cerrar, y cambiar el tamaño de las ventanas, etc. Gnome -puede trabajar con muchos gestores de ventanas. -Los mas populares son: - - Enlightenment y - Sawfish (oficialmente -conocido como Sawmill). -Cada gestor de ventanas puede usar muchos estilos diferentes de decoración -de ventanas y botones ( que se conocen como -temas del gestor de ventanas). -Como es imposible abarcarlos todos, en esta sección describiremos solo el -gestor de ventanas entregado por defecto con Gnome, -Sawfish, y su tema por omisión. -(MicroGUI). -En se muestra un ejemplo de borde de las -ventanas en el tema MicroGUI. - - - -
- Borde de las ventanas en el estilo MicroGUI. - - Borde de las ventanas en el estilo MicroGUI - - - -
- - -¿Entonces, que se puede hacer con las ventanas? - - - - - Cerrar, minimizar, y maximizar ventanas - - - -Para cerrar una ventana, pulse el botón con una pequeña x -amarilla en lado derecho del borde de la ventana. Si la aplicación tiene -datos que no se han salvado, le preguntara si desea salvarlos. - - -Para maximizar una ventana, esto es hacerla que ocupe toda la pantalla (a -excepción de la parte ocupada por los paneles), pulse el botón con una -pequeña flecha amarilla apuntado hacia arriba. Pulsando de -nuevo sobre esta flecha devolverá la ventana a su tamaño original. - - -Para minimizar (ocultar o iconificar) una ventana, pulse el botón con una -pequeña flecha amarilla apuntado hacia abajo. La ventana -desaparecerá de la pantalla. sin embargo, no se abra perdido para siempre -— la aplicación de esta ventana continua ejecutándose, no se pierden -los datos — esta solamente oculta de forma temporal. Todas las -ventanas minimizadas se muestran en el aplique lista de tareas y pueden -recuperarse como se indica mas adelante. - - -Una alternativa practica a minimizar las ventanas es -enrollarlas. Cuando se enrolla una ventana, se -enrolla sobre su propia barra de titulo, de forma que -la barra de titulo es la única parte de la ventana que permanece en la -pantalla. Para enrollar una ventana, pulse dos veces sobre la barra -de titulo; para desenrollarla, pulse dos veces de nuevo. ¡Pruebelo! - - - - - - - - Pasar a primer o segundo plano las ventanas - - - -Las ventanas pueden estar superpuestas en la pantalla, de forma que una -de las ventanas estará sobre las demás. -Puede pasar a primer plano una ventana (esto es, ponerla -por encima de todas las demás) pulsando en la barra de título de la -ventana. También puede pasar una ventana del primer plano a un segundo -plano pulsando el botón derecho del ratón -sobre la barra de titulo de la ventana, o pulsando el botón derecho del ratón -mientras se mantiene pulsada la tecla ALT en cualquier parte -del interior de la ventana. - - - - - - Foco - - - -De todas las ventanas de la pantalla, solo una esta activa (en la jerga de -la computación, «focused»), lo que significa que cualquier cosa -teclee en el teclado se enviara a la aplicación que este ejecutándose en esta -ventana. (Esto no significa que las aplicaciones que se ejecutan en otras -ventanas estén ociosas — pueden también estar en plena ejecución). -Para ayudarle a ver que ventana tiene el foco, la barra de titulo de esta -ventana tiene un color diferente (la parte izquierda es azul, en contraposición -al gris del resto de las ventanas). Para cambiar el foco a otra ventana, -simplemente pulse en cualquier parte de esta ventana. Puede también pulsar en la -barra de titulo para activar y llevar a primer plano de forma simultanea -una ventana. - - - - - - - - - Mover y cambiar el tamaño de las ventanas - - - -Para mover una ventana, arrastre su barra de titulo hasta una nueva posición -usando el botón izquierdo del ratón (esto es, pulse sobre la barra de titulo -y mueva el ratón sin soltar el ratón). Puede también mover una ventana -pulsando en cualquier punto del interior de la ventana manteniendo pulsada -la tecla ALT. - - -Para cambiar el tamaño de una ventana, sitúe el cursor del ratón en cualquiera -de los bordes de la ventana (a excepción del superior) o en las esquinas. -El cursor del ratón se transformara en una flecha que empuja una linea o una -esquina, permitiendo arrastrar el borde o la esquina a una nueva posición. - - - - - - - - Lista de tareas - -Todas las ventanas del escritorio (incluidas las minimizadas) se muestran -en la Lista de tareas, situada en el panel. -Para cada ventana, se muestra un mini-icono y el principio del titulo de -la ventana. Para restaurar una ventana minimizada, pulse simplemente sobre -su titulo en la lista de tareas. Al pulsar con el botón derecho sobre -el titulo de la ventana se abre un menú desplegable, que -permite enrollar la ventana, cerrarla, o matar la aplicación que se ejecuta -en la ventana. La ultima opción debería usarse solamente cuando la aplicación -esta bloqueada y no responda al comando Cerrar ventana. Si -mata una aplicación, pierde todos los datos que no haya salvado! - - - - - - Menú de manejo de ventanas - - Sawfish también proporciona un menú -para cada ventana; este menú contiene todas las operaciones posibles -para esta ventana descritas anteriormente. Para acceder es este menú, -pulse sobre el botón situado a la izquierda de la barra de titulo de -la ventana (con un pequeño triángulo apuntando hacia abajo). Puede también -invocar este menú pulsando el botón derecho sobre el título de la ventana -o pulsando en cualquier parte de la ventana con el -botón central del ratón mientras mantiene -pulsada la tecla ALT. - - - - - - Menú del escritorio - -Finalmente, Sawfish también proporciona un -menú de escritorio; se puede acceder a el pulsando -el botón central del ratón en cualquier -espacio vació del escritorio. Contiene las siguientes opciones: - - - - - Ventanas - - - -Proporciona una lista de todas las ventanas, incluyendo las minimizadas. -Si seleccionamos una de ellas, se restaurara (si estaba minimizada) y -pasara a primer plano, por encima del resto de las ventanas. Muy cómodo si -tiene tantas ventanas que la que necesita esta completamente tapada por -las demás. - - - - - - Escritorios - - - -Permite saltar de un escritorio a otro, crear y eliminar escritorios. Véase -mas detalles en el manual de Sawfish. - - - - - - Programas - - - -Igual a la sección Programas del -Menú principal. - - - - - - Configurar - - - -Permite al usuario personalizar todas las propiedades del comportamiento -de Sawfish. Para los usuarios noveles, -recomendamos probar varios valores de la Apariencia, -pero dejar como están el resto de las subsecciones. - - - - - - Ayuda - - - -Proporciona enlaces a las paginas de Sawfish, -al manual de Sawfish (cuidado: esto no es -un manual de usuario, sino un manual para las personas que escriben -extensiones/personalizaciones para la aplicación -Sawfish usando el lenguaje de programación -LISP), un enlace a la Guía de usuario Gnome, -y a la Página web de Gnome. - - - - - - - - - - - - Nautilus: el gestor de ficheros de Gnome, un navegador para ayudas, y mas - -Gnome 1.4 incluye un interprete de comandos gráfico, - Nautilus. -Combina un gestor de ficheros, un navegador para ayudas, un navegador para la web, un cliente -FTP, y mucho mas. Para ejecutarlo, seleccione Nautilus en el -Menú principal, o simplemente pulse dos veces en cualquier icono -de directorio de su escritorio. - - - Manejo de ficheros con Nautilus - - -Como los mas modernos gestores de ficheros gráficos, Nautilus -muestra el contenido de los directorios seleccionados usando iconos para representar -los ficheros y subdirectorios. los ficheros o directorios se abren al pulsar dos veces -sobre ellos (para los ficheros de datos, se arranca la aplicación apropiada para -abrir este fichero). Al pulsar con el botón derecho sobre un fichero o directorio se -abre un menú desplegable. Usando este menú, se puede borrar -o renombrar el fichero, ver o cambiar sus propiedades o permisos, y mas cosas. - - -Nautilus también proporciona una forma fácil de mover -ficheros entre directorios. Para mover un fichero de un directorio a otro, abra -cada directorio en una ventana diferente de Nautilus -seleccionado Nueva ventana en el menú -Archivo de Nautilus. -Seleccione el fichero que necesita, y arrastrelo de una ventana a la otra. -Puede también arrastrar un fichero o directorio al escritorio. - - Nautilus proporciona muchas otras -herramientas para manipular ficheros. Es también altamente configurable, de forma -que puede fácilmente cambiar la forma en que se presentan los ficheros (por ejemplo, -puede elegir un icono personalizado para un determinado fichero). Para una -descripción detallada de todas estas posibilidades, lea el -manual de Nautilus. - - - - - - Lectura de documentación con Nautilus - -Además de ser un gestor de ficheros, Nautilus es -también un navegador de ayudas: puede usarlo para leer documentación instalada -en su ordenador. Esto incluye no solo la documentación de Gnome, sino también -las paginas de manual al estilo Unix («manpages»), las paginas info de GNU -(formato de documentación de la utilidades del proyecto GNU), y otros -tipo de documentación. Para ver la lista de toda la documentación instalada en -su sistema, pulse en la solapa Ayuda en la parte izquierda -del panel de Nautilus. - - - - - - - - Personalización - -Gnome es altamente configurable — puede cambiar prácticamente -cualquier cosa: el color del fondo, las acciones asociadas a las teclas, -la posición de los paneles, el contenido del Menú principal, -y mas cosas. La mayoría de estos cambios se realizan usando el -Centro de control de Gnome, que puede encontrarse -en el submenú Configuración del -Menú principal. El -Centro de control de Gnome dispone de su propia -documentación detallada que debería consultar antes de realizar cambio -alguno. - - -Aquí nos gustaría dar únicamente un vistazo a las opciones mas comúnmente -utilizadas del centro de control de Gnome. - - - - Fondo - - -Puede cambiar el fondo del escritorio seleccionado -Propiedades del tapiz en la sección -Escritorio del -centro de control de Gnome. -(una alternativa mas rápida para acceder a esta sección es pulsar con el -botón derecho del ratón sobre un espacio vació del escritorio y seleccionar -Configurar la imagen de fondo en el menú -desplegable). - - - - - Selector de temas - - - - El Selector de temas permite cambiar el tema -del escritorio (también conocido como tema GTK). Esto cambia la apariencia -del Menú principal, así como los menús, barras de -herramientas, barras deslizantes, botones de selección y otros elementos -gráficos de la interfaz de usuario para todas las aplicaciones Gnome. -Muchos usuarios encuentran el tema por defecto demasiado gris, así que -la primera cosa que hacen es cambiarlo por otro. - - - - - El gestor de ventanas Sawfish - - - -Esta sección permite cambiar las características del gestor de ventanas. En -particular, en la subsección Apariencia puede cambiar -el estilo de los marcos (tema), que determina los bordes de las ventanas y -los botones. También puede cambiar la tipografía usada en la barra de titulo -de las ventanas. Si es un usuario novel, le recomendamos que no cambie otras -cosas. - - - - - Sesión - - - -En esta sección puede definir los programas iniciales (esto es, los programas -que se ejecutan cada vez que se conecta en el sistema), activar o desactivar -los consejos durante el arranque y los formularios de confirmación de -fin de sesión. - - - - - -Además, puede cambiar las propiedades de varios elementos — especialmente, -las de los paneles e iconos del escritorio — pulsando sobre ellos -con el botón derecho del ratón y seleccionando -Propiedades en el menú desplegable. -De esta manera, se puede cambiar el titulo de un icono, el tamaño y el color de -fondo (o incluso la imagen de fondo) del panel, y mas cosas. - - - -Casi todas las aplicaciones tienen sus propios parámetros de configuración -(busque los menús de Preferencias o -Configuración), así que puede cambiar, por ejemplo, los -colores usados por el terminal de Gnome o hacerlo transparente — las -posibilidades son ilimitadas! - - - - - - - Aplicaciones y utilidades Gnome - -Gnome se entrega con muchas aplicaciones y utilidades; además, Gnome permite -utilizar aplicaciones de terceros como Netscape), -aplicaciones de KDE, y otras aplicaciones y utilidades instaladas en su -sistema. A continuación se incluye una lista de algunas de las mas útiles -aplicaciones y utilidades que podrá encontrar en el Menú principal -de Gnome (¡no es una lista completa!). - - - - Aplicaciones - - - -Incluye aplicaciones de oficina y aplicaciones tales que - - - - Gnumeric - — una hoja de calculo compatible con Excel y totalmente funcional. - - - - AbiWord — un procesador de textos ligero. - - - - Calendario de Gnome para ayudarle a gestionar su -saturada agenda - - - Varios editores de texto, desde el simple y fácil de usar -gedit, hasta el (posiblemente) mas poderoso editor de -textos jamas creado, Emacs (que no es una aplicación -Gnome). - - - - - - - - Gráficos - - - - - Gimp — -programa de edición de imágenes para usuarios avanzados; rival de - Photoshop. - - - -Visualizadores de imágenes como el Ojo de Gnome, -GQview y xv. - - - - - - - Utilidades - - - -Junto a otras cosas, aqui encontrara - - - - Calculadora - - - - Herramienta de búsqueda de Gnome que puede -usar para buscar ficheros en su sistema - - - - gfloppy para formatear disquetes - - - - GDict para -buscar palabras en uno de los diccionarios libremente disponibles en Internet - - - - - - - Multimedia - - - -Aquí encontrara el - lector de CD, el - Mezclador (que también puede -usarse para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces), y el lector de MP3 - XMMS. - - - - - - Sistema - - - -Este submenú contiene utilidades para manejar su sistema. Puede encontrar información -detallada acerca del procesador, la memoria, y el sistema operativo usando la -información del sistema, chequear cuanto espacio queda -libre en sus discos usando el disco libre Gnome, o ver todos -los procesos (tareas) que se están ejecutando en su ordenador usando el - Monitor del sistema. -Además, el Monitor del sistema también muestra el -nivel de carga del procesador y la memoria, y permite matar los procesos bloqueados -o no deseados por otros motivos. - - -Este submenú también contiene herramientas para gestionar el software instalado -en su sistema, llamadas GnoRPM y -Actualizaciónes Helix Gnome (si esta usando la distribución -de Gnome preparada por la empresa Helix Code). -GnoRPM permite ver todos los paquetes de software -instalados en su sistema (si esta usando una distribución de Linux basada en paquetes -RPM, como Red Hat, SuSe, o Mandrake); también permite eliminar, actualizar, o instalar -nuevos paquetes. -Actualizaciónes Helix Gnome proporciona una extremadamente -sencilla forma, casi una sola pulsación de ratón, de actualizar su instalación de -Gnome. Ambas utilidades, en cualquier caso, requieren disponer de privilegios -de administración (root). - - -Y finalmente, el mismo submenú contiene también varios emuladores de terminal -(xterm, xterm a color, -terminal de Gnome) que le permiten utilizar la mas -poderosa (aunque no la mas intuitiva) interfaz jamas creada — el -interprete de linea de comandos. - - - - - Red - - - -Aqui, encontrara el navegador Netscape, -X-Chat para las retransmisión de charlas -en Internet (IRC), Gnome-ICU para hablar con -otras personas usando el protocolo ICQ, y gftp -una herramienta gráfica para transferir ficheros vía FTP. -Observe que el gestor de ficheros, Nautilus, -también dispone de capacidades FTP empotradas, así que gftp -se necesita solo en los raros casos en que necesite algo realmente complejo -(por ejemplo, la transferencia de ficheros usando versiones seguras de FTP, -basadas en ssh). - - - - - Juegos - - - - Montones de juegos — ¡simplemente pruebelos! - - - - - - - - - - - - Ayuda - Tengo problemas! - -Todo el mundo se encuentra con problemas tarde o temprano. A continuación -se dan algunos consejos para enfrentarse a los problemas mas -comunes: - - - - Matar una aplicación bloqueada - -Si una aplicación se bloquea o cuelga — esto es, si no responde -a las pulsaciones de ratón y a los comandos de teclado, puede o bien -esperar y confiar en que vuelva a responder, o bine puede matarla. -Si decide matarla (Aviso: perderá todos los datos no salvados), arranque -el monitor de sistema Gnome -(desde el submenú Sistema del -Menú principal), pulse con el botón derecho sobre -el nombre de la aplicación colgada, y seleccione -Matar inmediatamente. -El uso del monitor de sistema Gnome permite -también localizar y matar todos los procesos de apoyo arrancados por -esta aplicación. - - -Si una aplicación Gnome se bloquea o casca (muere de forma inesperada) -de forma repetida, debería rellenar un informe de error tal y como se -describe en . - - - - Mi sistema completo se bloqueo! - - -Si el sistema entero se bloquea y no responde, no se apresure a -pulsar el botón de reset del ordenador — -esta es generalmente la peor solución. -Probablemente, no sera el sistema operativo mismo el que esta bloqueado -(los sistemas Unix son conocidos por su estabilidad), sino únicamente -la parte gráfica, el sistema de ventanas X. En este caso, puede probar -a arrancar de nuevo el sistema de ventanas X pulsando simultáneamente -CTRL-ALT-Backspace. -Esto debería funcionar en la implementación del sistema de ventanas X -usada con Linux y *BSD, XFree86 — a no ser que su administrador de -sistemas lo haya deshabilitado. Por supuesto, con este método también -se pierden todos los datos no salvados, pero el menos no corre el riesgo -de estropear todo el sistema de ficheros. - - - - - - - Se perdió la configuración completa de Gnome! - -Si tiene problemas mas serios que la simple desordenación de los iconos -del escritorio — la solución radical es eliminar todos los ficheros -de configuración de Gnome y arrancar desde cero. Esta es una solución de -emergencia, ya que pierde todos los parámetros de configuración y deberá -configurar sus menús, paneles, etc. desde cero de nuevo, esto es, a partir -de la configuración por omisión de Gnome. En cualquier caso, esto solo -afecta a la configuración de Gnome, así que sus ficheros de datos y los -parámetros de las aplicaciones Gnome permanecen intactos. - - -Para eliminar todos los ficheros de configuración de Gnome y volver a -la configuración original de Gnome, termine la sesión y conectese de -nuevo manteniendo pulsadas las teclas CTRL y -SHIFT (inmediatamente después de introducir su clave -en el formulario de acceso). Se le presentara un formulario, ofreciéndole -la posibilidad de resetear la sesión salvada (esto es, las aplicaciones -que tenia abiertas la ultima vez que termino la sesión); o resetear los -parámetros de la configuración de Gnome; o ambas. - - -Finalmente, si tiene realmente serios problemas y su sistema se bloquea -o queda inutilizable en cualquier otra forma, nada mas conectarse, queda -una ultima opción. Puede seleccionar una sesión del tipo -prueba de fallos en vez de la sesión -por defecto Gnome en la pantalla de acceso. -Tanto el gestor de acceso de Kde como el de Gnome soportan esta opción. -En este tipo de sesión, no se arranca Gnome; en su lugar, se accede -con un única ventana de tipo terminal. Esto al menos garantiza un arranque -correcto, y , si sabe como usar las herramientas de linea de comandos, -tiene una oportunidad de localizar y corregir el problema. En caso -contrario, consulte a un experto. - - - - - - - - ¿Donde encontrar mas información? - - Documentación incluida con Gnome - -Gnome incluye documentación detallada de la mayoría de las aplicaciones, -utilidades y de otros componentes, como el panel o el gestor de ficheros -nautilus. Puede ver la lista de todos los documentos de Gnome instalados -en su sistema usando la carpeta Contenido de la ayuda -en Nautilus. Por tanto, si desea -saber mas acerca de uno de estos componentes, lea el manual apropiado. - - -Además de los manuales de los componentes individuales, la documentación -Gnome incluye también: - - - - - - Preguntas frecuentemente formuladas - - - - -Este documento contiene las respuestas a algunas de las preguntas sobre -Gnome mas frecuentemente formuladas. - - - - - - - Si es nuevo en el mundo UNIX/Linux... - - - - -Este breve documento le da la mínima información necesaria sobre Unix -y los sistemas operativos de tipo Unix, incluyendo cosas como los -nombres de ficheros,enlaces simbólicos y la mas confusa de todas ellas, -la noción de montaje. Si no ha usado nunca antes un -sistema Unix, no olvide leerlo. - - - - - - Glosario - - - -Ofrece una breve explicación de algunos de los términos relacionados con -ordenadores que podrá ver en la documentación Gnome, desde ASCII hasta -el sistema de ventanas X. - - - - - - - Recursos Gnome en Internet - -Además de la documentación entregada con Gnome, hay también información -abundante disponible en Internet. Un buen sitio donde empezar es, por -supuesto, la pagina web de Gnome. Allí -encontrara instrucciones para instalar Gnome, revisiones y trucos, -información de desarrollo, y mas cosas. - - -También puede encontrar documentación Gnome en Castellano en la -página web de Gnome-es -y en la -página de Gnome España - -. - - -Si no encuentra allí la respuesta a su pregunta, puede preguntar a otros -usuarios y desarrolladores de Gnome en la lista de correo de Gnome -(las instrucciones para suscribirse puede encontrarse -aquí). -Tenga en cuenta, sin embargo, que esta lista es solo para cuestiones -relacionadas con Gnome (no pregunte como configurar el sistema de ventanas -X, por ejemplo), y es de mala educación (por decirlo suavemente) formular -una pregunta sin comprobar primero que no este ya contestada en los -documentos disponibles como las FAQ de Gnome. - - - - - No todo es Gnome - -Se dará cuenta que Gnome es solo una parte de su ordenador. -Si desea descubrir todo el potencial de su ordenador, deberá comprender -no solamente Gnome, sino también el sistema operativo oculto debajo -(Unix/linux/FreeBSD), varias herramientas y utilidades incluidas con el, -y su sistema gráfico (el sistema de ventanas X). Cada uno de estos -componentes vienen normalmente con su propia documentación. La mayoría -de los comandos y utilidades Unix están documentadas en las así llamadas -paginas de manuales, «man pages» abreviado en Ingles. -Puede verlas usando Nautilus -(véase ). Esta documentación es normalmente -muy detallada y mas técnica de lo que la mayoría de los usuarios -quisieran. Otro formato de documentación usado por las utilidades del -proyecto GNU es el de las paginas info. -Pueden también visualizarse usando Nautilus. -Muchas aplicaciones tienen también documentación en otros formatos. -Algunas veces no es fácil localizar documentación de un determinada -aplicación — pruebe a mirar en el directorio -/usr/doc. - - -La documentación del sistema operativo mismo varía de un sistema a otro. -El mejor consejo es buscar en el manual impreso que se entrega con su -sistema. Para Linux, una buena fuente de información es el proyecto -de documentación Linux (LDP); puede leer su documentación en Internet -(en http://www.linuxdoc.org). -Virtualmente todos las distribuciones de Linux incluyen también copia -de los documentos de LDP; normalmente se encuentran en - /usr/doc/LDP o - /usr/doc/HOWTO. - - -Muchos de los documentos del proyecto LDP se encuentran también traducidos al castellano.Podras -encontarlos en las -páginas de los proyectos: -Lucas para los -manuales -, -Insflug -para los documentos como («HOWTO»), y -Grupos-es para otros proyectos de traducción de documentación. - -. - - - -Y por supuesto, hay un buen numero de libros disponibles acerca de todas -la variaciones de Unix/Linux, Gnome, y acerca de cualquier cosa en la -que este interesado. Busque en su librería local. - - - - - «feedback» - -Si tiene cualquier comentario, sugerencia, o queja sobre esta guia, por favor -envielas al proyecto de documentación Gnome en - docs@gnome.org. - - -Si encuentra algún fallo en una de las aplicaciones Gnome, por favor -reportelo! Los desarrolladores leerán estos informes y trataran de -corregir todos los fallos reportados. La forma mas fácil de enviar -un informe de fallo es usar la herramienta para informar de -errores de Gnome, que se encuentra en el submenú -Utilidades del Menú principal. -Esta herramienta arrancara de forma automática cuando una aplicación -Gnome falla. También debería usarse para enviar sugerencias o peticiones -de nuevas funcionalidades para las aplicaciones Gnome: -simplemente seleccione Prioridad: mejora en la -ventana apropiada de la herramienta para informar de -errores de Gnome. - - -Si tiene preguntas sobre Gnome, o desea discutir acerca de Gnome -con otros usuarios y desarrolladores, debería suscribirse a la lista -de correo de Gnome en la forma descrita en . - - -
- - - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/it/Makefile.am b/introduction-to-gnome/it/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index f36fd41..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/it/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -figs = \ - figures/desktop.png \ - figures/microguiborder.png -docname = introduction-to-gnome -lang = it -omffile = introduction-to-gnome-it.omf -sgml_ents = -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/desktop.png b/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/desktop.png deleted file mode 100644 index 543518e..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/desktop.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/microguiborder.png b/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/microguiborder.png deleted file mode 100644 index a712c05..0000000 Binary files a/introduction-to-gnome/it/figures/microguiborder.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome-it.omf b/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome-it.omf deleted file mode 100644 index e34a876..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome-it.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Introduzione a GNOME - - - GNOME - - - - - - diff --git a/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome.sgml b/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index ad2bf32..0000000 --- a/introduction-to-gnome/it/introduction-to-gnome.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1220 +0,0 @@ - -
- - Introduzione a Gnome - - - Gnome - Documentation Team - - - - - Bozza dell'Introduzione a Gnome per Gnome 1.4 - - - - - 2000, 2001 - - Red Hat, Inc., David A. Wheeler, Alexander Kirillov - - Traduzione italiana di Eugenia Franzoni, <eugenia@innominate.it> - - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any Gnome documentation, and those trademarks - are made aware to the members of the Gnome Documentation - Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. - - - - - - - - - Cosa è Gnome? - - Gnome è un ambiente grafico per il desktop user-friendly per i - sistemi Unix e Unix-like, che permette agli utenti di utilizzare - e configurare facilmente i loro computer. Gnome comprende un pannello - (per avviare le applicazioni e mostrare il loro stato), un desktop - (dove possono essere posizionati dati ed applicazioni), un insieme - di strumenti ed applicazioni standard, ed un insieme di convenzioni - che rendono facile per le applicazioni cooperare ed essere consistenti - l'una con l'altra. Gli utenti di altri sistemi operativi o ambienti - si dovrebbero sentire a casa usando il potente ambiente grafico di Gnome, - che gira su molti sistemi operativi di tipo Unix, come Linux, FreeBSD e - Solaris. - - Tutte le componenti di Gnome sono software libero (free software), - sviluppato da centinaia di programmatori in tutto il mondo. - Ne potete scaricare da Internet sia il codice sorgente completo che i binari - pronti all'uso, dato che sono distribuiti sotto la GNU General Public - License (ed i suoi cugini, Lesser General Public License e - Free Documentation - License, rispettivamente per le librerie e la documentazione). - In particolare, questo significa che tutti sono liberi di usare, copiare - e distribuire Gnome. Se vi interessa sapere di più sul progetto di Gnome, - visitate il sito Web di Gnome. - - - Gnome è altamente configurabile, e vi permette di impostare il desktop - nel modo che volete; supporta molte lingue, tra cui l'Italiano, e - addirittura diversi protocolli di Drag and Drop per avere interoperabilità - massima con le applicazioni non appartenenti al progetto. - - - - ``Gnome'' è un acronimo per GNU Network Object Model - Environment, ed è una parte del progetto GNU, - avviato nel 1984 per sviluppare un sistema operativo di tipo Unix completamente - libero. Per ulteriori informazioni, visitate il sito Web del progetto GNU. - - - Questa guida descrive Gnome 1.4, l'ultima versione (Febbraio 2001) di Gnome. - - - - - - Su questa guida - - Questa guida contiene una breve introduzione a Gnome, e non - ne copre tutti i dettagli; se volete altre informazioni, leggete - i manuali più dettagliati, che verranno elencati in . Inoltre, questa guida assume che abbiate Gnome - già installato; se vi serve aiuto nel farlo, leggete le istruzioni sul - sito Web di Gnome. - - - - Questa guida è stata scritta dai membri del Gnome - Documentation Project (GDP). Se avete commenti o suggerimenti da fare, - o se volete aiutare a tradurre la documentazione di Gnome, scrivete a - docs@gnome.org, o visitate il sito Web del GDP. - - Gli autori di questa guida assumono che abbiate la configurazione di - default, cioè il tema GTK di default e il gestore di finestre - sawfish con il tema - MicroGUI). Gnome è altamente configurabile, quindi - è facile cambiare non solo il suo aspetto ma anche il suo comportamento; - vi consigliamo però di farlo solo quando avrete imparato come funziona. - - - - - Convenzioni per il mouse - - Prima di descrivere Gnome, introduciamo alcuni termini usati non solo - in questa guida, ma in tutta la documentazione di Gnome; la cosa più - importante è chiarire l'uso dei pulsanti e dei click del mouse. - - - Nella maggior parte della documentazione di Gnome si assume che stiate - usando un mouse standard a 3 tasti (per Unix), e si parla di tasto - sinistro, destro e centrale; se un documento dice cliccate - senza indicare il tasto da usare, è sottinteso che si debba usare il - sinistro. Alcuni documenti usano la notazione tasto 1, - tasto 2 e tasto 3 (o MB1, MB2, MB3 in breve) - rispettivamente per i tasti sinistro, centrale e destro. - - - Se state usando un mouse a due tasti, potete emulare quello centrale - premendo contemporaneamente il sinistro e il destro; se avete un mouse - con la rotella, potete usare quest'ultima al posto del tasto centrale. - - - Potete scambiare le funzioni dei tasti usando il - Centro di Controllo di Gnome; molti mancini scelgono di scambiare - i tasti destro e sinistro. Se lo fate, quando nei documenti viene - indicato di cliccare, dovrete usare il tasto destro, e il sinistro - quando vi si chiede di fare click destro o di usare - il tasto 3 del mouse. - - - Se usate un mouse con i tasti impostati in maniera strana, una trackball - o qualche altro dispositivo di input, dovrete trovare quale tasto - corrisponde al destro, - sinistro e centrale; di solito si trova - questa informazione nel manuale del dispositivo stesso, ma nella maggior - parte dei casi il tasto sinistro (MB1) è quello sotto - l'indice. - - - - - - - - I primi passi: il desktop ed il pannello - - In trovate un esempio di come appare Gnome; - si può configurare in molti modi, quindi il vostro schermo può apparire - diverso. - - -
- Esempio di schermata di Gnome. - - Esempio di schermata di Gnome - - - -
- - - - Il pannello - - La barra in fondo alla è un - Pannello di Gnome, e contiene molte cose utili, come: - - - Il Menù Principale: è il pulsante - con il piede; cliccandoci sopra si apre un menù con tutte - le applicazioni ed i comandi di Gnome, compreso quello per fare - logout. - - - - - I pulsanti di avvio: sono pulsanti che avviano vari - programmi; ad esempio, il pulsante con la cassetta degli attrezzi - avvia il Centro di Controllo - (per configurare il sistema). - - - - - Applet per il pannello: sono piccoli programmi progettati - per funzionare all'interno del pannello; ad esempio, l'applet - orologio all'estrema destra - mostra l'ora corrente, e l'applet - lista task (nel mezzo del pannello) - visualizza l'elenco di tutte le finestre delle applicazioni aperte - sul desktop (sarà discussa in dettaglio in - ). - - - - - - Come tutte le componenti di Gnome, il Pannello è altamente - configurabile: potete aggiungere o togliere pulsanti di avvio ed applet, - modificare il Menù Principale, cambiare lo sfondo - del pannello o crearne di nuovi. Ad esempio, per spostare un oggetto, - trascinatelo nella nuova posizione usando il tasto centrale del mouse; per configurare - un oggetto, avere aiuto su di esso o rimuoverlo dal pannello, - fateci click destro sopra e selezionate la voce relativa dal menù - pop-up. Per nascondere il pannello quando non lo state - usando, cliccate su uno dei pulsanti di - minimizzazione con le frecce alle estremità del pannello. - - Dal menù del Panel sono disponibili altre operazioni; - lo potete aprire facendo click destro su qualsiasi punto vuoto del pannello - stesso, ad esempio sulle frecce di minimizzazione, e scegliendo - Panel dal menù. Tra le scelte possibili al suo - interno c'è la Guida del pannello, che descrive - tutte le opzioni possibili ed altri argomenti. - - - - Il desktop - - Tutto quello che sta al di fuori del Pannello si chiama - desktop; ci si possono posizionare le icone - corrispondenti a file, applicazioni ed altri elementi (ne vengono - installate alcune di default). Per usare l'oggetto rappresentato da un'icona - è sufficiente farci doppio click: - - - - - Se l'oggetto è un programma, verrà avviato. - - - - - Se è un file di dati, verrà aperto il programma appropriato con - il file aperto al suo interno. - - - - - - Se è una directory, verrà aperto il File Manager, che ne mostrerà - il contenuto; per avviare il File Manager sulla vostra home - directory è sufficiente cliccare sull'icona con la casa, che dovrebbe - essere presente sul desktop, e che si chiama - Home di vostronome. - - - - - Il modo più semplice di posizionare un elemento sul desktop è di - trascinare un file dalla finestra del File Manager, che verrà - discusso in maniera più approfondita in . - Quando l'elemento è sul desktop, lo potete spostare trascinandolo con il - sinistro, o cliccandoci sopra con il destro per aprire il menù - pop-up che permette di cancellarlo o di modificare le - sue proprietà. - - - - - - Usare il mouse - - Come avete già visto, potete fare quasi tutto usando solo il mouse; - ecco alcune convenzioni quasi universali per Gnome: - - - - - Cliccare su un elemento con il tasto sinistro lo seleziona, - evidenziandolo. Se dovete selezionare diversi oggetti, tenete - premuto - CTRL mentre fate click. - - - Fare doppio click su un elemento attiva l'azione di default - associata ad esso (avviare un'applicazione, aprire un file ecc). - - - Cliccare su un elemento con il tasto destro apre il menù - contestuale, che contiene tutti i comandi e le informazioni - relative all'elemento stesso. Se avete selezionato un gruppo - di elementi, facendo doppio click su uno qualsiasi apre il - menù contestuale riferito a tutto l'insieme. - - - Potete scegliere del testo in qualsiasi punto dello schermo usando - il pulsante sinistro del mouse, e poi inserirlo in un altro punto - che accetta input cliccando con il - tasto centrale. - - - - Inoltre, cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse su un punto vuoto - del desktop si apre un menù pop-up, - che permette di modificare lo sfondo del desktop ed altre proprietà, - e di aggiungere altri elementi nel desktop stesso. Cliccando sul destro - con il tasto centrale si apre il menù di default del gestore di finestre - (si veda ). - - - - - - Uscire da Gnome - - Per uscire da Gnome, aprite il menù principale - e selezionate Esci. Gnome - vi chiederà conferma, e vi darà la possibilità di salvare la sessione, - cioè le informazioni sulle applicazioni aperte e sulla loro posizione - sullo schermo, in modo che la prossima volta che ci si collega, le - stesse applicazioni verranno aperte nello stesso punto (funziona solo - per le applicazioni completamente compatibili con Gnome). - - - - - - - - Lavorare con le finestre - - Il sistema grafico usato da tutti i sistemi operativi di tipo Unix, - il Sistema X Window, permette di avere sullo schermo diverse finestre - con applicazioni differenti che girano al loro interno. Da solo, però, - il Sistema X Window può fare solo operazioni molto a basso livello, - e deve essere usato sempre insieme ad un altro software, il gestore di - finestre (window manager), che fornisce i bordi, i pulsanti, e - permette di spostare, chiudere, ridimensionare le finestre ecc. Gnome - può funzionare con molti gestore di finestre, ma i più diffusi sono - - Enlightenment e - Sawfish (che prima si chiamava - Sawmill). Ciascun gestore di finestre può usare stili diversi per le - decorazioni ed i pulsanti, che si chiamano - temi. Dato che è impossibile trattarli tutti, in questa - sezione descriveremo solo il gestore di finestre di default di Gnome, - Sawfish, e il suo tema di default, - (MicroGUI). Un esempio del bordo delle finestre nel - tema MicroGUI è mostrato in - - - -
- Il bordo delle finestre nel tema MicroGUI. - - Il bordo delle finestre nel tema MicroGUI - - - -
- - - Bene, cosa si può fare con le finestre? - - - - - Chiuderle, minimizzarle ed ingrandirle - - - - Per chiudere una finestra, cliccate sul pulsante con la piccola - x gialla a destra del bordo della finestra. Se - l'applicazione contiene dati non salvari, vi viene chiesto di - salvarli. - - - Per ingrandire una finestra, cioè fare in modo che occupi l'intero - schermo, tranne la parte presa dai pannelli, cliccate sul - pulsante con la freccia gialla in su; - cliccando di nuovo sulla stessa freccia si riporterà la - finestra alle dimensioni originarie. - - Per minimizzare una finestra, cioè nasconderla - o ridurla ad icona, cliccate sul pulsante con la freccia - gialla in giù; la finestra scomparirà - dallo schermo, ma non è persa per sempre... l'applicazione - in essa contenuta continua a girare, e i dati non vengono persi, - ma la finestra è temporaneamente nascosta. Tutte le finestre - minimizzate vengono mostrate nell'applet lista dei task, e possono - essere riportate a dimensione normale come descritto più avanti. - - Un'alternativa a ridurre ad icona le finestre, spesso - conveniente, è di arrotolarle sulla propria - barra del titolo, in modo che essa sia l'unica parte della finestra - che viene lasciata visibile. Per arrotolare una finestra, fate - doppio click sulla sua barra del titolo, e per srotolarla - fate lo stesso. Provate! - - - - - - Alzare ed abbassare le finestre - - - Le finestre possono sovrapporsi sullo schermo, in modo che - una di esse sia sopra l'altra. Si può - alzare una finestra (cioè metterla sopra a tutte le - altre) cliccando sulla sua barra del titolo. Si può anche - alzare una finestra e riportarla al suo posto cliccando sulla - barra del titolo con il tasto centrale, o cliccando - in un punto qualsiasi all'interno della finestra con il tasto - destro tenendo premuto Alt. - - - - - - Finestra attiva - - - - Di tutte le finestre sullo schermo, solo una è attiva, - cioè tutto quello che scrivete sulla tastiera viene inviato - all'applicazione che sta girando in quella finestra; ciò non - significa che le applicazioni nella altre finestre non stiano - funzionando. Per aiutarvi a distinguere la finestra attiva, - la sua barra del titolo ha un colore diverso (la parte sinistra - è blu, mentre in tutte le altre è grigia). Per rendere attiva - un'altra finestra, cliccateci dentro. Potete anche cliccare sulla - barra del titolo, in modo da renderla attiva ed alzarla - contemporaneamente. - - - - - - Spostare e ridimensionare le finestre - - - - Per spostare una finestra, trascinate la sua barra del titolo - nella nuova posizione usando il tasto sinistro del mouse (cioè - cliccate sulla barra del titolo e spostate il mouse senza lasciare - il tasto), oppure cliccando in un - punto qualsiasi al suo interno mentre tenete premuto il tasto - Alt key. - - - Per ridimensionare una finestra, ponete il cursore del mouse su - uno qualsiasi dei suoi bordi (tranne quello in alto) o angoli; - il cursore dovrebbe diventare una freccia che spinge una linea o - un angolo e dovrebbe essere possibile trascinare il bordo o - l'angolo nella nuova posizione. - - - - - - - - Lista dei task - - Tutte le finestre del desktop (comprese quelle ridotte ad icona) - vengono mostrate nella lista dei task, - che si trova sul Pannello. Per ciascuna finestra viene mostrata - una mini-icona, e l'inizio del titolo. Per visualizzare di nuovo - una finestra ridotta ad icona, cliccate sul suo titolo nella - lista dei task; se lo fate con il destro vi si aprirà il menù - pop-up che permette di arrotolarla, chiuderla o - uccidere l'applicazione che sta girando al suo interno. L'ultima - opzione dovrebbe essere usata solamente quando l'applicazione - è bloccata e non risponde al comando di chiusura della finestra, - dato che facendo così si perdono tutti i dati non salvati! - - - - - Menù delle operazioni possibili sulla finestra - - Sawfish fornisce anche un menù per - ciascuna finestra, che contiene tutte le operazioni ad essa relative - già descritte ed alcune altre. Per accedere a tale menù, cliccate sul - pulsante a sinistra della barra del titolo (quello con il - triangolino che punta in basso), oppure cliccate con il destro - sul titolo della finestra, o ancora cliccate in qualsiasi punto - della finestra con il tasto centrale tenendo premuto Alt. - - - - Il menù del desktop - - Infine, Sawfish fornisce anche un - menù per il desktop, al quale si può accedere - cliccando su un qualsiasi spazio vuoto nel desktop stesso con il tasto centrale. Contiene le - seguenti opzioni: - - - - - Finestre - - - - Dà un elenco di tutte le finestre, incluse quelle ridotte - ad icona. Selezionare una di esse la fa riapparire, se era - ridotta ad icona, e la porta sopra tutte le altre; è molto - utile se avete così tante finestre che quella che vi serve - è completamente nascosta. - - - - - - Workspace - - - - Permette di passare da un workspace ad un altro, - e di creare e cancellare workspace. Si veda il manuale di - Sawfish per i dettagli. - - - - - - Programmi - - - - La stessa cosa della sezione Programmi del - menù principale. - - - - - - Configura - - - - Permette di configurare tutte le proprietà di - Sawfish; per i nuovi utenti - si consiglia di provare le varie impostazioni di - Aspetto, ma di lasciare stare le altre. - - - - - - Aiuto - - - - Dà dei link al sito Web ed - al manuale di Sawfish (attenzione: - non è un manuale per gli utenti, ma per chi vuole scrivere - estensioni o personalizzazioni a - Sawfish usando il linguaggio LISP), - alla Guida dell'utente di Gnome ed al sito Web di Gnome. - - - - - - - - - - - Nautilus: Il file manager, il browser per la documentazione ed altro ancora - - Gnome 1.4 contiene una shell grafica, - Nautilus, che combina le funzioni - di browser per la guida, di browser Web, client FTP e molte - altre ancora. Per lanciarlo, selezionate Nautilus - dal menù principale, o fate doppio click sull'icona - di una directory sul desktop. - - - Gestire i file con Nautilus - - - Come la maggior parte dei file manager grafici, - Nautilus mostra il contenuto - della directory selezionata usando delle icone per rappresentare i file - e le sottodirectory. Facendo doppio click su un file o su una - directory la si apre; per i file dei dati, questo corrisponde ad - aprire l'applicazione appropriata ed il file dentro di essa. Facendo - click destro su un file o su una directory appare un menù - pop-up, usando il quale si può cancellare o rinominare - il file, visualizzarne e cambiarne le proprietà ed i permessi, ed altro. - - Nautilus fornisce anche un modo semplice - di spostare un file da una directory ad un'altra, di aprire ciascuna - directory in una diversa finestra di Nautilus - selezionando New window dal menù - File di Nautilus. - Selezionate il file che vi serve e trascinatelo da una finestra - all'altra usando il mouse, oppure sul desktop. - - Nautilus fornisce molti altri - strumenti per manipolare i file, ed è altamente configurabile, - e quindi è facile cambiare il modo in cui vengono visualizzati, - ad esempio scegliendo un'icona personalizzata. Per la descrizione - di tutte queste funzionalità si veda il manuale di Nautilus. - - - - Leggere la documentazione con Nautilus - - Oltre ad essere un file manager, - Nautilus è anche un browser per la - documentazione installata sul sistema; non solo quella di Gnome, - ma anche le pagine man Unix, le pagine Info (un formato di - documentazione usato dalle utility del progetto GNU) ed altri - tipi. Per vedere l'elenco della documentazione installata sul - sistema, cliccate sulla linguetta - Aiuto nel pannello di sinistra di - Nautilus. - - - - - - - Configurazione - - Gnome è altamente configurabile: si può cambiare praticamente tutto, - il colore di sfondo, le scorciatoie da tastiera, la posizione - dei pannelli, i contenuti del menù principale - e molto altro. - La maggior parte di tali cambiamenti si possono fare usando il - Centro di Controllo di Gnome, che si trova - nel sottomenù - Impostazioni del menù principale; - tale menù permette anche di accedere a sezioni specifiche del - Centro di Controllo; inoltre, prima di - apportare qualsiasi modifica è indispensabile consultare la - documentazione del Centro di Controllo. - - - Qui faremo solo una panoramica delle sue opzioni più comuni. - - - - Lo sfondo - - - Potete cambiare lo sfondo del desktop selezionando - Sfondo nella sezione - Desktop del Centro di Controllo di - Gnome, o, più velocemente, cliccando con il destro - su una parte vuota del desktop e scegliendo Change Desktop - Background dal menù pop-up). - - - - - Selezione dei temi - - - - Theme Selector permette di modificare il tema - del desktop (o tema GTK), cambiando l'aspetto del menù - principale e dei menù delle barre degli strumenti, - delle barre di scorrimento, dei pulsanti e degli altri elementi - dell'interfaccia grafica di tutte le applicazioni di Gnome. - Molti utenti trovano che il tema GTK di default sia noioso, - e la prima cosa che fanno è cercare di passare ad un altro. - - - - - Il gestore delle finestre Sawfish - - - - Questa sezione permette di modificare le impostazioni del - gestore delle finestre. In particolare, nella sottosezione - Aspetto, si può modificare lo stile - delle finestre (tema), che ne determina i bordi ed i pulsanti. - Si può anche cambiare il carattere usato per le barre del titolo; - se siete principianti, è meglio non cambiare altre - impostazioni. - - - - - Sessione - - - - In questa sezione potete definire i programmi che vengono avviati - automaticamente quando entrate in Gnome, abilitare o disabilitare - i suggerimenti al login e la conferma al logout. - - - - - - Inoltre, potete modificare le proprietà di vari elementi, tra i quali - i pannelli e le icone del desktop, cliccandoci sopra con il destro - e selezionando - Proprietà dal menù - pop-up. In questo modo potete modificare il titolo - di un'icona, la dimensione e il colore di sfondo (o anche l'immagine di - sfondo) del Pannello e molte altre cose. - - - - Quasi tutte le applicazioni di Gnome hanno la possibilità di impostare - le proprietà; basta cercare - Proprietà o Impostazioni nei - menù), ed è possibile cambiare, ad esempio, i colori usati dal Terminale - di Gnome o renderlo trasparente -- le possibilità sono illimitate! - - - - - - Le applicazioni e le utility di Gnome - - Con Gnome vengono distribuite molte applicazioni ed utility; - inoltre, Gnome vi permette di utilizzare qualsiasi applicazione - di terze parti, come ad esempio - Netscape), le applicazioni di KDE o altre - che avete installato sul sistema. Ecco un elenco di alcuni degli - strumenti e delle applicazioni più utili che potete trovare - nel menù principale di Gnome; non è una lista - completa!! - - - - Applicazioni - - - Applicazioni di office automation e di produttività individuale, - quali - - - Gnumeric - — un foglio di calcolo compatibile Excel - - - - AbiWord — un leggero - word processor - - - - Il Calendario di Gnome per - aiutarvi a gestire i vostri appuntamenti - - - Diversi editor di testi, da quelli semplici - da usare come gedit a quello - (probabilmente) più potente mai creato, - Emacs (che non è un'applicazione - di Gnome) - - - - - - - - Grafica - - - - - Gimp — - un programma di manipolazione grafica molto potente, - che compete con - Photoshop - - - Programmi di visualizzazione di immagini - quale Eye of - Gnome, GQview and - xv - - - - - - - Utilities - - - Tra le altre cose, qui troverete - - - Calcolatrice - - - - Il Cerca File di Gnome - per trovare i file nel sistema - - - - gfloppy per formattare i - floppy disk - - - - GDict per cercare le parole - nei vari dizionari liberamente disponibili su Internet - - - - - - - Multimedia - - - - Qui troverete lettori CD, - mixer (da usare anche per - cambiare il volume alle casse), ed un lettore MP3 - XMMS. - - - - - - Sistema - - - - Questo sottomenù contiene delle utility per gestire il sistema, - e vi potete trovare informazioni dettagliate sul processore, - sulla memoria e sul sistema operativo usando - Informazioni sul sistema, - controllare quanto spazio avete rimasto sui dischi con - space you have left on your disks using Gnome - DiskFree, o visualizzare tutti i processi - (job) attivi sul computer usando il - Monitor di sistema, che - vi mostra anche il livello di carico per i processori e la memoria, - e permette di uccidere un processo andato in stallo o comunque - indesiderato. - - - Questo sottomenù contiene anche strumenti per gestire il software - installato sul sistema, come - GnoRPM ed Helix - Gnome Update (se state usando la distribuzione - di Gnome preparata dalla Helix Code, Inc.). - GnoRPM permette di visualizzare tutti - i pacchetti software installati sul sistema (se state usando una - distribuzione di Linux basata sui pacchetti RPM, come - RedHat, SuSE o Mandrake), e di installare, aggiornare o - rimuovere pacchetti. - Helix Gnome Update fornisce una maniera - estremamente facile, quasi con un solo click, per aggiornare - l'installazione di Gnome; entrambe queste utility, però, - richiedono di avere privilegi di amministratore di sistema (root). - - - Infine, lo stesso sottomenù contiene anche vari emulatori di - terminale (xterm, - Color xterm, - Gnome Terminal) che vi permettono - di usare l'interfaccia più potente mai creata, la linea - di comando, che però non è molto user-friendly. - - - - - Internet - - - - Qui troverete il browser Web Netscape, - X-Chat per l'Internet Relay - Chat (IRC), Gnome-ICU per parlare - con altre persone usando il protocollo ICQ, e - gftp, uno strumento grafico - per i trasferimenti di file FTP. Da notare che FTP si può - usare anche con il file manager di Gnome, - Nautilus, quindi - gftp è necessario solo quando vi - servono delle cose complicate, ad esempio per trasferire dei - file usando delle versioni sicure di FTP, basate su - ssh. - - - - - Giochi - - - - Ce ne sono moltissimi... provateli! - - - - - - - - - - - Aiuto, sono nei guai! - - Tutti prima o poi abbiamo dei problemi, quindi ecco dei suggerimenti - su come gestire quelli più comuni. - - - - Uccidere un'applicazione entrata in stallo - - Se un'applicazione è entrata in stallo o si è congelata, - cioè se non risponde ai click del mouse ed ai comandi di tastiera, - potete aspettare e sperare che si risvegli, oppure ucciderla. - Se decidete per quest'ultima possibilità (NOTA: perderete tutti i - dati non salvati), avviate il Monitor di - sistema dal sottomenù Sistema - del menù principale), cliccate con il destro sul - nome dell'applicazione congelata e scegliete Termina - adesso. Il Monitor di sistema - vi permette anche di trovare ed uccidere tutti i processi - correlati che sono stati avviati dall'applicazione. - - - Se un'applicazione di Gnome si congela o muore inaspettatamente - più volte, dovreste mandare un bug report seguendo - le istruzioni descritte in . - - - - Il sistema si è congelato completamente! - - Se il sistema si è bloccato completamente e non risponde, - non abbiate fretta di spingere il pulsante di reset - sul computer, dato che questa è spesso la soluzione peggiore. - Con più probabilità, non è il sistema operativo in sé che è - bloccato, dato che i sistemi Unix sono noti per la loro stabilità, - ma solo la parte grafica, il Sistema X Window. In questo caso, - potete cercare di riavviare X premendo simultaneamente - - Ctrl-Alt-Backspace. - - che dovrebbe funzionare per l'implementazione del Sistema X - Windows usata su Linux e *BSD, XFree86, a meno che non sia stato - disabilito dall'amministratore. Naturalmente, in questo modo - si perdono tutti i dati non salvati, ma almeno non si rischia di - rovinare tutto il filesystem. - - - - - - - La mia configurazione di Gnome è sparita! - - Se avete dei problemi più seri delle icone del desktop, - ad esempio se manca il pannello, la soluzione radicale è di - cancellare tutti i vostri file di configurazione di Gnome ed - inziare da zero. Ovviamente si tratta di una soluzione di - emergenza, dato che perderete tutte le impostazioni e dovrete - riconfigurare da capo i menù, i pannelli e tutto il resto a partire - dalla configurazione di default. Questa operazione però influisce solo - sulla configurazione di Gnome, e tutti i dati e le impostazioni - delle applicazioni che non fanno parte di Gnome rimangono intatti. - - Per rimuovere tutti i file di configurazione di Gnome e - ritornare alla situazione originale, fate logout e poi - login di nuovo tenendo premuti i tasti Ctrl e - Shift (subito dopo aver inserito la password - nella finestra di dialogo di login). Vi verrà presentata una - finestra di dialogo, che vi offre la scelta di resettare la sessione - salvata, cioè le applicazioni aperte quando avete fatto logout - l'ultima volta, resettare la configurazione o entrambi. - - - Infine, se avete dei seri problemi e il sistema si blocca o diventa - altrimenti inutilizzabile subito dopo il login, avete un'ultima - opzione; potete scegliere il tipo di sessione - Failsafe invece di quella di default di - Gnome nella schermata di login, che è - supportato dai login manager sia di Gnome che di KDE. In questo tipo - di sessione non viene avviato Gnome, ma solo una finestra di terminale, - che non ha quasi mai problemi; se sapete come usare gli strumenti - da linea di comando per mettere a posto le cose avete questa - possibilità, altrimenti chiedete ad un esperto. - - - - - - - Dove trovare altra documentazione - - La documentazione di Gnome - - Gnome comprende documentazione dettagliata per la maggior parte - delle applicazioni, delle utility e degli altri componenti, come - il Pannello o il file manager Nautilus. Potete vedere l'elenco - di tutti i documenti di Gnome installati sul sistema usando - l'etichetta Help - Contents in Nautilus; quindi, se volete sapere - più di uno dei componenti, leggete il corrispondente manuale. - - - In aggiunta ai manuali per i singoli componenti, la documentazione - di Gnome comprende anche: - - - - - - FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) - - - - Questo documento contiene le risposte ad alcune delle - domande più frequenti su Gnome. - - - - - - - Se siete nuovi al mondo di UNIX/Linux... - - - - - Questo breve documento dà le informazioni minime necessarie - sui sistemi Unix e di tipo Unix, parlando, tra le altre - cose, di nomi dei file, di percorsi e di directory, permessi, - link simbolici e, cosa che fa confondere più di tutti, - della nozione di - mount. Se non avete mai utilizzato un sistema - Unix, leggetelo. - - - - - - Glossario - - - Vi dà una breve spiegazione di alcuni termini informatici - che si trovano nella documentazione di Gnome, da ASCII a - X Window. - - - - - - - Risorse di Gnome su Internet - - In aggiunta alla documentazione inviata con Gnome, esistono - moltissime informazioni disponibili su Internet; un buon punto - di partenza è, naturalmente, il sito Web di Gnome, dove - troverete istruzioni per l'installazione, suggerimenti, informazioni - per gli sviluppatori e così via. - - - Se non potete trovare risposta alle vostre domande, potete - chiedere ad altri utenti e sviluppatori di Gnome sulle - mailing list - (trovate le istruzioni per l'iscrizione qui). - Da notare, comunque, che questa lista è solo per domande relative - a Gnome, e non chiedetevi come configurare il Sistema X Windows, - ad esempio; è poco educato, se non peggio, fare una domanda - senza prima controllare se la stessa ha già avuto risposta - nei documenti disponibili come le Gnome FAQ. - - - - Tutto ciò che non è Gnome - - Dovreste capire che Gnome è solo una parte del vostro sistema, - e se volete rilasciare tutto il potenziale del computer dovete - capire non solo Gnome ma anche il sistema operativo - sottostante (UNIX/Linux/FreeBSD), tutti gli strumenti e le utility - in esso comprese, ed il suo sistema grafico (il Sistema X Window). - Ognuno di questi componenti di solito è accompagnato dalla sua - documentazione. La maggior parte dei comandi e delle utility Unix - sono documentate nelle cosidette pagine man; - le potete vedere usando Nautilus - (see ). Questo tipo di documentazione - di solito è molto dettagliata e più tecnica di quanto serve. - Un altro formato di documentazione usato dalle utility del progetto - GNU sono le pagine info; potete vedere anche quelle - con Nautilus. Molte applicazioni - hanno anche documentazione in altri formati, ed a volte non è facile - trovare la documentazione specifica di un'applicazione; provate - a cercare nella directory /usr/doc. - - La documentazione per lo stesso sistema operativo varia - da una macchina all'altra; il consiglio migliore che si possa dare - è di controllare il manuale stampato che avete ricevuto con il sistema. - Per Linux, una buona fonte di informazioni è il Linux Documentation - Project (LDP), che trovate su Internet (a http://www.linuxdoc.org - o, in italiano, a http://www.pluto.linux.it/ildp). - Virtualmente tutte le distribuzioni di Linux includono copie dei - documenti di LDP, di solito in - /usr/doc/LDP o - /usr/doc/HOWTO. - - - E, naturalmente, ci sono molti libri disponibili su tutti i tipi - di Unix/Linux, su Gnome e su qualsiasi altro argomento - che vi possa interessare. Controllate nella vostra libreria di - fiducia. - - - - - Feedback - - Se avete commenti, suggerimenti o rimostranze da fare su questo - documento, mandateli al Gnome Documentation project all'indirizzo - docs@gnome.org. - - - Se trovate un bug in un'applicazione di Gnome, fatecelo sapere! - Gli sviluppatori leggono i report che arrivano e cercano di - correggere tutti i bachi; il modo più semplice per - inviare un report è utilizzare lo - Strumento di notifica dei bug, che trovate - nel sottomenù - Utility del menù - principale. Questo strumento verrà avviato automaticamente - se un'applicazione di Gnome va in crash; dovrebbe venire usato - anche per inviare dei suggerimenti o delle richieste di nuove - caratteristiche per le applicazioni di Gnome, selezionando - Gravità: lista dei desideri nella finestra - appropriata dello strumento di notifica dei bug. - - - Se avete domande su Gnome, o volete discuterne con altri utenti e - sviluppatori, iscrivetevi alla mailing list descritta in - . - - -
- - - - - - - - - diff --git a/omf-install/Makefile.am b/omf-install/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 787a802..0000000 --- a/omf-install/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -# -# Modify the definition of $omf_dest_dir, replacing "gdp-example1" with -# the name of your package. -# -# No other modifications should be necessary. -# -# Note that you must configure your package with --localstatedir=/var/lib -# so that the scrollkeeper-update command below will update the database -# in the standard scrollkeeper directory. -# -# If it is impossible to configure with --localstatedir=/var/lib, then -# modify the definition of scrollkeeper_localstate_dir so that -# it points to the correct location. Note that you must still use -# $(localstatedir) in this or when people build RPMs it will update -# the real database on their system instead of the one under RPM_BUILD_ROOT. - -omf_dest_dir=$(datadir)/omf/gnome-user-docs -scrollkeeper_localstate_dir = $(localstatedir)/scrollkeeper - -install-data-local: - $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(omf_dest_dir) - -for file in $(srcdir)/*.omf; do \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$file $(DESTDIR)$(omf_dest_dir); \ - done - -scrollkeeper-update -p $(scrollkeeper_localstate_dir) - -uninstall-local: - -for file in $(srcdir)/*.omf; do \ - basefile=`basename $$file`; \ - rm -f $(omf_dest_dir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -rmdir $(omf_dest_dir) - -scrollkeeper-update -p $(scrollkeeper_localstate_dir) diff --git a/omf.make b/omf.make deleted file mode 100644 index 3261e00..0000000 --- a/omf.make +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -# -# No modifications of this Makefile should be necessary. -# -# This file contains the build instructions for installing OMF files. It is -# generally called from the makefiles for particular formats of documentation. -# -# Note that you must configure your package with --localstatedir=/var/lib -# so that the scrollkeeper-update command below will update the database -# in the standard scrollkeeper directory. -# -# If it is impossible to configure with --localstatedir=/var/lib, then -# modify the definition of scrollkeeper_localstate_dir so that -# it points to the correct location. Note that you must still use -# $(localstatedir) in this or when people build RPMs it will update -# the real database on their system instead of the one under RPM_BUILD_ROOT. -# -# Note: This make file is not incorporated into xmldocs.make because, in -# general, there will be other documents install besides XML documents -# and the makefiles for these formats should also include this file. -# -# About this file: -# This file was taken from scrollkeeper_example2, a package illustrating -# how to install documentation and OMF files for use with ScrollKeeper -# 0.3.x and 0.4.x. For more information, see: -# http://scrollkeeper.sourceforge.net/ -# Version: 0.1.2 (last updated: March 20, 2002) -# - -omf_dest_dir=$(datadir)/omf/@PACKAGE@ -scrollkeeper_localstate_dir = $(localstatedir)/scrollkeeper - -omf: omf_timestamp - -omf_timestamp: $(omffile) - -for file in $(omffile); do \ - scrollkeeper-preinstall $(docdir)/$(docname).xml $(srcdir)/$$file $$file.out; \ - done - touch omf_timestamp - -install-data-hook-omf: - $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(omf_dest_dir) - for file in $(omffile); do \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file.out $(DESTDIR)$(omf_dest_dir)/$$file; \ - done - -scrollkeeper-update -p $(scrollkeeper_localstate_dir) -o $(DESTDIR)$(omf_dest_dir) - -uninstall-local-omf: - -for file in $(srcdir)/*.omf; do \ - basefile=`basename $$file`; \ - rm -f $(omf_dest_dir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -rmdir $(omf_dest_dir) - -scrollkeeper-update -p $(scrollkeeper_localstate_dir) diff --git a/sgmldocs-ug.make b/sgmldocs-ug.make deleted file mode 100644 index d280bcb..0000000 --- a/sgmldocs-ug.make +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ -# To use this template: -# 1) Define: figs, docname, lang, omffile, sgml_ents although figs, -# omffile, and sgml_ents may be empty in your Makefile.am which -# will "include" this one -# 2) Figures must go under figures/ and be in PNG format -# 3) You should only have one document per directory -# -# Note that this makefile forces the directory name under -# $prefix/share/gnome/help/ to be the same as the SGML filename -# of the document. This is required by GNOME. eg: -# $prefix/share/gnome/help/fish_applet/C/fish_applet.sgml -# ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^ -# Definitions: -# figs A list of screenshots which will be included in EXTRA_DIST -# Note that these should reside in figures/ and should be .png -# files, or you will have to make modifications below. -# docname This is the name of the SGML file: .sgml -# lang This is the document locale -# omffile This is the name of the OMF file. Convention is to name -# it -.omf. -# sgml_ents This is a list of SGML entities which must be installed -# with the main SGML file and included in EXTRA_DIST. -# eg: -# figs = \ -# figures/fig1.png \ -# figures/fig2.png -# docname = scrollkeeper-manual -# lang = C -# omffile=scrollkeeper-manual-C.omf -# sgml_ents = fdl.sgml -# include $(top_srcdir)/doc/sgmldocs.make -# dist-hook: app-dist-hook -# - -docdir = $(datadir)/gnome/help/$(docname)/$(lang) - -doc_DATA = index.html - -sgml_files = $(sgml_ents) $(docname).sgml - -omf_dir=$(top_srcdir)/omf-install - -EXTRA_DIST = $(sgml_files) $(doc_DATA) $(omffile) $(figs) - -CLEANFILES = omf_timestamp - -all: index.html omf - -omf: omf_timestamp - -omf_timestamp: $(omffile) - -for file in $(omffile); do \ - scrollkeeper-preinstall $(docdir)/$(docname).sgml $$file $(omf_dir)/$$file; \ - done - touch omf_timestamp - -index.html: $(docname)/index.html - -cp $(docname)/index.html . - -$(docname).sgml: $(sgml_ents) - -ourdir=`pwd`; \ - cd $(srcdir); \ - cp $(sgml_ents) $$ourdir - - -# The weird srcdir trick is because the db2html from the Cygnus RPMs -# cannot handle relative filenames -$(docname)/index.html: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - if test "$(HAVE_JW)" = 'yes' ; then \ - jw -c /etc/sgml/catalog $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml -o $$srcdir/$(docname); \ - else \ - db2html $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml; \ - fi - - -app-dist-hook: index.html - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/figures - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/applets - -cp $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(distdir)/$(docname) - -cp $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css $(distdir)/$(docname) - -cp $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif \ - $(distdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images - -cp $(srcdir)/figures/*.png \ - $(distdir)/figures - -cp $(srcdir)/applets/*.sgml \ - $(distdir)/applets - -install-data-am: index.html omf - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/applets - -cp $(srcdir)/$(sgml_files) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/figures/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/applets/*.sgml; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/applets/$$basefile; \ - done - -$(docname).ps: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - db2ps $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml - -$(docname).rtf: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - db2ps $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml - -uninstall-local: - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/stylesheet-images/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/figures/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/figures/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/applets/*.sgml; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/applets/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(sgml_files); do \ - rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$file; \ - done - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) diff --git a/sgmldocs.make b/sgmldocs.make deleted file mode 100644 index 8159f7d..0000000 --- a/sgmldocs.make +++ /dev/null @@ -1,138 +0,0 @@ -# To use this template: -# 1) Define: figs, docname, lang, omffile, sgml_ents although figs, -# omffile, and sgml_ents may be empty in your Makefile.am which -# will "include" this one -# 2) Figures must go under figures/ and be in PNG format -# 3) You should only have one document per directory -# -# Note that this makefile forces the directory name under -# $prefix/share/gnome/help/ to be the same as the SGML filename -# of the document. This is required by GNOME. eg: -# $prefix/share/gnome/help/fish_applet/C/fish_applet.sgml -# ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^ -# Definitions: -# figs A list of screenshots which will be included in EXTRA_DIST -# Note that these should reside in figures/ and should be .png -# files, or you will have to make modifications below. -# docname This is the name of the SGML file: .sgml -# lang This is the document locale -# omffile This is the name of the OMF file. Convention is to name -# it -.omf. -# sgml_ents This is a list of SGML entities which must be installed -# with the main SGML file and included in EXTRA_DIST. -# eg: -# figs = \ -# figures/fig1.png \ -# figures/fig2.png -# docname = scrollkeeper-manual -# lang = C -# omffile=scrollkeeper-manual-C.omf -# sgml_ents = fdl.sgml -# include $(top_srcdir)/help/sgmldocs.make -# dist-hook: app-dist-hook -# - -docdir = $(datadir)/gnome/help/$(docname)/$(lang) - -doc_DATA = index.html - -sgml_files = $(sgml_ents) $(docname).sgml - -omf_dir=$(top_srcdir)/omf-install - -EXTRA_DIST = $(sgml_files) $(doc_DATA) $(omffile) $(figs) - -CLEANFILES = omf_timestamp - -all: index.html omf - -omf: omf_timestamp - -omf_timestamp: $(omffile) - -for file in $(omffile); do \ - scrollkeeper-preinstall $(docdir)/$(docname).sgml $$file $(omf_dir)/$$file; \ - done - touch omf_timestamp - -index.html: $(docname)/index.html - -cp $(docname)/index.html . - -$(docname).sgml: $(sgml_ents) - -ourdir=`pwd`; \ - cd $(srcdir); \ - cp $(sgml_ents) $$ourdir - - -# The weird srcdir trick is because the db2html from the Cygnus RPMs -# cannot handle relative filenames -$(docname)/index.html: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - if test "$(HAVE_JW)" = 'yes' ; then \ - jw -c /etc/sgml/catalog $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml -o $$srcdir/$(docname); \ - else \ - db2html $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml; \ - fi - -app-dist-hook: index.html - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/figures - -cp $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(distdir)/$(docname) - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - cp $$file $(distdir)/$(docname)/$$basefile ; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - cp $$file $(distdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/$$basefile ; \ - done - -if [ -e topic.dat ]; then \ - cp $(srcdir)/topic.dat $(distdir); \ - fi - -install-data-am: index.html omf - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images - -$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures - -cp $(srcdir)/$(sgml_files) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/figures/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images/$$basefile; \ - done - -if [ -e $(srcdir)/topic.dat ]; then \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/topic.dat $(DESTDIR)$(docdir); \ - fi - -$(docname).ps: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - db2ps $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml - -$(docname).rtf: $(srcdir)/$(docname).sgml - -srcdir=`cd $(srcdir) && pwd`; \ - db2ps $$srcdir/$(docname).sgml - -uninstall-local: - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/stylesheet-images/*.gif; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/stylesheet-images/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/figures/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/figures/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.html $(srcdir)/$(docname)/*.css; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$basefile; \ - done - -for file in $(sgml_files); do \ - rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$file; \ - done - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/stylesheet-images - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/figures - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) diff --git a/unix-primer/C/Makefile.am b/unix-primer/C/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 9d76688..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/C/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -figs = -docname = unix-primer -lang = C -omffile = unix-primer-C.omf -sgml_ents = -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook - diff --git a/unix-primer/C/unix-primer-C.omf b/unix-primer/C/unix-primer-C.omf deleted file mode 100644 index ed109df..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/C/unix-primer-C.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - If you are new to UNIX/Linux - - - General|Linux - - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/unix-primer/C/unix-primer.sgml b/unix-primer/C/unix-primer.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c438180..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/C/unix-primer.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,832 +0,0 @@ - -
- - - If you are new to Linux/UNIX - - 2000, 2001 - Alexander Kirillov - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those - trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME - Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps - or initial caps. - - - - - This document was last updated on April 25, 2001. - - - - - Introduction - - One of the goals of GNOME is to make your system easy to use, - without requiring you to learn the technical details about your - operating system. However, there are some basic UNIX notions that - you have to be familiar with even while using the easy graphical - interface provided by GNOME. For the convenience of new users, - these basics are collected in this document. If you need further - information on UNIX, you should read the documentation which came - with your system; there are also a number of books and on-line - guides available for all versions of UNIX. - - - The following guide applies to all versions of UNIX and - UNIX-like operating systems, including both the commercial Unices - such as Solaris and open-source operating - systems such as FreeBSD and - Linux. Some of the material here is based - on Linux Installation and Getting Started - guide, by Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, - Sean Dreilinger, Robert Kiesling, Evan Leibovitch, and Henry - Pierce. The guide is available for download or online viewing from - the Linux - Documentation Project or from the Open Source Writers Group. - - - - - Users - UNIX is a multiuser operating system: it - was designed to allow many users to work on the same computer, - either simultaneously (using several terminals or network - connections) or in turns. Under UNIX, to identify yourself to - the system, you must log in, which entails entering your - login name (the name the system uses to identify - you) and your password, which is your personal key - for logging in to your account. Because only you know your - password, no one else can log in to the system under your user - name. Usually people choose their first or last name or some - variation of it as their login name, so that if your real name - is Sasha Beilinson, your login might be sasha. - - Each user has a separate place to keep his files (called - his home directory). UNIX has a system of - permissions (see ), so that on a - properly configured UNIX system a user can't change other users' - or system files. This also allows every user to customize - various aspects of the system — in particular, GNOME - behavior — for himself, without affecting other users. - - On any UNIX system there is also a special user, called - system administrator, with the login name - root. He has full - control over the system — including full access to all the - system and users' files. He has the authority to change the - passwords of existing users and add new users, install and - uninstall software, and so on. The system administrator is - usually the person responsible for proper functioning of the - system, so if you have some problems, you should ask him. - - - IMPORTANT - - Even if you are the only user on your computer (for example, - if the computer is your personal workstation), so that you are - also the system administrator, it is important that you create - a user account and use it for daily work, logging in as root - only when necessary for system maintenance. Because root can - do anything, it is easy to make mistakes that have - catastrophic consequences. Picture the root account as a - magic hat that gives you lots of power, with which you can, by - waving your hands, create or destroy entire cities. Because - it is easy to wave your hands in a destructive manner, it is - not a good idea to wear the magic hat when it is not needed, - despite the wonderful feeling. - - - - - Files and filenames - - Under most operating systems (including UNIX), there is the - concept of a file, which is just a bundle of - information given a name (called a - filename). Examples of files might be - your history term paper, an e-mail message, or an actual - program that can be executed. Essentially, anything saved on - disk is saved in an individual file. - - - Filenames - - Files are identified by their filenames. For example, the file - containing your conference talk might be saved with the filename - talk.txt. There is no standard format for file - names as there is under MS-DOS and some other operating systems; in - general, a filename can contain any character (except the / - character–see the discussion of path names below) and is - limited to 256 characters in length. - - - IMPORTANT - - Unlike MS-DOS, the filenames in UNIX are case-sensitive: - myfile.txt and - MyFile.txt are considered as two - different files. - - - - You should also be aware of several UNIX conventions; while they are - not mandatory, it is usually a good idea to follow them. - - - It is customary to use the format - filename.extension for filenames, - where the extension indicates the file type; for - example, the extension txt is - usually used for plain text files, while the extension - jpeg is used for graphics in JPEG - format, and so on. In particular, the GNOME - File Manager - (Nautilus) uses extensions to - determine file type. You can view or change file - extensions recognized by - GNOME by selecting the - section Document Handlers - MIME types in - GNOME Control Center. Note - that the standard convention in UNIX is that the - executables (i.e., the program - files) have no extension at all. - - - - - Files and directories whose names begin with a dot - (.) are usually configuration - files, that is, files which keep settings and - preferences for various applications. For example, GNOME - keeps all its settings in various files in the directories - .gnome and - .gnome-desktop in the user's home - directory. Since most of the time you do not need to - edit these files manually, or even know their precise - names and locations, Nautilus - usually doesn't show these files. You can change this - setting as described in Nautilus manual. - - - - - Files with names ending with tilde (~) are - usually backup files created by various - applications. For example, when you edit a file - myfile.txt with - emacs, it - saves the previous version in the file - myfile.txt~. - - - - - - - Wildcards - - When entering commands from the command line, you can use - so-called wildcards instead of an exact - filename. The most common wildcard is *, which matches any - sequence of symbols (including an empty string). For example, - the command ls *.txt will list all the files with - the extension txt, and the command rm - chapter* will remove all files with the names starting with - chapter (ls and - rm are UNIX - commands for listing and removing files). Another useful - wildcard is ?, which matches any single symbol: for example, - rm chapter?.txt will remove files - chapter1.txt, chapter2.txt , but not - chapter10.txt - - Most new GNOME users prefer using the GNOME - File Manager for operations with files, rather - than working from the command line. Wildcards can also be - used in Nautilus in the file - selection and view filter dialogs. - - - - Using spaces, commas, etc. in file names - - As was mentioned above, a file name may contain not only - letters and numbers, but also spaces, commas, etc. — any - characters other than slash (/). However, if you are using - commands typed on the command line, you should be careful when - dealing with such files. To avoid problems, it is advised that - you enclose filenames that contain anything other than - letters, numbers, and dots, in single quotes: to delete file - My File, you should type rm 'My - File' rather than rm My - File. - - - Of course, if you are only using graphical tools such as GNOME - File Manager, than you do not need to worry about this: to - delete file My File, just drag it to the - trash can. - - - - - - Directories and paths - - Directory structure - - Now, let's discuss the concept of directories. A - directory is a collection of files. It - can be thought of as a folder that contains - many different files. Directories are given names, with which - they can be identified. Furthermore, directories are - maintained in a tree-like structure; that is, directories may - contain other directories. The top level directory is called - the root directory and denoted by - /; it contains all the files in your - system. - - - Pathnames - - A pathname is a file's full - name; it contains not only filename but also its - location. It is made up of the filename, preceded by the - name of the directory containing that file. This, in turn, - is preceded by the name of directory containing - that directory, and so on. A typical - pathname may look like - /home/sasha/talk.txt which refers to - the file talk.txt in the directory - sasha which in turn is a subdirectory - in /home. - - - As you can see, the directory and filename are separated by - a single slash (/). For this reason, filenames themselves - cannot contain the / character. MS-DOS users will find this - convention familiar, although in the MS-DOS world the - backslash (\) is used instead. The directory that contains a - given subdirectory is known as the parent - directory. Here, the directory - home is the parent of the directory - sasha. - - - Each user has a home directory, which is the directory set aside for - that user to store his or her files. Usually, user home directories - are contained under /home, and are named for the - user owning that directory, so that the home directory of user - sasha would be - /home/sasha. - - - - - Relative directory names - - At any moment, commands that you enter are assumed to be - relative to your current working - directory. You can think of your working directory as the - directory in which you are currently - located. When you first log in, your working - directory is set to your home directory — for user - sasha, it would be /home/sasha. Whenever - you refer to a file, you may refer to it in relationship to - your current working directory, rather than specifying the - full pathname of the file. - - - For example, if your current directory is - /home/sasha, and you have a file there called - talk.txt, you can refer to it just by its file - name: a command like emacs talk.txt issued from the - directory /home/sasha is equivalent to - emacs /home/sasha/talk.txt - (emacs is an extremely powerful editor for - text files; new users may prefer something simpler, such as - gnotepad, but for power user, - emacs is indispensable). - - - - - Similarly, if, in /home/sasha you have a - subdirectory called papers and, in that - subdirectory, a file called fieldtheory.txt, you - can refer to it as papers/fieldtheory.txt. - - If you begin a filename (like - papers/fieldtheory.txt) with a character - other than /, you're referring to the file in terms relative - to your current working directory. This is known as a relative - pathname. On the other hand, if you begin a filename with a - /, the system interprets this as a full pathname — that - is, a pathname that includes the entire path to the file, - starting from the root directory, /. Use of the full pathname - is known as an absolute pathname. - - - - Pathname conventions - - Here are some standard conventions you can use in paths: - - - ~/ — user's home directory - - - ./ — current working directory - - - ../ — parent of the current directory - - - For example, if sasha's current directory is - /home/sasha/papers, he can refer to the file - /home/sasha/talk.txt as - ~/talk.txt or as ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permissions - - Every file on your system has an owner — one - of the users (usually the one who created this file), and a system of - permissions, which regulate access to this - file. - - - For ordinary files, there are 3 types of access permissions: - read, write, and execute (the latter only makes sense for - executable files). They can be set independently for 3 - categories of users: the file owner, the users in the group - owning the file, and everyone else. Discussion of groups of - users goes beyond the scope of this document; the other two - categories are self-explanatory. So, if the permissions on a file - /home/sasha/talk.txt are set to read and - write for user sasha, who is the file owner, and read only for - everyone else, only sasha will be able to modify this file. - - - - - All newly created files carry some standard permissions, usually - read/write for user and read only for everyone else. You can - view the permissions using the GNOME File Manager, by - right-clicking on the file, choosing - Properties in the pop-up menu, and - then the Permissions tab. Using this - dialog, you can also change the permissions — just click - on a square representing the permission to toggle it. Of - course, only the file owner or the system administrator can - change the permissions of a file. Advanced users can also change - the default file permissions which are assigned to newly created - files—see the manual pages for your default shell (usually - bash, csh or - tcsh) and look for the command - umask. - - - - A file can also have some special permission properties such as - UID, GID, and sticky bit. They are for advanced - users only — do not change them unless you know what you - are doing. (If you are curious: these permissions are typically - used on executable files to allow the user to execute - some commands which read or modify files to - which the user himself doesn't have access.) - - - Similar to files, the directories also have - permissions. Again, there are 3 possible permissions: read, - write, and execute. However, they have different meaning: - namely, read permission for a directory means - permission to list the contents of the directory or search for a - file; write means permission to create and remove - files in the directory, and execute means - permission to access files in the directory. - - - Note that the permissions granted to a file depend on the - permissions of the directory in which the file is located: in - order to be able to read a file, a user needs to have the read - permission for the file itself and execute - permission for the directory that contains it. So, if user sasha - doesn't want anybody else to see his files, he can achieve this - by removing the execute permission on his home directory for all - other users. This way, no one but himself (and, of course, root) - will be able to read any of his files, no matter what the - permissions of individual files are. - - Detailed explanation of the permission system can be found, - for example, in the info - page for the GNU File Utilities - package. - - - - - Symbolic links - - In addition to regular files, UNIX also has special files called - symbolic links (or - symlinks for short). These files do not - contain any data; instead, they are just - pointers, or shortcuts to other - files. For example, sasha can have a symlink named - ft.txt pointing to the file - papers/fieldtheory.txt; this way, when a - program tries to access the file ft.txt, - the file papers/fieldtheory.txt will be - opened instead. As you can see from this example, the symlink - and the target file can have different names and be located in - different directories. - - Note that deleting, moving, or renaming the symlink file - has no effect on the target file: if sasha tries to delete the - file ft.txt, it is the symlink that will - be deleted, and the file - papers/fieldtheory.txt will remain - unchanged. Also, the permissions of the symlink are - meaningless: it is the permissions of the target file that - determine whether a user has the access to it. - - - Symlinks can also point to directories. For example, on - the GNOME FTP server (ftp.gnome.org), - there is a file - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, - which is actually a symlink to directory - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53 - — as one would expect, since October GNOME - is just another name for 1.0.53 release - of GNOME. - - - - Mounting and unmounting drives - - As we mentioned earlier, the directories on a UNIX system are - organized in a tree, with the top level directory being - /. Unlike some other operating systems such as - MS-DOS, there are no special names for files on your floppy disk or - CD-ROM: all the files accessible to your system - must appear in the main directory tree starting with - /. - - - Thus, before you can access files on a floppy diskette or a - CD-ROM, you must give to your system a command to incorporate - the contents of this diskette into the main directory tree, - which is referred to as mounting the - diskette. You can think of it as the software analog of - connecting the drive to your system. Typically the contents of - the CD-ROM will appear under the name - /mnt/cdrom; the floppy diskette under - /mnt/floppy (these are called the - mount points and are defined in the special - configuration file, /etc/fstab). Accessing - a drive in this fashion doesn't mean that the system will copy - all the files from the CD to the directory - /mnt/cdrom. Instead, it means that the - directory /mnt/cdrom - represents the CD-ROM: When a program tries - to access, say, a file called - /mnt/cdrom/index.html, the system will look - for file index.html on the CD-ROM. - - - So, in short: before you can use files on a drive, you must - mount it. Similarly, before removing - the disk from the drive, you must unmount it. - - - When using GNOME, you usually do not have to worry about - mounting and unmounting: GNOME scans the appropriate - configuration file and places the icons for all drives on your - desktop. Double-clicking on any of these icons automatically - mounts the corresponding drive (if it was not already mounted) - and starts the file manager in the appropriate directory. - Similarly, if you right-click on the drive icon and choose the - command Eject device from the pop-up - menu, GNOME automatically unmounts it before ejecting. You can - also mount/unmount a drive by right-clicking on its icon on the - desktop and choosing Mount device or - Unmount device from the pop-up menu, - or by using the disk mount applet. - - - Note that you can't unmount a drive if it is being used by some - program; for example, if you have a terminal windows open in a - directory on the drive you're trying to unmount. So, if you get - the error message Device busy while trying to - unmount a drive, make sure that none of your open applications - is accessing a file or directory on this drive. - - - However, GNOME cannot prevent you from ejecting the disk using the - physical eject button on the drive itself — in this case, - it is your responsibility to unmount the drive - before doing so. For CD and Zip drives, the system blocks the eject - button on the drive while the drive is mounted; for floppy drives this - is technically impossible. - - - - IMPORTANT - - If you eject a floppy disk using the eject button on the drive without - first unmounting it, you may lose your data! - - - - Some systems are running special programs such as - supermount or - magicdev - which automatically mount a drive when a disk is inserted and unmount a - drive if it hasn't been used for a specified period of time. In - this case, you will probably never need to worry about - mounting/unmounting drives yourself; you don't even need to read - this section. - - - Allowing users to mount and unmount drives carries some security - risks, so many multi-user systems are configured so that only - root can mount or unmount drives. This is the most probable - cause of error messages you may be getting while trying to mount - a drive. In this case, discuss this matter with your system - administrator. - - - If the computer is your personal workstation or home computer - and you are not worried about security, you can give mount - permission to ordinary users. The easiest way to allow this is - to use the application - linuxconf (which - can only be run by root). Just select the drive you want to - access in the Access local drive section. - In the Options tab select the - User Mountable option. Your drive will now - be mountable by users. - - - If linuxconf is - not available, then you must manually edit the file - /etc/fstab to include user access. This is - done by adding the user attribute to the - drive. For example: - - - If your fstab file contains a line like - this: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - add the word user to the fourth column: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - Drives and devices - - Under UNIX, the word device is used for all - peripheral devices connected to your computer; this includes - hard drives, floppy and CD-ROM drives, audio and video cards, - serial and parallel ports, and much more. Each device has a - name, such as /dev/hda. The most common - device names are listed below (for Linux; other varieties of - UNIX may use slightly different device names). - - - /dev/hd* (where *=a,b,c, - …): these are IDE devices, such as hard drives, - CD-ROM drives and ZIP drives. /dev/hda - denotes the master drive on the first IDE controller - (usually your first hard drive, C: - under Windows), /dev/hdb is the slave - drive on the first controller (this can be a second hard - drive or a CD-ROM), and so on. See also the note below about ZIP drives. - - - - /dev/sd* (where *=a,b,c, …): - these are SCSI devices, usually hard drives. - - - - - NOTE - If the acronyms IDE and SCSI are new to you, here is a - brief explanation: there are two types of interfaces for hard - drives and other similar devices: IDE (and its cousins such as - EIDE, ATAPI, etc.) and SCSI. SCSI provides better performance, - but is more expensive, so it is mostly used on - servers. If you are not sure what kind of drives you have, most - probably it is IDE. - - - - /dev/fd* (where *=0,1, etc) are floppy - drives; /dev/fd0 is the first drive (it - corresponds to A: under Windows), - /dev/fd1 is the second - (B:), etc. - - - - /dev/lp* (where *=0,1, etc) are - parallel ports; most commonly, these ports are used to - connect a printer to the - computer. /dev/lp0 corresponds to - LPT1 under Windows, - /dev/lp1 to LPT2, - etc. - - - /dev/ttyS* (where *=0,1, - etc) are serial ports; these ports are commonly used for - connecting a mouse or a - modem. /dev/ttyS0 corresponds to - COM1 under Windows, - /dev/ttyS1 to COM2, - etc. - - - - /dev/audio and - /dev/dsp — these two device - names are used for your audio card (they are not equivalent, - since they are used for different types of audio files). - - - - - In addition, it is a common practice to have symlinks - /dev/floppy, /dev/modem and - /dev/cdrom pointing to the actual device - name corresponding to your floppy drive, modem, and CD-ROM drive - respectively. - - - You rarely need to use these device names. In particular, if you - want to access a file on a drive, you do not use the device name - (such as /dev/fd0); instead, you first - mount the device so that its contents shows as a subdirectory - (for example, /mnt/floppy) in the main - directory tree, and then use this directory for accessing - files; see for more information. About - the only time when you actually need to use the device names is - when you are configuring some newly installed program. For - example, a fax program can ask you for the device name for your - modem (in which case you can either give it the actual device - name, such as /dev/ttyS1, or just use the - symlink /dev/modem). - - And just for fun: there is also a device - /dev/null which acts as a black - hole: you can send to it any information, and it never - returns. So if you do not want to be bothered by error messages, - re-direct them to /dev/null -:). - - - - Partitions - - Note that it is possible to subdivide a hard drive (or a - similar device) into parts which for all practical purposes - behave as independent disks, even though physically they - reside on the same disk. These parts are called - partitions (under Windows, the name - logical disk is used). For example, you can - partition your hard drive into several partitions, and install - different operating systems in different partitions; you can - reformat each partition independently of the others. This - partitioning of the hard drive is usually done during the - installation of the operating system; refer to your - installation guide for more information. - - - If your hard drive has been partitioned then each partition - is considered as a separate device. For example, if your hard - drive is /dev/hda, then the first - partition on this drive would be referred to as - /dev/hda1, the second as - /dev/hda2, and so on. - - - Partitioning of ZIP disks - - For reasons unknown to us, the pre-formatted - ZIP disks sold in stores or formatted using Iomega's ZIP - tools under Windows are partitioned in a strange way: - they have only one partition (of Windows type, of course), - but this partition has number 4. Thus, if your ZIP drive is - /dev/hdc, the correct device name you - should use for such disks is /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - Graphical user interface: X Window System, window - managers, and desktop environments. - - UNIX is a modular system: it consists of many components so that - a user (or system administrator) can choose those components he - needs. In particular, there are several layers of software - responsible for graphical user interface. These layers are: X - Window System, window managers, and desktop environment. - - X Window System (also known as X, or - X11) is the component of UNIX systems responsible for virtually - all basic graphics — in particular, for drawing icons, - backgrounds, and windows in which your applications - work. Without X, you only have command line. X11 sets the screen - resolution and color depth, moves the mouse cursor around the - screen, etc. It serves as a foundation for other components of - graphical user interface such as window managers and desktop - environments. - - Window manager extends capabilities of - X Window System by placing borders and buttons around windows, - which allows the user to move, close, hide or resize the - windows. X11 is virtually always used in combination with a - window manager, since it would be pretty much unusable without - one. There are many window managers available for X11; most - popular are fvwm, - mwm, kwm - (used by KDE), Enlightenment, and - Sawfish. - - Finally, a desktop environment goes - one more step further than a window manager by adding a - graphical file manager from which you can drag-and-drop items on - your desktop, a panel which can be used to launch frequently - used applications, and a set of applications and utilities. - There are several desktop environments available for all - versions of UNIX; the most popular ones are GNOME, KDE and CDE (soon to be - replaced by GNOME). - - Most desktop environments contain a window manager as their - integral part; for example, KDE contains its own window manager, - kwm (it is possible to use KDE with - another window manager, but few people do so). GNOME has no - window manager of its own; it will allow you to choose any - window manager you already have on your system. To make life - easier for new users, usually the - Sawfish window manager is distributed - with GNOME and is used by default; you can switch to - another window manager using GNOME Control - Center. Note however that you will need a - GNOME-compliant window manager to use such features of GNOME as - session management, taskbar applet, etc. - - - - - -
- - - diff --git a/unix-primer/Makefile.am b/unix-primer/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 345b6bc..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -SUBDIRS = C es it diff --git a/unix-primer/es/Makefile.am b/unix-primer/es/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 13375e3..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/es/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -figs = -docname = unix-primer -lang = es -omffile = unix-primer-es.omf -sgml_ents = -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook - diff --git a/unix-primer/es/unix-primer-es.omf b/unix-primer/es/unix-primer-es.omf deleted file mode 100644 index b6a4198..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/es/unix-primer-es.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Si usted es nuevo en Linux/Unix - - - General|Linux - - - - - - diff --git a/unix-primer/es/unix-primer.sgml b/unix-primer/es/unix-primer.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 20d1ffb..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/es/unix-primer.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,877 +0,0 @@ - -
- - - Si usted es nuevo en Linux/Unix - - 2000 - Alexander Kirillov - - - 2001 - Manuel de Vega Barreiro y grupo Gnome-es (traducción al Castellano) - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - - Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their - products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those - names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those - trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME - Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps - or initial caps. - - - Se permite la copia, distribución y/o modificación de este - documento bajo los términos de la licencia de documentación libre - de GNU, versión 1.1 o cualquier versión posterior publicada por la - fundación para el software libre; sin secciones invariantes, sin - portada, y sin contraportada. - Una copia de esta licencia esta disponible en la fundación para el - software libre y puede leerse en - linea. - - - - - Muchos de los nombres usados por las compañías para diferencias sus - productos y servicios son reclamados como marcas registradas. Allí - donde estos nombres aparezcan en la documentación de Gnome, y cuando - los miembros del proyecto de documentación Gnome hayan sido informados - de esas marcas registradas, los nombres estarán impresos en mayúsculas - o como nombres propios. - - - - - - - Introducción - - - Uno de los objetivos de Gnome es hacer su sistema fácil de usar, - sin que necesite aprender los detalles técnicos sobre el sistema -operativo. No obstante, hay algunas nociones básicas de Unix - con las que debe familiarizarse, incluso cuando utilice la interfaz - gráfica amigable suministrada por Gnome. Para los nuevos usuarios, - estos comandos se engloban en este documento. Si usted necesita más - información acerca de UNIX, debería leer la documentación que suminisitrada - con - su sistema. Existen también numerosos libros y guías - disponibles en Internet para todas las versiones de UNIX. - - - La siguiente guía se aplica a todas las versiones de UNIX y todos - los sistemas operativos parecidos a UNIX , incluidos tanto sistmas comerciales - como Solaris y sistemas operativos de código - abierto como BSD y Linux. - Parte del material de esta guía está basado en la guía - Instalación de Linux e primeros pasos, escrita por - Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, Sean Dreilinger, - Robert Kiesling, Evan Liebovitch, y Henry Pierce. La guía está disponible - para descargar o consultar directamente en la dirección URL - Proyecto de - Documentación Linux o del - Grupo de Escritores de Código Abierto. - - -Una versión en castellano de esta guia se encuentra en las paginas de -proyecto Lucas. - -. - - - - - - Usuarios - UNIX es un sistema operativo multiusuario: fue designado para - permitir a varios usuarios trabajar en la misma computadora, ya sea - simultáneamente (utilizando varios terminales o en conexiones de red) - o en turnos. En sistemas UNIX, para identificarse usted en el sistema, - debe conectarse, lo que conlleva introducir su nombre de - acceso (el nombre que el sistema utiliza para - identificarle) y su contraseña, que es su clave - personal para introducirse en su cuenta personal. Porque sólo usted - conoce su clave de acceso, nadie más puede introducirse en el sistema - con su nombre de acceso. Normalmente se escoge el nombre, el apellido - o alguna variación de éstos como su nombre de acceso, por lo que si - su nombre es: Sasha Beilinson, su nombre de acceso podría ser: - Sasha. - - Cada usuario tiene un espacio separado para guardar sus - documentos (llamado directorio personal). - UNIX posee un sistema de permisos (ver ), - por lo cual en un Sistema UNIX apropiadamente configurado, un usuario - no puede cambiar archivos pertenecientes a otro usuario o al sistema. - Esto también permite a cada usuario, configurar varios aspectos del - sistema — para sí mismo, sin afectar a otros. - - En cada sistema UNIX, hay un usuario especial, llamado - administrador del sistema, con el nombre de - acceso root. Este usuario tiene - completo control sobre el sistema — - incluyendo acceso total a todos los archivos de sistema y de los - usuarios. Tiene autoridad para cambiar las claves de acceso de los - usuarios existentes y añadir nuevos usuarios, instalar y desinstalar - software, además de otras cosas. El administrador del Sistema, es - normalmente la persona responsable del correcto funcionamiento - del sistema, por lo que si presenta algún problema, debe acudir a él. - - - IMPORTANTE - Incluso si usted es el único usuario en su ordenador (por - ejemplo, si es ordenador personal), por lo que usted también es el - administrador del sistema, es importante que cree una cuenta de - usuario y la utilice para su trabajo diario, accediendo como - administrador ("root") sólo cuando sea necesario para el - mantenimiento del sistema. Dado que "root" puede hacer cualquier - cosa, es fácil cometer errores que tengan consecuencias catastróficas. - Imagine el usuario "root" como un sombrero mágico que le da a usted - mucho poder, con el que puede, con un movimiento de manos, crear o - destruir ciudades enteras. Ya que es fácil mover las manos de forma - destructiva, no es una buena idea utilizar el sombrero mágico - cuando no es necesario, a pesar de lo maravilloso que se siente. - - - - - Archivo y nombres de archivos - En la mayoría de los sistemas operativos (incluyendo UNIX), - existe el concepto de archivo, que es sólo - un conjunto de información con un nombre (llamado nombre - del archivo. Ejemplos de archivos, podrían ser su examen - final de historia, un mensaje de correo electrónico, o un programa - que pueda ser ejecutado. Esencialmente, cualquier cosa guardada - en disco es guardado en un archivo individual. - - - Nombres de archivos - - Los archivos son identificados por sus nombres. Por ejemplo, el - archivo que contiene una conferencia hablada, puede ser guardada - bajo el nombre de archivo talk.txt. No existe - un formato estándar para los nombres de los archivos, como existe - en MS-DOS y otros sistemas operativos; en general, el nombre de un - archivo puede contener cualquier carácter (excepto el carácter – - vea la explicación de los caminos de nombres debajo) y es limitado - ,en su extensión, a 256 caracteres. - - - IMPORTANTE - - A diferencia de MS-DOS, los nombres de archivo en UNIX son sensibles - a mayúsculas o minúsculas: midocumento.txt - y MiDocumento.txt, son considerados como - dos archivos diferentes. - - - - También debe conocer algunas convenciones en UNIX, que si bien no - son obligatorias, normalmente es una buena idea seguirlas. - - - Es costumbre utilizar el formato - nombrearchivo.extensión, para nombres - de archivo, en el que la extensión indica el tipo de archivo; - por ejemplo, la extensión txt es - normalmente utilizada para archivos de texto simple; - en tanto que la extensión jpeg es utilizada para gráficos en - formato JPEG, y así. En particular, la aplicación - Gestor de Archivos de Gnome - (Nautilus) utiliza extensiones para - determinar el tipo de archivo. Usted puede ver o cambiar - todas las - extensiones de archivo reconocidas por - Gnome, - escogiendo la opción - - tipos MIME - - de la sección - - Manejadores de documentos - - en el - Centro de control de GNOME. - - Observe que la convención estándar en UNIX es que los - ejecutables no tienen extensiones. - - - - - Los archivos y directorios cuyos nombres comienzan con - un punto (.), son normalmente, archivos de - configuración, esto significa que estos archivos - contienen propiedades y preferencias para varias aplicaciones. - Por ejemplo, Gnome guarda todos sus configuraciones en varios - archivos en los directorios .gnome y - .gnome-desktop en el directorio personal - del usuario. Como la mayor parte del tiempo usted no necesita - editar estos documentos manualmente, ni siquiera conocer su - preciso nombre o localización, - Nautilus - no suele mostrar estos archivos. Usted puede cambiar la - configuración como se indica en el manual de Nautilus. - - - - - Los archivos cuyos nombres terminan con (~), por lo - general son archivos de soporte (copias de seguridad) creados - por varias aplicaciones. Por ejemplo, cuando usted edita - un archivo miarchivo.txt con - emacs, se guarda la versión previa - en el archivo miarchivo.txt~. - - - - - - - Caracteres comodín - - Cuando usted entra órdenes desde la línea de comandos, - puede utilizar los llamados Caracteres comodín, - en lugar de un nombre de archivo exacto. El carácter comodín más - común es *, que corresponde a cualquier secuencia de símbolos - (incluyendo una línea vacía). Por ejemplo, la orden - ls *.txt va a listar todos los archivos con la - extensión txt, y la orden - rm capítulo* va a borrar todos los archivos cuyos - nombres comiencen con capítulo - (ls y rm son órdenes UNIX para - listar o borrar archivos). Otro carácter comodín es ?, - que corresponde a cualquier símbolo individual: por ejemplo: - rm capítulo?.txt borrará todos los archivos - capítulo1.txt, capítulo2.txt, pero no el - capítulo10.txt - - Muchos de los nuevos usuarios de GNOME prefiere utilizar el - Gestor de Archivos GNOME para - realizar las operaciones con los archivos, antes que hacerlo - desde la línea de comandos. Los caracteres comodín también - son útiles para Nautilus en los - diálogos de selección de archivos y de visualización de filtros. - - - - - - Uso de espacios, comas, etc. en los nombres de ficheros - -Como se menciono anteriormente, un nombre de fichero puede contener no solo letras -y números, sino también espacios, comas, etc. — cualquier carácter destino -de la barra (/). Sin embargo, si esta usando comandos tecleados en la linea de comandos, -debe tener cuidado cuando use estos ficheros. Para evitar problemas, es recomendable que -ponga entre comillas (') los nombres de ficheros con cualquier otra cosa que no sea -letras, números, y puntos: para borrar Mi Fichero, debe teclear -rm 'Mi Fichero' en vez de rm Mi Fichero. - - -Por supuesto, si usa exclusivamente herramientas gráficas como el gestor de -ficheros de Gnome, no deberá preocuparse de estas cosas: para borrar el fichero -Mi Fichero, simplemente arrastrelo a la papelera. - - - - - - - Directorios y rutas - - Estructura de directorios - - Ahora, discutiremos el concepto de directorios. Un - directorio es una colección de archivos. - Se puede pensar como una carpeta que contiene muchos - documentos diferentes. A los directorios se les da nombres, - por los que pueden ser identificados. Más aún, los directorios - se mantienen en una estructura como de árbol, es decir, - el directorio puede contener otros directorios. El directorio de - más nivel es llamado el directorio raíz y denotado por - /; que contiene los archivos de su sistema. - - - Rutas - - Una ruta ("path") es realmente -el nombre completo del fichero; contiene no solo el -nombre del fichero, sino tambien su situación.Usted puede referirse -a un archivo por su ruta, - que se hace del nombre del documento, precedido por el nombre - del directorio que contiene ese documento. Este, a su vez, es - precedido por el nombre del directorio que contiene - este directorio y así. Una ruta típica - puede ser así: /home/sasha/talk.txt que - se refiere al archivo talk.txt en el - directorio sasha, el cual a su vez es un - subdirectorio de /home. - - - Como puede ver, el directorio y el nombre del archivo están - separados por una sola barra (/). Por esta razón los nombres - de los archivos no pueden contener en sí mismos el carácter /. - Los usuarios de MS-DOS encontrarán familiar esta convención, - a pesar de que en el mundo del MS-DOS se utiliza la barra - invertida (\). El directorio que contiene un subdirectorio dado, - es conocido como el directorio padre. - Aquí el directorio home es el padre del - directorio sasha. - - - Cada usuario tiene un directorio personal ("home"), el cual es - el directorio aparte que utiliza ese usuario para guardar - sus archivos. Normalmente, los directorios personales de los - usuarios están contenidos bajo /home, y son - nombrados por el usuario que posee ese directorio, por lo que el - directorio personal del usuario sasha - sería /home/sasha. - - - - - Nombres de directorios relativos - - En cualquier momento, las órdenes que usted introduce son asumidas - como relativas al directorio actual de trabajo. - Usted puede pensar que su directorio de trabajo es el directorio en - el que está actualmente localizado. Cuando usted se conecta - por primera vez, su directorio de trabajo es su directorio personal - — para el usuario sasha, esto sería - /casa/sasha. Cuando quiera referirse a un - archivo lo puede hacer en relación con su actual directorio - de trabajo, en lugar de especificar el nombre completo de la ruta - del archivo. - - - Por ejemplo, si su directorio actual es - /home/sasha, y tiene ahí un archivo llamado - talk.txt, puede referirse a éste por el nombre - del archivo: una orden como emacs talk.txt - ejecutada desde el directorio /home/sasha - es equivalente a emacs /home/sasha/talk.txt - (emacs es un editor extremadamente - poderoso para documentos de texto; los nuevos usuarios pueden - preferir algo más simple, tal como gnotepad, - pero para un usuario avanzado, emacs - es indispensable). - - - Similarmente, si en /home/sasha tiene un - subdirectorio llamado textos y, en ese - subdirectorio un archivo llamado - teoria_campo.txt, usted puede referirse a - éste como textos/teoria_campo.txt. - - Si usted comienza un nombre de un archivo (como - textos/teoria_campo.txt) con otro carácter - que no sea /, usted se está refiriendo al archivo en términos - relativos a su actual directorio de trabajo. Esto es conocido como - una ruta relativa. Por otro lado, si usted comienza el nombre del - archivo con un /, el sistema interpreta esto como una ruta completa - — esto es, una ruta que incluye la ruta completa al archivo, - comenzando por el directorio raíz, /.El uso de una ruta completa - es conocido como una ruta absoluta. - - - - Convenciones de ruta - - Aquí hay algunas convenciones estándar que puede utilizar en las rutas: - - - ~/ — directorio personal del usuario - - - ./ — directorio actual de trabajo - - - ../ — directorio padre del directorio - actual - - - Por ejemplo, si el directorio actual del usuario sasha es - /home/sasha/papers, puede referirse al - archivo /home/sasha/talk.txt como - ~/talk.txt o como - ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permisos - - Cada archivo en su sistema tiene un dueño — - uno de los usuarios (normalmente el que ha creado este archivo), y un - sistema de permisos que regula el acceso a éste archivo. - - - Para archivos ordinarios, existen 3 tipos de permisos de acceso: - leer, escribir y ejecutar ("Read", "Write", "eXecute") ( el último - sólo tiene sentido para archivos ejecutables). Estos permisos pueden - ser establecidos independientemente para 3 categorías de usuarios: - el dueño del archivo, los usuarios en el grupo que posee el archivo - y todos los demás. Las discusiones de grupos de usuarios van más allá - del alcance de este documento; las otras dos categorías se explican - por sí mismas. - Por tanto si los permisos en un archivo - /home/sasha/talk.txt están establecer para leer - y escribir por el usuario sasha, quien es el dueño del documento, y ser - leído solo por todos los demás, sólo sasha podrá modificar este - archivo. - - - - Todos los nuevos archivos creados llevan algunos permisos estándar, - por lo general leer/escribir para el usuario creador y leer sólo para - todos los demás. Usted puede ver los permisos utilizando el - Gestor de Archivos de GNOME, apretando el botón derecho del ratón en - el archivo, y escogiendo Propiedades en el - menú desplegable, y entonces la pestaña Permisos. - Utilizando este diálogo, puede también cambiar los permisos — - sólo presione en el cuadrado que representa el permiso para modificar - su estado. Por supuesto, sólo el dueño del archivo o el administrador - del sistema puede cambiar los permisos de un archivo. Los usuarios - avanzados también pueden cambiar los permisos de los archivos cuando - se establecen en la creación de los mismos — vea las páginas - del manual para su entorno de líneas de comandos, "shell" (normalmente - bash, csh o - tsch) y consulte la orden umask. - - - - Un archivo también puede tener propiedades especiales de permiso - como UID, GID y bit sticky. Estos permisos son sólo -para usuarios - avanzados — no los cambie a menos que usted sepa lo que está - haciendo. (Si usted es curioso: estos permisos son típicamente - utilizados en archivos ejecutables para permitir al usuario ejecutar - algunas órdenes para leer o modificar archivos - para los cuales el propio usuario no tiene acceso.) - - - Al igual que los archivos, los directorios también tienen permisos - especiales. Otra vez, existen 3 posibles permisos: leer, escribir y - ejecutar (Read,Write y - eXecute). No obstante, tienen diferente - significado: el llamado permiso de leer para un directorio, significa - permiso para listar el contenido del directorio o buscar un archivo; - escribir significa permiso para crear y eliminar archivos en el - directorio, y ejecutar significa permiso para acceder a los - archivos en el directorio. - - - Note que los permisos otorgados a un archivo dependen de los permisos - del directorio en el cual el documento está localizado: para ser capaz - de leer un archivo, el usuario necesita tener el permiso de leer para - el propio archivo y el permiso ejecutar para el directorio que lo - contiene. Por tanto, si el usuario sasha no quiere que nadie más vea - sus archivos, puede lograr esto eliminando los permisos de ejecución - de su directorio personal para todos los demás usuarios. De esta manera, - sólo él (y, por supuesto, el administrador root) podrán leer - cualquiera de sus archivos, sin importar cuales sean los permisos - individuales de los archivos. - - Una explicación detallada del sistema de permisos puede ser - encontrada, por ejemplo, - - -en las -páginas info -del paquete de Utilidades de Archivos GNU. - - - - - Enlaces simbólicos - - Además de los archivos regulares, UNIX tiene también archivos - especiales llamados enlaces simbólicos - ("symbolic links" o symlinks, para acortar). - Estos archivos no contienen datos; en su lugar solo son - "apuntadores" o "atajos" a otros archivos. Por ejemplo, sasha puede - tener un symlink llamado ft.txt que apunta al - documento pruebas/teoriacampo.txt; de esta manera - cuando un programa trata de acceder al archivo - ft.txt, el archivo - pruebas/teoriacampo.txt será abierto en su lugar. - Como puede ver por este ejemplo, el symlink y el archivo destino pueden - tener nombres diferentes y ser localizados en directorios diferentes. - - Note que eliminar, mover o renombrar un documento symlink no tiene - efecto en el archivo destino: si sasha trata de eliminar el - archivo ft.txt, es el symlink lo que se eliminará, - y el archivo pruebas/teoriacampo.txt seguirá - inalterado. También los permisos del symlink no tienen significado - alguno, son los permisos del archivo destino los que determinan - si el usuario tiene acceso a éste. - - - Los symlinks también pueden apuntar a directorios. Por ejemplo, - en el servidor de FTP de GNOME (ftp.gnome.org), - existe un archivo /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, que en el - momento en que se escribe este manual, es un enlace simbólico al -directorio - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53. -— como podra imaginar, October Gnome es simplemente -otro nombre de la versión 1.0.53 de Gnome. - - - - Montar y desmontar dispositivos - - Como hemos mencionado anteriormente, los directorios en un entorno - UNIX están organizados en un árbol, cuyo directorio raíz es - /. A diferencia de otros sistemas operativos - como MS-DOS, no hay nombres especiales para los archivos en - la unidad de disquete o en el CD-ROM: todos - los archivos accesibles por su sistema deben aparecen en él - árbol de directorios principal que empieza por /. - - - Por tanto, antes de que usted tenga acceso a los archivos en un - disquete o CD-ROM, usted debe dar a su sistema una orden para - incorporar los contenidos del disquete en el árbol directorio - principal, al cual se le refiere como montaje - del disquete. -Puede verlo como el equivalente software a la conexion del dispositivo -a su sistema. -Típicamente, los contenidos del CD-ROM aparecen bajo - el nombre mnt/cdrom; los del disquete bajo - /mnt/floppy (éstos son los llamados - puntos de montaje y son definidos en el - archivo especial de configuración, /etc/fstab). - El acceso a una unidad, de esta manera, no significa que el sistema - copiará todos los archivos del CD al directorio - /mnt/cdrom. En su lugar, esto significa que el - directorio /mnt/cdrom - representa al CD-ROM: Cuando un programa trata - de tener acceso, digamos a un archivo llamado - /mnt/cdrom/index.html, el sistema buscará el - archivo index.html en el CD-ROM. - - - Por tanto, en pocas palabras: antes de que usted pueda utilizar - archivos en una unidad, usted debe "montarlo". Similarmente - antes de sacar el disco del lector, usted debe - desmontarlo. - - - Cuando utilice GNOME, usualmente no tiene que preocuparse por montar - y desmontar: GNOME busca el archivo con la configuración apropiada y - localiza los iconos para todas las unidades en su escritorio. Al hacer - doble clic en cualquiera de estos iconos, automáticamente se monta la - unidad correspondiente (si no estaba montado ya) y ejecuta el - gestor de archivos en el directorio apropiado. Similarmente, si usted - hace doble clic en el icono unidad y escoge la orden Sacar - disco del menú desplegable, GNOME desmonta - automáticamente antes de sacarlo. Usted puede también montar/desmontar - una unidad presionando con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de su - escritorio y escogiendo Montar unidad o - Desmontar unidad del menú desplegable, o - utilizando el aplique de montaje de discos. - - - Note que usted no puede desmontar una unidad si está siendo utilizado - por algún programa; por ejemplo, si usted tiene abierta una ventana - terminal en el directorio de la unidad que usted está tratando de - desmontar. Entonces, recibe el mensaje de error "Controlador ocupado" - mientras intenta desmontar la unidad, asegúrese de que ninguna de sus - aplicaciones abiertas esté teniendo acceso a un archivo o directorio - en esta unidad. - - - No obstante GNOME no puede impedir que usted saque el disco manualmente - de la unidad &mdash, en este caso es su responsabilidad el desmontar la - unidad antes de hacerlo. Para unidades de CD o Zip, el sistema bloquea - el botón de sacado de la unidad mientras la unidad esté montado, para - los disquetes, esto es técnicamente imposible. - - - - IMPORTANTE - - Si usted saca un disquete utilizando un botón de sacado de la unidad - sin desmontarlo primero, usted puede perder sus datos! - - - - Algunos sistemas tienen programas especiales como -supermount o magicdev, - que montan automáticamente una unidad cuando - se inserta un disco y desmonta la unidad si ésta no se ha utilizado - por un período de tiempo específico. En este caso, usted nunca - deberá preocuparse de montar/desmontar unidades usted mismo; no -necesita por tanto ni leer esta sección. - - - El permitir a los usuarios el montar y desmontar unidades conlleva - algunos riesgos de seguridad, muchos sistemas multiusuarios se - configuran de modo - que sólo el usuario administrador "root" puede montar y desmontar - una unidad. Esta es la causa mas probable de los errores al intentar - montar un dispositivo. En este caso, plantee este problema al - administrador de su sistema. - - - Si la computadora es su estación de trabajo personal o el ordenador - personal de casa y no le preocupa la seguridad, usted puede - dar permiso de montar unidades a usuarios ordinarios. La manera más - fácil de permitir ello es el uso de la aplicación - linuxconf (que sólo - puede ser ejecutada por el usuario administrador "root"). Sólo - seleccione la unidad a la que quiere acceder en la sección - Unidades de acceso local de la pestaña - Opciones de la opción - Montable por usuarios. Su unidad será ahora - montable por los usuarios. - - - Si linuxconf no está - disponible, usted debe editar el archivo - /etc/fstab para incluir acceso a usuarios. Esto - se hace añadiendo el atributo del "usuario" a la unidad. Por ejemplo: - - - Si su archivo fstab contiene una línea como ésta: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - añada la palabra "usuario" a la cuarta columna: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - - Controladores y dispositivos - -En Unix, la palabra dispositivo se usa para todos los dispositivos -periféricos conectados al ordenador; esto incluye los discos duros, disqueteras -y CDROM, tarjetas de vídeo y audio, puertos serie y paralelo, y demás cosas. -Cada dispositivo tiene un nombre, como /dev/hda. Los nombres -mas comunes se listan a continuación (para Linux; otras variedades de Unix pueden -usar nombres de dispositivos ligeramente diferentes). - - - /dev/hd* (donde *=a,b,c, - …): son los dispositivos IDE, como discos duros, -lectores CDROM y dispositivos ZIP. /dev/hda representa -el dispositivo maestro del primer controlador IDE (usualmente el primer disco -duro, C: en windows), /dev/hdb -es el dispositivo esclavo del primer controlador (puede ser un segundo disco -duro o un CDROM), y así sucesivamente. -Véase también la nota mas abajo acerca -de los dispositivos ZIP. - - - - /dev/sd* (donde *=a,b,c, …): -son los dispositivos SCSI, normalmente discos duros. - - - - - NOTA - -Si los acrónimos IDE y SCSI son nuevos para usted, he aquí una breve -explicación: hay dos tipos de interfaces para discos duros y otros -dispositivos similares: IDE ( y sus parientes como EIDE, ATAPI, etc.) -y SCSI. SCSI proporciona mejores prestaciones, pero es mas caro, así que -se usa solo en los servidores. Si no esta seguro del tipo de dispositivos -que tiene, lo mas probable es que sean IDE. - - - - - /dev/fd* (donde *=0,1, etc) -son las disqueteras; /dev/fd0 es la primera -disquetera (se corresponde con A: en windows), -/dev/fd1 es la segunda - (B:), etc. - - - - /dev/lp* (donde *=0,1, etc) -son los puertos paralelos; generalmente, estos puertos se usan -para conectar impresoras a su ordenador. -/dev/lp0 se corresponde con - LPT1 en Windows, - /dev/lp1 con LPT2, - etc. - - - /dev/ttyS* (donde *=0,1, - etc) son los puertos serie; estos puertos se usan generalmente -un ratón o un módem. /dev/ttyS0 se corresponde con - COM1 en Windows, - /dev/ttyS1 con COM2, - etc. - - - - /dev/audio y - /dev/dsp — -estos dos dispositivos se usan para la tarjeta de audio (no hay equivalentes, -ya que se usan para diferentes tipos de ficheros de audio). - - - - -Además, es una practica común disponer de enlaces simbólicos, -/dev/floppy, /dev/modem y /dev/cdrom, -apuntando a los nombres reales de los dispositivos que correspondan -a la disquetera, módem, y CDROM, respectivamente. - - -En raras ocasiones necesitara usar los nombres de los dispositivos. -En particular, si necesita acceder a un fichero en dispositivo, no -usara el nombre del dispositivo (como /dev/fd0); -en su lugar, primero montara el dispositivo de forma vera que su contenido -como un subdirectorio (por ejemplo, /mnt/floppy) -en el árbol de directorios principal, y usara entonces ese directorio -para acceder a los ficheros; -Véase para mas información. Prácticamente el -único momento en que necesitara usar los nombres de los dispositivos -sera cuando este configurando algún nuevo programa. -Por ejemplo, un programa de fax puede pedirle el nombre del dispositivo -que representa su módem ( en cuyo caso puede o bien darle el nombre real -del dispositivo, como /dev/ttyS1, o bien usar -simplemente un enlace simbólico /dev/modem). - - -Y solo para satisfacer su curiosidad: también hay un dispositivo -llamado /dev/null que actúa como un -agujero negro: puede enviar allí cualquier información, -y jamas volverá. Así que si no quiere que le molesten los mensajes de -error, redirijalos a /dev/null -:). - - - - Particiones - -Observe que se puede subdividir un disco duro (o un dispositivo similar) -en partes que se comportan a todos los efectos como discos independientes, -aunque residan físicamente en el mismo disco. -Estas partes se llaman particiones (en Windows, se conocen -como discos lógicos). -Por ejemplo, puede dividir el disco duro en varias particiones, e instalar -diferentes sistemas operativos en diferentes particiones; puede formatear -de nuevo cada partición independientemente del resto. -La división del disco duro se realiza normalmente durante la instalación -del sistema operativo; para mas información remitase a su guia de instalación. - - -Si ha dividido su disco duro, entonces cada partición se considera como -un dispositivo separado. Por ejemplo, si su disco duro es -/dev/hda, entonces nos referiremos a la primera partición de este -dispositivo como /dev/hda1, la segunda como -/dev/hda2, y así sucesivamente. - - - Particionar discos ZIP - - -Por razones que desconocemos, los disco ZIP preformateados a la venta -en las tiendas o formateados usando las herramientas ZIP de Iomega en Windows -están particionados de una forma curiosa: -tienen solo una partición (de tipo windows, por supuesto). De este modo, si -su dispositivo ZIP es /dev/hdc, el nombre correcto del -dispositivo que debería usar para estos discos es /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - Interfaz gráfica de usuario: el sistema de ventanas X, el gestor de ventanas, y los entornos de escritorios. - -Unix es un sistema modular: se compone de muchos componentes de forma que el -usuario (o el administrador de sistemas) pueda escoger aquellos componentes -que necesite. En particular, hay varias capas de software responsables de la -interfaz gráfica de usuario. Estas capas son: el sistema de ventanas X, el gestor -de ventanas, y el entorno de escritorio. - - El -sistema de ventanas X (También conocido como X, o X11) es -el componente de los sistemas Unix responsable de virtualmente todas las operaciones -gráficas básicas — en particular, de dibujar los iconos, los fondos, y -las ventanas en las que se ejecutan las aplicaciones. -Sin las X, solo tendríamos la linea de comandos. X11 determina la resolución de -la pantalla y la profundidad de color, mueve el cursor del ratón alrededor de -la pantalla, etc. Sirve de base para otros componentes de la interfaz gráfica -de usuario como los gestores de ventanas y los entornos de escritorio. - - Los -gestores de ventanas amplian las capacidades del sistema -de ventanas X poniendo bordes y botones alrededor de la ventanas, lo que permite -al usuario moverlas, cerrarlas, ocultarlas o cambiar su tamaño. -X11 se usa casi siempre en combinación con un gestor de ventanas, ya que seria -prácticamente inutilizable sin el. -Hay muchos gestores de ventanas disponibles para X11; los mas populares -son -fvwm, - mwm, kwm - (usado por KDE), Enlightenment, y - Sawfish. - - -Finalmente, un entorno de escritorio va un paso mas -allá del gestor de ventanas, añadiendo un gestor gráfico de ficheros desde -el cual podrá arrastrar y soltar elementos sobre su escritorio, un panel -que puede usarse para lanzar las aplicaciones usadas frecuentemente, y -un conjunto de aplicaciones y utilidades. -Hay varios entornos de escritorio disponibles para todas las versiones -de Unix; Los mas populares son -GNOME, -KDE y -CDE -(pronto sustituido por GNOME). - - -casi todos los entornos de escritorio contienen un gestor de ventanas -como parte integral; por ejemplo, KDE contiene su propio gestor de -ficheros, kwm (es posible usar KDE con otro -gestor de ventanas, pero poca gente lo hace). Gnome no dispone de su -propio gestor de ventanas; le permite escoger cualquier gestor de ventanas -que tenga ya en su sistema. Para hacer la vida mas fácil a los nuevos -usuarios, se distribuye generalmente el gestor de ventanas -Sawfish con Gnome y se usa por defecto; -puede cambiar a otro gestor de ventanas usando el -Centro de control de GNOME. -Observe en cualquier caso que necesita un gestor de ventanas compatible con -Gnome para usar algunas de las funcionalidades de Gnome, como el gestor de -sesiones, el aplique barra de tareas, etc. - - - - - -
- diff --git a/unix-primer/it/Makefile.am b/unix-primer/it/Makefile.am deleted file mode 100644 index 910ada5..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/it/Makefile.am +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -figs = -docname = unix-primer -lang = it -omffile = unix-primer-it.omf -sgml_ents = -include $(top_srcdir)/sgmldocs.make -dist-hook: app-dist-hook - diff --git a/unix-primer/it/unix-primer-it.omf b/unix-primer/it/unix-primer-it.omf deleted file mode 100644 index acc91b0..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/it/unix-primer-it.omf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - - - - - Se siete alle prime armi con UNIX/Linux - - - General|Linux - - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/unix-primer/it/unix-primer.sgml b/unix-primer/it/unix-primer.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 2edd846..0000000 --- a/unix-primer/it/unix-primer.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,833 +0,0 @@ - -
- - - Se sei agli inizi con Linux/UNIX - - 2000 - Alexander Kirillov - - - - - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this - document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation - License, Version 1.1 or any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant - Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You - may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation - License from the Free Software Foundation by - visiting their Web - site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. - - - - Molti dei nomi usati dalle compagnie per distinguere i propri prodotti - sono registrati come marchi. Quando questi appaiono nella documentazione - di GNOME e non appartengono a membri del GNOME Documentation Project - vengono scritti in maiuscolo oppure con la prima lettera maiuscola. - - - - - Introduzione - - - Uno degli obbiettivi di GNOME è quello di rendere il vostro computer - facile da usare, senza richiedere la conoscenza di dettagli tecnici del - vostro sistema operativo. Nonostante tutto rimangono alcune nozioni - relative a UNIX che dovrebbero diventarvi familiari anche se usate la - semplice interfaccia grafica di GNOME. Per venire incontro ai nuovi utenti - questo documento raccoglie queste nozioni di base. Se avete necessità di - ulteriori informazioni su UNIX dovreste leggere la documentazione - provvista insieme al vostro sistema, oppure uno dei tanti libri e di guide - che si trovano on-line disponibili per tutte le versioni di UNIX. - - - - La seguente guida è valida per tutte le versioni di UNIX e tutti i sistemi - operativi a questo assimilabili, compresi sia gli UNIX commerciali come - Solaris e sistemi open-source come - FreeBSD e Linux. Alcune - parti di questo testo sono tratte dalla guida Linux - Installation and Getting Started di Matt Welsh, Phil Hughes, - David Bandel, Boris Beletsky, Sean Dreilinger, Robert Kiesling, Evan - Leibovitch, e Henry Pierce. Questa guida è disponibile sia per essere - scaricata che consultata in linea al link Linux Documentation - Project o Open Source Writers - Group. - - - - - Utenti - - UNIX è un sistema operativo multi-utente, cioè è stato progettato per - permettere a più utenti di operare sullo stesso computer, sia - contemporaneamente (mediante diversi terminali o connessioni di rete), sia - alternativamente. Usando UNIX per identificarsi nel sistema dovete - effettuare il log-in, che significa immettere il vostro nome di - login (cioè il nome usato dal sistema per identificarvi) e - successivamente la vostra password, cioè la vostra - chiave personale per entrare nel sistema. Poiché solo voi conoscete la - vostra password nessun altro la potrà usare per entrare a vostro nome nel - sistema. Normalmente si usa scegliere il proprio nome o il proprio cognome - o variazioni di questi come nome di login: così se ad esempio il vostro - nome reale è Sasha Beilinson il vostro nome potrebbe essere - sasha. - - - Ogni utente ha uno spazio separato per tenere i propri file personali - (detta la sua home directory). UNIX possiede un - sistema di permessi (vedi ), in modo che, se - il sistema non è mal configurato, un utente non ha la possibilità di - cambiare i file del sistema o di altri utenti. Questo permette inoltre ad - ogni utente di personalizzare molti aspetti del sistema — in - particolare il comportamento di GNOME — senza influire sugli altri - utenti. - - - Su molti sistemi UNIX esiste anche un utente speciale, detto - amministratore del sistema che usa il login - root. Questi ha il controllo - completo del sistema — compreso il completo - accesso a tutti i file di sistema e quelli di tutti gli utenti; ha la - possibilità di cambiare la password degli utenti esistenti, di aggiungere - nuovi utenti, installare e disinstallare il software e molto - altro. Normalmente l'amministratore è il responsabile del corretto - funzionamento del sistema, così se avete problemi dovete chiedere a lui. - - - IMPORTANTE - - Anche se siete l'unico utente del vostro computer (ad esempio se questo - è la vostra workstation personale), cioè siete anche l'amministratore, è - importante che creiate un account normale e che lo usiate per il lavoro - quotidiano, usando l'accesso come root solo quando realmente necessario - per la manutenzione del sistema; visto che root può fare tutto è facile - combinare pasticci che possono avere conseguenze - disastrose. Immaginatevi l'accesso di root come una sorta di incantesimo - che vi dona un potere immenso con il quale, solo muovendo le mani, - potete creare o distruggere intere città, e visto che è molto semplice - muovere le mani, anche in maniera pericolosa, non è una buona idea di - invocare questa magia quando non necessario anche se la sensazione di - potere può apparire meravigliosa. - - - - - File e nomi dei file - - Come in molti altri sistemi operativi anche in UNIX esiste il concetto di - file, che è un insieme di informazioni a cui viene - dato un nome (il nome file). Esempi di file possono - essere la vostra ricerca di storia, un messaggio di posta elettronica o un - programma che può essere eseguito, ma essenzialmente tutto ciò che si - trova sul disco è salvato su un file individuale. - - - Nomi dei file - - I file vengono identificati dal loro nome; ad esempio il file che - contiene il testo del vostro intervento alla conferenza potrebbe essere - salvato con il nome talk.txt. Non esiste un formato - standard per i nomi dei file come nell'MS-DOS e in altri sistemi - operativi; in generale un nome di file può contenere qualsiasi carattere - (eccetto il carattere / — vedi la discussione sui nomi dei path - più avanti) ed è limitato a 256 carattere. - - - IMPORTANTE - - A differenza dell'MS-DOS, i nome dei file in UNIX sono sensibili alle - maiuscole (in gergo si dice case-sensitive): - miofile.txt e MioFile.txt - vengono considerati come due file differenti. - - - - Dovreste anche conoscere alcune convenzioni tipiche di UNIX, per le quali, - pur non essendo obbligatorie, è buona norma seguirle. - - - - la prima è quella di usare il formato - nome.estensione, dove l'estensione indica il - tipo di file; ad esempio l'estensione txt è - normalmente usata per i file contenenti testo semplice, mentre - l'estensione jpeg è usata per le immagini nel - formato JPEG e via così. In particolare il File - Manager di GNOME - Nautilus) usa le estensioni per - determinare il tipo del file. Potete vedere o modificare le - estensioni riconosciute da GNOME - selezionando la sezione Document - HandlersTipi - MIME - nell'Pannello di controllo di - GNOME. Notate che la convenzione standard in UNIX è - di non usare alcuna estensione per i programmi - eseguibili (cioè i file dei programmi). - - - - - - I file e le directory il cui nome comincia con un punto (.) sono - normalmente file di configurazione; ad - esempio GNOME tiene tutte le sue impostazioni in molti file - contenuti nella directory .gnome e - .gnome-desktop nella home directory - dell'utente. Poiché normalmente non c'è necessità di modificare - questi file direttamente e neanche di conoscere i loro nomi e - posizioni precisamente Nautilus non - li mostra sempre (così come tutti gli altri file manager, NDT); è - possibile modificare questo comportamento come descritto nel - Manuale di - Nautilus. - - - - - - i file il cui nome termina con una tilde (~) sono normalmente file - di backup creati dalle applicazioni; ad esempio quando modificate - un file miofile.txt con - emacs, questo salva la versione - precedente nel file miofile.txt~. - - - - - - - Metacaratteri - - - Quando date comandi dalla linea di comando potete usare i cosiddetti - metacaratteri (in inglese wildcards) invece del - nome del file esatto. Il metacarattere più comune è l'asterisco (*), il - quale comprende ogni sequenza di simboli, compresa una stringa vuota: ad - esempio il comando ls *.txt mostrerà tutti i file con - estensione txt, mentre il comando rm - chapter* cancellerà tutti i file il cui nome comincia con - chapter (ls e - rm sono i comandi di UNIX per elencare ed eliminare i - file). Un altro metacarattere molto utile è il punto interrogativo (?) - il quale comprende ogni singolo simbolo: ad esempio rm - chapter?.txt eliminerà i file - chapter1.txt e chapter2.txt ma - non chapter10.txt. - - - La maggior parte dei nuovi utenti di GNOME preferiscono usare il - File Manager di GNOME per operare con i file - invece che lavorare direttamente dalla linea di comando. I metacaratteri - possono essere usati anche da Nautilus nelle - finestre di dialogo seleziona e mostra. - - - - Usare gli spazi, le virgole e altro nei nomi dei file - - Come detto prima un nome di file può non contenere solo lettere e numeri - ma anche spazi, virgole e quant'altro — in pratica ogni carattere - tranne lo slash (/). Comunque se state lavorando con questi file usando - la riga di comando dovete porre particolare attenzione perché per - evitare problemi dovete usare le virgolette semplici (queste -> ') per - indicare i nomi che contengono caratteri che non siano semplici lettere, - numeri o punti: per cancellare il file My file - dovete digitare rm 'My file' invece che rm - My file. - - - Naturalmente se invece state usando un programma grafico come il - File Manager di GNOME per cancellare il file - basta che lo trasciniate nel cestino. - - - - - - Directory e percorsi - - Struttura delle directory - - Affrontiamo adesso il concetto di directory. Una - directory è un insieme di file. Può essere pensata - come una cartella contenente tanti fogli. A queste - directory vengono assegnati dei nomi per identificarle. Inoltre vengono - tenute in una struttura ad albero di modo che delle directory possano - contenerne altre. La directory iniziale viene chiamata directory - root e viene indicata con il simbolo / e - contiene tutti i file del vostro sistema. - - - Persorsi - - Un percorsi è il nome completo di - un file, contenente cioè non solo il nome ma anche la sua posizione; è - costituito dal nome del file, preceduto dalla directory che lo - contiene preceduta a sua volta dalla directory che contiene - questa e via così. Un percorso tipico è - /home/sasha/talk.txt che indica il file - talk.txt nella directory - sasha la quale a sua volta è una sotto-directory - di /home. - - - Come potete vedere, la directory e il nome del file vengono separate - da una slash singola (/); per questa ragione i nomi dei file non - possono contenere il carattere slash (/). Gli utenti che provengono - dal sistema operativo MS-DOS troveranno familiare questa convenzione, - anche se in quel sistema operativo veniva invece usata la back-slash - (\). La directory che contiene quella attuale viene chiamata la - directory superiore. Ad esempio in questo caso la - directory home è la directory superiore di - sasha. - - - Ogni utente ha una propria home directory che normalmente è la - directory che contiene tutti i file personali dell'utente; normalmente - queste directory si trovano dentro di /home e - prendono il nome dall'utente proprietario così che la home directory - dell'utente sasha sarà - /home/sasha. - - - - - Nomi relativi delle directory - - In ogni momento i comandi inseriti vengono considerati - relativi alla vostra directory corrente, la quale - la potete pensare come la directory in cui trovate in quel - momento. Quando entrate nel sistema all'inizio la directory - corrente è la vostra home directory — per il solito utente sasha - sarà /home/sasha. Ogni volta che dovete riferirvi - ad un file potete farlo riferendovi alla vostra directory corrente - invece che specificarne il percorso completo. - - - Ad esempio se la vostra directory corrente è - /home/sasha, e qui avete un file chiamato - talk.txt potete farci riferimento solo con il suo - nome: il comando emacs talk.txt dato dalla directory - /home>sasha è equivalente a emacs - /home/sasha/talk.txt (emacs è un - potente editor per file di testo, forse poco indicato per nuovi utenti - che possono preferire cose più semplici come - gnotepad, ma per gli utenti avanzati - emacs risulta indispensabile). - - - Allo stesso modo, se in /home/sasha avete una - sotto-directory chiamata papers nella quale si - trova il file chiamato fieldtheory.txt, potete - riferirvi a questo come papers/fieldtheory.txt. - - - Se il primo carattere che usate quando vi riferite ad un file non è lo - slash (/) (come papers/fieldtheory.txt) allora - state usando un percorso relativo, cioè il nome è relativo alla - directory corrente. In altre parole se iniziate il nome del vostro file - con il carattere slash (/) il sistema lo interpreta come un percorso - completo — cioè un percorso che comprende l'indirizzo completo - fino al file partendo dalla directory root /. Questo modo di indicare i - file si dice percorso assoluto. - - - - Convenzioni sui percorsi - - Di seguito alcune convenzioni standard usate negli indirizzi: - - - ~/ — la directory home dell'utente - - - ./ — la directory corrente - - - ../ — parent of the current directory - - - Ad esempio se la directory corrente di sasha è - /home/sasha/papers, si può riferire al file - /home/sasha/talk.txt come - ~/talk.txt oppure come - ../talk.txt. - - - - - Permessi - - Ogni file sul vostro sistema ha un proprietario (NDT: - owner in inglese) — uno degli utenti (normalmente quello che ha - creato effettivamente il file stesso) e un sistema di - permessi che regolano l'accesso al file. - - - Per il file normali esistono tre tipi di permessi di accesso: lettura - (read), scrittura (write) ed esecuzione (execute), il quale ha senso solo - per i file eseguibili). Questi permessi possono essere impostati - separatamente per tre categorie di utenti: il proprietario del file, gli - utenti del gruppo che possiede il file e tutti gli altri. L'argomento dei - gruppi di utenti va al di là degli scopi di questo scritto e gli altri due - si spiegano da soli.. - In questo modo, se i permessi sul file - /home/sasha/talk.txt sono impostati per leggere e - scrivere per l'utente sasha, che ne è anche il proprietario, e di sola - lettura per tutti gli altri solo sasha potrà modificarlo. - - - - Ogni file appena creato "eredita" i permessi standard, normalmente lettura - e scrittura per l'utente e sola lettura per tutti gli altri. Potete - visualizzare questi permessi usando il File Manager di - GNOME cliccando sopra al file con il tasto destro e - scegliendo Proprietà nel menù a comparsa e poi - la voce Permessi. Usando questa finestra di dialogo - potete anche cambiare i permessi — basta cliccare su un quadratino - che rappresenta un permesso per modificarlo. Naturalmente solo il - proprietario del file o l'amministratore possono cambiare i permessi di un - file. Gli utenti avanzati possono anche cambiare i permessi standard che - vengono assegnati a tutti i nuovi file — leggete la pagina del - manuale della vostra shell predefinita (normalmente - bash, csh o tcsh) - e cercate il comando umask. - - - - Un file può anche avere permessi con speciali proprietà come UID, GID e il - bit sticky che servono solo per gli utenti avanzati — - non li cambiate a meno che non sappiate esattamente quello che fate. (Se - siete curiosi: questi permessi sono usati normalmente sui file eseguibili - per permettere ad utenti normali di eseguire alcuni - comandi che devono leggere o modificare file a cui l'utente stesso - normalmente non potrebbe accedere). - - - - Così come i file anche le directory hanno i permessi con le stesse tre - possibilità: lettura, scrittura ed esecuzione. Nel caso delle directory - però questi tre permessi hanno significati diversi: il permesso di - scrittura per una directory significa la possibilità di - elencare i file presenti nella directory oppure di effettuarvi ricerche; - il permesso di scrittura significa la possibilità di creare - ed eliminare file all'interno della directory e il permesso di - esecuzione dà la possibilità di accedere ai file della - directory. - - - Notate che i permessi dati ad un file dipendono dai permessi associati - alla directory nella quale si trova il file: per poter leggere un file - l'utente deve avere il permesso di scrittura sul file stesso e il permesso - di esecuzione per la directory. In questo modo, nel caso in - cui l'utente sasha non vuole che nessun altro possa vedere i suoi file può - semplicemente eliminare il permesso di esecuzione per la sua directory - home per tutti gli altri utenti; nessun altro (escluso chiaramente - l'amministratore) potrà così leggere i suoi file, indipendentemente dai - permessi di questi. - - - Una spiegazione dettagliata del sistema di permessi può essere letta, ad - esempio nella pagina info - del pacchetto GNU File Utilities. - - - - - Link simbolici - - Oltre ai file regolari, Unix possiede anche dei file speciali chiamati - link simbolici (in inglese/gergo - symlinks), file che non contengono dati ma che sono - soltanto puntatori o scorciatoie - ad altri file. Ad esempio sasha può avere un symlink chiamato - ft.txt che punta al file - papers/fieldtheory.txt in modo che, quando un - programma accede al file ft.txt verrà aperto invece - l'altro file papers/fieldtheory.txt. Come potete - capire dall'esempio, i link simbolici e i file reali - possono avere nomi differenti e possono trovarsi in directory diverse. - - - Notate che cancellare, muovere o cambiare nome ai link simbolici non ha - alcun effetto sui file reali: se sasha prova a cancellare il file - ft.txt verrà cancellato il link simbolico ma il file - papers/fieldtheory.txt rimarrà invece invariato. Allo - stesso modo i permessi sui link simbolici non hanno significato per gli - altri perché sono i permessi su quest'ultimi a determinare se un utente - può o meno accedervi. - - - - I link simbolici possono puntare anche alle directory; ad esempio nel - server FTP di GNOME(ftp.gnome.org) c'è un file - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/october-gnome, che è - semplicemente un link simbolico alla directory - /pub/GNOME/stable/releases/gnome-1.0.53 — come - avrete capito October GNOME è solo un altro nome per la - versione 1.0.53 di GNOME. - - - - Montare e smontare i dischi - - Come abbiamo accennato prima, le directory di un sistema Unix vengono - organizzate secondo una struttura ad albero, struttura nella quale il - livello più basso è rappresentato dalla directory - /. A differenza di altri sistemi operativi, come ad - esempio l'MS-DOS, non esistono dei nomi speciali per i file presenti sul - vostro disco floppy o sul vostro CD-ROM: tutti i - file accessibili dal vostro sistema devono apparire nella struttura delle - directory che parte dalla root /. - - - Per questa ragione, prima di poter accedere ai file presenti su un - dischetto floppy o su un CD-ROM dovete dare al vostro sistema un comando - per incorporare il contenuto di questi dischi nella - directory principale, comando che viene detto montare - il dischetto (o il CD-ROM). Potete pensare questo comando come ad - un'analogia con il collegamento hardware del lettore al vostro - computer. Normalmente il contenuto del CD-ROM apparirà sotto il nome - /mnt/cdrom, il floppy sotto - /mnt/floppy, directory che vengono chiamate - mount point e che vengono definite in un file di - configurazione speciale, /etc/fstab. Questo non - significa però che il sistema copi il contenuto del CD-ROM o del floppy - nelle directory suddette, ma che rappresenta il - contenuto di questi dentro quella directory: ad esempio, se un programma - prova a leggere il file /mnt/cdrom/index.html il - sistema cercherà il file index.html presente nel CD-ROM. - - - In breve, prima che possiate accedere ai file presenti su un lettore - removibile come un CD-ROM o un floppy, dovete montare - questi dispositivi. E di conseguenza prima di poter togliere i - dischi da questi lettori dovete smontarli. - - - Quando usate GNOME normalmente non dovete preoccuparvi di montare e - smontare i dischi perché GNOME legge i file di configurazione e mette le - icone di tutti i dischi sulla scrivania. In questo modo cliccando sopra - l'icona verranno automaticamente montati i dischi corrispondenti, sempre - che non siano già stati montati e avvia il file manager nella giusta - directory; cliccando invece con il tasto destro del mouse e scegliendo il - comando Espelli il disco dal menù a comparsa - GNOME smonterà il disco e poi lo espellerà. È possibile anche montare o - smontare un disco sempre cliccando sopra l'icona corrispondente e - scegliendo Monta il disco o Smonta - il disco dal menù a comparsa oppure usando l'applet - MontaDischi. - - - Notate che non potete smontare un disco se questo è in uso da parte di - qualche programma; ad esempio se avete una finestra terminale aperta su - una directory del disco che volete smontare otterrete il messaggio - d'errore device occupato se provate a smontarlo. - - - In ogni caso GNOME non può impedirvi di espellere un disco usando il - bottone fisico d'espulsione — in questo caso è vostra - responsabilità smontare il disco prima di espellerlo. Per - alcuni CD e per i dischi ZIP il sistema blocca il bottone d'espulsione se - il disco è montato ma per i floppy questo è tecnicamente impossibile. - - NDT: - - almeno nei computer del tipo PC-Compatibile - - - - - - IMPORTANTE - - Se espellete un floppy usando il bottone del lettore senza smontarlo - prima potreste perdere i vostri dati. - - - - - Alcuni sistemi possono avere in esecuzione programmi come - supermount o - magicdev con i quali i dischi vengono montati - automaticamente quando viene inserito un disco e smontati quando non - vengono più usati per un certo periodo; in questo caso non dovrete - preoccuparvi di montare o smontare i dischi e neanche di leggere questa - sezione di questo manuale. - - - Permettere agli utenti di montare e smontare i dischi può portare alcuni - problemi di sicurezza; per questa ragione molti sistemi sono configurati - in modo che solo l'utente root possa compiere queste azioni. Questa è la - ragione più probabile dei messaggi di errore che ottenete quando provate a - montare un disco, della qual cosa dovete informare il vostro - amministratore di sistema. - - - Se il computer in questione è la vostra workstation personale o il vostro - computer casalingo e non siete particolarmente preoccupati dei problemi - legati alla sicurezza potete dare il permesso di montare e smontare i - dischi agli utenti ordinari. Il modo più semplice è quello di usare il - programma linuxconf (che - però può essere usato solo da root). Selezionate il disco che volete far - montare e smontare ai vostri utenti nella sezione Access local - drive; nella sotto-sezione Opzioni - selezionate l'opzione User Mountable. A questo punto - il disco potrà essere montato dagli utenti. - - - Se non avete a disposizione - linuxconf dovete - modificare da soli il file /etc/fstab per permettere - l'uso da parte degli utenti; aggiungete l'attributo user al - disco. Ad esempio: - - - se il vostro file fstab contiene una linea simile a: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - aggiungete la parola user nella quarta colonna: - - -/dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom iso9660 user,exec,dev,ro,noauto 0 0 - - - - - Dischi e dispositivi (device) - - Nei Sistemi Operativi della famiglia Unix la parola - dispositivo (ma è molto più diffusa, conosciuta ed usata la - corrispondente parola inglese device) viene usata per - indicare tutte le periferiche connesse al vostro computer, comprendendo - perciò hard-disk, lettori CD-Rom, schede video e audio, porte seriali e - parallele e molto altro. Ogni dispositivo ha un nome proprio come ad - esempio /dev/hda. Elenchiamo i nomi dei dispositivi - più comuni (usati per Linux perché altri Unix usano nomi differenti): - - - - - /dev/hd* (dove *=a,b,c, …): sono i - dispositivi connessi al bus IDE, come ad esempio gli hard-disk, i - lettori di CD-Rom e ZIP che usano questo tipo di bus. Il nome - /dev/hda indica il primo disco del controller IDE - (normalmente il disco denominato master o anche disco - C: sotto Windows), /dev/hdb è - il disco slave, cioè il secondo disco del primo canale - del controller, disco che può anche essere un lettore CD-Rom e via - così. Vedi anche la nota più - avanti a proposito dei dischi ZIP. - - - - - - /dev/sd* (dove *=a,b,c, …): sono i - dispositivi connessi al bus SCSI, normalmente hard-disk. - - - - - - NOTA - - Se le sigle IDE e SCSI sono per voi sconosciute questa è una breve - spiegazione. Esistono due tipi di interfacce per gli hard-disk e altri - dispositivi simili: IDE (e i suoi cuginetti come EIDE, ATAPI ed altri) - e SCSI. La seconda offre maggiori prestazioni ma è più costosa e viene - usata principalmente sui server, per cui se non sapete quale tipo - abbiate voi a disposizione molto probabilmente state usando IDE. - - - - - - /dev/fd* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono i lettori dei - floppy: /dev/fd0 è il primo lettore (che - corrisponde al disco A: di Windows), - /dev/fd1 è il secondo (B: di - Windows), e via così. - - - - - /dev/lp* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono le porte - parallele. Comunemente queste porte vengono usate per connettere le - stampanti al computer. /dev/lp0 corrisponde a - LPT1 di Windows, /dev/lp1 a - LPT2, e via così. - - - - - /dev/ttyS* (dove *=0,1, etc) sono le porte - seriali, usate comunemente per connettere mouse oppure - modem. /dev/ttyS0 corrisponde a - COM1 di Windows, /dev/ttyS1 - a COM2, e via così. - - - - - /dev/audio and /dev/dsp - — questi due nomi di dispositivi vengono usati tutti e due per - la scheda audio, ma senza equivalenza perché vengono usati per due - differenti tipi di file sonori. - - - - - È uso comune avere dei link simbolici come - /dev/floppy, /dev/modem e - /dev/cdrom che puntano al dispositivo reale - corrispondente al vostro lettore floppy, al modem e al lettore di CD-Rom - rispettivamente. - - - Dovrete usare questi nomi raramente poiché se volete accedere ad un file - che si trova su un floppy non dovrete usare il dispositivo (come, nel - nostro esempio, /dev/fd0 oppure - /dev/floppy quale che sia) ma dovrete prima montare - il dispositivo così da poter vedere il suo contenuto dentro ad una - sotto-directory (che potrà essere ad esempio - /mnt/floppy oppure /floppy) - nella directory principale; vedi anche per - maggiori informazioni. Molto probabilmente dovrete usare questi nomi solo - quando dovrete configurare un nuovo programma; ad esempio un programma per - spedire fax potrebbe chiedervi il nome del dispositivo del vostro modem, - che potrebbe essere /dev/ttyS1 oppure il link - simbolico /dev/modem. - - - In puro spirito Unix esiste anche un dispositivo - /dev/null che funziona esattamente come un - buco nero poiché tutto ciò che viene inviato a questo viene - completamente cancellato. Ad esempio, se non volete essere disturbati dai - messaggi di errore potete inviarli a /dev/null e non - li vedrete più -:). - - - - Partizioni - - È possibile suddividere un hard-disk (o altri dispositivi simili) in - parti che si comportano in tutti gli usi come dischi differenti anche se - fisicamente stanno si tratta dello stesso disco. Queste parti vengono - chiamate partizioni (Windows usa il nome dischi - logici). Ad esempio è possibile suddividere un solo disco in - diverse partizioni ed installare in ognuna diversi sistemi operativi - poiché è possibile formattare ogni partizione in modo indipendente l'una - dalle altre. Questo partizionamento viene normalmente - fatto all'atto dell'installazione dei sistemi operativi; seguite le - istruzioni di installazioni per maggiori informazioni. - - - Se il vostro hard-disk è stato partizionato ogni partizione viene - considerata come un disco diverso: ad esempio se - /dev/hda è il vostro disco principale allora la - prima partizione è /dev/hda1, la seconda - /dev/hda2 e via così. - - - Partizionamento dei dischi ZIP - - - Per ragioni a noi sconosciute i dischi ZIP pre-formattati usando i - programmi per Windows della ditta IOMEGA produttrice di questi dischi, - sono partizionati in modo al quanto strano: hanno al loro interno una - sola partizione (di tipo Windows, chiaramente) che però ha il numero - 4. Così se il vostro lettore di dischi ZIP è - /dev/hdc, il dispositivo corretto che dovrete - usare è /dev/hdc4. - - - - - - - Interfacce utente grafiche: X Window System, gestori di finestre e - ambienti di desktop - - - Unix è un sistema modulare, che consiste cioè di molti componenti che - possono essere scelti dall'utente (o dall'amministratore del sistema) a - seconda dei gusti e delle necessità. In particolare ci sono molti livelli - di software responsabili dell'interfaccia grafica, livelli che sono - l'X Window System, i gestori di finestre e gli ambienti di - desktop. - - L'X Window System (conosciuto anche - semplicemente come X o X11) è il componente di Unix che gestisce tutti i - livelli grafici di base — in particolare disegna le icone, gli - sfondi e le finestre dove girano i programmi. Senza X potete usare solo - l'interfaccia grafica. X11 imposta la risoluzione dello schermo, la - quantità di colori disponibili, muove il cursore del mouse nello schermo e - altro; serve cioè come base per tutti gli altri componenti - dell'interfaccia utente grafica come i gestori di finestre e gli ambienti - di desktop. - - - I gestori di finestre estendono la possibilità dell'X - Window System disegnando bordi e bottoni intorno alle finestre, - permettendo così all'utente di muovere, chiudere, nascondere e - ridimensionare le finestre. Normalmente X11 deve essere usato sempre - insieme ad un gestore di finestre perché senza uno di questi rimane quasi - inutilizzabile. Esistono molti gestori di finestre per X11, dei quali i - più conosciuti sono fvwm, - mwm, kwm (usato da - KDE), Enlightenment, e - Sawfish. - - - Infine ci sono gli ambienti di desktop che vanno un - passo avanti dei gestori di finestre in quanto aggiungono un file manager - grafico dal quale potete usare il metodo drag-n-drop sui - vari elementi, un pannello contenente i programmi maggiormente usati e un - insieme di programmi e di utilità. Esistono alcuni ambienti di desktop - disponibili per tutte le versioni di Unix, delle quali le più conosciute - sono GNOME, KDE e CDE (che però verrà presto - rimpiazzato da GNOME). - - - Molti ambienti di desktop usano un gestore di finestre loro proprio: ad - esempio KDE contiene il suo gestore di finestre - kwm (anche se è possibile usare KDE con un - altro gestore di finestre nella pratica ben pochi utenti lo fanno). GNOME - non ha invece un proprio gestore di finestre, il che permette ad ogni - utente di usare quello già installato nel sistema. Per rendere le cose più - semplici possibili normalmente il gestore di finestre - Sawfish viene distribuito insieme a GNOME come - predefinito ma potete cambiarlo usando il Pannello di - Controllo, anche se dovete usare un gestore che sia - compatibile con GNOME per poter usare alcune caratteristiche come la - gestione delle sessioni, l'applet taskbar e altro. - - - - - -
- - - diff --git a/xmldocs.make b/xmldocs.make deleted file mode 100644 index 9f78af7..0000000 --- a/xmldocs.make +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -# -# No modifications of this Makefile should be necessary. -# -# To use this template: -# 1) Define: figdir, docname, lang, omffile, and entities in -# your Makefile.am file for each document directory, -# although figdir, omffile, and entities may be empty -# 2) Make sure the Makefile in (1) also includes -# "include $(top_srcdir)/xmldocs.make" and -# "dist-hook: app-dist-hook". -# 3) Optionally define 'entities' to hold xml entities which -# you would also like installed -# 4) Figures must go under $(figdir)/ and be in PNG format -# 5) You should only have one document per directory -# 6) Note that the figure directory, $(figdir)/, should not have its -# own Makefile since this Makefile installs those figures. -# -# example Makefile.am: -# figdir = figures -# docname = scrollkeeper-manual -# lang = C -# omffile=scrollkeeper-manual-C.omf -# entities = fdl.xml -# include $(top_srcdir)/xmldocs.make -# dist-hook: app-dist-hook -# -# About this file: -# This file was taken from scrollkeeper_example2, a package illustrating -# how to install documentation and OMF files for use with ScrollKeeper -# 0.3.x and 0.4.x. For more information, see: -# http://scrollkeeper.sourceforge.net/ -# Version: 0.1.2 (last updated: March 20, 2002) -# - - -# ************* Begin of section some packagers may need to modify ************** -# This variable (docdir) specifies where the documents should be installed. -# This default value should work for most packages. -# docdir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@/doc/$(docname)/$(lang) -docdir = $(datadir)/gnome/help/$(docname)/$(lang) - -# ************** You should not have to edit below this line ******************* -xml_files = $(entities) $(docname).xml - -EXTRA_DIST = $(xml_files) $(omffile) -CLEANFILES = omf_timestamp - -include $(top_srcdir)/omf.make - -all: omf - -$(docname).xml: $(entities) - -ourdir=`pwd`; \ - cd $(srcdir); \ - cp $(entities) $$ourdir - -app-dist-hook: - if test "$(figdir)"; then \ - $(mkinstalldirs) $(distdir)/$(figdir); \ - for file in $(srcdir)/$(figdir)/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(distdir)/$(figdir)/$$basefile; \ - done \ - fi - -install-data-local: omf - $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) - for file in $(xml_files); do \ - cp $(srcdir)/$$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir); \ - done - if test "$(figdir)"; then \ - $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$(figdir); \ - for file in $(srcdir)/$(figdir)/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$(figdir)/$$basefile; \ - done \ - fi - -install-data-hook: install-data-hook-omf - -uninstall-local: uninstall-local-doc uninstall-local-omf - -uninstall-local-doc: - -if test "$(figdir)"; then \ - for file in $(srcdir)/$(figdir)/*.png; do \ - basefile=`echo $$file | sed -e 's,^.*/,,'`; \ - rm -f $(docdir)/$(figdir)/$$basefile; \ - done; \ - rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$(figdir); \ - fi - -for file in $(xml_files); do \ - rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)/$$file; \ - done - -rmdir $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) - -- cgit